Digital PDFs

XX-23D1A-64

2000

552 pages

Original

147MB

Document:	Digital Networks and Communications Buyers Guide 198901
Order Number:	XX-23D1A-64
Revision:	0
Pages:	552
Original Filename:

OCR Text

Map to the Guide

Background
Information
Presents a general
overview of
networking and
communications
concepts and
architecture.

Product
Information
Describes product
featu res and capabilities.

Contents

Locating Products

What's new

New Products

Configuration
Information
Describes how
products can be
linked into networks.

Ordering
Information
Lis ts the codes
required to purchase specific
variations of a
products.

Order Codes

Suggestions For Using This Guide

Overview
Section 1
Introduction

Architecture
Overview

Products
Section 2
Connectivity: Local Area Networks

802.3/Ethernet
Overview

Product
Descriptions

Overview
Configurations

DECconnect
Overview

Product
Comparisons

Sample
Configurations

Standard Network
Packages Overview

Packaged Products

Pre-packaged
Ordering

Section 3
Connectivity: Communications Hardware

Product
Descriptions
Product
Comparisons

Order Code
ExplanationsHardware

Section 4
Interoperability: Communications Software

Product
Descriptions

Order Code
ExplanationsSoftware

Product
Comparisons
Section 5
Distributed Applications

Product
Descriptions
Product
Comparisons

Order Codes

Section 6
Manageability: Services and Products

Networks Services
Product
Descriptions

Order Codes

Appendices and Index
Appendix A-Network Configuration
and Performance Guidelines

Product
Performance
Information

Network
Configuration
Information

Appendix B-Environmental Specifications

SPD Titles and
Numbers

Appendix C-Software Product
Description List
Appendix D - Related Documentation
Index

Locating Products

To locate the information in this map, refer to the Contents beginning on page iii.

Networks and
Communications
Buyer's Guide

1989 January-June

Copyright © 1989, Digital Equipment Corporation. All rights reserved.
Digital believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date ; such
information is subject to change without notice. Digital is not responsible for any inadvertent
errors.
Products and product availability may differ outside the United States.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation: ALL-IN -1, DEC, DECconnect,
DECmate, DECNA, DECnet, DECnet-DOS, DECnet-UM -PLUS, DECnet-Rainbow, DECnet-RT,
DECnet-VAX , DECnet-VAXmate, DECnet/E, DECnet Router, DECnet Router/X .25 Gateway,
DECnet-ULTRIX , DECserver, DECservice, DECstart, DECsupport, DECsystem-10, DECSYSTEM-20,
DECUS, DELNI, DELUA, DEMPR, DELQA, DEREP, DESTA, Digital Network Architecture
(DNA), the Digital logo, EDE, Etherjack, ETHERnim , Internet, LAN Bridge, MAILbus ,
Message Router, MicroPDP-11 , MicroRSX, MicroVAX , Micro VMS, Packetnet, PDP , P/OS, PRO/
Communications, PRO/ DECnet, Professional, PRO/ SNA, PRO/Tool Kit , Q-bus, Rainbow, RSTS/ E,
RSX -llM, RSX -llM -PLUS, RSX-11S, RT-ll , Scholar, Standard Network Packages, Terminal
Server, ThinWire, TOPS-10, TOPS-20, ULTRIX, ULTRIX -11 , ULTRIX-32 , ULTRIX -32m , UNIBUS ,
VAX, VAXBI, VAXcluster, VAXELN, VAXmate , VAXPAC, VAXstation, VMS , VOTS, and VT .
3Com, IE2 and IE4 Etherlink are trademarks
of 3Com Corporation.

MICROCOM is a registered trademark of
Microcom , Inc.

Amphenol 960 is a trademark of Amphenol
Corporation.

MS , MS -Windows , MS-NET, and MS -DOS,
are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.

Chipcom and Ethermodem are trademarks of
Chipcom Corporation.
COMPAQ and COMPAQ DESKPRO are registered trademarks of Compaq Computer
corporation .
CP/ M, CP/ M-80 and CP/ M-86/ 80 are regis tered trademarks of Digital Research .
FUSION is a trademark of Network Research
Corporation.
Galaxy is a trademark of R.S. Means
Company.
IBM , CICS, DISOSS, TSO , PC/XT , Personal
Computer AT, Personal Services, OS/ 2, PS/ 2,
and SNADS , are trademarks of International
Business Machines Corporation.
IDMS-DC/ UCF, !CMS and IDMS/ R are trademarks of Cullinet Software, Inc.
KERMIT is copyright 1985, Trustees of
Columbia University.
Link Ware is a registered trademark of the
Linkware Corporation.

poly-BSC/ RJE, poly-XFR, poly-COM, and
poly-BSC/ 3270 are trademarks of Polygon
Associates, Inc.
PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems,
Inc_
PRISM is a trademark of Advanced Systems
Concepts, Inc.
Sytek and Loca!Net 20 are trademark s of
Sytek , Inc.
Tektronix 4010/ 4014 are trademarks of
Tektronix , Inc.
Telenet is a trademark of GTE Telenet
Communications.
Touch-Tone is a trademark of American
Telephone & Telegraph Corporation .
TransLAN is a trademark of Vitalink
Corporation.
TYMNET is a registered trademark of
TYMNET, Inc.

M/A-COM is a trademark of M/A-COM , Inc.

UNIX is a registered trademark of American
Telephone & Telegraph Corporation.

MCI Mail is a registered trademark of MCI
Communications Corporation.

Wang is a trademark of Wang Laboratories,
Inc.

MICOM , 15010-1, and NI5010-2 are
trademar'ks of MICOM System, Inc.

WIN/ TCP and WIN/TCP-DDN are trademarks
of the Wollongong Group.

Table of Contents

What's New to the Networks and Communications Buyer's Guide ....... , .. xi
Suggestions for Using This Guide ........................................... xiv
Abbreviations and Definitions ............................................... xvi
Key to Symbols Used in This Guide ........................................ xvii

Section 1

Introduction

Introduction to Digital's Networks .......................................... 1.1
Digital Network Architecture .. . .. ... .. . . . . .... ...... . .................. 1.2
The Evolution of Digital's Networks ....... . .... .. .... .. . ... . ......... . . 1.4
What People Expect from Networks Today .. . ......... . .......... . ..... 1.4
Digital's Strategic Networking Vision for the Future ... ... . . . .. . . . ... . . . 1.5
Future Directions ........ . .................................. . ... . ....... 1.7
Building the Network ........................................................ 1.8
Analyzing an Enterprise's Needs . . . ... . ...... . ...... .. ...... . . ........ . . 1.8
Digital's Networking Products ... . .. . ... . ... .. . . . .. ..... . . . ...... . . . .... 1.9
An Example of a Network Solution Using Open Systems
Interconnect. ..... . .... . . ................................. . ........ 1.10
Network Management . . .... . . . . . ... . ..... . .. ... . ... . . . . . ... .. .. . .... . . . 1.19

PRODUCTS

Section 2

Connectivity: 802.3/Ethernet Local Area Networks

802.3/Ethernet Overview ................................................... 2.1
IEEE 802 .3 Compliance . ... ........ . .... .. .... ........ .. . . .. .... .. ...... 2.1
802.3/Ethernet Channel Access ........ . . ... . .. . ..... . ... . . . ....... . ... . 2.1
Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Cabling . ......... . . .. . .... .. ... .. .... . . ...... 2.2
Broadband 802.3/Ethernet Cabling . ... . . . ....... . .. .. . . .. . .. ...... . ... 2.4
IEEE 802.3/Ethernet Communications Controllers .. . .. ..... . . . .... . .. 2.5
Servers . ... . . . .. .. . . . .......... . ... . ............. . . ..... . ... . ........ .. . . 2.5
Extended Local Area Networks . . . . . . ... . . . ... . .. ..... . ...... . .... .. . ... 2.8
802 .3/Ethernet Advantages . .. .. . . .. ... ... . . . . . ... . ......... . .... . ... . . 2 .10
DECconnect Overview ...................................................... 2.11
ThinWire 802 .3/ Ethernet Cabling ... ...... .. .... . ... ... .. . . . ..... ... .. 2.13
Unshielded Twisted -pair Cabling .. .. ..... .... .... ................ ... . . 2.13
DEC423 Signaling . . . . .... . . ... .. . .. . . . . . .. .. . .... .... ..... . ..... . . ... .. 2.13
Terminal Connections .. .. . . ................ . .... . ... . . ............. .... 2.14
DECsite Planning and Installation .... . ....... . . . ............ . ... . . ..... 2.14
Introduction to Standard Network Packages . .............................. 2.15
Typical Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Applications ............................ 2.16
Office Applications ......... ... . ......... . .. . . . ...... . ........ . ... ...... 2.16
Factory Applications .. . .... . ...... . .... . . . .. . . . ..... . . . .. . ............. . 2.17
CAD/CAM Applications .. . . . .. .... . .. . . . . . .. . .. ... .. .. ........... ..... . 2.18
Hospital Applications .. .... . ............ .. .. ....... . .............. ... .. 2.19
Laboratory Applications .... .. . . . . . .. . . . . .. . ................... . .... .. .. 2.21
University Applications ......... . ........................ . ...... .... . . . 2.22

iii

Table of Contents

Typical Broadband 802.3/Ethernet Applications .......................... 2.23
Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Products ........................................ 2.24
Standard Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Cable ............................. 2.26
Fiber Optic Cable ...................................................... 2.27
Transceiver Cable .. ... . ..... ....................................... . ... 2.27
Office Transceiver Cable ............................................... 2.28
Standard 802.3/Ethernet Cable Connectors and Terminators ......... 2.29
Etherjack (DEXJK) ..................................................... 2.30
Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Transceiver (H4005) ....................... 2.31
Local Network Interconnect (DELNI) ......................... .. ...... 2.32
Ethernet Repeaters (DEREP) ........................................... 2.36
ThinWire 802.3/Ethernet Products ........................................ 2.40
ThinWire 802.3/Ethernet Cable .. . .. ......... . . ........... . .. . ..... ... 2.40
ThinWire Ethernet Multiport Repeater (DEMPR) . .................... 2.41
ThinWire Ethernet Singleport Repeater (DESPR) ...................... 2.41
ThinWire Ethernet Station Adapter (DESTA) .......................... 2.43
DECconnect ThinWire Configurations ................. ... ... ..... ..... 2.43
Unshielded Twisted-pair 802.3/Ethernet Products ........................ 2.46
Unshielded Twisted-pair Starter Kit (H3300) .......................... 2.47
Unshielded Twisted-pair Ethernet Office Adapter (H3310) ........... 2.48
Unshielded Twisted-pair Wiring Closet/SER Adapter (H3330) ... .... 2.48
Unshielded Twisted-pair Rack Installation Kit (H3400) ............... 2.48
DECconnect Faceplate Products ........................................... 2.49
DECconnect Modular Faceplate (H3111-C) .. . ... . ............ ...... ... 2.49
Surface-mount Faceplate .................. .. .. ... . ... .. . ....... . .. .... . 2.50
Flush-mount Faceplate .... . ......................... ... .. .. ............ 2.50
Faceplate Installation Tool Kit .......................................... 2.50
Faceplate Jacks and Connectors ....... .............. ....... .. .. .... . ... 2.51
DECconnect Terminal-connection Components ........................... 2.53
DECconnect Network Equipment Cabinet Products ...................... 2.55
Satellite Equipment Room Rack (H3120) .............................. 2.55
Office Communications Cabinet (H9646-E) . ..... . ..... .. .......... . .. 2.57
Cabinet Building Block Kits ................ ... . .... .......... . ........ 2.58
DECconnect Remote Wall Enclosure (H3131-A) . . ........... . ......... 2.61
Broadband 802.3/Ethernet Products ...................................... 2.65
Chipcom Ethermodem Broadband Ethernet Transceiver ...... ..... .. 2.68
Chipcom Ethermodem Frequency Translator .......................... 2.69
802.3/Ethernet Communications Controllers .............................. 2.70
DEBNA ............. . ............. .. . ..... .............. .... ....... ..... 2.71
DELUA ................................................................. 2.73
DELQA ...... . ...... .......... . ...... ........... ....... .. . ........ .. .... 2.74
DESQA ....... ... . .... ............ . ...... . .... ..... .. . .......... .. .. . ... 2.75
DESVA ................. ................. ............... . . . ... . .. . .... . . . 2.76
DEPCA ............... ....... .. .... ......... . .... .... ........... ... ..... 2.76
Extended 802.3/Ethernet Local Area Network Products .................. 2.78
LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET) .. ............................... . .. ..... ..... 2.79
METROWAVE Bridge ...... ............. . .............................. 2.84
TtansLAN ................. ...... . ..... ....... ..... . .. ............. .... . 2.87

Table of Contents

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers .... . ............................. 2.90
Terminal Server Overview ... . .. . . .. .. . ..... . ........ . .. . ... . . . . .... . . . 2.92
DECserver 200 .. . . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . . ... . . . ... . ....... .. . ..... .. .. ... . . ... . 2.95
DECserver 550 .... . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. ... . ....... . .... . .... . ... .... . . .. 2.98
MUXserver 100/DECmux II Remote Terminal Server ..... . ... . .. . .. . . 2.104
Terminal Server Manager .... ..... .. . . .. .. .. .. ..... . ..... . ..... . ....... 2.109
PrintServer 40 .... . .. . ... . . . .. . . . .. .. . . .. . ... .. .. .. . . .. .... .. .. . . . .... . 2.111
DECrouter 200 ... . .. . . .. . .. .. .... . .. . . . ... . ... . ......... . .. . .. . ...... .. 2.113
DEC MicroServer ........ . .. . .. . .... .. .... ... . .. . . . ... . . . .... . .... ... .. 2.117
DECrouter 2000 ..... . . . .. .. .. .. .... .. ..... . .. .. . ... . ..... . ... . ..... .. . 2.118
X25router 2000 ....... .. . .... . .. . . .. . ......... ..... . .. .. .. . .. . ..... .. . 2.121
DECnet/SNA Gateway for Channel Transport .. . ......... . .. .. .. . .... 2.125
DECnet/SNA Gateway for Synchronous Transport ........... . ... . . ... 2.125
Introduction to Standard Network Packages ............................. 2.126
Service Solutions .... . .... . .... . .. . ..... . ... . ... ....... . ... . . .. . .. .. .. . 2.129
Ordering Standard Network Packages .. . . . . .. . . .. . ..... .. .. . . ... . . ... 2.129
Local Area Work Group Interconnection ................................. 2.130
DEC connect Integrated Communications Package . . .. . .. .. . . ... .. . ... 2.130
Low-speed Work Group Package- Terminal Interconnection . . ..... 2.136
High-speed Work Group Package- Work System Interconnection .. 2.138
IBM PC Interconnection Package ..... .. .. .. . .. . .. .... . ..... .. .. ... . ... 2.140
Extended Local Area Interconnection .................................... 2.143
Computer Room Package . .. . . .. .. . . ........ . ... .... . ..... .. . ... . .. . . . . 2.143
Building Package ..... . . . . .... .. . . .. .. . .. .. . ...... . .. . ........ . ... .. .. . 2.144
Site Package ..... . .. . . .... . . .. . . .. .. . .... . . . . .. . .. . ....... .. . . .. . ... ... 2.146
Wide Area Interconnection ............................................... 2.148
Wide Area Package ....... ... . ......... . .. . .. .. .... ... ...... .. . ... . ... . 2.148
Remote Site Package .......... . ... . .... ..... . .. .............. . . . ....... 2.150
Multivendor Interconnection ............................................. . 2.152
DECnet/IBM SNA Package . .... . . . .... . . . ... . ..... . ..... . .. . . .. . .. . ... 2.152
Section 3

Connectivity: Communications Hardware

Overview ............................................... . ................... . . 3.1
Communications Hardware Ordering Information ......................... 3.2
VAXBI Communications Controllers ........................................ 3.4
DHB32 ..... . .. ..... . ..... .. .. ....... . ...... . .... . . ..... . . . .. . .. .. . ... .. .. 3.5
DMB32 .... . . ........... . . . ... . . .. .... . ... . . .. . . ......... . ...... .. . . .. .. . 3.6
Q-bus Communications Controllers ........................................ 3.10
ex Communications Controllers . ......... . .. . . ... . .... . . . . . .. . . ..... .. 3.12
DHFll .......... . . .. . . . ... . . ...... . .. . . ... .. ... . . . ..... . . . ......... . .. . . 3.14
DHQll ............ . .. . . .... ........ . ... . ... . . ............... . . . ... ..... 3.16
DLVJl .. ... . ............. ....... . .. .. . ....... . . . . . . .. .. ...... . . . .. .... . . 3.18
DMVll . . .. ... ..... ...... . . ............. . . .... .. . .............. . .. . .. . .. 3.19
DPVll ....... . . . .. . . . ... . .. . . ... .......... . .. . . ............ .. . . .... . .. .. 3.22
DSVll . . . . . . . . . . . ................. . .. .. ... . . . . .. ... . .. .. . . .. . .... .. .. . . . 3.23
DZQll .... . . ...... .. .. ..... . ...... . . ... .. . .... . . .. .................. . .. . 3.25
KMVlA ....... . . . . . .. . .. . .... . .. . . . .. . ..... . .. .... .... . ...... . . . .... . . .. 3.26

Table of Contents

MicroVAX 2000 Communications Controllers ............................. 3.28
DHT32 ................................................................. 3.29
DST32 ......... ....... .............. .. . . ................................ 3.30
UNIBUS Communications Controllers ..................................... 3.32
DHUll ................................................................. 3.33
DMF32 ......... . ......... . . .............. . ............. .. .............. 3.34
DMRll ................................................................. 3.35
DMZ32 ................................................. .............. .. 3.37
DUPll ....................................... . .......................... 3.39
KCT32 ... ............... . ............................... ... ............. 3.39
KMSll . .. . .............. .......... ...................................... 3.40
KMSlP .................................................................. 3.41
Communications Processors ............................................... 3.43
KXTll-AB .............................................................. 3.43
KXJll-CA . ...... ....................................................... 3.43
KXTll-CA .............................................................. 3.44
Modems ..................................................................... 3.46
Ordering Information .................................................. 3.46
DFlOO Series .......................... .......... ........................ 3.47
DF200 Scholar Series ............. .... ... .......... ... ......... ......... 3.48
Multiple Modem (Rackmount) Enclosure ................... ... ....... 3.49
Statistical Multiplexers ..................................................... 3.50
DFM Series .................. ..... ...................................... 3.50
DFX Packet Assembler/Disassembler .................................. 3.52
Communications Cables .................................................... 3.55

Section 4

Interoperability: Communications Software

Introduction ................................................................. 4.1
Software Ordering Information ............................................. 4.2
DECnet Communications Software .......................................... 4.4
Introduction ........... ....... ...... . .. .. ... . ........................... . 4.4
DECnet Product Capabilities ............................ .... ....... . ... 4.5
DECnet-VAX ............. .. ............................. .. . .... ....... .. . 4.8
DECnet-ULTRIX ....... . . ............... .. ......................... . .... 4.10
DECnet-RSX ............................................. ....... ........ 4.12
DECnet-DOS .. ....... ................ . ................................. 4.13
DECnet-VAXmate ...... .. .... . ..... .. ................. ........ ...... . ... 4.15
DECnet/E .............................................................. 4.16
DECnet-RT ........................................................ . .... 4.17
Internet Communications Software ........................................ 4.18
Digital/IBM Communications Software .................................... 4.19
Comparison of VMS/SNA and DECnet/SN A Gateway Products ....... 4.21
DEC ChannelServer ........................... . ........................ 4.22
DECnet/SN A Gateway for Channel Transport . ... ........ .... ... . ..... 4.24
DECnet/SNA Gateway for Synchronous Transport. .................... 4.28
VMS/SN A ............. .. . ..... .................................... ...... 4.32

Table of Contents

DECnet/SN A Access Routines and Programming Interfaces .............. 4.34
VAX Message Router/S Gateway ..... . . ......... . .... .. . ... .... . ....... 4.36
VAX Message Router/P Gateway . ......... . . ...... .. .. . .. .. .. ... . . . ... . 4.36
DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management ............................. 4.36
DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Terminal Emulator ........................... 4.39
DECnet/SNA ULTRIX 3270 Terminal Emulator ........................ 4.41
DECnet/SNA MS-DOS 3270 Terminal Emulator ..... . .. ...... ... ... ... 4.43
DECnet/SN A VMS Remote Job Entry .... .. .. ..... ...... . .......... .. .. 4.46
DECnet/SNA Data Transfer facility (DTF) ...... . . ........... .. .... ... . 4.47
DECnet/SNA VMS DISOSS Document Exchange Facility (DDXF) ... .. 4.50
EDE with IBM DISOSS ...... ........... . ..... ........... . .... . . ..... . .. 4.51
DECnet/SNA VMS Distributed Host Command Facility (DHCF) .. .. . . 4.52
DECnet/SNA VMS Printer Emulator (PrE) .... . ....... .. .. . ........... 4.53
DECnet/SNA VMS Application Programming Interface (API) ......... 4.54
DECnet/SNA VMS Advanced Program-to-program Communication/
LU6.2 Programming Interface (APPC) . .... .. ..................... 4.56
DECnet/SNA FLASH/ IMS Programming Interface (FPI) .. ..... .. . .. .. 4.57
DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Data Stream Programming Interface
(3270 DS) .... . . . .... . ....... ............................ .... .. ... . . 4.58
VAX/IBM Data Access (VIDA) .......................................... 4.59
Binary Synchronous Communications Protocol Emulators ................ 4.60
VAX 2780/3 780 Protocol Emulator ..................................... 4.61
VAX 3271 Protocol Emulator ........................................... 4.63
RSX-112780/3780 Emulator .. . ..... . .. . ......... . .. .. . . .. ...... ..... . . 4.65
Micro/RSX 2780/3 780 Emulator ....................................... 4.67
RSX-113271 Protocol Emulator .. .. .............. . . ........... . ........ 4.68
Micro/RSX 3271 Protocol Emulator .... ... ...................... . .. .... 4.70
RSX-UM-PLUS RJE/HASP Emulator .................................. 4.70
Digital/UNIX Communications Software .................................. 4.72
VMS/ULTRIX Connection .............................................. 4.72
FUSION TCP/ IP ................... . .......... . . . ... .. . .. ...... . ........ 4.73
WIN/TCP and WIN/TCP-DDN ........... .. ... ...... . .... .... .. ........ 4.74
TCP / IP ............. . .............................. ... .. .. . . ............. 4.76
Digital/Wang Communications Software .................................. 4.78
EDE-W Document Exchange ........................................... 4.78
Packetnet Communications Software ...................................... 4.80
Supported Public PSDNs ..................... . . . ......... . .... ..... .... 4.86
X25router 2000 ....... . ......... . .. ...... . . .... . ...... .... ..... .. . .. ... 4.87
VAX P.S.I. and VAX P.S.I. Access ........................................ 4.87
RSX-11 P.S.I./M and RSX-11 P.S.I./M-PLUS . ..... .. ... .... .............. 4.91
Open Systems Interconnect (OSI) Products ............................... 4.93
VAX FTAM Open Systems Multi vendor File Transfer .................. 4.94
VAX DEC/ MAP ......................................................... 4.96
VAX OSI Applications Kernel (OSAK) .................................. 4.98
File Transfer and Terminal Emulation Products .......................... 4.101
VAX Public Access Communications (VAXPAC) ... . .. .. ... . ... . .. . . ... 4.101
VTERM II, poly-COM 220, and poly-COM 240 for the
IBM PC/ XT /AT .................................................... 4.102

vii

Table of Contents

Additional Software Products ............................................. 4.105
WPS-PLUS/ PC . .. .... . ............... . . .. . . . .. . . . ... .... . ...... . ....... 4.105
Software Development Tools ...... . ........... . . . .. .. . . ...... .. ... . ... 4.106
HDLC Framing Software . ...... . ................... . . .... . .. .. ...... .. 4.106
X.25 Link Level Software ... .... .. . ..... .... .. ......... . ... .. . ...... .. 4.107

Section 5

Distributed Applications

Introduction ................................................................. 5.1
Integrated Personal Computing ............................................. 5.2
VAX/VMS Services for MS -DOS and DECnet/PCSA Client ..... . . ... . . .. 5.5
PC Network Integration Package and PC Network Services Package .... 5.7
PC Integration Packages for Micro VAX 2000 and Micro VAX II .. .. .... . 5.8
DECnet System Services (DSS) ............................................. 5.10
VAX Distributed File Service (DFS ) ... ... . .. .. . . . .. .. .................. 5.11
VAX Distributed Queuing Service (DQS ) . .. . ....... .. . .. .... .. . ....... 5.13
VAX Distributed Name Service (DNS ) ....... . .... . ... .... ... .. ........ 5.15
Remote System Manager (RSM ) .. ...... .. ........... . ...... .. .. ... . . ... 5.17
Business Communications .................................................. 5.21
MAIL bus Electronic Mai!Interchange .. . ... . .. ... .. . ......... ... . ... .. 5.21
VAX Message Router . . ..... . . .. ... . ... . . . ........ . .. . .. . ............... 5.22
VAX Message Router VMSmail Gateway . . .......... ... . .. . .. . ... .... . . 5.24
ULTRIX Mail Connection . .. . . ... . . .. . .... . . .......... . .. .... . . ... . . . . . 5.26
VAX Message Router/ S Gateway (for IBM SNADS ) .......... .. .. . ... .. 5.27
VAX Message Router/ P Gateway (for IBM PROFS ) .. .... .. . ....... . . . .. . 5.9
VAX Message Router X.400 Gateway ..... . ..... . . . . ..... . .. ...... . ... .. 5.31
VAX MAILGATE for MCI Mail ........... . . . ............ .. .. .... . . . . ... 5.33
VAX Message Router Programmer 's Kit ... . ..... . .. . .. .. . ... ...... .. ... 5.36
VAX Notes ................... . ............ ..... . . ... . .. . ...... . ......... 5.37
VAX VTX . . . . .. . ....... . ..... . ... .. .... .. . .. ..... . ...... . . ... .. . ....... . 5.40

Section 6

Manageability: Services and Products

Overview . .................................................................... 6.1
Network Services ............................................................ 6.2
Services for the Planning and Design Phase . ............................... 6.3
NETplan/ Requirements Analysis . . . . . .. .... . ......... ..... ....... ... .. . 6.3
NETplan/ Design Analysis ........... . . . ... . .. . .... . . . . . . . ... . ... .. . . ... . 6.3
NETplan/ Application Design .... . . .. . .. ........... . . ... ........ . ....... 6.4
NETplan/ Protocol Design ..... . .. . ... . ... . . . ........ .. ......... . . . ... .. 6.4
NETplan/ Physical Design .... .. .... .. . . . . ..... . .. ... . .. ....... . .. .. ... . . 6.5
NETplan/ Planning Seminars ....... . . .. ..... .. . . ... . .......... ... ....... 6.5
Services for the Implementation and Startup Phase ........................ 6.6
NETstart/ Installation Management ..... . ... .. ..... . .... . .. . . .. . . .. . .... 6.6
NETstart/ Certification ........ . ........... . . . ...... . .... . . . .. .. ......... 6.7
NETstart/ Startup Assistance .... .. .. . ............. . . .. ... . ........ . ..... 6.7
NETstart/ Application Development ...... .. ....... .. . . . . . .... ... . ...... 6.8
NETstart/ Protocol Development ..... .. .. . ......... .. .. . . .. ......... . .. 6.8
NETstart/ Startup Training ... .. . . ... . ..... . ......... .. .. .. .... ... ....... 6.8
viii

Table of Contents

Services for the Operations and Growth Phase . ............................ 6.9
NETsupport/Maintenance Management .. .. ... .. ............ . ..... .. . .. 6.9
NETsupport/Management Tools Assistance ............................. 6.9
NETsupport/Operations Training ...................................... 6.10
Related Network Services .................................................. 6.11
Related Educational Services Training Courses .... ................ .... 6.11
Wide Area Interconnect Service ................. .. .................... 6.12
Local Area Interconnect Service ................ ... ... .. ............... 6.12
Software Installation Services .......................................... 6.12
Ongoing Maintenance .................................................. 6.13
Software Product Services ..... ... . . ..... ............. . ......... .. .. ... 6.14
DECsite Services .......... . .... ................ .................. .. .. .. 6.15
DECmove Service ....................................... . . ............. 6.16
Startup Packages ....................................................... 6.16
Computer Services Business .................... ...... . ..... .. . ........ 6.17
Computer Special Systems Services ........................................ 6.19
Network and System Management Products ............................... 6.20
NM CC/DECnet Monitor. ............................................... 6.21
NM CC/VAX ETHERnim (Ethernet Network Integrity Monitor) ....... 6.23
LAN Traffic Monitor ................... ...... . ..... . .......... . .. ....... 6.24
Remote Bridge Management Software (RBMS) ......................... 6.26
Network Security ................... . ................. . ..................... 6.28
Ethernet Enhanced Security System (DESNC) ......................... 6.28

Appendix A

Performance Guidelines

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines .................................. A.1
Phase IV Network Terms ............ . ..... . . .......... .......... ........ A.1
DNA Phase IV Network Configuration Guidelines ...................... A.1
Converting Networks from Phase III to Phase IV ....................... A.4
802.3/Ethernet-based Products ........................................ A.7
Planning a Baseband 802.3/Ethernet LAN .................... .. . .. ... A.10
Planning a ThinWire 802.3/Ethernet LAN ....... .... . ......... ........ A.16
Planning an Extended Baseband 802.3/Ethernet LAN ........ ....... . A.20
Planning a Broadband 802 .3/Ethernet LAN ........................... A.24
Planning an Extended Broadband 802.3/Ethernet LAN .............. A.26
Connecting Baseband to Broadband LANs ............................ A.27
Connecting Shared Resources to an 802.3/Ethernet LAN ............. A.29
Connecting an 802.3/Ethernet LAN to Remote Networks ............. A.34
DECnet-to-X.25 Communications ....... . .... . . . ...................... A.37
DECnet-to-IBM/S NA Communications ................................ A.40
Performance Guidelines ................................................... A.40
DECnet-VAX ......... ... . .. ..... . . .......... ........................... A.40
DECnet-RSX .................. ....... .... .... ...... ....... .... .... ..... A.40
DECnet-DOS and DECnet-VAXmate ................................... A.45
Terminal Server . ....... . .... ......... .. .......... ........ .............. A.47
Distributed File Service ......................... . .................. ... . A.48
VAX FTAM .. ..... . ................. .. .. .... ...... .. ..... .. ..... ..... ... A.53
DECrouter 200 .............. . .................... .. ..... . ....... .... ... A.57
DECrouter 2000 ....... . ...... . .............. . ..... . .................... A.58
ix

Table of Contents

X25router 2000 ................... . .... ......................... .. .. ... A.59
DECnet/SNA Gateway for Channel Transport ......................... A.60
DECnet/SNA Gateway for Synchronous Transport .. ..... . . .. ......... A.63
VMS/SNA .............................................................. A .67
DECnet/SN A Data Transfer Facility .................... ...... . . . . . . .... A.75
Bisync Emulators ...... . . .. . ............................................ A.78
LAN Bridge 100 ................... ... . . . .. .............. . .. .. .... .. .. .. A.80

Appendix B Environmental Specifications

Appendix C Software Product Description List

Appendix D
Index

Related Documentation

What's New to the Networks and Communications Buyer's Guide

DEC MicroServer

The solution whenever communication is required from an Ethernet LAN
into a wide area network environment, the DEC MicroServer provides the
hardware base for the new DECrouter 2000, X25router 2000, and the
DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST. & Refer to "802.3/Ethernet Communications
Servers" in Section 2.

DECrouter 2000

The DECrouter 2000 provides high-speed (64 Kb/s to 256 Kb/s) routing
for local or remote DECnet/ OSI networks . Replacing the DECSA-based
DECnet Router Server, it provides synchronous connections to remote
DECnet systems and LANs in a wide area network using DECnet.
& Refer to "802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers" in Section 2.

X25router 2000

Replacing the DECnet/X.25 Gateway, the X25router 2000 has all the capabilities of the DECrouter 2000, with the additional ability to access X.25
networks . The X25router 2000 runs on the DEC MicroServer hardware
and provides improved price/performance, throughput, and increased
concurrent sessions over the DECnet/X.25 Gateway. & Refer to
"802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers" in Section 2.

DECnet/SNA Gateway for
Synchronous Transport

The DECnet/SNA Gateway for Synchronous Transport (DECnet/ SNA
Gateway-ST ) replaces the network-to-network function provided by the
DECnet/SNA Gateway DECSA-FA -based product. Running on the DEC
MicroServer hardware, it provides improved price/performance over the
DECSA-FA-based product, and supports more lines at higher bandwidth
with greater throughput. & Refer to "Digital/IBM Communications
Software" in Section 4.

DECnet/SNA Gateway for Channel
Transport

The DECnet/ SNA Gateway for Channel Transport (DECnet/ SNA GatewayCT) addresses the need for high-performance , network-to-network connections . Offering direct channel attachment to an IBM S/3 70, it bypasses the
SNA Wide Area Network and the 37x5 Front-End Processor to provide
superior throughput for file transfer and task-to-task applications. With the
DEC ChannelServer as its hardware base, DECnet/ SNA Gateway-CT allows
users to access files, documents , and applications simultaneously on multiple mainframes in either central or distributed locations. & Refer to
"Digital/IBM Communications Software" in Section 4.

DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway
Management, V2.0

DECnet/ SNA VMS Gateway Management V2 .0 can be used to monitor both
DECnet/ SNA Gateway-ST and DECnet/ SNA Gateway-CT products, and
allows the Gateway administrator to configure the software executing in
the DECnet/ SNA Gateway. & Refer to "Digital/IBM Communications
Software" in Section 4.

DECnet/SNA Data Transfer
Facility Version 2.0

Version 2.0 of the DECnet/SNA Data Transfer Facility (DTF) provides
improved security, supports VSAM file types , and allows record-level access
to most IBM file types. When combined with the DECnet/ SNA GatewayCT or DECnet/ SNA Gateway-ST, DTF provides a better than tenfold
increase in performance and throughput over previously available
products . & Refer to "Digital/IBM Communications Software" in
Section 4.

What's New to the Networks and Communications Buyer's Guide

DSVll Q-bus Synchronous
Communications Controller

The DSVll module provides up to 256 Kb/s wide area network connection
for standalone MicroVAX II and MicroVAX 3500/3600 systems. The preferred MicroVAX option for host-based wide area communications, it has
the flexibility to support two lines running different applications, and is
supported by DECnet-VAX, VAX P.S.I., and VMS/SNA software
products. & Refer to "Q-bus Communications Controllers" in Section 3.

VMS/SNA, Vl.3

Answering the need for a single-system interconnect product, VMS/SNA
Vl.3 offers a connection to the IBM front-end processor through a synchronous connection, and allows remote systems to communicate directly
to an SNA environment without requiring them to be part of a LAN. VMS/
SNA Vl.3 supports the new DSVll communications device, VMS V5.0, and
the VAXstation II/GPX and VAXstation 3200/3500. A Refer to
"Digital/IBM Communications Software" in Section 4.

The ULTRIX Mail Connection

The ULTRIX Mail Connection provides connectivity between UNIX-based
mail and other MAILbus products through VMS Message Router V3 .0,
allowing ULTRIX users to exchange mail with ALL-IN-1, VMSmail users,
plus access X.400, IBM/PROFS, and IBM/ SNADS gateways. The ULTRIX
Mail Connection acts as a gateway between non-Digital UNIX-based systems and MAILbus. A Refer to "Business Communications" in Section 5.

The VMS/ULTRIX Connection

The VMS/ULTRIX Connection allows UNIX-based systems to mount files
on disks that are part of traditional VMS/VAXcluster systems. In addition to
sharing the physical resource, VMS/ULTRIX Connection also facilitates the
transfer of files between the operating systems. A Refer to "Digital/UNIX
Communications Software" in Section 4 for further information.

VAX FTAM

Based on OSI standards, VAX File Transfer and Access Management
(FTAM) provides the capability for VMS systems to use an internationalstandard protocol (ISO 8571) to transfer files between other ISO FTAMcompliant systems in a multivendor network. & Refer to "Open System
Interconnect (OSI) Products" in Section 4.

VAX DEC/MAP V2.0 and
DTQNA

With VAX DEC/MAP Version 2.0, Digital implements MAP (Manufacturing
Automation Protocol ), Version 2.1. The network management capabilities
of Vl.O have been extended to all seven layers of the ISO/OSI reference
model.
The DTQNA is Digital's new Token-bus-to-Q-bus Network Adapter,
provided with VAX DEC/MAP V2.0. It offers the same functions as the
Token-bus-to-UNIBUS Network Adapter. & Refer to "Open System
Interconnection (OSI) Products" in Section 4.

VAX Notes

VAX Notes is computer conferencing software that allows users to create
and access online conferences or meetings. Using electronic messaging
technology, VAX Notes lets users conduct meetings with people in different
geographic locations via computer. Participants can join in a discussion
from their own desks when they choose. & Refer to "Business
Applications" in Section 5.

xii

What's New to the Networks and Communications Buyer's Guide

VAXVTX

VAX VTX, software layered on VMS, provides videotex services compliant
with CCITT F.300 recommendations. Videotex is a distributed information
retrieval service that uses a tree-structured database through which the
user navigates by selecting choices from the menu. A Refer to "Business
Applications" in Section 5.

VAX OSI Application Kernel
(OSAK) Version 1.1

To simplify migration to Phase V DECnet and the ordering of OSI application products, VOTS and OSAK have been combined into a single product,
VAX OSAK, Vl.1. A Refer to "Open System Interconnection (OSI)
Products" in Section 4.

xiii

Suggestions for Using this Guide

Customers can use this guide to find the following kinds of information
about Digital's networking and communications products:

• Background Information presents a general overview of networking and
communications concepts and architecture.
• Product Information describes product features and capabilities.
• Configuration Information describes how products can be linked into networks.
• Ordering Information lists the codes required to purchase specific variations
of a product .
To locate information in this guide, find specific topics listed below and
refer to the Contents for page numbers.

Background Information
Product Information

General background information about Digital networking and communications is presented in Section 1.

Locating Products
Products are listed in the Contents and alphabetically in the Index .
New Products
New products are highlighted under What 's New to the Networks and Communications Buyer's Guide.
Packaged Products
Network products available in prepackaged configurations are described in
Section 2, under Standard Network Packages.
Descriptions of Software Products
Descriptions of software products are located in Sections 4, 5, and 6. Each
description is followed by order codes and any prerequisite hardware and
software.
Software required for 802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers is described
in "802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers" in Section 2.
Full Software Product Descriptions (SPDs) are published separately. The
SPD numbers for products in this guide are listed in Appendix C.

Hardware Product Descriptions
Hardware product descriptions are in Section 2, Connectivity: 802.31
Ethernet Local Area Networks, and Section 3, Connectivity: Hardware Communications Controllers. Each description is followed by specifications and
order codes as well as any prerequisite hardware and software.
Network Services Products
Network Services Products are listed in Section 6, Manageability.
Product Comparisons
(
Tables comparing the features and capabilities of products are located in
the following subsections: 802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers, Extended
802.3/Ethernet Local Area Networks, DECnet Communications Software,
Digital/IBM Communications Software, Asynchronous Communications Controllers, Synchronous Communications Controllers, and Modems .

xiv

Suggestions for Using this Guide

Product Performance Information
Product performance information is discussed in Appendix A.
Specifications
Specifications for hardware products are listed in individual product
descriptions and in summary tables.
Prerequisite Products
Any prerequisite hardware or software necessary to use a product is listed
in the individual product description.
Configuration Information

Overview configurations are described in Section 2, Connectivity: 802.31
Ethernet Local Area Networks.
Detailed configuration information is located in Appendix A.

Ordering Information

Order codes are listed in tables after each product description.
Order code formats are explained at the beginning of Sections 3 and 4. To
order network products in prepackaged configurations, refer to Standard
Network Packages in Section 2.

Comments and Suggestions

Use the reply card at the end of this guide to make comments and suggestions.

Abb1·eviations and Definitions

System Unit Space in chassis for mounting prewired backplane(s) that
accepts hex- or quad-sized modules .
Double Slot Space in a prewired backplane that accepts a 13.2 cm (5.22 in )
high module.
Quad Slot Space in prewired backplane that accepts a 26 .51 cm (10 .44 in )
high module.
Hex Slot Space in prewired backplane that accepts a 39 .63 cm (15 .6 in )
high module.
IIO Connection Panel Insert Openings for mounting I/ O Connection panel
inserts in the I/ O connection panel on the back of the CPU cabinet. These
inserts provide the transition between internal cabling and external
shielded cabling . There are two types of I/ O connection panel inserts-one
for UNIBUS systems and one for Q-bus systems .
I/O connection panel inserts for UNIBUS options vary in type and style
depending on the amount and type of connectors required by the option.
Each I/O connection panel accepts multiple inserts . Q-bus options have
I/ O connection panel insert sizes of A (2.54 x 10.1 cm or 1 x 4 in ), B (6.6 x
8.1 cm or 2.6. X3.2 in ), or C (10 .l X 10.1 cm or 4 X 4 in ).

de A mps Drawn de current (amps ) drawn by the option at 5 V, 15 V, -15 V,
12 v.
ac W atts Drawn ac current (watts ) drawn by the option at 120 V, 60 H z or
240 V, 50 Hz.
Bus loads The number of bus loads drawn from the appropriate system bus.

bi s Bits per second .
Kbls Kilobits per second. (K = 1,000 )
KB/s Kilobytes per second . (K = 1,024 )
MB /s Megabytes per second. (M = 1,048 ,578)
Mbl s Megabits per second . (1 Mbit = 1,000,000 bits )

xvi

Key to Symbols Used in This Guide

Transceiver

•

Terminator

Connector

c:::::-J~~~~~~~~~~

~~~~~~~~~~~~~--

Stand ard Baseband Ethernet Cable
Thin Wire

-~---

DESTA

DESTA with T-Connector
DECnet-VAX
(Phase IV)

~ VAX-J
Specific Node

Server,
Router,
Gateway

DEBNA

VAX 8800

Specific Node
with Communications
Device

Specific Node
with Communications
Device and
Resident Software

~
Modem

Network

Work Station or
Personal Computer

Terminal

[j
DESTAor
Broadband Transceiver

DELNI

CAD/CAM

Disk

§
Bridge

Local Repeater

Fiber Optic
Repeater

)
Printer

Statistical
Multiplexer

NBG-113-00

xvii

Section 1

Introduction to Digital's Networks

Introduction

Digital Equipment Corporation is the leading producer of networking
products, services, and capabilities that deliver computing power directly
to an individual's work space. Our computing philosophy is based on the
concept of distributed processing, which means locating powerful applications where users need them-in offices, laboratories, factory floors, or any
work space that can benefit from sharing information or computing
resources . Digital distributes computing power effectively through a broad
range of products and services that allow computers to communicate via
networking .
Organizations gain a number of benefits from arranging their computer
systems into networks. Networks enable all computer users to take advantage of the organization 's total computing capabilities through information
exchange and sharing of resources . Small systems can access the resources
and greater computing power of large systems , while large systems can
off-load applications best handled by personal workstations .
Networks encourage the free flow of information throughout an enterprise
by providing individuals (who have the proper security clearance ) ready
access to data , applications , and people. Any computing resource can
become a resource to the entire organization simply by attaching it to the
network .
Typically, computers are arranged into local area networks (LANs ) when
organizations need high-speed data transfer and communication within a
building or a cluster of buildings-such as a campus or office complex .
LANs may also be coupled to other nearby LANs to extend their distance
or to improve performance ; these are called extended LANs.
Network nodes can be distributed in different cities , or even to different
countries. For transmitting data over long distances and across oceans , a
network usually employs a combination of long-distance communication
media including telephone lines, public data networks , satellite signals , and
microwave. An organization with worldwide offices is likely to configure its
computers into such a wide area network (WAN ). Whether the network
forms a LAN, an extended LAN , or a WAN , the user sees the network
function as a single entity.
An important goal of any network should be to en able equipment manufactured by different vendors to work together. Communication between
heterogeneous systems is only possible if the multiple vendors agree on a
set of conventions or standards for information exchange. That is why
Digital is committed to building products that comply with the Open
Systems Interconnection (OSI ) model recommended by the International
Standards Organi zation (ISO ).
In addition , Digital supports multi vendor networks by providing gateways
to networks developed by other vendors , such as IBM 's S A networks and
X.25-compliant systems. These gateways allow th e functions of one vendor 's network to be converted into functions recognizable by another
vendor 's net work. In cases where Digital does not offer an off-the-shelf
method for communicating with a different vendor's product, Digital's
Computer Special Systems group can build customi zed hardware and
software to create such a link.

1.1

Introduction to Digital's Networks

Digital Network Architecture

Digital's networking capabilities arise from the Digital Network Architecture (DNA). Digital has adhered to DNA since 1975; it serves as the blueprint for virtually all past, present, and future communications products.
Historically, the DNA model, like the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI)
reference model, is arranged in independent layers. Each layer can be
changed without significantly affecting other layers. And in each layer, the
protocols govern communication with other layers.
As DNA progresses to its next phase, it will comply with the OSI reference
model.
Open Systems Interconnection Model

- - - • PRESENTS USER'S
APPLICATION
TRANSLATES DATA

CONTROLS DIALOGUE

ENSURES MESSAGE
INTEGRITY

ROUTES TRANSMISSION

CTS ERRORS

Digital's implementation of DNA is DECnet- a family of software and
hardware products that link systems into a single network. DECnet software is layered on each of Digital's operating systems, allowing all Digital
systems to communicate across the network with compatible functions.

1.2

Introduction to Digital's Networks

DNA, DECnet, and 802.J/Ethernet Relationships

Digital Network Architecture
DECnet

G
I

Host

........0
=
"ti
CJ

Host

NBG-11 5-01

DNA's layered structure has provided DECnet software with a unique
adaptive quality. Since DECnet was first announced, it has progressed
through four phases, with each phase providi ng increased capabi lity. Now
Digital has announced the next progression, DECnet/OSI Phase V, which
promises compliance with international standards by merging DECnet and
OSI. This will enable Digital customers to enjoy the benefits of
multivendor communication without compromising system quality.
Digital offers freedom to users who wish to integrate computers from a
variety of manufacturers into their networks through intern ational standards. And users are assured that DECnet networks allow them to incorporate new technologies without the expense of rewriting existing
applications or retraining staff.

1.3

Introduction to Digital's Networks

DECnet also offers flexibility in planning . Networks can start with two
nodes and expand to 64 ,000 nodes. And as Digital incorporates DECnet/
OSI Phase V, customers will be able to expand their networks to hundreds
of thousands of nodes. This will become increasingly important as large
corporations begin to connect their networks with those of their customers
and suppliers.
In the future, the most successful networks will function as information
utilities that are available at all times to anyone who needs them. Digital
envisions the integration of all communications systems located throughout
an enterprise, including voice, data , and image .
Standards are a key aspect in Digital's networking vision, as they are in any
utility. In telephones , for example, standards enable us to go to any store,
buy any brand or form of telephone and be confident that it will work
when we plug it in to any phone receptacle. Strict adherence to international standards will give network users the ability to communicate anything, to anywhere, at anytime, regardless of distance, medium , or vendor.
The Evolution of Digital's
Networks

The foundation for Digital 's networking vision was laid in 1975 with the
announcement of DNA. Thirteen years later, Digital's commitment to DNA
is even stronger, with the delivery of four phases of DECnet and the
announcement of DECnet/OSI Phase V. And with each new phase, Digital
renews its commitment to investment protection: Every device that Digital
ever manufactures will communicate with every device Digital manufactures today.
In 1980, Digital, Intel, and Xerox co-developed the Ethernet protocol for
local area network technology. Today, over half of the worldwide installed
LANs are Ethernet-based, and Digital is the leading LAN vendor.
In 1983, Digital made a commitment to communicate in multivendor environments. Today, we offer many direct connections to IBM products and
comprehensive gateways to IBM networks . Digital also supports links to
Unisys , HP, ICL, and other equipment manufacturers.
A plan to integrate OSI standards into DNA was launched in 1985. Digital
announced DECnet/OSI Phase V in 1987, becoming the only vendor at that
time to commit to making its proprietary architecture comply fully with
OSI standards.

What People Expect from
Networks Today

Networking has made great strides in recent years, fueled by dramatic
changes in the marketplace. For example, the "globalization" of business
has created a need to sell and service products worldwide. This has led to
a dependence on technology and a rethinking of the whole idea of communication .
The ability to master technology has become an important factor in keeping
a company competitive. Companies that invested heavily in computers to
increase efficiency now realize that unconnected islands of computers can
lead to information bottlenecks. Distributed computing can solve this
problem by allowing for more decision making at the hands-on level. And
networks can help companies respond more rapidly to the shifting
demands of the marketplace by making more timely and accurate information available to decision makers .

1.4

Introduction to Digital's Networks

At the same time that computers have proliferated, technological development has accelerated. Managers want to know what direction technology
will take in order to incorporate constantly changing technology into their
planning cycles . They want the freedom to purchase systems from multiple
vendors. Furthermore, they need to match new technology with the corporation 's past and present investments in hardware , software, and applications.
To accommodate these pressures, users and managers want networks that
are easy to install, change, and operate . They want a lateral, open, and
flexible flow of information to help managers cope with changes.
Digital's massive companywide network, EASYnet, is a good illustration of
the functions people now expect from networks. Digital's network was
established in 1978 with fewer than 10 nodes . Today EASYnet is the world's
largest private data network, with 75,000 users in nearly 300 locations on
three continents. It connects more than 27,000 computers worldwide , and
is growing at the rate of 200 new nodes per week . EASY net plays an important role in Digital's product development and testing, manufacturing,
distribution and marketing. Digital employees use the electronic mail
application to communicate with Digital facilities all over the world . And ,
while network users exchange critical information, they need not be concerned about how data physically passes through the network, because it is
transparent .
Digital's Strategic Networking
Vision for the Future

Digital's Strategic Networking Vision for the future can be summed up as
the ability to communicate anything, to anywhere , at anytime . In the
future, companies will expect the functional integration of all communications systems throughout the enterprise.

......§
u

"'O

The framework that organizes the technologies required to implement
Digital's Strategic Networking Vision distinguishes networking functions
into four areas : Connectivity, Interoperability, Distributed Applications,
and Manageability. This buyer's guide organizes Digital's products and
services into categories that reflect these four functional areas . All of our
past, present, and future products can be fit into this framework.
Connectivi ty

Connectivity is the ability of the network to move any piece of information
from Point A to Point B, regardless of the media or transmission technologies . Digital offers products to simplify the physical and logical connections in a network and enable ever y device to utilize the power of the
entire network . Digital 's connectivity solutions include
• 802 .3/ Ethernet LAN products.
· The DECconnect structured cabling system (which supports voice, data and
video transmission).
• Links to public and private data networks using X.25 protocols .
• Specific interfaces to other vendors' equipment using gateways and routers .
• NETplan network planning service.
Products included in the Connectivity category enable networking devices
to participate in an overall system and utilize the full power of a network.

1.5

Introduction to Digital's Networks

Interoperability
Interoperability enables all system elements to exchange information
between equipment from the same vendor, or from a collection of vendors
who support the integrity of the network . Users need
• Bidirectional exchange of information and files .
• Support for major equipment vendors.
• Compliance with standards.
Digital products such as DECnet , IBM Interconnect, DECnet/OSI, and PC
communications packages with DECnet-DOS allow users to operate in a
multivendor environment. Products included in the Interoperability category
give users the power of DECnet along with the advantages of industry
standards .

Distributed Applications
Distributed Applications are the measure of the value and usefulness of the
network and are a primary reason the network exists . D istributed applications can be accessed via a network as easily as if they were on a single
system. People use Digital networks to access and utilize enterprisewide
applications such as
• Electronic mail.
• DECnet System Services.
• Computer-integrated Telephony (CIT) .
• ALL -IN-1.
• Videotex/ electronic conferencing .
• File transfer.
In the Distributed Applications category are the products and services that
enable network managers to deliver high performance to users, regardl ess
of network topology. These products also provide consistent interfaces for
resources on the network. For example, electronic mail unites an enterprise
by connecting disparate mail systems such as IBM/ SNADS, IBM/ DISOSS,
X.400, and UNIX .

Manageability
Manageabi lity provides the network capabilities as well as the product and
service mix that
• Enables customers to design , implement, and con trol the performance of
the entire network.
• Manages change in a responsive and flexible manner.
Manageability is inherent in Digital networks because the intelligence is
built into the network architecture : The network handles day -to-day operations , automatically adjusting to changes in the system and circu mventing
failed components . In addition to the built-in capabilities, Digital network
management solutions- including life cycle management services, Remote
System Manager, the DESNC Enhanced Ethernet Security system , DECnet
Monitor, and LAN Traffic Monitor-help network managers better support
the enterprisewide network.
Services and products in the Manageability category provide information
and capabilities to ensure high network availability, ease of use, security,
and resource management .

1.6

Introduction to Digital's Networks

Future Directions

As Digital fulfills the Digital Strategic Networking Vision, the framework
of Connectivity, Interoperability, Distributed Applications, and Manageability will extend to meet industry needs . Digital customers will continue
to implement 802.3/Ethernet-based solutions over all standard media
including baseband cable (standard , ThinWire, and unshielded twistedpair), broadband cable, fiber optic cable, and microwave links. Digital's
enterprisewide networks will provide the functional integration of voice,
data , and video across the entire network.
Digital will strive for unrestricted interoperability with multivendor computing devices and networks by continuing its commitment to integrate OSI
standards . Digital also plans to enhance functional gateways to non-OSI
networks and vendors . Network users will have consistent user interfaces
for easy access to distributed applications such as DECnet System Services .
And Digital will continue to provide comprehensive network management
through OSI-based open management interfaces for multivendor support
and through enhanced life-cycle network -management services .
An organization's success in networking directly affects its ability to
respond to new business, redeploy resources, and aggressively seize competitive advantages. Digital has defined its vision today to help customers
plan networks that fulfill their vision tomorrow.

1.7

Building the Netwo1·k

Analyzing an Enterprise's Needs

A network is the outgrowth of the way an enterprise conducts business,
and is implemented to facilitate the productivity of the organization, the
department, and the individual. To succeed, an enterprise must examine its
business, information, and systems architectures; its product architecture
must support successful information flow.
Business Architecture

Business Architecture

Systems Architecture
Information Architecture

Hardware

Software

Networks

Applications Services

Prod~ct

Architecture

NBG-150-00

Within the product architecture are segments-hardware, software, services, applications, and networks-that support the information architecture. The network is part of the total solution: To get the most from any
network implementation, you must satisfy current and future requirements
at every level of the organization.
For instance, you must examine how and where information moves through
an enterprise, and consider the present and future requirements of the
people who communicate and share information, as well as those who
access common resources that support the information architecture.
To plan and design a new network, or to integrate an existing network, you
should examine:
• The way you do business.
• Your future requirements.
• The way a data communications network can foster intra-organizational
cooperation.
You must weigh the productivity of any networking solution against the
cost of that solution, and you must consider the performance and reliability
of alternatives. You should know the impact of each technology, now and in
the future, and couple the decision to support a technology with a sensitivity for business and organizational issues. .& Refer to "Services for the
Planning and Design Phase," Section 6.

1.8

Building the Network

Because the network architecture supports the information architecturewhich in turn supports the enterprise business architecture-you must
select the technology that will succeed:
• What networking or communications standards fit your needs
• How fast each department requires data
• Which communications wiring scheme provides functional growth , flexibility, and cost efficiency
Digital's Networking Products

Digital examines each business situation from the customer's point of view
and provides a comprehensive solution-whether it's a specific product, a
wiring scheme, connections to Digital and non -Digital hosts, or local or
geographically dispersed networks .
Digital has the hardware, software, and service products to cover many
environments (depicted in the topology at the end of this section). Digital
ensures that its products are compatible-designed and tested to run
together, applied in a consistent manner, managed with a consistent interface, and supported by consistent service and support. Because of this
approach, the whole is greater than the sum of the parts.
The networking products described in this Buyer's Guide are compatible,
have consistent interfaces, are well tested, readily adjust as the network
grows, and provide one of the most flexible solutions in the industry.
Product Testing
Invisible to the user are Digital's very strict testing standards consisting of
a multi-month-sometimes multi-quarter-test sequence that places a
product in many types of networks- starting on a small level, then growing
in size, distance , and complexity.

....c0

~
~
.s
.....

For example, a terminal server is tested with all of Digital's products, in all
sizes of networks, and with varied data loads, thus assuring customers that
it meets their needs today and in the future. This is a key reason Digital's
networking products meet the customers' long-term management and
reliability goals.
Product Solutions That Adjust to the Scale of the Network
Because Digital's networking products perform within a consistent architecture, they scale well, that is, they adjust to communications requirements as the network grows and changes. This feature allows you to
implement a network as little or large as your enterprise requires-even
starting with a one- or two-computer terminal-server network. You can
scale up, adding the incremental cost of just one piece of equipment and be
assured that everything works properly. You don't have to add a halfmillion-dollar front-end processor to acquire the next terminal.

Matching your organization 's growth with networking capabilities is a
result of the product design and testing, and products that scale well. You
can systematically add incremental equipment and implement a long-term
strategy to build and expand your network, comfortable that all components will continue to work together.
Products that adapt well provide users with the flexibility to react quickly
and easily to changes in an organization . If there's a sudden change in your
strategic plan-your enterprise adds a department or division, or adds an
entire building-the network adjusts to that change immediately.

1.9

Building the Network

An Example of a Network Solution
Using Open Systems Interconnect

Digital's commitment to integrate Open Systems Interconnect (OSI) standards into the DECnet architecture provides a truly open architectureanother key benefit that protects an enterprise's investment and helps
long-term planning . Digital's customers can build an enterprisewide network that easily accommodates all OSI-compliant equipment-including
equipment from other vendors .
As an example of Digital 's enterprise network capabilities-which include
OSI-based solutions-consider the hypothetical Baker Company, which
uses the networking products depicted in the topology at the end of this
section.
Baker Company operations have:
• Centrally located headquarters in New York with another building located
across the river in New Jersey.
• Many remote sales and distribution sites across the United States.
• A European headquarters in London.
• A Pacific Basin headquarters in Sydney, Australia .
A critical factor for Baker Company's success is to share data files and
electronic mail among all sites .
Baker Company's London office has two non-Digital , OSI-based mainframes that communicate with departments in the New York headquarters
to exchange files and mail.

1.10

Building the Network

New York·to·London Connection

London
New York

......c
0

"ti

toS

I TransLAN I
Bridge

The data can be communicated through :
• The DECnet routers using leased lines.
• Another pair of DECnet routers using an X.25 link.
• The TransLAN bridge involving a high-speed digital network .
With this redundancy, Baker Company can choose the technology to best
handle the required data volume or speed.
Because 802.3/ Ethernet is part of the OSI network, the communications
logical link can connect with any OSI device on the 802.3/Ethernet local
area network (LAN ). Baker Company knows that any two pieces of OSIbased equipment can interoperate because they are based on the same
international standards, and they can readily communicate across the
802.3 / Ethernet LAN .

1.11

Building the Network

Baker Company transfers files from the London OSI mainframe to the VAX
system in New York using File Transfer, Access, and Management (FTAM)
software, based on the OSI reference model from the International Standards Organization (ISO ). FTAM provides for copying and deleting files ,
and displaying information about files between ISO FTAM-compliant systems in a multivendor network.
An X.400 mail message moves across a similar path utilizing the VAX
Message Router X.400 Gateway MRX , a layered application that provides a
path for any message transfer service conforming to the CCITT X.400
Recommendations. A Refer to Section 4 for OSI and FTAM products, and
to Section 5 for X.400 mail capabilities.

Local Area Networks (LAN)
In the New York headquarters (third floor ), Baker Company has many
terminals, for their sales administration department , that are used to share
files among VAX and non-Digital hosts located on the same LAN , and with
other LANs in the same building. Information is processed on the thirdfloor LAN, then transferred to engineering operations on the second floor,
which has a high-speed computing environment. The data files are also
exchanged with the first-floor LAN , which houses Baker Company 's finance
and administration department.
The engineering department on the second floor of the New York building
has many IBM PCs and VAXstations. A tremendously important function for
Baker Company is bringing the power and convenience of multivendor PCs
and workstations into the Digital environment to share the benefits of the
local area network. The clear benefit to the engineering department is the
access to the VAX processors-file services and other applications the VAX
processors provide-while using the installed PCs and workstations.

1.12

Building the Network

New York Loc•I Are• Networks

" 7km (4 .5ml)

New York

METROWAVE
3rd Floor

NonDigital
Host

Bridge

LAN
VAX

Bridge

I TransLAN I

2nd Floor

Bridge
LAN

IBM
Main-

Bridge

frame

c::

....0

<.I

:I
""O
0

-...
c::

I-"

1st Floor

ULTRIX

VMS

VAX

....
LAN
Bridge

Ethernet LAN
New York

Baker Company has optimized their IBM/ Digital connection by using their
Digital desktop workstations to run application programs that reside on the
IBM host , and by taking advantage of DECnet/SNA transport services.
For instance, VMS/ SNA software allows the remote engineering site in
Washington, D.C., which computes engineering data on a VAX, to communicate directly with the IBM mainframe on the second floor of the New
York building.
Baker Company also found they could have a network-to-network connection (Digital's DECnet software to IBM 's SNA environment) with highvolume output on existing equipment from the Philadelphia site using a
DECnet/SNA Gateway (DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST) .

1.13

Building the Network

New York-Washington·Philadelphi~ Connection

IBM
Mainframe

MicroVAX

1st Floor
VAX

Philadelphia

VMS/ SNA

ULTRIX
VAX

Washington D.C.

Ethernet LAN

New York

When volume and throughput warrants, Baker Company can upgrade the
DECnet/SNA communications link on the second floor of the New York
building to a DECnet/SNA Gateway for Channel Transport to handle more
users and more sessions at higher throughput . & Refer to Section 4 for
information on DECnet/SNA capabilities.
Baker Company found that departments such as engineering, enhanced
their operations and improved their productivity by using DECnet System
Services (DSS ), networking products that facilitate distributed processing
with consistent, transparent, network-wide services. From anywhere in the
network users can share and manage network resources as if these
resources were directly attached to the local system.
All the engineering department sites, for example, use engineering specifications updated nightly in a master file . Using DSS, once the master file is
updated , the local engineering sites have access to current engineering
specifications. DSS provides a seamless , transparent means of accessing
printing, file-access, and software-management services for centralized or
decentralized systems . & Refer to Section 5 for information on DECnet
System Services.

1.14

Building the Network

Extended LANs
Each floor of the New York building has its own LAN-a LAN Bridge
connects each LAN segment to the vertical backbone. These departmental
LANs connected by LAN Bridges, called Extended LANs, provide the same
data-throughput benefits as a LAN , plus extend the geographic reach of the
network .
By connecting the departmental LANs in the New York building to the
vertical backbone, Baker Company can direct their business and topological requirements throughout the network. The engineers on the second
floor have high data flow within their departmental LAN, as well as to
other LANs . The intelligence of the LAN Bridge allows it to act as a filter :
Information destined for the same department stays within that LAN, while
information destined for other departments is transmitted across the
Extended LAN .
New York Depsrtmentsl Networks

s 7km (4.Smi)

New York

WAVE
3rd Floor

.2
....u

METRO-

"ti
0

.......

Bridge

~
NonDigital
Host

..,.

LAN
VAX

Bridge

I TransLAN I

2nd Floor

Bridge
LAN

IBM
Main-

Bridge

frame

1s1 Floor
ULTRIX

VMS

VAX

LAN
Bridge

Ethernet LAN
New York

1.15

Building the Network

The filtering of data traffic allows Baker Company to have very high network performance on each floor and within each departmental LAN. The
company retains the high performance of a single LAN without impacting
the other LANs on the backbone.
Baker Company has a research campus in New Jersey. Two of the campus
buildings need to communicate with the same functions and benefits as a
single LAN within a single-management entity. These buildings are connected with fiber optic cable attached to LAN Bridges on either end. This
allows Baker Company to connect two buildings up to 3,000 meters apart
with the same high performance as any Ethernet LAN. The LAN Bridge
provides traffic isolation between the buildings and Baker Company benefits from fully functional 802.3/Ethernet networking.
New Jersey Buildings Connected via Fiber Optic LAN Bridges

New Jeraey Plant 2

New Jeraey Plant 1

The fiber optic link provides Baker Company's research department with
an environment impervious to lightning and electrical interference. Also,
fiber optic cable is very difficult to tap into, providing a secure
environment-something that is very critical to the research department.
To communicate research information between its New Jersey research
campus and New York headquarters, Baker Company had communications
options to connect the building sites via leased lines, fiber optics, or microwave link. Because Baker Company could not obtain the rights to lay fiber
optic cable under the river, and the volume over leased lines might be
cost-prohibitive, it selected a METROWAVE Bridge, which uses line-ofsight microwave transmission .

1.16

Building the Network

New York-to-New Jeney Connection

:s: 7km (4.5mi)

New York

3rd Floor

LAN
VAX

New Jeraey Plant 1

Bridge

2nd Floor

The METROWAVE Bridge provides a microwave connection in an E xtended
LAN environment, using the LAN Bridge 100 to deliver the same high
performance, filtering capability, and reliability as other LAN Bridge
products. • Refer to "METROWAVE Bridge," Section 2.

Wide Area Networks (WAN)
Baker Company found , as many businesses have, that long-term success
depends on wide area networking using the appropriate communication of
data, voice , graphics, and image.
Digital provides an integrated set of wide-area-network products, several
of which are depicted in the topology. One of the most frequently used
connections is via a public PSDN (Packet Switched Data Network ), which
sends packets of information over leased telephone lines .
For example, when moving information from London to New York with
OSI-based equipment, VAX P.S.I. (Packetnet System Interface) provides a
means of returning packets to London across leased lines. The DECnet
Router (DECrouter 2000 )-to-satellite (or leased -line) connections, or
TransLAN-Bridge-to-leased-line connection involves DECnet software and
provides different value in flexibility, technology, and cost. • Refe r to
Section 4 for inform ation on Packet net Communications.
When Baker Company expanded its business to the Far East, it established
the Sydney headquarters for sales administration, promotions, and distribution administration . Baker essentially decentralized a heavy desktop/office
automation environment to Sydney, and extended the use of computers to
the Sydney workforce .

1.17

Building the Network

Within the Sydney building, Baker Company installed the networking
computers using satellite equipment rooms (SERs) that adhere to the
DECconnect radial-wiring strategy. Baker Company's remote sales offices in
the Far East are connected to Sydney headquarters via the MUXserver
remote terminal server. The MUXserver connects to modems over leased
lines , then directly to the Sydney Ethernet LAN for the most cost-effective
connection to the terminal -only remote offices .
Sydney Bui/Jia1 anJ Remote Of6ce Connected to ~ Yori via X.1J Lialc

DESTA

MicroVAX

1st Floor

DESTA

MicroVAX
PC

Satellite
Equipment
Room

Link to New York

Sydney

The Ethernet LAN in the Sydney building communicates with New York
headquarters via an X.25 Gateway (X25router 2000) connected through
the Packet Switched Data Network (PSDN) . The X25router 2000 provides
the optimum bandwidth-efficient solution with high-speed data communications based on the required data flow and volume .
Digital provides a comprehensive product set that meets the needs of any
enterprise, in any environment, using compatible hardware, software, and
service products that have been tested to perform together within a consistent architecture, a consistent service strategy, and a consistent management interface.

1.18

Building the Network

Network Management

Digital provides DECnet software with network self-management capabilities , as well as network management tools that perform network monitoring
and complex management tasks . The combination of the inherent capabilities of DECnet software and the network management applications provide
a very high level of up-time and network availability. & Refer to Section 6
for information on Network Management Products and Services.

....c:0

1
ioS

.,..

1.19

Building the Nctwork-Di.i:iwJ:, I:i11crpri.,· Nct11orki11.i: C:1p:1bili1h·,

New Jersey Plant 2

Printer

New Jersey Plant 1

MicroVAX

Perth

Philadelphia

VA X

VMSISNA
Washington O.C.

DE STA

MicroVAX
2nd Floor

1st Floor

MicroVAX
PC

Satellite
Equipment
Room

Link to New York

Sydney

London

s 7km (4 .5mi)

New York
METRO·
WAVE

3rd Floor

Bridge

LAN

Non·
Digital
Host

VAX

Bridge

2nd Floor

LAN

IBM
Mainframe

1st Floor

Bridge

ULTRIX

VMS

VAX

LAN

Ethernet LAN

New York

Public Network

Bridge

Product Information

lnternpe1·ability: Communications Software

Distributed Applications

Section 2

Connectivity: 802.3/
Ethernet Local Area
Networks

This section contains the
following topics ...

Overviews: 802.3/Ethernet, DECconnect, Standard Network Packages

802.3/Ethernet Applications

Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Products

ThinWire 802.3/Ethernet Products

Unshielded Twisted-pair 802.3/Ethernet Products

DECconnect Products

Broadband 802.3/Ethernet Products

802.3/Ethernet Communication Controllers

Extended Local Area Network Products

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

Standard Network Packages

Section 2

802.3/Ethernet Overview

Connectivity: 802.3/
Ethernet Local Area
Networks

A local area network (LAN) is a privately owned data communications
system that offers high-speed communications channels optimized for
connecting information-processing equipment. A LAN usually serves a
section of a building, an entire building, or a cluster of buildings.
Local area networks provide a fast , efficient means of exchanging information. They allow many varieties of information processing equipment to be
easily connected and they provide resource sharing, which allows users to
share expensive peripheral devices and databases . Local area networks
expand the possibilities for global resource sharing by offering standards
for communication between equipment of different vendors and between
local and remote networks .
Digital uses the IEEE 802.3/Ethernet standard for its local area network .
IEEE 802.3/Ethernet networks provide rapid access to data with a high
data-transfer rate that makes information and resource sharing practical.
IEEE 802.3/Ethernet LANs can be implemented on baseband (coaxial) or
broadband (CATV) cable : Baseband LANs replace the numerous connecting
cables in traditional data networks with a single network cable; broadband
LANs offer customers the ability to put 802.3/Ethernet on the same network wiring system with video, voice , and other data communications.
Baseband and broadband 802.3/Ethernet LANs represent long-term savings in lower wiring costs and reduction of system downtime when
reconfiguring or replacing equipment. Corporations are able to optimize
their networks easily because additional capability can be added without
disturbing network operation .

IEEE 802.3 Compliance

All Digital second-generation LAN products are designed to comply with
the IEEE 802 .3 specification . In addition , Digital LAN products are backward compatible with first-generation Ethernet version 2.0 products. This
ensures connectivity between products and a smooth transition to 802 .3based LANs . The IEEE 802.3 standard has been adopted by the International Standards Organization (ISO), defining layers one and the MAC layer
portion of layer two. Digital is committed to international standards, allowing customers the benefit of multivendor networking and flexibility in
choosing networking products .

802.3/Ethernet Channel Access

The technique used to access the baseband or broadband 802.3/Ethernet
channel is called Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection
(CSMA/CD ). CSMA/CD can be defined as follows :
• Carrier Sense (CS ) -A device listens for a clear channel before transmitting. If the channel is in use (carrier sensed), the device delays transmiss10n.
• Multiple Access (MA ) -Many devices can be connected to one common
wire, and when the channel is clear, all devices have equal access to it.
• Collision Detection (CD)- Two or more devices may sense a clear channel
and simultaneously try to transmit. This results in data collision. The
channel senses the collision condition, stops the transmission, and automatically retransmits the data after waiting a randomly selected amount of
time.

..:
u

E
u

..c:

@
~

f'i

0
00

....>.

:E....
u

c
0

2.1

802.3/Ethernet Overview

Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Cabling

Digital supports 802.3/Ethernet transmissions over three types of baseband
cables:
• Standard, recommended for communications between satellite equipment
rooms and floors of a building. This cable is sometimes called the
"backbone" cable.
• ThinWire, recommended for communications between workstations, personal computers, and low-end systems in local work areas on a floor
• Unshielded twisted-pair, recommended for those customers who have
already installed telephone-type twisted-pair cabling, and who want to
minimize the cost and network disruption of installing new network cable
Standard Baseband 802.J/Ethernet Cabling
Using standard baseband cabling, an 802 .3/Ethernet communications
controller in a network system connects to a transceiver using a specialized.
four-shielded-twisted-pair wire transceiver cable. The transceiver is
clamped onto the standard baseband cable without cutting the cable or
interrupting data transmissions .

A maximum of 100 transceivers can be used on a standard 802 .3/Ethernet
cable segment. A single cable segment can be up to 500 meters ( 1,640 feet)
long. Multiple cable segments can be linked together with barrel connectors. Multiple segments of transceiver cable can be linked together by
slide-latch connectors on the ends of standard transceiver cable.
A repeater or bridge connects segments of standard baseband 802.3/
Ethernet cable, creating a larger local area network.
Baseband Ethernet Cabling Layout

Terminator

Transceiver

Barrel Connector

Standard Ethernet Cable

DEB NA

Host

Terminator

Transceiver

Repeater

Barrel Connector

Standard Ethernet Cable
DELOA

Host

NBG-120-00

2.2

802.3/Ethernet Overview

ThinWire Baseband 802.J/ Ethernet Cabling
ThinWire 802 .3/Ethernet cabling, an inexpensive industry-standard coaxial cable with BNC connectors, enables the configuration of low-cost local
area networks in the work area. ThinWire coaxial cable delivers 10 Mb/s
802.3/Ethernet performance, like standard baseband coaxial cable, and is
specifically designed for horizontal wiring of a work area because of its
ease of installation and lower cost. This provides full 10 Mb/s speed to the
desktop for PCs and other intelligent workstations .
ThiaWire Cabling L•yout

M icroVAX
II

MicroVAX

2000

NBG-12 1-00

Unshielded Twisted-pair Baseband Cabling
Unshielded twisted-pair cabling brings full 802.3/ Ethernet capability to
the desktop using unshielded twisted-pair adapters . These adapters, one
located in the office and the other located in the satellite equipment room
(wiring closet), convert ThinWire communications to unshielded twisted pair communications. The adapters supply all required electrical and physical translation from active ThinWire devices such as DEMPRs and
VAXmates, providing a complete segment between the local area network
and the office device via twisted-pair cabling. Unshielded twisted-pair
802.3/Ethernet adapters complement existing 802.3 / Ethernet media
options, and can be used with many leading structured cabling systems .

...
s
II>

II>

..c:

""~

E-

:e...
u

II>

c
c
Q

2.3

802.3/Ethernet Overview

Unshielded Twisted-pair Cabling Layout

Transceiver
Cable

MicroVAX

2000

Thin Wire

ThinWire
•

Unshielded
] Twisted· Pair
Office
Adapter

NBG-122-01

Broadband 802.3/Ethernet Cabling

Broadband 802 .3/Ethernet offers customers the ability to put 802.3/
Ethernet on the same network wiring system with video, voice, and other
data communications. It is most feasible for customers who must distribute
multiple information services to a large user population over an extensive
local area .
With broadband cabling, the 802.3/Ethernet communications controller in
the node connects to the broadband transceiver using the same fourtwisted-pair wire transceiver cable as standard baseband . In turn, the
broadband transceiver is connected to a tap in the broadband network
cable via a broadband coaxial drop cable.
Design, installation, and maintenance of broadband cable networks are
available as part of Digital Network Services. (For more information on
broadband network services, refer to Section 6 or contact the local D igital
sales or field service representative. )

2.4

802.3/Ethernet Overview

Broadband 802.J/ Ethernet Cabling Layout

Broadband Tap

Broadband Terminator Cable
Broadband
Frequency
Translator

.... Broadband Drop Cable

[_..:J

Broadban d Transceiver

.... Transceiver Cable

/4 DEBNA
Host

7
NBG-123-00

IEEE 802.3/Ethernet
Communications Controllers

Communications controllers implemen t the Ethernet or IEEE 802 .3 data
link layer functions and CSMA/ CD protocol to make electrical connections
between 802.3/Ethernet systems. An 802.3/Ethernet communications
controller must be installed in systems that connect to an 802.3/Ethernet
local area network .

Servers

A server is any network node that provides a resource that can be shared
by other nodes on the network . (A "node" is an y intelligen t device that can
send and receive messages over the network .) Many different types of
servers are available : terminal servers , compute servers, disk servers,
application servers, router servers, gateway servers, and print servers . A
computer in a LAN that offers these types Of services , whether or not the
node is dedicated to that function, may be viewed as providing server
fu nctions. The following figure illustrates the various types of servers for
baseba nd or broadband networks.

2.5

802.3/Ethernet Overview

Generic LAN Servers

···~

NBG-124-00

A node providing server functions can run other applications if its
nonprocessing services do not justify total dedication. By adding servers to
a network, other nodes on the network can be dedicated to applications
processmg.
Digital has a substantial amount of software available that can be used to
provide server functions in the network. Print server, file server, terminal
server, and database server capabilities are available by using existing
Digital software on general-purpose computers.
Users can build servers by providing their own application software. For
example, a computer node providing typesetting services might be viewed
as an application server. A VAX 8700 that is connected to a local area
network and is running the VMS operating system might be viewed as a
computer server, while a VAX 8250 with a laser printer might be viewed as
a print server. The following table illustrates server software alternatives .

2.6

802.3/Ethernet Overview

Server Softwtlre Alternatives
General Purpose Servers
Print Server/File Server (for example, VMS Host)
Database Access (for example, DATATRIEVE Host)
Packaged/Special Purpose Servers
Terminal Server
Router
Gateway
Application Server
User developed

IEEE 802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers
IEEE 802.3/Ethernet communications servers are dedicated, special purpose units that provide resource sharing across many host systems within a
local area network (LAN) . Three types of communications servers are
available for use on a baseband or broadband 802 .3/Ethernet local area
network: Terminal Servers , Router Servers, and Gateways.
The following figure illustrates the use of communications servers on a
local area network.

..:u
u

2.7

B11seb11nd/Bro11db11nd 802.J/Ethernet LAN Configur11tion with Communic11tions Servers

Modem

Host

Terminator

Standard Baseband Cable

MicroVA X

Host

VMS/SNA
Broadband
Transceiver

CJ
Broadband Cable
NBG-125-01

Extended Local Area Networks

The LAN Bridge 100 connects network segments, either standard baseba nd
or broadband, to create an extended LAN. The standard 802.3/Ethernet
distance limit is 2,800 meters between any two nodes: An extended LAN
lengthens this distance without degrading the 802.3/Ethernet 10 Mb/s
throughput. An extended LAN may consist of up to 8,000 nodes and, using
fiber optic and microwave bridges, span distances of up to 35,700 meters .
T he bridge dynamically manages data traffic flow between segments, selectively forwarding packets to keep local traffic local and to reduce traffic
over the entire network. Baseband-to-baseband, broadband-to-broadband,
and baseband -to-broadband network configurations are possible using the
bridge as a link .

2.8

802.3/Ethernet Overview

The following figure illustrates an extended LAN configuration using the
LAN Bridge 100.
Baseband/Broadband 802.J/Ethernet LAN Configuration with LAN Bridge

[J
Terminator

,/:
Bridge
LI".

~>-er_m_in_a_io_r

LI J

Broadband

_____

BroadOOnd C•blo

VAX

MicroVAX

l J
L-

Broadband
Frequency
Translator

---i~ -~·~ ~ ~
~°"""""""'

lj
1

~
Standard Baseband Cable

c
0

u
~

-s
u

..c
NBG·126·01

~
ff'\
f'i

;,:,

....
....·s:....
CJ

c
c
0

2.9

802.3/Ethernet Overview

802.3/Ethernet Advantages

Digital's range of 802.3/Ethernet products has been developed to solve a
number of problems typically encountered in business and industry.
• Simplified network design-802.3/Ethernet architecture and design rules
are streamlined and uncomplicated because the cable, transceivers, and
controllers meet the IEEE 802.3 and/or Ethernet specifications . (For specific design rules , refer to "802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines" in
Appendix A. )
• Simplified installation-802 .3/Ethernet can be brought up one node at a
time. A newly installed node can communicate immediately with all other
active nodes on the network .
• Reduced wiring-A single network cable in baseband 802.3/Ethernet
replaces the many connecting cables in traditional data networks . And by
implementing 802.3/Ethernet on broadband with other video , data and
voice channels, the number of wiring systems can be significantly reduced.
• Flexibility for future growth-Additional devices and cable segments can
be connected without shutting down the network.
• Reliability:
- The absence of master/slave node relationships and the need for routing
nodes eliminates most single points of failure .
- Extensive diagnostics minimize the time needed to locate and to repair a
failure.
- The 802.3/Ethernet transceiver is designed with triple redundant circuitry to prevent a single failure from disabling the network.
- Standard baseband 802.3/Ethernet is very reliable due to its heavy construction, adherence to rigid standards on concentricity, and passive
nature.
- Broadband 802.3/Ethernet transceivers are designed with redundant
circuitry to prevent a single failure from disabling the network .
•High-speed communications-802 .3/Ethernet provides high-speed (10
Mb/s) links between all network nodes.
• Shared databases- The 802.3/Ethernet network coupled with DECnet
software provides rapid access to large amounts of data in remote locations. Files and databases can be shared .
• Shared resources-802.3 / Ethernet allows special purpose peripherals such
as high-speed printers, very large disks , and high-resolution graphics
packages to be shared by multiple users.
·Connection of diverse equipment-Digital Network Architecture (DNA)
allows the exchange of data , files , commands, and diagnostic information
among a large variety and range of Digital products. In addition , it is
possible to connect to other vendor's equipment at the 802.3/Ethernet
data-link level or through X.25 and SNA Gateways .

2.10

The DECconnect communications system encompasses the full family of
Digital networking products from electronics to cabling and connections.
DECconnect provides access to corporate computer networks , telephone
communications, and a video network. The modular nature of DECconnect
allows mixing and matching components to meet user requirements .
DECconnect offers a simple, cost-effective cabling system that brings both
high-performance baseband 802.3/Ethernet and enhanced EIA-423-A
terminal connection (compatible with EIA-232) to offices and work areas.
Through separate, industry-standard cabling runs that radiate from a
centralized equipment/ wiring area (called the satellite equipment room ) to
an integrated faceplate in the work area, DECconnect cabling allows a
customer to connect terminals, PCs, and workstations to an 802.3/Ethernet
network. And with standard baseband cable as a backbone, users have
access to data center and mainframe resources throughout a company.
DECconnect combines separate communications technologies into one
cohesive networking solution :
• ThinWire cable for 10 Mb/s 802.3/Ethernet communications to PCs, workstations, and departmental systems.
·Unshielded twisted-pair cable for terminal communications up to 19.2 Kb/s
or for 10 Mb/s 802.3/ Ethernet communications .
• Unshielded twisted-pair cable for telephone connections.
• Standard broadband cable for video connections.
Separate cables are used for low-speed data, high-speed data , telephone
and, if desired, video communications, allowing implementation and configuration flexibility. These cables follow standard-industry wiring patterns
and, except for video cabling, use radial topology from a central satellite
equipment room to a faceplate in the local work area. (The voice communications feature of the DECconnect communications system does not apply
in all European countries .)
Cables are pulled in a radial topology between two easily accessible
points : the faceplate located in the work area/office and the wiring closet,
also called the "satellite equipment room" (SER) . A radial topology combines maximum office space coverage with ease of network management
and maintenance . The following figure illustrates the DECconnect radial
topology.

...u
u

c
0
u

~...
u

E
u

..c

~
fl'\
N

0
00

......~
·:;:
u

c
c
0

2.11

DECconnect Overview

DECconnect Rsdisl Topology
TRANSCEIVER
CABLE

SATELLITE
EQUIPMENT ROOM

OFFICE CLUSTER

"""

STANDARD
ETHERNET CABLE
(BACKBONE)

FACEPLATE

The single connection point for all network services in the office or work
area is the DECconnect faceplate. Two types of faceplates are available , one
for mounting flush to a standard electrical box and one for mounting on
modular furniture . The user's terminal, personal computer or workstation,
telephone , and video equipment plug into the four outlets on the faceplate.
The satellite equipment room (SER) rack can service as many as 128 users
encompassing up to 15,000 to 20,000 square feet of floor space. The SER
serves two functions:
• It serves as a central cross-connection point for all radial office wiring,
such as unshielded twisted-pair cabling for terminals, ThinWire cable for
802.3/Ethernet services to personal computer and office workstations, and
when appropriate, telephones.
• It provides mounting space for all the active network hardware components , such as ThinWire multiport repeaters , terminal servers, and bridges.
DECconnect Features
• Multifunction , modular DECconnect faceplate

·Satellite equipment room-cabinet racks and cable patching/cross-connect
components
• ThinWire coaxial cabling (802.3/Ethernet-compliant)
• DEC423 (EIA-423-A) signaling with EOS/ESD protection and EIA-232-D
compatibility
• Serial terminal/printer connections
• 802 .3/Ethernet support
• DECsite planning and installation

2.12

DECconnect Overview

ThinWire 802.3/Ethernet Cabling

ThinWire 802 .3/Ethernet cabling, an inexpensive, industry-standard coaxial cable with BNC connectors, enables the configuration of low-cost local
area networks in the work area. ThinWire cable delivers 10 Mb/s 802.3/
Ethernet performance, like standard baseband cable, and is specifically
designed for horizontal wiring of a work area because of its ease of installation and lower cost.

In the DECconnect communications system, ThinWire cable runs from a
ThinWire 802.3/Ethernet repeater in a satellite equipment room to
DECconnect faceplates in a local work area. From the faceplates , desktop
systems such as personal computers, workstations , and low-end systems are
connected. Non-ThinWire (A.U.I. type) devices are connected to ThinWire
cable using the ThinWire Ethernet Station Adapter (DESTA). Disk and
print servers can also be connected to ThinWire cable.
Unshielded Twisted-pair Cabling

Unshielded twisted-pair cabling brings full 802.3/Ethernet capability to
the de~ktop using unshielded twisted-pair adapters. These adapters, one
located in the office and the other in the satellite equipment room , convert
from ThinWire communications to unshielded twisted -pair communications. The adapter products supply all required electrical and physical
translation from active ThinWire devices such as DEMPRs and VAXmates,
providing a complete segment between the 802 .3/Ethernet network and
the office device via twisted-pair cabling . Unshielded twisted-pair 802.3/
Ethernet adapters complement existing media options, and can be used
with many leading structured cabling systems.

In the DECconnect communications system , a segment of unshielded
twisted-pair wiring runs from an unshielded twisted -pair adapter in the
SER to a DECconnect faceplate in the local work area . (This faceplate
connection is otherwise used to connect the user's terminal.)
DEC423 Signaling

DEC423 signaling is based on the EIA-423-A standard for low-speed terminal connection. DEC423 provides all the improved signaling benefits of
EIA-423-A connection and is compatible with EIA -232 .
DEC423 was chosen as the signaling standard because of its improved
performance over the EIA-232 standard , and its backwards compatibility
with existing EIA-232-D equipment. By following the EIA-423-A standard,
DEC423 supports terminal-to-CPU or terminal server-to-terminal distances
of 1,000 feet, compared to the EIA-232-D standard of 50 feet . It is fully
compatible with all existing EIA-232 installations, making major equipment
changes unnecessary. Digital provides necessary mechanical adapters that
enable EIA -232-D (25-pin) terminals to plug into DEC423 (six-pin) communications controllers.

II.I

c
c

2.13

DECconnect Overview

DEC423 has the following features:
• Industry standard EIA-423-A signaling benefits, including CPU-to-terminal
distances of up to 1,000 feet at 38.4 Kb/s
• Complete electrical compatibility with EIA-232-D
• Smaller six-pin connector, which allows for increased line density at the
back of the CPU and remote connection through the use of cable concentrators
• Simplified cabling requirements with all cables having male connectors on
both ends and female connectors being designed into all new DEC423
(EIA-423-A) devices
• Improved cabling capabilities through the use of unshielded cables while
still meeting full FCC certification
Digital asynchronous devices with DEC423 signaling have the enhancement
of integral electrical overstress/ electrostatic discharge (EOS/ESD) protection. This improves equipment reliability and availability by protecting it
from EOS damage c;aused by static discharge, lightning, or ac power surges,
while still being 100 percent compliant with the EIA-423-A standard.
Terminal Connections

The DECconnect communications system allows low-speed terminal users
to migrate from EIA-232-D to DEC423 (EIA-423-A) signaling, cables, connectors, and office products. Digital offers the adapters, connectors, and
cables to migrate EIA-232-D devices to DEC423.
These migration products allow customers to install the DECconnect communications system without having to replace most existing cabling or
communications equipment. Digital supports the connection of new cabling
to old products, new cabling to new products, and old cabling to new
products.
Digital has also developed a standard connection cable and modified modular plug that can be used to connect terminals to the DECconnect faceplates. The standard cable is the Digital office cable (BC 16E), an
unshielded six-conductor flat cable that is flexible and easy to coil and
terminate. The BC 16E cable is designed primarily for office applications
where flexibility, simplicity, and aesthetics are important.
All Digital second-generation Ethernet products support the IEEE 802.3
LAN standard . Digital is committed to international standards so that
customers can enjoy the benefits of multivendor networking and have
flexibility in the choice of equipment for their companies.

DECsite Planning and Installation

Digital offers a complete line of planning and installation services for the
DECconnect cabling system under the DECsite program. Refer to "Related
Network Services" in Section 6 for more information.

2.14

lntrnduction to Standard Network Packages

Standard Network Packages make it easier for customers to configure and
order network products because they include the major communications
products required to implement specific network solutions. This modular
approach to network design and ordering can be effectively used in networking applications ranging from small standalone work groups to large
multiple-site installations.
Standard Network Packages work with existing Digital equipment in current system installations. All Digital computer systems having DECnet
capability can be used with the Standard Network Packages.
The packages are organized into four categories based on typical user
requirements. Three of the categories are based on geographic considerations; the fourth provides the capability to integrate another vendor's
network into the Digital network.
The four categories of Standard Network Packages are
• Local Area Work Group Interconnection, which provides connectivity
among users who are typically involved in related activities and are located
on the same floor.
• Extended Local Area Interconnection, which links individuals, groups, or
departments in geographically distinct work areas that are relatively close
to each other.
• Wide Area Interconnection , which provides a network link between remote
sites.
• Multivendor Interconnection, which allows information to be transferred
between a Digital network and the network of another vendor.
More information about Standard Network Packages is located at the end
of this section.

.:
u
u

c
c

0
u

~
....u

u
..c

""~
00

....;.:.
....u

:e
u

c
c
0

2.15

l~q1ical Baseband 802.3 / I:thcrnct Applications

Office Applications

The following figure depicts a business office in which terminals are available for accounting, order taking, order processing, inventory control, word
processing, and so on. Two supervisory stations have access to all data. A
manager with a VAXmate can monitor accounts , display graphic data (pie
charts, bar graphs, and so on), and issue instructions to any department.
The VAXmate is connected to a segment of ThinWire cable, which allows
up to 29 additional devices to be added as the company grows .
Standard 802.3/Ethernet baseband cable extends from the office area to
other major sources of information, including shipping, receiving, inventory, and the shop floor. Work can be monitored from the receipt of parts,
through shipp ing, to receipt of payment. A bank of modems attached to a
terminal server permits remote offices or sales representatives with small
portable terminals to call in orders or check a particular account at any
time.
Baseband 802.J/Ethernet Office Application

Video Display
Terminals

Supervisor's
Terminals

~-···

VAX

Standard Ethernet Cable
i-tl
Transceiver

erminator
Transceiver
Cable

~--,.. ;"'"l : ___/
~

\
8
Segments

MicroVAX

2000
./

.
e

Manager

VAX

hinWire

~
~
NBG- 128·01

2.16

Typical Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Applications

The following figure illustrates a typical application in a factory, which
controls automatic assembly/test devices. Data entry stations provide timely
information on the entire manufacturing process. Exchange of data between
the manufacturing site and the rest of the corporation is handled through a
router server.

Factory Applications

Baseband 802.J/Etbernet Factory Application

To Engineering
Manufacturing
Engineering

To Corporate
Accounting
To Corporate
Management
To Other Sites

VAX

Transceiver

Standard Ethernet Cable
Managers

Final Assembly
and Test

Auto
Testing

VAX

IVAX

Transceiver
Terminator

Testing

Receiving

Stock

IPDP-11

IVAX

Auto
Assembly

Auto
Testing

Kitting

Parts Inventory
NBG-129-01

2.17

Typical Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Applications

The 802 .3/Ethernet 10 Mb/s throughput handles everything from word
processing to bit-map graphics. A fully integrated 802.3/Ethernet design/
manufacturing network permits smooth integration of design , automated
manufacturing inventory, and business functions.

CAD/CAM Applications

The following figure depicts an engineering department using 802.3/
Ethernet to connect a number of workstations to CAD/CAM hosts. The
workstations are connected to a segment of ThinWire cable, which provides
cost-effective, high-speed communications. As the department grows, over
200 stations can be added without changing this basic configuration. A
terminal server is used for the low-speed terminal communications. Note
that a bridge isolates local engineering traffic from local administrative
traffic.
BssebsnJ 802.J/ Ethernet CAD/CAM Application

To Other
Corporate

VAXstation

2000

CAD/ CAM

Sites

..,!•.
ThinWire

;!&:;

• ••/

VAX

Transceiver
Cable
Terminator

Transceiver

Standard Ethernet Cable

Transceiver

PDP-11

MicroVAX

Auto
Test
Equipment

Auto
Assembly
Equipment

Bridge

CAD/CAM
Station

To Administrative Offices

NBG-130-01

2.18

Typical Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Applications

Hospital Applications

Connection of testing and laboratory computers to a hospital's central
computer and to a number of remote monitoring stations requires a highspeed network. With the 802.3/Ethernet high data-transfer rate, even
remote access to full-color bit-maps, such as CAT scans, is practical.
Hospital accounting and legal departments use automated patient records
to perform their jobs. The local area network provides a fast, accurate
means of accessing information critical to billing patient accounts and
storing the details of patient treatment procedures .
The following figure depicts an 802.3/Ethernet network on which critical
data is available at the nurses' station and in the offices of various department heads. The system can provide detailed medical information on any
given patient, as well as comparisons to similar cases and to the accepted
norms. Note that VAXmates on the operating room segment are connected
to ThinWire cable, which provides configuration flexibility.
The figure also shows a terminal server with modems and leased phone
lines connecting the offices of resident doctors. A physician can monitor
test results or the current conditions of patients from the office. Note that a
bridge isolates local traffic on this segment from local traffic on the other
two segments.

.W-

II>

....II>
E
II>

..c

""'0

....;.:,
....u

:e
II>

c
c
0

2.19

Typical Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Applications

Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Hospital Application

Business Office
Admissions

---~AX
-

mate

~ESPR

VAX

I.;"

--~~~~~~~--------< --,!--~~~~~~~~~,-1

Transceiver

Terminator

Standard Ethernet Cable

Laboratories
Legal Department

~~
~~
Standard Ethernet Cable

Bridge

PDP-11

VAX

~
~
Nurses' Station

~ ~· ... ~
~ bJ~

Nurses' Station

~ ~ --e- -~
bJ···~
~

Standard Ethernet Cable

I
I

--,,..,-- l

Transceiver

Transceiver
Cable

_J-----··

ThinWire

Segments

~
VAX-

mate

Operating
Room

Doctors' Offices
NBG-131 -01

2.20

Typical Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Applications

Laboratory Applications

Within a laboratory environment, monitoring test conditions and results is
extremely important. By networking a test control computer to a computer
acting as a monitoring station and to a central database on another computer, current test conditions can be displayed along with previous or
standard conditions . Deviations from the desired conditions become apparent and can be corrected before continuing with the test . Each MicroVAX
computer is connected to a single segment of ThinWire cable, which provides a cost-effective link to the high-speed devices.
The following figure illustrates how various laboratory computers and other
resources are typically connected by an 802.3/Ethernet local area network.
Baseband 802.J/Ethernet Laboratory Application

MicroVAX

3600

Segments
ThinWire

Micro
PDP-11

Transceiver
Cable

Transceiver

~~~~~~~c::==i~~~~-~

r~~~~~~~~~--.

Standard Baseband Cable

Data Collection Equipment
_l

MicroVAX
II

Data
Reduction

VAX

~
(j

Terminator

c:
c:
0

Transceiver

VAX

~ ...
Scientists' Offices

Report
Generation

NBG-132-01

2.21

Typical Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Applications

University Applications

The application of computers in a university system can cover everything
from maintaining student accounts and academic records to using computers as classroom tools.
The following figure illustrates an 802.3 / Ethernet application used at a
university. Note that bridges isolate local traffic throughout the university.
Fiber optic cable is recommended for connecting detached buildings. The
METROWAVE Bridge (microwave-based ) is used as an alternative for physi-

cal or economic reasons .
Bssebsnd 801.J/Ethernet University Application
Dormitory

Uberal Arts

c::::::::J .
c::::::::J Bridge

c::::::::J
c::::::::J

Fiber Optic Cable

c::::::::J
c::::::::J

Administration

Fiber Optic Cable

NBG-153-00

2.22

Typical Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Applications

Typical Broadband 802.3/Ethernet
Applications

Along with the 802 .3/Ethernet channel, the broadband network can be
used to distribute other data services, as well as voice and video communications. The shared cable capability is often a cost-effective networking
solution for universities , hospitals, manufacturing complexes, research
parks, and other organizations with large, dispersed user populations.
•Corporate Offices-Large corporations can distribute services such as
corporate teleconferencing, security monitoring, and employee video training along with an 802.3/Ethernet channel.onto a broadband LAN. Among
a wide variety of applications, energy management and building-access
control can use the 802.3/Ethernet channel. Wiring systems in a skyscraper or plant complex can be kept to a minimum, and changes to the
organization can easily be accommodated.
•Plant Environment-Industries, such as auto or aviation manufacturing,
can use the broadband network to monitor a variety of data collection
stations. The 802 .3/Ethernet channel can be used for transmitting reports,
energy management, and inventory distribution control, among a variety of
other tasks . On the factory floor, broadband 802.3 / Ethernet can coexist
with MAP .
•University Campus-Broadband can be ideal for university use because it
can support extensive communications needs. A single medium that can
transmit television, data communication, and security is invaluable to an
educational community. The broadband 802.3/Ethernet channel can provide access to important educational tools and a variety of databases while
sharing the cable with applications such as video training seminars. In
addition, by wiring classrooms and dormitories with broadband cable,
universities can also connect the growing number of personal computers
via the 802 .3/ Ethernet channel.
•Hospitals-Broadband networks are also invaluable to hospital communities. They allow medical staffs to maintain constant watch over patients via
channels from a central location, while also having access to patient
records and laboratory results on the 802.3/Ethernet channel. Meanwhile,
patients can be viewing their favorite programs on another channel on the
broadband LAN . For a hospital to have all of these functions , all it requires
is one broadband cable.

2.23

Baseband 802.3/Ethcrnct Products

The incorporation of 802.3/Ethernet local area network technology
into DECnet Phase IV demonstrates Digital's commitment to providing
a complete sef of products to address local area networking needs. 802.3/
Ethernet networks have been developed specifically for the kinds of communications and resource sharing that take place in a local work
environment .
Digital's local area network (LAN ) connects Ethernet or IEEE 802 .3compatible devices in a small geographic area by way of high-speed standard , ThinWire, or unshielded twisted-pair cable . Every device attached to
the cable has access to all network resources . The network becomes the
system .
Hardware products combine to create a physical channel over which
the DECnet and 802 .3/Ethernet protocols are implemented. Baseband
802.3/Ethernet products currently available include ThinWire products,
unshielded twisted -pair products, standard baseband cable, transceiver
cable, connectors , terminators, Etherjack, the Local Network Interconnect
(DELNI) , transceivers, repeaters, communications controllers, LAN bridge
products, and communications servers .

2.24

Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Products

Bssebsncl 802.J/Ethernet Products

MicroVAX

Transceiver

MicroVAX

VAX

Terminator

Standard Ethernet Cable

MicroPDP-11

Bridge

Terminator

Standard Ethernet Cable

Bridge

VAX

Standard Ethernet Cable
Terminator

DELNI

VAX

.:(.I
QI

c:
c:
VAX

PDP-11

(.I

E
QI

..:::

""~

£.

( .I

c:
c:
0

u
NBG-134-01

(II

2.25

Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Products

Standard Baseband 802.3/Ethernet
Cable

Standard baseband 802.3/Ethernet cable is the main transmission medium
of a baseband network. The cable is available in four lengths (sections),
which can be joined using barrel connectors to create segments up to 500
meters (1,640 feet) long. Local area networks can be extended beyond 500
meters by adding repeaters. Refer to "802.3/Ethernet Configuration
Guidelines" in Appendix A for more detailed information.
Features
• Standard baseband 802.3/Ethernet cable segments are premarked for
transceiver placement at 2.5-meter (8.2-foot) intervals, providing easy
installation.

• Plenum-rated coaxial cable is approved by the Underwriters' Laboratory
(UL) for safe use in environmental air spaces without a conduit.
• PVC-insulated coaxial cable offers a low-cost alternative to plenum-rated
coaxial cable. PVC-insulated coaxial cable can be used in an open space,
such as an office, laboratory, or manufacturing facility. PVC-insulated coaxial cable is not acceptable for use in environmental airspace that is used for
return airflow because it produces toxic fumes if it burns.
• High immunity to electrical noise allows the coaxial cable to be used in a
variety of environments.
• Pre-installed connectors on coaxial cable ends make terminators and barrel
connectors easy to install.
Standard Baseband Cable Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Plenum-rated Coaxial Cable:

23.4 rn (76.8 ft) long
70.2 m (230.3 ft) long
117.0 rn (383.9 ft) long
500.0 rn (1640.5 ft) long

BNE2A-MA
BNE2A-MB
BNE2A-MC
BNE2A-ME

PVC Coaxial Cable:

23.4 rn (76.8 ft) long
70.2 m (230.3 ft) long
117.0 m (383.9 ft) long
500.0 m (1640.5 ft) long

2.26

BNE2B-MA
BNE2B-MB
BNE2B-MC
BNE2B-ME

Baseband 802 .3/Ethernet Products

Fiber Optic Cable

Digital recommends the use of 62.51125 micron optical fiber for connecting
all its fiber optic network products . This optical-fiber type is approved by
the ANSI X3T9 .5 committee as the recommended fiber type for FDDI
applications . In addition , the EIA TR-41.8 .1 committee is seriously considering this optical-fiber type for its building wiring standard .
The optical fiber specified for use in all cable constructions must be 62.5
micron core and 125 micron cladding, dual-window, graded-index profile,
multimode glass-on-glass construction (EIA Class la ).
Optical Characteristics
Attenuation

2.8 to 3.5 dB/ Km at 850 nm
0.8 to 1.5 dB/Km at 1300 nm

Bandwidth

Greater than 160 Mhz-Km at 850 n m
Greater than 500 Mh z-Km at 1300 nm

Numeric
Aperture

0.275 +/-0.015 at 850 nm

Recommended
Connector Type

ST-style

T he ST-style connector, approved for FDDI applications, is generally a
higher performing connector type than the traditional SMA-style. ST-toSMA patch cable assembly is required when connecti ng current fiber optic
LAN Bridges (DEBET) and fiber optic repeaters (DEREP ) to ST-based
cableplants. Future Digital fiber optic network products will utilize an
ST- type connector.
Neither the cable nor the connectors are currently sold by Digital, but are
readily available from leading fiber manufacturers , such as Siecor Corporation , American Telephone & Telegraph Corporation , or their authorized
distributors.
Transceiver Cable

A transceiver cable connects an 802.3 / Ethernet transceiver or a Local
Network Interconnect (DELNI) to an 802 .3/ Ethernet communications
controller, broadband transceiver, or LAN Bridge 100. The cable is compatible with Ethernet and IEEE 802 .3 networking products and consists of
four twisted-pair wires enclosed in a shield and jacket of either plenum rated or PVC (polyvinyl chloride). Plenum-rated cable is more expensive
than PVC -insulated cable , but it can be used in environmental airspaces
without an expensive conduit. PVC -insulated cable can be used in an open
space, such as an office, laboratory, or manufacturing facility. PVCinsulated cable is not acceptable for use in environmental airspace because
it produces toxic fumes if it burns.
Transceiver cable is avai lable in several lengths (sections ). Sections can be
connected with built-in slide latches to form a single continuous link up to
50 meters ( 164 feet ) long . The connection point for a transceiver cable
section can be secured to a wall and hidden with the use of an Etherjack .
Each transceiver cable has either a straight or right-angled 15-pin connector on both ends .
For standard 802 .3/ Ethernet baseband networks , use BNE3H, K, L, or M
series cable .

....QJ
E
QJ

..c

""~
00

....>.
:e....
(,I

c
c
0

2.27

Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Products

Office Transceiver Cable

The office transceiver cable performs the same function as the transceiver
cable but is smaller in diameter and more flexible. The office transceiver
cable can be used in an open area (office, laboratory, or manufacturing
area) instead of the heavier transceiver cable.
The office transceiver cable is available only with PVC insulation. It should
not be connected to a standard baseband transceiver if the transceiver is
located in environmental airspace. PVC-insulated cable is not acceptable in
environmental airspace because it produces toxic fumes if it burns.
Office transceiver cable is available in two lengths (sections). Each office
transceiver cable has either a straight or right-angled 15-pin connector on
both ends. The connection of an office transceiver cable to a standard
transceiver cable is simplified because both use the same connectors. The
connection point can be secured to the wall base and hidden with the use
of an Etherjack.
The office transceiver cable attenuation is greater than that of the PVCinsulated or plenum-rated transceiver cable by a factor of four (for example, two meters, or 6.6 feet, of office transceiver cable is electrically
equivalent to eight meters, or 26.2 feet, of standard transceiver cable).
Because office transceiver cables are not as long as standard transceiver
cables, the distance between devices connected by office transceiver cables
is less than the distance between connected standard transceiver cables.
For standard 802.3/Ethernet baseband networks, use BNE4C- or D-series
cable.

2.28

Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Products

Transceiver Cable and Office Transceiver Cable Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Transceiver Cable with PVC Insulation,
Straight Connectors

Standard 802.3/Ethernet

5.0 m (16.4 ft ) long
10.0 m (32.8 ft ) long
20.0 m (65.6 ft ) long
40 .0 m (131.2 ft ) long

BNE3H-05
BNE3H-10
BNE3H-20
BNE3H-40

Transceiver Cable with PVC Insulation,
Right-angle Connectors:
5.0 m (16.4 ft ) long
10.0 m (32.8 ft ) long
20.0 m (65.6 ft ) long
40.0 m (131.2 ft ) long

BNE3K-05
BNE3K-10
BNE3K-20
BNE3K-40

Transceiver Cable, plenum-rated with
Straight Connectors:
5.0 m (16.4 ft ) long
10.0 m (32.8 ft ) long
20.0 m (65.6 ft) long
40.0 m (131.2 ft) long

BNE3L-05
BNE3L-10
BNE3L-20
BNE3L-40

Transceiver Cable, plenum-rated with
Right-angle Connectors:
5.0 m (16.4 ft) long
10.0 m (32.8 ft ) long
20.0 m (65.6 ft) long
40.0 m (131.2 ft) long

BNE3M-05
BNE3M-10
BNE3M-20
BNE3M-40

Office Transceiver Cable with PVC
Insulation, Straight Connector:
2 m (6.6 ft ) long
5 m (16.4 ft) long

BNE4C-02
BNE4C-05

Office Transceiver Cable with PVC
Insulation, Right-angle Connector:
2 m (6.6 ft) long
5 m ( 16.4 ft) long

Standard 802.3/Ethernet Cable
Connectors and Terminators

,BNE4D-02
BNE4D-05

Digital sells standard 802 .3/ Ethernet baseband cable with connectors at
each end of the cable. Standard Ethernet cables can be ordered in bulk,
with end connectors purchased later.
End connectors cannot remain open. At each end connector, a barrel
connector with another baseband cable or a terminator must be connected .

c:
c:

Barrel Connectors
Barrel connectors are used to directly join two sections of standard
b aseband cable . The barrel connector threads into the end connectors on
the two cable sections.
Terminators
Terminators are used to electrically complete the ends of the standard
baseb and cable . A terminator must be installed at each end of a standard
cable segment that is not connected to another standard cable segment.

2.29

Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Products

802.J/Ethernet Turnaround Connector
The 802.3/Ethernet turnaround connector is a testing device used to verify
that a host controller at the user 's station or a server controller and its
transceiver cable are electrically operational.
The turnaround connector consists of a transceiver installed on a short
length of coaxial cable. Both ends of the turnaround-connector coaxial
cable are terminated . The turnaround connector is attached to the trans ceiver cable, which is connected to a host controller or to a server controller. The turnaround connector is used to verify host operation prior to the
transceiver cable's actual installation on the baseband cable. The turnaround connector tests the controller and transceiver cable that connect it
to the local area network.
Etherjack (DEXJK)

The Etherjack (DEXJK} is a device for mounting cable connectors . Cables
can be run either along a wallbase or within a wall.
The Etherjack can be used to secure the cable along the base of a wall,
keeping the cable from the office floor area. The Etherjack also can be
used to secure transceiver cables extending from transceivers so that they
can be run down the inside of an office wall to the desired point of entry
into the office area . A third use for the Etherjack is to cover unsightly
connectors at the cable connection points within the office area.
Baseband Cable Connector and Terminator Product Order Codes

Baseband IEEE 802.3/Ethernet
Transceiver (H4005)

Option

Order Code

Baseband cable barrel connector

12 -19817-01

Baseband coaxial terminator

12 -19816-01

Baseband ground clamp (available only
from Digital Field Service)

12-21766-01

Baseband turnaround connector

H4080

Baseband transceiver cable straight
connector kit

H4054-00

Baseband transceiver cable right-angle
connector kit

H4055-00

Etherjack

DEXJK

The H4005 is a non -intrusive tapping transceiver that provides a physical
and electrical connection to a standard 802 .3/Ethernet cable. The H4005
connects to the standard baseband cable via a removable tap assembly. This
product complies with the IEEE 802 .3 specification and can interface to
both 802.3 and Ethernet station controllers . The H4005 contains the
necessary electronics to send and receive signals at 10 Mb/s, detect the
occurrence of collisions, and provide electrical isolation between the cable
and the station.

Compatibility
The H4005 is compatible with all products except the DEREP , which
requires the H4000 tran sceiver to connect -to the standard 802.3/Ethernet
cable.

2.30

Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Products

Features
• IEEE 802.3 and Ethernet compatibility allows for flexible network config-

uring .
• The transceiver clamps onto the standard baseband cable without cutting
it, allowing the unit to be installed, repaired, or removed without interrupting network operation .
• Simple installation and replacement procedures allow quick and easy
network reconfiguration. Network devices can be added to or removed
from the network easily.
• Redundant protective circuitry, high noise immunity and internal self-test
make the H4005 a highly reliable physical channel, reducing maintenance
cost.
• Heartbeat is enabled or disabled by a switch accessible from outside the
unit.
• The continuous message loopback feature simplifies and speeds fault isola tion , reducing maintenance time and cost.
•The U.L.-approved, rugged, insulated housing allows the H4005 to be
installed in environmental airspace without conduits .

Installation in Environmental Airspace
Commercial buildings commonly have drop ceilings. The space between
the drop ceiling and the floor above is called environmental airspace.
Environmental airspace is often used for return air for heating and air
conditioning systems (called return airspace) and to run wiring , such as
coaxial cable . Equipment in return airspace can be a potential fire hazard
because there is often no barrier to contain fire or smoke. Therefore,
equipment that is not approved by U.L. must be placed in a conduit when
installing it in return airspace.
Digital's plenum-rated cable and the H4005 are approved by the U.L. and
National Electric Code (NEC) for use in environmental airspace without a
conduit. (Canada, Europe, and GIA requirements may differ from those of
NEC). However, local and state regulations always take precedence over
U.L. approval.

Specifications
Physical Characteristics :
- Length : 3 in (8.7 cm)
- Width: 4 in (9.8 cm)
- Height: 1.5 in (3.7 cm)
- Weight: 10 oz .
Power Requirements :
- Voltage required at transceiver: 15.75 Vat maximum distribution impedance of less than 4 ohms
- Maximum current : 0.5 amps
- Environment class: C

Ordering Information
Installation of the H4005 transceiver by the customer requires the Trans ceiver Installation Tool Kit, which includes all the components necessary to
install the H4005.

...:
u
u

c::
c::

§
...
s
u

..c:

~
'~""'
00

...>.

....'>
~

c::
c::

2.31

Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Products

H4005 Order Codes

Local Network Interconnect
(DELNI)

Option

Order Code

802.3/ Ethernet Transceiver

H4005

Transceiver Installation Tool Kit

12-24664-02

The Local Network Interconnect (DELNI) is a low-cost, tabletop device
with its own power supply. I t is a concentrator that allows up to eight
Ethernet-compatible devices (not terminals) to be grouped together.
Device performance remains constant whether a device is connected to the
local area network through a transceiver or a DELNI.
The DELNI can be configured three ways: standalone, hierarchical
standalone, and connected . A switch on the DELNI allows selection of
either standalone or connected mode of operation .
The figure "DELNI Standalone Configuration" illustrates the standalone
configuration that supports up to eight systems using standard transceiver
cables.
The figure "DELNI Hierarchical Standalone Configuration" illustrates the
hierarchical standalone configuration that supports a combination of
DELNis and devices using standard transceiver cables. Hierarchical
standalone configurations are not connected to standard baseband cable.
The figures "DELNI Connected Configuration" and "DELNI Hierarchical
Connected Configuration" illustrate connected configurations that support
up to eight devices using transceiver cable. These configurations are connected to standard baseband cable via transceivers and transceiver cable.
For specific distance requirements , refer to "802 .3/Ethernet Configuration
Guidelines" in Appendi x A.
The DELNI can also be used in ThinWire configurations to concentrate up
to eight ThinWire repeaters . Refer to "ThinWire 802 .3/Ethernet Products"
in this section for more information.
Features
• A connected DELNI LAN reduces the cost of multiple connections to
standard baseband cable . It also allows more than 100 devices to be con nected to a single 500-meter coaxial cable segment.

• The standalone and hierarchical standalone DELNI LAN configurations
eliminate the need for standard baseband cable and transceivers in very
small networks.
• Transceiver cable wiring to a centrally located DELNI offers wiring configuration fle xibility.
• The DELNI can be installed by customers , reducing installation cost.
• A standalone/connected mode switch allows a user to change from the
connected configuration to the standalone configuration . This allows for the
temporary isolation of traffic in the DELNI subnet for security or for performance testing .

2.32

Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Products

DELNI Standalone Configuration

Transceiver Cable

MicroVAX

NBG-135-01

DELNI Hierarchical Standalone Configuration

50m
Transceiver Cable

DEB NA

DELUA

VA X 8800

PDP-11 / 84

VA X 8350

MicroVAX
II

40m
OEBNA
DELOA

VAX 8800

MicroVAX

.Wu
NBG-136-01

~...
u

E
u

..c:

""'f'i
Q

...>.
:e...
u

c
0

2.33

Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Products

DELNI Connected Conligurstion
Transceiver

Terminator

Standard Ethernet Cable

40m 1

35m 1

DEB NA
DELQA

PDP-11/84

VAX 8550

MicroVAX

The sum of two cable lengths.

NBG-1 37-01

DELNI Hiersrchicsl Connected Conligurstion

Transceiver
Terminator

Bridge

T=T

NBG-138-00

2.34

Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Products

DELNI Connected Configuration Using sn Etherjsck

Standard Ethernet Cable

Transceiver

Terminator

40m 1

35m'

DEBNA
DELQA

PDP-11 /84

VAX 8250

MicroVAX

1Sum of three cable lengths.

NBG-139-01

Specifications
Physical Characteristics:
- Length (rackmount): 44.5 cm (17.5 in)
- Length (with cover): 48.9 cm (19.25 in)
- Width (rackmount): 17.8 cm (7.0 in)
- Width (with cover): 19.7 cm (7.75 in)
- Height (rackmount): 6.4 cm (2.5 in)
- Height (with cover): 8.9 cm (3.5 in)
- Weight: 6.4 kg (14.0 lb)
Power Requirements:
- Switch-selectable : 120 V or 240 V, 47 to 63 Hz
- ac watts drawn: 26
- Inrush Currents: 1.0 amps at 120 V; 0.5 amps at 240 V
- Surge Currents: 2 amps for 5.cycles at 120 V; 1 amp for 5 cycles at
240 v
Environmental Class: C (Refer to Appendix B for details .)
Ordering Information
Order the DELNI and, if required, a country kit .
Each node connected to a DELNI requires an 802.3/Ethernet communications controller and transceiver cable. DELNI-connected configurations
require a transceiver and transceiver cable.
Non-U.S. versions of the DELNI require a country kit . (The U.S. version
does not require a country kit.) Each kit contains installation instructions
and a power cord. For countries not listed , select a country kit that uses
the same plug configuration.

2.35

Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Products

DELNI Order Codes
Option

O rder Code

Local Network Interconnect (DELNI), allows up to eight
network devices to be grouped together.
Local Network Interconnect, 110-120 Vac

DELNI-BA

Local Network Interconnect, 220-240 Vac

DELNI-BB

DELNI Country Kit Order Codes

Ethernet Repeaters (DEREP)

- ..
Local Ethernet Repeater
(DEREP-AA)

Fiber Optic Ethernet Repeater
(DEREP-RH)

Country

Order Code

Australia

DELNK-AZ

Belgium

DELNK-AB

Canada (English)

DELNK-AQ

Canada (Fren"ch)

DELNK-AC

Denmark

DELNK-AD

Finland

DELNK-AF

France

DELNK-AP

Holland

DELNK-AH

Italy

DELNK-AI

Norway

DELNK-AN

Spain

DELNK-AS

Sweden

DELNK-AM

Switzerland (German)

DELNK-AL

Switzerland (French)

DELNK-AK

United Kingdom

DELNK-AE

United States

Not required

West Germany

DELNK-AG

The standard baseband Ethernet repeater (DEREP) is a tabletop,
standalone device that connects two segments of standard baseband
Ethernet cable, ~xtending an Ethernet LAN beyond the 500-meter (1,640
feet) single-cable limit. Each repeater can connect two segments of standard Ethernet cable, each up to 500 meters ( 1,640 feet) long with as many
as 99 additional Ethernet transceivers installed. (The DEREP uses one
transceiver space.) The repeater retimes, amplifies, and repeats all signals it
receives from one cable segment and passes the signal to the next segment.
The DEREP repeater is offered in two versions, local and fiber optic. The
local DEREP repeater connects two standard baseband Ethernet segments
via transceiver cables and H4000 transceivers. The fiber optic version
interfaces one transceiver cable and a fiber optic link, which must connect
to either another fiber optic DEREP repeater or a fiber optic LAN Bridge
100. (For more information on the LAN Bridge 100, refer to "Extended
802 .3/Ethernet Local Area Networks" in this section.)
The local repeater connects two standard cable segments that are up to 100
meters (328 feet) apart. Two fiber optic repeaters connect two standard
cable segments that are up to 1, 100 meters (3,600 feet) apart via a fiber
optic link. The fiber optic repeater/bridge combination connects cable
segments up to 1,500 meters (4,920 feet) apart via fiber optic link.

2.36

Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Products

Local and Fiber Optic DEREP Configurations

Ethernet Transceiver

H4000 Transceiver

Local
Repeater

Standard
Ethernet

~!--~~~-

Standard
Ethernet
Cable
.H4000 Transceiver

H4000 Transceiver

Standard
Ethernet
Cable
H4000 Transceiver

NBG-140-01

Features
• Connects segments of standard Ethernet cable, increasing the length of an
Ethernet LAN and the number of devices supported.

• Can be installed and maintained by the customer, thus reducing cost.
• Contains an internal self-test feature that simplifies fault isolation,
increases reliability, and reduces maintenance costs.
• The fiber optic repeater is not affected by electrical or electromagnetic
interference and is protected from moisture , providing high performance
and low error rates. The fiber optic repeater can be used between buildings, underground , and in harsh environments.
• When the repeater detects faulty signals, it automatically stops repeating
them until good signals are detected again, at which point it resumes
normal signal transmission . This greatly increases network reliability.
• Diagnostic light-emitting diodes (LEDs) on the back panel of both the local
and fiber optic repeater assist in network troubleshooting .
• A second local repeater can be configured into the network providing
automatic backup for any local repeater, increasing network availability.

..:
(,I
u

c
c
0

(,I

Specifications

Physical Characteristics

Length
Width
Height

43.2 cm (17 in)
30.5 cm (12 in)
8.9 cm (3.5 in)

Environmental Class

C (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Qualifications
A message transmitted on a local area network must pass through no more
than two repeaters (DEREP, DEMPR, or DESPR) before either reaching its
destination or passing through a LAN Bridge.

....u
E
u

~!"i
0
00

E:E....
(,I

c
c
0

2.37

Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Products

The DEREP repeater cannot be used in broadband Ethernet networks or
between baseband and broadband Ethernet networks. It connects to standard baseband Ethernet cable via the H4000 transceiver; it cannot connect
to a DELNI or an H4005 transceiver.
The DEREP repeater supports the Ethernet standard ; it does not comply
with IEEE 802.3 standards.
Optical Performance Specifications
.&. Refer to "Planning a Baseband 802.3/Ethernet LAN" in Appendix A for

power budget specifications of various fiber optic cables.

Ordering Information
Local links require one DEREP repeater; fiber optic links require either
two fiber optic DEREP repeaters , or one fiber optic repeater and one fiber
optic LAN Bridge 100.
The DEREP repeater has a switch that changes between 110 Vac and 220240 Vac. Each local or fiber optic repeater purchased for use outside the
United States requires a country kit, which contains installation instructions and a power cord. (Versions for use within the United States do not
require a country kit. ) For countries not listed, select a kit that uses the
same plug configuration.
Transceivers, transceiver cables, and fiber optic cable must be ordered
separately. .&. Refer to this section and to "Communications Cables" in
Section 3 for more information.
DEREP Order Codes
Option

Order Codes

Local repeater for United States. Includes installation
instructions in English and 110-Vac power cord. Does not
require a country kit.

DEREP-AA

Local repeater for non-U.S. countries. Requires a country kit.

DEREP-AB

Fiber optic repeater for United States . Includes installation
instructions in English and a power cord. Does not require a
country kit.

DEREP-RH

Fiber optic repeater for non-U.S. countries. Requires a country
kit .

DEREP-RJ

Ethernet transceiver for use with DEREP Ethernet repeater.

H4000

Upgrade kit to convert older-model DEREP-RC/RD to DEREPRH/RJ. Includes field service installation. One version for 110
and 220-240 Vac. (Does not convert DEREP-AA or DEREP-AB.)

FOAED-AA

2.38

Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Products

DEREP Country Kit Order Codes
Country

Local Repeater

Fiber Optic
Repeater

Australia

DEREK -AZ

DEREK-RZ

Belgium

DEREK -AB

DEREK-RB

Canada (English)

DEREK -AQ

DEREK-RQ

Canada (French)

DEREK-AC

DEREK-RC

Denmark

DEREK-AD

DEREK -RD

Finland

DEREK-AF

DEREK -RF

France

DEREK-AP

DEREK -RP

Holland

DEREK-AH

DEREK-RH

Italy

DEREK -AI

DEREK-RI

Norway

DEREK -AN

DEREK-RN

Spain

DEREK -AS

DEREK-RS

Sweden

DEREK -AM

DEREK-RM

Switzerland (German)

DEREK-AL

DEREK-RL

Switzerland (French)

DEREK-AK

DEREK -RK

United Kingdom

DEREK-AE

DEREK -RE

United States

None required

West Germany

DEREK-AG

DEREK -RG

..;-

"'Q,I

c
c
0

u"'

2.39

ThinWire 802.3/Ethcrnet Prnducts

ThinWire 802.3/Ethernet cable delivers 10 Mb/s 802.3/Ethernet speed to
the desk, work area, and local area systems for connecting PCs, workstations, and computing systems.
ThinWire cabling and connection products are designed to the IEEE 802.3
specification for Ethernet, which provides a simple, inexpensive and flexible means of attaching devices to the local area network by using industrystandard cable and BNC-type connectors.
ThinWire 802.3/Ethernet Cable

ThinWire cable ·is a thin, flexible, and easy to install coaxial cable compatible with standard baseband cable. These qualities make it very suitable for
horizontal connections of devices on a work area floor, and for connecting
local work areas to satellite equipment rooms.
In comparison, standard baseband cabling is recommended for vertical or
horizontal connection between satellite equipment rooms or work group
areas because it can cover long distances (500 meters compared to 185
meters for ThinWire) and has superior EMI/RFI resistance. These qualities
make standard baseband cabling very suitable for connecting satellite
equipment rooms on facility floors and between floors.
Features
• ThinWire products are compatible with the IEEE 802.3 specification that
allows users greater capability to participate in multivendor Ethernet
networks.

• The maximum length of a ThinWire segment is 185 meters. Thirty devices
can be connected to a single segment by daisy-chained connections. When
a ThinWire Ethernet repeater is used, 29 stations may be connected to each
segment of ThinWire cable.
• Non-ThinWire 802.3/Ethernet (A.U.I. type) devices are connected to
ThinWire using a ThinWire Ethernet station adapter (DESTA), a compact
inexpensive IEEE 802.3 transceiver.
• A ThinWire segment consists of sections linked together by BNC Tconnectors . The bottom of the "T" is inserted either into a DESTA, which
is then connected to the station, or into an 802.3/Ethernet communications
controller that supports a BNC connector. T-connectors must be a minimum
of 0.5 meter apart.
• A maximum of eight ThinWire segments can be connected to a ThinWire
Multiport Repeater (DEMPR) to form a network of up to 232 stations. A
Local Network Interconnect (DELNI) can be used to concentrate up to
eight DEMPRs . These configurations can either stand alone or connect to
standard baseband cable using an H4005 (or H4000 -BA) transceiver.
•The Ethernet limit of 1,023 devices can be configured in a single ThinWire
802 .3/ Ethernet network .

2.40

ThinWire 802.3/Ethernet Products

ThinWire 802.J/Ethernet Cable Order Codes
Option

Order Code

PVC cable with connectors and boots:

ThinWire Ethernet Multiport
Repeater (DEMPR)

6 feet
15 feet
30 feet

BC16M-06
BC16M-15
BC16M-30

ThinWire PVC cable (1,000 ft)

H8243-A

ThinWire plenum-rated cable (1,000 ft)

H8244-A

Male coaxial connectors and boots

H8222

T-connectors and boots

H8223

Barrel connectors and boots

H8224

Terminators and boots

H8225

Installation kit

H8242

The ThinWire Ethernet multiport repeater (DEMPR) provides eight ports
for connection of eight ThinWire 802 .3/Ethernet segments, and one port
for connection to standard baseband cable. It can be used as a standalone
device , called a local DEMPR configuration, or connected to standard
baseband cable, called a global DEMPR configuration . The DEMPR
retimes, amplifies , and repeats signals between each of its nine ports. A
DEMPR must be counted as a repeater when configuring a standard
baseband 802 .3/Ethernet network.
Each ThinWire segment can be up to 185 meters long (606 feet ), and can
accommodate connection of up to 29 stations, for a total of 232 stations per
DEMPR.
Up to eight DEMPRs can be connected to a Local Network Interconnect
(DELNI ). This configuration provides up to 64 cable segments for connecting as many as 1,023 stations (Ethernet limit ). This configuration, in turn,
can be used in a standalone network or connected to standard baseband
802.3/Ethernet cable.

ThinWire Ethernet Singleport
Repeater (DESPR)

The ThinWire Ethernet singleport repeater (DESPR) connects a single
ThinWire segment to a standard 802.3/Ethernet network. The ThinWire
segment can be up to 185 meters long (606 feet) , and can accommodate up
to 29 stations.
The DESPR singleport repeater connects to standard baseband 802.3/
Ethernet cable using a standard baseband transceiver, or via a DELNI. The
DESPR must be counted as a repeater when configuring a standard
baseband 802 .3/ Ethernet network.
Qualification
A message transmitted on a local area network must pass through no more
than two repeaters (DEREP, DEMPR, or DESPR) before either reaching its
destination or passing through a ~AN Bridge.

2.41

ThinWire 802.3/Ethernet Products

DEMPR/DESPR Specifications

Physical Characteristics

-AA Models

-BA Models

Length

31.11 cm (12.25 in)

Width

48.9 cm (19.25 in)

. Height

11.43 cm (4.5 in)

Power Requirements
Nominal Voltage

100 to 120 Vac
3-wire single phase

189 to 240 Vac
1 N-PE single phase

Frequency

47 to 63 Hz

Maximum current

0.83 Amp

0.42 Amp

Maximum power

40 watts

Operating Environment

5 °C to 50 °C (41 °F to 122 °F)

Relative Humidity

10% to 90% (noncondensing)

DEMPR/DESPR Order Codes

Option

Order Code

ThinWire Ethernet Multiport Repeater,
120 V. Includes power cord.

DEMPR-AA

ThinWire Ethernet Multiport Repeater,
240 V. Requires power cord.

DEMPR-AB

ThinWire Ethernet Singleport Repeater,
120 V. Includes power cord.

DESPR-AA

ThinWire Ethernet Singleport Repeater,
240 V. Requires power cord .

DESPR-AB

DEMPRIDESPR Power Cord Order Codes

Country

Order Code

United Kingdom, Ireland

BN02A-2E

Austria , Belgium, Finland, France,
Germany, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal,
Spain, Sweden

BN03A-2E

Switzerland

BN04A-2E

Australia, New Zealand

BN05A-2E

Denmark

BN06A-2E

Italy

BN07A-2E

2.42

ThinWire 802.3/Ethernet Products

ThinWire Ethernet Station Adapter
(DESTA)

The ThinWire Ethernet Station Adapter (DESTA) converts a standard
15-pin A.U.I. station to ThinWire cabling. The station adapter can be
attached to standard-cable Ethernet controllers, allowing UNIBUS, Q-bus,
VAXBI , DECsystem -20, and other devices to connect to ThinWire . It also
allows Digital's 802 .3/ Ethernet communications controllers and terminal
servers to connect to ThinWire.
The DESTA has one 15-pin connector port that allows it to be mounted in
or near the 802.3/ Ethernet station, and a second port for connection to the
ThinWire cable . It contains 802 .3/ Ethernet transceiver circuitry and provides transceiver functions . The DESTA is very compact, and is powered
from the controller.
Specifications
Physical Characteristics :
- Length : 7.62 cm (3.0 in )
- Width : 8.38 cm (3 .3 in )
- Height : 3.55 cm (1.4 in )
Power Requirements:
- Input voltage (from controller): + 12 V
- Voltage required at transceiver: -9 V
- Maximum Current : 250 mA
- Typical Current : 200 to 250 mA
Environmental Class: C (Refer to Appendi x B for details. )
DESTA Order Code

DECconnect ThinWire
Configurations

Option

Order Code

ThinWire Ethernet Station Adapter

DESTA-AA

The DECconnect communications system recommends an installation that
includes ThinWire coaxial cable and two twisted-pair cables (one for
DEC423 and one for the telephone) distributed in a radial topology from a
local work area to a satellite equipment room . The ThinWire cable extends ,
without interruption, from a DEMPR in the satellite equipment room to an
H3111 faceplate in the loca l work area , and then to PCs, workstations , or
systems. Devices in the local work area can be daisy-chained on the
ThinWire segment using T-connectors and DESTAs. The ThinWire cable
attaches to the faceplate with a BNC connector. The total length of a
ThinWire cable segment from DEMPR to farthest work area device is 185
meters .
Standalone (Local) Configuration
In standalone or local configurations, a multiport repeater (DEMPR) acts as
a hub. Up to eight ThinWire segments run from the DEMPR to the local
work areas without interruption. In the local work area, ThinWire cables
connect to PCs, workstations , and low-end systems . The DEMPR connects
devices from up to eight local work areas in this configuration. The
DEMPR also isolates faults in a segment, keeping the rest of the segments
in operation . The following figure illustrates a standalone configuration in
local work areas .

.:
....
u

c
c
....0

:E....
....
u

c:
0

2.43

ThinWire 802.3/ Ethernet Products

DECconnect ThinWire Standalone Configuration (Local DEMPR Configuration)

ThinWire Cable

----j

MicroVA X

3600
Local Work Area-A

Terminator

----j .... H3111 Faceplate

T-Connector

...l ,_

DESTA

Multiport
Repeater

MicroVAX

2000

I'
MicroVAX
II

Satellite
Equipment
Room

7
Local Work Area-8

NBG-141-01

A larger standalone network can be formed by connecting up to eig ht
DEMPR hubs to a Local Network Interconnect (DELNI). This configuration
can service up to 64 local work areas.

Connected (Global) Configurations
In connected or global configurations, multiple standalone configurations
are connected to standard baseband 802.3/Ethernet cable. A DEMPR with
up to eight ThinWire segments can be connected to the standard baseband
cable using a standard baseband transceiver. This configuration provides
standard baseband 802.3/Ethernet service for up to eight local work areas.
(A single ThinWire segment with up to 29 stations may be connected to
standard baseband cable using a DESPR.)
A DELNI with up to eight attached DEMPRs/DESPRs must be connected to
standard baseband cable using an H4005 (or H4000-BA) transceiver. T his
configuration provides standard 802.3/Ethernet service for up to 64 local
work areas.
When a DELNI/DEMPR combination is connected to a standard baseband
cable segment, the following restrictions apply:
• The standard segment must be less than 300 meters.
• Connection to other standard segments must use a LAN Bridge (DEBET)
only.
When connected to standard baseband cable, the DEMPR or DESPR counts
as a repeater in the configuration. A message transmitted on a local area
network must pass through no more than two repeaters (DEREP, DEMPR,
or DESPR) before either reaching its destination or passing through a LAN
Bridge .

2.44

ThinWire 802.3/Ethernet Products

DECconnect ThinWire Connected Configuration (Global DEMPR Configuration)

Transceiver

Standard Ethernet Cable

(Heartbeat Disabled)

ThinWire Cable

~
~

MicroVAX

3600

Local Work Area-A
Transceiver
Cable
Terminator

- t -... H3111 Facepl ate
Multi port
Repeater

~
I

MicroVAX
II

Satellite
Equipment
Room

T-Connector

I'
MicroVAX

2000

Local Work Area-8

NBG-142-01

....u
e
~
...
~
...._
f'i

...>.
:e...
(,,j

c
c
0

2.45

Unshielded Twisted-pair 802.3/ Ethernet Products

Unshielded twisted-pair 802.3/Ethernet products provide full 10 Mb/s
Ethernet capability over telephone-type unshielded twisted-pair cabling.
This is the same type of cabling used in DECconnect and many other
industry-standard structured cabling systems. Through the use of passive
adapter products, active Thin~fire components, such as the DEMPR, DESPR
or DESTA, can be connected to desktop computers and low-end systems
over most unshielded twisted-pair cable.
Each twisted-pair segment can be up to 70 meters long from SER to station. Ir is recommended that all installed unshielded twisted-pair cabling
planned for 802.3/Ethernet applications should be tested before installation
of any 802.3/Ethernet products. Digital Field Service can provide Line
Impedance Characterization Testing (LICT) on a custom quotation basis.
Unshielded twisted-pair products include
• Unshielded twisted-pair Ethernet office adapter.
• Unshielded twisted-pair Ethernet wiring closet/SER adapter.
• Office cables from adapter to wallplate and cables from DEMPR to wiring
closet/SER adapter.
An eight-user starter kit includes all the components above plus a rack
installation kit.

2.46

Unshielded Twisted-pair 802.3/Ethernet Products

Table 2.21

Unshielded Twisted-pail" Configul"stion

SATELLITE EQUIPMENT ROOM (SER)

Th inWire
CABLE
DEMPR

UNSHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR
ETHERNET SER ADAPTERS
PATCHING
AREA

TWO-FOOT
OFFICE ADAPTER
CABLE
UNSHIELDED
TWISTED-PAIR
ETHERNET
OFFICE ADAPTER

50-0HM
TERMINATOR

PATCHING
AREA
(SE R DOOR)

.:CJ
u

LKG-1 685-88

c
c
0

Unshielded Twisted-pair Starter Kit
(H3300)

The unshielded twisted-pair starter kit (H3300) provides all the required
components to connect eight offices to a DEMPR via unshielded twistedpair cabling . These components include one H3310, one H3330, one
H3340 , and all necessary cabling.

....u
E
u

..c

@
~

f'i

0
00

....;.:,
:E....
CJ
u

c
c
0

2.47

Unshielded Twisted-pair 802.3/Ethernet Products

Unshielded Twisted-pair Ethernet
Office Adapter (H3310)

The unshielded twisted-pair Ethernet office adapter (H3310) is a package
of eight passive adapters that allow 802.3 / Ethernet stations to connect to
unshielded twisted-pair wiring that runs from the office to the satellite
equipment room . The H3310 is available as a separate component, as well
as part of the H3300 starter kit.

Unshielded Twisted-pair Wiring
Closet/SER Adapter (H3330)

The unshielded twisted-pair SER adapter (H3330 ) is a package that contains four dual adapter boards to support up to eight users in the SER.
Four H3330 adapters fill a single rack installation kit for 32 users. The
H3330 is available as a separate component, as well as part of the H3300
starter kit .

Unshielded Twisted-pair Rack
Installation Kit (H3340)

The unshielded twisted-pair rack installation kit (H3340) contains all the
mechanical mounting components necessary to support 32 users in the
SER. The H3340 is available as a separate component, as well as part of the
H3300 starter kit.
Unshielded Twisted-pair Product Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Unshielded twisted-pair Ethernet eight-line starter kit.
Includes all office and SER components and cabling options,
including ThinWire SER patch cables, and all three varieties of
office cables for DECconnect, AT&T, IBM, and Northern
Telecom cabling systems.

H3300-AA

Package of eight unshielded twisted-pair Ethernet office
adapters. (Accommodates eight unshielded twisted-pair office
segments.)

H3310-AA

Package of four dual -line unshielded twisted-pair Ethernet
wiring closet/SER adapters. (Accommodates eight unshielded
twisted-pair office segments.)

H3330-AA

Unshielded twisted-pair Ethernet rack installation kit. Includes
enclosure and mounting hardware for H3330 SER adapters.

H3340-AA

Package of 50 modified modular plug (MMP) connectors for
terminating twisted-pair segments.

H8226

Package of eight DECconnect SER patching cables, 3-foot length
for SER 6-pin MMP to 6-pin MMP.

BS16Q-03

Package of eight DECconnect office cables, 1-foot length for
office 6-pin MMP to 6-pin MMP.

BS16R-02

Package of eight Northern Telecom office cables, 2-foot length
for office 6-pin modular plug (MP) to 6-pin MMP

BS16S-02

Package of eight AT&T, IBM office cable, 2-foot length for
office 8-pin MP to 6-pin MMP

BS16U-02

Package of eight ThinWire SER/OCC patch cables, 8-foot
length.

BS16K-08

2.48

DECconnect Faceplate Prnducts

DECconnect faceplate products can be used in new installations or as
replacement products . The faceplates come with plugs to cover any unused
openings; the desired connectors are chosen separately. The modular
phone jack and modified modular data jack are the same size: A customer
can use two telephones or two data connectors, rather than one of each.
DECconnect Modular Faceplate
(H3111-C)

Fully Configured Modular Faceplate

The DECconnect modular faceplate (H3111-C) supports a choice of faceplate connectors by accommodating virtually any combination of low-speed
data (terminals) , 802.3/Ethernet (PCs/Workstations) and/or multiple voice
connections, up to a total of four "snap-in " connectors per faceplate . This
flexibility allows customers to support many combinations of data and
voice applications to meet at a single faceplate.
The Modular Faceplate is a frame that accepts any combination of two
types of inserts, blank or double opening. These inserts are then
"snap-mounted" into the faceplate frame. The inserts in turn accept any of
the traditional "snap-in" connectors including the modular jack (MJ) for
telephones and modified modular jack (MMJ) for low-speed data transmissions . A snap-in BNC (ThinWire) connector is available for the faceplate.
The faceplate provides total flexibility in that multiple voice and data
connections can be supported from the same faceplate, and a single, flexible configuration of telephone, unshielded twisted -pair and ThinWire can
be wired from every faceplate to accommodate the needs of a single office
user.

Features
• Modular, snap-in design allows faceplate to meet individual requirements.

• Easy, installation simplifies moves, adds, and changes.
• The faceplate, designed to an industry-standard form factor, does not
require custom wall boxes, and allows for the use of standard in-the-wall
electrical boxes, single- or dual-gang and side-by-side mounting of multiple
faceplates .

2.49

DECconnect Faceplate Products

Ordering Information
The modular faceplate is sold in kits of eight individually packaged faceplates. Each package contains the faceplate plus three inserts (one blank
and two doubles ) to allow any combination of one-to-four snap-in connectors. Connectors are purchased separately.
Surface-mount Faceplate
~nmnomo
\..

Flush-mount Faceplate
moo~o

The H3111-A is a combination surface-mount box and faceplate, selfenclosed for mounting to the walls of modular furniture, concrete walls , or
walls where internal cabling is prohibited . It is cabled in a similar fashion
to the H3111-B except that cables run to the box from a raceway or along
the floor, depending on the type of furniture and panels installed. The
cables enter the box from the top or bottom, rather than from behind, and
the box is mounted to the wall or furniture with double -sided tape or
magnets (included ).

The H3111-B is a flat , flush-mount faceplate that provides connection to
standard receptacle boxes that are a minimum of three inches deep and
installed in the wall. It mounts with two screws (included ) to the preinstalled wall box after installation of the appropriate cables.

•
Faceplate Installation Tool Kit

An H8242 faceplate installation tool kit is required to install either the
H3111-A or H3111-·B faceplate . The tool kit includes the following :
• A stripping tool to prepare the ThinWire before attaching the BNC connector
• A crimp tool to attach the ThinWire cable to the back of the BNC connector
• A punch-down tool to attach the twisted-pair cable to the back of the
modified modular jacks (MMJ) and modified jacks (MJ)
• A socket wrench to attach the BNC connector and the F connector to the
faceplate
• Loopback connectors for testing
At least one tool kit is required per facility, but it is recommended to have
at least one tool kit for every 100-120 faceplates. (This figure is based on
the si ze of the facility and the need for multiple installation resources: It is
not based on the life expectancy of the tool. )

2.50

DECconnect Faceplate Products

Faceplate Jacks and Connectors

DECconnect jacks and connectors are used to customize the faceplate to
provide essential network connections in office or other work areas. Jacks
and connectors are available for four connections:
· High-speed data over ThinWire Ethernet using a BNC connector (H3114),
for use with the H3111-A or H3 111-B faceplates
• Low-speed data with DEC423 (EIA-423-A) signaling using a modified
modular jack (H3111-A) for use with H3111-A or H3111-B faceplates
• Voice connection combined with the PBX vendor of choice using one of
three modular jacks (H3112-A, H3112-B, or H3112-D) for use with the
H3111-A or H3111-B faceplates. The H3112-A jack supports AT&T wiring,
the H3112-B jack supports a Northern Telecom PBX or Rolm PBX, and the
H3112-D is a universal 8-pin modular jack that accommodates other PBXs.
They can be snapped into the faceplate along with the H3113 for the
DEC423 wiring.
• Video connection using a standard F video connector (H3115) for use with
the H3111-A or H3111-B faceplates

TELEPHONE

VIDEO MONITOR

PC/WORKSTATION

.w
(,I

c
c
0

(,I

.w
u

E
u

..c:

""
...>.
:e...
N

0
00

(,I

c
0

2.51

DECconnect Faceplate Products

Faceplate Product Order Codes
Option

Order Code

DECconnect surface-mount faceplates, package of eight

H3111-A

DECconnect flush-mount faceplates, package of eight

H3111-B

DECconnect modular faceplates, package of eight

H3111-C

Modular jacks for AT&T connection, package of eight

H3112-A

Modular jacks for Northern Telecom, Rolm PBX connections,
package of eight

H3112-B

Modular jacks for universal telephone connections, package of
eight

H3112-D

Modified modular jacks for EIA-423-A signaling, package of
eight

H3113-A

Modified modular jacks for H3107-A only, package of eight

H3113-B

ThinWire Ethernet BNC bulkhead faceplate connectors, package
of eight

H3114-AB

F-style video connector, package of eight

H3115

Faceplate installation tool kit

H8242

To order cables, refer to "Communications Cables" in Section 3.

2.52

DECconnect Terminal-connection Components

DECconnect terminal-connection components are the cables, connectors,
and adapters used to link terminals, terminal servers, and computer hosts
within the DECconnect communications system. Low-speed terminal communication in the DECconnect system uses the DEC423 standard, a
superset of the EIA-423-A signaling standard . The Digital DEC423-based
products enhance the industry standard EIA-232-D performance by
• Improving transmission speed.

H8571-A

• Increasing the distance that terminals can be located from host computers .
• Incorporating EOS/ ESD protection.

Digital offers the following DEC423 products to connect devices using the
EIA-423-A signaling standard and to adapt devices from EIA-232-D signaling to EIA-423-A signaling.

H8571-B

H8572

•Digital office cable-the DEC423 (EIA-423-A) standard office cable
(BC16E), an unshielded six-conductor flat cable. The BC16E cable is terminated with a modified modular plug that has an offset key to prevent it
from being accidentally plugged into the telephone jack.
· Modified modular plug (MMP)-the DEC423 standard connector. To connect MMPs into existing terminals and printers, passive physical adapters
are required. Passive adapters allow both EIA-232 and EIA-423-A signaling
to pass through. However, EIA-423-A devices, when connected to EIA232-D wiring , are limited to EIA-232-D signaling parameters. Each passive
adapter has a modified modular jack (MMJ) to receive the MMP.
• H8571-A adapter (25-pin D subminiature)-required for terminal connection.
• H8571-B adapter (9-pin D subminiature)-required for printer connection .
• H3105 active converter-allows customers to upgrade an EIA-232-D device
to DEC423 and realize all the benefits of increased distance and EOS/ ESD
protection . As opposed to the passive adapters , which provide only a
mechanical adaptation, the H3105 active converter transforms the electrical
signal from an EIA-232-D interface to the signal for a DEC423 interface,
thus allowing longer distances and better noise immunity.
• H8572 cable extender (6-conductor)-used to extend the length of two
MMP preterminated cables .
Office Configuration with Passive Adapters

DEC423 ACTIVE
CONVERTER

25PIN
ADAPTER

2.53

DECconnect Terminal-connection Components

Office Configur•tlon witb Active Converter

vr22025 PIN
ADAPTER

Terminal-connection Product Order Codes

H3105

Option

Order Code

6-conductor DEC423 (EIA-423-A) office
cable terminated with MMPs (Refer to
"Communications Cables" in Section 3 for
cable lengths.)

BC16E-xx

25-pin active converter (110 V)

H3105-A

25 -pin active converter (220/240 V)

H3105-B

Package of 50 MMPs for 6-conductor
office cable

H8220

1,000-foot spool of unterminated, 6conductor, flat office cable

H8240

Crimp tool for 6-conductor cable

H8241

25-pin passive adapter (EIA-232-D
female)

H8571-A

25-pin passive adapter (EIA-232-D male)

H8571-D

9-pin passive adapter

H8571 -B

6-conductor cable extender

H8572

2.54

DECconnect Network Equipment Cabinet Prnducts

The DECconnect communications system offers the following network
equipment mounting options.
• Satellite equipment room (SER) rack, H3120-designed to be used as a
central hub servicing a large number of users (48-64) or up to 80 active
connections by either direct connection or connection to smaller, remotely
located equipment cabinets or patching panels . Because it is not enclosed
with panels, doors , or other enclosures, it must be located within a secure
room or wiring closet.
• Office communications cabinet (OCC), H9646-E-designed for customers
who might not have or want a dedicated room to house an SER rack , or
who prefer to use a standalone cabinet within an office area or computer
room.
• Remote Wall Enclosure (RWE) , H3131-A-designed to provide small, local
workgroups with a simple, easy-to-implement network connectivity solution for low-speed terminals via terminal servers (DECserver 200 or 500)
and high-speed PC/ Workstations via Ethernet multiport repeaters
(DEMPRs) to an enterprisewide 802 .3/Ethernet backbone.
The SER and OCC cabinets utilize a common set of products known as
building block kits . These kits comprise cable patching, termination panels,
cables for low- and high-speed data applications, mounting hardware, and
cable strain relief/management hardware. The building block kits offer the
flexibility to easily configure SER racks and office communications cabinets
for low- and high-speed data applications and office cable patching . They
allow the network/telecommunications manager to meet the needs of current users , while keeping the flexibility to easily upgrade the cabinets to
meet future needs .
Satellite Equipment Room Rack
(H3120)

The H3120 satellite equipment room rack comprises two industry-standard
19-inch-wide NEMA cabinet racks attached side by side. The rack on the
left side is the active rack and houses the active network hardware component; the rack on the right side is the passive rack, the termination point
for the office cabling and the mounting area for cable patching components
that connect the office cabling to the active devices. This cabinet is
designed to support up to 80 active connections .
..:
u
u

g
u

....u
E
u

..;:
~

""~
00

........>>.

·.;:::

a1
c
c
0

2.55

DECconnect Network Equipment Cabinet Products

Satellite Equipment Room Configuration

TRANSCEIVER

-r

TO DECconnect
FACEPLATES
IN OFFICES

iETHERNETBACKBONE

,,r

STANZ,
ETHERNET
CABLE

~i Th~ireAND

TWISTED-PAIR
CABLES

TRANSCEIVER
CABLE

'. '

t=1

::J

..JI

-~
DO

~·

"'l''Ul''I'
,~.,

:~
~

•

:
0

oo
•
0

ttt

::~ -

ETHERNET
PATCH
PANELS

~
~DODOO

~ ~ODD~
ODD

CABLE
1---coNCENTRATOR

!-- CABLE
PATCH
PANEL

D
0

•uO ~D

OD:J D

~ ~DD~ ~
DO

[10

~\\l)

tmmm.

EQUIPMENT I

000000000

ANYVENDORI DELNI

I"'

'"''"'"

••••••

DODOO

~~900 ·

'IL

}
..... ..
00000000

.......
·~·······
··u.:
.. ".J_······
......

t-H=

'..r.r.ll." ........

D
[<;DJ

t-t-t--

0 '>0 0 0 0 0 0

DEMPRs

DEC
SERVERS

-'>
...

~ DJ

SER RACKING

The H3120 includes two steel racks, power strip, cable managers, eight sets
of rackmount brackets for DECservers or DEMPRs, one set of rackmount
brackets for the DELNI, and two patch frame panels for mounting cable
patch panels . Customers select patch panels, patch cords, and other accessories from the menu of building block kits to meet their application needs.
(Refer to "Cabinet Building Block Kits" in this section for more information. )
The H3120 must be housed within a secure room or wiring closet. Each
dual rack is 88 inches high, 46 inches wide , and 23 inches deep. The general room minimum requirements are 65 inches deep/wide and 96 inches
long with a ceiling at least 96 inches high. These dimensions allow sufficient space for· accommodating a telephone and/or video patching area.
The H3120 can accommodate a wide variety of Digital network hardware
such as the DECserver 200 and 500, DEMPRs, DELNis, and the LAN
Bridge 100. Additionally, many 19-inch industry standard rackmountable
products can be accommodated if they meet environmental and power
considerations.

2.56

DECconnect Network Equipment Cabinet Products

SER Rack Order Code

Office Communications Cabinet
(H9646-E)

Option

Order Code

SER starter racks, power strip, cable managers, cable trays,
patching frames, and miscellaneous hardware, 110-120 Vac

H3120

The H9646-E DECconnect office communications cabinet (OCC) is a
standalone cabinet, as opposed to the H3120 SER rack, which requires a
secure room. The cabinet is attractive and takes little floor space, making it
suitable for an office. This product is ideal for small departments that plan
to expand and that need a secure environment for their networking products.
The H9646-E office communications cabinet, which complements the
64-user satellite equipment room rack (H3120) , can accommodate a variety
of devices that mount in a 19-inch rack.
Features
• Enclosed cabinet with standard 19-inch frames
• Locks on both front and rear doors
• Power strip for up to nine devices
• Patch panels for cable management
The H9646-E cabinets have sufficient space to accommodate the cabinet
building block kits , which allow customers to configure a cabinet to meet
specific requirements for number of users and types of network applications (such as low- or high-speed connections .) Refer to "Cabinet Building
Kits" in this section for more information.
Preconfigured Office Communications Cabinet (HJJJO-A)
The H3130-A office communications cabinet is a preconfigured version of
the H9646-E cabinet. It includes enough passive components, cables
(excluding transceiver cable), and hardware to accommodate one DELNI,
four DECserver 200s, and four ThinWire multiport repeaters (DEMPRs ),
allowing a total of 32 high- and low-speed connections with full patching
capability.
Office Communications Cabinet Order Codes
Option

Order Code

60-inch network equipment cabinet, includes side panels, top
cover, front and rear locking doors and 120 Vac power strip.
Does not include any other active or passive hardware
components.

H9646-EA

Network equipment cabinet, same as H9646-EA except that it
contains a 220-240 Vac power strip

H9646-EB

Office communications cabinet, includes enough patching
components and cables to support 32 low- and high-speed
users, 110-120 Vac

H3130-A2

Office communications cabinet, same as H3130-A2, except that
it contains a 220-240 Vac power strip

H3130-A3

2.57

DECconnect Network Equipment Cabinet Products

Cabinet Building Block Kits

The cabinet building block kits consist of DECconnect patching and termination products, mounting brackets for rackmounting termination panels,
recessed mounting brackets for DEMPRs, DECservers and DELNis, and
cables . These· kits are used with either the H9646-E office communications
cabinet or H3120 satellite equipment room rack. They allow customers to
patch in current users , while offering the flexibility to configure future
user support in 16-user increments.
All the components meet industry standards, allowing them to mount in
any 19-inch wide rack.

Building Block Ordering Examples
The following two figures show examples of using the building block kits.
The examples list all the components required for two Digital-supported
configurations for the H9646 -E series cabinet racks. The components are
ordered separately from the Building Block Kit Order Code table.
H9646-E Cabinet Configuration for 48 Low-speed, 16 High-speed Connections
with 100 Patching

HIGH-SPEED
PATCH ING

LOW-SPEED
PATCHING

Number of Kits
Required
Three H3106-AB

DEMPRs

Nine H3107-C
One H3107-D
One H3109-AB
Three H3117
Two H3118-AA
Two H3118-AB
One H3118-AC
One H8226

DS 200/Dls

One H9646-Ex

LKG-1659- 87

2.58

DECconnect Network Equipment Cabinet Products

H9646-E Cabinet Configuration for 128 Low-speed, )2 High-speed Connections
with No Patching

HIGH -SPEED
PATCHING

DEMPRs

Number of Kits
Required
Eight H3107-C
Two H3 107-D
One H3 109-AB
Four H3118-AA
Two H3 118-AC
T hree H8226
One H9646-Ex

DS500

LKG-1677-87

.WV

Q,I

c
c
0

Cabinet Kit Descriptions
The following list describes several cabinet kits . A For information regarding other building block components, such as ThinWire patch cable kits
and DECconnect patch-panel mounting brackets, refer to the Building
Block Kit Order Code table.
• H3106-AB flip adapters- two fl ip adapters, attached to the 36-conductor
ribbon cables , connect the H3107-C patch panels on the front of the
H9646-E cabinet to the H3107-Cs mounted in the rear of the cabinet. The
rear-mounted H3107-Cs are used as termin ation panels for building/office
twisted-pair wiring . The H3106-AB provides a "flip " in the signal paths
required when these two identical panels are used in this confi guration.

-~
.::
...
v

Q,I

c
c
0

2.59

DECconnect Network Equipment Cabinet Products

• H3107-A low-speed 16-user termination patch panel-has 16 individual
snap-in MM] connectors, which allow for "punching down" unshielded
twisted-pair ~able . It is primarily used with the H3120 SER cabinet and for
cable patching the unshielded twisted -pair 802.3/Ethernet product within
either the SER rack or OCC.
• H3107-C low-speed 16-user termination patch panel-primarily used with
the OCC and remote -enclosure products . Includes 16 PC-mount modified
modular jacks (MMJ ) on one side and two 36-pin connectors on the other.
The building twisted -pair cabling is attached to the panels using modified
modular plugs (MMP) (H8226 ). The MMPs, attached to building wiring,
snap into these panels on one side ; on the other side is a 36-pin connector
for attaching to the DECserver 200 or 500. This panel fits into both the
DECconnect hinged patch-panel frame (H3127) that comes with the H3120
and the DECconnect rackmounting bracket (H3108-AB) .
• H3107-D ThinWire coaxial cable patch block-supports 16 high-speed
office terminations. It includes two snap-in panels for ThinWire 802.3/
Ethernet connections, 16 bulkhead coaxial connectors, bushings for cable
management, and labeling. The BNC mounts into the plastic panels without
bushings and reduces the number of BNC connections (because the office
connections are now directly connected on the right side of the patch
panels). With this panel, the number of ThinWire cables is reduced by
eliminating the need for separate patch cables.
• H3108-AA DECconnect cable manager bracket-provides strain relief for
ThinWire, 36-conductor transceiver and cables, and guides the cable to the
rear of the cabinet for cable management. This bracket mounts into any
standard 19-inch rack .
• H3108-AB Patch-panel mounting bracket-has four cutout openings,
mounts in any standard 19-inch rack , and is used with any the H3107-series
patch panels. It includes the mounting bracket, two cable stress-relief rods ,
four U-nuts and mounting screws .
• H3109-AB DECconnect hardware kit- contains
- recessed brackets to mount one DELNI.
- recessed brackets to mount eight active devices, DEMPR or DECserver
200 .
- four cable organizers (H3108-AA) .
- bushings for the H3108-AAs.
- various screws, tie wraps , and cable clips .
- three patch-panel brackets (H3108-AB ).
- si x strain-relief rods for providing cable strain relief (used with the
H3108-AB panels ).
• H9646-E 60-inch network equipment cabinet-fully enclosed, including
side panels, top cover, front and rear locking doors , and rear-mounted
cable manager bracket. The cabinet includes a 12 amp power strip with 10
receptacle outlets and 15 amp circuit breaker. The power strip provides
power to all the active hardware components, such as DECservers or
DEMPRs .

2.60

DECconnect Network Equipment Cabinet Products

Bui/cling Block Kit Order Codes

DECconnect Remote Wall
Enclosure (H3131-A)

Flip adapter kit, containing two male 36-conductor flip
adapters used with ribbon cables and H3107-C for patching
DECserver 200/DL or DECserver 500/550 active connections

H3106-AB

16-user patch panel with 16 individual snap-in modified
modular jacks for "punching down" unshielded twisted-pair
cable in the H3120 SER rack

H3107-A

16-user patch panel with 16 PC-mounted modified modular
jacks to patch building/office wiring for low-speed data to two
DECserver 200 terminal servers in the H9646-E series OCC

H3107-C

16-user patch panel used to patch ThinWire cable to two
ThinWire Ethernet multiport repeaters. It contains 16 female
BNC bulkhead connectors for terminating the building/office
ThinWire cable within the patch panel.

H3107-D

Cable manager bracket kit

H3108-AA

Patch-panel mounting bracket kit

H3108-AB

DECconnect hardware kit

H3109-AB

Blank panel kit, containing eight blank panels for mounting in
the patch panel brackets

H3116-AA

Package of 16 two-foot low-speed DEC423 (EIA-423-A) patch
cords

H3117

Package of 16 two-foot high-speed ThinWire patch cords

H3118

Package of four 36-conductor ribbon cables, each eight feet
long (connects servers to patch field)

H3118 -AA

Package of four 36-conductor ribbon cables, each three feet
long (connects H3107-C patch panels)

H3118-AB

ThinWire patch cable kit,containing 16 8-foot male-to-male
patch cables for the H3107-D

H3118-AC

DEMPR/DECserver 200 recessed bracket rackmounting kit ,
containing all the necessary hardware to mount one DECserver
200 and/or one DEMPR in a 19-inch-wide cabinet

H3119-AA

DELNI mounting kit, containing two recessed brackets to
mount one DELNI

H3126-AA

Package of 50 modified modular plugs/connectors for field
termination of unshielded twisted-pair cable, solid wire only

H8226

The DECconnect Remote Wall Enclosure (RWE), H3131 -A, is a wallmounted metal enclosure that houses passive patching equipment to support a radial wiring topology for either 16 high- or 16 low-speed data lines
running over unshielded twisted pair cabling. The RWE provides small,
local work groups with a simple, easy-to-implement network connectivity
solution for low-speed terminals via terminal servers (DECserver 200 or
500) and high -speed PC/ Workstations via Ethernet multiport repeaters
(DEMPR) to an enterprisewide Ethernet backbone . The DECconnect
Remote Wall Enclosure provides a cost-effective alternative to a Satellite
Equipment Room (SER) or Office Communications Cabinet (OCC) .

c
c

0
u

2.61

DECconnect Network Equipment Cabinet Products

Support of low-speed, data-only (no modem control) terminal network
connectivity is accomplished by mounting a 16-user termination patch
panel kit (H3107-C) into the RWE. Unshielded twisted-pair office cabling
terminates at ·MMJ connectors in the H3107-C and radiates out to
DECconnect faceplates or directly to office equipment. A pair of 36conductor cables leads from the RWE-mounted H3107-C to local or
remotely located (up to 300 feet) DECserver 200/DL terminal servers or to
DECserver 5001550 CXA16 line cards .
Terminal servers (DECserver 200/DL) can be wall-mounted in proximity to
the RWE by using a H039 wall-mount kit (1 per DECserver 200) . Then the
BC 16C.10 cables that come with the DECserver 200/DL can be used to
connect the RWE mounted termination patch panel to the terminal server.

If the terminal servers are remotely located, the customer can use additional BC16D 36-conductor extension cables or can terminate bulk 36conductor cable using the H8101 field termination tool kit and H8227 field
termination connector kit. The 36-conductor cable can be run up to 300
feet to a DECserver 200/DL or to a CXA16 line card in a DECserver 5001
550.
High-speed 10 Mb/s 802.3/Ethernet communications is accomplished by
mounting an unshielded twisted-pair card cage kit (H3131-B) into the
RWE (H3131-A). Up to two unshielded twisted-pair adapter kits (H3330AA) can then be mounted into the H3131-B. Each H3330-AA kit contains
four adapter boards (eight lines), each of which supports two unshielded
twisted-pair 802.3/Ethernet connections that run to DECconnect faceplates
or office equipment. Two H3330-AA support a total of up to 16 radially
distributed unshielded twisted-pair communications lines. ThinWire cables
run from the back of the H3330-AA to DEMPRs, which is wall-mounted
next to the RWE using the H039 wall-mount kit . As an alternative, a super
8 Pack (H3300-AA) provides all twisted-pair components .
RWF Configuration for Local Terminal Server

2.62

DECconnect Network Equipment Cabinet Products

RWE Configuration for Remote Terminal Server

TRANSCEIVER CABLE
TO STANDARD ETHERNET

occ

LKG-1765-88

Features
• Compact wall-mounted enclosure uses no floor space.
• Aesthetically acceptable for office applications.
• Local patching/cable termination simplifies moves, additions, and changes.
Ordering Information
For low-speed communications, the maximum length for a 36-conductor
cable run between an RWE and a terminal server is 300 feet.
For high -speed communications,
• The maximum length for a twisted-pair cable running 802.3/Ethernet
communications is 230 feet.
• Twisted-pair cables terminate at twisted-pair Ethernet adapters, which in
turn use a short section of ThinWire to connect to the respective devices.
The total length of ThinWire cable- the cable leading from the RWE to the
DEMPR plus the cable leading from the office adapter to the end user
equipment- must not exceed 10 meters.

..:
u
u

c
c

0
u

2.63

DECconnect Network Equipment Cabinet Products

Remote Wall Enclosure Order Codes
Option

Order Code

DECconnect Remote Wall Enclosure
Unshielded Twisted-pair Card Cage Kit

HJlJl-A
HJlJl -B

Connector kit, 36-conductor cable

H8227-A

Tool kit, termination 36-conductor cable

H8101

36-conductor cable spool, PVC, 250 feet

H8247-A

36-conductor cable spool, PVC, 1000 feet

H8247-B

36-conductor cable spool, FEP, 250 feet

H8248-A

36-conductor cable spool, FEP, 1000 feet

H8248-B

Kit of 16 ThinWire cables

H3118-AC

Kit of eight unshielded twisted-pair office adapters

H3310-AA

Unshielded twisted-pair 802.J/ Ethernet SER card

H3330-AA

Terminal patching "low-speed" panel

H3107-C

Wall-mount kit, DECserver, DEMPR

HOJ9

Super 8-pack unshielded twisted-pair office adapters

HJ300-AA

2.64

Brnadband 802.3/Ethernet Prnducts

Broadband 802 .3/Ethernet is most often selected by customers who have
multiple services to distribute over large local areas. Broadband networks
use frequenc y division multiplexing to carr y many channels on one wiring
system, enabling customers to transmit data , video , and voice over the
same cable, simultaneously. The broadband cable and components are the
same as those used for cable TV.
Digital Network Services can provide design , installation, and network
maintenance, and can serve as the customer 's single point of contact for the
broadband network , Digital hardware and software products, and qualified
vendor products.
Broadband 802 .3/Ethernet is an extension of Digital's baseband 802 .3/
Ethernet. Baseband and broadband provide the same capabilities: a highspeed 10-Mb/s, peer-to-peer communications link between computers and
other intelligent devices for transferring files and high-resolution graphics
displays , and for transmitting text, electronic mail , and facsimile data . The
broadband 802 .3/ Ethernet transceivers use the same controllers and
DECnet Phase IV software as baseband . In addition , the broadband transceiver is used in conjunction the same bridges, routers , gateways, terminal
servers, and communications servers as baseband networks. Also , the
broadband transceiver cable is the same as for the baseband. The major
difference between the two is the transceivers: the standard Ethernet
transceiver for baseband, and Ethermodem for broadband .
For configuration information, including distance requirements , refer to
"Planning a Broadband 802 .3/ Ethernet LAN " in Appendix A.

Repeater Restrictions
Repeaters cannot be used in broadband networks , or between baseband
and broadb and networks.

( .I

2:5

........E->

c
c

8
C'I

2.65

Broadband 802.3/Ethernet Products

Broadband 802.J/Ethernet Configuration

Host

Broadband
Frequency
Translator

Broadband
Transceiver

Host

NBG-154-01

2.66

Broadband 802.3/Ethernet Products

Broadband

Baseband

ThinWire

Packets are transmitted by
a broadband transceiver.

Packets are transmitted by
a baseband transceiver.

Packets are transmitted by
a built-in DESTA transceiver.

Broadband can share the
cable with other independent channels, such as
video, data, and voice.

Baseband is the only
channel on the cable.

Network cable is the same
as for cable TV.

Network cable is designed
to Ethernet or IEEE 802.3
specifications.

to Ethernet or IEEE 802.3

Tap and drop cable are
the same as for cable TV.

Transceiver serves as the
tap, and transceiver cable
serves as the drop cable.

Network cable is designed
specifications.
Transceiver serves as the
tap, and transceiver cable
serves as the drop cable
to a ThinWire Ethernet
Repeater. ThinWire cable
connects devices to the
ThinWire Ethernet
Repeater.·

*ThinWire is also available in standalone configurations. Refer to "802.3/Ethernet
Configuration Guidelines" in Appendix A for more information.

Broadband, Baseband, and ThinWire Cable Connection Comparison
Terminator
Thin Wire

MicroVAX

DE LOA

:Bo.

DELOA

Transceiver Cable

MicroVAX
II

Broadband

Transceiver Cable

Transcevier

Broadband Cable
Broadband Tap

Standard
Baseband Gabl~
Baseband Tran:;ceiver

Standard
Baseband Cable

~~~~~~;;;...;;;.;...;;..;;;..;;;;;..;.;;;.....;;..;;;;;;=

Baseband
Transceiver

...:
~

c
0

NBG-155-01

Digital's broadband 802.3/Ethernet products implement an 802.3/Ethernet
channel for both single- and dual-cable broadband LANs . Almost all
Digital networking products used with baseband technology are compatible
with broadband. These include

·DECnet Phase IV for VMS, RSX, RSTS/ E, and P/ OS operating systems.
• The 802.3/Ethernet communications controllers that connect to standard
baseband cable.
• Communications servers (routers, terminal servers, and gateways ).
·LAN Bridge 100.

2.67

Broadband 802.3/Ethernet Products

Digital's Third-party Program has qualified two products that incorporate
multivendor services on broadband 802.3 / Ethernet LANs . The products,
the Ethermodem and the Frequency Translator, are available through
Chipcom Corporation in the United States and in most European countries. Ethermodem is 802 .3-compliant and coexists with Ethernet, MAP ,
IBM PC NET, or Sytek LocalNet 20 .
Chipcom Ethermodem Broadband
Ethernet Transceiver

The Chipcom two-port Ethermodem is a broadband transceiver that links
baseband 802.3/Ethernet nodes to broadband networks . Ethermodems are
full y IEEE 802 .3 compliant and are available in either single or dual -cable
configurations . Ethermodems are available in five frequencies providing 10
Mb/s performance and are transparent to higher level network software
such as DECnet, TCP/ IP, and XNS.
The DELNI, DEREP repeater, and ThinWire Ethernet repeaters should not
be used with the Ethermodem as these are unsupported configurations .
Chipcom and installed Digital broadband products (DECOM)can neither
communicate nor coexist on the same broadband cable due to frequenc y
conflicts . Single-cable Ethermodem installations require a Chipcom frequency translator.
Features
• IEEE 802.3 and Ethernet V2.0 compatible.

• 10 Mb/s CSMA/ CD performance with full collision enforcement.
·Multiple frequenc y ranges to allow flexibility when configuring with MAP ,
IBM PC network , and SYTEK services.
• Functions in either mid-split or high -split single cable networks.
• 3,800 m station-to-station distance coverage.
• Available in either dual- or single-cable versions .
• Transparent to upper-level network software supporting systems that use
DECnet , XNS , TCP/ IP, or TOP.
• On -board self-test, digital and RF loopback.
• Can be rackmounted or shelfmounted.
• Coexists with up to three MAP channels.
• Two -port modem .
Specifications
Physical Characteristics :
- Height : 8.89 cm (3.5 in )
- Width : 44.45 cm (17.5 in )
- Depth : 37.46 cm (14.75 in )
- Weight : 6.80 kg (15 lb )

Power Requirements:
- Power source: 115/ 220 Vac
- Frequency tolerance : 50165 Hz ± 10%
- Maximum AC watts drawn: 40 W
- Power connector : IEC male
- Transmitted power : 50 dBmV ±2 dBmV optional for dual cable versions
- Receiver range : 20 dB minimum (-4 to +16 dBmV), 25 dB typical (-6
to +19 dBmV)

2.68

Broadband 802.3/Ethernet Products

Ordering Information
Ethermodem is available in the U.S. and in some other countries via distributors . Contact a local marketing representative for country-specific
information.
Chipcom Ethermodem Frequency
Translator

The Chipcom Ethermodem frequency translator, located at the network
headend , is used with single-cable Ethermodems. The Ethermodem frequency translator receives low frequency signals from the reverse direction
and translates them up in frequency by 192.25 MHz (IEEE recommended
standard ) to the transmit band. It amplifies, filters, and sends the signal to
the user on the forward direction. The Ethermodem frequency translator
minimi zes interference with services in nearby frequencies by providing
sharp, out-of-band filtering . It is available off-the-shelf in a range of standard frequencies. The Ethermodem frequency translator coexists with
other broadband products (such as IBM PC Network, Sytek Loca!Net 20,
and MAP ), video , and other common services . Contact your local Digital
sales representative for ordering and service information.
Specifications
Physical Characteristics :
- Height: 8.89 cm (3 .5 in)
- Width: 44.45 cm (17.5 in )
- Depth : 40.64 cm ( 16.0 in)
- Weight : 6.80 kg (15 lb)
- Mounting : 48 .26 cm (19 .0 in) standard rack

Power Requirements :
- Power source: 115/220 Vac
- Frequency tolerance : 50/60 Hz ± 10 %
- Maximum ac watts drawn : 40 W
- Power connector: IEC male
- Power indicator: red LED
Translation frequency : 192.25 MHz ±25 kHz
Nominal bandwidth: 18 MHz
Gain : 55 ±2 dB

2.69

802.3/Ethcrnct Communications Controllers

802 .3/Ethernet communications controllers are interfaces that connect
systems to an 802 .3/Ethernet local area network. Digital currently offers
the following communications controllers :
• The DEBNA, which connects VAXBI systems to standard baseband or
broadband cable
·The DELQA, which connects Q-bus MicroVAX and MicroPDP-11 systems
to standard baseband or broadband cable
·The DESQA, which connects Q-bus MicroVAX and MicroPDP-11 systems in
BA200-series enclosures to standard or ThinWire 802.3/Ethernet cable
• The DELUA, which connects UNIBUS VAX and PDP-11 systems to standard
baseband or broadband cable
• The DESVA, which connects MicroVAX 2000 and VAXstation 2000 systems
to ThinWire, standard baseband, or broadband cable
• The DEPCA, which connects the IBM PC , PC/ XT, and Personal Computer
AT to ThinWire Ethernet cable
In addition, the VAXmate has an integral Ethernet communications controller which connects to ThinWire Ethernet cable.
Controllers designed for standard baseband cable connect to the cable
with a standard baseband 802.3/Ethernet transceiver or via a Local Network Interconnect (DELNI). They connect to broadband cable with a
broadband transceiver. They can connect to ThinWire cable via a ThinWire
Ethernet station adapter (DESTA ).
Controllers designed for ThinWire 802 .3/ Ethernet cable connect to the
cable via a BNC connector. They can connect to standard baseband cable
via a ThinWire Ethernet Repeater, which then connects to standard
baseband cable via an 802.3/Ethernet transceiver or DELNI.
802.J/Ethernet Communications Controllers

MicroVAX
3600

VAXBI

MicroPDP-11

Host

DELOA

DEBNA

VAX 8650
DELUA

DESVA

MicroVAX
2000

DESO A

MicroVAX
3600

DESVA

MicroVAX
2000

NBG-156-01

2_10

802.3/Ethernet Communications Controllers

802.J/Ethernet Communications Controllers

DEBNA

DELVA

DEPCA

DELQA

DESQA

DES VA

VAXBI

UNIBUS

IBM PC-bus

Q-bus

Q-bus systems
in BA200-series
enclosures

MicroVAX 2000
and
VAXstation 2000
bus

DMA

Yes

Maximum
speed'

5 Mbls

10 Mb/s

Ethernet cable

Standard

Standard 4 or
ThinWire

Standard

Standard or
ThinWire

DECnet support

DECnet-VAX,2
DECnet-ULTRIX

DECnet-VAX,
DECnet-ULTRIX,
DECnet-RSX,
DECnet/E

DECnet-DOS,
PCSA/PC Client 3

DECnet-VAX,2
DECnet-ULTRIX,
DECnet-RSX,
DECnet-Micro/
RSX, DECnet/E

DECnet-VAX, 2
DECnet-ULTRIX,
DECnet-RSX,
DECnet-Micro/
RSX, DECnet/E

DECnet-VAX, 2
DECnet-ULTRIX

Operating
system support

VMS,

VMS,
ULTRIX-32
ULTRIX-11,
RSX-11,
RSX-llM-PLUS,
RSX-llS,
RSTS/E

IBM PC DOS,
ULTRIX-32,
MS-DOS

VMS,
COMPAQ,
ULTRIX-11,
RSX-llM,
RSX-llM-PLUS,
RSX-llS,
Micro/RSX,
RSTS/E,
VAXELN

VMS,
ULTRIX-32,
ULTRIX-11,
RSX-llM,
RSX-llM-PLUS,
RSX-llS,
MICRO/RSX,
RSTS/E,
VAXELN

VMS,
ULTRIX-32,

Bus

Number of lines

Consult the appropriate DECnet Software Product Description for more information.

DECnet-VAX allows multiple 802.3/Ethernet controllers per host within the limitations listed in the Load Unit Table in Software Product Description 25.03. When two or more 802.3/Ethernet controllers are used on a single CPU, they must be connected to different
cables attached to separate local area networks. These cables must not be joined by a bridge or repeater, though they may be joined by a
DECnet router.

PCSA/PC Client software includes DECnet-DOS support.

Converts to standard baseband cable with the optional DEPCA-AU.

DEB NA

The DEBNA is an 802.3/Ethernet-to-VAXBI communications controller that
connects VAXBI systems to an 802 .3/Ethernet local area network. The
DEBNA also allows a VAXBI system to be used as a boot member in a
Local Area VAXcluster. (The number of satellite nodes that can be supported varies by system.) One DEBNA is a standard component of each
VAXBI system.
The DEBNA is a single VAXBI module that supports the physical and
data-link communications layers. It operates at speeds up to 5-Mb/s peak
hardware throughput. (Actual throughput depends on system configuration, packet sizes, and application.)

..c:
....

~
~

....&
.....e
y

c
c

2.71

802.3/Ethernet Communications Controllers

Multiple DEBNA controllers can be added for control of multiple local
area networks. Each DEBNA must be connected to a separate LAN, except
when two controllers are connected to the same LAN with one on standby.
The maximum number of DEBNA controllers allowed per system depends
on available system DC power, available backplane space, and the following
system limits:
• VAX 87xx/88xx systems may have a maximum of three DEBNA controllers
per VAXBI channel and a maximum of four DEBNA controllers per system .
Four DEBNA controllers on internal VAXBI channels may connect to the
standard baseband cable with transceivers or a DELNI. DEBNA controllers
on external VAXBI channels must connect through a DELNI.
• VAX 85xx systems may have a maximum of three DEBNA controllers per
VAXBI channel and a maximum of four DEBNA controllers per system . No
more than two DEBNA controllers on internal VAXBI channels may connect to the standard baseband cable through a transceiver. External VAXBI
channels allow only one standard 802.3/ Ethernet transceiver connection
per channel. Additional connections must be through a DELNI.
·VAX 82xx/83xx Configuration 2 systems may have a maximum of two
DEBNA controllers per system. Both DEBNA controllers may be connected
to the standard baseband cable using the transceiver or DELNI.
• VAX 82xx/83xx Configuration 1 systems may have a maximum of two
DEBNA controllers per system. The standard 802.3/Ethernet transceiver
may be used to connect one controller to the standard baseband cable; the
other connection must be made through a DELNI.

For VAXBI systems which include a UNIBUS , the maximum number of
combined UNIBUS and VAXBI 802 .3/Ethernet controllers per system
cannot exceed the maximum numbers listed above.
Specifications
Mounting Code: One VAXBI Slot
Power Requirements :
- de amps drawn at + 5 V: 6.72
- de amps drawn at + 12 V: 0.5 (CK-DEBNA-LJ)
I/O Panel Units: 1 for CK -DEBNA-LJ ; 2 for -LM , -LN
DEBNA Order Codes
Option

Order Code

VAXBI 802.3/Ethernet controller. Includes base module only.

DEBNA-M

For system installation, select one of the following cabinet kits,
which includes an internal 802.3/Ethernet cable, an I/O
connector panel, and a boot-enable jumper for 802.3/Ethernet:
Cabinet kit for use with VAX 88xx, 87xx, 8550 internal VAXBI
channels.

CK-DEBNA-LJ

Cabinet kit for use with VAX 88xx, 87xx, 8550 and 8350
external VAXBI channels.

CK-DEBNA-LN

Cabinet kit for use with VAX 8350 and 8250.

CK-DEBNA-LM

2.72

802.3/Ethernet Communications Controllers

DELVA

The 802 .3/ Ethernet-to-UNIBUS high-performance synchronous communications controller (DELUA ) connects UNIBUS systems (VAX and PDP) to
both Ethernet V2.0 and IEEE 802.3 local area networks . It is M68000
microprocessor based, operates at 10 Mb/s, and has 4-Mb/s throughput
capability. (Actual device speed and throughput depend on operating
system , system configuration, and application .) The 80-KB RAM is used
primarily for buffering of data at the high bus rate . A separate DMA controller is used to access host memory locations.
The DELUA microcode implements data encapsulation and decapsulation ,
data link management, and all channel access functions to ensure maximum
throughput with minimum processor intervention. It provides such network maintainability features as remote loopback of data from other stations , resident microdiagnostics , system identification, and the loading and
remote booting of UNIBUS PDP-11 systems from other stations on the
network .
The DELUA physically and electrically connects to the standard baseband
cable via transceiver cable (BNE3X or BNE4X series) and either a
baseband transceiver or Local Network Interconnect (DELNI). The DELUA
also connects to a DESTA and ThinWire cable in ThinWire networks.
Transceiver cable can be a maximum of 40 meters ( 131 feet) and must be
ordered separately. Refer to "Communications Cables" in Section 3 for all
order codes .
The DELUA-M option comprises one hex module. A cabinet kit option ,
which must be ordered separately with the DELUA-M , contains a distribution panel and associated internal cabling.
Specifications
Mounting Code: 1 hex slot

Power Requirements :
- de amps drawn at +5 V: 8.0 A
- de amp s drawn at -15 V: 1.0 (to power the transceiver)
Bus Loads: ac 4, de 1
I/O Connection Panel Inserts : 2 panel units
Environmental Class : B (Refer to Appendi x B for details. )
DELUA Order Codes
Option

Order Code

802.3/Ethernet UNIBUS single-line interface communications
controller. Includes base module only.

DELUA-M

For system installation, select the appropriate external cables
and one of the following cabinet kits:
For use with VAX-111725 shielded cabinets.

CK-DELUA-KL

For general purpose use with shielded cabinets.

CK-DELUA-KM

For use with unshielded cabinets.

CK-DELUA-Kl

2.73

802.3/Ethernet Communications Controllers

DELQA

The DELQA is an 802 .3/Ethernet-to-Q-bus communications controller that
connects Q-bus MicroPDP-11 and MicroVAX systems to an Ethernet V2.0
or IEEE 802.3 local area network.
The DELQA provides the firmware capability to support Maintenance
Operation Protocol (MOP), which offers enhanced network management
features , including remote circuit loopback, system identification messages,
remote booting of diskless systems, maintenance of data link counters, and
IEEE 802.2 XID and Test.
The DELQA physically and electrically connects to the standard baseband
cable by means of a cabinet kit, transceiver cable (BNE3L or BNE3H
series), and baseband transceiver or Local Network Interconnect (DELNI).
The DELQA also connects to ThinWire via a DESTA station adapter.
Features
• Dual size module saves on backplane space.

• Low power draw provides more available power for additional peripheral
and communications options.
• On-board self-test executes extensive testing of the DELQA circuitry at
each power-up or reset .
• On -board MOP provides the ability to decrease the demand on system
software, thus reducing processor time required to support network management activities .
Specifications
Mounting Code : 1 dual slot

Power Requirements :
- de amps drawn at + 5 V: 2.5
- de amps drawn at + 12 V: 0.5
Bus Loads: ac 2.2, de 0 .5
110 Connection Panel Insert: Size A
Operating Environment:
- Storage Temperature : 0°C-66°C (32 °F-151°F)
- Operating Temperature: 5°C-60°C (41 °F-140°F)
- Relative Humidity: 10%-95 % non-condensing (Complies with DEC 102
standard , Class C)
DELQA Order Codes
Option

Order Code

802.3/Ethernet-to-Q-bus communications controller. Requires
one of the following cabinet kits.

DELQA-M

Cabinet kit for BA123 and BAll-M enclosure

CK-DELQA-YA

Cabinet kit for MicroPDP-11 BA23 enclosure

CK-DELQA-YB

Cabinet kit for H9642 cabinet

CK-DELQA-YF

2.74

802.3/Ethernet Communications Controllers

DESQA

The DESQA is an 802.3/Ethernet-to-Q-bus communications controller that
connects MicroPDP-11 and MicroVAX systems in BA200-series enclosures
to an 802 .3/Ethernet local area network. Based on the DELQA, the DESQA
combines, on a quad-height module, the functions of the DELQA-M with a
cabinet kit and ThinWire Ethernet station adapter (DESTA). A separate
cabinet kit is not required because the bulkhead is integral to the module
handle .
The DESQA can interface to either standard 802.3/ Ethernet cable (15-pin
D-connector) or to ThinWire (BNC connector). This allows the user to
connect a system to the local area network using a standard 802.3 /
Ethernet transceiver cable or ThinWire cable.
Specifications
Mounting Code : 1 quad BA200 slot
Power Requirements:
- de amps drawn at + 5 V: 2.4
- de amps drawn at + 12 V: 0.22
- Maximum watts drawn: 14.64
Bus Loads : ac 3.3, de 0.5
Operating Environment :
- Storage Temperature: 0°C-66°C (32 °F-151°F )
- Operating Temperature : 5°C-60°C (41 °F-140°F )
- Relative Humidity : 10 % -95 % non -condensing (Complies with DEC 102
standard , Class C)
Ordering Information
Order the DESQA-SA for factory installation, and the DESQA-SF for field
installation .
The DESQA physically and electrically connects to standard 802.3/
Ethernet cable via BNE3x or BNE4x transceiver cable, directly to BC16M
ThinWire, or to broadband cable via transceiver cable, broadband trans ceiver, and broadband drop cable . These components are not included
with the DESQA .
The following accessories are supplied with the DESQA :
• One ThinWire BNC T-connector

.:~

c
c

• Two 50-ohm terminators

DESQA Order Codes
Factory-installed 802 .3/Ethernet-to-Q-bus communications
controller for BA200-series enclosures.

DESQA-SA

Field-installed 802.3/Ethernet-to-Q-bus communications
controller for BA200-series enclosures.

DESQA-SF

DESQA Technical Manual

EK-DESQA-TM

2.75

802.3/Ethernet Communications Controllers

DES VA

The DESVA is a synchronous 802.3/Ethernet communications controller
that connects MicroVAX 2000 and VAXstation 2000 computers to ThinWire
local area networks. It includes a 15-pin standard Ethernet connector and
a short transceiver cable for direct connection to a baseband 802 .3/
Ethernet transceiver. The DESVA has FCC certification, is fully compatible
with the IEEE 802.3 standard, and operates at 10 Mb/s .
The DESVA provides 802.3/Ethernet data-link layer functions and a portion of the physical channel functions . It is supported under DECnet Phase
IV software . The DESVA is a standard component of the VAXstation 2000,
and optional for the MicroVAX 2000.
DESVA Order Codes

DEPCA

Option

Order Code

ThinWire 802.3/Ethernet communications controller option for
MicroVAX 2000. Includes Networking Guide, T-connector, two
terminators, and connector plus transceiver cable for
connection to standard baseband cable.

DESVA-AA

The DEPCA is an 802 .3/Ethernet communications controller that connects
the IBM PC, PC/XT, and Personal Computer AT to Ethernet and IEEE
802 .3 local area networks. The DEPCA operates at 10 Mb/s .
The DEPCA implements data encapsulation and decapsulation, data link
management, and all channel access functions to ensure maximum throughput. It provides network maintenance features including remote loopback ,
resident self-test diagnostics, and system identification. The DEPCA implements an asynchronous serial channel for connection to the VSXXX-AA
mouse. This interface may be operated in an interrupt driven environment .
The DEPCA contains 48-KB RAM memory, used primarily for buffering
network data at the high bus data rate. The Personal Computer 's CPU is
used to access the buffer memory, and to execute data link and self-test
firmware (contained in a 16 KB ROM memory on the DEPCA module ).
The DEPCA connects directly to the ThinWire cable, using integral transceiver (MAU) circuitry. With the addition of the DEPCA-AU connector
option, the DEPCA can connect to standard baseband cable via a transceiver or Local Network Interconnect (DELNI) .
The DEPCA is offered as a module-only option or as a component of the
Network Integration Packages. .A. For more information, refer to
"Integrated Personal Computing" in Section 5.

2.76

802.3/Ethernet Communications Controllers

Specifications
Mounting Code: One 8-bit PC-bus slot (2 when used with DEPCA-AU)
Power Requirements :
- de amps drawn at + 5 V: 2.0 (max)
- de amps drawn at + 12V: 1.350 (max) ( 1.0 to power the transceiver)
- de amps drawn at -12 V: 0.050 (max)
Bus Loads : 2 LSTTL

110 Connection Panel Inserts : 1 slot (2 when used with DEPCA-AU)
Environmental Class: A (Refer to Appendix B for details.)
DEPCA Order Codes
Option

Order Code

ThinWire 802.3/Ethernet communications controller for IBM
PC, PC/XT, and Personal Computer AT. Includes a ThinWire
assembly kit (T-connector, terminator, and 12-foot PVC BNC
cable).

DEPCA-AA

15-pin 802.3/Ethernet transceiver adapter connects the DEPCA
to standard baseband cable via a transceiver or DELNI.

DEPCA-AU

.:
u

~
c:
0
u

-E
~

..c:

E......e
«"I

0
00

:-E
;.:.

c:
c:
0

2.77

Extended 802.)/ Ethernct Local Arca Network Products

Introduction

A standard 802.3/Ethernet local area network (LAN ) has a limit of 2,800
meters between the farthest two nodes on the network . This limitation is
the sum of
• Two 50-meter transceiver cables extending from the nodes, plus
• Three 500-meter coaxial cable segments that are connected by two pairs of
DEREP fiber optic repeaters , plus
• Four 50-meter transceiver cables connected to the fiber optic repeaters,
plus
• A fiber optic link that is 1,000 meters long .
A Digital extended LAN uses the LAN Bridge 100, METROWAVE Bridge,
and Vitalink Communications Corporation's TransLAN Bridge to increase
the distance between local area networks and to increase the number of
nodes directly connected over 10 Mb/s 802 .3/Ethernet links.
Variations of the LAN Bridge 100 are
·The standard LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET-Ax ), which interfaces two transceiver drop cables.
·The fiber optic LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET-Rx ), which interfaces one transceiver cable and a fiber optic link . The fiber optic link must connect to
either another fiber optic LAN Bridge 100 or to a fiber optic DEREP
repeater.
Bridges and/ or repeaters are required for sites that have more than 90
meters between two LANs , where a pair of 45-meter transceiver cables
would be insufficient to span the distance. • For more information on the
fiber optic repeater, refer to "Baseband 802.3/Ethernet Products" in this
section.
•The METROWAVE Bridge (DEMWB -'' A), which interfaces one transceiver
drop cable at each end with a microwave link . The METROWAVE Bridge
connects geographically separated LANs where cable is neither feasible nor
economical, up to 4.5 miles (7, 240 meters ) bridge to bridge .

LAN Bridge 100, METROWAVE Bridge, and TransLAN Extended LANs
Digital's 802.3/Ethernet bridges, the LAN Bridge 100 and the
METROWAVE Bridge, are designed to transparently connect a series of up
to eight 802 .3/ Ethernet segments, creating an extended LAN that could be
35 kilometers (22 miles ) long. The LAN Bridge 100 and METROWAVE
Bridge provide high -performance throughput across the network . Additionally, the low error rate of the connection is maintained from one end of
the network to the other.
Many of the functions and capabilities of the Digital and Vitalink bridges
are similar. One exception, however, is Digital's implementation of Remote
Bridge Management Software (RBMS ) that allows a privileged user anywhere in the network to monitor and analyze the network.

2.78

Extended 802.3/Ethernet Local Area Network Products

Vitalink's TransLAN Bridge is primarily intended to connect LANs across
distances greater than a few miles where coaxial, fiber optic, or microwave
links are not available or feasible . TransLAN provides industry-standard
V.35 or EIA -232 connections and is capable of transmitting at a maximum
rate of 2.048 Mb/s. This can be a constraint when the average traffic load is
higher than the 2.048 Mb/s capability. Additionally, depending on the
communications links (for example, terrestrial lines) delay may be apparent. Unlike the Remote Bridge Management Software, the TransLAN
Bridge is managed from a bridge-management console attached to the
TransLAN Bridge.

Comparison of Repeaters, Bridges, and Routers
The following table compares the LAN extension features of the LAN
Bridge 100 with the Ethernet Repeater and DECrouter 2000 .
Comparison of Extended LAN Devices

Features

Repeater

Bridge

Router

ISO layer

Physical

Data Link

Network

Forwarding capability

Forwards
bits

Forwards
frames

Forwards
messages

Addressing function

No address

MAC
address 1

Network
address

Network extension

Yes

Packet filtering

Yes

Traffic management

Yes

Network management

Yes

Performance (throughput)

High

Medium
Medium

Cost

Low

Medium

Transparent to upper level protocols

Yes

Message segmentation

NIA

Yes

Load sharing

Yes

Mixed media 2

Yes

Common carrier

Yes

Multivendor network

Yes

Auto back-up 3

Yes

..:

Support for DECnet area routing

NIA

Yes

c
c

Medium Access Control (requires Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 packet format)
2
Refer to the product descriptions for media supported.
3
Ability to activate upon failure of a parallel device

LAN Bridge 100

0
u

The LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET) connects two or more 802.3/Ethernet LANs,
creating an extended local area network. The LAN Bridge 100 uses a storeand-forward technique to receive, regenerate, and transmit packets . This
feature allows users to build extended LANs several times larger than
Ethernet guidelines would otherwise allow.

2.79

Extended 802.3/Ethernet Local Area Network Products

The LAN Bridge 100 can connect broadband 802.3/Ethernet networks,
baseband networks , or a combination of the two . It improves network
performance by dynamically managing the data traffic flow. A user can
increase bandwidth efficiency by isolating traffic on heavily loaded segments from the rest of the network. Traffic management is done automatically while still providing fu ll network connectivity. Locally destined traffic
remains local; remote traffic is forwarded to the appropriated destination .
The bridge operates at the data link level and is protocol-independent . Any
protocols that run on Ethernet/IEEE 802.3, such as DECnet, LAT, XNS, or
TCP/ IP, can simultaneously take advantage of a LAN Bridge with no loss of
performance .
Changes in network configuration are automatically detected by the bridge
within seconds and its memory is updated . Bridges may be used in any
arbitrary topology, thereby allowing them to be used in parallel with other
bridges to provide an auto-backup capability. Bridges causing loops in this
situation automatically enter a backup state. A bridge that is in the backup
state continues to monitor traffic on both LANs and, if the primary bridge
fails , automatically takes over and forwards messages.
This auto-configuring/self-initializing feature of the bridge allows users to
build a network that is immune to misconfiguration. Extended LANs can
evolve without rigorous prior planning . They can be split or joined at any
place or time . Customers do not need a network designer to plan changes
ahead of time because the bridges automatically and completely adjust to
configuration changes .
Digital recommends configuring a maximum of seven bridges in a series to
ensure adequate performance of time-critical protocols . No restrictions
exist on the number of bridges when time-critical protocols are not an
issue . Because it has an 8,000-node address buffer, an extended LAN can
contain more than 8,000 node addresses with only minor degradation to
network performance. An Extended LAN spanning distances up to 35,700
meters can be constructed by using fiber optic and microwave bridges.
Baseband-to-baseband LAN Bridge 100 Configuration

Transceiver

Stan dard
-1~Baseband
Cable

,.
~

Bridge
DEBET-Ax

7
Transceiver Cable

NBG-158-01

2.80

Extended 802.3/Ethernet Local Area Network Products

Baseband-to-broadband Fiber Optic LAN Bridge 100 Configuration

Baseband
Transceiver

11 Fiber Optic
~'

Standard
Baseband
Cable

Bridge
DEBET·RX
JU_/

Fiber Optic~
Cable
L__
Fiber Optic
Bridge
DE BET· RX

Broadband
Transceiver

Broadband
Cable
Broadband Tap

NBG-159-01

Features
• Store-and-forward capability-receives, regenerates, and transmits packets,
enabling the configuration of Extended LANs .
·Address filtering-reduces the total data traffic on an extende·d LAN by not
forwarding those packets that have local destination addresses. Increases
bandwidth efficiency.
• Operates at the data link layer level- allows multivendor implementation
transparent to higher-level protocols such as DECnet, LAT, TCP/IP, or
XNS.
·Baseband and broadband 802.3/Ethernet compatible -connects LANs:
baseband to baseband, baseband to broadband, broadband to broadband.
• No software required-does not require downline loading . No requirement
to have a Digital node on the network.
• Remote Bridge Management Software (RBMS) available for enhanced
management -by using a VAX/VMS system running RBMS, a user can
observe and control any bridge in the extended LAN.
·IEEE 802.3/Ethernet device-can be used in networks compliant with
IEEE 802.3, standard Ethernet, or ThinWire .
·Optional LAN Traffic Monitor (LTM) analyzes extended LAN utiliztion- a
LAN Bridge 100 (minimum revision level E), downline loaded with LTM
software, provides multiple users with timely, accurate traffic performance
statistics.
• Dynamic learning- automatically detects and adjusts to changes in network
configuration.
·Auto backup (using redundant bridges)- increases availability and reliability of the network .

.:~
c
c
0y

~
t

E
u

..c

""'Q
N

........~~
...
y

Q.I

c
c

u
C'I

2.81

Extended 802.3/Ethernet Local Area Network Products

• Write access switch-write protection feature controls the access necessary
to change operating parameters.
• Non-volatile RAM available for storing settable parameters - protects the
settable operating parameters against los s due to power failures .
• Fiber optic version -provides a fiber optic link up to 3,000 meters that is
not affected by electrical or electromagnetic interference and is protected
from moisture. The fiber optic bridge can be used between buildings,
underground, and in harsh environments .
• Rackmount or wallmount-Can be used in a wiring closet or mounted in a
19 -i nch rack.
Specifications
Physical Characteristics

With Plastic End

Without Plastic End

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

16.2 cm (6.4 in)
49.4 cm (19.4 in)
JU cm (12.3 in)
9.5 kg (21 lb)

13.3 cm (5.3 in)
43 .6 cm (17.2 in)
29.8 cm (11.7 in)
7.3 kg (16 lb)

Low-range line voltages
High-range line voltages
FrP.quency tolerance
Maximum ac watts drawn

120: 93 to 128 V
240: 207 to 253 V
47 to 63 Hz
150 w

Maximum Heat
Dissipation

500 Btu/h

Performance

j. Refer to "LAN Bridge 100 Performance Guidelines" in
Appendix A for packet-processing rates of the LAN
Bridge and for power budget specifications of fiber optic
links.

Power Requirements

Required Hardware
• For the standard LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET-Ax):
- Baseband-to -baseband communications require two of the following in
any combination: baseband transceiver or Local Network Interconnect
(DELNI).
- Broadband -to-broadband communications require two Ethermodems.
(Note that the Ethermodem cannot connect to a DELNI.)
- Baseband -to-broadband communications require either a baseband
transceiver or DELNI on the baseband side, and a broadband transceiver
on the broadband side.
• For the fiber optic LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET-Rx): either another fiber optic
bridge or a fiber optic repeater (DEREP-Rx), plus the required hardware
listed for the standard LAN Bridge 100.

Optional Management Software
Remote Bridge Management Software (RBMS) is an optional software
package that allows users at a VAX or MicroVAX node to manage any bridge
in an extended network. The network manager uses RBMS to control each
bridge on the network, view error and traffic counters, operational parameters and the bridge's forwarding database. The manager also uses RBMS to
change various operating parameters such as bridge state, link state and
address filtering characteristics.

2.82

Extended 802.3/Ethernet Local Area Network Products

LAN Traffic Monitor (LTM) is network monitoring software used in
multivendor environments to analyze the utilization of an extended LAN .
LIM allows multiple users at any location to access traffic information that
is gathered from any device connected to the LAN . LIM displays data,
which is based on nodes, addresses, and/or protocol types, in graphic and
tabular format. The software is downline loaded into a dedicated LAN
Bridge 100 from a VAX node .
.A For more information, refer to "Network and System Management
Products" in Section 6.

Ordering Information
Local links require one DEBEI bridge; fiber optic links require either two
fiber optic DEBEI bridges, or one fiber optic bridge and one fiber optic
DEREP repeater.
Each local or fiber optic bridge purchased for use outside the United States
requires a country kit that contains a power cord. (Versions for use within
the United States do not require a country kit. ) For countries not listed in
the order code table, select a kit that uses the same plug configuration .
Transceivers , transceiver cables, and fiber optic cable must be ordered
separately. Refer to this section and to "Communications Cables" in Section
3 for more information.
LAN Bridge 100 Order Codes
Option

Order Codes

Local LAN Bridge 100 for United States. Includes 110- Vac
power cord. Does not require a country kit.

DEBET-AA

Local LAN Bridge 100 for non-U.S. countries. Requires a
country kit.

DEBET-AB

Fiber optic LAN Bridge 100 for United States. Includes a 110Vac power cord. Does not require a country kit.

DEBET-RH

Fiber optic LAN BrIBge 100 for non-U.S. countries. Requires a
country kit.

DEBET-RJ

Upgrade kit to convert older-model DEBET-RC/RD to DEBETRH/RJ. Includes field service installation. One version for 110
or 220-240 Vac. (Does not convert DEBET-AA or DEBET-AB.)

FOAED-AA

LAN Bridge 100 Country Kit Order Codes
Country

Order Code

Austria, Belgium, Finland, France, Germany, Netherlands,
Norway, Portugal, Spain, Sweden

BN03A-2E

Australia, New Zealand

BN05A-2E

Denmark

BN06A-2E

Ireland, United Kingdom

BN02A-2E

Italy

BN07A-2E

Switzerland

BN04A.-2E

2.83

Extended 802.3/Ethernet Local Area Network Products

METROWAVE Bridge

The METROWAVE Bridge connects geographically separated 802.3/
Ethernet LANs within a metropolitan or campus environment in which
cable is neither feasible nor economical. The METROWAVE Bridge consists
of two LAN Bridge lOOs connected by microwave transmission medium,
thus adding microwave technology to the LAN Bridge lOO's traditional
coaxial and fiber optic transmission media.
The METROWAVE Bridge is a high-performance 802 .3/Ethernet device
that connects two or more LANs separated by such obstacles as streets ,
highways , and waterways. Transparent to the user, the bridge provides
high-speed transmission via a 23 -gigahertz (GHz) wideband , duplex,
frequency-modulated microwave link. The METROWAVE Bridge spans
single-link line-of-sight distances up to 4.5 miles, bridge to bridge . Multiple METROWAVE Bridges can be connected to reach greater distances,
provided they adhere to 802 .3/Ethernet configuration rules .
The METROWAVE Bridge provides a microwave connection that delivers
the same high performance and store-and-forward filtering capability as the
standard and fiber optic LAN Bridge lOOs . The METROWAVE Bridge can
simultaneously handle any protocols that run on 802 .3/Ethernet, accommodating totally Digital, multivendor, or totally non-Digital networks .
The microwave equipment for this product is manufactured by a joint
marketing partner, M/A-COM , Inc. The microwave radios, modified specifically for the METROWAVE Bridge, are based on widely proven 23-GHz
technology. Digital's microwave adapter converts microwave equipment
signal levels to standard 802.3/Ethernet signal levels. It also notifies the
LAN Bridge 100 of a collision when both link stations attempt simultaneous transmission over the microwave link .
A complete METROWAVE Bridge system comprises two microwave link
stations as shown in the following figure.
METROWAVE Bridge Configuration

Microwave Link
Anten[f?\------:-LL ----Q!ntenna
METROWAVE

----4~.5=-mi - -•

Bridge

•

Ethernet LAN
Site A

Transceiver

METROWAVE

·•- -'l ~,.,_"'-----·
Transceiver

Ethernet LAN
Site B

NBG-160-00

2.84

Extended 802.3/Ethernet Local Area Network Products

Features
• T he microwave link, transparent to the user, allows connection when cable
is too expensive or not feasible .
• 802 .3/Ethernet 10 Mb/s bandwidth provides high-speed transmission .
• Protocol independence and Ethernet Version 2.0 compliance accommodates multivendor environments.
• Easily installed for quick availability.
• "T" -carrier and video system can be combined with the METROWAVE
Bridge to increase flexibility and reduce overall costs .
• 802.3/Ethernet permits use in networks that are 802.3, standard Ethernet,
or ThinWire compli ant .
A Refer to the LAN Bridge 100 product description for additional features
that the METROWAVE Bridge shares with the LAN Bridge 100.

A vailability
This product is available in the United States, Canada, and Austral ia.
Limited avai lability of private-use licenses for 23-GHz microwave equipment exists in some other countries where M/A-COM equipment is distributed and supported . P lease call the Digital Computer Special Systems
group at 1-800-832 -6277 for details , or Di gital Annecy in Europe .
Implementing the Link
The customer is responsible for such activities as path survey, site analysis,
and compliance with FCC licensing regulations. Assistance in performing
these activities is available from Digital and authorized M/A-COM dealers.
Additional information on implementing the link is listed in a separate
Digital publication, METROWAVE Bridge Links Ethernet LANs with Microwave Technology (YM-AA114-00) , or is available by calling 1-800-832-6277.
Specifications
The LAN Bridge 100 and the microwave adapter operate at 10 Mb/s using
the Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD)
technique. The radio frequenc y (RF) unit generates a 23 -GHz microwave
carrier. It is co-located with the antenna and is powered by a cable from
the microwave transmitter and receiver controllers.

llc
c
0

u
~

2.85

Extended 802.3/Ethernet Local Area Network Products

The following specifications are the aggregate totals for the LAN Bridge,
the microwave adapter, the transmitter controller, and the receiver controller. For individual specifications , refer to a separate Digital publication,
METROWAVE Bridge Links Ethern et LANs with Microwave Technology
(YM -AA114-00).
Physical Characteristics

Height
Depth
Width
Weight

31.50 in
31.25 in
21.35 in
190 lb

Power Requirements

Voltage tolerance
Line frequency
Maximum current
Power consumption

93 to 128 Vac
60 Hz
3.95 A (120 Vac)
326 W (Maximum)

Environmental Class

B .& Refer to Appendix B for details.

Prerequisite Software
No special software is required for operation of the METROWAVE Bridge
because the bridge control functions are resident in the LAN Bridge 100
component.
Optional Management Software
Remote Bridge Management Software (RBMS) is recommended for
enhanced control and monitoring of the microwave link for Digital
LANs . .& Refer to "Network and System Management Products" in Section
6 for more information.
METROWAVE Bridge Order Codes for Digital Components
Option

Order Code

A METROWAVE Bridge includes two each: LAN Bridge 100,
standard Ethernet transceiver, microwave adapter, BNEJM-20,
BNE4D-02 , and cable adapter. The METROWAVE Bridge is
available premounted in 31.5-inch cabinets, or in non-cabinet
configurations suitable for rack mounting in Satellite Equipment
Room (SER) racks.
METROWAVE Bridge in 2-cabinet configuration package

DEMWB-AA

METROWAVE Bridge in 2 -SER-compatible configuration package

DEMWB-BA

METROWAVE Bridge in 1-cabinet and 1-SER-compatible
configuration package

DEMWB-CA

Ordering MIA-COM Components
The M/A -COM LAN radio components , designated MA-23 LAN , include the
following :
• Two transmitter controllers
• Two receiver controllers
•Two 23-GHz RF units
• Two 4-foot coa xial cables
• Two 2- or 4-foot microwave antennas

2.86

Extended 802.3/Ethernet Local Area Network Products

The MA-23 LAN and its instal lation are purchased separately through an
authorized M/A-COM dealer. Contact the Digital Computer Special Systems
group at 1-800-832-6277 for the name , address , and telephone number of
the nearest authorized M/A-COM dealer.
TransLAN

Digital and Vitalink Communications Corporation have a third-party marketing agreement to offer a device that allows connection of multiple
Et hernet or IEEE 802 .3 LANs into one extended network . The Vitalink
product, TransLAN, connects via terrestrial link, extending the LAN from
1. 74 miles (2.8 kilometers ) to thousands of miles.
TransLAN, which includes hardware and software, is a bridge that provides
protocol-transparent connection of similar or dissimi lar higher- level protocols on two or more LANs . It serves as a link- level relay, transferring data
independently of the higher-level protocols in use. In order to tra nslate
between higher-level protocols, gateways are required .
TransLAN can connect 802.3 / Ethernet LANs to digital transmission systems , for example, terrestrial private lines. On one side, TransLAN connects to an 802 .3/Ethernet LAN , while on the other side, it provides
industry-standard V.35 or EIA-232 connections . LAN-to -LAN connections
are supported at speeds up to 2.048 Mb/s. When using time-critical protocols, a minimum line speed of 56 Kb /s is recommended.
Using TransLAN , Digital systems networked with DECnet 802.3/ Ethernet
can commu nicate . Beyond the requirement that systems connect to an
802.3 / Ethernet LAN , the bridge does not restrict higher-level communications protocols.
Features
• Connecting Ethernet or IEEE 802.3 LANs via TransLAN allows long dis tance broadcast communications, similar to using one local area network.

• Using multiple bridges connecting LANs , one node can send messages to
many other local and remote nodes concurrently .
• Connects DECnet Phase III and DECnet Phase IV networks . Depending on
the functions required and network configuration , you may choose a bridge
or a router. A DECrouter 2000 is usuall y less expensive.
• TransLAN can connect Digital nodes running DECnet or other networking
software on one 802.3/ Ethernet LAN to Digital nodes running DECnet or
other networking software on another 802.3 / Ethernet LAN . The same
requirement that exists on a local LA N -that stations communicating with
each other must run the same protocols - also applies to nodes running on
separate LAN s connected by TransLA N.
• TransLAN can connect non-Digital nodes on one 802 .3/Ethernet LAN to
simi lar non-Digital nodes on a remote 802 .3/ Ethernet LAN . TransLAN can
also con nect Dig ital nodes on the two LANs at the same time . (Note that
communication is limited to homogeneous systems. )

-s
u

..c:

~
......
!'i

0
00

:--e
;.:,

c
0

2.87

Exten de d 802.3/Ethernet Local Area Network Products

Network Configuration
. Usin8 TransLAN

Host

Trans LAN

NBG-161-01

2.88

Extended 802.3/Ethernet Local Area Network Products

Specifications

Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Length
Weight

14.0 cm (5.5 in)
43.2 cm (17 in)
54.1 cm (21.3 in)
12.2 kg (27 lb)

Power Requirements
ac watts drawn at 100 V, 47 Hz
ac watts drawn at 120 V, 47 Hz
ac watts drawn at 230 V, 47 Hz

400
400
400

Environmental Class

C .A Refer to Appendix B for details.

Port Interfaces
User Port Interface
Terrestrial Port Interfaces
Terrestrial Port Data Capacity
Frame Processing Rates

Ethernet Version 2.0 or IEEE 802.3
16 V.35/16 EIA-232
2.048 Mb/s
15,000 frames per second filtering
600 to 1, 500 frames per second
forwarding, depending on the application

Availability
TransLAN is available in some countries outside the United States via
distributors. Contacr a local marketing representative for more information.

Ordering Information
TransLAN is serviced and supported by Vitalink. For more information,
contact your local Digital sales office.

.;<.I

c
c
0

2.89

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

802.3/Ethernet communications servers are divided into Terminal Severs,
Print Servers, Routers and Gateways . Terminal and Print Servers are
dedicated, special-purpose systems that provide resource sharing across
nodes within a local area network (LAN). Router and gateway servers
provide connection to nodes off the local area network via synchronous or
asynchronous communication lines.

Terminal and Print Servers
Digital's Terminal and Print Server products include the following:
• DECserver 200-Connects up to eight terminals, serial printers, or
modems to one or more hosts on an 802.3/Ethernet LAN.
• DECserver 550-Connects from eight to 128 terminals , serial printers, or
modems to one or more hosts on the 802.3/Ethernet LAN.
• MUXserver 100/DECmux II Remote Terminal Server-Connects up to 16
terminals, PCs, or serial printers at remote sites to one or more hosts on
the LAN.
• PrintServer 40-Provides high-volume laser printing via a dedicated data
print controller to client nodes in a local area network.

Routers and Gateways
Digital's Router and Gateway products include the following:
• DECrouter 200- Transfers data packets from DECnet nodes on an
802.3/Ethernet LAN to remote DECnet nodes or other 802.3/Ethernet
LANs via asynchronous lines .
• DECrouter 2000-Provides synchronous connections to remote a DECnet
system and LANs in a wide area network or between remote LANs using
DECnet.
• X25router 2000- Combines the functions of DECrouter 2000 with additional X.25 connections to Packet Switching Data Networks (can run both
DECnet and X.25 concurrently).
• DECnet/SNA Gateway for Synchronous Transport-Connects
802.3/Ethernet LANs to IBM hosts using high-performance and highbandwidth connections to front -end processors .
• DECnet/SNA Gateway for Channel Transport-Connects an
802.3/Ethernet LAN to an IBM host using direct attachment to the S/3 70
channel.
The DECrouter 2000, X25router 2000, and DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST share
a common hardware base, the DEC MicroServer (DEMSA) , used whenever
communication is required from an Ethernet LAN into a Wide Area Network (WAN) environment. Special software determines which function the
DEC MicroServer performs.

2.90

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

Features
• Provides resource sharing across multihost systems within an
802.3/Ethernet LAN.

• Performs a dedicated function whose cost can be spread over many users.
• Increases 802 .3/ Ethernet LAN configuration flexibility.
• Offloads communications processing from 802 .3/ Ethernet nodes , reducing
CPU overhead .
• Automatic diagnosis on startup checks communications-server operation,
increasing network reliability.
Summary of 802.J/Ethernet Terminal Servers
Server Product

DECserver 200

DECserver 550

MUXserver 100/
DECmux II

Hardware Type

DSRVB

DSRVS

DSRZA/DFMZA

Number of Lines/
Maximum
Throughput

8@ 19.2 Kb/s

Up to 128
(160,000 char/s
output, 14,000
char/s input
-applicationdependent)

16@ 19.2 Kb /s

MultiCPU Access

Yes

Modem Control

MC version- Yes;
DL version-No

CXY08-Yes;
CXA16-No
CXB16-No

Protocols

Asynchronous

Downline-load
Host Support 1

DECnet-VAX,
DECnet-llMPLUS,
DECnet-Micro/
RSX ,
DECnet-ULTRIX

DECnet-VAX,
DECnet-llM PLUS,
DECnet-Micro/
RSX

DECnet-VAX,
DECnet-llMPLUS,
DECnet-Mic ro/
RSX,
DECnet-ULTRIX

Operational Host
Support 1

VMS ,
RSX-llM-PLUS,
Micro RSX,
ULTRIX -32 2

VMS,
RSX -llM -PLUS,
MicroRSX

VMS,
RSX-UM-PLUS,
MicroRSX,
ULTRIX-32

Connect to nonLAT hosts;
modem control;
DEC423 (EIA423 -A) connection

Modular growth ;
high density with
small footprint;
decreased costper-port as users
increase

..:
u
u

Primary Buying
Reason

1The terminal servers support only DECnet Phase IV implementations .
2

LAT support .

Efficient remote
terminal
connection ; low
price per line

c:
c:

....u
E
u

..=

""f'i
Q

....>.

:E....
u

c:
c:
0

2.91

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

Summary of 802.J/Ethernet Routers and Gateways
Server Product

DECrouter 200

DECrouter 2000 X25router 2000

DECnet/SN A
Gateway-ST

DECnet/SN A
Gateway-CT

Hardware Type

DSRVC

DEMSA

DEM SA

DES NA

Number of Lines/ Maximum Throughput

8@ 19.2 Kb/s

2@ 256 Kb/s
4 @ 64 Kb/s

2 @ 256 Kb/s
4 @ 64 Kb/s

1@ 256 Kb/s
2@ 128 Kb/s
4@ 64 Kb/s

1@ channel
speed

MultiCPU Access

Yes

Modem Control

Full

Protocols

Asynchronous
DDCMP

DDCMP

DDCMP, X.25
(LAPB)

Synchronous
SDLC

Channel

Downline-load Host Support'

DECnet-VAX,
DECnet-ULTRIX

DECnet-VAX
DECnet-ULTRIX

DECnet-VAX,

DECnet-VAX

Operational Host Support'

Any Phase IV
DECnet node

Any Phase III or VMS
Phase IV
DECnet
node

VMS,
ULTRIX-32,
MS-DOS

Primary Buying Reason

Cost-effective
PC-to-LAN
connection

Connects Phase
III nodes and
wide area nodes
to LAN;
offloads nodes
from communications
processing

Connects an
802.3/Ethernet
LAN to as many
as four IBM SNA
networks over
synchronous
communications lines

High-end
DECnet/SN A
transport
provides
channel
connection for
Digital/IBM
communications

Multi CPU
access to
PSDNs ; price
and
performance
advantages over
VAX CPUs
acting as
dedicated
gateways

'The DECnet/SNA Gateway products support only DECnet Phase IV implementations, while the DECrouter 2000 and X25router 2000
support any Phase III or Phase IV implementation.

Terminal Server Overview

Terminal servers provide a cost-effective, flexible way to connect terminals
to hosts in an 802.3/Ethernet LAN. Each terminal connected to a terminal
server can access services running on service nodes connected to the sa me
LAN (refer to Prerequisite Software for supported hosts) . Terminal servers
connect asynchronous terminals at speeds up to 19.2 Kb/s to local nodes
that implement the Local Area Transport (LAT) protocol.
Digital offers the following terminal server products:
• DECserver 200- an eight-line server that includes software that is
downline loaded into DSRVB hardware . The DECserver 200 has a version
with modem control (MC), and a DEC423 (EIA-423-A) version for dataonly leads with no modem control.
• DECserver 550 - an eight-to-128-line server that includes software that is
downline loaded into DSRVS hardware . The DECserver 550 can accommodate three types of line controllers: one for full modem control, one for
DEC423 (EIA-423-A) connections with no modem control, and one for
EIA-422 connections with no modem control.
• MUXserver 100/DECmux II -a 16-line remote server that includes
MUXserver 100 V2.0 software downline loaded into DSRZA hardware , and
a remote multiplexer, the DFMZA.

2.92

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

Server software, including diagnostics , is downline-loaded into the server
from a load host. In the event of hardware or software malfunction, the
unit attempts to upline-dump the memory image (for later analysis), and
automatically reloads the software.
The function performed by these terminal servers is similar to that offered
by traditional terminal data switches (for example, Gandalf or Micom ).
The difference is that the terminal servers handle terminal communications
over a communications line, while a traditional switch requires multiple
terminal line connections. This results in a significant reduction in cost per
line when using terminal servers, especially when cabling, host power, and
packaging expenses are factored into the overall cost of network terminal
connection .

In a VAXcluster environment, terminal servers add significantly in maintaining high availability to the cluster. Features such as log-in load balancing, automatic login failover, and multisession terminal connections provide
greater user productivity.
Terminal servers support VT, LN, LA and LQ series terminal devices as
well as Digital devices that run in VTlOO compatibility mode (for example,
the DECmate II and III , the Rainbow personal computer, and the Professional 300 Series computers) .
Terminals connected to terminal servers can access remote DECnet nodes
through DECnet Phase IV routing nodes on the same LAN. They can also
connect to VMS nodes running Access software to access a X25router 2000
or DECnet/SNA Gateway. Note that a system on the LAN does not have to
be running DECnet to communicate with the terminal servers. However,
DECnet must be running on at least one node on the LAN in order to
downline load the terminal server.

Printer Support
A terminal server used for printer applications provides a cost-effective
way to distribute a printer or a collection of printers in an 802 .3/Ethernet
LAN. Each printer connected to a server can be shared between multiple
VMS nodes connected to the same LAN. A terminal server can connect
asynchronous printers at speeds up to 19.2 Kb/s to local nodes that implement the LAT protocol. Refer to the appropriate terminal-server Software
Product Description for a list of printers supported.
Features
The following features are common to Digital terminal servers:
· Multiple Sessions- Users can establish and maintain multiple sessions to
several service nodes. Only one session is active at a time and users can
access the different sessions without repeating a login dialog.

..:
CJ
II.I

c
c
0

• Load Balancing- When more than one node offers the same service, the
server connects to the node with the highest rating for the service desired .
This rating is based on the current loading on the nodes that offer the
service.
• Automatic Sessions Failover- The server provides increased reliability and
redundancy by allowing terminals logically connected to a failed host to
access other hosts on the LAN.

2.93

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

·Terminal Request Management- The server eliminates terminal "blocking"
(a limitation of data switches) by managing multiple terminal requests
logically instead of physically. The LAT software allows the terminal server
to effectively "multiplex" many terminal access requests over a single
physical line.
·Terminal Connection Management- Users can establish a logical connection (session ) to any local service node that implements the LAT protocol.
Users connect to the services offered rather than the node itself. All the
standard system utilities and applications supported by the node are available to the user.
• Security- The server provides multiple levels of security for terminal
access to network hosts , preventing unauthorized users from accessing
network resources .
·PC File Transfer-poly-XFR File Transfer for IBM Personal Computers.
LAN Configuration Using Terminal Servers

Printer

Printer
DEC-

DEC-

mux

ULTRIX-32

VMS

VAX8800

VAX 8700

Standard Ethernet Cable

Non-Digital
Host

PDP-11 /84

RSX-11M-PLUS

MicroVAX
II

VMS

Digital
Non-LAT
Host

NBG- 163-01

2.94

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

DECserver 200

The DECserver 200 is a network terminal switch for 802.3/Ethernet local
area networks . It supports the simultaneous operation of up to eight terminals at speeds up to 19.2 Kb/s full duplex. Two versions of the DECserver
200 are available: DECserver 200/MC and DECserver 200/DL.
The following capabilities are supported by the DECserver 200/MC
(Modem Control) :

DECserver 200

• EIA-232-D line interface
· Modem Control- The DECserver 200 provides modem support for asynchronous modems (Digital's modems or BELL 103, 212, and 2400 baud
modems)

•'
-~·
DECserver 200/MC

DECserver 200/DL

• LED enhanced visual communication monitors
· Connection to Non-LAT Hosts- The DECserver 200/MC provides transparent logical terminal connections to hosts that do not implement the LAT
protocol. In this type of configuration, the DECserver 200 becomes the
802.3/Ethernet connection and protocol support for these hosts . Users can
access LAT and non-LAT hosts directly via a DECserver 200 . A host that
supports XON/XOFF , ASCII standards, and EIA-232-D interfaces can be
connected to the DECserver 200.
The DECserver 200/DL (Data Leads) has a single 36-pin connector capable
of supporting eight DECconnect ports (DEC423) . A special cable is
required to connect the DECserver 200/DL to equipment that can interface
to DEC423 signals . DECserver 200/DL does not support modems or applications with devices that require modem control signals. The DECserver
200/DL is intended for applications requiring only data leads to serial
terminals or printers . Refer to "DECconnect" in this section for more
information .
Features
• Terminal Device/Session Management Protocol (TD/ SMP) supports these
functions on VT330 and VT340 terminals:
- Two terminal sessions can be active simultaneously, regardless of which
session is displayed on the screen.
- Users can concurrently display the interaction with two sessions on a
divided screen.
- While the user is interacting with one session, the other session can
continue processing.

Refer to Terminal Server Overview in this section for other DECserver 200
features.
Specifications
Physical Characteristics :
- Height : 11 .75 cm (4.63 in)
- Width : 48 .90 cm (19.25 in)
- Depth: 32.07 cm (12.63 in)
- Weight: 5.44 kg (12 lb)
- Environmental Class: C (Refer to Appendix B for details.)
Prerequisite Hardware
• All 802.3/ Ethernet physical channel hardware .

• Either an 802.3/Ethernet transceiver, a DELNI, or DESTA and transceiver
drop cable.

2.95

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

Prerequisite Software
• DECserver 200 software must be downline loaded from one of the following load hosts: DECnet-VAX, DECnet-UM, DECnet-UM-PLUS, DECnetMicro/RSX, and ULTRIX-32 .
• For service node support, one of the following operating systems is
required: VMS, MicroVMS, RSX-UM-PLUS with DECnet-UM-PLUS ,
Micro/RSX with DECnet Micro/RSX, ULTRIX-32.
• Refer to the Software Product Description for the version number
requirements.

Terminal Server Manager Optional Software
The Terminal Server Manager/VMS is a software tool that allows a user at a
VAX host to remotely observe and control Digital terminal servers anywhere in an extended local area network. For more information, refer to
Terminal Server Manager in this section .
Ordering Information
Order the DECserver 200 hardware , a country kit for 240-V versions, and
at least one copy of the software. Cables to connect terminals and modems
must be ordered separately.
The DECserver 200 hardware includes the license to run DECserver 200
software. Software on the appropriate distribution medium must be purchased for the host that downline loads the DECserver 200.
The DECserver 200 country kit includes a power cord, hardware manual ,
and rackmounting brackets. The 240-V versions of the DECserver 200
require a country kit; the 120-V versions include the country kit. A 120 -V
country kit for the U.S. and Canada is listed to retrofit models originally
ordered for 240 V.
DECserver 200 Hardware Order Codes
Option

Order Code

8-line DECserver 200, 120 V, supports 8 EIA-232-D physical
terminal connections. Includes country kit.

DSRVB-AA

8-line DECserver 200, 120 V, supports DEC423 data-only
terminal connections. Includes SER adapter kit and country kit.

DSRVB-BA

8·· line DECserver 200, 240 V, supports 8 EIA-232 -D physical
terminal connections. Requires country kit.

DSRVB-AB

8-line DECserver 200, 240 V, supports 8 DEC423 data-only
terminal connections. Includes SER adapter kit; requires
country kit.

DSRVB-BB

2.96

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

DECserver 200 Power Corel Order Codes
Country

Order Code

Australia, New Zealand

DSRVB-KZ

Belgium, Finland, France, Holland ,
Norway, Spain, Sweden

DSRVB-LA

Canada (English and French), United
States

DSRVB-KA

Denmark

DSRVB -KD

Italy

DSRVB-KI

India

DSRVB-LJ

Israel

DSRVB-KT

Japan

DSRVB-KJ

Switzerland (French and German)

DSRVB-LB

United Kingdom

DSRVB-KE

West Germany

DSRVB-KG

DECserver 200 Software Order Codes for VMS
Option

Order Code

Materials and Installation:

Distribution and documentation

QA-VCBAA-H#

Documentation only

QA -VCBAA-GZ

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-VCBAA -HZ

Installation Service

QT-VCBAA -I#

#Supported media: 3, 5, G, M, Y

DECserver 200 Software Order Codes for ULTRIX and RSX
Option

Order Code

Materials and Installation

ULTRIX-32

Micro/RSX

RSX-HMPLUS

Distribution and documentation

Q*Z14 -HG
Q*Z14 -HM

QYZ06-H3
QYZ06-H5

QRZ06-HH
QRZ06-HM

Software revision right-to-copy

Q*Z14 -HZ

QYZ06-HZ

QRZ06-HZ

ti
II.I
c

Documentation only

QLZ14-GZ

QYZ06-GZ

QRZ06-GZ

*Supported processors(*): VAX 8200/8250 (5); VAX 8300/8350 (7); VAX 8500/8530 (9);
VAX 8550 (2); VAX 8600/8650 (K); VAX 8700 (2); VAX 8800 (M); VAX 8974/8978 (2)

'For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.

2.97

802 .3/Ethernet Communications Servers

Terminal Cables
To connect terminals to the DECserver 200/MC, order the following cables.
(When ordering cables refer to "Communications Cables" in Section 3 for
cable options and be sure to specify length, for example, BC22F-25.)
• BC22E-Full modem 16-wire cable for modem connections .
• BC22F-Full modem 25-wire cable for modem connections.
• BC22R-Recommended null modem cable for host systems and other
devices, including those that utilize CTS/RTS flow control.
• BC17D-Null modem cable for host systems and other devices that do not
utilize CTS/RTS flow control.
DECserver 550

The DECserver 550 terminal server is a terminal switch capable of connecting large concentrations of terminals, serial printers, and modems to
one or many hosts on an 802.3/Ethernet local area network . It can also be
used to connect other vendors' processors to the local area network, allowing access to terminal-server users. It is the high-end companion to the
DECserver 200 terminal server.
The DECserver 550 high-density compact packaging supports up to 128
terminal connections via eight integral card slots that support terminal
interface options:
• The CXY08 with modem control provides eight EIA-232-D 25-pin connections.
• The CXA16 provides 16 EIA-423-A modular-jack local connections for local
terminals or serial printers.
• The CXB16 provides 16 EIA-422 modular-jack connections to terminals in
harsh environments loacted at distances up to 4,000 feet.
_. For more information on the CX modules, refer to "Q-bus Communications Controllers" in Section 3.

A fully populated DECserver 550 with EIA-423-A or EIA-422 interface
options supports a maximum of 128 terminal devices. A fully populated
DECserver 550 with EIA -232-D interface options supports a maximum of
64 devices. Or, any combination of interface op tions, up to eight total, can
be mixed within the same enclosure.
The DECserver 550 with CXY08 EIA-232-D interface provides a non-LAT
802 .3/Ethernet interface that connects non-Digital equipment, including
processors, modems, protocol converters , Data PBXs, and virtually any
device with a serial port that supports asynchronous EIA-232-D connections
with modem control.
The DECserver 550 in many ways performs like a Data PBX. It can co-exist
with or replace existing Data PBXs as part of a migration path to 802.3/
Ethernet local area networks.
The DECserver 550 is avai lable in two versions: one for rackmounting into
a Digital Satellite Equipment Room (SER) or 19-inch utility cabinets, and
one with cabinet enclosures for the office floor.

2.98

802 .3/Ethernet Communications Servers

Features
• Ideally suited for connecting large concentrations of terminal devices to
802.3/Ethernet local area networks.

• Can co-exist with or replace traditional Data PBX switches as a migration
path to 802 .3/Ethernet local area networks .
• Protocol compatible with the family of Digital terminal servers.
• High-density packaging supports a large number of terminal connections
from a compact footprint size.
• Decreased cost-per-connection as the number of users increase .
• Printer support for VAX and MicroVAX systems allows users to share
printers.
• Supports multiple sessions , up to a total of 512 per DECserver 550 . Users
can simultaneous maintain multiple sess ions to several hosts , resulting in
greater productiv~
• Modular design allows incremental growth from eight to 128 terminal
connections , depending on the interface modules se lected.
• Accommodates a total of 64 lines with eight CXY08 controllers, or 128
lines with eight CXA16 or CXB16 controllers, or any combination of the
three (up to a total of eight controllers ).
• Includes one year hardware and software warranty.
• Refer to "Terminal Server Overview" in this section for other terminal
server features .

The following figures shows how the DECserver 550 with CXA16 (no
modem control) can be configured for the Office Communications Cabinet.

...:
u
Q.I

c
0

~....
Q.I

E
Q.I

..c:

""
~

:.:,

...·::......
I.I
Q.I

2.99

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

DECserver 500 Rackmounted in an H9646 -E Office Communications Cabinet

HIGH -SPEED
PATCHING

DEMPRs

DS500

LKG-1 6n -87

Front View

LKG-2046-88

Rear View

2.100

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

DECserver JJO Non·raclcmounted, Standalone Configuration

DECserver 500 CON FIGURA TlON
EIHERNET COAXIAL CABLE

CXY08 OPTION CARO
RS-232 COMPATIBLE

TRANSCEIVER
(H4000, DESTA, DELNI, EIHERMOOEM)

CXA16 OPTION CARO
OEC-423 COMPATIBLE

ETHERNET
CONTROLLER

llHEJ-XX OR llHE,.__XX
lRANSCfl'v£R CA8l.£•

"ti' CXA16

"ti' CXY08
TWO 12-FOOT EXTENSION
CABLES W/RS-232-C
CONNECTORS
~

HJio 4 CABLf,..
CONCENlRA /

TWO 25-FOOT EXTENSION
CABLES W/REMOTE
/CABLE CONCENTRATORS

VT22D
TERMINAL

NON-LAT HOST
(DEC OR NON-DEC)

SERIAL
PRINTER

"o" denotes included with ex communications option.

E
u

LKG-1684-68

..c

N
0

Q()

:-e
>.

c
0

2.101

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

Specifications
Physical Characteristics

Office Model

Rackmount Model

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

.69 m (27 in)
.53 m (21 in)
.45 m (17.8 in)
39.5 kg (85 lb)

.66 m (26.25 in)
.46 m (18.28 in)
.29 m (11.5 in)
28.3 kg (61 lb)

Environmental Class

C (Refer to Appendix B for details.)

Requisite Hardware
• All physical channel hardware.
• Either an 802.3/Ethernet transceiver, a DELNI, or DESTA and transceiver
drop cable.

Prerequisite Software
Instructions for installing the server software are included in the Software
Installation Guide for the appropriate operating systems . Consult the RSX
Software Product Description (SPD ) 18.53 or the VMS SPD 26.97 for
information regarding prerequisites for installation.
Optional Software
The Terminal Server Manager/VMS is a software tool that allows a user at a
VAX host to remotely observe and control Digital terminal servers anywhere in an extended local area network . For more information, refer to
Terminal Server Manager in this section.
Ordering Information
The DECserver 550 hardware (DSRVS ) includes the processor, 802.3/
Ethernet controller, and license to run DECserver 550 software. The
rackmount models (-CA and -CB) include rackmounting brackets. Each
DECserver 550 must be ordered with at least one communications controller : CXY08, CXA16, or CXB16. Up to eight controllers may be ordered in
any combination.
The -CA and -DA models of the DECserver 550 include a power cord . The
-CB and -DB models require a power-cord kit. A U.S./Canada power-cord
kit is available to retrofit models originally ordered for 240 V.
DECserver 550 hardware includes the license to run DECserver 550 software . The software on the appropriate distribution medium must be purchased for the node that downline loads the DECserver 550.

2.102

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

DECserver 550 H11rdw11re Order Codes
Option

Order Code

DECserver 550 rackmount model, 120 V. Includes power cord
kit.

DSRVS-CA

DECserver 550 rackmount model, 240 V. Requires power cord
kit.

DSRVS-CB

DECserver 550 floor model, 120 V. Includes power cord kit.

DSRVS-DA

DECserver 550 floor model , 240 V. Requires power cord kit .

DSRVS-DB

Each DECserver 550 must be ordered with at least one of the
following communications controllers:
Factory-installed 16-line asynchronous communications
controller for DEC423 (EIA-423-A) signaling standard .

CXA16-AA

Factory-installed 16-line asynchronous communications for
EIA-422 signaling standard .

CXB16-AA

Factory-installed 8-line asynchronous communications
controller for EIA-232-D signaling standard.

CXY08·AA

The following may be ordered as field add-on options :
Field-installed 16-line asynchronous communications controller
for DEC423 (EIA-423 -A) signaling standard.

CXA16-AF

Field-installed 16-line asynchronous communications controller
for EIA-422 signaling standard .

CXB16-AF

Field-installed 8-line asynchronous communications controller
for EIA-232-D signaling standard .

CXY08 -AF

DECserver 550 Power Cord Order Codes
Option

Order Code

United States, Canada

BN20A-2E

Japan

BN20B-2E

Australia, New Zealand

BN20C -2E

Belgium, Finland, France, West Germany, Holland, Norway,
Spain, Sweden

BN20D-2E

Ireland, United Kingdom

BN20E-2E

z
r.n

Switzerland

BN20F-2E

.:
...u

Denmark

BN20H-2E

Italy

BN20]-2E

India, South Africa

BN20K-2E

Israel

BN20L-2E

<ll

c:
c:

...0

.:
u
E
u

..c
....

Ee
f'f'\
f'i
Q

.t:

.e....

...

c:
c:
0

u
C'I

2.103

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

DECserver 550 Software Order Codes
Option

VMS

RSX

MicroRSX

Media and
documentation 1

QA-03KAA-HM
QA-03KAA-H3
QA-03KAA-H5

QRZ46-HM
QRZ46-HH

QYZ46-H3
QYZ46-H5

Software revision
right-to-copy

QL-03KAA-HZ

QRZ46-HZ

QYZ46-HZ

Documentation
only

QA-03KAA-GZ

QRZ46-GZ

QYZ46-GZ

Installation
service

QT-03KAA-IM
QT-03KAA-13
QT-03KAA-15

QRZ46-IM
QRZ46-IH

QYZ46-13
QYZ46-I5

The following processors are not supported as downline-load hosts for VMS:
MicroVAX I, VAXstation I, and VAX-11/725.

MUXserver 100/DECmux II
Remote Terminal Server

The MUXserver 100/DECmux II Remote Terminal Server connects up to 16
remote asynchronous terminals, personal computers, and printers via a pair
of modems and a leased phone line to an 802.3/Ethernet local area network. The MUXserver 100 connects to the LAN and functions as a terminal
server for remote devices . The DECmux II connects devices at the remote
site and functions with the MUXserver 100 as a statistical multiplexer to
send data to the LAN.
Features
The MUXserver 100/DECmux II reduces monthly phone charges by concentrating data over one leased phone line, and it offers an efficient and
low-cost method for multiplexing remote devices over one leased phone
line .
.A Refer to "Terminal Server Overview" in this section for other
MUXserver 100 features.
Specifications
Physical Characteristics

MUXserver 100
- (DSRZA)
.

DECmux II (DFMZA)

Height

9.52 cm (3.75 in)

11.43 cm (4.5 in)

Width

45.7 cm (18 in)

35.29 cm (13.5 in)

Depth

30-48 cm (12 in)

22.35 cm (8.8 in)

Weight

6.8 kg (15 lb)

2.95 kg (6.5 lb)

Power Requirements
Low-range line voltage

100 Vac to 120 Vac (-BA versions)

High-range line voltage

200 Vac to 240 Vac (-BB versions)

Frequency tolerance

50160 ±3 Hz

50/60 ±3 Hz

Maximum ac watts drawn

Maximum heat dissipation

393 Btu/h

210 Btu/h

Environmental Class

C (See Appendix B for details.)

2.104

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

Configurations
Each DECmux II can connect up to eight remote devices. Because each
MUXserver 100 can accept up to 16 channels, two DECmux Us can be
linked to one MUXserver 100. Also, each MUXserver WO can accept up to
tWC>composite links. A MUXserver 100 is linked to a DECmux II through a
leased phone line and two external modems operating at a maximum speed
of 19.2 Kb/s. Configurations include
• Sixteen users at one site: Two DECmux IIs can be linked at the same
remote site with an EIA-232-D cable (maximum distance : 50 feet) or an
EIA-422 cable (maximum distance: 3, 280 feet) to accommodate up to 16
users .
• Sixteen users at two sites: Each site can have up to eight users connected
to a DECmux II. Each site connects through a phone link to one
MUXserver 100.
• Two sites with route-through: If there are two separate remote sites that
are located close to each other, one site can be routed through the second
site by linking two DECmux IIs with two modems and a leased phone line.
Each site can have a maximum of eight users .
• One local site and one remote site: If only eight remote devices need
802.3/Ethernet connection, eight local devices can also be linked to the
MUXserver 100 through a DECmux II. The MUXserver 100 is locally
linked to a DECmux II with an EIA-422 cable.
MUXserver 100/DECmux II Configuration

Printer

Printer
DEC-

DEC-

mux
II

Standard Ethernet Cable

....
E

Transceiver

NBG-167-00

Prerequisite Hardware
• One MUXserver 100 with one or two DECmux Us plus user port cables.
• One 3002 or equivalent leased phone line and one pair of external modems
and cables, where needed.
• All 802.3/Ethernet physical channel hardware.
• An 802.3/Ethernet transceiver, DESTA, or DELNI and transceiver drop
cable.

..c:

""~
00

.........::;.:,
....
CJ

c
0

2.105

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

Prerequisite Software
• To downline load MUXserver 100 software, one or more load hosts on the
LAN must run one of the following:
- DECnet-VAX
- DECnet- llM-PLUS
- DECnet-Micro/RSX
- DECnet-ULTRIX
See the Software Product Description for the version number requirements.
• Service node support is available on the following operating systems:
-VMS
- RSX-llM-PLUS
- Micro/RSX
- ULTRIX-32
Remote printer support is available only for VMS and MicroVMS operating
systems.
A See the Software Product Description for the software version number
requirements.

Optional Software
The Terminal Server Manager/VMS (TSM) is a software tool that allows a
user at a VAX host to remotely observe and control Digital terminal servers
anywhere in an extended local area network. For more information, refer
to Terminal Server Manager in this section.
Standard Network Packages
A Refer to "Standard Network Packages" in this section to order the

Remote Site Package, which combines MUXserver 100 hardware, cables,
and modems in one order code.
MUXserver 100/DECmux II Hardware Order Codes
Option

Order Code

MUXserver 100, 120 V (supports 16 remote devices connected
to DECmux II ports.) Includes U.S. country kit.

DSRZA-BA

DECmux II, 120 V (supports 8 EIA-232-D Terminal, PC, or
printer connections). Includes U.S. country kit.

DFMZA-BA

MUXserver 100, 240 V (supports 16 remote devices connected
to DECmux II ports.) Requires country kit.

DSRZA-BB

DECmux II, 240 V (supports 8 EIA-232-D Terminal, PC, or
printer connections). Requires country kit.

DFMZA-BB

2.106

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

MUXserver 100/DECmux II Software Order Codes for VMS
Option

Order Code

Load host operating system

VMS/MicroVMS

Single-use License 1 (A license is required
for each CPU.)

Q*ZAW-UZ

Materials and Installation
Distribution and documentation

Q*ZAW-H#

Software revision right-to-copy

Q*ZAW-HZ

Documentation only

QLZAW-GZ

Installation Service

Q*ZAW-I#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX 2000 (3); VAX -11/725/730 (C); VAX-11/750 (D);
VAX-11/780/782/785 (E); VAX 8200/8250 (5); VAX 8300/8350 (7); VAX 850018530 (9);
VAX 8550 (2); VAX 8600/8650 (K); VAX 8700 (2); VAX 8800 (M); VAX 8974/8978 (2)
#Supported media: 3, 5, M, Y
1

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.

MUXserver 100/DECmux II Software Order Codes for ULTRIX and RSX
Option

Order Code

Load host operating system

ULTRIX32/32m

Micro/RSX

Q*ZCK-UZ

QYDAW-UZ

QJDAW-UZ

Distribution and documentation

Q*ZCK-H#

QYDAW-H3
QYDAW-H5

QJDAW-H3
QJDAW-H5

Software revision right-to-copy

Q*ZCK-HZ

QYDAW-HZ

QJDAW-HZ

Documentation only

QLZCK-GZ

QYDAW-GZ

QJDAW-GZ

Single-use License 1 (A license is
required for each CPU.)

RSX-llM-

PLUS

Materials and Installation:

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (Z); MicroVAX 2000 (3); VAX-11/725/730 (C);
VAX-11/750 (D); VAX-11/780/782/785 (E); VAX 820018250 (5); VAX 8300/8350 (7);
VAX 8500/8530 (9); VAX 8550 (2); VAX 8600/8650 (K); VAX 8700 (2); VAX 8800 (M)
#Supported media: 3, 5, M, Y
1
For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.

2.107

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

Required Cables
To configure the MUXserver 100/DECmux II, order the following cables.
When ordering cables refer to Communications Cables in Section 3 for
cable options and be sure to specify the length, for example, BC22F-25.
Cable

Order Code

Modem cable to connect external modem
to MUXserver 100 or DECmux II.

BC22F

Null modem cable to connect two
DECmux Us.

BC17D

Null modem cable to connect terminals,
personal computers, or printers to
DECmux II user ports.

BC22D

Note that EIA-422 cables are not sold as a Digital standard product. However, documentation is provided so that customers can make their own
cables or Digital Field Service can custom-make them for an additional
charge.

MUXserver 100/DECmux II Country Kits
The U.S. MUXserver 100/DECmux II (DSRZA-BA/DFMZA-BA) includes a
U.S. / Canada country kit. The non-U.S. MUXserver 100/DECmux II
(DSRZA-BB/ DFMZA-BB) requires a country kit. Each country kit includes a
power cord, hardware documentation, and country-specific items. Be sure
to order the appropriate country kit as a separate line item.
MUXserver 100/DECmux II Country Kit Order Codes

Country

MUXserver 100
Order Code

DECmux II
Order Code

Australia

DSRZA-KZ

DFMZA-KZ

Belgium

DSRZA-LA

DFMZA-LA

Canada (English and French)

DSRZA-KA

DFMZA-KA

Denmark

DRSZA-KD

DFMZA-KD

Finland

DSRZA-LA

DFMZA-LA

France

DSRZA-LA

DFMZA-LA

Holland

DSRZA-LA

DFMZA-LA

Italy

DSRZA-KI

DFMZA-KI

India

DSRZA-LJ

DFMZA-LJ

Israel

DSRZA-KT

DFMZA-KT

Japan

DSRZA-KJ

DFMZA-KJ
DFMZA-KZ

New Zealand

DSRZA-KZ

Norway

DSRZA-LA

DFMZA-LA

Spain

DSRZA-LA

DFMZA-LA

Sweden

DSRZA-LA

DFMZA-LA

Switzerland (French and German)

DSRZA-LB

DFMZA-LB

United Kingdom

DSRZA-KE

DFMZA-KE

United States*

DSRZA-KA

DFMZA-KA

West Germany

DSRZA-KG

DFMZA-KG

*The U.S. version of the MUXserver 100 (DSRZA-BA) includes a country kit. A U.S.
country kit is also available as a separate line item.

2.108

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

Terminal Server Manager

The Terminal Server Manager/VMS (TSM) software allows a network
manager at a VAX/ VMS host to control and observe terminal servers any where in an extended local area network. TSM allows the manager to
configure, monitor, and control Digital's family of terminal servers including the DECserver 100, 200 and 500/ 550, MUXserver 100, and Ethernet
Terminal Server.
TSM integrates the functions of NCP TSC and DSVCONFIG in a product
that allows the use of command files to help automate terminal server
management. TSM exceeds the capabilities of NCP CONNECT in both
configuration and fault management.
Terminal Server Manager Configuration

Terminal
Server
Manager,
DECnet-VAX

Host

Standard
Ethernet
Cable

Terminator
Transceiver

Host

LAN
Bridge

,_____}--II

Standard
Ethernet
Cable

ti~
c:
c:
0
u

MicroVAX

2000

3600

NBG-1 68-01

2.109

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

Features
• Allows a manager to group terminal servers based on server type, floor
location, or department. Commands can be executed on a portion or on all
servers, saving time .
• Automatically updates the DECnet database with information about each
terminal server on the network, allowing easy access to all servers by name
rather than LAN address .
• Allows generic command files to operate on single, group, or all servers in
the network, saving time and providing flexibility.
• Tests LAT printers that are set up with LATCP and informs the manager of
any printer queue setup problems or printer hardware problems.
• Automatically produces a command file configuration template containing
parameters from a selected terminal server on the network.
• Can log all screen output to a specified file for review, useful for saving
counters and error information.
• Measures round-trip delay from host to server or servers, useful in diagnosing synchronous line bridge problems .
• Provides automatic TSM command files to perform common server set-up
functions such as those used for modem ports, printer ports, and reverseLAT ports .
• Allows the manager to assign commonly used TSM commands to keyboard
keys, then execute the command by pressing the key.

Prerequisite Hardware
TSM runs on any VAX processor except the MicroVAX I, VAXstation I, or
VAX-11/725.
Prerequisite Software
• VMS , V5.0 or later. Classes required for fully functional product are Base,
DRVR, NET , PROG, and UUTIL.
• DECnet-VAX, V 4.5 or later

Supported Terminal Servers
• DECserver 200 (DSRVB) Vl.O or later
• DECserver 5001550 (DSRVS) Vl.O or later
• MUXserver 100 (DSRZA) V2 .0 or later
• DEC server 100 (DSRVA) V 1.2 or later
• Ethernet Terminal Server (DECSA) V2 . l or later

2.110

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

Terminal Server Manager/VMS Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use license'
Cluster license

QL-VDHA*-AA
QL-VDHA*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster 3

QL-VDHA*-CA

Monthly rental, single-use 3

QL-VDHA*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster 3

QL-VDHA*-DB

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

QA-VDHAA-H#

Documentation only

QA-VDHAA-GZ

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-VDHA*-HZ

Installation service

QT-VDHA*-I#

U.S. Software Services 4

DECsupport service

QT-VDHA*-9#

Basic service

QT-VDHA*-8 #

Self-maintenance service

QT-VDHA*-3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P),
MicroVAX 3500/3600 (B); VAXstation II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R),
VAXstation 3200/3500 (C); VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C); VAX-11/730 (M),
VAX-111750 (L), VAX-11/780/782/785 (K); VAX 8200/8250 (]),VAX 8300/8350 (H),
VAX 850018530 (G), VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E),
VAX 8800/8820 (D), VAX 8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)
#Supported media(#): RXOl (Y), RX50 (3), TK50 (5), 1600 bpi magtape (M), TU58 (G)
'For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU. ·

PrintServer 40

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX-11/730.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or
VAX 8600/8650 .

For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

The PrintServer 40 is a monochromatic, high-speed laser printer that
provides a shared printer resource on an 802.3/Ethernet LAN to VMS or
MicroVMS client systems. It offers high-quality text , graphics, and scanned
images. It handles multiple paper sizes, uses multiple fonts and point sizes,
and prints directly on overhead transparencies or labels .
The PrintServer 40 employs PostScript, the industry standard, as its page
description language. PostScript enables the PrintServer 40 to produce
highly professional, complex documents with rotated type, textures, patterns , halftones , and images in any size and shape. Because not all application software currently supports PostScript, three VMS translators are
included. These translators convert data syntaxes of ANSI (ASCII and
Sixels), ReGIS, and Tektronix 4010/4014 to PostScript, which is then sent
to the PrintServer 40.

....u
E
u

-s
~

""'~

....;.:,
»
·::u
u

c
cQ

2.111

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

The PrintServer 40 is downline-loaded and managed from a VMS or
MicroVMS system running the VAX PrintServer 40 Support Host software.
The PrintServer 40 is accessed by suitably configured VMS or MicroVMS
systems running the VAX PrintServer 40 Client software. _. For more
information on the VAX PrintServer 40 Support Host software, refer to
Software Product Description (SPD) 27.68. For more information on the
VAX PrintServer 40 Client software, refer to SPD 27.67.
Features
• Electrophotographic printing of up to 40 pages per minute on plain paper
and transparencies, using dry toner, heat and pressure fusing.

• High-speed 802.3/Ethernet connection for VAX and MicroVAX systems to
support distributed processing.
•High-duty cycle-typically up to 50,000 to 60,000 pages per month.
• Accommodates multiple paper sizes , cut sheet paper, transparencies, and
predrilled paper.
• Three paper input trays provide capacity of up to 2500 sheets of various
media combinations.
• Employs PostScript as its standard page description language . (Information
on PostScript training from Digital is available by calling 1-800-332-5656
or 1-508-276-4300.)
• Multiple fonts with 29 resident PostScript typefaces, including the symbol/
math set.
• Resolution of 300 by 300 dots per inch for text, graphics, and scanned
images.
·Translates ANSI/sixels, ReGIS, and Tektronix 4010/4014 protocols.
• Accounting functions can record page-usage and system-performance data,
useful to a system manager.
• "Layup" functions permit multiple images on a single sheet of paper.
Prerequisite Software
• VMS operating system V5 .0
• DECnet-VAX V5.0
Ordering Information
Order PrintServer 40 hardware, cables, and software.

The PrintServer 40 hardware includes the licenses to use the Client and
Support Host software . Customers must order one copy each of the Client
and Support Host software on the appropriate distribution medium.
For H4005 / DELNI connection, right-angle cables must be ordered. The last
two digits of the order code specify the length of the cable, measured in
feet .

2.112

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

PrintServer 40 Hardware Order Codes
Option

Order Code

U.S. model: PrintServer 40, 40 ppm 802.3/Ethernet printer,
2201240 V, 60 Hz, attached power cord. Client and Support
Host licenses are included.

LPS40-AA

International model : PrintServer 40, 40 ppm 802.3/Ethernet
printer, 200/208/220/240 V, 50 Hz, detached power cord.
Client and Support Host licenses are included.

LPS40-A3

Cables

IEEE 802.3/Ethernet PVC-jacketed right angle male-to-female
transceiver cable

BNE3K-10
BNE3K-20
BNE3K-40

IEEE 802.3/Ethernet plenum-rated right angle male-to-female
transceiver cable

BNE3M-10
BNE3M-20
BNE3M-40

Consumable Parts

Toner cartridges, package of 6 for appro~imately 60,000 pages
total

LPS4X-AA

Developer and replaceable parts for approximately 100,000
pages

LPS4X-AB

Silicon oil, package of 4 for approximately 60,000 pages total

LPS4X-AC

PrintServer 40 Sohwsre Order Codes
Option

Order Code

VMS Support-host media

QA-798A*-H#

VMS Client media

QA-797A*-H#

Support-host documentation

QA-798AA-GZ

Client documentation

QA-797AA-GZ

#Supported media(#): RX50 (3), TK50 (5), 1600 bpi magtape (M)

DECrouter 200

The DECrouter 200 provides communications between systems running
DECnet software and systems on an 802 .3/Ethernet local area network.
Systems that can connect to the DECrouter 200 include the Digital Rain bow, the Digital Professional 300 series, the IBM PC, IBM PC AT , or any
system running asynchronous DECnet-VAX or DECnet-RSX.
The DECrouter 200 handles up to eight local and remote connection at line
speeds up to 19.2 Kb/s. It has a maximum throughput rate of 170 packets
per second when all eight lines are running at maximum speed . .a. For
more information on performance, refer to Appendix A.

.W-

Ill

c:
c:
0
u

The DECrouter 200 communications server software runs on a dedicated
hardware base (the DSRVC) to provide the routing functions for up to eight
DECnet Phase IV end nodes. It performs the routing functions on the LAN
to allow Phase IV end nodes not directly connected to the LAN to communicate with directly-connected Phase IV nodes . The DECrouter 200 can
also be the designated router on the LAN , allowing end nodes to communicate with nodes off the LAN.

2.113

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

The DECrouter 200 implements Phase IV DECnet asynchronous DDCMP
routing and network management. It can be used to connect to Phase III
nodes to provide Phase III networks with connectivity to Phase IV nodes.
The DECrouter 200 supports intra-area (Level 1) routing for transporting
messages between nodes; it does not support inter-area (Level 2) routing.
The DECrouter 200 transports messages between Phase III or Phase IV
routing end nodes in the same area. End nodes connected directly to the
LAN must use the DECrouter 200 or Phase IV host -routing nodes on the
same LAN for message routing off that LAN.
Features
• Eight asynchronous lines with dial-in capability.

• Supports standard EIA-232-D connections and standard Ethernet AUi
connections. ThinWire connects to the ntework via the DESTA Ethernet
Station Adapter.
• Supports Phase IV enhancements (path-splitting, out-of-order packet caching) .
• Provides full network management.
• Includes a monitor that shows such useful data as line utilization and
speeds, other nodes on the network, and the designated router.
Installation and Host System Configurations
The DECrouter 200 can be downline-loaded from a DECnet-VAX or
DECnet-ULTRIX system. & Refer to the respective order code tables for a
list of supported processors. (Note that ULTRIX and DECnet-ULTRIX do
not support the VAX-111782 configuration.)
Prerequisite Hardware
A valid 802.3/Ethernet configuration is required to downline-load the
DECrouter 200. The load host for the DECrouter 200 must be a DECnet
Phase IV node with 802.3/Ethernet controller, and must be connected to
the same LAN segme:!t as the DECrouter 200 .

The load host must have one of the following devices to read the distribution medium : 1600 bpi magnetic tape, RX50 floppy diskette , or TK50 tape
cartridge.
Prerequisite Software
The software must be downline loaded by one of the following systems:

· VMS with DECnet-VAX, V4.2 or later
• ULTRIX-32, Vl.2 or later, and DECnet-ULTRIX, Vl.1 or later
• ULTRIX-32m, Vl.2 or later, and DECnet-ULTRIX Vl.1 or later
For more information, refer to Software Product Description (SPD)
(27.72).

DECrouter 200 Hardware Order Codes
Description

Order Code

DECrouter 200, EIA-232-D version, 120 V

DSRVC -AA

DECrouter 200, EIA-232-D version, 240 V

DSRVC-AB

2_114

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

Cable Requirements
One of the following cables must be used to connect to the DECrouter 200
asynchronous port:
• BC22D-EIA-232-D/CCITT V.24 null modem cable used to connect directly
to locally situated nodes that do not require modem control signals.
• BC17D-EIA-232-D/CCITT V.24 null modem cable used to connect directly
to locally situated nodes that require modem control signals.
• BC22E-EIA-232-D/CCITT V.24 cable used to connect to modems and
modem-type devices.
The DECrouter 200 hardware (DSRVC) requires a transceiver cable to
connect the integral 802.3/Ethernet port to the transceiver. The DSRVC
may be connected to
• Standard baseband or broadband 802.3/Ethernet transceivers- requires a
BNE3(H,K,L, or M) up to 50 meters, or a BNE4(C or D ) up to 12.5 meters.
• DELNI Local Network Interconnect-requires a BNE3(H,K,L, or M) up to
50 meters, or a BNE4(C or D) up to 12.5 meters.
• DESTA ThinWire Ethernet Station Adapter-requires a BNE (H, K, L, or
M) up to 50 meters, or a BNE4(C or D ) up to 12.5 meters.
DECrouter 200 Country Kits
Description

Order Code

DECrouter 200 Country Kit

DSRVC -K*
DSRVC -L*

*Refer to the Price List "for more information.

..:u
u

c
c
0

-E
u

..c

""f'i
Q

'>
·:::
u

c
0

2.115

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

DECrouter 200 Software Order Codes for VMS
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)
Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1

QL-VDJA*-AA

Cluster member 2

QL-VDJA*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster3

QL-VDJA*-CA

Monthly rental, single-use 3

QL-VDJA*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster 3

QL-VDJA*-DB

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-VDJA*-HZ

Materials and Installation
Distribution and documentation

QA-VDJAA-H#

Documentation only

QA-VDJAA-GZ

Installation service

QT-VDJA*-1#

U.S. Software Services4
DECsupport service

QT-VDJA*-9#

Basic service

QT-VDJA*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-VDJA*-3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P),
MicroVAX 3500/3600 (B), VAXstation II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R),
VAXstation 3200/3500 (C), VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX-11/725/730 (M),
VAX-11/750 (L), VAX-11/780/782/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4),
VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/8250 (}), VAX 8300/83:50 (H), VAX 8500/8530 (G),
VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D), VAX 8810 (E),
VAX 8820 (D), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)
#Supported media(#): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), RL02 (H), RX33 (7), TK50 (5)
1

2
3

For software licen~ing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.
Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX-11/725/730.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or
VAX 8600/8650.
For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

2.116

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

DECrouter 200 Software Order Codes for ULTRIX
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use license 1

Q*Z51 -UZ

Initial license 2

Q*Z51 -1P

Periodic payment 2

Q*Z51 -JP

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

Q*Z51 -H#

Software revision right-to-copy

Q*Z51 -HZ

Documentation only

QLZ51 -GZ

Installation service
U.S. Software Services

Q*Z51 -I#
3

DECsupport service

Q*Z51-9#

Basic service

Q*Z51-8#

Self-maintenance service

Q*Z51-3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (Z); VAXstation II (4); MicroVAX 2000 (3);
MicroVAX 3500/3600 (O); VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (1); VAXstati on 3200/3500 (1);
VAX-11/725/730 (C); VAX-11/750 (D); VAX-11/780/785 (E); VAX 820018250 (5 );
VAX 8300/8350 (7); VAX 850018530 (9); VAX 8550 (2); VAX 8600/8650 (K);
VAX 8700 (2); VAX 8800 (M)
#Supported media: 5, M
1
For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
si ngle CPU.
2
3

DEC MicroServer

~~-.~~~~~~·~
==.:.~)~

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or VAX 8600/8650.
For non-U.S. service agreements, consult a local Digital sales representative.

The DEC MicroServer is the hardware base for the DECrouter 2000, the
X25router 2000, and the DECne t/SNA Gateway-ST, providing conn ection
whenever communication is required from an 802 .3/Ethernet LAN into a
Wide Area Network (WAN ). Network users can access destinations across
a worldwide geography via either a DECnet network , a Packet Switched
Data Network (X.25 ), or an IBM SNA network , by connecting the DEC
MicroServer to the 802.3 / Ethernet network.
The DEC MicroServer allows DECnet backbone networks to use leased
lines or X .25 public data networks . It can also provide a networkto- network connection from DECnet to SNA.
The DEC MicroServer is packaged in a LAN Bridge 100-type enclosure that
can be placed on a desktop or mounted in a standard 19 -inch rack. The
hardware , a single-board communications engine, comprises a MicroVAX II
chip set, two Mbytes of on-board memory, one Ethernet interface port
(IEEE 802 .3 compatible), power supply, and four synchronous commun ication s ports.

c
0

2.117

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

Features
• With high line speed support, users benefit from cost-effective tariffs for
higher speed telecommunications services and X.25 public data networks.
• Compatibility with CCITT X.25 PSDNs allows users to build global networks , utilizing the most competitive worldwide public networks.
• Efficient use of bandwidth improves price/performance and lowers cost of
network ownership.
Specifications
Physical Characteristics

With Plastic

Without Plastic

Height
Width
Depth
Weight

16.2 cm (6.4 in)
49.4 cm (19.4 in)
31.3 cm (12.3 in)
8.1 kg (18 lb)

13.3 cm (5.3 in)
43.6 cm (17.2 in)
29 .8 cm (11.7 in)
6.9 kg (13 lb)

Low-range line voltage
High-range line voltage
Frequency tolerance
Maximum ac watts drawn
Maximum heat dissipation

120-87 to 132 V
240-174 to 264 V
47 to 63 Hz
150 w
500 BTU/hr

Environmental Class

A (See Appendix B for details.)

Power Requirements

Ordering Information
The DEC MicroServer is packaged with the DECrouter 2000, X25router
2000, and DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST. Ji. Refer to the appropriate product
description for ordering information.
Refer to the order codes below only when ordering spare hardware for any
of these packages. Note that the options below do not include cables,
licenses, media or documentation.
DEMSA Order Codes

DECrouter 2000

1-- -

l ----

Option

Order Code

DEC MicroServer configured for 120 Vac
DEC MicroServer configured for 240 Vac

DEMSA-AA
DEM SA-AB

The DECrouter 2000, a combination hardware/software product that runs
on the DEC MicroServer (DEMSA) hardware unit, is a dedicated routing
system that supports both intra-area (Level 1) and inter-area (Level 2)
routing for Phase IV nodes on the LAN , or Phase III or Phase IV remote
nodes connected to one of the four synchronous lines . The DECrouter 2000
is compatible with Phase V implementations.
The product supports DDCMP point-to-point and multipoint links and
"path splitting" between two or more equal-cost paths. Path splitting
means that DECnet traffic can share two equal-cost routes between source
and destination nodes, providing higher performance as well as an alternative path if one route fails. Note that the destination end node must be
VMS V 4.1 or later, which supports reordering of out-of-order packets.

2.118

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

The DECrouter 2000 supports full- or half-duplex communications over
four synchronous lines at speeds up to 64 Kb/sec or two synchronous lines
at speeds up to 256 Kb/sec . Adapter cables provide the necess~r y interchange circuits for each synchronous line .
.& Refer to Software Product Description 28.85 for fu rther information.

DEC MicroServer (DEMSA )
The DEC MicroServer provides the hardware base for the DECrouter 2000 ,
for interconnect whenever communication is required from an Ethernet
LAN into a Wide Area Network (WAN ) . .& For further information regarding the DEC MicroServer, refer to its product description in this section.
LAN Configuration Using a DECrouter 2000

Terminator

Corporate
Headquarters
(New York)

Transceiver

Standard Ethernet Cable

Host

Host
Host

.WV

Q,I

c:
c:
0

Manufacturing
(Houston)

Standard Ethernet Cable

Engineering
(Los Angeles)

4'
Q,I

NBG·169-01

Features
• Provides synchronous connections to remote DECnet system and LANs in a
wide area network or between remote LANs using DECnet.
• Operates at speeds up to 128 Kb/s for two lines, or 64 Kb/s for one line.
• Can communicate with remote Phase III nodes in the same DECnet area .

E
Q,I

..::

""N

0
00

....;.:,

:e....
v

Q,I

c:
c:
0

2.119

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

Prerequisite Hardware
Any VAX processor specified in the order code table. Every load host on
which the DECrouter 2000 software is installed must contain:
·A valid DECnet-VAX or DECnet-ULTRIX system configuration.
the DECnet and appropriate operating system SPDs.

& Refer to

• A supported connection on the same LAN as the DECrouter 2000.
• An appropriate device available to read the software during
installation. & Refer to the order code table for supported devices.

Prerequisite Software
For each VAX system acting as a load host/dump receiver, one of the following:
• VMS Operating System V 4.4 to V5.0
• MicroVMS Operating System V4.4 to V4.7
• ULTRIX-32 Operating System Vl.2
·DECnet-VAX V4.4 to V5.0
·DECnet-ULTRIX Vl.2 (either end node or full-function)
For VMS V5.0 systems, the following VMS classes are required to be fully
functional:
• VMS Required Saveset
• Network Support
.&. For more information on VMS classes and tailoring, refer to SPD 25.01.

Ordering Information
Order the hardware base for the DECrouter 2000, which includes the
license for the DECrouter 2000 software. Also order at least one copy of
the distribution and documentation kit.
DECrouter 2000 Hardware Order Codes
Option

Order Code

DECrouter 2000 Server Package includes
DEC MicroServer hardware (120 V), two
V.35 and two EIA-232-D adapter cables,
power cord, and DECrouter 2000 license
with warranty.

DEMSA-D*

DECrouter 2000 Server Package for
Ireland. Includes components listed
above.

DEM SA-EE

*Replace the *with one of the following codes: A (United States, Mexico), D
(Denmark), E (United Kingdom), G (West Germany). I (Italy), K (Switzerland), P
(France), T (Israel), X (Austria, Belgium, Finland, Netherlands, Norway, Sweden,
Portugal, Spain)

2.120

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

DECrouter 2000 Software Order Codes
Option

VMS

ULTRIX-32

Distribution and
documentation

QA-VI8AA-H#

QA-VI9AA-H#

Software revision rightto-copy

QL-VI8H*-HZ

QL-VI9H*-HZ

Documentation only

QA-VI8AA-GZ

QA-VI9AA-GZ

Installation service

QT-VI8A*-I#

QT-VI9A*-I#

DECsupport service

QT-VI8A*-9#

QT-VI9A*-9#

Basic service

QT-VI8A*-8#

QT-VI9A*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-VI8A*-3#

QT-VI9A*-3#

Materials and Installation

U.S. Software Services

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P),
MicroVAX 3500/3600 (B), VAXstation II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R),
VAXstation 3200/3500 (C), VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX-11/730 (M),
VAX-111750 (L), VAX-11/780/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4),
VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/8250 (J), VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 850018530 (G),
VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D), VAX 8810 (E),
VAX 8820 (D), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)
#Supported media(#) for VMS: RX50 (7), TK50 (5), 1,600 bpi magtape (M)
Supported media(#) for ULTRIX: TK50 (5), 1,600 bpi magtape (M)
1

X25router 2000

For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

The X25router 2000 , a combination hardware/software product that runs
on the DEC MicroServer (DEMSA) dedicated hardware unit, acts as an
X.25 gateway for an 802.3/Ethernet local area network. This product
provides access to one or more PSDNs for any system on the LAN that runs
VAX P.S.I. Access software. It also provides access to any DECnet system
that uses the PSDN to carry DECnet traffic to remote Digital systems, as
well as providing one end of a point-to-point connection using standard
ISO protocols, which conform to both CCITT and ISO standards.
As with the DECrouter 2000, the X25router 2000 supports both Level 1
and Level 2 area routing. Adapter cables provide the necessary interchange
circuits for each synchronous line. Performance is approximately 170 packets per second for DECnet circuits over X.25 .
.& Refer to Software Product Description 28.86 for further information.

DEC MicroServer (DEMSA)
The DEC MicroServer provides the hardware base for the X25router 2000 ,
for interconnect whenever communication is required from an Ethernet
LAN into a Wide Area Network (WAN). .& For further information on the
DEC MicroServer, refer to its product description in this section.

2.121

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

X25router 2000 Configuration (Digital·to·non·Digit11l Host)

DECnet-VAX
VAX P.S.I. Access

VAX

MicroVAX

Standard Ethernet Cable

Transceiver

9---{:====-~~~----{c::;:::::i~~~~___,c::'.:::J~~~~~~~~~~--·

Terminator

PDP-11

DECnet-RSX
RSX P.S./.

NonDigital
Host

DECnet-VAX
VAX P.S.I.

NBG·109·01

X.25/X.29 Terminsl Access Configurstion

Standard Ethernet Cable

Transceiver

Terminator

DFX
PAD'

DECnet-VAX
VAX P.S.I. Access

PDP-11

DECnet-RSX
RSX P.S./.
'available only in the United States

NBG·110·01

2.122

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

X25router 2000 Configuration (DECnet-to-DECnet only)

Corporate
Headquarters
(N ~O_!;k)
_j---_,_
__

DECnet-VAX
(Phase IV)
Host

DMB32

VAX 8550

DMV11

Host

Micro
PDP-11

DECnet- 11M
(Phase IV)
RSX P.S.I.

DECnet-RT
(Phase Ill}

Host

Broadband
Transceiver

Broadband
Frequency
Terminator

Broadband
Tap

Broadband Cable

Translator

NBG-220-01

Features
• Performs all the functions of the DECrouter 2000 plus connects systems on
the LAN to X.25 PSDNs.
• Can run both DECnet and X.25 protocols concurrently.
• Allows DECnet to be connected to up to four X.25 PSDNs simultaneously.

Prerequisite H ardware
Any VAX or MicroVAX system, as specified in the X25router Software
Order Code Table .

....4'

s
4'

-fl

Ee
""'0
N
00

;.:,

.t:

.e....
u

c
0

2.123

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

Prerequisite Software
For each VAX system acting as a load host or dump receiver:
•VMS Operating System V4.4 to V5.0
• MicroVMS V4.4 to V4.7
• DECnet-VAX V 4.4 to V5.0 (either end node or full-function)

Ordering Information
To use any of the host-to-host or terminal-host capabilities of an X.25 link
from the X25router, VAX P.S.I. Access software must be installed on
DECnet nodes requiring X.25 access. The PS.I. Access software is not
necessary to use the DDCMP or DECnet DLM circuits. A For information
on VAX P.S.I. Access, refer to " Packetnet Communications Software" in
Section 4.
X25router 2000 Hardware Order Codes
Option

Order Code

X25router 2000 Server Package includes DEC MicroServer
hardware (120 V), two V.35 and two EIA-232-D adapter cables,
power cord, and X25router 2000 license with warranty.

DEMSA-X*

X25router 2000 Server Package for Ireland. Includes
components listed above.

DEMSA-YE

*Replace the *with one of the following codes: A (United States, Mexico), D
(De nmark ), E (United Kingdom), G (West Germany). I (Italy), K (Switzerland), P
(France), T (Israel), X (Austria, Belgium, Finland, Netherlands, Norway, Sweden,
Portugal, Spain)

X25router 2000 Software Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Materials and Installation
Distribution and documentation

QA-VlAAA-H#

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-VlAA*-HZ

Documentation only

QA-VlAAA-GZ

Installation service
U.S. Software Services

QT-VlAA*-1#
1

DECsupport service

QT-VlAA*-9 #

Basic service

QT-VlAA*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-VlAA*-3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P),
MicroVAX 3500/3600 (B), VAXstation II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R),
VAXstation 3200/3500 (C), VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX -11/730 (M),
VAX -11/750 (L), VAX-11/780/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4),
VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/8250 (]),VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 8500/8530 (G),
VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D ), VAX 8810 (E),
VAX 8820 (D), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)
#Supported media(#): RX33 (7), TK50 (5), 1,600 bpi magtape (M)
1

For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

2.124

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers

DECnet/SNA Gateway for Channel
Transport

The DECnet/SNA Gateway for Channel Transport, a combination
hardware/software product that runs on DEC ChannelServer dedicated
hardware , operates as part of both the DECnet and IBM SNA networks,
allowing users in either network to share systems, applications, and network resources.
The DEC ChannelServer attaches directly to both the 802.3/Ethernet local
area network and an IBM S/3 70 byte multiplexer, block multiplexer, or
selector channel.
• Refer to "Digital/IBM Communications Software" in Section 4 for more
information.

DECnet/SNA Gateway for
Synchronous Transport

The DECnet/SNA Gateway for Synchronous Transport, a combination
hardware/softwa re product that runs on DEC MicroServer dedicated hardware, connects a DECnet 802.3/Ethernet local area network to as many as
four remote SNA networks over synchronous communications lines.
• Refer to "Digital/IBM Communications Software" in Section 4 for more
information.

2.125

lntrnduction to Standard Network Packages

Availability
Standard Network Packages are available only in the United States.

2.126

Introduction to Standard Network Packages

Local Area Work Group Interconnection
Local Area Work Group Interconnection provides connectivity among
users that are typically involved in related activities and are located on the
same floor. Four packages are available :
• DECconnect Integrated Communications Package, which provides integration and full access to the communication technologies used in the office :
low-speed data, high-speed data , voice (telephone), and video . This system
uses a faceplate at the user office to provide easy "plug-in " access.
• Low-speed Work Group Package, which provides network access for areas
where the equipment used in work groups includes terminals, printers, and
personal computers in terminal emulation mode.
• High-speed Work Group Package, used in areas where equipment is primarily PCs and/ or workstations, and the applications require rapid transfer of
large amounts of dat~.
• IBM PC Interconnection Package, a special application of the High-speed
Work Group Package for IBM personal computers with fu ll utiliz ation of
the D igital network .

Extended Local Area Interconnection
Extended Local Area Interconnection links individuals , groups , or departments in geographically distinct work areas that are relatively close to each
other. Three packages are available:
• Building Package, which links floors of a building together in a common
network.
• Site Package, which connects multiple buildings in a site, such as a university campus or an office complex .
• Computer Room Package, which connects up to eight computers in one
location to the network through one interface. Each of the computers may,
in turn , support its own local area network .

Wide Area Interconnection
Wide Area Interconnection provides a network link between remote sites .
A typical application links headquarters with manufacturing plants, sales
offices, and distribution centers . Two packages are avai lable :
• Wide Area Package, which connects two geographically dispersed local
area networks .
• Remote Site Package, which allows users , at a geographically remote site
with no computer/ network, to gain access to an organization's local area
network via a leased line.
Multivendor Interconnection
Multivendor Interconnection allows information to be transferred between
a D igital network and the network of another vendor. One package is
available:
• DECnet/IBM SNA Package, which allows communication between an IBM
SNA network and a DECnet network. Users may send and retrieve information or perform specific functions on IBM host systems connected to the
SNA network.

..r
u
Q.I

..r
Q.I

E
Q.I

..c

""'f'i

0
00

E-

:e...
u

Q.I

c
c
0

2.127

Introduction to Standard Network Packages

The relationship of the Standard Network Packages in a large network is
illustrated in the following figure . The network configuration is simplified
in the diagram in order to clearly indicate the purpose of each package .
Relationship of Standard Network Packages in a Large Network

Remote Site

DECconnect Integrated Comm unications Package
Low-speed Work Group Package
3
High-speed Work Group Package
2

IBM PC Interconnection Package

Computer Room Package

Building Package

Site Package

Wide Area Package

Remote Site Package

DECnet/ IBM SNA Package

2.128

Introduction to Standard Network Packages

Service Solutions

Digital's service solutions are an important part of an ongoing commitment
to meet the customer's needs. Digital can tailor a service solution to meet
requirements for designing, implementing, or operating a Digital network.
The services available include network design consulting, network installation (for hardware, software, and cabling), ongoing maintenance and remedial support, and network-management tools and support. Refer to Section
6, "Manageability", for more information.
All hardware products sold in Standard Network Packages include a oneyear warranty from Digital.

Ordering Standard Network
Packages

Each Standard Network Package consists of one or two product areas:
• Network hardware products (required for all packages)
• Network software products (required for many packages)
A product description and ordering table for each Standard Network
Package is contained in the following pages. The exact ordering requirements
for these products must be followed. This ensures that all the appropriate
hardware and software necessary to implement the desired network solution are ordered. The installation of standard 802.3/Ethernet backbone
cable, to which the electronic hardware connects, is not included in the
Standard Network Packages. Digital custom designs and installs the backbone cable as needed, to meet specific customer requirements.

In addition to the products that are required for each base package, there
may be the need to order additional network hardware, software, and/or
services to provide the desired network solution. The need for these
optional products and services vary according to customer requirements of
such things as number of offices, type of equipment requiring connection,
physical facility layouts, and existing customer software. The optional
products can also be ordered to expand an existing network installation,
where the customer already has many of the required base package components. The most common of these optional products are listed in the ordering tables of each Standard Network Package.

2.129

Local A1·ea Work Group Interconnection

Local Area Work Group Interconnection provides connectivity among
users that are typically involved in related activities and are located on the
same floor. Local Area Work Group Interconnection enhances work communications, allows effective and efficient sharing of computer resources ,
and provides information cons istency through a common database .
DECconnect Integrated
Communications Package

The DECconnect Integrated Communications Package includes all of the
hardware and software necessary to establish a Local Area Network using
Digital's DECconnect strategy. The DECconnect solution utilizes satellite
equipment rooms (SER) as the centralized location for the required electronic hardware and wiring connections. The required cables radiate from
the SER to each office/user location, where a DECconnect faceplate provides convenient user access to low-speed (terminal) , high-speed (work
system ), and voice (telephone) communications . The following figure
illustrates the DECconnect configuration in an office environment . Refer to
"DECconnect" in Section 2 for additional information.
DECconnect System
THINWIRE
ETHERNET CABLE

ETHERNET
BACK BONE

2.130

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

The number of offices (users ) and type of devices (low-speed/ high -speed)
that are connected on the local area network largely determines the number of required satellite equipment rooms and hardware products . The
physical office layout on the floor is another important consideration when
designing the appropriate DECconnect solution . Wiring of the backbone
cable in the building (for connection to the SER) is not part of the
DECconnect Package. Digital performs this function on a custom basis to
meet individual customer needs.
The following figure illustrates the hardware configuration of a typical
satellite equipment room in a network that requires both low- and high speed connections.
Satellite Equipment Room Configuration
TO OFFICES
TRANSCEIVER

STANDARD
ETHERNET
CABLE

Th1nWire ANO
TWISTED-PAIR
CABLES

TRANSCEIVER :
CABLE

II
~~~~~~

DEMPRs

}

~~~~~l:T
PATCH
PANELS

CABLE
CONCENTRATOR
CABLE
PATCH
PANEL

DEC
SERVERS

- - ---,
I

TELEPHONE I
EQUIPMENT I
ANY VENDOR I DELNI

2.131

~ocal Area Work Group Interconnection

Ordering Guidelines for the DECconnect System
The configuration guidelines and ordering rules in this section provide a
methodology for selecting the appropriate number of DECconnect package
components to meet various networking needs. To determine the appropriate quantity of hardware and software products required to implement the
network, follow these steps:
• Order one satellite equipment room rack (DEPKF-Sl) for each 64 offices,
or part thereof. Additional satellite equipment rooms may be required if
physical distances between offices are large or if a high proportion of
offices utilizes low- and high-speed connections simultaneously.
• Determine the total number of low- and high-speed connections for all
offices (for each SER). Refer to the following sections on Low-speed and
High-speed Work Group Packages for additional detail. Find the appropriate letter in Table 2.1 (Low-speed/High-speed Connections) corresponding
to the connection requirements .
• Using Table 2.2, find the letter (DECconnect Ordering Matrix) selected
from Table 2.1. Read across the row to determine the quantity of hardware,
software, and service product components to order. Repeat these steps for
each multiple of 64 offices to be connected or portion thereof. Add
together the quantities of similar components to determine the total order
requirements for the DECconnect installation .
• Use Table 2.3 (DECconnect Integrated Communications Package Order
Codes) to fill in the cumulative totals of each component in the quantity
column next to the corresponding order code. All quantities were determined previously from Table 2.2. The above steps must be followed to
ensure that all necessary products are ordered to complete the desired
network solution.
• Customers using unshielded twisted-pair office cabling should order one
eight-line Twisted-pair Starter Kit (H3300-AA) for every base or add-on
package.
·Di gital recommends the use of a network management product with local
area networks. If network management is required , order either NMCC/
VAX ETHERnim or NMCC/DECnet Monitor. Refer to "Network and System
Management Products" in Section 6 for product descriptions. Order both
the software license and media/documentation kit.

2.132

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

Table 2.1

Low·speeJ/High·speeJ Connections
Number of Required Low-speed Connections

Number of Required
High-speed Connections

0
1-8

1-8

9-16

17-24

2S-32

33-40

41-48

49-S6

S7-64

9-16

17-24

G2*

H2*

NIA

25-32

N2*

02*

NIA

33-40

T2*

U2*

NIA

41-48

Y2*

Z2*

NIA

49-S6

C3*

D3*

NIA

57~4

F3*

G3*

NIA

*In floor-package configurations wit.h over 64 connections, up to 80 can be supported within the standard rack; a slot is available for an
additional DECserver 200 or DEMPR. In these cases two base packages must be ordered.

....u
u

§
u
u

..:u

E
....

""!°'i
0

..........>>...
u

c
cQ

2.133

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

Table2.2

DECconnect Ordering Matrix

Required Package Component Order Number
Selected
Letter from
Table D

DEPKL·Ol

DEPKL-Al

DEPKH-01

DEPKH-Al

A
B

J
K

s
T

w
x

*In floor-package configurations with over 64 connections, up to 80 can be supported
within the standard rack; a slot is available for an additional DECserver 200 or DEMPR.
In these cases two base packages must be ordered.

2.134

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

Table 2.2

DECconnect Ordering Matrix (Continued)

Required Package Component Order Number
Selected
Letter from
Table D

DEPKL-01

DEPKL-Al

DEPKH-01

DEPKH-Al

G2*

H2*

N2*

02*

T2*

U2*

Y2*

Z2*

..:-

c
c

CJ*

DJ*

FJ*

GJ*

0
u

2.135

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

Table 2.J

DECconnect Integrated Communications Package Order Codes

Product Description

Order Code

Quantity

Satellite equipment room

SER rack

DEPKF-S l

Low-speed products (Refer to Table 2.5 for
contents)

Low-speed Base Package

DEPKL-01

Low-speed Add-on

DEPKL-Al

DECserver 200 software media and
documentation (order one per load host
computer)

QA-VCBAA-H#

High-speed products (Refer to Table 2.7 for
contents)

High-speed Base Package

DEPKH-01

High-speed Add-on

DEPKH-Al

Optional Unshielded Twisted-pair Ethernet
eight-line Starter Kit

H3300 -AA

#Refer to "DECserver 200" in Section 2 for distribution media.

Low-speed Work Group Package Terminal Interconnection

The Low-speed Work Group Package links devices operating at speeds
between 75 bis and 19.2 Kb/s (terminals, printers, and personal computers
in terminal emulation mode) to a local area network . The preconfigured
base package supplies the products required to connect up to eight terminals to the 802.3 Ethernet backbone cable of the network.

Network Hardware Products
The Low-speed Base Package includes the following products:
• One baseband Ethernet transceiver
• One Local Network Interconnect (DELNI)
• One DECserver 200/DL Terminal Server (DSRVB-BA) with software license
and cable kit
·One DEC423 Cable Kit (H3104-B)
• Two baseband transceiver cables

Network Software
• DECserver 200 software media and documentation (one per load host)
The following figure details the hardware configuration of the network
products provided in the Low-speed Base Package. Add-on packages allow
for the connection of up to 56 additional terminals, in multiples of 8, to
the base network connection outlined above.

2.136

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

Low-speed Work Group Package-Terminal Interconnection Configuration

Transceiver
Transceiver Cable

Twisted-p~~ /
Cab/

1 ••• 8

To DECconnect Faceplates
in Offices

NBG-173-00

Ordering Guidelines for Low-speed Work Group Package
Use Table 2.4 (Low-speed Work Group Package Ordering Matrix) to
determine the quantity of products required to satisfy each terminal connection (low-speed) . Use the table each time a distinct work group and/or a
work group of more than 64 offices is connected to the network backbone.
To use the table ,
• List all of the distinct work groups and the number of users within each
work group .

• If a distinct work group has more than 64 users , divide it by 64 and round
up to the next whole number. For ordering purposes in using the table, the
one large work group is treated as several different work groups. (As an
example, assume that there are two work groups consisting of 14 users and
80 users. The second work group of 80 would be treated as two groups
because 80 divided by 64 rounds up to 2.)
• Use Table 2.4 once for each work group by reading down the appropriate
column corresponding to the number of low-speed connections in that
work group to determine the exact quantity of each package component
listed on the left, for example, DEPKL-01 or DEPKL-Al. (In the example
above, the matrix would be used once for the first work group of 14 users
and two more times for the larger work group of 80. The breakdown of the
larger work group into two groups should consider relative office locations
and future expansion requirements. In this example, the larger group
could become two groups of 40 each, one group of 64 and one group of 16,
or other combinations totaling 80.)
• After using the matrix for each work group, add together t he quantities of
each package component to find the total order requirements for each
component .
• Use Table 2.5 (Low-speed Work Group Package Order Codes) to compile
the complete order by filling in the qu antities that were determined above .
Follow all product order requirements exactly.

-~
(,I
Q,I

c
c
0

..SQ.I

E
Q,I

..c:

~
ff'\

rJ00

....>.

.e
( ,I

Q,I

c
0

2.137

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

Table 2.4 Low-speed Work Group Package Ordering Matrix

Number of Terminal Connections Per Work Group
Required Package Component Order
Number

1-8

9-16

17-24

DEPKL-01

1
1

DEPKL-Al
QA-VCBAA-H#

25-32

33-40 41-48

49-56

51-64

1 per load host computer (typically one per local area network)
Table 2.5 Low-speed Work Group Package Order Codes
Product Description

Order Code

Network hardware base package

DEPKL-01

Quantity

One baseband Ethernet transceiver (H4005)
One Local Network Interconnect (DELNI)
One DECserver 200/DL Terminal Server
with software license and cable kit
One DEC423 Cable Kit (H3104-B)
Two transceiver cables (BNEJL-05)
Network hardware add-on package

DEPKL-Al

One DECserver 200/DL Terminal Server
One transceiver cable (BNEJL-05)
Network Software 1

DECserver 200 software media and
documentation (One required per load host
computer)

QA-VCBAA-H#

#Refer to "DECserver 200" in Section 2 for distribution media.
'The level of software service contract must be the same for both the DECserver 200
software. Refer to Software Product Description 27.53.xx.

High-speed Work Group PackageWork System Interconnection

The High-speed Work Group Package links workstations, personal computers , and low-end systems operating at speeds greater than 19.2 Kb/s to a
local area network. The preconfigured base package supplies the products
required to connect up to eight work systems to the backbone cable of the
network .

Network Hardware Products
The High-speed Base Package includes the following products:
• One baseband Ethernet transceiver
• One Local Network Interconnect (DELNI)
• One ThinWire Ethernet Multiport Repeater (DEMPR)
• Two baseband transceiver cables
The following figure details the hardware configuration of the network
products provided in the high-speed base package. Add-on packages allow
for connecting up to 56 additional work systems, in multiples of 8, to the
base network connection outlined above .

2.138

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

High-speed Work Group Packase-Work System Interconnection Configuration

H4005

1 ••• 8

Thin Wire
Ethernet Cable

To DECconnect Faceplates
in Offices
NBG-174-00

Ordering Guidelines for High-speed Work Group Package
Use Table 2.6 (High-speed Work Group Package Ordering Matrix ) to
determine the quantity of products and services required to satisfy each
work -system connection situation . The matrix should be used each time a
distinct work group and/ or a work group of more than 64 offices is con nected to the network backbone . To use the ordering matrix ,
• List all the distinct work groups and the number of users within each work
group.
• If a distinct work group has more than 64 users , divide it by 64 and round
up to the next whole number. For ordering purposes in using the matrix ,
one large work group is treated as several smaller work groups. (As an
example , assume that there are two work groups consisting of 14 users and
80 users . The second work group of 80 would be treated as two groups
because 80 divided by 64 rounds up to 2.)
• Use Table 2.6 once for each work group by reading down the appropriate
column corresponding to the number of high-speed connections in that
work group to determine the exact quantity of each package component
that is listed on the left, for example, DEPKH-01 or DEPKH-Al. (In the
example above, the matrix would be used once for the first work group of
fourteen users , and two more times for the larger work group of 80. The
breakdown of the larger work group into two groups should consider
relative office locations and future expansion requirements . In this example, the larger group could become two groups of 40 each , one group of 64
and one group of 16, or other combinations totaling 80.)
• Customers using unshielded twisted-pair office cabling should order one
8-line Twisted-pair Starter Kit (H3300-AA) for every base or add-on package.
• After using the table for each work group, add together the quantities of
each package component to find the total order requirements for each
component.
· Use Table 2.7 (High-speed Work Group Package Order Codes) to compile
the complete order by filling in the quantities that were determined above.
Follow all product order requirements exactly.

-E
4'

.£
~

""'
!"i

0
00

....>.
.e
a1
c
c
0

2.139

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

Table 2.6 High-speed Work Group Package Ordering Matrix

Required Package Order No.

DEPKH-01

Number of Work System Connections per Work Group
1-8

9-16

17-24

1
1

DEPKH-Al

49-56

25-32

33-40 41-48

57-64
7

Table 2. 7 High-speed Work Group Package Order Codes
Product Description

Order Code

Network hardware base package

DEPKH-01

Quantity

O ne H4005 transceiver
One DELNI
One DEMPR
Two transceiver cables (BNE3L-05)
Network Hardware add-on package

DEPKH-Al

One DEMPR
One transceiver cable (BNE3L-05)
Optional hardware
Unshielded Twisted-pair Ethernet 8-line
Starter Kit

IBM PC Interconnection Package

H3300-BA

The IBM PC Interconnection Package provides the hardware and software
products necessary to connect up to eight IBM PCs to the Digital network .
This is accomplished through the use of an 802.3/Ethernet controller in
each of tpe IBM PCs, which enables communications on the network. The
IBM PCs connect to the 802.3/Ethernet backbone through a multiport
repeater (DEMPR), which consolidates the eight connections through one
transceiver.

Network Hardware
The IBM PC Interconnection Base Package includes the following products:
• One baseband Ethernet transceiver
• One baseband transceiver cable
• One ThinWire Ethernet Multiport Repeater
• Eight 802.3/Ethernet communications controllers with software licenses
for DECnet/PCSA Client software

Network Software
• One DECnet/PCSA Client software media and documentation (one
required per network)
The following figure details the hardware configuration of the network
products provided in the IBM PC Interconnection Package. This configuration is appropriate when up to eight IBM PC connections are required.
(When more than eight IBM PC network connections are required from the
same transceiver, refer to "Ordering Guidelines for More Than Eight IBM
PCs.")

2.140

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

IBM PC Interconnection Package

Transceiver

1 ••• 8

Thin Wire
Ethernet Cable

To IBM PCs
NBG-175-00

Ordering Guidelines for Eight or Fewer IBM PCs per Work Group
Use the IBM PC Interconnection Package Order Code Table to compile the
complete order by filling in the quantities determined:
• Order one hardware base package for each eight IBM PC connection in a
distinct office area. (If there are more than eight users in the same work
group, up to 64 IBM PCs in total, refer to "Ordering Guidelines for More
than Eight IBM PCs per Work Group.")
• Customers using unshielded twisted-pair office cabling should order one
8-line Twisted-pair Starter Kit (H3300-AA) for every base or add-on package.
• Order the DECnet-DOS software media and documentation (QVA05-HI).
Only one of these order codes is required per network. When many IBM
PC users are connected to the network, it may be desirable to order additional software media and documentation kits.

Ordering Guidelines for More than Eight IBM PCs per Work Group
When there are more than eight IBM PCs per work group, use the Highspeed Work Group Package order codes as well as IBM PC Add-on order
codes as follows:
• Follow the ordering guidelines for the High-speed Work Group Package to
determine the number of High-speed Hardware Base and High-speed
Add-on Packages needed .
• For every eight IBM PCs (or portion thereof), order one IBM PC Add-on
Package from the following table. (The IBM PC Add-on Package consists of
eight IBM PC 802.3/Ethernet controller boards .)
• Order the DECnet-DOS software media and documentation (QVA05-HI).
Only one is required per network. When many IBM PC users are connected
to the network, it may be desirable to order additional software media and
documentation kits.

.:
~

c
c

2.141

Local Area Work Group Interconnection

IBM PC Interconnection Package Order Codes
Product Description

Order Code

Network hardware base package

DEPKP-01

One H4005 transceiver
One DEMPR
Eight 802.3/Ethernet controllers with
DECnet/PCSA Client software licenses
(DEPCA-BA)
Network hardware add-on package

DEPKP-Al

Eight 802.3/Ethernet controllers with
DECnet/PCSA Client software licenses
(DEPCA-BA)
Optional hardware

Unshielded Twisted-pair Ethernet 8-line
Starter Kit

H3300-AA

Network software

One DECnet/PCSA Client software media
and documentation (one required per
network)

2.142

QVA05-HI

Quantity

Extended Local Arca Interconnection

Extended Local Area Interconnection links individuals, groups, or departments in geographically distinct work areas that are relatively close to each
other. Extended Local Area Interconnection enhances communication
between individuals and departments that are not easily accessible to each
other, facilitates better decision making through more timely and accurate
information flow, and provides effective and efficient use of computing
power and support resources.
Computer Room Package

The Computer Room Package provides the base network hardware necessary to link up to eight computers within a computer room environment to
an existing 802 .3/Ethernet backbone. Any systems with Digital 802.3/
Ethernet communication controllers and DECnet software can be used
with this package. Depending on internal cabling, computers may be
located up to 40 meters from the transceiver in this package.

Network Hardware Products
The Computer Room Package includes the following products:
• One Local Network Interconnect (DELNI)
• One baseband Ethernet transceiver
• One baseband transceiver cable
The following figure details the hardware configuration of the network
products provided in the Computer Room Package. Note that, because of
variations in distance between the Local Network Interconnect (DELNI)
and computers being connected to the network, the transceiver cables are
available only on a custom basis .
Computer Room Package Configuration

Transceiver

To Computers
NBG-176-00

Computer Room Package Ordering Guidelines
Use the Computer Room Package Order Code Table to compile the complete order by filling in the quantities that are determined below.
• Order one base network hardware package for each group of eight computers in the computer room .
• Digital can provide the required cabling and installation to connect each
computer to the DELNI on a custom basis.
• Customers who are new to network concepts and operation should order
the NETstart Plus Network Startup Package (QSC34-SZ).

2.143

Extended Local Area Interconnection

• Digital recommends the use of a network management product with local
area networks. If network management is required, order either NMCC/
VAX ETHERnim or NMCC/ DECnet Monitor. Refer to "Network and System
Management Products" in Section 6 for product descriptions. Order codes
for both the software license and media/documentation are required.
Computer Room Package Order Codes
Product Description

Order Code

Quantity

Network hardware

One DELNI
One H4005 transceiver
One transceiver cable (BNEJL-05)

DEPKC-01

Optional Network service

NETstart Plus Network Startup Package

Building Package

QSC34-SZ

The Building Package combines two 802.3/Ethernet segments into an
extended local area network (LAN) and isolates local traffic within each
segment. This package delivers 10 Mb/s 802 .3/Ethernet capability in either
of two configurations : Package A connects two floors of a building, up to
100 meters apart , for use with standard baseband cable (not included);
Package B connects two floors of a building, up to 1,500 meters apart, for
use with fiber optic cable (not included).
The Building Package includes the following products :

Network Hardware Products
Order one of the following packages :
·Package A-For economical, local connections to the standard baseband
cable between floors of a building, up to 100 meters :
- One standard LAN Bridge 100
- Two baseband Ethernet transceivers
- Two baseband transceiver cables
·Package B-For local connection to the 802.3/Ethernet fiber optic cable
between floors of a building, up to 1, 500 meters:
- One fiber optic Ethernet repeater
- One fiber optic LAN Bridge 100
- Two baseband Ethernet transceivers
- Two baseband transceiver cables
The following figures detail the hardware configuration of the network
products provided in each of the two Building Package alternatives.

2.144

Extended Local Area Interconnection

Building Package A Configuration

Tra nsceiver
~ Transceiver

Cable

Standard
Bridge

NBG-177-00

Building Package B Configuration

Transceiver

Fiber
Optic
Bridge
Fiber Optic Cable
(not included)
~
>

·a;

~
c
F

Transceiver Cable

NBG- 178-00

Building Package Ordering Guidelines
Use the Building Package Order Code table to compile the complete order
by filling in the quantities determined :
• Determine the base network hardware package required to connect the
floors and/or buildings in the network . Order one hardware package for
each Building Package.
• Customers new to network concepts and operation should order one
NETstart Plus Network Startup Package (QSC34-SZ) per building .
• Customers who require long-range network planning should order one
Network Planning and Design Package (QSNET-SZ) per building .
• Digital recommends the use of a network-management product with local
area networks . If network management is required , order either NMCC/
VAX ETHERnim or NMCC/ DECnet Monitor. & Refer to "Network and
System Management Products" in Section 6 for product descriptions. Order
codes for both the software license and media/documentation are required.
Digital can provide the design and installation of standard and fiber optic
cabling on a custom basis. They are not included in the Building Package.

2.145

Extended Local Area Interconnection

Building Package Order Codes
Product Description

Order Code

Quantity

Network hardware
Package A (local connections) includes
One LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET.AA)
Two H4005 transceivers
Two transceiver cables (BNE3L-05)

DEPKB-Bl

Package B (local fiber optic connections)
includes
One fiber optic Ethernet repeater
(DEREP-RH)
One fiber optic LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET-RH)
Two H4005 transceivers
Two transceiver cables (BNE3L-05)

DEPKB-B2

Optional network services

Site Package

NETstart Plus Network Startup Package

QSC34-SZ

Network Planning and Design Service

QSNET-SZ

The Site Package provides the capability to join 802.3/Ethernet network
segments between geographically close buildings , such as a university
campus or office complex. This package delivers 10 Mb/s Ethernet capability between buildings within an extended local area, up to 3,000 meters
using fiber optic cable (not included).

Network Hardware Products
The Site Package includes the following products:
• Two Fiber Optic LAN Bridge lOOs
• Two baseband Ethernet transceivers
• Two baseband transceiver cables
The following figure details the hardware configuration of the network
products provided in the Site Package.

2.146

Extended Local Area Interconnection

Site Package Configuration

Transceiver
•Transceiver
Cable

Fiber
Optic
Bridge
_:z:::riber Optic Cable
(not included)

Fiber
Optic
Bridge
--=:Esceiver Cable
Transceiver

NBG-179-00

Site Package Ordering Guidelines
Use the Site Package Order Code Table to compile the complete order by
filling in the quantities determined:
• Determine the base network hardware package required to connect the
floors and/or buildings in the network. Order one hardware package for
each Site Package.
• Customers who are new to network concepts and operation should order
one NETstart-Plus Network Startup Package {QSC34-SZ) per building.
• Customers who require long-range network planning should order one
Network Planning and Design Package (QSNET-SZ) per building.
• Digital recommends the use of a network management product with local
area networks. If network management is required, order either NMCC/
VAX ETHERnim or NMCC/DECnet Monitor. Refer to "Network and System
Management Products" in Section 6 for product descriptions. Order codes
for both the software license and media/documentation are required.
Site Ps.ckage Order Codes
Product Description

Order Code

Network hardware
Two fiber optic LAN Bridges lOOs
(DEBET-RH)
Two H4005 transceivers
Two transceiver cables (BNE3L-05)

Quantity

DEPKB-B3

E
u

..c:

""'

0
00

Optional Network services

:-e
;.:_

NETstart Plus Network Startup Package

QSC34-SZ

Network Planning and Design Service

QSNET-SZ

u
u

c
0

2.147

Wide Area Interconnection

Wide Area Interconnection provides for network access between sites that
are geographically remote from one another. A typical application links a
headquarters operation with all of its manufacturing plants, sales offices,
and distribution centers. Wide Area Interconnection facilitates better
management control through more accurate and timely information gathering, processing, and reporting. It provides immediacy and uniformity for
information updates to field operations in areas such as pricing, policy, and
product availability. And it enables an organization to coordinate its efforts
in response to market conditions .
Wide Area Package

The Wide Area Package provides the capability for customers with a local
Digital network to connect to remote Digital networks or systems . Communication can be accomplish~d via either private or public data networks. .
The Wide Area Package can be used with any standard systems or CPUs
with Digital 802.3/Ethernet communications controllers and DECnet
software. Digital can provide individual site survey and installation plans
to ensure proper routing of cable and placement of electronics. Digital can
also quote materials and labor necessary to route and install the appropriate cabling. The following products are included in the Wide Area Package:

Network Hardware Products
• One baseband Ethernet transceiver
• One baseband transceiver cable
• One DECnet Router Server hardware (DECSA-EA)
• One DECSA U.S. Country Kit (DECSK-AA)

Network Software
Order one of the following :
·DECnet Router Server software (Q''725-xx), or
•DECnet Router/X.25 Gateway software (Q''727-xx)
The following figure details the hardware configuration of the network
products provided in the Wide Area Package .
Wide Are.t P.1clc.1ge Configuration

Transceiver

··.
NBG-1 80-00

Wide Area Package Ordering Guidelines
Use the Wide Area Package Order Code Table to compile the complete
order by filling in the quantities determined below.
• Order one base network hardware package (DEPKR-01) for each Wide
Area Package.

2.148

Wide Area Interconnection

• Order one of the following software packages for each Wide Area Package
('' refers to the CPU that will downline-load the software; # refers to the
distribution medium )
- DECnet Router Server license (Q''725 -UZ ) with media and documentation (Q'' 725-H# ), or
- DECnet Router/X .25 Gateway license (Q"727-UZ ) with media and documentation (Q''727 -H#)
Note that the level of software service contract must be the same for both
the CPU operating system and the DECnet Router Server or DECnet/X.25
Gateway software . Refer to Software Product Description (SPD ) 30 .34 or
SPD 30 .41.
• Customers who are new to network concepts and operation should order
one NETstart Plus Network Startup Package (QSC34 -SZ ) per building .
• Customers who require long-range network planning should order one
Network Planning and Design Package (QSNET-SZ ) per building .
• Digital recommends the use of a network-management product with local
area networks . If network management is required , order the NMCC/
DECnet Monitor. Refer to "Network and System Management Products" in
Section 6 for a product description . Order Codes for both the software
license and media/documentation are required.
Wide Area Package Order Codes
Product Description

Order Code

Quantity

Network hardware

One H4005 transceiver ·
One transceiver cable (BNE3L-05)
One DECSA DECnet router server
One DECSA U.S. Country Kit

DEPKR-01

Network software 1

For the DECnet Router Server, order the
following license and media :
DECnet Router Server software license (one
per package)

Q*725 -UZ

DECnet Router Server software media and
documentation (one per package)

Q*725 ·H#

..:
(j
cu

c
c

For DECnet Router/X.25 Gateway, order the
following license and media :

DECnet Router/X.25 Gateway software
license (one per package only)

Q*727-UZ

DECnet Router/ X.25 Gateway software
media and documentation (one per package)

Q*727-H#

Optional Network services

NETstart Plus Network Startup package

QSC34 -SZ

Network Planning and Design Service

QSNET-SZ

*Refer to "DECnet Router Server Software Order Codes" in Section 2 and to "DECnet
Router/ X.25 Gateway Software Order Codes" in Section 4, for a list of supported
processors and distribution media .
1
The level of software service contract must be the same for both the CPU operating
system and the DECnet Router Server or DECnet Router/ X.25 Gateway software. Refer
to the appropriate Software Product Descriptions .

2.149

Wide Area Interconnection

Remote Site Package

The Remote Site Package links terminals, printers, and personal computers
(in terminal emulation mode) in a remote site to an 802.3/Ethernet local
area network via one leased phone line. The products in this package
combine terminal server and statistical multiplexing techniques to enable
remote site connection.
The Base Package supplies the products and services required to connect
up to eight remote devices over a leased phone line to a local area network; the base package plus the add-on package connect up to 16 devices.
External modems that run at 9.6 Kb/s are used in this package to connect
over the leased phone line.

Network Hardware Products
The Remote Site Base Package includes the following products:
• One baseband Ethernet transceiver
• One baseband transceiver cable
• One MUXserver 100 (DSRZA-BA)
• One DECmux II (DFMZA-BA)
· Two 9.6 Kb/s synchronous modems (DF129-AA)
• Two modem cables

Network Software
• MUXserver 100 software media and documentation (one per load host)
• MUXserver 100 software license (one per MUXserver 100)
Remote Site Base Package Configuration

Transceiver

Standard Ethernet Cable

..,..__ __,,Modem

DEC-

mux
Modem

r----

NBG-1 81·00

2.150

Wide Area Interconnection

Remote Site Package Order Codes
Product Description

Order Code

Quantity

Network hardware

Base Package includes
One H4005 transceiver
One transceiver cable (BNE3L-05)
One MUXserver 100 (DSRZA-BA)
One DECmux II (DFMZA-BA)
Two 9.6 Kb/s synchronous modems
(DF129-AA)
Two modem cables (BC22F-10)

DEPKM-01

Add-on package includes
One DECmux II (DFMZA-BA)
One connection cable (BC17D-10)

DEPKM -Al

Network software

MUXserver 100 software license (one
required per MUXserver 100)

Q*ZAW-UZ

MUXserver 100 software media and
documentation (one required per load host)

Q*ZAW-H#

*Refer to "MUXserver 100/ DECmux II Remote Terminal Server" in Section 2 for a list
of supported processors and distribution media.

4'
u

4.1

c
0

u
~

2.151

Multivendor Interconnection

Multivendor interconnection allows information to be transferred between
a Digital network and the network of another vendor, and enables the
information to be used on either system. Multivendor interconnection
protects a company's investment in existing equipment, and provides freedom of choice for future equipment decisions.
DECnet/IBM SNA Package

The DECnet/IBM SNA Package allows communication with an IBM SNA
network using the 802.3/Ethernet-based DECnet/IBM SNA and the
DECnet/IBM SNA Access Routines. DECnet/SNA Access Routines are
software packages, residing on a VAX or MicroVAX host, that allow users to
perform specific functions on IBM host systems connected to the SNA
network.
Three DECnet/SNA Access Routines are included in the DECnet/SNA
Package as listed below. .& For detailed product descriptions of all
DECnet/IBM SNA Access Routines, refer to "Digital/IBM Communications Software" in Section 4.
The following products are included in the DECnet/IBM SNA Package:

Network Hardware
• One baseband Ethernet transceiver
• One baseband transceiver cable
• One 802.3/Ethernet-based DECnet/SNA Gateway (DECSA-FA)
• One 802.3/Ethernet-based DECnet/SNA Gateway U.S. Country Kit
(DECSK-AA)

Network Software
• DECnet/SNA Gateway software
• DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management software
• DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Terminal Emulator
• DECnet/SNA VMS Remote Job Entry

Network Service
• DECnet/SNA Gateway Software Installation and Orientation
The following figure details the hardware configuration of the network
products provided in the DECnet/IBM SNA Package.

2.152

Multivendor Interconnection

DECnet/ IBM SNA Package Configuration

Transceiver

~~~~~___,~rsc-e-ive_r_C_ab-le~~-

··.

TolBM/SNA

Network

NBG -182-00

DECnet/ IBM SNA Package Ordering Guidelines
Use the DECnet/IBM SNA Package Order Code table to compile the complete order by filling in the quantities that are determined below.
• Order one base network hardware package for each DECnet/ IBM SNA
Package (DEPKS-01 )
• Order the DECnet/SNA Gateway software, license, and documentation
• Order all the required DECnet/SNA Access Routines . Both a software
license code and a media/documentation code are required for each Access
Routi_ne. Refer to the order code table.
Note that the level of software service contract must be the same for
both the CPU operating system and the DECnet/ SNA Gateway
software . .A Refer to Software Product Description 30.15.
• Order one DECnet/SNA Gateway Software Installation and Orientation
Service for each DECnet/IBM SNA Package.
• For customers who are new to network concepts and operation , order one
NETstart Plus startup service per building.
• For customers who require long-range network planning, order one Network Planning and Design Package per bui lding.
• Digital recommends the use of a network management product with local
area networks. If network management is required, order the NMCC/
DECnet Monitor. Refer to "Network and System Management Products" in
Section 6 for a product description . Order codes for both the software
license and media/documentation are required .

.:
u

Q,I

c
c
0

Q,I

E
..;
Q,I

""l'i

0
00

£-

c
0

2.153

Multivendor Interconnection

DECnet/IBM SNA Package Order Codes
Product Description

Order Code

Quantity

Network hardware
One H4005 transceiver
One transceiver cable (BNE3L-05)
One DECnet/SNA Gateway
One DECnet/SNA Gateway U.S. Country Kit

DEPKS-01

Network software licenses 1
DECnet/ SNA VMS Gateway software (one
each per package)

Q*545 -UZ

DECnet/ SNA VMS Gateway management

Q*452 -UZ

DECnet/ SNA VMS 3270 Terminal Emulator

QL-454A*-AA

DECnet/ SNA VMS Remote Job Entry

QL-453A*-AA

Network software media and documentation'
DECnet/SNA Gateway software (one each per
package)

Q*545 -H#

DECnet/ SNA VMS Gateway Management

Q*452 -H#

DECnet/ SNA VMS 3270 Terminal Emulator

QA-454AA-H#

DECnet/ SNA VMS Remote Job Entry

QA-453AA-H#

Network service
Software installation and orientation

QSFOl -SZ

Optional network services
NETstart Plus Network Startup Package

QSC34-SZ

Network Planning and Design Service

QSNET-SZ

*Refer to "DECnet/SNA Access Routines and Programming Interfaces" in Section 4 for a
list of supported processors and distribution media.
1

The level of software service contract must be the same for both the CPU operating
system and the DECnet/SNA Gateway software. A Refer to Software Product Description 30.15.

2.154

Section 3

Connectivity:
Communications
Hardware

This section contains the
following topics . ..

Ordering Information

VAXBI Communications Controllers

Q·bus Communications Controllers

MicroVAX 2000 Communications Controllers

UNIBUS Communications Controllers

Communications Processors

Modems

Cables

Section 3

Overview

Connectivity:
Communications
Hardware

Asynchronous and synchronous communications hardware is used in both
Digital-to-Digital and Digital-to-non-Digital environments to transmit data
between computers or from terminals to computers. Transmission methods,
or protocols, used for asynchronous connections differ from those used for
synchronous connections.
Asynchronous transmission, a character-oriented protocol, is primarily used
in terminal-to-host communications. Asynchronous transmission is
uniquely suited to the low-speed, intermittent data transmission from
terminals to hosts. Synchronous transmission, on the other hand, is a more
efficient block-oriented protocol that transmits an entire block of characters at one time. Synchronous transmission is used primarily for high-speed
communications between computers. Note that although Digital's terminalto-computer connections are asynchronous, IBM and many other vendors
use synchronous terminal-to-computer connections.
When data is sent across most telephone lines, the digital signals of computers must be translated into the analog signals used with telephone
equipment. This is accomplished through modems. Computer devices are
connected to modems through standard interfaces. EIA-232-C/CCITT V.28,
EIA-422/CCITT V.11, EIA-423-A/CCITT V.10, and CCITT V.35 are examples
of such interface standards. All Digital communications interfaces that
include an industry-standard interface can be used to connect Digital
systems to a Private Branch Exchange (PBX) via a modem.
A network is a flexible configuration of interconnected terminals, computers, and other intelligent devices (nodes). Nodes can be either close
together (local) or far apart (remote) . Some devices, because of their high
speed, operate only in a local area. Because low-speed devices can be
connected across phone lines, they can be used in remote applications as
well as locally.

E-

:e...
(,,I

c
c
0

This section includes product descriptions and configuring and ordering
information for Digital's asynchronous and synchronous hardware communications products, modems, statistical multiplexers, and cables.
A For information on Digital's 802.3/Ethernet products, refer to Section 2.

Note: Synchronous products do not support the use of internal clocking.

3.1

Communications Ha1·dware Ordering Information

To order a communications device , order both the base option module and
the specific cabinet kit required to install the module on your system. A
cabinet kit includes the appropriate cabling, filter assembly, and brackets.
Several cabinet kits are available for each option because various length
internal cables and mounting brackets are required for different system
cabinets .
UNIBUS communications options can be mounted in Digital's older,
unshielded cabinets by ordering a cabinet kit that includes an adapter
bracket . To determine whether a cabinet is shielded or not, examine the
back of it. A shielded cabinet will have metal panels with I/O connection
panel inserts or blank metal plates mounted in the spaces between the
panels. An unshielded cabinet may have other devices mounted in the
back. However, the CPU box and disk enclosures will be visible from the
back of an unshielded cabinet.
For example, to order a 16-line multiplexer for a VAX-11/780 system, order
a DHUll-M (base option) and a CK-DHUll-AD (cabinet kit to install a
DHU 11 on a VAX-11/780 system) . The following figure and tables explain
the hardware order code designations .
Parts of a Cabinet-kit Order Code
CK

DHU11

Cab Kit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - '
Device Name - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - lnterface Type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Cabinet Field- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -----'
NBG-183-00

Interface Types for Cabinet Kits
Char

Electrical Mechanical Interface

EIA-232 (with full modem control)

V.35

Integral modem

EIA-232 (with limited modem control)

EIA-422/449

EIA-423-A/449

20 Ma

Fiber optic

'802.3/Ethernet

Multifunction device (see device user's guide for detailed
description)

M,N

Base options designations

CCITT V.11

CCITT/X.21

50-pin multi-interface support (see device user's guide for detailed
description)

1-9

Multiple interface types in a single option, for example, halfsynchronous and half-asynchronous

3.2

Communications Hardware Ordering Information

Cabinet Fielcl Designations for Cabinet Kits

Char

Shielded Cabinets

Cable
21 inches

BA123 box

BA23 box

12 inches

PDP-11/23 PLUS

30 inches

PDP-11 , DECSYSTEM-20, VAX-11/750
expanded cabi net, VAX -11/780 systems

10 feet

PDP-11/84 , VAX -11/730 systems, VAX -11/750
kernel

7 feet

VAX-11/725, 5 panel, PDP-11/84 box,
MicroPDP-11/83 cabinet, MicroVAX II
ca bine t

3 feet

VAXBI (8500, 8800)

5 feet

VAX-11/725, 2 panel

4 feet

VAXBI (VAX 8200/8300) systems

8 feet

VAXBI (8800 expansion cabinet)

15 feet

All VAX system expanded cabi nets for
DMZ32 only

10 feet

Char

Unshielded Cabinets
10-ft Cable/Mou nt in H9544-SJ or 74-2729201 (D epends on option)

...
...

;

""Q

=>.
I'll

.e....
(,,I

10-ft Cable

c
c

25-ft Cable

(')

Cable Ordering Information

The order codes for external cables req uired by the communications
devices are listed in "Communications Cables" at the end of th is section.

3.3

VAXBI Communications Controllers

The following table summarizes the features of Digital's asynchronous and
synchronous VAXBI communications controllers .
VAXBI Communications Controllers
DMB32

DHB32

Type

Asynchronous

Number of lines

Direct Memory
Access (DMA) 1

Yes

Maximum speed
(Consult SPD) 2

38.4 Kb/s

64 Kb/s for
HDLC, SDLC;
19.2 Kb/s for
DDCMP; 9.6 Kb/s
for others

38.4 Kb/s
simultaneously on
four channels
with custom
driver; 19 .2 Kb/s
simultaneously on
two channels with
VMS

Software support

DECnet-VAX

DECnet-VAX;
DMB32
synchronous
device driver
(prerequisite);
VAX P.S.I.'

DECnet-VAX

Operating system
support

VMS

MultiCPU access 3

Full

Yes (with EIA-232
Cabinet Kit)

Modem control

Primary buying
reason

Synchronous

Asynchronous
16

Interface to VAXBI systems, 8
asynchronous lines, 1 synchronous line, 1
printer port

Direct connection
to VAXBI for
asynchronous
devices

Modem control refers to the number of signals available to control modem functions
on U.S. and European modems. Full modem control includes nine to eleven signals.
Limited modem control is five signals . No modem control means only send and receive
signals are present for .each line.

' Can be integrated with DECnet-P.S.l. must be present.

3.4

VAXBI Communications Controllers

DHB32

The DHB32 is an asynchronous communications controller that enables up
to 16 terminals , modems , or serial printers to communicate directly with a
VAXBI processor. The DHB32 emulates the asynchronous portion of Digital's DMB32 communications controller by using similar architecture and
the same software driver. The functions offered by the eight asynchronous
channels on the DMB32 are extended to 16 channels on the DHB32. Unlike
the DMB32 , the DHB32 has neither a synchronous communications line nor
a parallel printer channel.
The DHB32 is available in an EIA -232-D or DEC423 (EIA -423) version . The
EIA-232 version has a distribution panel for 16 asynchronous channels with
modem control. The DEC423 version has 14 DECconnect channels for
connection to terminals , plus two channels that can be switched to DEC423
for terminals or EIA-232 for modem control.
Using the standard VMS driver, the DHB32 can operate 16 channels simultaneously at the following maximum throughput speed : 19.2 Kb/s for two
channels and 9.6 Kb/s for 14 channels. Using a custom-developed driver, it
can operate four channels simultaneously at maximum throughput speed of
38.4 Kb/s.

;

"'O

::c:

Features
• Allows maximum of 16 terminals , modems , or serial printers to communicate directly with a VAXBI processor.

....>.
·::
........
I.I

• Provides full modem control with full-duplex, auto-answer, dialup operation .

c
0

• Has programmable split-speed operation with automatic flow control of
transmitted and received data.
• Includes a full range of diagnostics compatible with the DMB32 .
• Provides DECconnect terminal connection with DEC423 (EIA-423 ) version.

Prerequisite Software
The DHB32 uses the asynchronous portion of the DMB32 device driver,
which is included with VMS Operating System V4.6 or later.
Specifications
Mounting Code : One VAXBI slot
Power Requirements :
- de amps drawn at 5 Vdc: 5 .56
- de amps drawn at 12 Vdc: 0.42
- de amps drawn at -12 Vdc: 0.42
VAXBI nodes : 1
I/O Panel Units: 8 for EIA-232, 4 for DEC423

Ordering Information
Order the DHB32-M controller and the appropriate cabinet kit. Cabinet
kits include the distribution panel, a loopback connector for diagnostic
testing, six adapter cables to connect the module to the distribution panel,
and a user guide.
External device cables for the DHB32 must be ordered separately. The
DEC423 version requires the H3104-B cable and cable concentrator.

3.5

VAXBI Communications Controllers

DHBJ2 Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Controller
16-line asynchronous communications controller for VAXBI
processors .

DHB32-M

Cabinet Kits
For EIA-232-D system installation, select one of the following
cabinet kits:
EIA -232-D cabinet kit for VAX 82xx/ 83xx .

CK -DHB32 -AM

EIA-232 -D cabinet kit for VAX 85xx/87xx/ 88xx

CK-DHB32 -AJ

EIA-232 -D cabinet kit for VAX 85xx/ 87xx/ 88xx external VAXBI
channels.

CK-DHB32-AN

For DEC423 system installation, select one of the following
cabinet kits :
DEC423 cabinet kit for VAX 82xx/83xx .

CK-DHB32 -LM

DEC423 cabinet kit for VAX 85xx/87xx/88xx internal VAXBI
channels, and VAX 62xx internal and external channels.

CK·DHB32 -LJ

DEC423 cabinet kit for VAX 85xx/ 87xx/ 88xx VAXBI external
channel

CK -DHB-LN

Cables .6. Refer to "Communications Cables" at the end of this
section for available lengths.

DMB32

Connects EIA-232 -D-compatible terminals and printers.

BC22D-xx

Connects EIA-232 -D-compatible asynchronous modems.

BC22E-xx

DEC423 cable and cable concentrator for eight devices. (Order
two kits for connecting up to 16 DEC423 devices.)

H3104 -B

Connects DEC423 terminals or printers to cable concentrator
with modified modular jack connectors .

BC16E-xx

The DMB32 is a high-performance DMA intelligent communications
controller for the VAXBI family of computer systems . It provides ten
communication lines-eight asynchronous terminal or modem lines, one
synchronous line, and one parallel printer line, all supported from a single
VAXBI backplane slot .
The eight asynchronous lines can transmit at speeds up to 38.4 Kb/s a line
under specified conditions. (Actual line speed and throughput depends on
the operating system and user applications .) All lines provide DMA output,
full modem control, and split receive/transmit speed capability.
The one synchronous line supports message framing , and CRC generation
and verification with full modem control for the HDLC , SDLC , BISYNC,
DDCMP , and GEN BYTE protocols. It is capable of operating at speeds up
to 64 Kb/s for HDLC and SDLC protocols , and 19.2 Kb/s for DDCMP .
Other protocols are supported at 9 .6 Kb/s speeds. (The actual throughput
depend s on the operating system and application.)
The one parallel printer line supports LP32 generic printer specifications,
including the LP25, LP26 , LP27, LXY12 , LXY22, and LGOl parallel
printers .

3.6

VAXBI Communications Controllers

Features
•Asynchronous communications :
- Eight communication lines, EIA-232 -D compatibility
- Line speeds up to 38.4 Kb/s (application dependent )
- DMA output optimizes terminal 1/0 performance
- Split receive/transmit speeds on a per-line basis
- Full modem control supports full- and half-duplex point-to-point
modems
• Synchronous communications :
- One communication line with EIA-232 -D, EIA -422-A, EIA-423-A, and
V.35 compatibility
- Line speeds up to 64.0 Kb/s (application-dependent)
- DMA input and output
- Full modem control supports full- and half-duplex point-to-point
modems
• Parallel printer line supports a wide range of Digital parallel printers,
including LP25, LP26, LP27, LP32 , LXY12 , LXY22 and LGOl.
• Comprehensive self-test through ROM-based diagnostics performs extensive functional tests of the DMB32 circuitry at each power-up or reset.
DMBJ1 Typical Configuration

Local Terminals

Parallel
Printer
Sync

Modem
Cable

WAN

Environment
NBG-186-00

Adapter Cables
The appropriate two-foot adapter cable must be ordered to connect the
DMB32 50-pin D-subminiature connector to the selected synchronous
communication device. A Refer to the DMB32 Hardware Order Code
Table for ordering information. The adapter cable can be ordered through
the DECdirect Plus catalog.

3.7

VAXBI Communications Controllers

Distribution Panel
The distribution panel is four panels wide, does not require power, and
attaches to the back of the computer system cabinet containing the module.
The panel contains eight 25-pin D-subminiature connectors for asynchronous lines, one 50-pin D-subminiature connector for the synchronous line,
and one 3 7-pin D-subminiature connector for the printer port.
Specifications
Mounting Code: One VAXBI slot
- One distribution panel (H3033 ), four-panel width
Power Requirements :
- de amps drawn at 5 V: 6. 75 A
- de amps drawn at 12 V: 300 mA
- de amps drawn at -12 V: 425 mA
Environmental Class: C .6. Refer to Appendix B for details.

Required Software
• VMS Operating System V5.0 or later
• DMB32 Wide Area Network Device Driver, required to use the synchronous line with VMS

Required Hardware
• A VAXBI system configuration .6. Refer to the DMB32 software order code
table for a list of supported processors.
• Adapter cable for synchronous line

Ordering Information
The VAX Wide Area Network device driver for the synchronous line must
be ordered separately to support point-to-point communications with VMS.
DMBJ2 Hardware Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Includes base module only. For system installation, select the
appropriate cabinet kit and external cables.

DMB32-M

Cabinet Kits

For use with VAX 8840, 8830, 8820, 8810, 8800, 8700, 8550,
and 8530 internal VAXBI channels; H9657 external VAXBI
channels; and VAX 6200 series internal and external channels

CK-DMB32-LJ

For use with VAX 8250 and 8350

CK-DMB32-LM

For use with VAX 8810, 8800, 8700, 8550, and 8530 external
(H9652) VAXBI channels

CK-DMB32-LN

Synchronous line adapter cables

For use with CCITT V.35

BC19F-02

For use with EIA-232 -D/CCITT V.24

BC19D-02

For use with EIA-422

BC19B-02

For use with EIA-423-A

BC19E-02

3.8

VAXBI Communications Controllers

VAX Wide Area Network Device Driver Software 01'.der Codes
Order Code

Option
Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use license Software revision
right-to-copy

QL-VAWAA-AA
QL-VAWHA-HZ

Materials and Installation
Distribution and documentation

QA-VAWAA-H#

Documentation only

QA-VAWAA-GZ
QT-VAWA*-1#

Installation service

U.S. Software Services

DECsupport service

QT-VAWA* -9#

Basic service

QT-VAWA* -8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-VAWA* -3#

*Supported processors(*) : VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4), VAX 6240 (D),
VAX 8200/8250 (}),VAX 8300/8350 (H}, VAX 8500/8530 (G), VAX 8550 (E),
VAX 8700 (E) , VAX 8800 (D), VAX 8810 (E), VAX 8820 (D), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V),
VAX 8978 (5)
#Supported media (#): TK50 (5), RX33 (7), 1,600 bpi magtape (M)
1 For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

3.9

Q-bus Communications Controllers

The following table summarizes the features of Digital's asynchronous and
synchronous Q-bus communications controllers.
Q-bus Communications Controllers
Device
Type

Asynchronous

CXYOS

CXB16

CXA16
1

Asynchronous

DHF11 8

DHQll

Asynchronous

Number of lines

16 or 32

DMA 2

Yes

Maximum speed
(consult SPD) 3

38.4 Kb/s

Software support

DECnet- HM-PLUS,
DECnet-Micro/RSX

DECnet-1 lM-PLUS,
DECnet-Micro/RSX

DECnet-llM-PLUS,
DECnet-Micro/RSX,
DECnet-VAX

DECnet-RSX,
DECnet-Micro/RSX,
MicroPower/Pascal

DECnet-VAX,
DECnet-RSX,
DECnet-Micro/RSX,
MicroPower/Pascal

Operating system
support

RSX- llM-PLUS,
Micro/RSX, VMS

RSX-HM-PLUS,
Micro/RSX, VMS

VMS, RSX-HMPLUS, Micro/RSX,
RSTS/E, VAXELN,
ULTRIX-32

VMS, RSX-HMPLUS, Micro/RSX,
ULTRIX-32, RSTS/E,
VAXELN

MultiCPU access4

Modem control'

Full

Primary buying
reason

DEC423 (EIA423-A)
asynchronous
communications
(data only)

EIA-422
asynchronous
communications
(data only)

EIA-232-D
asynchronous
communications;
full modem control

Fiber optic link up
to 1 kilometer;
environments that
prevent the use of
copper connections

High performance;
low power
consumption; dual
height module with
full modem control

Used only on Q-bus systems with BA200 series enclosures.

DMA (Direct Memory Access) is the ability to move multi-character messages between a communication line and CPU memory without
interrupting the CPU. This capability yields higher performance.

Actual device speed and throughput depend on current Digital operating system, system configuration, and applications.
MultiCPU access is the ability to send a message directly to two or more CPUs without routing the message through another CPU.

3.10

Q-bus Communications Controllers

Q-bus Communications Controllers (Continued)
Device

DLVJll

DMVll

DPVll

DSVU

DZQU

KMVlA

Type

Asynchronous

Synchronous

Asynchronous

Asynchronous or
Synchronous

Number of lines
DMA

4
No

Yes

Maximum speed
(consult SPD) 3

I line @ 38.4
Kb/s, 2 lines @
19.2 Kb/s, 4
lines @ 9.6 Kb/s

56 or 19.2 Kb/s
(Depends on the
version)

56 Kb/s, 9.6
Kb/s for IBM
interconnect

2 lines@ 64
Kb/s, 1 line @
256 Kb/s; SNA
limited to 1 line
@ 64 Kb/s

9.6 Kb/s

64 Kb/s 7

Software
support

DECnet-RT,
DECnet-RSX,
DECnet-Micro/
RSX

DECnet-RT,
DECnet-RSX,
DECnet/E,
DECnet-Micro/
RSX, DECnetVAX

DECnet-RT,
DECnet-RSX,
RSX P.S.I. 6 ,
DECnet-Micro/
RSX, VAX P.S.1. 6 ,
VMS/SN A

DECnet-VAX,
VAX P.S.I.,
VMS/SNA

DECnet-RSX,
DECnet-VAX,
DECnet-Micro/
RSX

RSX-11M-PLUS
Software Tools,
Micro VMS
Software Tools,
HDLC framing,
X.25 Link Level
Products, VAX
P.S.1. 6 , RSX
P.S.1. 6

Operating
system support

RSX -UM -PLUS

RSX-llM, VMS

VMS, RSX-llS,
RSX-llM, RSXHM-PLUS,
Micro/RSX-llS,
Micro/RSX-HM,
Micro/RSXHM-PLUS

VMS

RSX-llM-PLUS,
Micro/RSX,
VMS, ULTRIX32, Micro/RSTS,
RSTS/E

VMS, RSX-11S,
RSX-11M, RSX11M-PLUS,
Micro/RSX

...u
;
""O
...
t'I

:I:

...;.:,
....'">
y

c
c
0

u
C')

MultiCPU
access4

Yes

Modem control'

Limited

Full

Limited

Full

Primary buying
reason

Lowest price;
FDX
configurations

DECnet pointto-point
configurations
across phone
lines

Low cost

High
performance;
multi protocol
support

Dual height
module with
limited modem
control; FDX

High
performance for
bit-stuff
protocols;
programmable
for synchronous
or asynchronous
communications

' Modem control refers to the number of signals available to control modem functions on U.S. and European modems. Full modem control includes nine to eleven signals. Limited modem control is five signals. No modem control means only send and receive signals are
present for each line .
6 Ca n be integrated with DECnet-P.S.I. must be present.
7

Limited to 19.2 Kb/s with VAX P.S.I. or RSX P.S.I.

8 DECnet-VAX does not currently support this device.

3.11

Q-bus Communications Controllers

CX Communications Controllers

The ex communications controllers provide asynchronous communications
for Q-bus systems that use the BA200 series system enclosures. These
communications controllers-the eXY08, the eXA16, and the eXB16operate at speeds up to 38.4 Kb/s per line, and transmit data using either
Direct Memory Access (DMA) or programmed output.

CXYOS
The eXY08 provides eight EIA-232-D communications lines to terminals,
modems, or serial printers. All lines support full modem control, which
permits point-to-point dialup or leased-line operation.

CXA16
The eXA16 provides 16 DEe423 lines for data-only connections (no
modem control) using the DEeconnect modular plug connectors.
DEe423, a superset of EIA-423-A, supports local EIA-232-D terminalto-host communications at 9.6 Kb/sup to distances of 200 feet with the
H8571-A passive adapter. EIA-232 terminals using the H8571-A and
H3105-A active adapters can take advantage of DEe423 Electrical
Overstress and Electrostatic Discharge (EOS/ESD) protection, as well as
increased distances up to 1000 feet at 9.6 Kb/s.
VT300 series terminals provide integral DEe423 compatibility, which
allows connection to the eXA16 at operating distances of 1000 feet at 9.6
Kb/s, without the need of a passive or active adapter.

CXB16
The eXB16 provides 16 EIA-422 communications lines for data-only connections (no modem control).
The EIA-422 standard offers a high immunity to line noise, important in
harsh factory, industrial, and military applications. It allows for line lengths
up to 4,000 feet at all supported line speeds. (The eXB 16 is used only with
EIA-422-compatible terminal equipment; connection to standard VTlOO/
200/300 series terminals is not supported.)
Features
• High throughput allows transmissions at selectable speeds up to 38.4 Kb/s
per line (operating system and user application dependent). eXY08 total
throughput is 50,000 char/s; eXA16 and eXB16 total throughput is
100,000 char/s (10-bit characters: 8 data, 1 stop, no parity).

• Automatic XON/XOFF flow control manages receive and transmit data flow
on a per-line basis without program intervention.
• 256-character receive FIFO buffer ensures top system performance during
periods of data intensive input.
• Comprehensive self-test using on-board sequencer performs an extensive
test at each system or device reset.
• No cabinet kit is necessary because the bulkhead distribution panel is
integral to the ex module handle.
• DMA or programmed output with CXA16 or CXB16 allows the software
device driver to dynamically select appropriate transmit mode, either DMA
or 64-character FIFO output, depending on user application. This helps to
optimize 110 system performance.

3.12

Q-bus Communications Controllers

Software Support
The ex options are supported by the following operating systems : RSX11M-PLUS V3 .0, Micro/ RSX V3 .1, and VMS V4 .6.
Specifications
CXYOS

CXA16

CXB16

Number of lines

Electrical interface standards

EIA -232

DEC423
(EIA-423)

EIA-422

Direct memory access

Yes

Modem control

Full

Mounting space

Quad slot

Asynchronous formats

5-, 6-, 7- or 8-bit characters; Odd, even, or

no parity; 1, 1.5, or 2 stop bits
Power requirements
de amps drawn at +5 V
de amps drawn at + 12 V
de loads
ac loads

1.5
0.22
1.5
3.0

1.4
0.11
1.5
3.0

1.6
0.0
1.5
3.0

Ordering Information
The ex communications controllers are used with Q-bus systems that use
the BA200 series system enclosure (for example , the MicroVAX 3000).
Order the -AA options with the purchase of a system ; order the -AF
options for field-installed add-ons .
The e XA16 and e XB16 include two 25-foot extension cables (Be 16D-25 ),
each leading to a 16-connection harmonica . The eXY08 includes two 12foot cables (Be 19N-12 ), each providing an eight-foot run to a molded box
with four EIA-232 -D connections .
CX Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Factory-installed eight-line EIA-232-D asynchronous controller
with modem control

CXYOB -AA

Field-installed eight-line EIA-232 -D asynchronous controller
with modem control

CXYOS-AF

Factory-installed 16-line DEC423 (EIA-423 -A) asynchronous
controller (data only)

CXA16-AA

Field-installed 16-line DEC423 (EIA-423-A) asynchronous
controller (data only)

CXA16-AF

Factory-installed 16-line EIA-422 asynchronous controller (data
only)

CXB16-AA

Field-installed 16-line EIA-422 asynchronous controller (data
only)

CXB16-AF

3.13

Q-bus Communications Controllers

DHFll

The DHFll is a fiber optic terminal interface that provides a maximum of
32 full-duplex, asynchronous, DEC423 (EIA-423) serial data channels on
Q-bus systems. The DHFll, based on LSI technology, multiplexes and
demultiplexes 16 data lines onto one fiber optic cable.
The fiber optic terminal interface provides asynchronous connections to
Digital's Q-bus products where the environment prevents copper connections between the devices and the host system. The DHFll also provides
the ability to connect remote (up to one kilometer) clusters of terminals to
a Q-bus host where an 802 .3/Ethernet connection is not available. Therefore, the DHFll can be used in many applications, including data concentration, near or remote terminal interfacing, factory floor cell control, and
terminal cluster control. The fiber optic terminal Q-bus controller is fully
compatible with existing software drivers, so new system software drivers
are not required.
The DHFll is a quad-height module that supports one or two 16-line ports.
Each 16-line port connects, via a dual fiber optic cable, to an active terminal concentrator (H3132) that handles 16 full-duplex, asynchronous
DEC423 (EIA-423-A) serial data lines.
Features
• The remote-powered terminal concentrator with a DEC423 interface economically connects data terminals to remote processing equipment when an
802.3/Ethernet LAN is not installed .

• Full-duplex 38.4 Kb/s asynchronous point-to-point terminal connections
over fiber optic cables up to one kilometer long provide higher bandwidth
and longer distances than available with copper connections. (Operating
system driver limits speed to 19.2 Kb/s for most applications.)
•The DHFll uses high-volume 62.5/125 micron fiber optic (industrystandard) cable.
• The host-transparent, programmable split-speed reception and transmission by the terminal user allows support of split-speed terminals with host
intervention.
• The DHFll is Q-bus compatible, so it can be used with any 16-, 18-, and
22-bit address system (not supported on Q-bus processors that use the
BA200 series enclosure).
• Visual indicator for terminal concentrator status allows quick check for
proper operation, and selftest and background monitor diagnostics provide
realtime notification of hardware failure .
• Remote maintenance mode allows line tests to be invoked from the terminal side.
•The DHFll isolates the system from lightning (EOS) and static (ESD),
making it ideal for campus and industrial installations.
• The high terminal-to-cable density reduces cable congestion at the host.
• Self-test and background monitor diagnostics provide realtime notification
of hardware failure .

3.14

Q-bus Communications Controllers

Operating System Support
• MicroVMS V4 .6 or later (MicroVMS has been integrated into VMS as of
V5 .0)
• RSX-llM -PLUS V4 .0
• Micro/RSX V4.0
• RSTS/ E V9 .5
• VAXELN V3 .1
• ULTRIX-32 V2 .2 or later
• MicroPower/ Pascal-MicroRSX V2 .4
Specifications
Mounting Code: One quad slot
Power Requirements :
- de amps drawn at 5 V: 5
- de amps drawn at + 12 V: 0
- de amps drawn at -12 V: 0
Bus Loads: ac 3.7, de 1.0
I/O Connection Panel Inserts : One size A
Ordering Information
The DHFll includes a 10-meter fiber optic cable for each 16-line terminal
concentrator, and is compatible with Digital's BN25J standard fiber optic
cables. • Refer to "Communications Cables" at the end of this section for
specific cable lengths.

...·s:...~
y

c
c

8
(')

Power cords are supplied with 120 Vac products. For 240 Vac products, a
power cord must be ordered for each 16-line terminal concentrator.
DHFll Order Codes
Option

Order Code

16-line fiber optic terminal controller, 120 Vac. Includes power
cord for use in the U.S., Canada, Mexico, and Japan.

DHFll-AA

32-line fiber optic terminal controller, 120 Vac. Includes power
cords for use in the U.S., Canada, Mexico, and Japan.

DHFll -BA

16-line terminal concentrator upgrade for DHFll -AA , 120 Vac.
Includes power cord for use in the U.S., Canada, Mexico, and
Japan .

H3123 -B2

16-line fiber optic terminal controller, 240 Vac. Requires power
cord .

DHFll -AB

32-line fiber optic terminal controller, 240 Vac. Requires power
cord.

DHFll -BB

16-line terminal concentrator upgrade for DHFll -AB, 240 Vac.
Requires power cord.

H3123-B3

3.15

Q-bus Communications Controllers

DHFll Power Cord Order Codes

DHQll

Country

Order Code

Australia

BN19H-2E

Central Europe

BN19C-2E

Denmark

BN19K-2E

Italy

BN19M-2E

India

BN19S-2E

Israel

BN19U-2E

Switzerland

BN19E-2E

United Kingdom

BN19A-2E

U.S./Canada (not required)

BN19P-1K

The DHQll is a Q -bus communications controller that supplies eight
asynchronous communications lines on a dual size module . The DHQ 11
operates in either Direct Memory Access (DMA) or programmed-output
mode .
The DHQll provides EIA-232-D or DEC423 (EIA-232/EIA-423) signaling
to externally connected terminal devices through a choice of distribution
panels, called cabinet kits . EIA-232 cabinet kits supply eight 25-pin connectors to support full modem control; DEC423 (a superset of EIA-423-A)
cabinet kits supply eight DECconnect modular plug connectors, without
modem control, for local terminal connections.
The DHQll is the logical choice for connecting local terminals , modems,
and serial printers to MicroVAX II and MicroPDP-11 computer systems.
Features
• High throughput on all eight asynchronous communications lines allows
transmission at selectable speeds up to 38.4 Kb/s per line, full-duplex
(operating system and user application dependent), for a total throughput
of 60,000 char/second ( 10-bit characters : 8 data, 1 stop, no parity), ideal
for graphics and videotext applications .

• Compact, dual-size module leaves more backplane space available for
additional communications devices.
• Low power consumption with EIA-232 cabinet kit requires only 1.4 amps
from the CPU +5 V-power supply; DEC423 cabinet kit requires only 2.0
amps, leaving more power available for connecting additional peripheral
devices to the backplane.
• Receive FIFO buffer of 256 characters is shared by the eight lines. This
ensures top system performance during periods of data intensive input.
• DMA or programmed -output 64-character FIFO transmit buffer optimizes
I/O performance by transmitting data from memory to communications
channel with minimum CPU interruptions.
• Automatic XON/XOFF flow control manages data flow in either direction
on a per-line basis without program intervention .
• Modem control with EIA-232 cabinet kit provides full modem control for
full- and half-duplex , point-to -point communications.

3.16

Q-bus Communications Controllers

• DEC423 cabinet kit with Electrical Overstress/Electrostatic Discharge
(EOS/ESD) supports local EIA-232-compatible terminals at 9.6 Kb/s. The
terminals may be placed up to 200 feet from the CPU with the H8571-A
passive adapter, and up to 1000 feet from the CPU with the H3105-A active
and H8571 -A passive adapters. A Refer to the following figure and to
Section 2 for more information.
• Onboard self-test executes an extensive test of DHQll circuitry each
power-on or device reset. Also, a background monitor program continually
tests the DHQll when it is not engaged in other tasks.
DHQll Configuration with DEC42J Cabinet Kit
BC16E
6Conductor
Office Cable
H8571-A
Passive
Adapter

H3105-A
Active
Adapter

BC16C-25
Bulkhead
136 Conductor Cable' Converter_l
/ DH0 11
1

Compact Remote
Cable Concentrator·

Micro
VAXll

- - - 1000 feet @ 9.6 Kb/s - - - - - - - - - 'Items contained in DH011 DEC423 cabinet kit

::i::
;.:..

.............I>
..
u

Q,I

NBG-185-00

c::
c::
0

CPU and Software Support
The DHQll is supported by the MicroVAX II, MicroPDP-11/23, MicroPDP11/53, MicroPDP-11173, and MicroPDP-11/83 .

The DHQll is supported by the following operating systems : RSX,
MicroRSX, RSTS/ E, Micro/ RSTS, VMS , ULTRIX-32 , and VAXELN. It is also
supported by MicroPower/ Pascal.
Specifications
Mounting code: One dual slot

Power Requirements :
- de amps drawn at + 5 V: 1.4 with EIA -232 cabinet kit ; 2.0 with DEC423
cabinet kit
- de amps drawn at + 12 V: 0.23
Bus Loads : ac 3.2, de 0.5 with EIA-232 cabinet kit; ac 2.9, de 0.5 with
DEC 423 cabinet kit
I/O Connection Panel Inserts :
- 2 Size B (EIA-232)
- 1 Size B (DEC423)
Environmental Class: C A Refer to Appendix B for details.

3.17

Q-bus Communications Controllers

DHQll Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Asynchronous Q-bus communication controller. Includes base
module only.

DHQll-M

For system installation, order one of the following cabinet kits:
Cabinet Kits for EIA-232 connection: contain two B-size slot
bulkhead distribution panels with 25-pin male connectors and
associated cabling to connect the module to the distribution
panels. Data cables are not included.
21-in cable for BA123 box

CK-DHQll-AA

12-in cable for BA23 box

CK-DHQll-AB

36-in cable for H9642 cabinet

CK-DHQll-AF

Cabinet kits for DEC423 connection: contain B-size slot
bulkhead distribution panel with a 36-conductor cable, compact
remote terminal concentrator and associated cabling to connect
the control module to the distribution panel. Data cables are
not included.

DLVJl

21-in cable for BA123 box

CK-DHQll-WA

12-in cable for BA23 box

CK-DHQll-WB

36-in cable for H9642 cab

CK-DHQll-WF

The DLVJl is a four-line asynchronous communications controller that
provides local or remote connection between Q-bus systems and EIA232-C/CCITT V.28, EIA-422/CCITT V.11, and EIA-423-A/CCITT V.10 terminals and modems . The DLVJl acts as four separate devices, making
program operations more convenient than with a multiplexer. The DLVJl
operates at program or jumper-selectable speeds from 150 to 38,400 bits
per second at full-duplex (1 line at 38.4 Kb/s, 2 lines at 19 .2 Kb/s, or 4
lines at 9 .6 Kb/s). Split-speed transmit and receive rates are supported on
each line, reducing the software demand for the receive line.
The DLVJl is compatible with Digital's family of modems and with Bell
100 and 200 series modems and their equivalents. The DLVJ 1 is not supported by MicroVMS or VMS.
Features
• Four asynchronous communications lines from a dual size board.
• Single line speed up to 38.4 Kb/s , two lines at 19.2 Kb/s each, or four lines
at 9.6 Kb/s each.

• Limited modem control on all lines supports full-duplex, point-to-point
modems.
• Character interrupt input/output.
• Split receive/transmit speeds on a per-line basis .
• EIA-232-C, EIA-422-A and EIA-423-A compatible.

3.18

Q-bus Communications Controllers

Specifications
Mounting Code: 1 double slot

Power Requirements:
- de amps drawn at + 5 V: 1.0
- de amps drawn at + 12 V: 0.15
Bus Loads : ac 1, de 1
1/0 Connection Panel Insert : Size B

Environmental Class : C

& Refer to Appendix B for details.

DLVJl Order Codes
Options

Order Code

EIA-232-C/CCITT V.28 interface. Includes base module only.

DLVJl -M

For system installation select external cables and one of the
following cabinet kits :
For use with BA123 (MicroVAX II) and BAll-MA(MB) (PDP11/23-S) boxes.

CK -DLVJl -LA

For use with BA23 b ox (MicroPDP-11, MicroVAX).

CK-DLVJl-LB

For use with dual cabi net (PDP-11/83, MicroVAX II).

CK-DLVJl-LF

EIA-442/CCITT V.11 interface. Includes base module only.

DLVJl-M

For system installation select external cables and one of the
following cabinet kits :

DMVll

For use with BA123 (MicroVAX II) and BAll-MA(MB) (PDP11/23-S)boxes.

CK-DLVJl -EA

For use with BA23 box (MicroPDP-11) .

CK -DLVJl-EB

For use with dual cabinet (PDP- 11183, MicroVAX II) .

CK-DLVJl -EF

The DMVll is a microprocessor-controlled , single-line synchronous com munications controller that provides local or remote connection between
Q-bus systems and other computer systems with EIA-232-C/ CCITT V.28 ,
CCITT V.35, or EIA -423-A/ EIA-449 interfaces . The DMVll implements
DDCMP in hardware and supports direct memory access data transfers ,
DECnet point-to-point configurations, and full modem control. It operates at speeds up to 56 Kb/s (depending on the version selected ) at halfor full-duplex. Note: The maximum speed for EIA -232-C connection is
19.2 Kb/s.
Depending on the operating system and layered software, the DMVll can
support up to 12 tributaries. In point-to-point configurations, the DMVll
can communicate with DMCll, DUPll , DPVll , DMRll , DMPll, or other
DMVll controllers .
The DMVll is compatible with Digital's family of modems and with Bell
200 series modems and their equivalents .

3.19

Q-bus Communications Controllers

Features
• Single-line synchronous communications from a dual size board.

•Line speeds up to 56 Kb/s (application-dependent).
• DMA input/output optimizes communication throughput.
• Full modem control supports full- or half-duplex communications.
• EIA -232-C , EIA-423-A/EIA-449, or V.35-compatible depending on version
selected .
Specifications
Mounting Code: One quad slot (all versions)

Power Requirements :
- de amps drawn at +5 V: 3.4 (DMVll-A, -B , -F), 3.4 (DMVll-C)
- de amps drawn at + 12 V: 0.38 (DMVll-A, -B, -F), 0.26 (DMVll-C)
Bus Loads: ac 2, de 1 (all versions)

110 Connection Panel Inserts:
- Size B (DMVll-A, -F )
- Size A (DMVll -B, -C)
Environmental Class: C

3.20

& Refer to Appendix B for details.

Q-bus Communications Controllers

DMVll Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Synchronous Q -bus controller for EIA-232-C/CCITT V.28,
EIA-423 -A/EIA -449, or CCITT V.35 interfaces. Includes base
module only.

DMVll-M

Synchronous Q-bus controller for integral modem. Includes
base module only.

DMVll -N

EIA-232-C/CCITT V.28 Cabinet Kits
For EIA-232 -C/CCITT V.28 system installation, select one of the
following cabinet kits :
For use with BA123 (MicroVAX II, MicroPDP-11) and
BAll -MA(MB) (PDP-11/23-S) boxes.

CK-DMVll-AA

For use with BA23 box (MicroPDP-11) .

CK-DMVll-AB

For use with H9642 Micro cab (MicroVAX II, MicroPDP-11).

CK-DMVll-AF

For use with CPUs that do not have an I/O connection panel.
Kit contains a 10-ft cable that connects the DMVll-M module
to an external device.

CK-DMV11-A2

EIA-423-A/EIA-449 Cabinets Kits
For EIA-423-A/EIA-449 system installation, select one of the
following cabinet kits:
For use with BA123 (MicroVAX II, MicroPDP-11) and
BAll -MA(MB) (PDP-11/23-S) boxes.

CK-DMVll-FA

For use with BA23 box (MicroPDP-11) .

CK-DMVll-FB

For use with H9642 Micro cabinet (MicroVAX II,
MicroPDP-11) .

CK-DMVll-FF

For use with CPUs that do not have I/O panel. Kit contains a
10-ft cable that connects the DMVll-M module to an external
device.

CK-DMV11 -F3

CCITT V.35 Cabinet Kits
For CCITT V.35 system installation, select one of the following
cabinet kits:
For use with BA123 (MicroVAX II, MicroPDP-11) and
BAll -MA(MB) (PDP -11/23-S) boxes. Includes a BC17E cable for
connection to modem.

CK-DMVll -BA

For use with BA23 box (Micro/PDP-11). Includes a BC17E
cable for connection to modem.

CK-DMVll -BB

For use with H9642 Micro cabinet (MicroVAX II,
MicroPDP-11) .

CK-DMVll -BF

For use with CPUs that do not have an I/O connection panel.
Kit contains a 25 -ft cable that connects the DMVll -M module
to an external device.

CK-DMV11-B3

Integral Modem Cabinet Kits
For system installation with integral modem, select one of the
following cabinet kits.
For use with BA123 (MicroVAX II, MicroPDP-11) and
BAll -MA(MB) (PDP-11/23-S) boxes .

CK-DMVll-CA

For use with BA23 box (MicroPDP-11).

CK-DMVll-CB

For use with H9642 Micro cabinet (MicroVAX II,
MicroPDP-11 ).

CK-DMVll-CF

For use with CPUs that do not have an I/O connection panel.
Kit contains a 25 -ft cable that connects the DMVll-N module
to an external device.

CK-DMV11-C3

3.21

Q-bus Communications Controllers

DPVll

The DPVll is a low-cost, single-line synchronous programmable interface
that provides local or remote connection between Q-bus systems and other
computer systems with EIA-232 -C/CCITT V.28 or EIA-232-C/CCITT V.11
interfaces . Operating at speeds up to 56 Kb/s at half- or full-duplex with
full modem control (DDCMP/BISYNC at 56 Kb/s, HDLC/SDLC at 9.6
Kb/s), the DPVll is programmable for either byte-oriented protocols
(DDCMP or BISYNC) or bit-oriented protocols (SDLC or HDLC) . The
DPVll is suited for interfacing to medium-speed synchronous lines for
remote batch and remote job-entry applications and is compatible with
Digital's family of modems and with the Bell 200 series modems and their
equivalents .
Features
. • Single-line synchronous communications from a dual size board .

• Line speeds up to 56 Kb/s (application dependent) .
• Full modem control supports full and half-duplex communications .
• Character interrupt input/output.
• EIA-232-C compatible.

Specifications
Mounting Code: 1 double slot

Power Requirements:
- de amps drawn at + 5 V: 1.2
- de amps drawn at + 12 V: 0.3
Bus Loads : ac 1, de 1
I/O Connection Panel Insert: Size A
Environmental Class : C

& Refer to Appendix B for details.

DPVll Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Single-line synchronous Q-bus communications controller.
Includes base module only; requires cabinet kit.

DPVll-M

Factory-installed controller for BA200 seri1;s enclosures. No
cabinet kit required.

DPVll-SA

Field-installed controller for BA200 series enclosures . No
cabinet kit required.

DPVll-SF

For system installation of the DPVll-M, select one of the
following cabinet kits :
For use with BA123 (MicroVAX II, MicroPDP-11) and
BAll -MA(MB) (PDP-11/23-S) boxes.

CK-DPVll -AA

For use with BA23 box (MICRO/PDP-11).

CK-DPVll-AB

For use with H9642 Micro cab (MicroVAX II, MicroPDP-11).

CK-DPVll-AF

For use with CPUs that do not have an 1/0 connection panel.
Kit contains a 25-ft cable that connects the DPVll-M module to
an external device.

CK-DPV11-A3

3.22

Q-bus Communications Controllers

DSVll

The DSVll module supports synchronous communications at speeds up to
256 Kb/s for MicroVAX II and MicroVAX 3500/3600 systems. It is the
preferred MicroVAX option for host-based wide area communications, with
the flexibility to support two lines running different applications.
The DSVll supports the DDCMP, HDLC, and SDLC protocols at speeds up
to 256 Kb/s for one-line-only operation, and speeds up to 64 Kb/s per line
for two-line operation. The Bisync protocol is also supported at speeds up
to 9.6 Kb/s per line, regardless of whether one or two lines are in operation.
Up to five DSVll modules may be included in a system box (available
slots , power, and bus load permitting), except for the BA23 box where the
limit is two DSVll modules.
DECnet-VAX, VAX P.S.I., and VMS/ SNA software products support the
DSVll module. Combinations of these software products can share the
DSVll, with one product controlling both lines, or one product controlling
one line while another product controls the second line.
The following table lists the software combinations that can control the
DSVll and the maximum line speeds they support .
Communications
Application

One-line
Operation
(speed)

;
"E
:I:

....;.:.

:e....

Two-line Operation
(speed/line)

c
c
0

DECnet-VAX VMS/SN A

VAX P.S.I.
64 Kb/s

DECnet-VAX

256 Kb/s

64 Kb/s

VMS/SN A

64 Kb/s

N/S*

64 Kb/s

VAX P.S.I.

64 Kb/s

*VMS/SNA does not support two DSVll lines.

Features
• High performance .
• Multi -protocol capability supports different applications .

• Configurable communications ports support different line interfaces with
one option.
Prerequisite Software
VMS V5 .0 operating system for support of the Wide Area Device Driver
included with the DSVll .

A synchronous device driver is available for DSVll support under VMS
V4 .7 operating system. Refer to Software Product Description 28.49 for
more information.
Spec:ific:ations

Mounting Code

1 quad slot

Power Requirements
de amps drawn at + 5 V
de amps drawn at + 12 V

5.43
0.62

Bus Loads

3.9 ae, 1.0 de

1/0 Connection Panel Inserts

1 size B (BA23/BA123/H9642 only)

3.23

Q-bus Communications Controllers

Ordering Information
The DSVll is available in versions using a cabinet kit for BA23/BA123
enclosures or with integral distribution panel for BA200-series enclosures .
The DSVll includes the Wide Area Network Device Drive software for
support under the VMS V5 .0 operating system-license, distribution on
TK50 media, and documentation are included.
For multiple DSVll modules on one system , order one DSVll -SA/-SF/-AA
plus additional DSVll -SB/-S G/-AB options as required .
DSVll Order Code Table
Option

Order Code

First DSVll controller for BA200-series enclosures, factory
installed. Includes software, one EIA-232 adapter cable, one
V.35 adapter cable, and documentation.

DSVll.SA

Extra DSVll modules for the same system , factory installed .
Includes adapter cables only; no software or documentation.

DSVll-SB

First DSV 11 controller for BA200-series enclosures, field
installed. Includes software, one EIA-232 adapter cable, one
V.35 adapter cable, and documentation.

DSVll -SF

Extra DSVll modules for the same system , field installed .
Includes adapter cables only; no software or documentation.

DSVll-SG

First DSVll module for BA23/BA123/H9642 enclosures.
Includes software, one EIA 232 adapter cable, one V.35 adapter
cable, and documentation.

DSVll-AA

Extra DSVll modules for the same system . Includes adapter
cables only; no software or documentation.

DSVll-AB

Cabinet Kits

For system installation of the DSVll-AA and DSVll -AB, order
one of the following cabinet kits.
Cabinet kit for BA123

CK-DSVll-UA

Cabinet kit for BA23

CK-DSVll-UB

Cabinet kit for BA123

CK-DSVll-UF

Adapter Cables

EIA-422 adapter cable

BC19B-02

EIA:-232/V.24 adapter cable

BC19D-02

EIA-423 adapter cable

BC19E-02

V.35 adapter cable

BC19F-02

3.24

Q-bus Communications Controllers

DZQll

The DZQll is a four-line asynchronous communications controller that
provides local or remote connection between PDP-11 and VAX Q-bus
systems and EIA-232-C/CCITT V.28 and EIA-423-A/CCITT V.10 terminals,
modems , or other systems. The DZQll operates at program-selectable
speeds up to 9.6 Kb/sat full-duplex with limited modem control on each
line.
The DZQll is compatible with Digital's family of modems and with Bell
100 and 200 series modems and their equivalents .

Features
• Four asynchronous communication lines from a dual size module .
·Line speeds up to 9.6 Kb/s.
• Limited modem control on all lines supports full-duplex, point-to -po int,
modems.
• Character interrupt input/output.
• EIA-232-C and EIA-423 -A compatible.

Specifications
Mounting Code : 1 dual slot

Power Requirements:
- de amps drawn at + 5V: 1.0
- de amps drawn at + 12V: 0.36

:E....

Ill

c
c

Bus Loads: ac 1.4 , de 0.5

I/O Connection Panel Insert : Size B
Environmental Class : C

& Refer to Appendix B for details.

C'? .

DZQll Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Four-line asynchronous Q-bus controller. Includes base module
only; requires cabinet kit.

DZQll -M

Factory-installed controller for BA200 series enclosures.
Includes base module only; no cabinet kit required .

DZQll-SA

Field-installed controller for BA200 series enclosures. Includes
base module only; no cabinet kit required .

DZQll-SF

For system installation of DZQll-M, select the appropriate
external cables and one of the following cabinet kits :
For use with BA123 (MicroVAX II, MicroPDP-11) and
BAll-MA(MB) {PDP-11/ 23-S) boxes.

CK-DZQll-DA

For use with BA23 box {Micro/PDP-11, MicroVAX).

CK-DZQll-DB

For use with H9642 Micro cabinet {MicroVAX II,
MicroPDP -11).

CK-DZQll-DF

For use with CPUs that do not have an I/O connection panel.
Kit contains a 25-ft cable that connects the DZQll -M module
to eight EIA-232 or EIA -423 -A devices. (Non -FCC compliant)

CK-DZQ11 -D3

3.25

Q-bus Communications Controllers

KMVlA

The KMVlA is a high-performance direct-memory-access single-line programmable communications controller that provides connection between
Q-bus systems with EIA-232-C/CCITT V.28, EIA-422/CCITT V.H, and
EIA-423-A/CCITT V.10 interfaces. It is capable of communications speeds
up to 64 Kb/s. Used on the PDP-H/23, PDP-11/23-PLUS, MicroVAX II,
MicroVAX 3500, MicroVAX 3600, and MicroPDP-H systems, it utilizes the
Micro/TH Processor to perform user-defined communications functions,
thereby freeing the host to do more application computations.
The KMVlA can be programmed in synchronous or asynchronous modes.
It also provides full modem support for Digital's family of modems, the
Bell 200 Series or equivalent, and European PTT-approved modems.
Software Development Tools, X.25 Link Level, and HDLC Framing package
are available for use under RSX-HM and RSX-HM-PLUS systems. Software
support is available for VAX P.S.I. (at speeds up to 19.2 Kb/s), X.25 Link
Level, and Development Tools on a MicroVAX.
Specifications
Mounting Code

1 quad slot

Power Requirements

de amps drawn at +5 V
de amps drawn at + 12 V

2.6
0.2

Bus Loads

ac 3, de 1

1/0 Connection Panel Insert (Compatible
connections for MicroVAX 3500/3600)

Size B (PDP-11/23, MicroPDP-11,
MicroVAX II)
Size C (PDP-11/23-PLUS)

Environmental Class

C & Refer to Appendix B for details.

3.26

Q-bus Communications Controllers

KMVlA Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Controllers
Field-installed EIA -232 -C KMV controller for BA200 series
enclosure. No cabinet kit required .

KMVlA -SF

Field-installed EIA-422 KMV controller for BA200 series
enclosure. No cabinet kit required.

KMVlA -SG

Field -installed EIA-423 -A KMV controller for BA200 series
enclosure. No cabinet kit required.

KMVlA -SH

KMV controller for MicroVAX II and MicroPDP-11 systems.
Includes module only. Requires cabinet kit.

KMVlA-M

Cabinet Ki ts
For KMVlA-M system installation , select one of the following
cabinet kits.
EIA -232 -C for PDP-11/ 23 and BA123 .

CK-KMVlA-AA

EIA-232 -C for BA23.

CK-KMVlA-AB

EIA-232-C for PDP-11/23 -PLUS.

CK-KMVlA -AC

""O

EIA -232-C for MicroVAX II System 5 (in H9642 cabinets).

CK-KMVlA-AF

EIA -422 for PDP-11/ 23 and BA123 .

CK-KMVlA-EA

:I:
....>.

EIA-422 for BA23 .

CK-KMVlA-EB

EIA-422 for PDP-11/ 23 -PLUS.

CK-KMVlA-EC

EIA-422 for MicroVAX II System 5 (in H9642 cabinets).

CK -KMVlA-EF

c
c

EIA-423 -A for PDP -11/ 23s and BA123.

CK-KMVlA-FA

EIA-423-A for BA23 .

CK-KMVlA -FB

(")

EIA -423-A for PDP-11/23 -PLUS.

CK-KMVlA -FC

EIA-423 -A for MicroVAX II System 5 (in H9642 cabinets).

CK-KMVlA -FF

...u

;

...

t'I

:E....
u

u
0

Cables for Modem Connection
Connects KMVlA -S controllers to EIA -232-compatible modems .

BC22U-xx

Connects KMVlA -S controllers to EIA -422 or EIA -423 -A
compatible modems

BC22W-xx

KMVlA Optional Software Order Codes
Option

Order Code

RSX KMV software tools

QJS98 -x x

RSX X.25 link level

QJS97 -xx

RSX-llM HDLC framing

QJS32-xx

RSX-llM -PLUS HDLC framing

QJS39 -xx

RSX-11 P.S.l./M (limited to 19.2 Kb/s)

QJD91 -xx

RSX -11 P.S.I./M-PLUS (limited to 19 .2 Kb/s)

QJD92 -xx

VAX P.S.I. (limited to 19.2 Kb/s)

QA -071A*-xx

KMVlA VMS driver and development tools

QA-VCPA* -xx

3.27

MicrnVAX 2000 Asynchrnnous/Synchrnnous Communications Contrnllcrs

The following table summarizes the features of Digital's MicroVAX 2000
communications controllers.
MicroVAX 2000 Communications Controllers
DHT32

DST32

Type

Asynchronous

Synchronous

Number of lines

Direct Memory Access
(DMA) 1

Maximum speed (consult
SPD) 2

38.4 Kb/s

19.2 Kb/s

Software support

DECnet-ULTRIX'

VAX P.S.I.,
VMS/SNA

VMS, ULTRIX-32

VMS

Full

DEC423 (EIA-423-A)
asynchronous
communications; adds
eight lines to
MicroVAX 2000

Low-cost connection to
wide area network

Operating system support
MultiCPU access
Modem control

Primary buying reason

DMA (Direct Memory Access) is the ability to move multi-character messages between
a communication line and CPU memory without interrupting the CPU .•This capability
yields higher performance.

Act ual device speed and throughput depend on Digital operating system, system configuration, and applications.

MultiCPU access is the ability to send a message directly to two or more CPUs without
routing the message through another CPU.

Modem control refers to the number of signals available to control modem functions
on U.S. and European modems. Full modem control includes nine to eleven signals.
Limited modem control is five signals. No modem control means only send and receive
signals are present on each line.
'DECnet -VAX does not currently support this device.

3.28

MicroVAX 2000 Asynchronous/Synchronous Communications Controllers

DHT32

The DHT32 is an eight-line asynchronous multiplexer for the MicroVAX
2000, application compatible with the DHQll . It provides data-only transmission at speeds up to 38.4 Kb/s, and allows eight additional terminals or
peripheral devices to connect to the MicroVAX 2000 system . With the
three non-modem lines and one modem line available on the MicroVAX
2000, a total of 12 asynchronous lines can be connected to the MicroVAX
2000 system . (A "network" solution, including DECserver 200 via 802 .3i
Ethernet , is appropriate if more asynchronous lines are required .)
The DHT32 supports the DEC423 (EIA-423-A) standard . Terminals requiring EIA-232 connections can use an adapter. Cables that connect directly to
terminals or printers are not provided as part of this option.
Note: The DST32 and the DHT32 (eight-line asynchronous communications
option) are mutually exclusive, and only one can be installed in a system. If
more than four asynchronous lines are required, customers can add terminals using Digital terminal servers. For synchronous communication to an
IBM host , an alternate method is to use a DECnet/SNA Gateway.
Features
• Eight-line, asynchronous , terminal-expansion option gives MicroVAX 2000
a total capacity of 12 asynchronous lines.

•Performance approximates the MicroVAX II systems with DHVll/DHQll
asynchronous controller.
Software Support
VMS and ULTRIX-32 operating systems.
Specifications
Mounting Space : Daughter-boarded to the system module; driver/ receiver
board located in the expansion adapter.

Power Requirements:
- de amps drawn at + 5 V: 1.50
- de amps drawn at + 12 V: 0.70
- de amps drawn at -12 V: 0.12
Bus Loads : Private bus architecture (1 F-type logic board )
I/ O Connection Panel Inserts : Located in opening C in the ex pansion

adapter
Environmental Class: B with modified relative humidity (operating) of
10-90% (no diskette system), and 20-80 % (diskette in use).
DHTJ2 Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Eight-line asynchronous controller includes serial line logic
module, serial line driver/receiver module, 34-way internal
ribbon cable, external 25-foot data cable, and eight-line data
cable concentrator (H3104) .

DHT32-AA

3.29

MicroVAX 2000 Asynchronous/Synchronous Communications Controllers

DST32

The DST32, a single-line synchronous communications controller for the
MicroVAX '2000, is a fully duplexed line option with bit- or characteroriented protocol. The DST32 supports HDLC and SDLC at speeds up to
19.2 Kb/s.
The DST32 option includes the DST32 device driver license and software.
Customers can use the DST32 either for VMS/SNA connection or for VAX
P.S.I.
Note: The DST32 and the DHT32 (eight-line asynchronous communications
option) are mutually exclusive, and only one can be installed in a system. If
more than four asynchronous lines are required , customers can add terminals using Digital terminal servers. For synchronous commun ication to an
IBM host , an alternate method is to use a DECnet/SNA Gateway.
Features
• Provides cost-effective, wide-area connection for applications supporting
geographically dispersed MicroVAX 2000 systems.

• Supports SNA or X.25 (P.S.I.) networks.
Prerequisite Software
VMS/SNA Vl.2 and VAX P.S.I. V4 .1 under the VMS operating system, V4.6
(or later)
H ard ware Sp ecifications
Mounting Space : Daughter-boarded to the system module; driver/receiver
board located in the expansion adapter.

Power Requirements:
- de amps drawn at +5 Vac: 2.0
- de amps drawn at + 12 Vac: 0.07
- de amps drawn at -12 Vac: 0 .115
Bus Loads: Private bus architecture (1 F-type logic board)
I/O Connection Panel Inserts : Located in opening C in the expansion
adapter
Environmental Class: B with modified relative humidity (operating) of
10-90 % (no diskette system), and 20-80 % (diskette in use).

3.30

MicroVAX 2000 Asynchronous/ Synchronous Communications Controllers

Ordering Information
DST32 hardware comprises a controller module , a driver/ receiver module ,
an internal ribbon cable, and an external modem adapter cable. The
appropriate modem cable must be ordered separately for a specific applica tion: BC22F-xx for DST32-AA, and BC55D- xx for DST32-AB and DST32 AC, where xx is the cable length . A Refer to "Communications Cables" in
this section for available cable lengths.

Also included are the device driver in both tape and diskette media , and
software license.
DSTJ2 Order Codes

Option

Order Code

Single-line synchronous communications controller for
MicroVAX 2000. Includes EIA -232/ V.24 modem cable with
EIA-232-C adapter (supported by VMS/SNA) .

DST32 -AA

Si ngle-line synchronous communications controller for
MicroVAX 2000. Includes EIA -423 / V.10 modem cable.

DST32-AB

Si ngle-line synchronous communications controller for
MicroVAX 2000. Includes EIA -422/V.36 modem cable.

DST32-AC

~=
::c:

.....::;.:..
...
I.I

Q,j

c
c
0

3.31

UNIBUS Communications Contrnllcrs

The following table summarizes the features of Digital's asynchronous and
synchronous UNIBUS communications controllers.
UNIBUS Communications Controllers
Device

DHUll

DMF32
Asynchronous

DMRll

DMZ32

Synchronous

Asynchronous 7

Type

Asynchronous

Number of lines

DMA'

Yes

Maximum speed
(consult SPD) 2

38.4 Kb/s

19.2 Kb/s

1 Mb/s

19.2 Kb/s

Software support

DECnet-VAX

DECnet-VAX, VAX
P.S.I.'

DECnet-VAX

DECnet-RT,
DECnet-20,
DECnet-10,
DECnet/E, DECnetVAX, DECnet-RSX

DECnet-VAX

Operating system
support

VMS, RSX-llM,
RSX-llM-PLUS,
ULTRIX-32, RSTS/E

VMS

VMS, RSX-llS,
RSX-UM, RSXllM-PLUS, RSTS/E,
TOPS-10, TOPS-20

VMS, ULTRIX-32

MultiCPU access'

Modem control

Full

Yes

Full on two lines;
none on six lines

Full

Full (optional)

Primary buying
reason

DMA performance
with full modem
control; lowest
price per line

Low cost; DMA performance; one
synchronous line; eight asynchronous lines;
one printer port

DECnet interface
across phone lines

DMA performance
with full modem
control; remote
distribution panel

Synchronous

DMA (Direct Memory Access) is the ability to move multi-character messages between a communication line and CPU memory without
interrupting the CPU. This capability yields higher performance.
2
Actual device speed and throughput depend on Digital operating system, system configuration, and applications.
3
MultiCPU Access refers to the ability to send a message directly to two or more CPUs without routing the message through another
CPU.
4
Modem Control refers to the number of signals available to control modem functions on U.S. and European modems. Full modem
control includes nine to eleven signals. Limited modem control is five signals. No modem control means only send and receive signals
are present for each line.

3.32

UNIBUS Communications Controllers

UNIBUS Communications Controllers (Continued)
Device

DUPll

KCT32

KMSll

KMSlP

Type

Synchronous

Asynchronous or
Synchronous 7

Synchronous

Number of lines
DMA

Yes

Maximum speed
(consult SPD) 2

9.6 Kb/s 4

2 lines @ 64 Kb/s, 1
line @ 160 Kb/s

4 lines @ 56 Kb/s, 8
lines @ 19.2 Kb/s 8

64 or 19.2 Kb/s
(depends on the version)

Software support

IBM lnternet 6 , RSX
P.S.I., VAX P.S.I.',
DECnet-RT, DECnet-RSX

VAX-11 KCT32 Software
Tools

VAX X.25 Link Level,
RSX X.25 Link Level,
VAX HDLC/BSC
Framing, VAX P.S.L' ,
RSX P.S.I.'

VAX P.S.L', RSX X.25
Link Level, RSX P.S.I.'

Operating system
support

RSX-llM, RSX-llMPLUS, RSX-llS , VMS
(for VAX P.S.I.)

VMS

VMS, RSX-llM, RSX llM -PLUS, RSX -llS

VMS, RSX-llM, RSXllM-PLUS

MultiCPU access 3

Full

Low cost; host
programmable protocols

Low cost for custom
applications;
programmable (sync or
async) on VAX systems

Multiple line X.25
support, high
performance

Single line X.25 support,
high performance

Modem control

Primary buying reason

'Can be integrated with DECnet-P.S.I. must be present.
6&
7

For more information, tefer to "Digital/IBM Communications Software" in Section 4.

...!-

....e
~

c
c

8
C')

VAX systems only.

8 Limited to 19.2 Kb/s with VAX P.S.I. and RSX P.S.I.

DHUll

__
- ~

----

i1 111li1:il tii1ii l1
11

- - ·-

. ..

The DHUll is a 16-line asynchronous communications controller with
direct memory access (DMA) that provides local and remote connection
between UNIBUS PDP -11 or VAX systems and EIA-232-C/CCITT V.28 or
EIA-423-A/CCITT V.10 terminals, modems, serial printers, and data
switches. The DHUll supports operating speeds up to 38.4 Kbps. Actual
communications speed and throughput is dependent on current Digital
operating systems and system configuration . Full modem control is available on all 16 lines .

Features
• Sixteen asynchronous communications lines from a hex size board.
•Line speeds up to 38.4 Kb/s (application-dependent).
• DMA output optimizes communications throughput compared to character
interrupt devices .
• Full modem control on all lines supports full- and half-duplex, pointto -point modems .
• Automatic XON/ XOFF flow control allows the management of data flow in
either direction on a per-line basis without program intervention.
• Split receive/transmit speeds on a per-line basis .
• Comprehensive self-test through ROM-based diagnostics provides testing of
DHUll circuitry at each power-on or reset.
• EIA -232 -D and EIA-423-A compatibility.

3.33

UNIBUS Communications Controllers

Software Support
The DHUll is supported by VMS, ULTRIX-32, RSX-llM, RSX-llM PLUS,
RSTS/E, and ULTRIX-11.
Specifications
Mounting Code: 1 hex slot

Power Requirements :
- de amps drawn at + 5 V: 6.0
- de amps drawn at + 15 V: 0.4
- de amps drawn at -15 V: 0.4
Bus Loads : ac 2.2, de 1.0
I/O Connection Panel Inserts : 8 for -AD; 2 for -VD
Environmental Class: C

& Refer to Appendix B for details.

DHUJJ Order Codes
Option

Order Code

EIA -232-C/CCITT V.28 and EIA-423-A/CCITT V.10 interface
with full modem control and DMA. Includes base module only.

DHUll -M

For system installation, select the appropriate external cables
and one of the following cabinet kits :

DMF32

For general-purpose expander cabinet used with the
VAX-111780, PDP-11/44, and the expander cabinet for the
VAX -11/750.

CK-DHUll-AD

Remote distribution cabinet kit requires only two I/O
distribution panels for shielded connection to two 8-connector
distribution panels. Each distribution panel has full
international modem control signals for four of the eight serial
lines. Internal cable length is ten feet.

CK-DHUll-VD

For kernel cabinet of VAX -11/750, and PDP-11/84.

CK-DHUll-AE

For use with PDP-11/84 rackmount variations.

CK-DHUll-AF

For use with unshielded cabinet models. Adapter bracket
included.

CK-DHUll-Al

The DMF32 , a multifunction communications controller, provides connection between modems or terminals and UNIBUS VAX systems. The DMF32
consists of an eight-line asynchronous multiplexer, a single-line synchronous interface, and a general-purpose parallel interface . It is supported by
the VMS operating system, DECnet-VAX networking software, and VAX
P.S.I. communications software.
The eight-line asynchronous multiplexer operates at speeds up to 19.2 Kb/s
at full-duplex in either DMA mode or FIFO (first-in, first-out) mode. Two
lines have full modem control and split-speed capability; the other six lines
have no modem control and are for connecting local terminals only. The
single-line synchronous interface operates at speeds up to 19, 200 bits per
second in DMA mode with full modem control and supports both bit- and
byte-oriented protocols. The general purpose parallel interface operates
with either a lineprinter (in DMA mode) or a user-specific device (DMA
mode or FIFO mode).
The DMF32 is compatible with Digital's family of modems and with Bell
200 series modems and their equivalents.

3.34

UNIBUS Communications Controllers

Features
•Asynchronous communications:
- Eight asynchronous communications lines
- DMA output optimizes communications throughput compared to character interrupt devices
- Line speeds up to 19.2 Kb/s (application dependent )
- Full modem control on two lines supports full- and half-duplex , pointto-point modems
- EIA-232-C compatible

• Synchronous communications:
- One synchronous communications line with line speeds up to 19.2 Kb/s
- DMA input/output optimizes communications throughput
- Full modem control point-to-point
- EIA-232-C compatible
• Parallel printer line supports LP27 generic specifications
• Comprehensive self-test
• Software support for VMS and ULTRIX-32
Specifications
Mounting Code : 1 hex slot

Power Requirements:
- de amps drawn at + 5 V: 8.0
- de amps drawn at + 15 V: 0.5
- de amps drawn at -15 V: 0.5
Bus Loads: ac 6, de 1
I/O Connection Panel Inserts : 4 panel units

Environmental Class : B

A Refer to Appendix B for details.

DMFJ2 Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Includes base module only.

DMF32 -M

For system installation, select the appropriate external cables
and one of the following cabinet kits:
For use with shielded cabinets (VAX-11/780).

DMRll

CK-DMF32-LD

For use with shielded cabinets (VAX-11/750).

CK-DMF32-LE

For use with cabinets without 1/ 0 connection panels. Adapter
brackets included. (Non -FCC compliant)

CK-DMF32-Ll

The DMRll is a high-performance microprocessor-controlled single-line
synchronous communications controller that provides local or remote
connection between PDP-11 or VAX UNIBUS systems and other computer
systems with EIA-232-C/ CCITT V.28, CCITT V.35, EIA-423-A/ EIA-449, or
EIA-422/EIA-449 interface. The DMRll implements DDCMP in hardware
and supports direct memory access data transfers, DECnet point-to-point
configurations, and full modem control. It operates at speeds up to 1 Mb/s
at half- or full -duplex. The DMRll can communicate with another DMRll ,
DMVll , or any other synchronous interface that implements DDCMP
Versions 3.1 or 4.0.

3.35

UNIBUS Communications Controllers

The DMRll is compatible, depending on the version selected, with Digital's
family of modems and with Bell 200 series and Bell 500a 11/5 modems
and their equivalents.

Specifications
Mounting Code : 2 hex slots (all vers ions)
Power Requirements :
- de amps drawn at +5 V: 12 .0 (all versions )
- de amps drawn at + 15 V: 0.08 (DMRll -A, -C ), 0.11 (DMRll-B, -E, -F)
- de amps drawn at -15 V: 0.19 (DMRll -A, -C) , 0.20 (DMRll-B, -E, -F)
Bus Loads : ac 1 (all versions ), de 1 (all versions)
1/0 Connections Panel Inserts:
- 1 panel unit (DMRll -A, -B, -C, -E )
- 2 panel units (DMRll-F)
Environmental Class : C

& Refer to Appendix B for details.

DMRll Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Includes base module only.

DMRll-M

For installation, select the appropriate external cable and one
of the following cabinet kits :
EIA-232-C cabinet kit. For use with shielded cabinets.

CK-DMRll-AD

For use with shielded cabinets.

CK-DMRll-AL

For use with unshielded cabinets. Adapter bracket included .

CK-DMRll-Al

V.35 cabinet kit. For use with shielded cabinets.

CK-DMRll-BD

For use with shielded cabinets.

CK-DMRll-BL

For use with unshielded cabinets. Adapter bracket included .

CK-DMRll-Bl

Includes integral modem for local connection. This option must
be ordered with the system.*
Integral modem cabinet kit. For use with shielded cabinets.
For use with shielded cabinets.

CK-DMRll-CD

For use with unshielded cabinets. Adapter bracket included.

CK-DMRll -Cl

AS/ 422/ EIA-449 cabinet kit. For use with shielded cabinets.

CK-DMRll-ED

CK-DMRll-CL

For use with shielded cabinets.

CK-DMRll-EL

For use with unshielded cabinets. Adapter bracket included .

CK-DMRll-El

EIA -423-A/ EIA-449 cabinet kit. For use with shielded cabinets.

CK-DMRll-FD

For use with shielded cabinets.

CK-DMRll-FL

For use with unshielded cabinets. Adapter bracket included.

CK-DMRll-Fl

*Supports switch-selectable speeds over the distances noted in the following table.
Frequency

Maximum Distance

Cable

1 Mb

6,000 ft (1,830 m)

BC55S

500 Kb

7,000 ft (2,135 m)

BC55S

250 Kb

8,000 ft (2,440 m)

BC55S

56 Kb

16,000 ft (4 ,800 m)

BC55T

3.36

UNIBUS Communications Controllers

DMZ32

The DMZ32 is a 24-line asynchronous terminal interface for UNIBUS VAX
computers running VMS or ULTRIX-32 operating system. It provides
EIA-232-C compatibility and offers Direct Memory Access (DMA) output
on all lines to optimize terminal to CPU 1/0 performance. The DMZ32
operates at speeds up to 19.2 Kb/sand features a distribution panel that
can be located locally or remotely.
The DMZ32 distribution panel can be located locally or remotely up to
5,000 feet from the VAX computer system. Terminals can be located where
needed , up to 5,000 feet from the VAX computer, without affecting the
EIA-232-C specified speed/distance limitations.

In the local configuration, the DMZ32 can be mounted in the H9642FC/FD and H9652-MF/MH UNIBUS expander cabinets or any existing
19-inch cabinet. The H9642-FC/FD can support one DMZ32 panel. The
H9652-MF/MH can support one DMZ32 panel with two BAll-K boxes
installed, and two panels with one BAll-K box installed.

In remote configurations, the distribution panel can be mounted in any
standard 19-inch cabinet or the H9646 communications cabinet. This
reduces the requirements for costly UNIBUS expander cabinets because the
DMZ32 distribution panel has a self-contained power supply and fan
assembly. (The distribution panel plugs into a standard 120 V electrical
outlet.)
A single high-performance twisted-pair Tl cable connects the DMZ32
interface module to the remote distribution panel. The remote distribution panel then connects separate EIA-232 data cables to the individual
VTl00/200/300 or compatible terminals.

Cabinet Kits
The DMZ32 can be purchased with or without modem control by selecting
the appropriate cabinet kit. The cabinet kit includes 15 feet of Tl cable
with optional 1,000-foot lengths available . .& Refer to the DMZ32 order
code table for information.
Features
• Twenty-four asynchronous communication lines from a hex size board.
·Line speeds up to 19.2 Kb/s (application dependent).
• Automatic XON/XOFF flow control allows the management of data flow in
either direction on a per-line basis without program interruption.
• Full modem control with full- and half-duplex communications available
on all lines with the CK-DMZ32-AY cabinet kit.
• Split receive/transmit speeds on a per-line basis optimizes CPU performance by reducing software demand on input.
• Software programmable line parameters such as speed and character
length.
• Remote distribution panel lets you locate terminals up to 5,000 feet from
the computer system .
• Comprehensive self-test through ROM-based diagnostics provides complete
checkout of the DMZ32 circuits on each power-on or reset.

3.37

UNIBUS Communications Controllers

The following diagram illustrates a DMZ32 configuration where terminals,
personal computers, modems, and serial printers are connected to a local
UNIBUS VAX computer system:
DMZJ2 Typical Configuration

Office Area

Office Area
Computer Room
RS232 Data Cables

T1 Cable
Link

DMZ32

Remote
Distribution
Panel

Unibus VAX

Up to 5000 Feet

Remote
Distribution
Panel

Printer

Up to 5000 Feet
NBG-1 64-00

Specifications
Mounting Code: 1 hex slot
Power Requirements:
Module
- de amps drawn at +5 V: 9.0 A
- de amps drawn at + 15 V: 0.1 A
Distribution Panel
- 1. lA at 120 Vac

- 0.6A at 220-240 Vac
Bus Loads : ac 6.0, de 1.5
I/O Distribution Panel Insert:
- 8 panel units (when mounted in the cabinet mentioned above)
- 1 additional panel unit for bulkhead cable connector
- 1 panel unit (if remote , for bulkhead cable connector)
Environmental Class: B • Refer to Appendix B for details.
DMZJ2 Order Codes
Option

Order Code

24-line DMA terminal interface

DMZ32-M

Cabinet kits include 15 feet of cable and the remote
distribution panel containing 24 DB25-pin connectors.
Cabinet Kit with modem control

CK-DMZ32-AY

Cabinet Kit without modem control

CK-DMZ32-DY

Modem control upgrade for CK-DMZ32-DY cabinet kit

DMZ32-N

1,000-ft PVC Tl cable

BC18L-LO

1,000-ft plenum-rated Tl cable

BC18M-LO

3.38

UNIBUS Communications Controllers

DUPll

The DUPll is a single-line, synchronous programmable communications
controller that provides remote connection between PDP-11 or VAX
UNIBUS systems and other systems with EIA-232-C/CCITT V.28 interface.
It operates at speeds up to 9.6 Kb/sat half- or full-duplex with full modem
control. The DUPll is programmable for either byte-oriented protocols
(DDCMP or BISYNC) or bit-oriented protocols (SDLC or HDLC). The
DUPll is suited for interfacing to a medium-speed synchronous line for
remote batch and remote job entry applications.
The DUPll is compatible with Digital's family of modems and with the
Bell 200 series and their equivalents.

Specifications
Mounting Code: 1 hex slot
Power Requirements:
- de amps drawn at +5 V: 3.6
- de amps drawn at + 15 V: 0.08
- de amps drawn at -15 V: 0.08
Bus Loads: ac 1, de 1

I/O Connection Panel Insert: 1 panel unit
Environmental Class: C

.& Refer to Appendix B for details.

DUPll Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Includes base module only.

DUPll -M

For system installation, select one of the following cabinet kits:

KCT32

For use with (PDP-11124) shielded cabinets.

CK-DUPll-AD

For use with (PDP-11/84) shielded cabinets.

CK-DUPll-AF

For use with unshielded cabinet models. Adapter bracket
included.

CK-DUPll-Al

The KCT32 is a programmable communications interface based on the
Digital DCTll chip. Its two lines provide low-cost asynchronous or synchronous communication between VAX systems and other devices with
EIA-232-C/CCITT V.28, EIA-422/CCITT V.11, or EIA-423-A/CCITT V.10
and V.35 interfaces for networking or custom communications applications.
The KCT32 operates at speeds up to 64,000 bits per second for two lines,
and 160,000 bits per second for one line in bit synchronous mode. The
KCT32 supports direct memory access with full modem control on each
line. It has 56 Kbytes of user-programmable memory for implementation of
custom communications functions.

Specifications
Mounting Code: 1 hex slot
Power Requirements:
- de amps drawn at + 5 V: 6.0
Bus Loads: ac 4.5, de 1
I/O Connection Panel Insert: 1 panel unit
Environmental Class: B

.& Refer to Appendix B for details.

3.39

UNIBUS Communications Controllers

KCT32 Hardware Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Two lines provide asynchronous or synchronous
communications between VAX systems and other devices with
CCITT V.35. Includes CCITT V.35 interface quad board, CCITT
V.35 interface panel and test connector.

KCT32-AB

EIA -422/CCITT V.11 with basic system unit, EIA-422/CCITT
V.11 interface panel and test connector.

KCT32-AE

EIA-232-C/CCITT V.28 version with basic system unit, EIA232-C/CCITT V.28 interface panel, and connector modem test.

KCT32-FA

. EIA -423-A/EIA-449 version with basic system unit, DEC423
(EIA-423-A)/EIA-449 interface panel, and EIA-423-A/EIA -449

KCT32-FF

test connector.

KCT32 Optional Software Order Code

KMSll

Option

Order Code

VAX KCT32 software tools.

QA-128A*-xx

The KMSll is an eight-line synchronous intelligent front end that provides
up to eight lines of connection between UNIBUS PDP-11 or VAX systems
and other devices with EIA-232-C/CCITT V.28 or CCITT V.35 (with
optional hardware module) interfaces . The KMS 11 operates at speeds up to
56.0 Kb/s in half- and full-duplex with full modem control. (V.35 is
required for 56 .0 Kb/s .) The KMSll supports direct memor y access data
transfers , X.25 Link Level , and HDLC/ BSC Framing Software.
Ma ximum line speed depends on the software application . The X.25 link level software is currently warranted for four lines at 56.0 Kb/s (using
V.35 ) or eight lines at 19 .2 Kb/s.
VAX PS.I. or RSX P.S.I. is limited to 19.2 Kb /s with some rest rictions on the
number of lines used . (Consult the VAX P.S.I. Software Product Descrip tion 25 .40 for further restrictions concerning multiple network suppo rt and
DTE/DCE modes.)

Specifications
Mounting Code : 2 SU (KMSll-BD ), 3 hex slots (KMSll -BE )
Power Requirements:
- de amps drawn at +5 V: 12.5
- de amps drawn at + 15 V: 1.5
- de amps drawn at -15 V: 0.5
Bus Loads : ac 7, de 2
I/O Connection Panel Inserts: 8 panel units
Environmental Class: B A Refer to Appendix B for details.

3.40

UNIBUS Communications Controllers

KMSll Hardware Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Eight-line communications multiplexer including a KMCll-B
auxiliary processor unit, line terminator, modem control unit,
1/0 connection panel, double system unit, and internal cables.

KMSll-BD

Same as KMSll-BD without the double system unit.

KMSll-BE

KMSll Optional Software Order Codes
Option

Order Code

VAX X.25 link level

QA-757A*-xx

RSX-llM X.25 link level

Q]757

RSX-llM-PLUS X.25 link level

QJ770

VAX HDLC/BSC framing

QA-920A*-xx

VAX P.S.I. (limited to 19.2 Kb/s)

QA-071A*-xx

RSX-11 P.S.I. (limited to 19.2 Kb/s)

QJD91

RSX-11 P.S.I./M-PLUS (limited to 19.2
Kb/s)

QJD92

*A Refer to the appropriate Software Product Description for a list of supported proces·
sors.

KMSlP

The KMSlP is a one-line intelligent synchronous communications controller that provides connection between PDP-11 or VAX UNIBUS systems
and EIA-232-C/CCITT V.28, EIA-423-A/CCITT V.10, CCITT V.35, or
EIA-422-A/CCITT V.11 interfaces . The microprocessor-based device operates at speeds up to 19.2 Kb/s (V.28 option) or 64 Kb/s (V.35 option) in
half- or full-duplex and full modem control. The KMSlP supports direct
memory access data transfers , the VAX P.S.I. and RSX P.S.I. software packages, and RSX X.25 Link Level software.
Specifications
Mounting Code : 2 hex slots

Power Requirements :
- de amps drawn at + 5 V: 10.5
- de amps drawn at + 15 V: .15
- de amps drawn at -15 V: .20
Bus Loads: ac 5, de 1
1/0 Connection Panel Insert: 1 panel unit
Environmental Class: B A Refer to Appendix B for details.

3.41

UNIBUS Communications Controllers

KMS1P Order Codes
Option

Order Codes

Single-line programmable synchronous intelligent
communications controller. Includes microprocessor and line
unit modules.

KMSlP-M

For system installation, select one of the following cabinet kits:
Cabinet kit for X.25, EIA-232 -C/ CCITT V.28 interface

CK-KMSlP-AD

Cabinet kit for X.25, CCITT V.35 interface

CK-KMSlP-BD

Cabinet kit for X.25, EIA -422/CCITT V.11 interface

CK -KMSlP-ED

Cabinet kit for X.25, EIA -423 -A/CCITT V.10 interface

CK-KMSlP-FD

KMS1P Optional Software Order Codes
Option

Order Code

VAX P.S.I.

QA-071A* -xx

RSX -11 P.S.I./M

QJD91 -xx

RSX-11 P.S.I./M -PLUS

QJD92 -xx

RSX-llM X.25 link level

Q]757-xx

RSX -llM-PLUS X.25 link level

QJ770-xx

3.42

Communications Processors

KXTll-AB

The KXTll-AB is PDP-11 (Tll) 16-bit, single-board computer suitable for
communications applications running in ROM or RAM. The processor can
support up to 32 Kbytes of RAM, 32 Kbytes of ROM, two asynchronous
serial line units , 24 parallel lines, a realtime clock, and Q-bus expansion.
The KXTll-AB is supported by RT-11, V5.1 or later, MicroPower/Pascal,
and MACR0 -11.
Specifications
Mounting Code: One double slot

Power Requirements:
- de amps drawn at +5 V: 2.8 A maximum
- de amps drawn at + 12 V: 1.1 mA maximum
Bus Loads: ac 2. 7 unit loads; de .5 unit load
Environmental Class : C

A Refer to Appendix B for details.

KXTll-AB Order Code
Option

Order Code

SBC-11/21 single-board, 16-bit processor with 16 Kbytes static

KXTll-AB

RAM.

KXJll-CA

The KXJll-CA is a PDP-11 (Jll) 16-bit, single-board processor that can act
as a realtime processor, co-processor, or communications processor. As a
communications processor, the KXJll-CA can offload the main processor
by handling low and intermediate levels of communications protocol.
Applications for the KXJll -CA may be written in either MicroPower/Pascal
(V2.3 or later) or MACR0 -11. Peripheral Processor Tool Kits are used by
the host to communicate with the application on the KXJ 11-CA. The tool
kits support use of the KXJll-CA as a slave processor in PDP-11 Q-bus
system that run RT-11, RSX-UM, or Micro/RSX, and in MicroVAX II systems that run MicroVMS.
A For more information on the Peripheral Processor Tool Kits, refer to the
applicable Software Product Descriptions: SPD 12. 70.xx for RT-11, SPD
13.25.xx for RSX, SPD 18.48.xx for Micro/RSX, and SPD 28.29.xx for
MicroVMS.

Features
• PDP-11 (Jll) processor with Q-bus compatibility
• 512 Kbytes of RAM that can be programmed as shared memory on the
Q-bus

• Expansion of basic ROM up to 64 Kbytes
• Two channels for direct memory access
•Two fully programmable synchronous/ asynchronous lines
• One asynchronous serial console port
• Three 16-bit programmable timers
• 20-bit programmable parallel port (4 control lines and 16 data lines )

3.43

Communications Processors

Specifications
Mounting Code: one quad slot

Power Requirements :
- de amps drawn at +5 V: 6.0 A maximum
- de amps drawn at + 12 V: 2.0 A maximum
Bus Loads : ac 3.0 unit loads; de 0.5 unit load
Environmental Class : C

& Refer to Appendix B for details.

KXJll-CA Order Codes
Option

KXTll-CA

Order Codes

Single-board PDP-11 (Jll) 16-bit processor.

KXJll-CA

KXJll-CA User's Guide.

EK-KXJCA-UG

The KXTll-CA is a PDP-11 (J 11) 16-bit, single-board processor that can
operate as a standalone processor or a peripheral processor.
Applications for the KXTll-CA may be written in either MicroPower/Pascal
or MACR0-11. Peripheral Processor Tool Kits are used by the host to
communicate with the application on the KXTll-CA. The tool kits support
use of the KXTll-CA as a slave processor in PDP-11 Q-bus systems that
run RT-11, RSX-llM, or Micro/RSX, and in MicroVAX II systems that run
Micro VMS.
& For more information on the Peripheral Processor Tool Kits, refer to the
applicable Software Product Descriptions: SPD 12.70.xx for RT-11, SPD
13.25.xx for RSX, SPD 18.48.xx for Micro/RSX, and SPD 28.29.xx for
MicroVMS.

Features
• PDP-11 (Tll) processor with Q-bus compatibility

• 32 Kbytes RAM with battery-backup support
·Expansion of basic ROM up to 32 Kbytes
• Two channels for direct memory access
• Two fully programmable synchronous/asynchronous lines
• One asynchronous console port
• Three 16-bit programmable timers
• 20-bit programmable parallel port (4 control lines and 16 data lines)

3.44

Communications Processors

Specifications
Mounting Code : One quad slot

Power Requirements :
- de amps drawn at +5 V: 4.0 A maximum
- de amps drawn at + 12 V: 0.4 A maximum
- Battery backup at + 5 V: 20 mA maximum
Bus Loads : ac 2.0 unit loads ; de 1.0 unit load
Environmental Class: C

A Refer to Appendix B for details.

KXTll·CA Order Code
Option

Order Code

Single-board PDP-11 (Tll) 16-bit processor.

KXTll -CA

3.45

Modems

This product set is available in the United States and Canada.
Ordering Information

A To order modems, refer to the Dialup-line Modem Charts and the
Private/leased-line Modem Charts, then turn to the specific product
description for ordering information.

The 100 series modems are available in desktop and rackmount options.
The 200 series modems are available only in desktop models.
For more information, call the Computer Special Systems Support Team at
1-800-832-6277.
Dialup-line Modem Charts
Asynchronous Communications

Full Duplex

Data Rate

2400 bis
(1200 bis)
(300 bis)

2400 bis
( 1200 bis)
(300 bis)

2400 bis
(1200 bis)
(300 bis)

1200 bis
(600 bis)
(300 bis)

2400 bis
(1200 bis)

Functional Compatibility

CCITT V.221
V.22 bis

CC ITT
V.22

DF126
(CCITT V.26)

BELL 212Al103J

Digital Modem

DF242*

DF224*

DF124

DF212*

Synchronous Communications

Full Duplex

Data Rate

2400 bis
(1200 bis)

1200 bis
(600 bis)

2400 bis
(1200 bis)

Functional Compatibility

CCITT V.221
V.22 bis

CCITT V.22

CCITT V.221
V.22 bis

DF126
(CCITT V.26)

BELL 212A

BELL 201B/C

DF242*

DF212*

DF124

DF224*

DF126

Digital Modem

Half Duplex

DF126
Half Duplex

*Desktop only

Private/Leased-line Modem Chart
Asynchronous Communications

Full Duplex

Data Rate

2400 bis
(1200 bis)

Functional Compatibility

CCITT V.221
V.22 bis

DF126
(CCITT V.26)

BELL 212A/103J
Digital Modem

DF124

Synchronous Communications

Full Duplex

Data Rate

9600 bis
(7200 bis)
(4800 bis)

4800 bis
(2400 bis)

2400 bis
(1200 bis)

4800 bis
(2400 bis)

Functional Compatibility

CC ITT
V.29

CCI TT
V.27

CCITT
V.26

CC ITT
V.22 bis

CC ITT
V.27

BELL 201B

BELL 212A

DF126

DF124

Digital Modem

DF129

3.46

DF126
Half Duplex

DF127

Modems

DFlOO Series

The DFlOO series of modems provides remote connection between Digital
systems. DFlOO series modems operate in either asynchronous or synchronous mode at half- or full-duplex at speeds ranging from 300 bis to 9.6
Kb/s, depending on the version selected . They support standard EIA-232-C
and EIA-423-A interfaces and are compatible with Bell 103/212A, 201 B/C,
and CCITT V.22 bis/V.27/V.29 modems. DFlOO series modems are FCCapproved for direct connection to telephone lines on all Public Switched
Telephone Networks (PSTN) and Private/Lease Telephone Networks (Pl
LTN) in the U.S. and Canada.
The DFlOO series of modems was designed to utilize three standard enclosures: one for standalone desktop modem applications (DFlOO-DT), one for
multiple modem (rackmount) applications (DFlOO-RM), and one for the
DFM series of statistical multiplexers.
The DF124 is a 1.2- or 2.4-Kb/s, full-duplex asynchronous and synchronous
modem for dialup and leased-line telephone networks. It has an integral
autodialer and is designed to support desktop, multiple (rack) modem, and
DFM statistical multiplexer configurations.
The DF124 modems have all the features of the Scholar Plus modems
.A refer to "Scholar Plus Modems", including access and dial-in security,
"AT" compatibility, and MNP and X.PC error correction . When used in a
leased-line application, the DF124 detects faltering line conditions and
drops back to a preset dialup line. The DF124 is compatible in operation to
CCITT V.22 bis, CCITT V.22, Bell 212A, and Bell 103 modems.
The DF126 is a 2.4-Kb/s synchronous/asynchronous half-duplex dialup line
and full -duplex leased line modem. It can also be used in leased-line
multipoint communication environments. It includes an asynchronous
integral autodialer that can also be used for synchronous communications
when a BC22Y-01 adapter cable and customer-written software are used.
The modem is designed for use in desktop, multiple modem (rack), and
DFM statistical multiplexer configurations. The DF126 is compatible in
operation to Bell 201 B/C CCITT V.26 modems.
The DF127 is a 4.8-Kb/s synchronous, half-duplex, full-duplex, leased line
modem that is CCITT V.27-compatible. It is designed for use in desktop ,
multiple modem (rack), and DFM statistical multiplexer configurations .
The DF129 is a 9.6-Kb/s synchronous, full-duplex, leased line modem that
is CCITT V.29 compatible . It is capable of fallback speeds of 7200 and
4800 bis. The DF129 is designed for use in desktop, multiple modem
(rack), and DFM statistical multiplexer configurations.
Specifications
Physical Characteristics for DF124-CA, DF126-AA, DF127-AA, DF129-AA:
- Height: 74 mm (2.91 in)
- Width: 217 mm (8.56 in)
- Depth : 292 mm (11.5 in)
- Weight: 2.62 kg (5 lb, 13 oz)

Physical Characteristics for DF124-CM, DF126-AM, DF127-AM, DF129-AM:
- Height: 25.4 mm (1 in)
- Width: 203 mm (8 in)
- Depth: 264 mm (10.4 in)
- Weight: .55 kg (1 lb , 4 oz)

3.47

Modems

Power Requirements :
de amps drawn at:
Product

+5 v

+12 v

-12 v

DF124-CM

0.70

0.20

0.15

DF126-AM

0.40

0.15

0.10

DF127-AM

1.00

0.18

DF129-AM

1.00

0.18

Environmental Class: B .A. Refer to Appendix B for details.
DFlOO Series Order Codes

DF200 Scholar Series

Option

O rder Code

DF124 desktop modem for U.S./Canada

DF124-CA

DF124 modem module for U.S./Canada

DF124-CM

DF126 desktop modem for U.S./Canada

DF126-AA

DF126 modem module for U.S./Canada

DF126-AM

DF127 desktop modem for U.S./Canada

DF127-AA

DF127 modem module for U.S./Canada

DF127-AM

DF129 desktop modem for U.S./Canada

DF129-AA

DF129 modem module for U.S./Canada

DF129-AM

The DF224 Scholar is a low-profile desktop modem with external wallmount power supply. It operates at 2400, 1200, and 300 bis full duplex
over dialup (PSTN ) lines . The DF224 asynchronous integral autodialer
stores up to 15 telephone numbers, which may also be identified by an ID
name of six characters or less. Phone number linking capabilities are also
provided . The DF224 is designed for supporting Digital and non-Digital,
asynchronous or synchronous terminals , personal computers and workstation applications in the U.S. and Canada. The DF224-AA is compatible in
operation to CCITT V.22 bis, CCITT V.22, and Bell 103/212A modems.
Scholar Plus
The DF242 and DF212 are enhanced versions of the desktop DF224
Scholar modem. As full-duplex, dialup (PSTN), desktop modems, these
Scholar Plus modems offer the industry-standard Microcom Networking
Protocol (MNP) error correction and X.PC error correction (used when
accessing the TYMNET value-added network). Compatibility with the
industry-standard Hayes "AT" command language acclimates the experienced modem user in minimal time. In addition, the Scholar Plus modems
offer the simplified Digital Modem Command Language (DMCL) with
VMS-like commands to set parameters .

DMCL features a unique security system to prevent unauthorized access to
proprietary databases . One of four levels of security can be set:
• Passthrough via password
• Callback to predefined phone number with password
• Callback to predefined number with password and phone number validation
• Callback to predefined or user-defined phone number with password for
those who call in from different sites, local or long distance

3.48

Modems

For complete security, an audit trail records dial attempts. Parameter
settings are also secured by password to avoid unattended modem modifications .
The autodialer includes mixed dialing of up to 30 linked phone numbers,
local or long distance. In the event of a busy or no-answer signal, the next
linked number is dialed. The embedded speaker allows audible monitoring
of call progress .
Cables may be ordered separately from the DECdirect catalog.
Call the Computer Special Systems Sales Support Team at 800-832-6277
for more information.
Specifications
Physical Size for DF224-AA, DF242-CA, DF212-CA:
- Height: 30 .3 mm (1 .19 in)
- Width: 152.4 mm (6.00 in )
- Depth: 219 .0 mm (8.62 in )
- Weight : .539 kg (1 .19 lbs) including power supply

Power Requirements :
- de amps drawn at + 5 V: 0.80
- de amps drawn at + 12 V: 0 .10
- de amps drawn at -12 V: 0 .10
Environmental Class : B

& Refer to Appendix B for details.

DF200 Series Order Codes

Multiple Modem (Rackmount)
Enclosure

Option

Order Code

2400/1200/300 FDX desktop modem Scholar for U.S./Canada

DF224-AA

2400/1200/ 300 FDX desktop modem Scholar Plus for
U.S./Canada

DF242-CA

1200/ 600/ 300 FDX desktop modem Scholar Plus for
U.S./ Canada

DF212-CA

The multiple modem (rackmount) enclosure provides online computer
services to distributed remote terminal users. The enclosure can house up
to 12 combination DF lOO modem modules. Modules can be added or
changed from the front of the enclosure without disconnecting ac power or
disrupting other online users . The enclosure connects to either dialup or
leased telephone lines. For dialup communications, RJ21X telephone service is required , and for leased line communications, either two- or fourwire telephone ser vice is required. All enclosures have a self-contained
power supply that provides power to all modem modules within the enclosure. The enclosure is available with a 6-amp integral power supply.
Multiple Modem Enclosure Order Code
Option

Order Code

6-amp multiple modem enclosure for U.S./Canada

DFlOO-RM

3-49

Statistical Multiplexers

DFM Series

The DFM Series of Intelligent Communication Processors (ICP) are freestanding units that utilize statistical time-division multiplexing techniques
for concentrating four to sixteen EIA-232 -C data channels over a single
high -speed communication link. These data channels interface to terminals,
personal computers, printers, modems , and computer ports .
The DFM Series has been designed with multi-microprocessor architecture
utilizing internal DMA data transfer for high efficiency. The DFM uses a
total modular design concept. This allows users to easily expand and
upgrade the units from 4 to 16 channels with and without integral 4.8- and
9.6-Kb/s modems.
Channel switching and contention features provide the flexibility required
in the rapidly changing data communication environments. Any switched
channel end can be connected to any other authorized switched channel in
the network. The contention feature allows a DFM at one end of the network to be connected to a DFM with fewer channels at the host end of the
network . Users at one end may contend for connections on a first come/
first served basis .
DFM-concentrated link configurations include telephone lines or satellite
links. Digital's DDCMP protocol is supported on synchronous channels .
The DFM handles synchronous data traffic on up to one-half of its channels. Each of these channels can be configured to support various data
speeds and block sizes. Call the CSS Sales Support Team at 800-832-6277
for further information. Cables may be purchased separately from the
DECdirect Catalog .
Features
• Asynchronous and synchronous data channels

• Network control and management
• Channel switching
• Port contention with queuing
• Modem control, all channels
• Network diagnostics
•Optional 4.8/9.6-Kb/s integral modems
• Automatic speed detection
• Speed conversion
• Flow control conversion
• Local and remote echo
• Easy expansion from 4 lines to 16 lines

3.50

Statistical Multiplexers

DFM Statistical Multiplexer Configuration

VAX or
PDP-11

DFM

with

Integral
Mod em

Modem

NBG-187-00

Specifications
Physical Size:
- Height : 32 cm (12.5 in )
- Width : 32 cm (12.5 in )
- Length : 23 cm (9.0 in )

Power Requirements:
- 120 V, 60 H z: 92 W
- 240 V, 50 H z: 92 W
Environmental Class: B

& Refer to Appendix B for details.

DFM Series Order Codes
Option

Order Code

4-channel DFM with no modem

DFM04-AA

4-channel DFM with 4.8 Kb/s integral modem

DFM04-AB

4-channel DFM with 9.6 Kb/ s integral modem

DFM04-AC

8-channel DFM with no modem

DFM08-AA

8-channel DFM with 4.8 Kb/s integral modem

DFM08·AB

8-channel DFM with 9.6 Kb/s integral modem

DFM08-AC

12-channel DFM with no modem

DFM12-AA

12-channel DFM with 4.8 Kb/s integral modem

DFM12-AB

12-channel DFM with 9.6 Kb/s integral modem

DFM12-AC

16-channel DFM with no modem

DFM16-AA

16-channel DFM with 4.8 Kb/s integral modem

DFM16-AB

16-channel DFM with 9 .6 Kb/s integral modem

DFM16-AC

4-channel expansion line card for DFM08 option

DFMXX-4E

8-channel expansion line card for DFM08 option

DFMXX-8E

2.4 Kb/s integral modem for all DFM models

DF126-AM

4.8 Kb/s integral modem for all DFM models

DF127-AM

9.6 Kb/s integral modem for all DFM models

DF129-AM

Cables for the DFM mu st be ordered separately. W hen ordering cables,
supply the length of the cable. & Refer to "Communications Cables" in
this section for available cable lengths.

3.51

Statistical Multiplexers

DFM Cable Order Codes

DFX Packet Assembler/
Disassembler

Option

Order Code

Cable to connect modem to DFM link, or to connect
synchronous device to DFM channel

BC22F-xx

Cable to connect asynchronous device to DFM channel

BC22E-xx

Cable to connect dialup modem to DFM channel

BC22M-xx

Cable to connect two DFMs together for pre-installation test

BC22L-xx

The DFX Packet Assembler/Disassembler (PAD) is a freestanding concentrator that connects asynchronous devices to X.25 Public and Private Packet
Switched Data Networks (PSDNs ). With the same enclosure as the DFM
statistical multiplexer, the DFX PAD is available in basic units of 4- , 8- and
16-channel models . To accommodate growing networks , the basic 4- and
8-channel units are expandable to a maximum of 16 channels. When the
number of terminals or computer ports to be networked increases, the DFX
PAD channel expansion cards (DFMXX-xE) are available for field-upgrade
expansion in increments of 4 and 8 channels .
The DFX PAD concentrates the asynchronous data from 4, 8, 12, or 16
terminals or host computer ports onto a single high-speed synchronous
X.25 leased access line . The DFX PAD is compatible with 1980 X.25 industry standards recommended by the international standards committee
(CCITT). Video terminals and personal computers connected to the local
DFX PAD can use it as a data switch to access and share local computer
ports, printers, or modems. This combines comprehensive local communication with access to remote hosts , such as Digital systems running
Packetnet products, via the PSDN . & Refer to Section 4 for more information on Packetnet products.
The DFX PAD supports a single synchronous access line to the PSDN at
speeds ranging from 2.4 Kb/s to 64 Kb/s. Most public applications will
provide, as part of the basic service, the pair of leased line modems and
the leased telephone line to access the X.25 network. However, in private
applications, or where permitted by a public PSDN, Digital's two optional
integral modems may be used to access the X.25 network: the DF127-AM
operates at 4.8 Kb/sand the DF129-AM operates at 9.6 Kb/s .
The DFX PAD may also be used , given suitable modems or modem eliminators , to connect directly to VAX P.S.I. over a local or long-distance leased or
private synchronous line. In such a configuration, VAX P.S.I. is configured
as a DCE to the ISO 8208 specification, and the DFX PAD acts as the DTE.
& For more information on VAX P.S.I., refer to Section 4.
The DFX PAD is certified for connection to TYMNET and TELENET net works in the United States and the DATAPAC networks in Canada.
Features
• Fully compatible with 1980 CCITT recommendation X.3 , X.28 , X.29 and
X.25.

• Certified for use on TYMNET and TELENET in the U.S. and Canada's
(1980 ) DATAPAC X.25 Public Networks.
• Enhanced terminal interface parameters in addition to standard X.3 settings provide customized support for a wide variety of applications .

3.52

Statistical Multiplexers

• Local port switching and contention combines local resource sharing with
access to remote hosts on the X.25 networks.
• Easy field-upgrade channel expansion up to 16 channels with 4- and 8channel expansion modules.
·Easy-to-use calling features such as AUTOCALL and ABBREVIATED-CALL
allow users to save time and eliminate the occurrence of wrong numbers
when connecting to the remote X.25 destination .
• Composite link supports speeds of up to 64K b/s.
• Dedicated supervisory channel and user-friendly self-prompting software
commands allow independent configuring of system, channel and link
parameters in nonvolatile memory.
DFX PAD Terminal-to-host Application

~:r:

........:.:..>
DFX
PAD

Host
System

8
(")

NBG-188-00

Specifications
Physical Characteristics:
- Height: 32 cm (12.5 in)
- Width: 32 cm (12.5 in)
- Length: 23 cm (9.0 in)

Power Requirements:
- 120 V, 60 Hz: 92 W
- 240 V, 50 Hz: 92 W
Environmental Class: B

A Refer to Appendix B for details.

3.53

Statistical Multiplexers

DFX PAD Order Codes
Option

Order Code

4-channel X.25 PAD

DFX04-AA

8-channel X.25 PAD

DFX08-AA

16-channel X.25 PAD

DFX16-AA

Optional X.25 control module to upgrade existing DFM
Statistical Multiplexer to an X.25 PAD

DFX25-CM

Channel Expansion Modules:
4-channel expansion module for DFX04 and DFX08

DFMXX-4E

8-channel expansion module for DFX04 and DFX08

DFMXX-8E

Integral Modems:
4800 bis synchronous modem

DF127-AM

9600 bis synchronous modem

DF129-AM

3.54

Communications Cables

The following table lists the order codes and available lengths for cables
required by the networking and communications products described in this
catalog. For information about custom cables and longer-length cables,
contact Digital's Accessories & Supplies Group.
Communications Cable Order Codes
Order Code

Description

Where Used

Length

BC16C-10
BC16C-25

36 position, straight-to-right angle, maleto-male, shielded, 18 assembly

DECconnect, DEC423 Q-bus products

3.05 m (10 ft)
7.62 m (25 ft)

BC16D-10
BC16D-25
BC16D-50
BC16D-A5

36 position, right-angle, male to male,
shielded, 18 twisted-pair extension cable

DECconnect, DEC423 Q-bus products

3.05 m (10 ft)
7.62 m (25 ft)
15.24 m (50 ft)
45.7 m (150 ft)

BC16E-02
BC16E-10
BC16E-25
BC16E-50

Terminated six-conductor cable for terminal
connection (Digital office cable)

DECconnect standard terminal connection
cable

0.6 m (2 ft) 3.1 m
(10 ft) 7.6 m (25 ft)
15 .2 m (50 ft)

BC16K-10

ThinWire patch cord

Patches ThinWire patch panel to DEMPR

3.05 m (10 ft)

BC16M-06
BC16M-15
BC16M-30

ThinWire 802.3/Ethernet PVC cable with
connectors and boots

ThinWire 802 .3/Ethernet Products

1.8 m (6 ft)
4.6 m (15 ft)
9.2 m (30 ft)

BC17C-10
BC17C-25
BC17C-35
BC17C-50
BC17C-75
BC17C-AO
BC17C-BO
BC17C-B5

Full ElA-232-C/CCITT V.28 modem cable,
round, 25 -wire, fully shielded, male-tofemale molded connectors

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers
(DCSAX-LA line cards)

3.1 m (10 ft)
7.6 m (25 ft)
10.7 m (35 ft)
15 .2 m (50 ft)
22.9 m (75 ft)
30.5 m (100 ft)
61.0 m (200 ft)
76.2 m (250 ft)

BC17D-02
BC17D-10
BC17D-25
BC17D-50
BC17D-AO

ElA-232-C/CCITT V.28, fully shielded, null
modem, 10-wire, female-to-female molded
connectors

802 .3/Ethernet Communications Servers
(DCSAX-LB line cards)

0.6 m (2 ft)
3.1 m (10 ft)
7.6 m (25 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
30.5 m (100 ft)

BC17E-25
BC17E-50
BC17E-AO
BC17E-A5
BC17E-BO
BC17E-B5

CCITT V.35, fully shielded, modem cable
(Note: This cable has a ElA-449 connector on
the CPU end, and a V.35 connector on the
modem end.)

802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers
(DCSAX-LB line cards), DMR

7.6 m (25 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
30.5 m (100 ft)
45 .7 m (150 ft)
61.0 m (200 ft)
76.2 m (250 ft)

BC17L-04

ElA-232-C/CCITT V.28, 25-wire, fully
shielded, male-to-female connectors adapter
cable

802 .3/Ethernet Communications Servers
(DCSAX-LA or DCSAX-LC line cards)

1.22 m (4 ft)

...u
~
'"O
...
(IS

::c:
....>.
:E....
u
u

c
c
0

u
(')

3.55

Communications Cables

Communications Cable Order Codes (Continued)
Order Code

Description

Where Used

Length

BC22D-10
BC22D-25
BC22D-35
BC22D-50
BC22D-75
BC22D-AO
BC22D-A5
BC22D-BO
BC22D-B5

Null modem cable, round, 6-wire, fully
shielded, EIA-232-C/CCITT V.28, femaleto-female molded connectors
'

Local connection of asynchronous terminals

3.1 m (10 ft)
7.6 m (25 ft)
10. 7 m (35 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
22.9 m (75 ft)
30.5 m (100 ft)
45.7 m (150 ft)
61.0 M (200 ft)
76.2 m (250 ft)

BC22E-10
BC22E-25
BC22E-35
BC22E-50
BC22E-75
BC22E-AO
BC22E-A5
BC22E-BO
BC22E-B5

Modem cable, round, 16-wire, fully shielded,
EIA-232-C/CCITT V.28, male-to-female
molded connectors

Connection of asynchronous modems

3. 1 m (10 ft)
7.6 m (25 ft)
10. 7 m (35 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
22.9 m (75 ft)
30 .5 m (100 ft)
45 .7 m (150 ft)
61.0 m (200 ft)
76.2 m (250 ft)

BC22F-10
BC22F-25
BC22F-35
BC22F-50
BC22F-75
BC22F-AO
BC22F-A5
BC22F-BO
BC22F-B5

Full, EIA-232-C/CCITT V.28 modem cable,
round, 25-wire, fully shielded, male-to·
female molded connectors

Connections of synchronous modems

3.lm(lOft)
7.6 m (25 ft)
10. 7 m (35 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
22.9 m (75 ft)
30.5 m (100 ft)
45.7 m (150 ft)
61.0 m (200 ft)
76.2 m (250 ft)

BC22U-10
BC22U-25
BC22U-50

Full, EIA-232-C/CCITT V.28 modem cable,
D-subminiature connector, fully shielded,
male-to-female molded connectors

KMVlA configuration in BA200 enclosure

3.1 m (10 ft)
7.6 m (25 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)

BC22W-10
BC22W-25
BC22W-50

EIA-422/423 communications cable, 37·
conductor, D-sub miniature connector, fully
shielded, molded connectors

KMVlA configuration in BA200 enclosure

3. 1 m (10 ft)
7.6 m (25 ft)
15 .2 m (50 ft)

BC55D-10
BC55D-25
BC55D-50

EIA-423-A/EIA-449 interface connectors

Connection of DMR, DMP, DMV options

3.1 m (10 ft)
7.6 m (25 ft)
15 .2 m (50 ft)

BC55S-25
BC55S-50
BC55S-75
BC55S-AO
BC55S-B5
BC55S-EO
BC55S-LO
BC55S -YA

Integral modem, triaxial with BNC
connectors

Connects fully shielded DMR, DMP, DMV
options

7.6 m (25 ft)
15.2 m (50 ft)
22.9 m (75 ft)
30.5 m ( 100 ft)
76.2 m (250 ft)
152.4 m (500 ft)
304.9 M ( 1000 ft)
1,067 m (3500 ft)

3.56

Communications Cables

Communications Cable Order Codes (Continued)
Order Code

Description

Where Used

Length

BC55T-25
BC55T-50
BC55T-75
BC55T-AO
BC55T-B5
BC55T-EO
BC55T-LO
BC55T-YA

Integral modem, twinaxial cable with BNC
connectors

Connects fully shielded DMR, DMP, DMV
options

7.6 m (25 ft)
15 .2 m (50 ft)
22.9 m (75 ft)
30 .5 m (100 ft)
76.2 m (250 ft)
152.4 m (500 ft)
304 .9 m (1000 ft)
1,067 m (3500 ft)

BC56A-02

Male-to-male BC55S-to-BC55M adapter cable

Connects fully shielded DMR, DMP, DMV
options to old options using CPC plastic
connectors

0.6 m (2 ft)

BC56B-02

Male-to-female BC55S-to-BC55M adapter
cable

Connects fully shielded DMR, DMP, DMV
options to old options using CPC plastic
connectors

0.6 m (2 ft)

BC56D-02

Male-to-male BC55T-to-BC55N adapter cable

Connects fully shielded, DMR, DMP, DMV
options to old options using CPC plastic
connectors

0.6 m (2 ft)

...

ill

=
~

...

"ti

BC56E-02

Male-to-female BC55T-to-BC55N adapter
cable

Connects current, fully shielded DMR, DMP,
DMV options to old options using CPC
plastic connectors

0.6 m (2 ft)

BN25]-10
BN25]-20
BN25J-50
BN25]-A0
BN25]-B5

VCS FOSHA-AC/AD fiber optic cable

Connects DHFll remote terminal
concentrator to DHFll controller

10 m (32.8 ft)
20 m (65.6 ft) 50 m
(98.4 ft)
100 m ( 131.2 ft)
250 m (820 ft)
500 m (1,640)

....;.:..
:E....
u
ill

BN25J-EO
BNE2A-MA
BNE2A-MB
BNE2A-MC
BNE2A-ME

Plenum-rated coaxial cable

Standard 802.3/Ethernet cable (backbone)

c
c
0

u
('I)

23.4 m (76.8 ft)
70.2 m (230.3 ft)
117 m (383.9 ft)
500 m (1640.4 ft)

3.57

Communications Cables

Communications Cable Order Codes (Continued)
Order Code

Description

Where Used

Length

BNE2B-MA
BNE2B-MB
BNE2B-MC
BNE2B-ME

PVC-insulated coaxial cable

Ethernet

23.4 m (76.8 ft)
70.2 m (230 .3 ft)
117 m (383.9 ft)
500 m (1640.4 ft)

H8243 -A

PVC-insulated ThinWire cable spool

ThinWire 802.3/Ethernet Products

300 m (1000 ft)

H8244-A

Plenum-rated ThinWire cable spool

ThinWire 802 .3/Ethernet Products

300 m ( 1000 ft)

BNE3A-05
BNE3A-10
BNE3A-20
BNE3A-40

PVC-insulated transceiver cable with straight
connector

Ethernet

5 m (16.4 ft)
10 m (32.8 ft)
20 m (65.6 ft)
40 m (131.2 ft)

BNE3B-05
BNE3B-10
BNE3B-20
BNE3B-40

.PVC-insulated transceiver cable with rightangle connector

Ethernet

5 m ( 16.4 ft)
10 m (32 .8 ft)
20 m (65.6 ft)
40 m (131.2 ft)

BNE3H-05
BNE3H-10
BNE3H-20
BNE3H-40

PVC-insulated transceiver cable with straight
connector

IEEE 802 .3

5 m (16.4 ft)
10 m (32.8 ft)
20 m (65.6 ft)
40 m (131.2 ft)

BNE3K-05
BNE3K-10
BNE3K-20
BNE3K-40

PVC-insulated transceiver cable with rightangle connector

IEEE 802.3

5 m (16.4 ft)
10 m (32 .8 ft)
20 m (65.6 ft)
40 m (131.2 ft)

BNE3L-05
BNE3L-10
BNE3L-20
BNE3L-40

Plenum-rated transceiver cable with straight
connector

IEEE 802.3

5 m (16.4 ft)
10 m (32.8 ft)
20 m (65.6 ft)
40 m (131.2 ft)

BNE3M-05
BNE3M-10
BNE3M-20
BNE3M-40

Plenum-rated transceiver cable with right angle connector

IEEE 802.3

5 m (16.4 ft)
10 m (32 .8 ft)
20 m (65.6 ft)
40 m (131.2 ft)

BNE4C-02
BNE4C- 05

Office transceiver cable with PVC insulation,
straight connector

IEEE 802.3

2 m (6.6 ft)
5 m (16.4 ft)

BNE4D-02
BNE4D-05

Office transceiver cable with PVC insulation,
right-angle connector

IEEE 802.3

2 m (6.6 ft)
5 m (16.4 ft )

3.58

Section 4

Interoperability:
Communications Software

This section contains the
following topics ...

Ordering Information

DECnet Communications Software

Digital/IBM Communications Software

Digital/UNIX Communications Software

Digital/WANG Communications Software

Packetnet Communications Software

Opens Systems Interconnect (OSI) Products

File Transfer and Terminal Emulation Products

Section 4

Introduction

Interoperability:
Communications Software

Interoperability is the ability to exchange information between systems
from the same vendor or from a collection of vendors .
Digital allows customers to choose DECnet, OSI, and Packetnet products
to satisfy requirements of bidirectional exchange of information and files,
support of multivendor equipment, and compliance with industry standards . Also , Digital provides bidirectional communication with IBM databases and equipment.
The following Digital communications products, described in this section ,
facilitate interoperability.
• DECnet communications software

• Internet communications software including
- Digital/IBM
- Digital/UNIX
- Digital/Wang
• Packetnet communications software
• Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) products
• File-transfer and terminal emulation products

4.1

Introduction

Software Ordering Information

The software order code tables in this guide provide all the information
needed to order the major components of a software product: the licenses,
distribution and documentation, and installation service.
The following example illustrates the typical software order code table
listed in this guide .
Typical Software Order Code Table
O rder Code

Option
Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use or first license for VAXclus ter 1

QL -VERA*-AA

Cluster member 2

QL -VERA* -AB

Initial license, primary and clus ter3

QL -VERA* -CA

Monthly rental, single-use 3

QL-VERA*-DA

Monthly renta l, cluster

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-VERA *-DB
QL-VERA*-HZ

Materials and Installation
D istribution and documentation

QA -VERAA -H#

D ocumentation only

QA-VERAA-GZ

Installation service

QT-VERA*-!#

*Supported processors(*) : MicroVAX II (N) , MicroVAX 2000 (P) , MicroVAX 3500/3600
(B), VAXstation II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R) , VAXstation 3200/3500 (C),
VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX -111750 (L), VAX -11/780/782/785 (K) ,
VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4), VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/8250 (}),
VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 8500/8530 (G), VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F),
VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D) , VAX 8810 (E), VAX 8820 (D), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V) ,
VAX 8978 (5)
#Supported media (#): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), RL02 (H), RXOl (Y) , RX33 (7), TK50
(5) , TU58 (G)
1

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU .
2
Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX-11/730.
3

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or
VAX 8600/8650.

Codes listed in the table that contain an "' or # are incomplete : The footnotes after the table provide the information needed to complete the codes.
To complete the order code, replace the "' with the processor on which the
software will run, and the # with the medium on which the software will
be delivered . For example, to order the VAXcluster license from the above
table for the VAX 8350, replace the,., in the QL-VERA"'-AA code with a
"H". The order code is therefore QL-VERAH-AA. To order installation
service for a VAX 8700 with magtape , specify order code QT-VERAE-HM,
where "E " designates the VAX 8700 and "M" designates magtape.
Note that a software product may not support all processors or all distribution media. Also note that certain limitations might accompany each
option ; for example, VAXcluster licenses might not be available for certain
processors.

4.2

Introduction

The list of media codes follows .
Media Codes for Software Order Code Tables
Description
RX18 floppy diskette
RX50 floppy diskette
RC25 disk cartridge
TK50 streaming tape cartridge
TK25 cartridge
RXJJ floppy diskette
RD50/optical disk
6250 b/in 9-track magtape
RX24 3.5 inch floppy diskette
9-track 800 b/in magtape (NRZI)
TU58 DECtape II cartridge
RL02 disk cartridge

Code
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A

B
D
G
H

Description

Code

RL02 disk cartridge
RXJ 1 floppy diskette
RA60 disk cartridge
RP04 disk pack
9-track 1600 b/in magtape
(PE)
TU60 cassette
RLOl disk cartridge
RK06 disk cartridge
RK07 disk cartridge
RX02 double-density diskette
RXOl floppy diskette

H
I

J
K
M

Q
T

v
x

4.3

DECnet Communications Software

Introduction

Digital Network Architecture (DNA) is implemented in phases. The current phases are III and IV.
Four network capabilities were introduced in DNA Phase III :
• Adaptive routing (255 nodes)
·Network management
• Network command terminal software
• Multipoint line support
The maximum number of nodes in a Phase III network is 255. Network
management was enhanced to provide the software tools for identifying and
isolating problems for remotely testing network integrity.
Phase IV DECnet products give network owners significantly more flexibility in developing larger and more cost-effective computer networks and
extending their current networks as their needs evolve. Phase IV capabilities include
• Routing-Area routing with 63 areas , 1,023 nodes per area.
• Communications server support .
• Network virtual terminals .
• 802.3/Ethernet support .
Digital offers two packages, full-function and end-node, for Phase IV
DECnet products . The full-function package includes routing capability.
The end-node package offers full DECnet capability with the excep tion of
the routing function; that is, this DECnet package offers only single-line
access to a network .
Using an end -node package, data can originate and terminate at this node,
but data destined for other nodes cannot transit this node. End nodes
access DECnet routers, X.25 gateways, or full-function nodes to send messages beyond the local area network. An end node reduces overhead
needed for routing, thus increasing application performance.
Customers who have never used DECnet are strongly advised to purchase
DECnet with the full service offerings including installation service .
The following table shows which DECnet products support full-function
and end-node Phase IV packages and which continue to support Phase III .

4.4

DECnet Communications Software

DECnet Packaging Support
Phase IV Packaging Support

DECnet-VAX

Full-function
Package

End-node Package

•

•
•
•
•
•

DECnet-ULTRIX
DECnet-DOS
DECnet-VAXmate
DECnet-HM
DECnet-llM -PLUS

•
•

•

DECnet Product Capabilities

•
•

DECnet-RT (end node only)
DECnet/E

•
•

DECnet-Micro/
RSX
DECnet-HS

Phase III
Packaging
Support

•

Each DECnet software product offers a particular set of capabilities that
are summarized in the following table . These capabilities are divided into
two categories :
• DECnet Functions-those capabilities inherent in the DECnet product
•DECnet Services-those capabilities provided by software beyond DECnet .

Definitions of DECnet Functions
• Program-to-program communication means that cooperating programs,
including those running under different operating systems and written in
different languages, can exchange data .
• Network command terminal capability allows users on a host system to log
onto like (homogeneous ) systems in the network as though their terminals
were directly connected to the other system .
• File trans/er is the ability to exchange files among systems in a network.
• Command/ batch file submission and execution means that a user at a source
node can request a destination node to execute a command file. The command file can already be at the destination node, or the source node can
send it along with the request.
• Remote resource access allows the sharing of such resources as expensive
peripheral devices and massive database files for reasons of economy and
convenience. This capability is sometimes referred to as "remote file
access," when programs access file-structured devices remotely. DECnet
offers both remote file and remote record access.
• Downline system loading is the ability to store initial memory images for a
DECnet- US system on a host. These images can then be loaded on request
into adjacent DECnet-US systems on the network.

4.5

DECnet Communications Software

• Downline task loading is the ability of a host to store programs that are to
be executed on another system or server. These programs are then loaded
on request into adjacent systems or servers on the network, under the joint
control at both ends of the logical link.
• Upline dumping is the capability of a system or server to automatically send
a system-image dump to an adjacent node if the system or server fails .

Definitions of DECnet Services
• SNA Access is the ability to access an IBM SNA network.
• CCITT X.25 Access is the ability to access an X.25 service.
• Bisync Access is the ability to support the IBM binary synchronous communications protocol between Digital and IBM systems.
DECnet Product Capabilities

Capability

DECnetProducts
-RT

Micro/RSX, -HS
-HM,
-HM-PLUS

-VAX -ULTRIX -VAXmate -DOS

•

•4

. 4

•
•

•

•
•

•

•
•
•

•

. 2

SNA Access

•

CCITT X.25 Access

•
•

DECnet Functions
Program-to-program Communications

•

Network Command Terminal

•

File Transfer
Command/Batch File Submission and
Execution
Remote Resource Access

•

Downline System Loading
Downline Task Loading
Upline Dumping

DECnet Services

•
•
•
•
•
•

•
. 1 .6

•

. 2

•
•
•

•

. 2

•

Bisync Access
1

Requester-only function. DECnet-HS does not support connection from remote command terminals.
Command file must reside on remote node.
3
Supports homogeneous network virtual terminal.
4 Supports CTERM, heterogeneous network virtual terminal.
'Supports outgoing requests only.
6 Local system supports unit-record equipment only.
7
Support for RSX-11M and RSX-UM-PLUS.
8
Requires additional software beyond DECnet.
2

4.6

DECnet Communications Software

DECnet Product Support

DECnet IE
-RT

CPU

-RSX

-Micro/ -VAX -ULTRIX -DOS
RSX

•

VAX CPUs

•

PDP-.11 CPUs
IBM PCs

•

•
•

.'.5

VAXmate

Ethernet Controllers

-VAXmate

•
•

DEB NA

•

DELUA

•

•
•
.3

DEPCA

•
•

DELQA
DESQA

•

•
•
•

DES VA

•

•
•

Communications Controllers
CXA16
CXB16
CXY08

•

•
•

DHB32
DHFll
DHQll

•
•

DHT32

DLVJl

•

DHUll

•
.1

DMB32

•

DMF32
DMRll
DMVll

•
•

•

DMZ32
DPVll

•

DZQll
1
2

1
Q

"'Qc::
=
u
·a
·:::

•
•

•

Requires additional software beyond DECnet.
Refer to the appropriate Software Product Description for support of retired products.

3 Also supports some third-party products.
4

...

•
•

•

DSVll
DUPll

•
•
•

e
e

•

......>-

...=
!

Refer to the DECnet-DOS product description for supported processors and controllers.

...2

5 Uses an integral 802.3/Ethernet controller for connection to a local area network.

G.I

"It

4.7

DECnet Communications Software

DECnet-VAX

DECnet-VAX allows a suitably configured VMS system to participate as a
full-function (routing) or end node in DECnet computer networks. With
proper network planning, DECnet-VAX Version 5.0 networks can contain
up to 1,023 nodes per network area, and up to 63 areas per network.
DECnet-VAX interfaces are standard components of the VMS operating
system for use on a local, standalone system .
The DECnet-VAX end-node and full-function products are licensed separately for VMS . The DECnet-VAX License Product Authorization Key
(PAK), when registered on a VMS system, enables communication between
different networked systems that use the same protocols .
DECnet-VAX is a Phase IV network product that is warranted for use only
with Phase III and Phase IV products supplied by Digital.
DECnet-VAX offers task-to-task communications, file management,
downline system and task loading, network command terminals, and network resource-sharing capabilities using the Digital Network Architecture
(DNA) protocols . DECnet-VAX communicates with adjacent and non adjacent Phase III and Phase IV nodes . (Adjacent nodes are connected by a
single communications line.)
VMS programs written in VAX MACRO and native-mode high-level languages can use DECnet-VAX capabilities ; programs executing in PDP-11
compatibility mode cannot use DECnet-VAX.
Network functions available to DECnet-VAX users depend in part on the
network configuration. Networks consisting entirely of DECnet-VAX Phase
IV nodes provide all the functions described in the DECnet-VAX Software
Product Description. Networks that combine different DECnet implementations may limit the functions available to the DECnet-VAX user on nonDECnet-VAX nodes (because other DECnet implementations may not
implement the functions ). Conversely, a user of another DECnet implementation may not be able to access all DECnet-VAX functions. Functions
available on mixed networks can be determined by comparing the Software
Product Descriptions for the appropriate DECnet products.
DECnet-VAX allows multiple 802.3/Ethernet controllers per host within
the limitations listed in the Load Unit Table in Software Product Description 25.03 . When two or more 802.3/Ethernet controllers are used on a
single CPU , each controller must be connected to a different 802 .3/
Ethernet cable. These cables must not be joined by a bridge or repeater,
though they may be joined by a DECnet router.
DECnet-VAX licenses include a license to run VAX/VMS Services for MSDOS, allowing the DECnet-VAX host to act as a file, disk , and print server
to VAXmate and other PC clients. Software media and services must be
purchased separately. & Refer to "VAX/VMS Services for MS·DOS" in
Section 5 for more information.
& For prerequisite hardware and software, consult Software Product
Description 25.03.

4.8

DECnet Communications So&ware

Ordering Information
Order the license for either the end-node or full-function version. A license
is also available to upgrade an end node to a full-function node .
As of DECnet-VAX Version 5.0, no media kit is required . DECnet-VAX is
fully integrated into VMS V5.0 and is included in the VMS V5.0 Media and
Documentation kit. A DECnet-VAX license PAK must be installeC. on each
node.
As of Version 5.0 of DECnet-VAX, the VAX-11/782 is no longer supported.
DECnet-VAX End Node Order Codes
Option

O rder Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.

QL-D04A*-AA

Single-use license
Clu ster license 1
In itial license, primary and cluster

QL-D04A*-AB
2

QL-D04A*-CA

Monthly rental, si ngle-use 2

QL-D04A*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster 2

QL-D04A*-DB

Software revision r ight-to-copy

QL-D04A*-HZ

Installation

Installation service

QT-D04A*-I#

U.S. Software Services 3
DECsupport service

QT-D04A*-9 #

Basic service

QT-D04A*-8 #

Self-maintenance service

QT-D04A*-3#

*Supported pro cessors(*): MicroVAX I/II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P),
MicroVAX 3500/3600 (B), VAXstation I/II (Q), VAXstatfon 2000 (R),
VAXstation 3200/3500 (C), VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C)., VAX-11/725/730 (M),
VAX-11/750 (L), VAX-11/780/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4), VAX
6240 (D ), VAX 820018250 (J), VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 8500/8530 (G) , VAX 8550
(E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D), VAX 8810 (E), VAX 8820 (D),
VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)
# Supported media( # ): RX50 (3), TK50 (5), TU58 (G), 1,600 bpi magtape (M),
RXOl (Y)
1

Available on VAX-11/750, VAX-11/78x, VAX 860018650 only.
2
Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or
VAX 8600 series.
3
For service agreements in othe r countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

4.9

DECnet Communications Software

DECnet-VAX Full-function Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Upgrade from End Node to Full
Function' (A license is required for each
CPU.)
Single-use license

QL-D09A*-AA

Monthly renta l, single-use 3

QL-D09A*-DA

Full-Function Licenses (A license is
required for each CPU.)
Single-use license
Cluster license

QL-D05A*-AA

QL-D05A*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster 3

QL-D05A*-CA

Mon t hly rental, single-use 3

QL-D05A*-DA

Monthly renta l, cluster

Software revis ion right-to-copy

QL-D05A*-DB
QL-D05A*-HZ

Installation
Installation service

U.S. Software Services

QT-D05A*-1#
4

DECsupport service

QT-D05A*-9 #

Basic service

QT-D05A*-8 #

Self-maintenance service

QT-D05A *-3 #

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX I/II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P),
MicroVAX 3500/3600 (B), VAXstation I/II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R),
VAXstation 3200/3500 (C), VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX-11/725/730 (M),
VAX- 11/750 (L), VAX-111780/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4),
VAX 6240 (D ), VAX 8200/8250 (}),VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 8500/8530 (G),
VAX 85 50 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D), VAX 8810 (E),
VAX 8820 (D ), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)
# Supported med ia( # ): RX50 (3), TK50 (5), TU58 (G), 1,600 bpi magtape (M), RXOI

(Y)
'Not avai lable on VAXstati on I.

DECnet-ULTRIX

Avai lable on VAX-11/750, VAX- ll/78x, VAX 8600/8650 only.

Not avai lable on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 ser ies, or
VAX 860018650.

For service agree ments in other coun tries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

DEC net-ULTRIX is a Phase IV end-node implementation of the Digital
Network Architecture (DNA) for the ULTRIX-32 operating system. It
allows D igital ULTRIX systems to communicate with other Digital operating systems that use the DNA Phase III or Phase IV protocols, as well as
with non-Digital operating systems that support the Internet (TCP/IPbased) protocols.
DECnet-ULTRIX functions include a semi-transparent, bidirectional gateway that acts as a bridge between DECnet networks and Internet (TCP/
IP-based) networks. This function allows DECnet and Internet users to
communicate through file transfers, remote logins, and mail correspondence. The gateway function does not require special software on systems
that use its service, nor does it require accounts for remote users on the
gateway system.
&

Refer to Software Product Description 26.83 for further information.

4.10

DECnet Communications Software

Features
DECnet-ULTRIX offers these networking capabilities :
• Semi-transparent, bidirectional software gateway between DECnet networks and Internet (TCP/ IP-based ) networks
• Task-to-task communications
• Network virtual terminal
• Remote file transfer
• Electronic mail
• Network management

Prerequisite Hardware
One of the following :
• Any valid VAX system configuration running ULTRIX-32 with the following
communications devices : DEUNA or DELUA Ethernet controller, or
VAXBI 802.3/Ethernet controller, or DMRll synchronous controller
interface . A Refer to the order code table for a list of supported VAX
processors.
• Any valid MicroVAX or VAXstation system configuration running ULTRIX32 with the following communication devices: DELQA, DESQA or DESVA
802.3/Ethernet controller, or DSV ll synchronous controller. A Refer to
the order code table for a list of supported VAX processors.

Prerequisite Software
ULTRIX-32 operating system

4.11

DECnet Communications Software

DECnet-ULTRIX Order Codes
Order Code

Option
Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)
Single-use or first license for VAXcluster

QL-716A*-AA

Cluster member 1

QL-716A*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster 1

QL-716A*-CA

Monthly rental, single-use 1

QL-716A*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-716A*-DB
QL-716A*-HZ

Materials and Installation
Distribution and documentation

QA-716AA-H#

Documentation only

QA-716AA-GZ

Installation service

QT-il6A*-I#

U.S. Software Services 2
DECsupport service

QT-716A*-9#

Basic service

QT-716A*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-716A*-3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II/VAXserver 100 (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P),
MicroVAX 3500/3600 (B), VAXstation II/GPX (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R),
VAXstation 3200/3500 (C), VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX-11/750 (L), VAX11/780/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 8200/8250 (J), VAX 8300/8350 (H),
VAX 8500/8530 (G), VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800/8820
(D), VAX 8810 (E)
#Supported media(#): Magtape, 1600 bpi (M), RA60 (}), TK50 (5)

DECnet-RSX

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX-11/700 series, or
VAX 8600/8650.

For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

DECnet-RSX allows a suitably configured PDP-11 computer system to
participate as a node in a DECnet network. DECnet-RSX Phase IV supports
all Phase IV capabilities. The functions available to a user partially depend
upon the configuration of the rest of the network. DECnet-Micro/RSX
functions as an end node only.
.A For prerequisite hardware and software, consult the following Software

Product Descriptions: DECnet-HM 10.75, DECnet-HS 10.74, DECnetHM-PLUS 10.66, and DECnet-Micro/RSX 18.27.
DECnet-llM Order Codes
Option

Order Code

License (A license is required for each CPU.)

End Node

Full Function

Single-use license

QJ765-UZ

QJ764-UZ

Materials
Distribution and documentation

QJ765-H#

QJ764-H#

Software revision right-to-copy

QJ765-HZ

QJ764-HZ

Documentation only

QJ765-GZ

QJ764-GZ

#Supported media: D, H, M, 5

4.12

DECnet Communications Software

DECnet·llS Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

End Node

Full Function

Single-use license

QJ763-UZ

QJ762-UZ

Distribution and documentation

QJ763 -H#

QJ762-H#

Software revision right-to-copy

QJ763-HZ

QJ762-HZ

Documentation only

QJ763-GZ

QJ762-GZ

Materials

#Supported media: D, H , M, 5

DECnet-llM·PLUS Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

End Node

Full Function

Single-use license

QJ767 -UZ

QJ766-UZ

Distribution and documentation

QJ767-H#

QJ766-H#

Software revision right-to-copy

QJ767-HZ

QJ766-HZ

Documentation only

QJ767-GZ

QJ766-GZ

Materials

#Supported media: D, H, M, 5

DECnet-Micro/RSX Order Codes (End Node Only)
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use license

QY766-UZ

Materials

Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to -copy

QY766-H#

Documentation only

QY766-GZ

QY766-HZ

#Supported media : 3, 5

DECnet-DOS

DECnet -DOS allows IBM PCs, PC/ XTs, Personal Computer ATs, and
PS/ 2 models to participate as nonrouting (end ) nodes in DECnet local
area and wide area networks. In addition , some IBM compatibles are supported . • Refer to Software Product Description (SPD) 50.15 for specifics
on supported systems and configurations.
DECnet-DOS supports the following 802 .3/ Ethernet communications controllers :
• Digital : DEPCA multibuffered 802.3/ Ethernet controller
• MICOM/ INTERLAN : NI5010-1 and NI5010-2 IBM PC Ethernet/ IEEE 802.3
controllers
•3Com : Etherlink/ IBM PC , Etherlink II, and Etherlink/MC Ethernet Network Interfaces

4.13

DECnet Communications Software

DECnet-DOS nodes that use the DEPCA 802.3/Ethernet controller
are supported in a broadband environment using the Chipcom
Ethermodems. & Refer to SPD 50.15 for a list of supported systems and
configurations.

Features
• Supports task-to -task communications, remote file access, utilities for
network file operations, and network resource sharing using DNA protocols.
• Supports virtual command terminals (VT220 emulation) and a scripting
language.
• Allows access to full DECnet-DOS functions for MS -DOS user programs
written in Macro Assembler or the C language.
• Provides SETHOST 132-column support for Digital national character sets
and Digital multinational character sets .
• Supports IBM enhanced keyboards for IBM PC/ XT and IBM Personal
Computer AT, and Digital LK250.
• Allows for remote network monitoring of DECnet-DOS nodes .

Prerequisite Hardware
& Refer to SPD 50.15 for configuration details.
Prerequisite Software
IBM PC Disk Operating System or vendor's variant of MS-DOS.
SPD 50.15 for more information.

& Refer to

DECnet-DOS Configuration

DECnet-DOS

DECnet-DOS
VAX

VMS
(full function)

Standard Ethernet Cable

DECnet-DOS
DECnet-DOS

DECnet-DOS
NBG-101 -01

4.14

DECnet Communications Software

DECnet-DOS Order Code
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU .
License, binaries, warranty and
documentation

QVA05-AB
QVA05-AI

Single-use license 1

QVA05-UZ

8-pack license

QVA05-U3

16-pack license

QVA05-U4

64-pack license

QVA05-U6

128-pack license

QVA05-U8

500-pack license

QVA05-UB

1000-pack license

QVA05-UC

Software revision right-to-copy

QVA05-HZ

Distribution and documentation

QVA05-H#

Documentation only

QVA05-GZ

#Supported media(#) : RX24 (B), RXJI (1)
1

DECnet-VAXmate

A DECnet-DOS license is included in the DEPCA Network Integration Packages.
& For more information, refer to "Network Integration Packages" in Section 5.

DECnet-VAXmate allows Digital's VAXmate personal computer/ workstations
to participate as nonrouting (end ) nodes in both local and wide area
DECnet networks . This software is one of the DECnet-DOS famil y of products for personal computer systems running Microsoft Corporation 's
MS-DOS operating system , and specific variants of that product. DECnetVAXmate is a DECnet Phase IV network product and is warranted for use
only with supported Phase IV products supplied by Digital.
Features
• Supports task-to-task communications, remote file access , utilities for
network file operations, network command terminals , and network resource
sharing using DNA protocols .

• Provides NETBIOS session-level interface, which allows NETBIOS applications to be layered on DECnet -DOS. These applications can co mmunicate
with other DECnet applications or with other PCs running DECnet and the
NETBIOS application .
• Allows access to full DECnet-DOS functions for MS-DOS user programs
written in Macro Assembler or the C language .
• Provides SETHOST 132-column support for Digital national character sets
and Digital multinational character sets .
• Allows multiple CTERM and LAT terminal emulation sessions .
• Allows for remote network monitoring of DECnet-VAXmate nodes.
& Refer to Software Product Description 50.05 for more information about
DECnet-VAXmate.

4.15

DECnet Communications Software

DECnet- VAXmate Configuration

DECnet-VAX
(full function)

VAX

Standard Ethernet Cable

DECnet-VAXmate
NBG-102-00

Minimum Hardware Required
.A Refer to Software Product Description 50.05 for supported configurations.
Note: Operation of the 802.3/Ethernet interface with broadband modems
is not supported.
Prerequisite Software
VAXmate Standalone Software Vl.1 or V2.0
DECnet· VAXmate Order Code

DECnet/E

License and Materials

Order Code

License, binaries, warranty, and
documentation

Q6000-A7

Single-use license

Q6000-UZ

Distribution and documentation

Q6000-H7

DECnet/E software allows a suitably configured RSTS/E system to participate as a routing or nonrouting node in DECnet computer networks.
DECnet/E can connect to an Ethernet and supports all Phase IV capabilities except area routing.
DECnet/E is a Phase IV network product and is warranted for use with
supported Phase III and Phase IV DECnet products .
.A For prerequisite hardware and software, consult Software Product
Description 10.73.

4.16

DECnet Communications Software

DECnet/E Order Codes
Option

Order Code

License (A license is required for each CPU.)

PDP-11

MicroPDP-11

Single-use license

QP692-UZ

QY692-UZ

QP692-H#
QP692-HZ
QP692-GZ

QY692-H#
QY692-HZ
QY692-GZ

Materials

Distribution and documentation
Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only
*Supported media: D, H, 5, M, V

DECnet-RT

DECnet-RT software allows a suitably configured RT-11 Foreground/
Background (FB) system to participate as an end node in DECnet computer
networks . The backward compatibility of Phase IV allows DECnet-RT to
connect to Ethernet through any Phase IV routing node.
DECnet-RT is a Phase III network product and is warranted for use with
supported Phase III and Phase IV DECnet products supplied by Digital.
A For prerequisite hardware and software, consult Software Product
Description 10. 72.

DECnet-RT Order Codes
Option

Order Code

License (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use license

QJ687-UZ

Materials

Distribution and documentation

QJ687-H#

Software revision right-to-copy

QJ687-HZ

Documentation only

QJ687-GZ

*Supported media: 3, H, M, X

4.17

Internet Communications Software

Digital's Internet family of products supports the connection of Digital's
computers and Digital's networks to systems built by other manufacturers.
Internet products are tools for distributed data processing in a multivendor
environment. As parts of the powerful DNA, the Internet products allow
transparent , bidirectional communication with the equipment of other
vendors and , at the same time, provide the flexibility required by local
networks and office systems. They support many programming languages
and the wide range of computing power provided by Digital.
Internet Communications Software includes
·Digital/IBM.
· Digital/UNIX.
· Digital/WANG.
· Packetnet.
· Open Systems Interconnection (OSI).

4.18

Digital/IBM Communications Software

Digital/IBM communications products range from single-function, pointto-point protocol emulation to multi-function network-to-network communication via an IBM channel.
Digital offers three transport products that provide DECnet connection to
the SNA environment. All three products support MVS (both ISP and
/XA), VM/SP, and VSE/SP operating systems . The products fit into three
price/performance tiers .
· VMS/SNA is a software product, layered on the VMS operating system,
that provides a system-to-network connection over a synchronous communications line. It is suitable for low-volume applications that run on a single
system and require a single, direct link to the SNA environment.
• DECnet/SNA Gateway for Synchronous Transport is software that runs on
the DEC MicroServer, dedicated server hardware that provides networkto-network communications . It connects a DECnet 802.3/Ethernet local
area network to as many as four remote SNA networks over synchronous
communications lines. This product is suitable for medium traffic over a
DECnet network to one or more IBM SNA systems.
· DECnet/SNA Gateway for Channel Transport is software that runs on the
DEC ChannelServer, dedicated server hardware that connects 802.3/
Ethernet local area networks to an SNA network via an IBM S/3 70 channel. Its high throughput and dedication to one high-speed IBM channel
make it suitable for applications with heavy traffic between the DECnet and
SNA environment.

4.19

Digital/IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA Environment

DECnet-VAX
VMS DTF
VMS Gateway Management

VAX

DECnet-VAX
VMS 3270 TE
DECnet-DOS

VAX

~···
DECnet-VAX
VMS/SNA
DSV 11

MicroVAX
IBM

System370

MVSDTF

DECnet-DOS
MS-DOS 3270 TE
DECnet-ULTRIX
ULTRIX 3270 TE

DECnet-VAX
Access Routines/Programming Interface
VMS Gateway Management

NBG-127-00

The DECnet/SNA Gateway products and VMS/SNA software require installation of the appropriate DECnet/SNA Access Routines and Programming
Interfaces . These products provide such functions as terminal and printer
emulation, bidirectional data transfer, mail exchange, and remote job
entry. & Refer to "DECnet/SNA Access Routines and Programming
Interfaces" in this section for more information.

4.20

Digital/IBM Communications Software

Digital's Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC Protocol Emulator
products provide point-to -point emulation between Digital and IBM systems and are designed to satisfy single-function Digital/IBM communication requirements . If the amount of communication between Digital
systems and IBM mainframes is relatively low, BSC may be the appropriate
connection method. Digital offers two types of IBM Internet products
using the BSC technology-3271 and 2780/3780 protocol emulation software .
DECnet-DOS and DECnet/PCSA Client software products allow the IBM
PC, PC/ XT , Personal Computer AT systems (from PS/ 2 models), and
selected compatibles to participate as nonrouting (end) nodes in DECnet
and 802 .3/Ethernet computer networks . A Refer to "DECnet Communications Software" in this section for more information.
Other products are available for Digital/IBM communications:
• VIDA allows integration of data from IDMS on IBM mainframes with VAX
databases
• WPS-PLUS/PC provides Digital-style word processing for IBM PC users
Comparison of VMS/SNA and
DECnet/SNA Gateway Products

The three DECnet/ SNA transport products----VMS/SNA, DECnet/SNA
Gateway for Synchronous Transport (-ST, and DECnet/SN A Gateway for
Channel Transport (-CT) - allow systems in a DECnet network to access
resources , programs, and information in an SNA network . In cooperation
with the appropriate DECnet/ SNA Access Routines , they allow 3270 dis play users within the SNA network to access DECnet-based system
resources within the DNA environment.
VMS/ SNA, a software product that runs on a VAX/ VMS system, provides
system-to-network connection with the same functions as the DECnet/SNA
Gateway products (except for the Distributed Host Command Facility,
discussed later in this section). The DECnet/SNA Gateway products provide dedicated service between the DECnet network and the SNA network,
alleviating the VMS systems from managing this task.
In deciding which product is suitable for a customer site, it is helpful to
consider both the application and the operating environment.

Suitable Applications for VMSISNA
• Remote offices requiring both independent computing resources for office
applications and access to the corporate database on the IBM mainframe.
• Government command and control systems requiring a link to the IBM
mainframe for transfer of militar y information from mobile units .

Suitable Applications for the DECnet/SNA Gateway Products
• Installations with Digital department-level systems and IBM corporate
systems. The department-level systems are linked via DECnet to the corporate SNA network with a DECnet/SNA Gateway.
• Remote sites with more than one Digital computer that require access to
the SNA network .
• IBM 3270 users requiring access to a corporate mail system implemented
on VAX systems . The DECnet/SNA VMS Distributed Host Command Facility access routine provides this capability.

4.21

Digital/IBM Communications Software

Suitable Environments for VMS/SNA
• A large SNA network with a small number of VAX systems
• A large SNA network and geographically dispersed single VAX systems,
each requiring a separate link to the SNA network

Suitable Environments for the DECnet/SNA Gateway Products
• A large DECnet network and medium-to-heavy interface to SNA network
• Multiple DECnet networks and medium interface to SNA network
• Need for multiple lines to SNA network
• Heavy VAX usage that requires offloading network capabilities to a communications server
Comparison of VMS/SNA and DECnet/SNA Gateway Capabilities

DEC ChannelServer

VMS/SN A

DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST

DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT

System-to-network
connection

Network-to-network
connection

Network-to-IBM-channel
connection

Single line at speeds up to
64 Kb/s

One line at speeds up to
256 Kb/s;
Two lines at speeds up to
128 Kb/s;
Four lines at speeds up to
64 Kb/s.

Direct channel speed
(typically 3 to 4 Mb/s)

Supports 16 concurrent
sessions

Supports 128 concurrent
sessions

Supports 25 5 concurrent
sessions

Supports all VAX
processors except VAX
UNIBUS processors

802.3/Ethernet-based,
supports all VAX systems

No Distributed Host
Command Facility

Supports Distributed
Host Command Facility

Node management
internal

Gateway management
uses DECnet tools

The DEC ChannelServer represents the high-end of the DECnet/SNA
Gateway product family and provides the hardware base for the DECnet/
SNA Gateway for Channel Transport (DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT). The DEC
ChannelServer attaches directly to both the Ethernet Local Area Network
and an IBM S/3 70 Byte Multiplexer, Block Multiplexer, or Selector Channel.
The DEC ChannelServer is defined to the 110 subsystem as either a 3174-lL
or 3 790 communications controller and is also defined to VTAM as a Physical Unit Type 2.0. It supports a single pair of Bus and Tag connectors and
is capable of accessing information on any mainframe defined to the SNA
network regardless of its location. By using the SNA network, a single DEC
ChannelServer can access applications, files , and documents simultaneously
on multiple mainframes in either central or distributed locations.
The DEC ChannelServer consists of a MicroVAX II CPU with 4 MBytes of
additional memory enclosed in an H9642 OEM cabinet. It connects to the
Ethernet LAN through a DELQA controller and connects to the S/3 70
through a three-card Q-BUS option with driver/receiver panel. An RX33
diskette controller and a video port are also included for diagnostic use.
A For more information, refer to "DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT" in this
section.

4.22

Digital/IBM Communications Software

Specifications
Physical Characteristics
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

41. 7 inches
23.0 inches
36.0 inches
200 pounds

105.918 cm
58.42 cm
91.44 cm
90.72 kg

Power Requirements

120 Vac

240 Vac

Low-range line voltage
High-range line voltage
Frequency tolerance
Frequency
Steady state current (typ)
Steady state current (max)
Power consumption (max)

88 to 128 Vac
Single
47 to 63 Hz
60 Hz
4.4 A
6.0 A
345

176 to 256 Vac
Single
47 to 63 Hz
50 Hz
2.2 A
3.0 A
345

Environmental Class

A A Refer to Appendix B for details.

Prerequisite Hardware
• Any VAX, MicroVAX , or VAXstation configuration as specified in the order
code table can act as the load host.
• S/3 70 Bus and Tag cables (terminators if appropriate) for connection into
the X/370 system.
• VTlxx, VT2xx, or VT3xx series terminal for diagnostic use .
Note : The DEC ChannelServer has a built-in Ethernet communications
controller. It needs a suitable connection to the user 's Ethernet LAN,
together with any transceiver cables.

Prerequisite Software
· VMS V4 .6 to V5.0 or MicroVMS V4.6 to V4 .7
• DECnet-VAX V 4.6 to V5.0

Ordering Information
The DEC ChannelServer is packaged and ordered as a complete
DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT system. & Refer to the DECnet/SNA GatewayCT product description to order the package.
Refer to the order codes below only when ordering spare hardware. Note
that the options li sted below do not include cables, licenses, or documentation.
DEC ChannelServer Spare Hardware Order Codes
DEC ChannelServer configured for 120 Vac

DESNA-AA

DEC ChannelServer configured for 240 Vac

DESNA-A3

4.23

Digital/IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA Gateway for Channel
Transport

DECnet/SNA Gateway for Channel Transport (DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT),
the high-end member of the DECnet/SNA Transport family, is software that
runs on the DEC ChannelServer dedicated server hardware. The DECnet/
SNA Gateway-CT operates as part of both the DECnet and SNA networks ,
allowing users anywhere in either the SNA or DECnet network to share
systems, applications, and network resources.
DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT is defined to VTAM as a physical unit type 2.0
and can be configured to the physical unit type 2 maximum of 255 logical
units. Also, it supports a maximum of 255 simultaneous sessions. Compatible with IBM MVS, VSE/SP, and VMS operating systems, DECnet/SNA
Gateway-CT also supports all existing DECnet/SNA Access Routines for
VMS, ULTRIX, and MS-DOS systems.
DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT software is downline loaded across an Ethernet
network into the DEC ChannelServer from a suitably configured VAX/VMS
load-host system. The DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT product is configured and
managed by the load host using DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management
V2.0 (required for each load host). DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management software can be used to manage both DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT and
DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST products. £ For more information on the
DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management software, refer to "DECnet/SNA
Access Routines and Programming Interfaces" in this section.

DEC Channe!Server
The DEC ChannelServer provides the hardware base for the DECnet/SNA
Gateway-CT, and attaches directly to both the Ethernet Local Area Network and an IBM S/3270 Byte Mutliplexer, Block Multiplexer, or Selector
Channel.
£ Refer to the DEC ChannelServer product description in this section and
to Software Product Description 29.76 for further information.

4.24

Digital/IBM Communications Software

DECnet/ SNA Gateway-CT Configuration

DECnet-VAX
VMS DTF
VMS Gateway Management

VAX

DECnet-VAX
VMS 3270 TE
DECnet-DOS

VAX

Terminator

Transceiver

DECnet- VAX
VMSI SNA
DSVll

MicroVAX
Channel
Attach

IBM

System 370

MVS DTF
Standard Ethernet Cable

VAX

•
VAX

DECnet-DOS
MS-DOS 3270 TE
DECnet-ULTRIX
ULTRIX 3270 TE

DECnet-VAX
Access Routines/ Programming Interface
VMS Gateway Management

NBG-147-00

Features
• Up to 255 concurrent sessions allow many users and applications to be
supported through a single DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT.
• High performance DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT supports greater concurrent
sessions and provides higher throughput than any other DECnet/SNA
Transport product.
• Direct S/3 70 channel attachment bypasses front-end processors and widearea networks.

4.25

Digital/IBM Communications Software

• Compatibility with DECnet/SNA Access Routines and Programming Interfaces eases migration from other transport products to DECnet/SNA
Gateway-CT .

Prerequisite Hardware
• Any VAX, MicroVAX, or VAXstation configuration as specified in the order
code table
• S/3 70 Bus and Tag cables (terminators if appropriate for connection into
the X/3 70 system
• VTxxx terminal for DEC Channe!Server diagnostic use
• The DEC ChannelServer has a built-in Ethernet communications
controller that needs transceiver cable and a suitable connection to the
802.3/Ethernet LAN.

Prerequisite Software
For the load host that will downline load the DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT
software :
· VMS V4.6 to V5.0 or MicroVMS V4.6 to V4 .7
· DECnet-VAX V4.6 to V5.0

Ordering Information
Order the DEC ChannelServer hardware base for the DECnet/SNA
Gateway-CT (DESNA), which includes a power cord, diagnostic package,
and software licenses for DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT and DECnet/SNA VMS
Gateway Management software V2.0. First time purchasers of a DEC
Channe!Server system require distribution media and documentation kits
for the DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT software and the DECnet/SNA VMS
Gateway Management software V2 .0. A For information on ordering the
DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management V2.0 software, refer to
"DECnet/SNA Access Routines and Programming Interfaces" in this
section.
The DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT software is downline loaded across the
Ethernet LAN by a suitably configured VAX/VMS system which acts as
a load host. A copy of the DECnet/SNA VMS Gatweway Management
V2 .0 software must be installed on this load host. A single VAX/VMS
system is capable of acting as a load host for multiple DECnet/SNA
Gateways of any type.
DECnet systems, requiring access to the SNA environment through the
DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT, must be config ured wit h the appropriate Access
Routines or Programming Interfaces. A For more information, refer to
"DECnet/SNA Access Routines and Programming Interfaces" in this
section.
Bus and Tag cables are the responsibility of the customer and are not
available from Digital.

4.26

Digital/IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT Hardware Order Codes
Option

Order Code

DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT package includes DEC ChannelServer
hardware, power cord, diagnostics, DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT
License, DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway V2.0 license.

DESNA-S*

DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT package for Ireland. Includes
components listed above.

DESNA-TE

*Fill in one of the following codes for the appropriate country: A (United States,
Mexico), D (Denmark), E (United Kingdom), G (West Germany), I (Italy), K
(Switzerland), P (France), T (Israel), X (Austria, Belgium, Finland, Netherlands,
Norway, Sweden, Portugal, Spain)

DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Materials and Installation*

Distribution and documentation

QA-VC9AA-H#

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-VC9AA-HZ

Documentation only

QA-VC9AA-GZ

U.S. Software Services'

Installation service-first time

QSFOl-SZ

Installation service- subsequent

QSF02-SZ

DECsupport service

QT-VC9AA-9#

Basic service

QT-VC9AA-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-VC9AA-3#

*Supported processors: MicroVAX I/II, MicroVAX 2000, MicroVAX 350013600,
VAXstation 1111, VAXstation 2000, VAXstation 320013500, VAXserver 3500/3600/3602,
VAX-111730/750/780/785, VAX 6210/6220/6230/6240, VAX 8200/8250,
VAX 8300/8350, VAX 85001853018550, VAX 8600/8650, VAX 8700,
VAX 8800/8810/8820/8840/8842, VAX 8974/8978
#Supported media(#): RX33 (7), TK50 (5), 9-track 1,600 bpi magtape (M)
'For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales {epresentative.

4.27

Digital/IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA Gateway for
Synchronous Transport

DECnet/SNA Gateway for Synchronous Transport (DECnet/ SNA GatewayST) , is software that runs on the DEC MicroServer, dedicated server hardware that provides network-to-network communications. It connects a
DECnet 802 .3/Ethernet local area network to as many as four remote
SNA networks over synchronous communications lines. This product is
suitable for medium traffic over a DECnet network to one or more IBM
SNA systems .
The DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST, the midrange member of the DECnet/SNA
Transport family, connects Digital and IBM networks using a wide variety
of Digital Access Routines running under VMS , MS-DOS , and ULTRIX
operating environments . DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST is defined to Virtual
Telecommunications Access Method (VTAM) as a physical unit type 2.0
and can be configured with up to four physical unit type 2 definitions
supporting up to 128 concurrent sessions.
DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST software is downline loaded across an Ethernet
network into the DEC MicroServer from a suitably configured VMS load
host system. The DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST is configured and managed by
the DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management V2.0 (required for each load
host), which can be used to manage both DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST and
DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT systems .
& For more information on the DEC MicroServer, refer to "802.3/Ethernet
Communications Servers" in Section 2. For more information on the
DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST, refer to Software Product Description 25.C6.

4.28

Digital/IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST Configuration

DECnet-VAX
VMS DTF
VMS Gateway Management

DECnet-VAX
VMS 3270 TE

Drp= [J

VAX

}--{

G
DECnet-VAX
VMS/SNA
DSVll

MicroVAX
Channel
Attach

IBM

System 370

MVS DTF
Standard Ethernet Cable

I 1----l

VAX

DECnet-DOS
MS-DOS 3270 TE
DECnet-ULTRIX
ULTRIX 3270 TE

DECnet-VAX
Access Routines/Programming Interface
VMS Gateway Management

NBG-103-01

4.29

Digital/IBM Communications Software

Features
• Supports up to 128 concurrent sessions and up to four synchronous connections .
• Operates at speeds up to 256 Kb/s for one line, 128 Kb/s for two lines, or
64 Kb/s for four lines.
• Supports all DECnet/SNA Access Routines and Programming Interfaces.
• Uses the same user interface as the DECSA DECnet/SNA Gateway, eliminating retraining.

Prerequisite Hardware
In Ethernet local area networks:
• VAX , MicroVAX, or VAXstation configuration as specified in the order
code table
• Bell System-compatible modems . .A Refer to SPD 25.C6 for approved
models.

Prerequisite Software
·VMS V4.6 to V5.0 or MicroVMS V4.6 to V4.7
• DECnet-VAX
• DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management V2.0 for each VAX/VMS load host

Ordering Information
Order the hardware base for the DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST (DEMSA),
which includes the license for the Gateway and Gateway Management
software . Order at least one copy each of the Gateway software and Gateway Management software on the appropriate distribution medium. .A For
information on ordering the DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management
V2.0 software, refer to "DECnet/SNA Access Routines and Programming
Interfaces" in this section.
The DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST software is downline loaded across the
Ethernet LAN from a suitably configured VAX/ VMS system which acts
as a load host. A copy of the DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management
V2.0 software must be installed on this system. A single VAX/ VMS system
is capable of acting as a load host for multiple DECnet/SNA Gateways of
any type .
DECnet systems, requiring access to the SNA environment through the
DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST, must be configured with the appropriate Access
Routines or Programming Interfaces . .A For more information, refer to
"DECnet/SNA Access Routines and Programming Interfaces" in this
section.

4.30

Digital/IBM Communications Software

DECnet/ SNA Gateway-ST Hardware Order Codes
Option

Order Code

DECnet/ SNA Gateway- ST package.
Includes DEC MicroServer hardware, two
V.35 and two EIA -232 adapter cables,
power cord, DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST
license wi th warranty, and DECnet/ SNA
VMS Gateway Management license with
warranty. (Packages for West Germany
have two X.21 and two EIA -232 cables.

DEMSA-S*

DECnet/ SNA Gateway-ST package for
Ireland. Includes components listed
above.

DEM SA-TE

*Fill in one of the following codes for the appropriate countr y: A (Un ited States ,
Mexico), D (Denmark) , E (United Kingdom) , G (West Germany) , I (Italy), K
(Switzerland), P (France) , T (Israel) , X (A ustria, Belgium, Finland, Netherlands,
Norway, Sweden, Portugal, Spain)

DECnet/ SNA Gateway-ST Software Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Materials and Installation*
Distribution and documentation

QA-SOlAA-H#

Software revision right -to -copy

QL-SOlAA-HZ

Documentation only

QA-SOlAA-GZ

Insta llation service

QT-SOlAA-I#

U.S. Software Services'

DECsupport service

QT-SOlAA -9#

Basic service

QT-SOlAA-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-SOlAA-3#

*Supported processors : MicroVAX I/II, MicroVAX 2000, MicroVAX 3500/3600,
VAXstation I/II, VAXstation 2000, VAXstation 3200/ 3500, VAXserver 3500/3600/ 3602 ,
VAX-111730/ 750/ 780/785, VAX 6210/ 6220/ 6230/ 6240, VAX 8200/ 8250,
VAX 8300/ 8350, VAX 8500/ 8530/8550, VAX 8600/ 8650, VAX 8700,
VAX 8800/ 8810/ 8820/ 8840/ 8842 , VAX 8974/ 8978
#Supported media(# ): RX33 (7) , TK50 (5) , 9-Track 1,600 bpi magtape (M)
1 For service agreements in other countries , consult a local Digital sales representative.

4.31

Digital/IBM Communications Software

VMS/SN A

VMS/ SNA is a software product, layered on the VMS operating system, that
provides a system-to-network connection over a synchronous communications line. It is suitable for low-volume applications that run on a single
VAX/ VMS system and require a single, direct link to the SNA environment.
Architecturally, a VAX system running VMS/ SNA appears to the SNA network as a remote Physical Unit Type 2 node, and is attached to the SNA
network through a synchronous communications controller to an IBM 3 7x5
Communications Controller.
VMS/ SNA allows a VMS system to connect to SNA at lower entry cost than
the DECnet/SNA Gateway products. VMS/ SNA provides the high-level
capabilities of a system-to-network link , allowing users to perform such
functions as
• Accessing IBM application programs or other system resources .
• Acting as a 3270 display station.
• Transferring files between Digital and IBM environments.
• Exchanging documents and electronic mail messages between the VMS
operating system and IBM's DISOSS or PROFS.
• Implementing distributed application programs that run between the VMS
and IBM systems .
.A Refer to Software Product Description 27.01 for more information.

Features
• VMS/ SNA supports DECnet/SNA VMS Access Routines that provide
SNA functions such as terminal and printer emulation, bidirectional data
transfer, mail exchange, and remote job entry . .A Refer to "DECnet/SNA
Access Routines and Programming Interfaces" in thi s section for more
information .

• SNA Node Management (SNANM provides a node management facility to
control, monitor, and troubleshoot VMS/ SNA and the IBM/ SNA environment. SNANM commands display information about the circuit status,
circuit counters, line status, and access names .
· The SNA Protocol Trace Utility (SNATRACE ) is a problem-determination
tool that provides frame-level tracing of a circuit to help in debugging
application programs, as well as identifying system problems .

4.32

Digital/IBM Communications Software

VMSISNA Configuration

DECnet-VAX
VMS DTF
VMS Gateway Management

/!
DECn.,-DOS

VAX

Terminator

DECnet-VAX
VMS 3270 TE

, _ _ _ _,_1- -,. .7_~- -1:
r ~
Transceiver

MVS DTF

IBM

DECnet-VAX
VMS/ SNA
DSVll

Mic roVA X
Channel
Attac h

IBM

System 370

MVS DTF
Standard Ethernet Cable
____.,----~1--~~~-c:--::--::-::r-~~--1

VAX

DECnet-DOS
MS-DOS 3270 TE
DECnet-ULTRIX
ULTRIX 3270 TE

DECnet-VAX
Access Routines/Programming Interface
VMS Gateway Management

NBG-1 04-00

Prel'equisite Hardware
VMS/ SNA supports various synch ronous communicat ions cont rollers for
supported processors. A Refer to SPD 27.01 for a list of devices and their
maximum line speeds.
• Refer to the VMS/SNA order code table for a list of supported processors.

4.33

Digital/lnM Communications Software

Prerequisite Software
• VMS V4.7 or later.
• At least one of the DECnet/SNA Access Routines or Programming
Interfaces. (VMS/SNA does not support the Distributed Host Command
Facility.) .A. For more information, refer to "DECnet/SNA Access Routines
and Programming Interfaces" in this section.
• The synchronous communcations controller may require a software device
driver. .A. Refer to SPD 27.01 for more information.

Ordering Information
Order the license and at least one copy of the distribution-media and
documentation kit.
VMSISNA Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.

Single-use license

QL-362A *-AA

Initial license, primary

QL-362A*-CA

Monthly rental, single-use

QL-362A*-DA

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-362A*·HZ

Materials and Installation
Distribution and documentation

QA-362AA-H#

Documentation only

QA-362AA-GZ

Installation service

U.S. Software Services

QT-362A*-I#
1

DECsupport service

QT-362A*-9#

Basic service

QT-362A *-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-362A*-3#

*Supported processors (*): MicroVAX I/II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P),
MicroVAX 3500/3600 (B), VAXstation II (Q), VAXstation 3200/3500 (C),
VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4),
VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/8250 (J), VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 8500/8530 (G),
VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8700 (El, VAX 8800 (D), VAX 8810 (E), VAX 8820 (D) ,
VAX 8830 (U), VAX 8840 (V)
#Supported media(#): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), TK50 (5), RX33 (7)
1

DECnet/SNA Access Routines and
Programming Interfaces

For non-U.S. service agreements, consult a local Digital sales representative.

DECnet/SNA Access Routines and Programming Interfaces allow users to
perform specific functions on IBM host systems connected to the SNA
network. Access Routine software packages are required for either the
DECne t/SNA Gateway products or VMS/SNA software.
The following products, which are ordered separately, are available:
• Message Router/S Gateway (for IBM SNADS)
• Mes sage Rou ter/P Gateway (for IBM PROFS)
• DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management
• DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Terminal Emulator (VMS 3270 TE)
• DECnet/SNA ULTRIX 3270 Terminal Emulator (ULTRIX 3270 TE)
• DECnet/SNA MS -DOS 3270 Terminal Emulator (MS-DOS 3270 TE)

4.34

Digital/IBM Communications Software

• Remote Job Entry (RJE)
• DECnet/ SNA Data Transfer Facility (DTF )
• DISOSS Document Exchange Facility (DDXF)
• EDE with IBM DISOSS
• D istributed Host Command Facility (DHCF)
• Printer Emulator (PrE)
· Advanced Program-to-Program Communication/LU6 .2 Programming
Interface (APPC )
• DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Data Stream Programming Interface (3270 DS )
• DEC net/SNA VMS Application Programming Interface (API)
The following table lists the IBM operating systems supported by each of
the access routines .
IBM Software Supported by Access Routines

DECnet/SNA Access Routine

IBM Software Supported
MVS

VM/SP

VSE/SP

DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Terminal
Emulator Vl.4

CICS, !SPF,
Netview,
PS/370, TSO

CMS, PROFS,
Netview

CICS, ISPF,
NCCF, PS/
370

DECnet/SNA ULTRIX 3270 Terminal
Emulator, Vl.O

CICS, ISPF,
Netview,
PS/370, TSO

CMS, PROFS,
Netview

CICS, !SPF,
NCCF , PS/
370

DECnet/SNA Ms.nos 3270 Terminal
Emulator, Vl.O

CICS, !SPF,
Netview,
PS/ 370, TSO

CMS, PROFS,
Netview

CICS, ISPF,
NCCF, PSI
370

DECnet/SNA VMS RJE Vl.3

JES2 , JES3

NIA

VSE/ Power

DECnet/SNA VMS API V2.2

CICS, VTAM,
IMS , TSO

VTAM, CMS,
RSCS

CICS, VTAM

DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Data Stream
Programming Interface Vl.3

CICS, IMS ,
TSO, VTAM

CMS

CICS, VTAM

DECnet/SNA VMS APPC/LU6.2
Programming Interface V2.0

CICS

NIA

CICS

DECnet/ SNA VMS PrE Vl.1

DSPRINT,
CICS, JES
328X

RSCS

CICS, VSE/
Power

DECnet/SN A VMS DHCF V 1.1

HCF

NIA
NIA
NIA
NIA
NIA

NIS
NIS

DECnet/SNA VMS DDXF Vl.3

DI SO SS

EDE with IBM DISOSS V2. l

DISOSS

DECnet/SNA DTF V2.0

MVS/DTF

VAX Message Router/S Gateway Vl.O

DISOSS

VAX Message Router/P Gateway V l. O

NIA

PROFS, CMS
Notes

N/S

NIA
N/S

NIA

NIA means not applicable
N/ S means the product has not been certified and is not supported

4.35

Digital/IBM Communications Software

Message Router/S Gateway
(for IBM SNADS)

Message Router/S Gateway is a layered VMS application that allows
transparent exchange of messages between Digital and IBM Office
Networks . & For more information, refer to "MAILbus Electronic Mail
Interchange" in Section 5.

Message Router/P Gateway
(for IBM PROFS)

Message Router/P Gateway is a layered VMS application that allows transparent exchange of messages between Digital and IBM PROFS and CMS
systems. & For more information, refer to "MAILbus Electronic Mail
Interchange" in Section 5.

DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway
Management

DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management provides configuration and management functions for the DECnet/SNA Gateway for Synchronous Transport (DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST and DECnet/SNA Gateway for Channel
Transport (DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT). & Refer to the appropriate
descriptions in this section for information on both products.
DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management allows the gateway administrator
to configure the software executing in the DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST or
DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT system. Also , it allows the administrator to
es tablish parameters relating to lines, circuits, physical units, logical units,
and other variables necessary for network -to-network communications
between the DECnet and SNA networks . Additionally, DECnet/SNA VMS
Gateway Management allows the administrator to manage and to diagnose
problems related to the DECnet/SNA Gateway.
DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management includes the following fault
isolation tools:
• A trace capability for use with the DECnet/ SNA Gateway(s) helps debug
application programs and assists in identifying system problems. An operator can run a trace at the line/circuit, physical unit (PU), or session level,
then format the data on a specified Digital system . This trace feature helps
determine an error for remedial action .
• A "snapshot" monitoring utility displays on a Digital host-controlled terminal t he status of the Gateway's buffer availability, the number of SNA
session currently in progress, and other information pertinent to both the
DECnet and the SNA network.

· If an irrecoverable error occurs during operation of the DECnet/SNA
Gateway system, a memory image may be dumped to a designated
Ethernet -attached VAX host .
& For furthe r information, refer to Software Product Description 29.70 .

4.36

Digital/IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management Configuration

DECnet-VAX
VMS DTF
VMS Gateway Management

VAX

DECnet-VAX
VMS 3270 TE
DECnet-DOS

VAX

Terminator
Transceiver

DECnet-VAX
VMS/SNA
DSVll

MicroVAX

MVS DTF

VAX

DECnet-DOS
MS-DOS 3270 TE
DECnet-ULTRIX
ULTRIX 3270 TE

DECnet-VAX
Access Routines/Programming Interface
VMS Gateway Management

NBG-105-01

Qualifications
Note that only DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management Vl.x supports
DECnet/SNA Vl.x (DECSA-FA/DX24).

4.37

Digital/IBM Communications Software

Features
• Simple configuration procedure-After installing DECnet/SNA Gateway
software (on a load host) and DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management
software, the administrator runs a single configuration procedure appropriate for the type of DECnet/SNA Gateway to be used. This configuration
procedure creates files that define items for the DECnet database on the
load host, and the SNA and DECnet databases on the Gateway.
• DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management utility- The Gateway supports
network control program (NCP) commands to manage the Gateway-toDECnet components such as lines and circuits.
• Server management- The GAS, RJE, and DHCF servers are managed with
SNANCP commands.

Qualification
DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management V2.0 can configure and monitor
both the -CT and -ST DECnet/SNA Gateway products . It does not support
the DECSA Gateway, which is supported by DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway
Management Vl.O.

Prerequisite Hardware
Any VAX , MicroVAX, VAXstation, or VAXserver system specified in the
Order Code table.

• Refer to Software Product Description (SPD) 29.70 for other requirements.

Prerequisite Software
VMS V4.6 to V5 .0 or MicroVMS V4.6 to V4.7
A Refer to SPD 29.70 for information regarding optional software and
growth considerations.

Ordering Information
Order the appropriate license and at least one copy of the distribution and
documentation kit for the VAX system that will downline load and monitor
the -CT and -ST DECnet/SNA Gateway products.

4.38

Digital/IBM Communications Software

DECnet/ SNA VMS Gateway Man agement V2.0 Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use or first license for VAXcluster

QL-VCKA *-AA

Cluster member 1

QL -VCKA *-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster

QL-VCKA *-CA

Monthly rental, single-use

QL·VCKA *-DA

Month ly rental, cluster

QL.VCKA* -DB

Software revision right-to-copy

QL -VCKA *-HZ

Materials and Installation
D istribution and documentation

QA -VCKAA-H #

Documentation only

QA-VCKAA -GZ
QT-VCKA*-I#

Installation service

U.S. Software Services

DECsupport service

QT- VCKA* -9#

Basic service

QT-VCKA *-8 #

Self-maintenance ser vice

QT-VCKA* -3 #

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX I/II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P) ,
MicroVAX 3500/ 3600 (B) , VAXstation I/II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R),
VAXstation 8000 ( ), VAXstation 3200/ 3500 (C), VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C),
VAX -11/730 (M ), VAX -111750 (L ), VAX -11/780/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3),
VAX 6230 (4) , VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/ 8250 (}) , VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 8500/8530
(G) , VAX 8550 (E) , VAX 8600/8650 (F) , VAX 8700 (E ), VAX 8800 (D ), VAX 8810 (E),
VAX 8820 (D ), VAX 8840/ 8842/ 8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5 )
# Supported media ( # ): RX33 (7), TK50 (5), 9-track 1,600 b pi magtape (M)

DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Terminal
Emulator (VMS 3270 TE )

Not available on MicroVAX I, VAXstat ion I, or VAX -11/725/730/782.

For service agreements in other countries, consult a local D igital sales representative.

The DEC net/ SNA VM S 3270 Terminal Emulator (VMS 3270 TE ) is software
layered on DECnet-VAX that allows VT users (or users of other Digital
terminals, workstation s, or personal computers in VT emulation mode ) on
suitably confi gured VAX, MicroVAX, or VAXstation systems to interactively
access IBM mainframe- based applications. The applications for use by the
VMS 3270 TE are those originally developed for IBM 3270 display stations
in a Systems Network Architecture (SNA ) networki ng environment.
The VMS 3270 Terminal Emulator gains access to the SNA environment via
a DECnet/ SNA Gateway product or VMS/ SNA software.
Features
· IBM 3x78 Mode ls 2, 3, 4, or 5 Terminal Emulation .

• Support for multiple IBM Operating Syste m environments (MVS, VM,
VSE/ SP ).
• Support for SSCP-LU sessions - Supports USS screen (al so called Mes sage
10) and by use of the SYS REQ key allows users to switch easily between
SSCP-LU and LU-LU sessions .
• Support for SPAWN/ATTACH command s-Allows users to create
subprocesses and easily switch between VMS processes using SPAWN/
ATTACH commands .

4.39

Digital/IBM Communications Software

• Support for RECORD/ PLAYBACK-Allows users to save frequently used
key sequences and associate them with particular PF keys . The key
sequences saved (recorded ) can then be executed by pressing the desired
PF key. Up to 127 keystrokes can be saved on each PF key.
• Support for Numeric Lock Override-Allows users to enter non-numer ic
characters in numeric fields . The numeric lock override feature is enabled/
disabled by the NUM OVR key.
VMS 3270 Terminal Emulator Configuration

ULTRIX
IBM

32 70 TE

Mainframe
ULTRIX
3270 TE

VAX

Terminator

[]
VMS
3270 TE

••• cC. . .__P_r_in-te-~)

Modem

NBG - 148-00

Prerequisite Hard ware
The VMS 3270 TE is supported on any valid VAX, MicroVAX , or VAXstation
running VMS and DECnet- VAX . (The order code table lists the supported
processors .) .& For more specific communications configuration information, refer to Software Product Description 26.84.
Access via a DECnet/ SNA Gateway requires a VMS-based Load
Host. .& Refer to the appropriate DECnet/SNA Gateway product
in this section for more information.
Prerequisite Software
• VMS Operating System
· DECnet-VAX
• DECnet/ SNA Gateway and Gateway Management Software (for
DECnet/ SNA Gateway configurations), or VMS/ SNA

4.40

Digital/IBM Communications Software

VMS 3270 Terminal Emulator Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1

QL-454A*-AA

Cluster member 2

QL-454A*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster 3
Monthly rental, single-use

QL-454A*-CA
QL-454A*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster 3

QL-454A*-DB

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-454A*-HZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

QA-454AA-H#

Documentation only

QA-454AA-GZ
QT-454A*-I#

Installation service
U.S. Software Services

DECsupport service

QT-454A*-9#

Basic service

QT-454A*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-454A*-3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX I/II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P),
MicroVAX 3500/3600 (B), VAXstation II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R),
VAXstation 3200/3500 (C), VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX-11/725/730 (M),
VAX-11/750 (L), VAX-11/780/782/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4),
VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/8250 (]) , VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 8500/8530 (G),
VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D), VAX 8810 (E),
VAX 8820 (D), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)
#Supported media (# ): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), RXOl (Y), RX50 (3), TK50 (5)
1

For software. licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.

Not available on MicroVAX I, VAXstation I, or VAX-11/725/730/782.

3 Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or

VAX 8600/8650.
4

DECnet/SNA ULTRIX 3270
Terminal Emulator
(ULTRIX 3270 TE)

For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

The DECnet/SNA ULTRIX 3270 Terminal Emulator (ULTRIX 3270 TE) is
software layered on DECnet-ULTRIX that allows VT users (or users of
other Digital terminals , workstations, or personal computers in VT emulation mode) to interactively access IBM mainframe-based applications.
The ULTRIX 3270 TE Terminal Emulator gains access to the SNA environment via a DECnet/SNA Gateway product on ly.

4.41

Digital/IBM Communications Software

Features
• IBM 3x78 Model 2, 3180 (24 x 80 mode) Terminal Emulation
• Access to multiple IBM Operating System environments (MVS, VM,
VSE/ SP )
• Access to IBM mainframe-based applications (via the DECnet/ SNA Gateway) designed fo r interaction with a screen size of 1920 (24 X80) characters
• Record/playback function for associating frequen tly used key sequences
with particular PF (Program Function) keys
• Online keyboard customization
• Online help facility
• Numeric lock override
• Local/logical print fu nctions
ULTRIX 3270 Terminal Emulator Configuration

ULTRIX
3270 TE

IBM

Mainframe

ULTRIX
3270 TE

Transceiver
~

Term inator

-,-----J--C~=i-~~~~

Standard Ethernet Cable

1 , -,------,

•

G
VMS

3270 TE

Printer

Modem

NBG-191-01

Prerequisite H ardware
The ULTRIX 3270 TE is supported on any valid VAX, MicroVAX, or
VAXstation running ULTRIX-32 and DECnet-ULTRIX. (The order code
lists the supported processors.) A For more specific communications
configuration information, refer to Software Product Description 26.40.
IBM Access is via a DECnet/SNA Gateway, which requires a VMS-based
load host. A For more information, refer to the appropriate DECnet/SNA
Gateway product description in this section.

Prerequisite Software
• ULTRIX-32 Operating System V2.2 or later, or ULTRIX Worksystem
Software Vl.1 (for VAXstation 3200/3500 systems or later
· DECnet-ULTRIX V2.2 or later

4.42

Digital/IBM Communications Software

ULTRIX 3270 Terminal Emulator Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)
Single-use license 1
Cluster license

Initial license, primary and cluster3

QL-VCWA*-AA
QL-VCWA* -AB
QL-VCWA* -CA

Monthly rental, single-use3

QL-VCWA*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster3

QL-VCWA*-DB

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-VCWA*-HZ

Materials and Installation
Distribution and documentation

QA-VCWAA-H#

Documentation only

QA-VCWAA-GZ

Installation service

QT-VCWA*-I#

U.S. Software Services 4

DECsupport service

QT-VCWA*-9#

Basic service

QT-VCWA*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-VCWA* -3#

*Supported processors (*): MicroVAX II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P),
MicroVAX 3500/3600 (B), VAXstation II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R),
VAXstation 3200/3500 (C), VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX-11/725/730 (M),
VAX-111780/782/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4) , VAX 6240 (D),
VAX 8200/8250 (]), VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 850018530 (G), VAX 8550 (E),
VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D). VAX 8810 (E), VAX 8820 (D),
VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)
#Supported media(#) : TK50 (5), 1,600 bpi magtape (M), TU58 (G), RA60 (])

DECnet/SNA MS-DOS 3270
Terminal Emulator
(MS-DOS 3270 TE)

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered
a single CPU.

Not available on MicroVAX I, VAXstation I, or VAX-11/725/730/782.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or
VAX 8600/8650.

For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

The DECnet/SNA MS-DOS 3270 Terminal Emulator (MS-DOS 3270 TE) is
software layered on DECnet-DOS or DECnet-VAXmate , which allows an
MS-DOS -based personal computer (PC), connected as an end node in a
DECnet environment, to interactively access IBM mainframe-based applications. The PC connection to the DECnet environment can be via either a
serial port driver with asynchronous DDCMP, or an 802.3/Ethernet communications controller.
The MS -DOS 3270 TE is available for use with the DECnet/SNA Gateway
products only.

4.43

Digital/IBM Communications Software

Features
•IBM 3x78 Model 2, 3180 (24X80 mode) Terminal Emulation
• IBM 3279 2A Base Color support (4 colors)
• Access to IBM mainframe-based applications (via the DECnet/SNA Gateway) designed for interaction with a screen size of 1920 (24 x 80) characters
• Record/playback function for associating frequently used key sequences
with particular Program Function keys
• Online keyboard customization
• SPAWN capability for accessing the DOS command environment from the
TE session
• Numeric lock override
• Local/logical print functions
MS-DOS 3270 Terminal Emulator Configuration

IBM

Mainframe
MS-DOS 3270 TE

••1------c __J - ----1Transceiver
__

. ) -i._

Terminator

Standard Ethernet Cable

-...--}-·

Thin Wire

§
MS-DOS 3270 TE
DECnet-VAX
VAX-

mate

MS-DOS 3270 TE

MS-DOS 3270 TE
NBG-192-01

Prerequisite Hardware
The following systems are supported:
• Digital VAXmate personal computer
•IBM 5150 Personal Computer
·IBM 5160 Personal Computer XT
• IBM 5162 Personal Computer XT Model 286
·IBM 5170 Personal Computer AT
• IBM 8525 Personal System/2 Model 30
• IBM 8525 Personal System/2 Model 50
• IBM 8525 Personal System/2 Model 60
• IBM 8525 Personal System/2 Model 80
• COMPAQ DESKPRO 286 Personal Computer Model 40
• COMPAQ DESKPRO Model 2

4.44

Digital/IBM Communications Software

Standard keyboards supplied with the above PCs are supported . The
DIGITAL LK250 is also supported on the IBM PC, IBM PC/ XT and IBM
PC/AT.
The following video adapters are supported :
• MDA (IBM Monochrome Display Adapter )
• CGA (IBM Color Graphics Adapter)
• EGA (IBM Enhanced Graphics Adapter)
• MCGA (IBM PS/ 2 Model 30 video hardware )
• VGA (IBM PS/ 2 Model 50 , 60, 80 video hardware)
IBM Access requires a DECnet/ SNA Gateway, which requires a VMS-based
load host . A Refer to Software Product Description 30.15 for DECnet/
SNA Gateway configuration details.

Prerequisite Software
Operating system-one of the following depending on PC model:
• VAXmate Standalone Software
• IBM PC Disk Operating System
• COMPAQ MS-DOS
Digital layered products-one of the following:
• DECnet-DOS or DECnet/ PCSA Client
• DECnet-VAXmate
MS-DOS 3270 Terminal Emulator Order Code
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use license

QVVFA-UZ

8-pack license

QVVFA-U3

16-pack license

QVVFA-U4

32-pack license

QVVFA-U5

64-pack license

QVVFA-U6

128-pack license

QVVFA-U7

500-pack license

QVVFA-UB

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

QVVFA-H#

Software revision right-to-copy

QVVFA-HZ

U.S. Software Product Services

Basic Service

QVVFA-8#

Self-Maintenance Service

QVVFA-3#

#Supported media(#) : RX33 floppy diskette (7), RX31 floppy diskette (I), RX24 3.5-inch
floppy diskette (B)

4.45

Digital/IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SN A VMS Remote Job
Entry (RJE)

The DECnet/ SNA VMS Remote Job Entry (RJE) access routine allows
suitably configured VAX or MicroVAX systems to function as SNA/ RJE
workstations that can submit batch jobs to an IBM host and receive job
output . The RJE access routine must reside on each VAX or MicroVAX
system supporting RJE transmission. Note that access routines are not
required for DECnet nodes that transmit files to a DECnet system for
subsequent RJE processing, nor are they required for any routing nodes
between the requesting VAX or MicroVAX system and the DECnet/SNA
Gateway. The RJE access routine is available for use with both VMS/ SNA
and the DECnet/SNA Gateway products .
A Refer to Software Product Description 26.85 for further information.

DECnet/SNA VMS Remote Job Entry Order Codes
Order Code

Option
Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1

QL-453A*-AA

Cluster member 2

QL-453A*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster
Monthly rental, single-use
Monthly rental, cluster

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-453A*-CA
QL-453A*-DA
QL-453A*-DB
QL-453A*-HZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

QA-453AA-H#

Documentation only

QA-453AA-GZ

Installation service
U.S. Software Services

QT-453A*-I#
4

DECsupport service

QT-453A*-9#

Basic service

QT-453A*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-453A*-3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX I/II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P),
MicroVAX 3500/3600 (B), VAXstation II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R),
VAXstation 3200/3500 (C), VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX-11/730 (M),
VAX. 11/750 (L), VAX-11/780/782/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4),
VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/8250 (]),VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 8500/8530 (G),
VAX 8550 (E), VAX 860018650 (F), VAX 8700 (E) , VAX 8800 (D), VAX 8810 (E),
VAX 8820 (D), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V) , VAX 8978 (5)
.
#Supported media(#): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), RXOl (Y), RX50 (3), TK50 (5),
TU58 (G)
'For software licensing purposes, a VAX-111782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU .
2

Not available on MicroVAX I, VAXstation I , or VAX-11/725/730/782.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or
VAX 8600/8650 .

For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

4.46

Digital/IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA Data Transfer
Facility (DTF)

DECnet/SNA Data Transfer Facility (DTF) is a software product that provides bidirectional data transfer capabilities, initiated by either environ ment , between an IBM MVS system in a Systems Network Architecture
(SNA ) environment and one or more Digital nodes in a DECnet network .
Digital nodes include VMS systems running DECnet-VAX , ULTRIX -32
systems running DECnet-ULTRIX, and MS -DOS systems running DECnetDOS . Access between the cooperating Digital and IBM environments is via
a DECnet/SNA Gateway or VMS/ SNA software.
The DTF software comprises these components :
• DECnet/ SNA DTF Server software that runs on a DECnet-VAX system to
communicate between the DECnet nodes and the MVS/ DTF system.
• DECnet/SNA MVS DTF software that runs on the IBM MVS system. MVS/
DTF includes a VTAM application program to control the communications
with the VMS/ DTF Server nodes, a TSO command processor, and an ISPF
dialog to initiate transfers from the IBM system .
• Optional DECnet/SNA VMS DTF Utilities software that runs on any
DECnet-VAX node that is not a DTF server and needs to initiate recoverable file transfers .
Features
• Allows record-level access from VMS systems to MVS data sets via
DATATRIEVE, RMS applications, or DCL commands .

• Provides create, read , and write facilities for IBM VSAM and non -VSAM
data sets.
• Uses the VMS/ DTF Server software via DECnet for all VMS , MS -DOS, and
ULTRIX systems .
•Allows MS -DOS, ULTRIX, and VMS systems to initiate nonrecoverable ,
bidirectional file transfers . Optional VMS Utilities software provides recovery and management capabilities for other networked VMS systems .
• Provides recoverable file transfer for non -VSAM file types between the IBM
MVS system and a VMS system .
• Customers maintain control over their corporate data.
• Provides password security through a proxy database on the VMS/ DTF
Server node for both Digital and IBM users .
• Supports standard user interfaces in Digital and IBM environments.

4.47

Digital/IBM Communications Software

DTP Configuration

DECnet- VAX
VMS DTF
VMS Gateway Management

VA X

DECnet-VAX
VMS3270 TE
DECnet-DOS

VA X

Terminator

Transceiver

DECnet-VAX
VMS/SNA
DSVll

MicroVAX
Channel
Attach

IBM

System 370

MVS DTF
Standard Ethernet Cable

VA X

DECnet-DOS
MS-DOS 3270 TE
DECnet-ULTRIX
ULTRIX 3270 TE

DECnet-VAX
Access Routines/Programming Interface
VMS Gateway Management

NBG- 106-01

Prerequisite Hardware
A suitably configured VAX/VMS system that wi ll act as the D TF
server. A Refer to the order code table for processors supported and to
SPD 27.85 for Server and Utilities block-space requirements.
MVS/DTF is installed on an IBM System 3 70 class machine (including 43xx

and 30xx).

4.48

A Refer to SPD 27.85 for more information.

Digital/IBM Communications Software

Prerequisite Software
For VMS/DTF Server and Utilities ,
•VMS, V4.5-V4.7, or MicroVMS, V4 .7 operating system. (For MicroVMS,
both the E xtended Base and Program Development components are
required .)
·DECnet/VAX V4.7-V5.0
For ULTRIX and MS -DOS clients,
• ULTRIX V2.2 operating system
• DECnet-ULTRIX V2.2
For MS-DOS , DECnet-DOS V2.0-V2.1 operating system

Ordering Information
Order the following :
• A license for the VAX processor that will act as the server and a distribution and documentation kit (order codes Q"-VEBA"-H )
• A license for the IBM MVS system and a software distribution kit delivered
on 9-track 6250 bpi magtape (order codes QXlOl)
• As an option , a license for each VAX system that requires the VMS/DTF
Utilities and at least one distribution and documentation kit (order codes
Q;, -VEKA '' -"''' )
DECnet/SNA VMS DTF Server and Utilities Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Server

Utilities

Single-use license 1

QL-VEBA*-AA

QL-VEKA*-AA

VAXcluster license

QL-VEBA*-AB

QL-VEKA*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster

QL-VEBA*-CA

QL-VEKA*-CA

Monthly rental, primary

QL-VEBA*-DA

QL-VEKA*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster

QL-VEBA*-DB

QL-VEKA*-DB

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-VEBA*-HZ

QL-VEKA*-HZ

Distribution and documentation

QA-VEBAA-H#

QL-VEKAA-H#

*Supported processors (*): MicroVAX II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P),
MicroVAX 3500/3600 (B), VAXstation II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R),
VAXstation 3200/3500 (C), VAXserve~ 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX-11/730 (M),
VAX-11/750 (L), VAX-11/780/782/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4)
VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/8250 (J), VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 8500/8530 (G),
VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D), VAX 8810 (E),
VAX 8820 (D), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)
#Supported media(#): RX33 (7), TK50 (5), 1,600 bpi magtape (M)
1For software licensing purposes, a VAX-111782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a

single CPU.

4.49

Digital/IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA MVS DTF Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

DECnet/SNA VMS DISOSS
Document Exchange Facility
(DDXF)

Single-use license

QXlOl-UZ

Initial license

QXlOl-lP

Monthly rental

QXlOl-JP

Distribution and documentation

QXlOl-HA

The DECnet/SNA VMS DISOSS Document Exchange Facility (DDXF)
access routine allows suitably configured VAX or MicroVAX systems to
access both document distribution and library services provided by the
IBM host supported Distributed Office Support System/3 70 (DISOSS/ 3 70) .
DDXF communicates with the DISOSS host system using the SNA
Advanced Program-to-Program Communication (APPC/ LU6 .2) facility and
the Document Interchange Architecture/Document Content Architecture
(DIA/DCA ) protocols.
DDXF accepts both final-form-text and revisable-form-text documents for
transmission or reception . However, transform routines are provided for
final-form-text documents only. Final-form-text documents are translated
by DDXF to/from ASCII text after reception or prior to transmission of a
document. This allows a VAX or MicroVAX user to perform minor revisions
to a received document via a text editor such as EDT.
DDXF is available for use with both VMS/ SNA and the DECnet/SNA
Gateway products .

4.50

Digital/IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA VMS DDXF Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use license 1

Q*042-UZ

VAXcluster license 2

Q*042-QZ

Initial license, primary and cluster
Periodic payment, primary

Periodic payment, cluster 3

Q*042-1P
Q*042.JP
Q*042.JZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

Q*042-H#

Software revision right-to-copy

Q*042-HZ

Documentation only

QL042-GZ
Q*042-I#

Installation service
U.S. Software Services

DECsupport service

Q*042-9#

Basic service

Q*042-8#

Self-maintenance service

Q*042-3#

*Supported processors(*) : MicroVAX I (N); MicroVAX II (Z); VAXstation II (4);
MicroVAX 2000 (3 ); VAXstation 2000 (8); MicroVAX 3500/3600 (O);
VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (l); VAXstation 3200/3500 (l); VAX-11/730 (C);
VAX:ll/750 (D); VAX -11/780/782/785 (E); VAX 8200/8250 (5); VAX 8300/8350 (7);
VAX 8500/8530 (9); VAX 8550 (2); VAX 8600/8650 (K); VAX 8700 (2); VAX 8800 (M)
#Supported media: 3, 5, G, M, Y
1
For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.
2
Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX-11/730.
3 Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or
VAX 8600/8650.
4
For non-U.S. service agreements, consult a local Digital sales representative.

EDE with IBM DISOSS

The EDE with IBM DISOSS product provides VAX or MicroVAX users of
ALL-IN -1 Office Menu software or DECdx/VMS access to the Document
Librar y Services and Distribution Services of the IBM DISOSS/ 3 70 product
running in an SNA environment. Both final-form-text and revisable-formtext are supported/transformed. Operation of EDE with IBM DISOSS is
initiated through a simple menu interface, which can be added to the
ALL -IN -1 Office Menu or invoked from the DCL system prompt when
used with DECdx/VMS . Note: The DISOSS Document Exchange Facility
(DDXF) access routine is a prerequisite product.
EDE with IBM DISOSS is available for use with both VMS/SNA and the
DECnet/SNA Gateway products.

4.51

Digital/IBM Communications Software

EDE with IBM DISOSS Order Codes
Order Code

Option
Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use license 1

Q*761-UZ

VAXcluster license 2

Q*761-QZ

Initial license, primary and cluster 3

Q*761-1P

Periodic payment, primary3

Q*761-JP

Periodic payment, cluster

Q*761-JZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

Q*761-H#

Software revision right-to-copy

Q*761-HZ

Documentation only

QL761-GZ

Installation service

Q*76 1-I#

U.S. Software Services 4

DECsupport service

Q*761-9#

Basic service

Q*761-8#

Self-maintenance service

Q*761-3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (Z); MicroVAX 2000 (3); VAXstation 2000 (8);
VAX-11/730 (C); VAX-11/750 (D); VAX-111780/782/785 (E); VAX 8200/8250 (5);
VAX 8300/8350 (7); VAX 8500/8530 (9); VAX 8550 (2); VAX 8600/8650 (K);
VAX 8700 (2); VAX 8800 (M)
#Supported media: 3, 5, G, M, Y
1
For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.
2

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX-11/730.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or
VAX 8600/8650.
4
For non-U.S. service agreements, consult a local Digital sales representative.

DECnet/SNA VMS Distributed
Host Command Facility (DHCF)

The DECnet/SNA VMS Distributed Host Command Facility (DHCF) access
routine allows IBM 3270-class displays connected to an IBM host running
the HCF (Host Command Facility) program product in an SNA network to
access VAX/ VMS systems. The IBM system gains access to VAX/VMS systems through a DECnet/SNA Gateway product. This allows the IBM network manager to control both the IBM and Digital networks from an IBM
display terminal. It allows IBM users to access Digital computers and
perform VAX functions such as executing VMS commands, reading VAX
mail , editing files , and monitoring and controlling VMS processors.
DHCF is available for use with the DECnet/SNA Gateway products only.

4.52

Digital/IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA VMS DHCF Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single- use license 1

Q*043-UZ

Q*043-QZ

VAXcluster license

Initial license, primary and cluster 3

Q*043-1P

Periodic payment, primary 3

Q*043-JP

Periodic payment, cluster 3

Q*043·JZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

Q*043-H#

Software revision right-to-copy

Q*043-HZ

Documentation only

QL043.GZ

Installation service

Q*043-I#

U.S. Software Services 4

DECsupport service

Q*043·9#

Basic service

Q*043-8#

Self-maintenance service

Q*043-3#

*Supported processors (*):MicroVAX II (Z); VAXstation II (4); MicroVAX 2000 (3);
VAXstation 2000 (8); MicroVAX 3500/3600 (0); VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (1);
VAXstation 3200/3500 (l); VAX-11/730 (C); VAX-11/750 (D); VAX-11/780/782/785 (El;
VAX 8200/8250 (5); VAX 8300/8350 (7); VAX 8500/8530 (9); VAX 8550 (2);
VAX 8600/8650 (K); VAX 8700 (2); VAX 8800 (M)
#Supported media: 3, 5, G, M, Y
1
For software licensing purposes, a VAX-111782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.
2
Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX-11/730.
3
Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or
VAX 8600/8650.
4
For non-U.S. service agreements, consult a local Digital sales representative.

DECnet/SNA VMS Printer
Emulator (PrE)

The DECnet/SNA VMS Printer Emulator (PrE) access routine allows suitably configured VAX or MicroVAX systems to receive printable data from
IBM host-based applications. These applications were original ly developed
to produce output for an IBM 3287 printer in system mode that is connected to an IBM 3274 cluster controller. Using PrE, either an IBM or
Digital terminal user (in 3270 terminal emulation mode) can have a document printed at a Digital printer attached to a local VAX or MicroVAX
system .
PrE is available for use with both VMS/SNA and the DECnet/SNA Gateway
products. • Refer to Software 26.70 for further information.

4.53

Digital/IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA VMS PrE Order Codes
Order Code

Option
Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1

QL-044A*-AA

Cluster member 2

QL-044A*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster

QL-044A*-CA

Monthly rental, single-use 3

QL-044A*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster 3

QL-044A*-DB

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-044A*-HZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

QA-044AA-H#

Documentation only

QA-044AA-GZ
QT-044A*-l#

Installation service
U.S. Software Services

DECsupport service

QT-044A*-9#

Basic service

QT-044A*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-044A*-3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX I/II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P),
MicroVAX 3500/3600 (B), VAXstation II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R),
VAXstation 3200/3500 (C), VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX-111730 (M),
VAX-11/750 (L), VAX-11/780/782/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4),
VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/8250 (J), VAX 8300/8350 (H) , VAX 8500/8530 (G),
VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D), VAX 8810 (E),
VAX 8820 (D), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)
#Supported media(#): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), RX50 (3), TK50 (5), TU58 (G) ·
1

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX-111730.

3 Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or

DECnet/SNA VMS Application
Programming Interface (API)

VAX 8600/8650.
For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

The DECnet/SNA VMS Application Programming Interface (API) supports
many different types of sessions between VMS or Micro VMS applications
and applications running in an IBM host through its support of Logical
Unit Type 0 (LUO) sessions. This product can implement the path control,
transmission control, and the data flow control layers of SNA for the VMS
user. The API also provides extensive parameter checking, state machine
management, and other high level services.
The DECnet/SNA VMS Application Programming Interface can be used in
either basic or extended mode. Two sets of subroutines are provided with
the product : the set for the basic mode supports VMS or MicroVMS application programs written with the Vl.x product; the set for the extended
mode provides users with an easier-to-use interface than earlier versions of
the product.
API is available for use with both VMS/SNA and the DECnet/SNA Gateway
products.

4.54

Digital/IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA VMS Application Programming Interface Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use or first license for VAXcluster

QL-455A*-AA

Cluster member

QL-455A*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster

QL-455A*-CA

Monthly rental, single-use

QL-455A*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster

QL-455A*-DB

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-455A*-HZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

QA-455AA-H#

Documentation only

QA-455AA-GZ

Installation service
U.S. Software Services

QT-455A*-I#
2

DECsupport service

QT-455A*-9#

Basic service

QT-455A*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-455A*-3#

*Supported processors (*): MicroVAX I/II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P),
MicroVAX 3500/3600 (B), VAXstation II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R),
VAXstation 3200/3500 (C), VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX-11/725/730 (M),
VAX-11/750 (L), VAX-11/780/782/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4),
VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/8250 (J), VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 8500/8530 (G),
VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D), VAX 8810 (E),
VAX 8820 (D), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)
#Supported media(#): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), RXOl (Y), RX50 (3), TK50 (5), TU58
(G)
1

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.
2
For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

4.55

Digital/IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA VMS Advanced
Program-to-Program
Communication/LU6.2
Programming Interface (APPC)

The DECnet/SNA VMS Advanced Program-to-Program Communication/
LU6 .2 Programming Interface (APPC) allows program-to-program communications between transaction programs on an IBM host and those on a
suitably configured VAX or MicroVAX system. The APPC product is a set of
subroutines called by VMS programs acting as Logical Unit 6.2 (LU6.2)
transaction application programs. Any of the VMS programming languages
conforming to the VMS Calling Standard can be used to write VMS or
MicroVMS programs that communicate with IBM applications running
under IBM 's CICS transaction subsystem. APPC implements both the basic
and mapped conversation verb set of LU6.2 , using additional parameters to
implement the mapped verbs .
APPC is available for use with both VMS/ SNA and the DECnet/SNA Gateway products. A Refer to Software Product Description 26.88 for further
information .
DECnet/SNA VMS APPC/LU6.1 Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1

QL-022A*-AA

Cluster member 2

QL-022A*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster3

QL-022A*-CA

Monthly rental, single-use 3

QL-022A*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster 3

QL-022A*-DB

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-022A*-HZ

Materials and Inst.allation

Distribution and documentation

QA-022AA-H#

Documentation only

QA-022AA-GZ

Installation service
U.S. Software Services

QT-022A*-I#
4

DECsupport service

QT-022A*-9#

Basic service

QT-022A*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-022A*-3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX I/II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P),
MicroVAX 3500/3600 (B), VAXstation II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R),
VAXstation 3200/3500 (C), VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX-11/725/730 (M),
VAX-11/750 (L), VAX-11/780/782/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4),
VAX 6240 (D), VAX 820018250 (]), VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 8500/8530 (G),
VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D), VAX 8810 (E),
VAX 8820 (D), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)
#Supported media (#): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), RXOl (Y), RX33 (7), RX50 (3), TK50
(5), TU58 (G)
1

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU .

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX-11/730.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or
VAX 8600/8650.

For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

4.56

Digital/IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA FLASH/IMS
Programming Interface (FPI)

The DECnet/SNA FLASH/IMS Programming Interface (FPI) is a layered
software package that enables high-level, task-to-task message exchange
between cooperating VMS and IMS applications.
FPI facilitates creation of distributed applications where one component of
the application runs on an IBM IMS system and another component runs on
a VMS system . It is suitable for developing high-performance, realtime , and
inquiry-response applications.
Layered on the DECnet/SNA VMS Application Programming Interface
(API) software, the FPI software exists on the VMS system as a shareable
subroutine library.

Features
• Provides mechanisms for applications to perform session level recovery in
the event of communications failure, ensuring data integrity across sessions
and prevents loss or duplication of messages.
• Supports asynchronous and synchronous calls as well as inbound/outbound
session activation and multiple SNA sessions per user process.
• Has high-level callable interface conforms to VMS calling standard.
• Implements SLU-Type P protocol.
• Performs default translation between ASCII and EBCDIC.
• Allows user-definable translation tables .

Availability
This product is available in the United States only.
Prerequisite Hardware
•Any valid VAX or MicroVAX system configuration.
• Access between the cooperating Digital and IBM applications is via a
DECnet/SNA Gateway or VMS/ SNA software.

Prerequisite Software
·VMS or MicroVMS Operating System and DECnet/SNA VMS Application
Programming Interface. & Refer to Software Product Description 26.86.
• For IBM software, any valid IBM system which supports Digital's
DECnet/ SNA VMS Application Programming Interface. 4. Refer to
Software Product Description 26.86.

Ordering Information
For ordering information contact the local Digital sales office.
FLASH/IMS Programming Interface Order Codes
Option

Order Code

FLASH/IMS Programming Interface includes single-use license,
VAXcluster license, distribution and documentation,
installation, orientation service, and support service.

QSTAM-SZ

4.57

Digital/IBM Communications Software

DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Data
Stream Programming Interface
(3270 DS )

The DECnet/ SNA VMS 3270 Data Stream Programming Interface (3270
DS ) allows users to develop programs that use Logical Unit Type 2 (LU2 )
sessions to communicate with IBM application programs . This product can
be used in either of two modes -Data Stream Mode or Field Mode. Data
Stream Mode programs send and receive uninterpreted 3270 data streams,
as defined by IBM. The VMS program interprets the incoming 3270 data
stre am and builds the data stream that returns to IBM applications. Field
Mode programs interpret the incoming 3270 data stream to build a screen
image, and produce the 3270 data screen to return to the IBM application
from the updated image provided by the VMS application .
3270 DS is available for use with VMS/ SNA and the DECnet/SNA
G ateways. A Refer to Software Product Description 26.87 for further
information .
DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 DS Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU .)

Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1
Cluster member

QL-363A*-AA
QL-363A*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster 3

QL-363A*-CA

Monthly rental , single-use3

QL-363A*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster3

QL-363A*-DB

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-363A*-HZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

QA-363AA-H#

Documentation only

QA-363AA-GZ

Installation service

QT-363A*-I#

U.S. Software Services 4

DECsupport service

QT-363A*-9#

Basic service

QT-363A*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-363A*-3#

*Supported processors(*) : MicroVAX I/II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P),
MicroVAX 3500/3600 (B) , VAXstation II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R),
VAXstation 3200/3500 (C) , VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX-11/725/730 (M),
VAX-11/750 (L), VAX -11/780/782/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4),
VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/8250 (]), VAX 8300/8350 (H) , VAX 8500/8530 (G),
VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D), VAX 8810 (E),
VAX 8820 (D), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)
#Supported media : magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), RXOl (Y), RX50 (3), TK50 (5)
1

2
3

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX-11/725/730.
Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or
VAX 8600/8650.
For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

4.58

Digital/IBM Communications Software

VAX/IBM Data Access (VIDA)

VAX/IBM Data Access (VIDA) is VMS-layered software that allows integration of data from IBM mainframe databases with VAX databases. VIDA
conforms to a read-only subset of the Digital Standard Relational Interface
(DSRI) architecture. VIDA users can access IBM data through products
such as Datatrieve, the Rdb/VMS utilities and embedded Data Manipulation Language (DML ), and other layered products which acces~ data
through DSRI.
VIDA uses Digital's VMS/ SNA Gateway products to communicate with
software from Cullinet Software, Inc., running on the IBM mainframe. The
Cullinet software accesses the data from the IBM mainframe database, and
sends it across an VMS/SNA Gateway to the VAX user's application soft ware. The accessed data can also be stored in a VAX database or
file. A. Refer to Software Product Description (SPD) 27.25 for detailed
information about VIDA.

Required Hardware
Digital hardware: Any valid VAX or MicroVAX system configuration and
802.3/Ethernet-based VMS/ SNA Gateway. A. Refer to Software Product
Description (SPD) 27.25 for individual system requirements.
IBM hardware: Any valid IBM system which supports the required Cullinet
Software and Digital's DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Data Stream Programming
Interface. A. Refer to SPD 26.87.

Prerequisite Software
Digital software: VMS or MicroVMS Operating Systems and DECnet/SNA
VMS 3270 Data Stream Programming Interface Vl.1 or later.
IBM software : Any valid IBM system which supports the required Cullinet
software and Digital's DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Data Stream Programming
Interface. A. Refer to SPD 26.87.
Cullinet software: IDMS-DC/ UCF, ICMS Version 10.0 and IDMS/ R Version
10.0 with Information Database (IDB) .

4.59

Digital/IBM Communications Software

VIDA Order Codes
Order Code

Option
Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1

QL-B12A*-AA

Cluster member 2

QL-B12A*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster

QL-B12A*-CA

Monthly rental, single-use 3

QL·B12A*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster 3

QL-B12A*-DB

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-B12A*-HZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

QA-Bl2AA-H#

Documentation only

QA-B12AA-GZ
QT-B12A*-I#

Installation service
U.S. Software Services

DECsupport service

QT-B12A*-9#

Basic service

QT-B12A*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-B12A*-3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P ),
MicroVAX 3500/3600 (B), VAXstation II (Q ), VAXstation 2000 (R),
VAXstation 3200/3500 (C), VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX-111730 (M),
VAX-11/750 (L), VAX-11/780/782/785 (K ), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4),
VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/8250 (J), VAX 8300/8350 (H ), VAX 8500/8530 (G ),
VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D ), VAX 8810 (E ),
VAX 8820 (D ), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)
#Supported media (# ): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), RX33 (7), TK50 (5)
1

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX-11/725/730.
Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or
VAX 860018650.
4
For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

Binary Synchronous
Communications Protocol
Emulators

The communications used in this group of products is a subset of IBM's
Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC) protocol. Access to an IBM
host system can be either via batch or interactive methods. Horizontal
format control records can be received and processed . A subset of vertical
format control escape sequences is supported, specifically single, double ,
and triple space, form feed , and space suppress. In most cases, any blockaddressable storage device supported by the Digital system can be used as a
source of transmission files with fixed length (80-character card image),
variable length transmitted as either EBCDIC (automatically translated from
ASCII) , or binary data (no translation ). BSC control characters are automatically added to the data before transmission and stripped upon reception .
&

Refer to Software Product Description 25.07 for more information.

4.60

Digital/IBM Communications Software

VAX 2780/3 780 Protocol Emulator

The VAX 2780/ 3 780 Protocol Emulator supports the synchronous line
protocol used by an IBM 2780 or 3 780 Remote Batch Terminal. The emulator provides the VMS user with a mechanism for transferring data between
the VMS operation system and another system equipped to handle 2780 or
3 780 communications protocols .
The following IBM remote batch terminal features are supported:
• 2780 Extended and Multiple Record Option
• Variable Horizontal Forms Control
• BSC Transparency
• 3 780 Space Compression
The VAX 2780/ 3 780 Protocol Emulator can run up to four physica l lines
concurrently, each with a different set of attributes. For example, some
lines may connect to 2780 terminals , others to 3 780 terminals, at speeds up
to 9.6 Kb /s per line (4.8 Kb/s for MicroVAX II).

Features
•Can be invoked interactively or by a VMS command procedure.
• Command set designed to facilitate sharing a communication line among
several users to reduce network costs.
• With the appropriate modem options, the emulator can automatically
answer incoming calls .
• Using a combination of command procedures , the emulator can operate
unattended and is capable of
- detecting an incoming call.
- establishing the connection.
- transmitting and receiving files.
- recovering from transmission failures.

Prerequisite Hardware
One of the following :
• A MicroVAX or VAXstation system with DPVll communications
interface. .6 Refer to the order code table for a list of supported processors.
·A VAX-11/700 system (except VAX-11 / 725 with a DUPll or DMF32 communications interface ; or a VAX-11/725 with a DMF32 communications
interface. The VAX-11 / 730 requires an R80/RL02 configuration.
·A VAX 8000 series system with a DUPll , DMF32 , or DMB32 communications interface. A Refer to the order code table for a list of supported
processors.

4.61

Digital/IBM Communications Software

Optional Hardware
•For MicroVAX or VAXstation, up to two additional DPVll communications
interfaces
•For VAX-11/780 , VAX-11/782 , VAX-11/785, VAX 8600, or VAX 8650 , up to
three additional DUPll or DMF32 communications interfaces
·For VAX-11/750 , one additional DUPll or DMF32 communications interface
•For VAX 8200 or VAX 8300, one additional DMF32 or DMB32 communications interface
• For VAX 8530, VAX 8550 , VAX 8700, or VAX 8800, up to three additional
DUPll , DMF32, or DMB32 communications interfaces

Prerequisite Software
• For MicroVAX and VAXstation systems, MicroVMS with Extended Base
component and Program Development component
• For VAX systems, VMS and, if using the DMB32 , the DMB32 Synchronous
Device Driver
VAX 178013780 Protocol Emulator Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU .

Single-use license 1

Q*111 -UZ

VAXcluster license 2

Q*111-QZ

Initial license, primary & cluster 3

Q*lll-lP

Periodic payment, primary3

Q*111-JP

Periodic payment, cluster3

Q*111 -JZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

Q*lll -H#

Software revision right-to -copy

Q*111 -HZ

Documentation only

QLlll -GZ

Installation service

Q*lll -I#

U.S. Software Services•

DECsupport service

Q*111 -9#

Basic service

Q*lll -8#

Self-maintenance service

Q*111 -3#

*Supported processors(*) : MicroVAX I (N); MicroVAX II (Z); VAXstation II (4);
MicroVAX 3500/3600 (O); VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (1); VAXstation 3200/3500 (1);
VAX-11/725/730 (C); VAX-11/750 (D); VAX -11/780/782/785 (E); VAX 8200/8250 (5);
VAX 8300/8350 (7); VAX 8530 (9); VAX 8550 (2); VAX 8600/8650 (K); VAX 8700 (2);
VAX 8800 (M)
#Supported media: 3, 5, G , M, Y
1

For software licensing purposes, a VAX -11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX -11/730.
Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or
VAX 8600/8650 .

For non-U.S. service agreements, consult a local Digital sales representative.

4.62

Digital/IBM Communications Software

VAX 3271 Protocol Emulator

VAX 3271 Protocol Emulator enables VTlOO users (or users with Digital
terminals or personal computers that emulate the VTlOO) on a VMS system
to communicate interactively with application programs running on an IBM
System 3 70 class host. The 3271 Protocol Emulator can run with IMS/ VS ,
CICS/VS, or TSO, and allows users to implement applications performing
remote, online access to IBM databases for data entry, retrieval and update .
This capability is an especially efficient migration tool in the transition
phase for users who are implementing distributed processing by moving
applications from centralized mainframes to VAX distributed processors.
The application program interface provides a base for distributed applications where one component of the application runs on an IBM system and
the other on a VAX. This type of application is useful in situations such as
on-line access and update of a mainframe database in response to an event
in the VAX. .A. Refer to Software Product Description 25.21 for detailed
information.

Features
• Manages the modems and line protocols and provides an easy-to-use interface.
• The application program support interface provides on-line access to a
mainframe database.
• Executes the WRITE, GENERAL POLL, and SPECIFIC POLL command
sequences.
• Allows the system manager to control and monitor the activity of the emulator.
• The 3270 Terminal Emulation utility causes a screen display transmitted
from the IBM system to be displayed on the Digital terminal in a fashion
similar to the display on a 3270, and maps the Digital terminal keyboard to
simulate the 3270 keyboard.

Prerequisite Hardware
One of the following:
•A MicroVAX or VAXstation system with DPVll communications
interface. .A. Refer to the order code table for a list of supported processors.
· A VAX-11/700 system (except VAX-11/725 ) with a DUP11 or DMF32 .communications interface, or a VAX-11/725 with a DMF32 communications
interface . The VAX-11/7 30 requires an R80/RL02 configuration.
·A VAX 8000 series system with a DUPll or DMF32 communications
interface . .A. Refer to the order code table for a list of supported processors.

4.63

Digital/IBM Communications Software

Optional Hardware
• For MicroVAX or VAXstation, up to two additional DPVll communications
interfaces
•For VAX-11/780, VAX-11/782, VAX-11/785, VAX 8600, or VAX 8650, up to
three additional DUPll or DMF32 communications interfaces
• For VAX-11/750, one additional DUPll or DMF32 communications interface
• For VAX 82x x or VAX 83xx, one additional DMF32 communications interface
• For VAX 8530, VAX 8550, VAX 87xx, or VAX 88xx , up to three additional
DUPll or DMF32 communications interfaces

Prerequisite Software
• For MicroVAX I, MicroVAX II, and VAXstation II systems, MicroVMS with
Extended Base component and Program Development component
• For VAX systems, VMS operating system

4.64

Digital/IBM Communications Software

VAX )271 Protocol Emulator Order Codes
Order Code

Option
Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.

Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1

QL-112A*-AA

Cluster member 2

QL-11 2A*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster3
Monthly rental, single-use
Monthly rental, cluster

Sofrware revision right -to-copy

QL-112A*-CA
QL-112A*-DA
QL-112A*-DB
QL-112A*-HZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

QA-112AA-H#

Documentation only

QA-112AA-GZ
QT-112A *-I#

Installation service
U.S. Software Services

DECsupport service

QT-112A*-9#

Basic service

QT-112A*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-112A*-3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P), MicroVAX 3500/3600
(B), VAX -11/725/730 (M), VAX-111750 (L), VAX-111780/782/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2) ,
VAX 8200/8250 (]), VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 8500/8530 (G), VAX 8550 (E),
VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D ), VAX 8810 (E), VAX 8840/8974 (V),
VAX 8978 (5)
#Supported media(#): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), RXOl (Y), RX50 (3), TU58 (G)
1

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-111782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.
2
Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX-11/725/730.
3 Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or

VAX 8600/8650.
4 For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

RSX-11 2780/3780 Emulator

The RSX-11 2780/3 780 software emulates the communications protocol of
an IBM 2780 or 3 780 data communications terminal while running as a user
task on a suitably configured RSX-11M or RSX-11M-PLUS system . This
product is not designed to run on RSX-11S systems.
The RSX-11 2780/3 780 Emulator appears as an IBM 2780 or 3 780 data
transmission terminal on point-to-point switched or nonswitched communications line operating with standard 2780/3 780 protocol.
This product can transmit and receive data and job control files with an
IBM System/3 70 class host system running batch subsystems such as
POWER, HASP, RES, JES2 , or JES3. RSX-11 2780/3780 software will transmit files from or store received files on any file-structured device accessible
through the RSX-11M or RSX-11M-PLUS File Control Services (FCS)
except DECtape or TU58 .
On a mapped system the RSX-11 2780/3 780 Emulator also supports a
spooling feature that allows users to queue one or more files for subsequent transmission or printing.

4.65

Digital/IBM Communications Software

Users running the RSX-11 2780/3 780 Emulator on an unmapped system are
limited to one-line support, 2780 emulation, and attended mode.
A Refer to Software Product Description 10.01 for further information.

Features
• Transmission from disk storage devices.

• Capable of queuing transmission request in unattended operation.
• Maximum transmit and receive block size of 400 characters in 2780 mode,
512 characters in 3780 mode.
• Maximum transmit and receive record size of 144 characters.
• Handles up to seven records per block in 2780 mode and up to 256
records per block in 3 780 mode.
• Supports vertical and horizontal print format control.
• Supports binary or EBCDIC transmission.
• Selectable EBCDIC-to-ASCII conversion on Receive.
• Space Compression/Expansion in 3 780 mode.
• Concurrent operation with application programs.
• Automatic retry of unattended mode transmissions.
• Error log recording and loopback facilities.
• Supports up to four lines concurrently.
• Supports line speeds up to 9,600 bits per second half duplex, although
CPU utilization on small RSX- llM systems will make support of more than
two lines running at 9,600 bits per second impractical.
Prerequisite Hardware
RSX-UM or RSX-UM-PLUS system configuration with

•At least an additional 16 Kwords of memory available for this product (10
Kwords for unmapped systems). Requirements vary with option and configuration; see product documentation for exact requirements.
·One DUll, DUPll, DUVll, or DPVll synchronous line interface per line.
Prerequisite Software
One of the following operating systems:

• RSX- llM operating system
• RSX- UM-PLUS operating system

4.66

Digital/IBM Communications Software

RSX-11 278013780 Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use license
Materials and Installation

QJD82 -UZ

Distribution and documentation

QJD82 -HD
QJD82-HH
QJD82 -HM
QJD82 -HQ
QJD82 -HT
QJD82-HV

Software revision right-to-copy

QJD82 -HZ

Sources

Micro/RSX 2780/3 780 Emulator

Source listings and source distribution

QJD82-ED
QJD82 -EM

Source license and source listings

QJD82 -FR

Source distribution

QJD82-ND
QJD82 -NM

The Micro/RSX 2780/3 780 Emulator is a layered software product that
extends the ability to communicate with IBM systems using Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC) protocols in both a batch and interactive
manner.
Micro/ RSX 2780/ 3 780 emulates the communications protocol of an IBM
2780 or 3 780 remote batch terminal. Data may be transferred between the
Micro/RSX system and the IBM system that supports the IBM 2780 or 3 780
protocol.
l. Refer to Software Product Description 18.32 for further information.

Prerequisite Hardware
• Any system with 512 Kbytes of memory
• One DPVll synchronous communications device (Note : Maximum line
speed is between 2400 and 4800 b/s .)

Prerequisite Software
Micro/ RSX V3 .0
Follow the guidelines described in the Software Product Description
regarding prerequisite support and customer responsibility for installing
this product.
Micro/RSX 2780/J 780 Emulator Order Code
Option

Order Code

Single-use license with limited warranty, documentation,
binaries on RX50 . (A license is required for each CPU.)

QYD82 -UZ

4.67

Digital/IBM Communications Software

RSX-11/3271 Protocol Emulator

RSX-11/3271 Protocol Emulator (PE) enables VTlOO or VT200 users on an
RSX- llM or RSX-11M-PLUS system to communicate interactively with
application programs running on an IBM System 3 70 class host. The 3271
PE can run with IMS/ VS, CICS/VS, or TSO. The protocol emulator makes it
possible to implement applications performing remote, online access to IBM
databases for data entry, retrieval and update .
This capability is an especially efficient migration tool in the transition
phase for users who are implementing distributed processing by moving
applications from centralized mainframes to PDP- U distributed processors.
The RSX-1113271 PE allows users to access the applications that remain on
mainframes through their local PDP-11 systems.
The application program interface provides a base for distributed applications where one component of the application runs an IBM system and the
other a PDP-11. This type of application is useful in situations such as
online access and update of a mainframe database in response to an event
in the PDP-11, or where it is inappropriate to present a 3270-style formatted screen to a user who is accustomed to RSX- U style screens.
A Refer to Software Product Description 10.88 for further information.

Prerequisite Hardware
RSX- UM or RSX- UM-PLUS system configuration with

·Synchronous interface: either a DVU, a DUP11, or a DUVll.
• Additional memory available for the RSX-11/3271 Protocol Emulator
Application Interface :
- 16 Kbytes for the first or only 3270 controller emulated by the application
interface (i .e., for the first or only synchronous line).
- 2 Kbytes for each synchronous line after the first.
- 1.2 Kbytes of pool for the protocol emulator and approximately 60 bytes
of pool for each application task supported.
• Installation requires approximately 4,800 blocks of disk space; approximately 2,800 are required for generation .
Prerequisite Software
RSX-llM or an RSX-UM-PLUS operating system
Features
• Manages the modems and line protocols and provides an easy-to-use interface so that the application programmer does not have to be knowledgeable
about communications.

• The application program support interface provides online access to a
mainframe database.
• Executes the WRITE, GENERAL POLL, and SPECIFIC POLL command
sequences.
• Allows the system manager to control and monitor the activity of the emulator.
• The 3270 Terminal Emulation utility causes a screen display transmitted
from the IBM system to be displayed on the VTlOO in a fashion similar to
the display on a 3270, and maps the VTlOO keyboard to simulate the 3270
keyboard .

4.68

Digital/IBM Communications Software

• The hardware is microprocessor driven providing Direct Memory Access
(DMA ) for the DUPll synchronous line adapter on PDP-11 UNIBUS configurations. The DMA ability reduces the CPU overhead associated with the
transmission and reception of messages compared to a character interrupt
method which interrupts the CPU for each character as it is received .
The terminal emulator portion of the RSX-11/ 3271 Protocol Emulator
supports the following features of the 3277 Model 2 terminal:
• 1,920-character screen
• Upper/lowercase, numeric , and special symbol characters
• Field attribute characters, protected and unprotected fields
·Tab stop
• Overstrike and insert mode
• Reverse video and intensified display (both requiring the VTlOO Advanced
Video Option ), display or nondisplay characters
RSX-1113271 Protocol Emulator Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each

RSX-UM

RSX-UM-PLUS

QJD76 -UZ

QJD84-UZ

Distribution and documentation

QJD76-HD
QJD76-HH
QJD76-HM
QJD76-HQ
QJD76-HT
QJD76-HV

QJD84-HD
QJD84-HH
QJD84 -HM
QJD84-HV

Software revision right-to-copy

QJD76-HZ

QJD84-HZ

Documentation only

QJD76-GZ

QJD84-GZ

CPU.)

Single-use license
Materials

Sources

Source license and sources

QJD76-ED

QJD84-ED

Distribution
Source license and source listings

QJD76 -EM

QJD84-EM

QJD76 -FR

QJD84-FR

Source distribution

QJD76 -ND
QJD76-NM

QJD84-ND
QJD84-NM

4.69

Digital/IBM Communications Software

Micro/RSX 3271 Protocol
Emulator

The Micro/RSX 3271 PE is a layered software product that enables supported Digital terminals and application programs to interact with IBM
system application programs and system services that use the Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC) line discipline . Digital terminal users
access the 3270 Terminal Emulator which is part of the Micro/RSX 3271
PE distribution; application programmers use an application program
interface (API ) provided as part of the Micro/RSX 3271 PE product.
• Refer to Software Product Description 18.33 for further information.
Prerequisite Hardware
·Any system with 512 Kbytes of memory

• One DPVll synchronous communications device.
Note: Maximum line speed supported is between 2400 and 4800 bis.
Prerequisite Software
Micro/RSX V3 .0

Follow the guidelines described in the Software Product Description
regarding prerequisite support and the customer's responsibility for installation of this product.
Micro/RSX 3271 Protocol Emulator Order Code

RSX-llM/RSX-llM-PLUS RJE/
HASP Emulator

Option

Order Code

Single-use license with limited warranty, documentation,
binaries on RX50. (A license is required for each CPU.)

QYD84-UZ

The RSX-llM/ RSX -llM-PLUS RJE/ HASP Emulator is a software package
that performs the standard functions of an IBM HASP Remote Job Entry
Workstation. It operates as a set of tasks under the RSX-UM-PLUS operating system.
The emulator provides multileaved (pseudosimultaneous, bidirectional)
communication of up to seven input and seven output data streams . The
number of input and output streams accommodated by the emulator is
fixed at assembly time . The operator can assign operating supported
devices to data streams on a per-file or temporarily dedicated basis.
Features
• Data compression of repeated sequential characters including blanks

• Full EBCDIC transparency
• Multileaving
• Printer vertical forms control skip to channel 1 (top of form) is supported
(No other vertical forms control is supported. )

4.70

Digital/IBM Communications Software

Prerequisite Hardware
• PDP-11/44 or PDP-11/70 with at least 128 Kwords of memory configured
to support RSX-llM-PLUS
·A KGll-A communications arithmetic unit
• A tape drive capable of reading the distribution media
•At least 14 Kwords of memory allocated for RSX-llM-PLUS RJE/ HASP
operation with one input and two output streams
• 600 words of memory required for each additional stream with File Control Services (FCS)
• One of the following synchronous communications line controllers : DPll ,
DU 11, or DUP 11 for line speeds up to 4,800 bits per second
• One of the following Bell System modems or a modem that is exactly
equivalent:
- 201A 2.0 Kb/s dialup
- 201B 2.4 Kb/s private line
- 201C 2.4 Kb/s dialup
- 208A 4.8 Kb/s private line
- 208B 4.8 Kb/s dialup
- 209A 9.6 Kb/s private line
- 19.2 Kb/s current Bell
A For host system compatibility, consult Software Product Description

10.48.

Prerequisite Software
RSX-11-PLUS operating system
RSX-llM/RSX-llM-PLUS RJEIHASP Order Codes
Option

Order Code

License Options (A license is required for
each CPU.)

Single-use license only

QJS62 -DZ

Sources, services

QJS62 -XD
QJS62 -XM

Sources, NINS services

QJS62 -YD
QJS62 -YM

Sources, no services, update

QJS63-YD
QJS63-YM

Documentation only

QJS62-GZ

...cu

r'-l

"'0
=

·.:
~

·a

e=
e0

u
>.

:E
....

...t:J

...cu
Q.
...cu0
~

...

~
~

4.71

DigitaUUNIX Communications Software

VMS/ULTRIX Connection

The VMS/ULTRIX Connection, a VMS layered software product, provides a
bridge between VMS servers and ULTRIX clients without modifying the
syntax or semantics of either operating system. The VMS/ULTRIX Connection supports Internet networking protocols and a network file system
(NFS) server on VMS. The protocols are
• Transmission Control Protocol (TCP).
·Internet Protocol (IP).
• User Datagram Protocol (UDP).
• Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).
·Address Resolution Protocol (ARP).
·File Transfer Protocol (FTP).
The VMS/ULTRIX Connection also provides a QIO (Queued Input/
Output) programming interface so VMS users can write applications to
access the lower-level protocols. Users can write networking applications in
any VAX language using the standard ASSIGN, DASSGN, and QIO system
services.
The Network File System (NFS) server provides UNIX-based clients with
transparent access to remote file systems. The NFS server promotes data
sharing between clients by providing a central data storage facility for VMS
and UNIX file systems .
.& Refer to Software Product Description (SPD) 25.A4 for further informa·
ti on.

Features
• Customers can connect VMS and ULTRIX systems with UNIX-based systems from other vendors using industry-standard protocols for communication.

• Users can write network applications that access the Internet Networking
Protocols using standard VMS services.
• UNIX-based clients can access VMS and UNIX-compatible files stored on a
remote VMS-based system or VAXcluster system.
• VMS system managers can manage Internet communications and the FS
server without a detailed knowledge of UNIX networking.
Hardware Requirements
Refer to the order code table for processor support. At least one Ethernet
controller is required. .& Refer to SPD 25.A4 for more information.

Note: The VMS/ULTRIX Connection can share the same Ethernet interface
with other Digital protocols such as DECnet-VAX.
Software Requirements
For the VMS server, VMS V4.7 or later, or MicroVMS V4.7

For UNIX-based clients, any UNIX-based system which supports NFS V2 .0
protocol specifications and the networking protocols specified by the the
Defense Data Network RFCs.

4.72

Digital/UNIX Communications Software

VMS/ULTRIX Connection Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.
Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1
Cluster member

QL-VHRA* -AA
QL-VHRA*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster 3

QL-VHRA* -CA

Monthly rental, single-use 3

QL-VHRA*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster 3

QL-VHRA*-DB

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-VHRA*-HZ

Materials and Installation
Distribution and documentation

QA-VHRAA-H#

Documentation only

QA-VHRAA -GZ

Installation service
U.S. Software Services

QT-VHRA*-I#
4

DECsupport service

QT-VHRA* -9#

Basic service

QT-VHRA*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-VHRA*-3#

*Supported processors(*) : MicroVAX II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P),
MicroVAX 3500/3600 (B), VAXstation II (Q) , VAXstation 2000 (R),
VAXstation 3200/3500 (C), VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX-11/730 (M) ,
VAX-11/750 (L) , VAX-11/780/782/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3) , VAX 6230 (4),
VAX 6240 (D), VAX 820018250 (]),VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 850018530 (G),
VAX 8550 (E) , VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E) , VAX 8800 (D), VAX 8810 (E),
VAX 8820 (D), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V) , VAX 8978 (5)
#Supported media(#): RX33 (7), TK50 (5), TU58 (G), RL02 (H), 1,600 bpi magtape
(M), RXOl (Y)

FUSION TCP/IP

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX-11/725/730.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or
VAX 8600/8650 .

For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

FUSION TCP/ IP , developed by Network Research Corporation and distributed by Digital through the Digital Distributed Software (DDS ) program, is

a communications package that provides full VMS communications services
to other vendors' systems that support the Transmission Control Protocol/
Internet Protocol (TCP/ IP) suite .
.& Refer to Software Product Description 29.81 for further information.

4_73

Digital/UNIX Communications Software

Features
• Supports TCP/IP communications services over any Digital 802.3/Ethernet
communications controllers. The shared version can share an 802.3/
Ethernet communications controller simultaneously with DECnet.
• Provides three standard application-level utility services for VMS users:
- File Transfer: The File Transfer Protocol (FTP) permits the transfer of
both text and binary files between network hosts.
- Electronic Mail: The Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) allows users
to send and receive mail over the network.
- Virtual Terminal: The TELNET protocol allows a user to log into a
remote system and utilize the resources of the remote host.
• Supports the following protocols: IP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, ARP, and TFTP.

Availability
This product is available worldwide.
Prerequisite Hardware
Any valid VAX system with a Digital 802.3/Ethernet communications
controller
Prerequisite Software
VMS, V 4.3 or later
Ordering Information
Special pricing is available for qualified educational institutions.
Option

Order Code

FUSION TCP/IP, includes license, media ,
and documentation

Q*ZDN-C#

FUSION TCP/IP Shared, includes license,
media, and documentation

Q*ZDQ-C#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX I (N); VAXstation I (Q); MicroVAX II (Z);
VAXstation II (4); MicroVAX 2000 (3); VAXstation 2000 (8); MicroVAX 3500/3600 (O);
VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (1); VAXstation 3200/3500 (1); VAX-11/725/730 (CJ;
VAX-11/750 (D); VAX-11/780/782/785 (E); VAX 8200/8250 (5); VAX 8300/8350 (7);
VAX 8530 (9); VAX 8550 (2); VAX 8600/8650 (K); VAX 8700 (2); VAX 8800 (M)
#Supported media: 5, M

WIN/TCP and WIN/TCP-DON

WIN/TCP and WIN/TCP-DDN, developed by the Wollongong Group and
distributed by Digital through the Digital Distributed Software (DDS)
program, allow VMS systems to fully communicate with systems that support the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).

Features
• WIN/TCP supports TCP/IP communications services over any Digital
802.3/Ethernet communications controller. WIN/TCP-DDN supports connection to the various Defense Data Networks, ARPANET, MILNET, or
DISNET through X.25 communications interfaces supplied by Advanced
Computer Communications.
• WIN/TCP is based on the most recent specifications for TCP/IP and is
compatible with BSD 4.3 UNIX.

4.74

Digital/UNIX Communications Software

• Provides three standard application-level utility services for VMS users :
- File Transfer : The File Transfer Protocol (FTP) permits the transfer of
both text and binary files between network hosts
- Electronic Mail: The Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) allows users
to send and receive mail over the network using standard VMS mail
facilities .
- Virtual Terminal: The TELNET protocol allows a user to log into a
remote system and utilize the resources of the remote host .
·WIN/ TCP and WIN/ TCP-DDN support the following protocols: IP, TCP,
UDP, ICMP, EGP, ARP.

Availability
This product is available in North America only.
Prerequisite Hardware
For WIN/ TCP, any valid VAX system with a valid 802.3 / Ethernet communications controller.
For WIN/ TCP-DDN, any valid VAX system with a DDN X.25 interface from
Advanced Computer Communications.

Prerequisite Software
VMS , V4.3 or later
Optional Software
WIN/ TCP-DDN Ethernet option adds support for 802.3 / Ethernet communications to WIN/ TCP-DDN .
WIN/ TCP DDN option adds support for DDN X.25 interfaces to WIN/ TCP.

Ordering Information
Special pricing is available for qualified educational institutions.
Option

Order Code

WIN/TCP, includes license, media, and
documentation

A*ZNJ-C#

WIN/TCP-DDN option, includes license,
media, and documentation

Q*ZNM-C#

WIN/TCP-DON , includes license, media,
and documentation

Q*ZNH-C#

WIN/TCP-DDN Ethernet option, includes
license, media, and documentation

Q*ZNL-C#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (Z); VAXstation II (4); MicroVAX 2000 (3) ;
VAXstation 2000 (8); MicroVAX 3500/3600 (O); VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (1);
VAXstation 3200/3500 (1); VAX-111730 (C); VAX-11/750 (D ); VAX-11/780/782/785 (E);
VAX 8200/8250 (5); VAX 8300/8350 (7); VAX 8530 (9); VAX 8550 (2); VAX 8600/8650
(K); VAX 8700 (2); VAX 8800 {M)
#Supported media: 5, M

4.75

Digital/UNIX Communications Software

TCP/IP

TCP/IP is a software communications product developed by the Wollongong
Group and available through Digital's Distributed Software (DDS) program. TCP/ IP software under VMS or MicroVMS contains the network
protocols required in exchanging messages between various systems connected to a TCP/ IP network. The package supports various hardware interfaces to the following networks : Arpanet , 802.3/Ethernet, MILNET,
Defense Data Network (DDN ), Point-to-Point Networks , custom-designed
networks . The DEUNA and DEQNA Ethernet controllers are supported
and can be shared by the TCP/ IP package, DECnet, and LAT (terminal
server protocols) . The DMC/ DMR-11 is also supported . & Refer to Software Product Description 21.34 for further information.

DECnet-ULTRIX as an Alternative Solution
TCP/ IP is a suitable solution for a single VMS node in a large UNIX environment. However, DECnet-ULTRIX communicates between the VMS and
ULTRIX environments using DECnet instead of the TCP/ IP protocols .
DECnet-ULTRIX bridges both environments by supporting the co-existence
of the DECnet and TCP/ IP protocols . Coexistence means that DECnet and
TCP/ IP can run together simultaneously (DECnet-ULTRIX systems use
DECnet to communicate with other Phase III/ IV systems in DECnet networks and TCP/IP is used to communicate with non-Digital systems in
Internet networks . DECnet and TCP/ IP can also share the same system
resources such as the DEUNA and DEQNA Ethernet interfaces, and programs can be written in such a way that either of the lower-level protocols ,
NSP or TCP, can be used. In general, existing programs running over
TCP/ IP can be easily modified to run with DECnet. DECnet programs can
run over TCP/ IP, but only if they do not make use of operations that are
specific to DECnet. This feature of co-existence allows a DECnet-ULTRIX
system to act as a gateway between DECnet networks and Internet
networks. & Refer to "DECnet Communications Software" in this section
for a description of DECnet-ULTRIX.

4.76

Digital/UNIX Communications So&ware

Features
The following application-level protocols are included in the TCP/ IP package :
• SMTP-Simple Mail Transfer Protocol, which allows users to send and
receive electronic mail
• FTP-File Transfer Protocol, which allows a user to transfer files between
hosts
• TELNET -A protocol which allows a user to log on to a remote system
over the network (virtual terminal)
· UDP-User Datagram Protocol, which allows an application program to
send messages to other programs via the network (task- to- task communications )
• ICMP - Internet Control Message Protocol, which provides a method of
sending messages concerning unusual network events
A vailability
T his product is currently not available in Europe.
TCP/IP Order Codes
Option

Order Code

TCP/IP (commercial)

QAX74 -CM

TCP/IP (ed ucational install ations)

QAX75 -CM

TCP/IP MicroVMS (commercial)

QAXX 1-C3

TCP/IP MicroVMS (educational)

QAXX2-C3

4.77

Digital/Wang Communications Software

EDE-W Document Exchange

EDE-W Document Exchange is a software application that utilizes the
VAX 2780/3780 Protocol Emulator to give VAX users of ALL-IN-1 or
DECdx/VMS the ability to send documents to a suitably equipped Wang
OIS system. Wang OIS users can transfer documents to VAX system using
Wang's telecommunications software, which includes Wang's equivalent
2780/3 780 protocol emulator. Wang OIS systems can be connected to a
VAX system either by dedicated lines or through dial-up connections.
Wang documents being transferred are first converted from Wang Word
Processing System Code to EBCDIC code by the Wang software and then
transferred to the VAX system. The VAX 2780/3 780 Protocol Emulator
receives the document from the Wang system and EDE-W transforms the
document from the Wang format to DECdx format, then stores the converted documents in the user's DECdx or ALL-IN-1 filing cabinet. For
transfers from the VAX system to the Wang OIS system, the process is
reversed .
Operation of the EDE-W Document Exchange is initiated through an
easy-to-use menu interface, which can be added to the ALL-IN-1 Office
Menu, or, when used with DECdx/VMS, invoked from the DCL system
prompt. The user interface for operating the document transfer functions
are compatible with Digital standard user interface requirements for office
products. Online help capability is included with the product.
A Refer to Software Product Description 26.37 for more inform_ation.

Prerequisite Hardware
Any valid VAX system. .A Refer to the order code table for a list of supported processors.

· UNIBUS VAX systems require a DUPll or a DMF32. (The VAX-11/730
requires an RA80/RL02 configuration.)
• Q-bus MicroVAX systems require the DPVll.
• VAXBI systems require a DMB32 and V.24 adapter cable, or a VAXBIto -UNIBUS adapter with DUP11 or DMF32.
Prerequisite Software
• ALL-IN-1 V2.1 or V2 .2 DECdx Vl.1
•VAX 2780/3780 Protocol Emulator Vl.5 or Vl.6 (DMB32 requires Vl.6)

· VMS or MicroVMS, V4.4 to V4.6

4.78

Digital/Wang Communications Software

EDE-W Document Exchange Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use license 1

Q*760-UZ, -UA,-U3

VAXcluster license 2

Q*760-QZ

Initial license, primary & cluster

Q*760-IP, -IA, -13

Periodic payment, primary3

Q*760-JP, -JA,-J3

Periodic payment, cluster 3

Q*760-JZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

Q*760-H#

Software revision right -to-copy

Q*760-HZ

Documentation only

QL760-GZ

Installation service
U.S. Software Services

Q*760-I#
4

DECsupport service

Q*760-9#

Basic service

Q*760-8#

Self-maintenance service

Q*760-3#

*Supported processors(*) : MicroVAX II (Z); VAXstation II (4); VAX -11/730 (C);
VAX -11/750 (D); VAX-11/780/782/785 (E); VAX 8200/8250 (5); VAX 8300/8350 (7);
VAX 8530 (9); VAX 8550 (2); VAX 8600/8650 (K); VAX 8700 (2); VAX 8800 (M);
VAX 8974/8978 (2)
#Supported media : 3, 5, G, M, Y
1
License for VAX 8974 is -UA; for VAX 8978 is -U3. For software licensing purposes, a
VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a single CPU.
2
Not available on MicroVAX, VAXstation, or VAX -11/730.
3

Initial and periodic licenses for VAX 8974 are -IA and -JA ; for VAX 8978 are -13 and
-J3. Not available on MicroVAX, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or VAX 8600/8650 .

For non-U.S. service agreements, consult a local Digital sales representative.

4.79

Packetnet Communications Software

Overview

The fundamental technology used in data networks is called packet switching. With it, user data and the accompanying control information needed to
ensure delivery are formed in discrete entities called packets. The network
dynamically interweaves the packets of many users over shared transmission facilities and routes the packets to their destinations.
Packet-switched data networks (PSDNs) can be public or private. A public
PSDN is the computer's analogy to the telephone : Once connected to the
PSDN, calls can connect to any other number on that network, or to any
number on another public PSDN that is cross-connected to it (for example,
for international data communication). Calls can be normally or reversecharged, and the customer pays a tariff related to time-of-day, number
called , and duration and amount of data . The tariff structures vary considerably between public PSDNs, but the data charges are generally more
significant than either time or distance factors .
Private PSDNs are owned and operated by one company or group of companies, for inter- rather than intra-company communications. Otherwise,
they offer the same general features as their public counterparts.

Digital's Packetnet System Interface (P.S.I.) products extend the high-level
DECnet functions of Digital's Network Architecture to computer systems
communicating across PSDNs. The currently available products are
· X25router 2000
·VAX P.S.I. and VAX P.S.I. Access
· RSX-11 P.S.l./M
· RSX-11 P.S.l./M-PLUS

These interfaces allow suitably configured Digital systems to connect to
packet-switched data networks that conform to the CCITT Recommendation X.25. (CCITT is the International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee, an advisory committee established under the United
Nations to recommend worldwide standards.) VAX P.S.I. also supports
International Standards 7776 and 8208, which standardize the protocols
described in the CCITT recommendations.
Features

Packet-switching networks offer a number of benefits to a customer looking for low-to-medium data communications rate to a reasonable number of
remote locations, and in particular when the remote locations tend to be
undefined. These benefits can include
•Reduced complexity of wiring-only one physical line can handle multiple
calls simultaneously, to the same or different remote locations.
• The same network can handle computer-to-computer and terminal-tocomputer traffic .
• The tariff is less than leased lines if the data rate to the remote site is
relatively low.
• Because it is an internationally recognized protocol, X.25 can be used as a
common carrier for multiple protocols, avoiding duplication of networks.
• A level of multivendor operation, especially when used to carry Open
System Interconnection (OSI ) protocols above the basic X.25 protocols.
• Simpler network management as a result of reduced proliferation of lines
and protocols.

4.80

Packetnet Communications Software

Applications
Applications where packet-switching communications technology is particularly suitable include
• Dial-in access to or from the general public.
• Any OSI applications such as electronic mail to customers or other third
parties .
A For an introduction to packet switching networks and the user benefits
associated with their use, refer to Introduction to VAX P.S.I. (AA-L067DTE) or Introduction to RSX P.S.I. (AA-M369B-TC) in the product documentation sets.

For connections to private networks other than those conforming to the
ISO 7776/ 8208 standards, Digital requires that its P.S.I. software be specifically configured . Consult the local Digital sales representative for details .

Native, Access and Connector Nodes
Digital's Packetnet products can act in three ways , each giving different
configuration benefits. These ways are referred to as native mode , access
mode, and connector mode.
A native mode configuration is a standalone CPU with direct connection to
one or more PSDNs . It may have other DECnet connections, but the essential point is that all communications to or from any PSDN originate or
terminate in that same CPU . The following figure shows VAX P.S.I. in native
mode .
VAX P.S.I. Native-mode Operation

DSV 11

Local DTE

Remote

DTE

V.AX P.S.I.

NBG·107-01

Access mode allows communications to take place to or from a PSDN that is
not directly connected to that CPU. The PSDN is connected to another
node, called a connector node, and the connector node communicates with
the access node by DECnet (usually, but not necessarily, over an 802.3/
Ethernet local area network). The following figure shows VAX P.S.I. Access
in such a configuration .

4.81

Packetnet Communications Software

VAX P.S.I. Access with Connector Mode of Operation

VAX P.S. I. Access

MicroVAX

Terminator

Standard Ethernet Cable

Remote
DTE

NBG-149-00

The following table indicates the mode of the various Digital Packetnet
products :
Comparison of Modes for Packetnet Products
Native Mode

Access Mode

Connector Mode

X25router 2000

Yes

VAX P.S.I.

Yes

No'

Yes

VAX P.S.I. Access

No'

Yes

No 1

RSX P.S .I.

Yes

VAX P.S.I. and VAX P.s .r. · Access can be installed in the same system to provide com-

bined Native, Connector, and Access facilities .

How to Choose between Host and Gateway X.25 Connections
The following table summarizes the trade -offs and benefits of the two
approaches to X.25 communications in an 802.3/ Ethernet environment:
direct connection between a PSDN and the system that needs to access it ;
and indirect connection using access and connector modes .

4.82

Packetnet Communications Software

Comparison of Direct and Connector Packetnet Connection
Direct Connection

Connector Connection

Cost of connections

One per system

One shared between all
systems on 802.J/Ethernet
LAN

Cost of devices

One set per system; may
be limited in speed due to
cost factors

Shared devices on the
connector node(s); possible
to use fewer, higher-speed
lines

Technology Considerations

Specific to each system
concerned; may need to
change if processor types
change

Specific to the connector
node only; no change
needed if other processors
change

DECnet communication

Requires a DECnet fullfunction license per system

Handled entirely in one
connector node; only
end-node licenses needed
elsewhere

X.25 or X.29

Uses VAX or RSX P.S.I. on
all connected nodes

Uses P.S.I. Access on all
other nodes

communication

No user differences in X.25/X.29 application interfaces/
code; applications are portable between (VAX) P.S.I. and
P. S.I Access nodes
CPU overhead: routing
DECnet (DLM) data traffic

Can be significant on the
directly-connected nodes

Handled entirely in the
connector node

CPU overhead: X.25 taskto-task and X.29 terminal
traffic

Optimal when using direct
memory access (DMA)
devices

Sometimes higher on
access nodes due to
DECnet overhead

The benefits of using the gateway or connector increase when a high portion of the PSDN traffic is DECnet; the benefits of using direct connection
increase when a high proportion of the PSDN traffic is task-to-task X.25 or
X.29 terminal traffic. A combination of direct connections and connector
nodes may sometimes be best.

If an access/connector solution is indicated , the following table shows. the
benefits of choosing between different connector nodes , that is, VAX PS.I.
in multihost mode and the X25router 2000 .

4.83

Packetnet Communications Software

Comparison of Host and X.25 Gateway Connections
VAX P.S.I. Multihost

X25router 2000

Type of solution

Existing VMS system may
be used

Dedicated server on the
802.3/Ethernet

Technology

General-purpose system

Specific hardware

Public PSDNs supported

Many

Number of lines and line
speeds

Not limited, but depends
on system used

Four lines @ 64 Kb/s or
two lines @ 256 Kb/s

DECnet communication

Requires DECnet fullfunction license

Handled entirely in the
Gateway node

Supports Level 1 (local) or
Level 2 (area) routing

DDCMP lines require extra
devices

Supports up to 4 DDCMP
lines

CPU overhead in the access
nodes

No difference between the
two solutions.

CPU over head in the
gateway node

Can be significant,
depending on the VAX
system

Puts the CPU load on the
gateway rather than on a
VAX

Load host

Not required

Must be a VAX/VMS
system

Multivendor Aspects
Because many networks contain non-Digital systems, Digital fully supports
the concept of cooperative computing via the Packetnet family of products .
These products provide extended X.25 capabi lities including communications with non-Digital hosts and asynchronous terminals connected to the
X.25 network. Note that when X.25 is used as the data link protocol
between Digital systems and non-Digital systems, all upper-level software
(such as file transfer protocols) must be written by the user, or purchased
separately (for example, the VOTS product from Digital for OSI
multi vendor communications).

The configuration shown in the following figure enables the following
communications:
·Digital-to-Digital communications using DECnet between the X25router
2000 at New York , the Houston PDP-11 running RSX P.S.I. and DECnetRSX, and the Los Angeles VAX P.S.I. node. DECnet routing on the two
802.3/Ethernet local area networks means that the use of the X.25 PSDN is
transparent to users on other 802.3/Ethernet nodes at New York and Los
Angeles.
• Customers can write applications to communicate between a VAX P.S.I.
Access node on the two local area networks and any Digital or non -Digital
node connected to the PSDN . The same is true for OSI applications , subject
to support of such in all nodes concerned.
• Terminals connected to VAX hosts on the 802.3/Ethernet local area net works, or the RSX P.S.I. node at Houston, can make outgoing calls to log
into any Digital or non-Digital node on the PSDN, or any VAX P.S.I. Access
node on the lo cal area network.

4.84

Packetnet Communications Software

• Remote terminals on the PSDN can use Packet Assemblers/Disassemblers
(PADs) to place calls into any Digital or non-Digital node connected to the
PSDN, including the RSX P.S.I. node at Houston. These calls can access any
VAX P.S.I. Access node on either of the two 802.3 / Ethernet local area
networks . The PADs may be "public" PADs provided as a part of the PSDN
service, accessible through dedicated or dialup telephone connections or,
depending on PSDN policies, a customer-owned "private" PAD such as the
DFX product (described in Section 3), connected to the PSDN by a synchronous leased line .
Packetnet Communications Including Non-Digital Computers

••• A
___P_r~in....te_r )
\_~

Modem

VAX P.S.I. Access

·•~~~~-r
Terminator

Standard Baseband Cable

.l--f ____,}-~~~~~~~-c=--:=::r~~--{==--=}-11
Transceiver

VAX P.S.I.

VAX
NonDigital
Host

RSX P.S.I.

VAX P.S.I. Access
VAX
Host

Host

Manufacturing
(Houston)
Broadband

I lJ

Transceiver

Broadband
Frequency
Translator

VAX

Engineering
(Los Angeles)

I
L

----

Broadband
Tap

Host

Broadband Cable
Terminator

NBG·2 17-01

4.85

Packetnet Communications Software

Currently Supported PSDNs
The following table lists the currently supported public PSDNs by country
and product. Consult the local Digital sales office for the latest additions to
this table.
Supported Public PSDNs

Country

Public PSDN

VAX P.S.I.

RSX P.S.I.

X25router 2000

Australia

Austpac

yes

Austria

Datex -P

yes

Belgium

DCS

yes

Brazil

Renpac

yes

Canada

Datapac

yes 1 •3

yes 1

Denmark

DATAPAK

yes

Finland

DATAPAK

yes

France

Transpac

yes

W. Germany

Datex-P

yes

Hoiland

Datanet-1

yes

Hong Kong

INTELPAK
DATAPAK

yes
yes

yes
no

yes
yes

Ireland (Eire)

Eirpac

yes

Italy

ITAPAC

yes

Japan

DDX-P
VENUS-P

yes 1•3
yes 3

no
no

yes
yes
yes

Malaysia

Maypac

yes

Mexico

Telepac

yes

Norway

DATAPAK

yes

Portugal

Telepac

yes

S. Korea

DATACOM-NET

yes

Singapore

Telepac

yes

Spain

IBERPAK

yes

Sweden

DATAPAK

yes

Switzerland

Telepac

yes
yes2 ,3

yes 2

Taiwan

Pacnet

yes

United Kingdom

PSS

yes

United States

ACCUNET
AUTO NET
INFO NET
Mark*net Extended
PTN-1
Telenet
TYMNET
Worldnet

yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes

no
no
no
no
no
yes
yes
no

yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes

CCITT 1976

CCITT 1978
3CCITT 1980

4.86

Packetnet Communications Software

X25router 2000

The X25router 2000 is a combination hardware/software product that
provides access to one or more PSDNs for any system on the LAN that runs
a supported VAX P.S.I. Access product. It also provides access to any
DECnet system that uses the PSDN to carry DECnet traffic to remote
Digital systems.
The X25 router is the preferred method for accessing a PSDN. A For more
information on the X25router 2000 refer to "802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers" in Section 2.

VAX P.S.I. and VAX P.S.I. Access

The VAX P.S.I. products allow suitably configured VMS systems to connect
to, and/or access, Packet Switching Data Networks (PSDNs). The product
set consists of two options: full-function VAX P.S.I. and a subset of that
product, VAX P.S.I Access. VAX P.S.I allows connection to PSDNs conforming to CCITT recommendations X.25 (1978, 1980 or 1984) or to Full or
Draft International Standards (ISO or DIS) 7776 and 8208.
Both options enable process-to-process and terminal communications
between a VAX and remote Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) in a PSDN
supporting the X.25 interface protocol. VAX PS.I. also enables direct connection to equipment acting as either Data Circuit Terminating Equipment
(DCE) or DTE using the ISO 7776/8208 protocols.

VAX P.S.l.
VAX P.S.I. allows a sta ndard VMS system to use X.25 connections to any
number or combination of the foll owing:
• O ne or more DTEs (lines) connecting to X.25 PSDN(s) conforming to the
CCITT X.25 recommendations (1978, 1980 or 1984)
• Point-to-point connections to one other DTE or DCE conform ing to the
ISO 7776/8208 protocols
Most facilities and options of the CCITT recommendations can be supported with VAX P.S.I. Consult the Software Product Description for
de tai ls.
VAX P.S.I. can be configured for either multihost or native mode operations. When installed in native mode, VAX P.S.I. supports access to the
PSDN or DTE on ly from processes in the VAX processor on which it. is
insta ll ed. W hen installed in multihost mode in a DECnet-VAX node, VAX
P.S.I. acts as a connector node to the PSDN or DTE, supporting access to
the network by other properly configured local or remote VAX hosts. T hese
additional hosts must be DECnet-VAX systems on which the VAX P.S.I.
Access software has been installed.
VAX P.S.I. is a layered VMS product and may be used in the following
ways:
• Process-to-process (X.25) commun ication
• Process-to-terminal communication (remote terminal)
• Terminal-to-process communication (remote CPU)
• Full DECnet communication (Digital remote hosts only)
• As part of an OSI multivendor communications environmen t (when used
with Digital's VOTS product and OSI applications)
For all the above uses, VAX P.S.I. provides accounti ng, secur ity, and P.S.I.
Mail. A Refer to Software Product Description for further information .

4.87

Packetnet Communications Software

VAX P.S.I. Native Mode of Operation

Remote

DTE

NBG-107-01

VAX P.S.I. Access
VAX P.S.I. Access allows a properly configured DECnet-VAX system in a
DECnet environment to make logical connections to PSDNs by way of one
or more other P.S.I. connector nodes. VAX P.S.I. Access, with the connector
node providing physical connections to a PSDN, enables process-to-process
and terminal communications between the accessing VAX and remote DTE.
The P.S.I. connector node may be one of the following:
• VAX P.S.I. installed in multihost mode. The corresponding version of VAX
P.S.I. and VAX P.S.I. Access is required for full functionality, though basic
communication will take place with earlier versions of VAX P.S.I.
• An X25router 2000.

.& Refer to Software Product Description 28.86.

DECnet logical links are established by VMS to connect the VAX P.S.I.
Access host to the connector node. These links may use any supported
DECnet communications path between the VAX P.S.I. Access node and the
connector node, provided they do not themselves use an X.25 connection.
VAX P.S.I. Access uses these links to transmit X.25/X.29 messages between
the connector node and the VAX P.S.I. Access host.
A single VAX P.S.I. Access host can logically connect to one or more connector nodes concurrently and hence access all PSDNs accessible from
those connector nodes . During installation of VAX P.S.I. Access, one of
these connector nodes/PSDN combinations is established as the default
DTE/ DCE connection that outgoing calls will normally use.
VAX P.S.I. Access provides all of the user interfaces of the full-function
VAX P.S.I. product, with the ability to utilize these interfaces from a
DECnet- VAX node not directly connected to the PSDN. If such connection
to a packet switching data network is necessary, the full -function VAX P.S.I.
product is required. Applications that work correctly on VAX P.S.I. may be
used with VAX P.S.I. Access, and vice versa, if the application is not sensitive to the differences in timing or throughput involved in the transfer.
.& Refer to Software Product Description 27. 78 for more information.

4.88

Packetnet Communications Software

VAX P.S.I. Multibost Mode of Operation

··· ~
/

VAX P.S./. Access

VAX 8350

MicroVAX

Transceiver

m---c=

~~-:--~~~~~~~c.:._:....::_i~~~~~--11

Terminator

Standard Ethernet Cable
DSV11

Local DTE
Remote

DTE
VAX P.S./.

NBG-108-01

Features (VAX P.S. I. and VAX P. S.I. Access)
• Support for multiple networks-A VAX P.S.I. node (native or multihost
mode) may be connected to more than one network. This is useful for
connection to both a public and private network, or (in those countries
where applicable) to several public ones .
• Support for DCE mode of operation- The VAX P.S.I. product may be used
to configure individual lines as either a DTE or DCE. Two VAX P.S.I. nodes
may be connected "back -to-back," with one as a DTE and the other as a
DCE. Point-to-point configurations are valid only where both ends fully
conform to ISO standards 7776/8208.
• Support for CCITT 1984 networks-VAX P.S.I. has the capability to connect
to networks conforming to the CCITT 1984 revision of the X.25 family of
protocol recommendations .
• Co-residency of P.S.I. and P.S.I. Access-Both VAX P.S.I. and VAX P.S.I.
Access can be installed in the same node, granting local users/processes
the ability to access a network or networks connected to another P.S.I.
multihost node .
· Process-to-process communication -VAX P.S.I. and VAX P.S.I. Access allow
application programs to access the packet level of the protocol as defined
by the X.25 recommendation. T his interface enables an application program using VMS System Services to communicate with complementary
software on other systems (Digital or non-Digital DTEs) accessible via the
X.25 connection.
• Terminal communications-VAX P.S.I. and VAX P.S.I. Access support terminal communications according to CCITT recommendations X.3, X.28, and
X.29. Remote terminals may access the VAX , and local terminals on the
VAX may access remote CPUs .

4.89

Packetnet Communications Software

• PSimail- Users of the VMSmail utility may exchange electronic mail
directly between VAX PS.I. (or VAX P.S.I. Access) nodes over a PSDN,
without the need for a DECnet circuit connection between the nodes.
·Virtual circuits-VAX P.S.I. (in native mode, or configured for multihost
access) and VAX P.S.I. Access offer communication over both Permanent
and Switched Virtual Circuits (PVC and SVC), and support up to 512
virtual circuits in total per CPU.
• Line discipline-For VAX P.S.I. in native mode, or configured for multihost
access , the line discipline used for PSDN communications complies with
CCITT recommendation X.25 (1978 , 1980 or 1984) and/or with DIS7776
and IS08208.
•Accounting- The Accounting utility, PSIACCOUNTING, enables the system manager to obtain information on network usage . The Accounting
utility can extract the information collected and display the information
directly on a terminal or to a file.
• Security-A security mechanism (PSIAUTHORIZE), which is consistent
with the VMS access and security mechanisms, offers the means of controlling both remote DTE access to VAX P.S.I. and access to the network by the
VAX P.S.I. user community.
·Network management-VMS provides a Network Control Program (NCP)
for managing DECnet-VAX , the VAX P.S.1. products, and other Digital
communications software. In addition, extensive event-logging and tracing
capabilities are available. Trace data may be stored on a file, or displayed
"live" on a local terminal.
• Communications-For the best performance, Digital recommends using a
DMA device . • Refer to the Software Product Description for a list of
devices VAX P.S.I. supports, and for any restrictions in line speed or function.
Prerequisite Hardware and Software
DECnet-VAX for VAX PS.I. multihos t operation, VAX P.S.I. Access , or
DECnet (DLM communications across the PSDN .

The KMS/ KMV link-level software and drivers are not required when these
devices are to be used only with VAX P.S.I. The DMB32 synchronous driver
is required for use with VAX P.S.I.
• For additional prerequisite hardware and software, refer to Software
Product Description 25.40 for VAX P.S.I., and 27.78 for VAX P.S.I. Access.

4.90

Packetnet Communications Software

VAX P.S.I. and VAX P.S.I. Access Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

VAX P.S.I.

VAX P.S.I.
Access

Single-use or first license for VAXcluster

QL-07 lA *-AA

QL-061A *-AA

QL-071A* -AB

QL-061A *-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster 2

QL-071A* -CA

QL-061A* -CA

Monthly rental , single·use 2

QL-071A* -DA

QL-061A*-DA

QL-071A* -DB

QL-061A*-DB

QL-071A* -HZ

QL-061A* -HZ

Distribution and documentation

QA-071AA-H#

QA-061AA-H#

Documentation only

QA-071AA-GZ

QA-061AA-GZ

Installation service

QT-071A *-I#

QT-061A*-I#

DECsupport service

QT.071A *-9#

QT-061A *-9 #

Basic service

QT-071A*-8#

QT-061A*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT.071A*-3#

QT-061A* -3#

Cluster member

Monthly rental, cluster

Software revision right-to-copy
Materials and Installation

U.S. Software Services 3

*Supported processors(*) : MicroVAX I/II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P),
MicroVAX 3500/3600 (B), VAXstation II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R),
VAXstation 3200/3500 (C), VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX-11/730 (M),
VAX -11/750 (L), VAX-11/780/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4),
VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/8250 (J), VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 8500/8530 (G) ,
VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D), VAX 8810 (E) ,
VAX 8820 (D), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)
#Supported media (# ): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), RX33 (7), TK50 (5)
1

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX-11/725/730.

2 Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or

VAX 8600/8650 .
3 For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

RSX-11 P.S.l./M and RSX-11
P.S.l./M-PLUS

RSX-11 P.S.I./M and RSX-11 P.S.I./M-PLUS allow suitably configured
RSX- llM and RSX -UM-PLUS systems to connect to a single Packet Switching Data Network (PSDN) conforming to the CCITT recommendation X.25
(June 1980). Access to the RSX-11 P.S.I. products is supported for user
programs written in MACR0-11, FORTRAN IV/ RSX , and PDP-11
FORTRAN/RSX. RSX-11 P.S.I. products support task -to-task and incoming
or outgoing remote terminal communications via the network.
The RSX -11 P.S.I. products can coexist with or operate as a layered product
under DECnet-llM or DECnet- llM-PLUS to allow use of DECnet facilities
over PSDNs , as well as point-to-point connectors, such as private leased
lines or switched telephone networks . A For details, refer to Software
Product Descriptions 10.42 and 10.43.
The communications discipline used is the CCITT recommendation X.25.
Specifically, the product supports EIA-232-D/CCITT V.28 at the hardware
level, the symmetric LAPB variant of the X.25 frame level protocol, and the
X.25 packet level protocol over point -to-point , four-wire, synchronous,
full-duplex lines.

4.91

Packetnet Communications Software

Features
• Supports access from remote terminals according to the CCITT recommendations X.3, X.28 , and X.29 (1978 and 1980). Terminals are supported in
"Remote X.29 Terminal" mode in which code conversions between ASCII
and the actual code used by the terminal are performed by the network.
• Includes a host PAD to permit outgoi ng X.29 calls from a local terminal
connected to the PDP-11 to a remote DTE.
• For intertask communication, application programs use RSX -11M or RSXllM-PLUS executive calls to set up and break connections with the net work , to send and receive data, and to issue control and synchronization
requests .
• Offers communications over both Permanent and Switched Virtual Circuits
(PVCs and SVCs) .
• Manages virtual-circuit calls on behalf of DECnet by using user-data fields
as well as subaddressing.
• A Network Control Program and Configuration File Editor are provided
for the control of the operation of the X.25 software . This includes loading
and unloading.

Prerequisite Hardware
• Supports all current PDP-lls and MicroPDP-lls .
• Requires at least one of the following communications controllers for each
processor :
- For the PDP -11/23/53/73/83 : a DPVll -DA or KMVlA -A
- For the PDP-11/24/44/70/84 : a DUPll-DA, KMSll -BD/ BE, or KMSll PX/ PY

Prerequisite Software
• RSX-11 operating system for RSX-11 P.S.I ./M
• RSX-llM-PLUS operating system for RSX -11 P.S.I./M -PLUS
RSX-11 P.S.I. Order Codes
Option

Order Code

License (A license is required for each CPU.)

RSX-UM

RSX-UM-PLUS

Single-use license

QJD91-UZ

QJD92-UZ

Distribution and documentation

QJD91-HD
QJD91-HH
QJD91 -HM
QJD91 -H5

QJD92-HD
QJD92-HH
QJD92-HM
QJD92-H5

QJD91-HV

QJD92-HV

Software revision right- to-copy

QJD91-HZ

QJD92-HZ

Documentation only

QJD91-GZ

QJD92-GZ

Materials

4.92

Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) Products

Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a set of developing standards pro duced by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). OSI has
been developed by ISO to allow computers made by various manufacturers
to communicate with each other using internationally accepted protocols.
Users are thus enabled to explore networking in an open environment. OSI
is based on an architectural reference model that defines a layered protocol
structure for systems communications. The Digital Network Architecture
(DNA) is based on the OSI Reference Model.
The OSI model has seven layers with well-defined functions. Each layer
builds upon the functionality offered by lower layers . Used with other
Digital products, six of the seven layers can be provided. VAX P.S.I. and
802.3/Ethernet products provide services at the Physical, Data Link, and
Network Layers of the OSI model. VAX DEC/MAP provides network services for the manufacturing environment at the network, transport, session,
and application layers . VOTS provides services at the Transport Layer and
OSAK provides services at the Session Layer. Message Router X.400 Gateway, combined with Digital's other MAILbus products, provides mail ,
messaging , and document interchange services at the Application
layer. A Refer to "MAILbus Electronic Mail Interchange" in Section 5 for
more information.
Digitsl's OSI Products
Layer
Number

Network Management
OSI Layers

DNA Layers

Digital OSI Products

Application

User

Presentation

Network application

(Customer written
application)

Session

Session control

OSAK

Transport

Network

Routing

Data Link

Physical Link

Network
Management

Message
Router/
X.400
Gateway

VAX
FTAM

VAX
DEC/MAP

VOTS
VAX P.S.I. or
VAX P.S.I. ACCESS

IEEE 802.3
Products

IEEE 802.4
Products*

*Available from Concord Communication, Inc. for UNIBUS or VAXBI processors only.
NBG-151-00

The following Open Systems Interconnection products are available:
·VAX FTAM
· VAX DEC/MAP
· Message Router X.400 Gateway
·VAX OSI Applications Kernel (OSAK) , which includes VAX OSI Transport Service (VOTS)
·VAX P.S.I. •For more information, refer to "Packetnet Communications
Software" in this section.

2::

;

<t:
0

('-!

"'c

.s...

....cucos
~

4.93

Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) Products

VAX FTAM Open Systems
Multivendor File Transfer

VAX FTAM (File Transfer, Access, and Management ), a layered product on
VMS V5.0, allows VMS systems to use the international standard protocol
ISO 8571 to transfer files between other ISO-FTAM-compliant systems in a
multivendor network. VAX FTAM copies files , deletes files, and displays
information about files between open systems .
An open computer system implements the standards for each of the seven
layers of the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) Basic Reference Model
for communications as defined by the International Organization for Standardization. An FTAM system is any open system containing an FTAM
implementation that conforms to the FTAM standard and includes the
implementations of the necessary underlying OSI services.
VAX FTAM contains components that together include the protocols and
services of layers 3 through 7 of the OSI Basic Reference Model, described
earlier in this section : the File Transfer, Access , and Management service
element ; the Association Control Service Element (ACSE) of the Application layer ; the Presentation layer; the Session layer; the Transport and
Network layers.
VAX FTAM conforms to ISO 8571 and supports transfer of the following
document (file) types : FTAM I-unstructured files containing ASCII data
and having stream record formats, FTAM 2- sequential text files with
variable record formats and carriage-return attributes, and FTAM 3 unstructured files containing binary data and having stream record formats.
A For more information, refer to Software Product Description (SPD)
29.86.

Features
• Effortless file transfer between multivendor systems

• Based on ISO standards
• DCL-level access to user facilities
• Flexible and transparent access to local files
• Support for RMS -style format for file specifications
• Support for various file types
• Support for an y file -naming convention
• Management tools
Prerequisite Hardware
A Refer to the order code table for a list of supported processors.

When used in a Local Area Network Environment, VAX FTAM requires
that an Ethernet Communications Controller be installed on the VAX
system. A Refer to "Ethernet Communications Controllers" in Section 2
and to SPD 29.86 for more information.
Also , a transceiver cable is needed to connect the Ethernet controller to a
tap on the local area network . A Refer to "Baseband 802.3/Ethernet IEEE
Products" in Section 2 for appropriate order numbers.
A For optional hardware requirements for X.25 packet-switched networks,
refer to VAX P.S.I. (SPD 25.40) or VAX P.S.I. Access (SPD 27.78).

4.94

Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) Products

Prerequisite Software
VMS V5.0

The required software depends on the physical medium of the open systems network. The network can be an ISO 8802-3 (IEEE 802.3 ) LAN , or an
X.25 packet-switched network . To support the ISO 8802 -3 data link, VAX
FTAM use s standard VMS LAN drivers.
For an X.25 wide area network , the VAX P.S.I. (SPD 25.40 ) or VAX PS.I .
Access software (SPD 27.78 ) is required .
VAX FTAM Order Codes
Order Code

Option
Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use license

QL -VFWA*-AA

Cluster license 1

QL-VFWA*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster 2
Monthly rental, single-use

QL -VFWA*-CA
QL-VFWA*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster 2

QL -VFWA*- DB

Software revision right -to-copy

QL -VFWA*-HZ

Materials and Installation
Distribution and documentation

QA-VFWAA -H#

Documentation only

QA-VFWAA-GZ
QT-VFWA*-I#

Installation service

U.S. Software Services

DECsupport service

QT-VFWA*-9#

Basic service

QT-VFWA*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-VFWA*-3#

*Supported processors (*): MicroVAX II (N) , MicroVAX 2000 (P) ,
MicroVAX 3500/ 3600 (B) , VAXstation II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R) ,
VAXstation 3200/ 3500 (C), VAXserver 3500/3600/ 3602 (C ), VAX-11/750 (L),
VAX -111780/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3) , VAX 6230 (4) , VAX 6240 (D),
VAX 8200/ 8250 (}), VAX 8300/ 8350 (H) , VAX 8500/ 8530 (G), VAX 8550 (E),
VAX 8600/ 8650 (F) , VAX 8700 (E) , VAX 8800 (D ), VAX 8810 (E), VAX 8820 (D),
VAX 8840/ 8842/ 8974 (V) , VAX 8978 (5)
#Supported media (# ): TK50 (5), RX33 floppy diskette (7) 1,600 bpi magtape (M)
1

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX-11/725/730.

Not available on MicroVAX , VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-111700 series, or
VAX 8600/ 8650 .
3 For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative .

4.95

Open Systems Interconnection (OSI ) Products

VAX DEC/MAP

VAX DEC/MAP is a multivendor, broadband, local area network for the
manufacturing environment, which adheres to the Manufacturing Automation Protocol (MAP) specification Version 2.1. The MAP Version 2.1 specification is based on the seven-layer, International Standards Organization/
Open Systems Interconnection (ISO/OSI) network reference model.
This product is available in two configurations that comprise both software
and hardware.
· The DTUN 1' -Designed for the UNIBUS and VAXBI-bus systems, it
includes the KMSlP communications controller, firmware, appropriate
cables, and software layered on the VMS operating system.
• the DTQNA-Designed for the MicroVAX II, it includes the DTQNA MAP
controller, firmware, appropriate cables, and software layered on the VMS
operating system. The DTQNA offers the a frequency agile modem and also
an internal and external (NEMA 12 enclosure) modem option.
The MAP network architecture specifies the protocols and services for the
Physical, Data Link, Network, Transport, Session, Presentation and Application Layers-Layers 1-7, respectively. The software (VAX DEC/MAP) for
the DTUN''' provides the Network Layer through the Applications Layer
(Layers 3-7): the Physical and Data Link Layers, Layers 1 and 2, are
implemented in hardware from Concord Communication, Inc. (CCI), and
are not included in the VAX DEC/MAP V2.0 product. The software (VAX
DEC/MAP) for the DTQNA implements the Session Layer to the Application Layer (Layers 5-7), the Physical through the Transport Layers (Layers
1-4) are found on the hardware (DTQNA). The Presentation Layer is null
as specified by MAP V2.1. The network media is 75-ohm broadband CATV
cable.
The VAX DEC/MAP software provides the user interface to the communication services that consist of File Transfer, Access, and Management
(FTAM), Common Application Service Elements (CASE), Manufacturing
Messaging Format Standard (MMFS).
VAX DEC/MAP Net\york Management includes the MAP Control Program
(MAPCP). MAPCP enables a network manager to read and modify local and
remote parameters, isolate faults through event logging and loopback
testing , perform system verification, and maintain the local directory cache.
MAPCP commands are similar to DECnet NCP commands. Also included is
the Directory Service/Client Services Agent (CSA) which provides nameto-address resolution.
A For more information, refer to Software Product Description 27.66.

4.96

Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) Products

Specifications and Standards used for VAX DEC/MAP

DEC/MAP Component

Specifications and Standards

OSI Layer

Network Management

Network Management Agent (NMA) only defined in the MAP V2. l Spec.
Network

Manager

Application

• NBS Phase I FTAM
• MAP CASE V2. l
• MAP V2.1 MMFS
• Directory Service/CSA

Based on ISO FTAM DP2
ISO based and defined in Service Definition and Protocol Spec. (7185)
Conformance class 0
MAP V2.1

Presentation

Undefined in MAP V2 . l, therefore NULL layer

Presentation

Session

ISO Session Standard (ISO/IS 8326, 8327)
Only Kernel and full-duplex is implemented as required in MAP V2 .l

Session

Transport

ISO Transport, Class 4 Service as specified in ISO/ IS 8072, ISO/ IS 8073.

Transport

Network

ISO Internet (ISO/IS 8473)

Internet

Data Link

IEEE 802.2 Class 1, Logic Link Control; IEEE 802.4 Token Bus, Media
Access Control

Data Link

Physical

IEEE 802.4 Broadband

Physical

Interoperability
Digital guarantees the operation of the VAX DEC/MAP product between
Digital nodes only, with the prerequisite hardware supplied by Concord
Communication, Inc. The DTQNA product has successfully completed
conformance testing at ITI (Industrial Technological Institute ), an independent testing facility for MAP products.

Required Hardware
VAX DEC/ MAP software is a layered product, supported on the VMS operating system . This product requires 7, 500 blocks (3 .84 MB) of system disk
space for installation and 6, 500 blocks (3.33 MB) of system disk space for
permanent use.
This product is part of a packaged system : The customer cannot purchase
software separately from hardware.
Minimum hardware :
• Any valid VAX UNIBUS-compatible configuration, including the VAXBI
machines, which require a UNIBUS adapter, and MicroVAX II (BA23,
BA123, BA2 1,;', H9642 only)
• Broadband cableplant
• CCI headend remodulator, 10 Mb/s (part number L5-R051-2100 )
·CCI Map Server/Plus, (TIM), 10 Mb/s (part number LOT051-0820 , for
UNIBUS or BI-bus machines only)
Note: The CCI Map Server/Plus must be purchased through Concord
Communication, Inc. (CCI).

Prerequisite Software
VMS Operating System

4.97

Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) Products

VAX DEC/MAP Orcler Cocles
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is
required for each CPU .)

DTUN*

DTQNA

Single-use license (with
hardware)

DTUN*-AA , -AC 1

DTQNA-DA, -DB
DTQNA-DC, -DE 2

Software revision rightto-copy

Q*VFZ-HZ

QL-VFZAN-HA

Distribution and
documentation

Included in kit

Documentation only

QA-VFZAA-GZ

QA-VFZAB-GZ

Installation service

Q*VFZ-I#

Included in kit

DECsupport service

Q*VFZ-9#

QT-VFZAA-95

Basic service

Q*VFZ-8#

QT-VFZAA·85

Self-maintenance service

Q*VFZ-3#

QT-VFZAA·35

Materials and Installation

U.S. Software Services

*Supported processors(*): VAX-11/750 (D); VAX-11/780/782/785 (E);
VAX 820018250 (5); VAX 8300/8350 (7); VAX 8530 (9); VAX 8550 (2);
VAX 8600/8650 (K); VAX 8700 (2)
#Supported media(#) : 5, M

VAX OSI Applications Kernel
(OSAK)

Choose -AA for FCC-compliant cabinet, -AC for non-FCC.compliant cabinet. For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a single
CPU.

Supports MicroVAX II (BA23, BA123, BA200-series, H9642) only. Specify -DA for internal modem for BA23, BA123, H9642 and BA200 series; -DB for external modem for
BA23 configuration; -DC for external modem for BA200 series; -DE for the external
modem option for BA123, H9642.

For non-U.S. service agreements , consult a local Digital sales representative.

The VAX OSI Applications Kernel is a laye red product on VMS that provides an OSI-conformant base on which to develop products . The product
consists of interfaces to the Session and Transport layers of the OSI Basic
reference model for communications , as defined by the ISO and discussed
earlier in this section.
The product conforms to the following protocol standards :
• ISO 8327: 1987 -Basic Connection Oriented Session Protocol Specification
•ISO 8073: 1986-Basic Connection Oriented Transport Protocol Specification
• ISO 84 73 - Protocol for providing Connectionless Mode Network Services

4.98

Open Systems Interconnection (OSI ) Products

Features
• The VAX OSI Applications Kernel comb ines both the VAX OSI Transport
Service (VOTS) and the VAX OSI Applications Kernel into a single package,
simplifying both migration to Phase V DECnet for current users and the
ordering of OSI products.
• The VAX OSI Transport Service provides and supports many of the options
stated in International Standard ISO 8073. An end system, VOTS is implemented according to International Standard ISO 8473, and supports many
of the options listed in the specification.
• The VAX OSI Applications Kernel software is a privileged shareable image,
which can be linked with VMS users' programs. It provides the higher level
services that allow interprocess communications over an OSI network to
one or more remote systems. The VAX OSI Applications Kernel is layered
on VAX OSI Transport Service.
• Refer to SPD 27.4 7 for further information.

Prerequisite Hardware
Any valid VAX/VMS system configuration as specified in the order code
table.
Prerequisite Software
VMS Operating System V5.0
The software may be used over either an ISO 8802-3 (IEEE 802.3) local
area network or an X.25 packet-switched network. To support the ISO
8802-3 data link, VAX OSAK uses standard VMS drivers . For an X.25 wide
area network , the VAX P.S.I. V4.2 or VAX P.S.I. Access V 4.2 software (SPD
25.40 and SPD 27.78) is required .
• For more information on precise product specifications, requirements for
local and wide area usage, and conformance to standards, refer to SPD
27.47.

4.99

Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) Products

VAX OSI Applications Kernel Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU .)

Single-use licen se

QL-VD9A* -AA

Cluster license2

QL -VD9A* -AB

Initial license, primary and cluster 2

QL-VD9A* -CA

Monthly rental, single-use 2

QL-VD9A* -DA

Monthly rental , cluster 2

QL -VD9A*-DB

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-VD9A*-HZ

Materials and Installation
D istribution and documentation

QA-VD9AA-H#

Documentation only

QA-VD9AA -GZ

Insta llation service

QT-VD9A*-I#

U.S. Software Services 3

DECsupport service

QT-VD9A* -9#

Basic service

QT-VD9A *-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-VD9A *-3#

*Supported processors(*) : MicroVAX II (N) , MicroVAX 350013600 (B) , VAXstation II
(Q) , VAXstation 3200/ 3500 (C), VAXserver 3500/ 3600/ 3602 (C), VAX -11/730 (M) ,
VAX-111750 (L), VAX-11/780/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2 ), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4J ,
VAX 6240 (D) , VAX 8200/ 8250 (JJ , VAX 8300/ 8350 (H) , VAX 8500/8530 (GJ,
VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/ 8650 (F), VAX 8700 (EJ , VAX 8800 (DJ, VAX 8810 (E) ,
VAX 8820 (D) , VAX 8840/ 8842/ 8974 (VJ, VAX 8978 (5 J
#Supported media (# J: RX33 (7 ), TK50 (5 ), 1,600 bpi magtape (M)
1
2

Not available on MicroVAX , VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX-11/730.
Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or
VAX 860018650 .
For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

4.100

File Transfer and Terminal Emulation Products

VAX Public Access
Communications (VAXPAC)

VAX Public Access Communications (VAXPAC) lets VMS or MicroVMS
users connect to a remote system using asynchronous lines . VAXPAC allows
users to access database services that provide information such as investment reports , credit verification, or international news .
The remote system may be any system that accepts and displays data using
an asynchronous interface compatible with EIA-232-D, EIA-422, or EIA423-A.
VAXPAC users can operate as if the terminal were directly connected to the
remote system, can capture data from the remote system in a file for later
printing or editing, or transfer a file (with error checking) to or from a
system with cooperating software .
.& For more information, refer to Software Product Description 28.51.

Features
• Provides access to all facilities through menu selections and extensive
online help.
• Includes KERMIT error-correction file-transfer software; provides an interface that allows other file-transfer software to be invoked instead of
KERMIT .
• Offers predefined connections that can be specified for either general use
or designated individuals.
• Supports direct or telephone connections with autodial, dial from keyboard, or dial from handset for applicable modems.
• Includes maintenance facilities that let users customize VAXPAC operation.
Prerequisite Hardware
One of the following:
• Any valid MicroVAX II with 3-MB internal memory, TK50 or dual RX50
drive, one DZQll or DHVll, one RD52, and a VTlOO- or VT200-series
terminal, or any MicroVAX 2000 or VAXstation 2000, plus one or more
modems if using telephone connections: DF224 (Scholar), DF03compatible, or Hayes Instruction Set compatible.
•Any valid MicroVAX 3500/3600 system with 3-MB memory, TK70, one
RA70, CXY08 or DFAOl, and VTlOO- or VT200-series terminal.
Prerequisite Software
One of the following :
•All components of MicroVMS, V4.4 or later
• VMS, V 4.4 or later

4.101

File Transfer and Terminal Emulation Products

VAXPAC Order Codes
Order Code

Option
License Options : (A license is required
for each CPU.)

Single-use license 1

Q*ZBl-UZ

Materials and Installation

Distri bution and documentation

Q*ZBl-H#

Software revision right-to-copy
Documentation only

Q*ZBl-HZ
QLZB l -GZ

Installat ion service

Q*ZBl-1#

U.S. Software Services

Self-maintenance service

Q*ZBl-3#

"Supported processors("): MicroVAX II (Z); MicroVAX 2000 (3); VAXstation II (4);
VAXstation 2000 (8); VAX-11/730 [PC]; VAX-11/750 (D); VAX-11/780/782/785 (E);
VAX 8200/8250 (5); VAX 8300/8350 (7); VAX 8530 (9); VAX 8600/8650 (K); VAX 8700
(2); VAX 8800 (M)
# Supported media: 3, 5
1
For service agreements in other countries, consult a local D igital sales representative.

VTERM II, poly-COM 220, and
poly-COM 240 for the IBM PC/
XT/AT

This product set is not currently available in Europe.
The Digital Distributed Software Program offers three products that run
on the IBM PC/XT/AT to emulate Digital terminals. These products perform ASCII and binary file transfers between an IBM PC and a Digital host
system. VTERM II allows the PC/XT/AT to emulate a VT52 or VTlOO terminal, poly-COM 220 allows the PC/XT/AT to emulate a VT52, VT102, and
VT220 terminal, and poly-COM 240 allows the PC/ XT/AT to emulate a
VT240 terminal.

VTERM II
VTERM II is an asynchronous communication package for the IBM PC
developed by Coefficient Systems Corporation . VTERM II allows direct
connection to a host computer at speeds up to 9600 baud. With a Digital
mini or mainframe computer, users can run full screen, keypad oriented
software such as EDT, TECT, WORDll , and EMACS transferring text and
binary files between the PC and the host.
VTERM II Features
• Plus compatible with VTlOO
• Full VT 100 keyboard and video emulation
• 20 user definable keys
• Full VTlOO and VT52 escape sequence recognition
• Status display line on screen
• 80 column display-132 with adapter board available from Coefficient
Systems Corporation
• DOS-VTERM toggle key allows switching between the DOS screen and the
host screen without losing the communications link
• Setup mode key
• Printer support for VTlXX-AC and VT102 ports using any IBM PC compatible printer

4.102

File Transfer and Terminal Emulation Products

poly-COM 220 and 240
poly-COM 220 is the successor to poly-COM and allows the use of an IBM
PC/ XT/AT computer as any one of the Digital VT52, VT102, and VT220
terminals for file transfer. The program supports all Digital full screen
editors, including EDT, and all programs that use advanced terminal features such as Digital's ALL-IN-1. poly-COM 220 provides an instant horizontal shift key which allows the user to view and work on text up to 132
columns wide. poly-COM 240 adds Digital VT240 emulation to poly-COM
220 and provides full Digital color graphics terminal emulation.
poly-COM 220 Features
• Plus compatible with VTlOO series and VT220
• Full VTlOO and VT200 keyboard and video emulation
• 8-bit international character support with compose key
• 21 soft function keys "user definable"
• VTlOO escape sequence recognition and VT220 8-bit terminal control
• Status display line on screen
• Instantaneous horizontal shift for 132-character display
• DOS-VTERM toggle key allows switching between the DOS screen and the
host screen without losing the communication link
• Setup mode key
•Printer support for VTlxx -AC and VT102 ports using any IBM PC compatible printer
• Host control functions allows the host to control the IBM PC through
poly-COM 220
• Screen Save function which blanks the PC screen after an inactive time
period that is user definable .
poly-COM 240 Features
• Plus compatible with VTlOO series and VT220
• Full VTlOO and VT220 keyboard and video emulation
• 8-bit international character support with compose key
• 21 soft function keys " user definable"
• VTlOO escape sequence recognition and VT200 8-bit terminal control
• Status display line on screen
• Instantaneous horizontal shift for 132-character display
• Setup mode key
·Printer support for VTlXX -AC and VT102 ports using any IBM PC compatible printer
• VT240 and VT125 device ID
• ReGIS graphics supported
• Full support for IBM PC and Epson graphics printers
Required Hardware
For the Digital host , the same hardware used for asynchronous terminal
ports accommodates the IBM PC.
For the PC, a serial communications port is required for direct cable connection to the Digital host or to a modem.

4.103

File Transfer and Terminal Emulation Products

VTERM II, poly-COM 220, and poly-COM 240 Order Codes
Option

Order Code

VTERM for IBM PC with 96K*

QAX97-C3

poly-COM 220 for IBM PC with 192K

QAX98-C3

poly-COM 240 for IBM PC with 256K

QAX99-C3

*Host source included

Host Software for poly-COM Package Order Codes
Option

Order Code

poly-XFR, RSX

QA139 -CD (HJ*

poly-XFR, RT-11

QA140-CY (H, D J*

poly-XFR, RSTS

QA141-CD

poly-XFR, VMS

QA142 -CY (G, MJ*

*Optional media

4.104

Additional Software Products

WPS-PLUS/PC

WPS-PLUS/ PC is a document-processing software system that provides
Gold Key style word processing for users of IBM PCs and IBM PC/ XTs
running IBM PC-DOS Version 2.10, 3.0, or 3.10. .A Refer to Software Product Description 30.75 for more information.

Features
WPS-PLUS/ PC allows PC-DOS users to
• Create, edit, and print documents, as well as retrieve documents by document name , number, or keyword.
• Produce form letters and maintain mailing lists.
• Convert a WPS-PLUS document to and from a DX file format and ASCII
file format .
• Communicate through user-developed scripts .
• Create and modify printer attribute and character print tables.
• Transfer documents with Digital hosts running WPS-PLUS/ VMS or WPSPLUS/ALL-IN-1.
• Include technical characters and scientific equations in a document.
• Run WPS -PLUS/ VMS on the VAX in VTlOO emulation mode , which also
supports the Digital Multinational and Technical Character Sets.
• Include diagrams, matrixes and VTlOO character set equations, and composite and multinational characters in a document.
• Transfer documents between the IBM PC and IBM PC/ XT and any Digital
host running the poly-XFR for PC-DOS/ IBM Personal Computers Communications package, where the host does not have WPS -PLUS/ VMS or WPS PLUS/ALL-IN-1.

Required Hardware
Any valid IBM PC or IBM PC/ XT personal computer configuration with
• At least 384 Kbytes of memory.
• A minimum of two 5.25 inch , 362-KB flopp y drives, or one 5.25 inch,
362-KB flopp y drive and a hard disk.
· IBM PC/ XT keyboard .
Prerequisite Software

PC -DOS Operating System , Versions 2.10, 3.0, or 3.10
WPS-PLUS/ PC Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Single-use license, binaries,
documentation, warranty
Quantities 1-9

QBA72 -Al

Quantities 10-24

QBA73 -Al

Quantities 25-99

QBA74 -Al

Quantities 100 plus

QBA75 -Al

Installation service

QBA72·Il

Basic service

QBA72·81

Single product update service

QBA72-3I

4.105

Additional Software Products

Software Development Tools

Digital's Software Development Tools facilitate the development of layered
telecommunications protocols for Digital's family of direct memory access
(DMA) intelligent communications processors.
The development tools are especially useful to OEMs and end users who
write their own communications packages. Well-defined programming
standards and methodology help reduce project development costs.
Digital-supplied firmware routines build an executive that acts as the communication processor's operating system . With the development tools,
system programmers can easily implement private protocols for custom
networking applications.
Digital offers Development Tools for the following intelligent communications processors.
• KMVlA-M Direct Memory Access Intelligent Communications Processor
• KCT32 Direct Memory Access Intelligent Communications Processor
Features
• Facilitates custom network applications

• Extensive documentation
• Reduced development costs
• Linker and loader
• Single-step, start, stop, and breakpoint program debugger
Software Development Tools Order Codes

Option

Order Code

VMS
KCT32 development tools*

Q*128

RSX-HS, RSX-llM, RSX-llM PLUS
KMVlA-M development tools

QJS98

MicroVMS
KMVlA-M development tools*

QZZ36-xx

KMVlA-M MicroVMS driver

QZZ35 -xx

*VAX-11 RSX (Q*382) is required for VMS and MicroVMS development.

HDLC Framing Software

Digital offers HDLC framing software for the KMSll-BD/BE and the
KMVlA-M. These software packages provide a basic HDLC frame; they do
not provide the addressing and sequencing that must be supplied by the
user for some applications. The framing software packages are particularly
useful in multivendor environments and in applications requiring proprietary protocols . The KMSll-BD/BE Framing Software can also be configured for Bisync (BSC) Framing.

4.106

Additional Software P roducts

HDLC/BSC Framing Software Codes
Option

Order Code

VMS
KMSll-BD HDLC/BSC frami ng software

Q*920

RSX-HS, RSX-HM
KMVlA HDLC frami ng software

QJS32

RSX-HM PLUS
KMV l A-M HDLC frami ng software

X.25 Link Level Software

QJS39

Digital offers X.25 Link Level software for the KMSll-BD/ BE, KMSlP-M ,
and KMVlA-M. These packages provide point-to-point communications
between host processors, making them particularly useful in a multivendor
environment. The packages operate in full-duplex mode , and implement
the CCITT 1980 recommendations for X.25 LAPB Link Level Protocol.
These packages are not required when the devices are used by Packetnet
software. • For more information, refer to "Packetnet Communications
Software" in this section.
X. 25 Link Level Software Order Codes
Option

Order Code

VMS
KMSll -BD/BE

Q*757

MicroVMS
KMVlA-M MicroVMS driver

QZZ35

KMV l A-M Micro VMS X.25 link level

QZZ37

RSX-HS, RSX-HM
KMS ll -BD/BE, KMSlP -M

Q]757

KMVIA-M

QJS97

RSX-HM-PLUS
KMSll -BD/ BE, KMSlP-M

QJ770

KMVlA-M

QJS97

4.107

Section 5

Distributed Applications

This section contains the
following topics ...

Integrated Personal Computing

DECnet System Services

Business Communications

Section 5

Distributed Applications

Introduction

Distributed applications support large network environments , allowing
network resources to be accessed as readily as if they were on a single
system.
T his section describes the following distributed applications , which
enhance the value and usefulness a network delivers:
· Integrated Personal Computing - These applications allow personal com puters to participate in a DECnet network and to share network resources
such as printers and disks . PC users can share data with other DECnet
users, and connect their PCs as termina ls to DECnet nodes .
·DECnet System Services- These services simplify network use and allow a
user to access network resources as if those resources were on the user 's
system . They also allow a system manager to remotely control systems in
the network .
• Business Communications - T hese applications allow users to exchange
mail in a multivendor environment, to participate in online conferenc ing ,
and to share videotex information-retrieval services .

Beca use customers must access and retrieve information easily, they require
hig h performance regard less of network topology and a consistent interface
for distributed resources . D igital's distributed applications provide efficient
access to information in Digital and multivendor networki ng environments.

5.1

Integrated Personal Computing

Digital's Integrated Personal Computing combines the advantages of
MS-DOS personal computing with the power of VMS to provide comprehensive desktop solutions in a multivendor, enterprise-wide networked
environment. Integrated Personal Computing solutions create an environment that gives customers more features , functions , and growth potential
than a PC local area network, with competitive performance and price .
Digital's PC integration products are based on international industry standards such as OSI, MS-Net , MS -DOS, and NETBIOS. They implement
Digital's Personal Computing Systems Architecture (PCSA) to extend the
MS -DOS desktop environment to the DECnet/VMS environment. PCSA
transparently integrates the personal, departmental, and enterprise computing environments to offer
• Shared files, data , and applications .
• Centralized, simplified management of PC resources .
• Flexible, incremental growth .
• Multivendor support.
The integrated personal computing solution, which combines VAX/ VMS
systems and personal computers in a server/client relationship, includes
• VAX and MicroVAX server computers running VAX/ VMS Services for
MS -DOS and DECnet-VAX software, and
• Networked personal computers running DECnet/PCSA Client software,
which includes DECnet-DOS .

5.2

Integrated Personal Computing

Integrated Personal Computing Environa;Jent

IBM

Mainframe

VAX 8800
Server

Terminator
rl)

c
0

Laser
Printer

·.::::
co
y

Thin Wire

~c(___

P_r_in-te_..r )
7

Thin Wire

:ac.
<

"'O

...u::s
·c
...

..0

T-connector

rl)

Printer

NBG-197-00

VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS, which runs on a VAX or MicroVAX server,
acts like an extension to the local MS-DOS system, making facilities such as
VMS files, VMS directories, or VAX printers appear as MS-DOS equivalents.
This capability allows simple interchange of data between PC and VAXbased applications. MS-DOS applications adhering to the NETBIOS programming interface standard can be used without software modification.
The license for VAX/VMS services for MS-DOS is included with the
DECnet-VAX license at no additional charge. Customers can purchase the
DECnet/PCSA Client license, which allows personal computers to run
software that communicates with VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS, in the
following ways:
·
• As DECnet/PCSA Client software-only option.
• As part of the PC Network Packages, which include appropriate PC network hardware for running the DECnet/PCSA Client software.
• As part of the PC Integration Packages for MicroVAX II or 2000, which
combine the server license, three client licenses, and appropriate network
hardware .

5.3

Integrated Personal Computing

The following table summarizes the products available for PCSA servers
and clients .
Product Summary of PCSA Servers and Clients
Processor

Hardware

Software

Service

Options

VAX/MicroVAX
Server

DEPCA-RA Starter ·Kit for
MicroVAX 2000 Server, or
DESVA-AA 802.3/Ethernet
controller

DECnet-VAX license
(included in DEPCARA/SA): includes VAX/VMS
Services for MS-DOS
license

QS938-SZ PCSA DECstart
(first server installation
only)

Not applicable

DEPCA-SA Starter Kit for
MicroVAX II Server, or
DESTA-AA for adapting a
standard 802.3/Ethernet
controller to ThinWire
VAXmate Server

Q*A93-H VAX/VMS
Services for MS-DOS
media/documentation

PC500-BA (green)
PC500-CA (amber)
RCD3x-FC expansion box
with hard disk

VAXmate Client

Q*A93-** DECsupport,
Basic, Self-maintenance

PC500-BA (green)
PC500-CA (amber)
Includes DECnet/PCSA
Client VAXmate license

Q6A93-UZ VAXmate
Services for MS-DOS
license

QS939-SZ PCSA DECstart
(first service installation
only)

Q6A93-H7 VAXmate
Services for MS-DOS
media/documentation

Q6A93-*7 DECsupport,
Basic, or Self-maintenance
service

Q6ZP3-UZ DECnet/PCSA
Client license (one
required per PC; included
with PC500)

Q6ZP3-3*/3Z Self.
maintenance Service/
Right-to-copy

DEPCA-KA/DEPCB·V* IBM
PC Network Integration
Pkg 1 or
DEPCA-BA/DEPCB-B* PC
network Services Pkg2
(Both include QBZP3-UZ
DECnet/PCSA Client PC
license), or a supported
third-party Ethernet
controller 1

QBZP3-U* DECnet/PCSA
Client PC license 2 (one
required per PC; included
in DEPCA-KA/BA)

PS/2 Models
50/60/80 Client

Asynchronous support
only

QBZP3-UZ DECnet/PCSA
Client license (one
required per client)

PC50X-MA 2-MB RAM

PC50X-AA 2-MB RAM
FP287 Math Coprocessor
PC50X-MA Modem

Q6ZP3-H* DECnet/PCSA
Client media/
documentation (one copy
per network)

IBM PC/XT /AT,
PS/2 Model 30,
and Selected
Compatible
Clients

FP287 Math Coprocessor

RCD3x-FC expansion box
with hard disk

QBZP3-3*/3Z Selfmaintenance Service/
Right-to-copy

DEPCA-AU for direct
connection to standard
802.3/Ethernet cable);
VSXXX-AA mouse

QBZP3-H* DECnet/PCSA
Client media/
documentation (one copy
per network)

QBZP3-3*/3Z Selfmaintenance Service/
Right-to-copy

QBZP3-H* DECnet/PCSA
Client media/
documentation (one copy
per network)
Standalone
VAXmate

PC500-BA (green)

Q6005-A7 license, media,
and documentation for
standalone use

PC500-CA (amber)
RCD3x-FC expansion box
with hard disk

Q6005-*7 DECsupport,
Basic, or Self-maintenance
Service

PC50X-AA 2-MB RAM
FP287 Math Coprocessor
PC50X-MA Modem

*A Refer to the product order code tables to complete the order code.
1

.t. Refer to Software Product Description 55.07 for supported configurations.

Quantity pricing available.

5.4

Integrated Personal Computing

VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS
and DECnet/PCSA Client

VAX/ VMS Services for MS -DOS allows the VAXmate, IBM PC, IBM PC/XT,
IBM Personal Computer AT, IBM PS/ 2, and selected PC compatibles to act
as clients to VAX or MicroVAX servers in a local area network. The PC
clients use selected facilities and services of the server system, and can
access information and services on other types of systems in DECnet networks .
VAX/ VMS Services for MS-DOS consists of networking and server software.
VAX/ VMS Services for MS-DOS implements Digital's Personal Computing
Systems Architecture (PCSA), which integrates industry-standard personal
computing into larger-scale multiuser computing environments . The net work software is based on an adaptation of MS -NET, which allows it to be
used in a DECnet-based network.
VAX/VMS Services for MS -DOS provides file services, disk services, print
services, file transfer, and network management and control. It also offers
remote boot capability for VAXmates and for PCs equipped with Digital's
DEPCA 802 .3/Ethernet controller.
DECnet/PCSA Client software includes DECnet-DOS and MS-NET networking software, NETBIOS interface support, VT200 -series terminal
emulation, Microsoft's MS-Windows, DOS operating system enhancements,
and an Online User Information System . MS-DOS is included for VAXmate;
PC-DOS or MS-DOS is a prerequisite for other PCs.
With DECnet/PCSA Client software, VAXmate and PC systems function as
clients in the integrated personal computing (PCSA) environment, utilizing
the services provided by a VAX or MicroVAX configured as a server.
DOS applications adhering to the NETBIOS programming interface standard can be used without modification with DECnet/PCSA Client and
VAX/ VMS Services for MS-DOS software. In the PCSA environment, the
same NETBIOS applications can run on local area and wide area DECnet
networks, and can communicate with other DECnet applications .

Features
• 802 .3/Ethernet-based communications for high-speed data exchange.
• Asynchronous communication for lower-speed remote data access.
• Access to VAX-based server systems to provide centralized application and
data storage, file and record sharing, centralized system management, and
the ability to share resources such as laser printers and disk storage.
• Full compatibility with Digital's DECnet family of networking products.
• Industry-standard compatibility for running off-the-shelf MS-DOS applications software.

Prerequisite Hardware
• Server systems : Any valid VAX or MicroVAX system connected to the same
local area network as the PC clients.
• Client systems: Several IBM personal computers, selected PC compatibles,
and selected third-party Ethernet controllers are supported .
.& Refer to Software Product Description (SPD ) 30.50 for more information
on VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS, SPD 55 .09 for more information on
VAXmate Services for MS-DOS, SPD 55.07 for more information on PC
configurations, and SPD 55.10 for more information on VAXmate configurations.

5.5

Integrated Personal Computing

Prerequisite Software
•VAX or MicroVAX server systems : VMS or Micro VMS operating system and
DECnet-VAX .
• IBM PC client systems: PC DOS V3.20 or V3 .30
·COMPAQ client systems: COMPAQ MS-DOS V3 .20 Rev A or V3 .30
• VAXmate client systems : no prerequisites

Ordering Information
Customers do not purchase a license to run VAX/ VMS Services for MSDOS, as this license is included with the DECnet-VAX license. The license
to use the DECnet/PCSA Client software for the IBM PC may be purchased
• As described in the following information.
• As part of the PC Network Integration Package or PC Network Services
Package, which combines the Client license with appropriate network
hardware. .& Refer to "PC Network Integration Package and PC Network
Services Package" in this section for more information.
• As part of the PC Integration Packages for MicroVAX 2000 and MicroVAX
II, which combine the DECnet-VAX server license, client licenses, and
appropriate network hardware. .& Refer to "PC Integration Packages for
MicroVAX 2000 and MicroVAX II" in this section for more information.
Follow these instructions to purchase VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS and
the DECnet/PCSA Client software.
• For VAXmate clients, order
- A DECnet/PCSA Client license (Q6ZP3-Ux) for each VAXmate that will
run the DECnet/PCSA Client software. This license includes the license
to use DECnet-VAXmate. License packages are available for multiple
VAXmate clients as indicated in the DECnet/PCSA Client Software Order
Code Table.
- At least one copy of the binaries and documentation for the VAXmate
clients . (One copy may be used to load multiple VAXmates.)
• For IBM PC and PC-compatible clients, order
- A DECnet/PCSA Client license (QBZP3-Ux) for each PC that will run the
DECnet/PCSA Client software. This license includes the license to use
DECnet-DOS. License packages are available for multiple PC clients as
indicated in the DECnet/PCSA Client Software Order Code Table.
- At least one copy of the binaries and documentation for the IBM PC or
PC-compatible clients . (One copy may be used to load multiple PCs.)
• For the server system, order the binaries and documentation (Q*A93-H#)
for the VAX or MicroVAX system that will run VAX/VMS Services for
MS -DOS .
• To realize a smooth installation, new sites should order the PCSA DECstart
Integration Service for MS-DOS (QS938-SZ) from Software Services.

5.6

Integrated Personal Computing

VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS Server Software Order Code
Option

Order Code

Distribution and documentation

Q*A93-H#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (Z); VAX-11/725/730 (C); VAX-11/750 (D);
VAX-11/780/782/785 (E); VAX 820018250 (5); VAX 8300/8350 (7); VAX 8530 (9);
VAX 8550 (2); VAX 860018650 (K); VAX 8700 (2); VAX 8800 (M); VAX 8974/8978 (2)
#Supported media : 3, 5, M

DECnet/PCSA Client Software Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

VAXmate

IBM PC and
Compatibles

Single-use license

Q6ZP3 -UZ

QBZP3-UZ

64-pack license

Q6ZP3-U6

QBZP3-U6

96-pack license

Q6ZP3-U7

QBZP3-U7

128-pack license

Q6ZP3-U8

QBZP3-U8

192-pack license

Q6ZP3-U9

QBZP3-U9

~
c.

500-pack license

Q6ZP3-UB

QBZP3-UB

1000-pack license

Q6ZP3-UC

QBZP3-UC

Q6ZP3-H3
Q6ZP3-H5

QBZF7-HB
QBZF7-HI

Distribution
Distribution and documentation

QBZF7-H5

Software revision right-to-copy

PC Network Integration Package
and PC Network Services Package

c"'

...=

Q6ZP3-HZ

...:su
':9...
...

"'
Q
It)

QBZF7-HZ

The PC Network Integration Package and PC Network Services Package
allow the IBM PC, PC/XT, Personal Computer AT, PS/2 Model 30, and
selected PC compatibles to participate in 802.3/Ethernet local area networks using VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS software.
The PC Network Services Package includes
• DEPCA 802.3/Ethernet/mouse controller for the IBM PC.
• ThinWire 802.3/Ethernet cable kit.
• License to use DECnet/PCSA Client software. • For more information on
DECnet/PCSA Client, refer to "VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS and
DECnet/PCSA Client" in this section.
The PC Network Integration Package includes all the components in the PC
Network Services Package, plus a Digital keyboard and three-button
mouse. (This package varies for each country.) The Digital keyboard displays GOLD KEY labels for ALL-IN-1 and WPS-PLUS, as well as IBM PC
labels .
Ordering Information
To order individual PC Network Integration Packages or PC Network
Services Packages, follow these instructions .
• For each personal computer, order one PC Network Integration Package or
one PC Network Services Package as described in the following Order
Code Table .

5.7

Integrated Personal Computing

• Order at least one copy of the binaries and documentation for the DECnet/
PCSA Client software. • Refer to "VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS and
DECnet/PCSA Client" in this section for ordering information.
• To realize a smooth installation, new sites should order the PCSA DECstart
Integration Service for MS-DOS (QS938-SZ) from Software Services .
In addition to being a component of the PC Network Packages, the DEPCAAA 802.3/Ethernet controller is available as a module -only option, typically purchased when using non-DECnet network software or when
upgrading client PCs from asynchronous to 802 .3/Ethernet
communications. • For more information, refer to "802.3/Ethernet Communications Controllers" in Section 2.
Three PC Network Packages are bundled into the PC Integration Packages
at a lower cost. • For more information, refer to "PC Integration Packages
for MicroVAX 2000 and MicroVAX 11" in this section.
PC Network Packages Order Codes
Option

Order Code

PC Network Integration Package includes DEPCA-AA ThinWire
802.3/Ethernet/mouse controller and ThinWire cable kit,
Digital VSXXX-AA three-button mouse, LK250 keyboard with
cable for IBM PC family, DECnet/PCSA Client single-use
software license, Personal Workstation Handbook, and DEPCA
Owner's Manual.

DEPCA-KA
DEPCB-V*

PC Network Services Package includes DEPCA-AA ThinWire
802.3/Ethernet/mouse controller, ThinWire cable kit, DECnet/
PCSA Client single-use software license, and DEPCA Owner's
Manual.

DEPCA-BA
DEPCB-B*

*Variations for local language keyboards are: A (English), C (Canadian French), D
(Danish), E (Canadian Bilingual), F (Finnish), G (German), I (Italian), K (Swiss
French), L (Swiss German), M (Swedish), N (Norwegian), P (French), S (Spanish), T
(Hebrew)

PC Integration Packages for
MicroVAX 2000 and MicroVAX II

The PC Integration Packages for MicroVAX 2000 and MicroVAX II reduce
the entry-level cost of connecting IBM PCs and selected compatibles to
MicroVAX server systems over an 802.3 / Ethernet local area network using
VAX/ VMS Services for MS-DOS and PCSA Client software. Each PC Integration Package provides the components to link three PCs to a MicroVAX
system in a local area network.
The PC Integration Package for the MicroVAX II includes
• One IBM PC Network Integration Package (DEPCA -KA) and two PC Network Services Packages (DEPCA-BA) . • Refer to "PC Network Integration
Packages and PC Network Services Package" in this section for a detailed
description.
• One QZD04-UZ DECnet-VAX end-node license, which includes the license
to use VAX/ VMS Services for MS -DOS on a MicroVAX server system .
The PC Integration Package for the MicroVAX 2000 includes all the components in the MicroVAX II package, plus the DESVA-AA 802.3 / Ethernet
communications controller for the MicroVAX 2000 .

5.8

Integrated Personal Computing

Prerequisite Hardware
An 802.3/Ethernet communications controller might be needed for early
MicroVAX II systems that did not include the controller with the purchase
of the system.
Ordering Information
Order the following:
• A PC Integration Package for either the MicroVAX II or 2000.
• The binaries-and-documentation kit for VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS .
.& Refer to "VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS and DECnet/PCSA Client" in
this section for the order codes.
The binaries and documentation for DECnet-VAX are included with the
binaries and documentation for VMS V5 .0.
• The binaries-and-documentation kit for DECnet/PCSA Client software .
.& Refer to "VAX/VMS Services for MS-DOS and DECnet/PCSA Client"
in this section for the order codes.
• To realize a smooth installation, new sites should order the PCSA DECstart
Integration Service for MS-DOS (QS938-SZ) from Software Services.
Cables for 802.3/Ethernet are not included because existing networks and
physical arrangements can vary.

c
0

·~
.~

"S.
c..

<
""O

PC Integration Package Order Codes

...
..c
·c...

Option

Order Code

PC Integration Package for MicroVAX II

DEPCA-SA

PC Integration Package for MicroVAX 2000. Includes one
DESVA-AA 802.3/Ethernet communications controller.

DEPCA-RA

Cl>

5.9

DECnet System Services ( DSS)

DECnet System Services (DSS) is a set of networking products that make a
network of VAX systems-including single systems, VAXclusters, and Local
Area VAXclusters-appear to be a single system for many key functions .
DSS allows users to share and manage network resources as easily as if
these resources were directly attached to the local system. DSS products
include
• VAX Distributed File Service (DFS)-offers high-performance, networkwide file operations.
• VAX Distributed Queuing Service (DQS)-provides distributed use and
management of network printing resources .
• Remote System Manager (RSM) - provides system management services
for multiple VMS and ULTRIX systems in a distributed environment .
· VAX Distributed Name Service (DNS)-provides a network-wide base of
names for distributed applications .

Because all DSS products are transparent to existing applications, applications do not have to be rewritten. Also , the average VAX user does not have
to be retrained to use the DSS facilities .
Features
• Provides an easy mechanism for individual systems, VAXclusters, and
Local Area VAXclusters to share data, primers, and system management
resources .

• Files and printers do not have to be duplicated throughout a network
because these resources can be made available to anyone needing access .
• One system manager can manage multiple networked systems .
• Transparency to applications makes it unnecessary to rewrite programs to
take advantage of DSS.
• Provides for various management styles ranging from fully centralized to
full y distributed network management .
• Provides network transparency to both users and applications .
• Supports local and wide area networks , and cluster topologies .

5.10

DECnet System Services (DSS )

DECnec System Services Configuration

RSM Client
DFS andDQS
Client and Server

RSM Client
DNS Server

RSM Client
DOS Client
and Server

t1
VAX/VMS

VAX/VMS

Workstation

Host

ULTRIX

Workstation

VAX/VMS

Host

VAX/VMS

System

c"'
0

·::

=
y

RSM Client

DFSand DOS
Client and Server

1:<
"'Q

NBG-111-00

VAX Distributed File Service
(DFS)

The VAX Distributed File Service (DFS ) is a VMS layered product that
provides DECnet-VAX users with high-speed , transparent access to files
stored on remote VMS disks as if they were on local disks. DFS supports
applications that use virtual I/ O and do not require write sharing .

....::sQI

:S
...

....

s"'

Using DFS, directory structures (a directory and all of its subdirectories)
can be made available to other DFS nodes . These directory structures are
given names which are registered with the VAX Distributed Name Service .
The VAX Distributed Name Service provides location independence
between the " name" that is associated with a directory structure and the
physical location of that directory structure . If this directory structure were
moved to a different location, only a single update is required. After this
single update , all DFS nodes automatically use the new location .
DFS nodes that wish to access distributed directory structures simply
specify the name of the directory structure, using the mount command
supplied with DFS .
A DFS license is required on each VMS node that either makes a directory
structure available to other users, or wants to access remote directory
structures .

5.11

DECnet System Services (DSS)

Features
• Provides users with high performance file access while using fewer CPU
resources than standard DECnet-VAX file access.
• Use and management is similar to the use and management of a local disk.
• Supports all VMS file types.
• Supports the following VMS file operations:
- Shared access (read)
- Exclusive access (read and write)
- All VMS Directory operations, including the creation and deletion of
directories
- Virtual I/O
- Mapped I/O
• Transparent to VMS DCL commands that do not manipulate identifiers, use
logical, physical, or write-shared I/O.
• Uses the VAX Distributed Name Service to provide location independence
of data.
• Can be used in any DECnet environment, including local area networks
and wide area networks. (Optimum performance for directory operations
requires a link speed of at least 56.0 Kb /s.)
• Provides file security through standard VMS proxy mechanism.
• Performs end-to-end checksum to guard against network faults .

Required Hardware
Any valid VAX or MicroVAX system with VMS or MicroVMS configured to
operate on a DECnet network. & Refer to the software order code table
for a list of supported processors.
Prerequisite Software
· VMS or MicroVMS operating system, V4.4 or later (MicroVMS Base Component required)
• DECnet-VAX, V4.4 or later
• VAX Distributed Name Service, Vl.O

5.12

DECnet System Services (DSS)

Distributed File Service Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1
Cluster member

QL-VEQA*·AA
QL.VEQA* -AB

Initial license, primary and cluster3

QL-VEQA*-CA

Monthly rental, single-use3

QL-VEQA*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-VEQA* -DB
QL-VEQA* -HZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

QA-VEQAA -H#

Documentation only

QA-VEQAA-GZ

Installation service

QT-VEQA*-1#

fl)

c
0

·::

U.S. Software Services4

DECsupport service

QT-VEQA* -9#

Basic service

QT-VEQA*-8#

"S.
c.

Self-maintenance service

QT-VEQA* -3#

"'O

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P), MicroVAX 3500/3600
(B), VAXstation II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R), VAXstation 3200/3500 (C),
VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C) , VAX-11/750 (L), VAX-11/780/782/785 (K), VAX 6210
(2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4), VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/8250 (J), VAX 8300/8350
(H), VAX 8530 (G), VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D),
VAX 8810 (E), VAX 8820 (D), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)

....:IQI

...0

·c
....
Q
fl)

#Supported media(#): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), TK50 (5), RX33 (7)
'For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.
2
Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX-11/730.

VAX Distributed Queuing Service

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or
VAX 8600/8650.

For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

The VAX Distributed Queuing Service (DQS ) uses DECnet to extend the
standard VMS print queue service, enabling users to print jobs on printers
distributed across a local or wide area network , and monitor or change
parameters of the job after it is queued.
DQS operates within the client/server environment : Print requests originate
from a client node , and are directed to server nodes that provide print
services . Any node with DQS software can be configured to operate as
client only or as both client and server. DQS does not limit the number of
client or server nodes , or queues . The system manager creates the queues
and establishes the correspondence between client queues and queues on
server nodes.

5.13

DECnet System Services (DSS)

Features
• Supports local and wide area networks, allowing multiple VMS systems to
share printers .
• Provides completely transparent support for most qualifiers of the VMS
PRINT command.
• Attempts to transfer a print job whenever a server becomes available, if it
was previously inaccessible.
• DQS server queues can be configured to direct print jobs to a different
queue if a printer is unavailable .
• Allows additional DQS queues and DQS nodes to be added without rein stalling DQS .
• Can be configured to limit access to servers, and to keep usage records .

Required Hardware
Any valid VAX or MicroVAX system with VMS or Micro VMS configured to
operate on a DECnet network . .A Refer to the software order code table
for a list of supported processors.
Prerequisite Software
·VMS or MicroVMS operating system, V4.4 or later (MicroVMS Base Component required)
·DECnet-VAX, V4.4 or later

5.14

DECnet System Services (DSS)

Distributed Queuing Service Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)
Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1

QL-VENA* -AA

Cluster member 2

QL-VENA*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster

QL-VENA *-CA

Monthly rental, single-use 3

QL-VENA*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster3

QL-VENA*-DB

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-VENA*-HZ

Materials and Installation
Distribution and documentation

QA-VENAA-H#

Documentation only

QA-VENAA-GZ

Installation service
U.S. Software Services

QT-VENA*-l#
4

DECsupport service

QT-VENA* -9 #

Basic service

QT-VENA*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-VENA*-3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P), MicroVAX 3500/3600
(B), VAXstation II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R), VAXstation 3200/3500 (C),
VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX-111750 (L), VAX-11178017821785 (K), VAX 6210
(2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4), VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/8250 (]),VAX 8300/8350
(H), VAX 8530 (G), VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D),
VAX 8810 (E), VAX 8820 (D), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)

It)

#Supported media(#): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), TK50 (5), RX33 (7)

VAX Distributed Name Service
(DNS)

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-111782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX-11/730.

Not available on MicroVAX , VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or
VAX 860018650.

For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

The VAX Distributed Name Service (DNS) provides a network-wide name
service to select Digital distributed applications. (The initial release of DNS
does not include a programmer 's interface.) DNS provides these select
Digital application programs with the ability to create, read, modify, and
delete the names and characteristics of network resources.
DNS presents a consistent, network-wide set of names, called the

namespace, which allows users to refer to resources using the same name
from any node in the network, without knowing where the resource is
located.
The name service is implemented using a client/server model, with the
node running DNS acting as the server. Client software is provided within
Digital applications that use DNS .

5.15

DECnet System Services (DSS)

DNS provides a network-wide name service when it is installed on a single
node. DNS can be installed on additional nodes in a network to provide
availability and performance benefits. As a general rule, it is suggested that
the DNS be placed on two nodes in each local area network to provide
adequate performance and redundancy for most network topologies.
DNS stores name information in databases on DNS nodes. When more than
one DNS node is present in the network , these nodes cooperate to maintain
consistent databases. Overall availability of the name service can be
enhanced by replicating some or all of the directories on multiple DNS
nodes.

Features
• Provides a consistent network -wide set of names that allows selected
applications to refer to network resources using the same name from any
node in the network.
• Provides access control to each name stored in the name service on a
per-user basis.
• Includes a DNS management control program to control DNS operation
and display statistical and error information.
• Provides network event logging using the DECnet-VAX event logging facility. (The DECnet-VAX NCP utility can be used to enable and disable name
service events.)

Required Hardware
Any valid VAX or MicroVAX system with VMS or MicroVMS configured to
operate on a DECnet network. & Refer to the software order code table
for a list of supported processors.
Prerequisite Software
·VMS or MicroVMS operating system, V4.4 or later (MicroVMS Base Component required )
·DECnet-VAX, V4.4 or later

5.16

DECnet System Services (DSS)

Distributed Name Service Order Codes
Option •

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)
Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1

QL-VERA*-AA

Cluster member 2

QL-VERA *-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster 3
Monthly rental, single-use

QL-VERA *-CA
QL-VERA* -DA

Monthly rental, cluster 3

QL-VERA*-DB

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-VERA* -HZ

Materials and Installation
Distribution and documentation

QA -VERAA -H#

Documentation only

QA-VERAA-GZ

Installation service
U.S. Software Services

QT-VERA*-! #
4

"'
=
0

DECsupport service

QT-VERA*-9#

Basic service

QT-VERA* -8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-VERA*-3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P), MicroVAX 3500/3600
(B), VAXstation II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R), VAXstation 3200/3500 (C),
VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX-11/750 (L), VAX-111780/782/785 (K), VAX 6210
(2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4), VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/8250 (J), VAX 8300/8350
(H), VAX 8530 (G), VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D ),
VAX 8810 (E), VAX 8820 (D), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)

Q..

"'O

....Ill:I

•t:

....

"'
Q

#Supported media(#): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), RX33 (7), TK50 (5)

Remote System Manager

For software licensing purposes, a VAX -111782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX -11/730.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or
VAX 8600/8 650.

For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

Remote System Manager (RSM) is a network application that centralizes
and faci litates the recurring system management tasks of
• Distributing and installing software.
• Backing up and restoring files across the network.
• Tracking software configurations among participating systems.
The Remote System Manager environment consists of a number of VMS or
ULTRIX-32 systems configured with DECnet on a local area or wide area
network. One system is the server, running VMS, and the others are clients, running VMS or ULTRIX-32. The server provides services to clients
that are defined in the server's registration and network databases.

5.17

DECnet System Services (DSS)

The Remote System Manager server software comprises a menu interface
and a set of management tools . The primary user interface consists of two
main menus: an installation menu and a management menu . The installation menu is used to perform the initial registration and software installation of clients . The management menu is used to perform ongoing,
repetitive management tasks . The management tools perform such functions as initial software installation, application management, file backup,
file restoration , distribution of RSM logical names, RSM symbols and the
DECnet database , and remote execution of single DCL commands.
RSM supports most members of the VAX family as clients. RSM networks
can comprise multiple servers, distributing the support of a broad client
base.

Features
• Centralized software installation and updating relieves users of system
management responsibilities and ensures current versions of applications
and tools . Centralized file backup relieves users of file backup at the workstation .
• Reduced need for system support resources at client site provides greater
fle xibility for system placement, and lowers operating costs.
• Supports VMS and ULTRIX-32 operating systems .
• Supports wide area , local area, and large networks . Allows flexibility in
balancing system management among servers in such networks .
• Supports clusters as clients.
• Simplifies system management for larger, wide-area networks and minimi zes the costs associated with systems support personnel.
• Useful for managing networks of VAX and MicroVAX systems, each of
which might be serving several PCs using VAX/ VMS Services for MS-DOS.

Required Hardware
• .A. For the RSM server, refer to the appropriate order code table for sup-

ported processors.
• For the RSM client, all VAX and MicroVAX systems. .A. Refer to the appropriate order code table for supported processors. At least one client must
have a load device , such as a TK50 tape drive. .A. Refer to Software Product Description 29.59 for specific system and disk storage requirements.

Software Requirements
• For VMS servers and clients:
- VMS V4.4 through V4 .7
- DECnet-VAX V4.2 through V4.5
- VAX Distributed Name Service (DNS ) installed on at least one node in
the network (two are recommended ) and accessible to the RSM server via
DECnet
• For ULTRIX-32 clients:
- ULTRIX-32 , V2 .0 through V2 .2
- DECnet-ULTRIX-32
- ULTRIX-32 worksystem software
Note : For installation of operating system software, both the RSM server
and client must be in the same LAN or extended LAN.

5.18

DECnet System Services (DSS)

Remote System Manager VMS Server Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1

QL·Bl3A*-AA

Cluster member 2

QL-Bl3A*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster3

QL.Bl3A*-CA

Monthly rental, single-use3

QL-Bl3A*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-Bl3A*-DB
QL·Bl3A*-HZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

QA-Bl3AA.H#

Documentation only

QA-Bl3AA-GZ

Installation service

QT-Bl3A*-I#

U.S. Software Services 4

DECsupport service

QT-B13A*-9#

Basic service

QT-Bl3A*-8 #

Self-maintenance service

QT-B13A*-3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P), MicroVAX 3500/3600
(B), VAXstation II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R), VAXstation 3200/3500 (C),
VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX-11/750 (L), VAX-11/780/782/785 (K), VAX 6210
(2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4), VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/8250 (]),VAX 8300/8350
(H), VAX 8530 (G), VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D),
VAX 8810 (E), VAX 8820 (D), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)
#Supported media(#): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), RX33 (7), TK50 (5)
1

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.
2 Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX-11/730.
3 Not avllilable on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or

VAX 8600/8650.
4 For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

5.19

DECnet System Services (DSS)

Remote System Manager Client Software Order Codes

VMS

ULTRIX-32'

Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1

QL-Bl4A*-AA

Q*ZEZ-UZ

Cluster member

QL-B14A*-AB 2

Option
Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Initial license, primary and cluster 3
Monthly rental, single-use

QL-Bl4A*-CA

Q*ZEZ-lP

QL-B14A* -DA

Q*ZEZ-JP

Monthly rental, cluster

QL-B14A*-DB 3

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-B14A*-HZ

Q*ZEZ-HZ

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P), MicroVAX 3500/3600
(B), VAXstation II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R), VAXstation 3200/3500 (C),
VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX-11/750 (L), VAX-11/780/782/785 (K), VAX 6210
(2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4), VAX 6240 (D), VAX 820018250 (]),VAX 8300/8350
(H), VAX 8530 (G), VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D),
VAX 8810 (E), VAX 8820 (D), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)
#Supported media(#): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), RX33 (7), TK50 (5)
1

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX-11/730 for VMS.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-111700 series, or
VAX 860018650 for VMS.

For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

'ULTRIX-32 Client Software not available for VAX 6210, VAX 6220, VAX 6230,
VAX 6240, VAX 8530, VAX 8810, VAX 8820, VAX 8840, VAX 8974, VAX 8978,
MicroVAX I, VAXstation I, or VAXstation 8000.

5.20

Business Communications

The following applications supply answers for specific multivendor requirements :
• MAILbus Electronic Mail Interchange - Electronic mail and messaging
services allows users and application programs to exchange mail or messages in a multivendor environment. These services are based on the
CCITT X.400 standard for message handling .
•VAX Notes-A computer conferencing software product , VAX Notes allows
users to create and access online conferences.
•VAX VTX-Videotex is a distributed information retrieval service that the
user can navigate by selecting choices from a menu. VAX VTX , a software
product layered on VMS , provides videotex services compliant with CCITT
F.300 regulations.
MAILbus Electronic Mail
Interchange

MAILbus is a set of applications software that links multivendor electronic
mail systems and messaging applications into an enterprise-wide electronic
messaging system. MAILbus provides a company with the ability to tie all
of its mail systems together in a corporate-wide electronic mail backbone,
and enables electronic mail exchange with public electronic mail systems.
Messages delivered on MAILbus follow the model specified in the CCITT
X.400 Message Handling System Recommendations. The recommendations
outline three major components for a message-handling system, the OSI
network, the Message Transfer Service, and the User Agents. MAILbus is
Digital's Message Transfer Service and consists of
· VAX Message Router Base.

"'c

~
u
:::i

c.
c.

"'O

....QJ:I

..0

·c
....

"'
Q

· VAX Message Router VMSmail Gateway.
· ULTRIX Mail Connection.
•VAX Message Router/S Gateway (for IBM SNADS).
·VAX Message Router/P Gateway (for IBM PROFS).
· VAX Message Router X.400 Gateway.
· VAX MAILGATE for MCI Mail.
•VAX Message Router Programmer's Kit (API).

5.21

Business Communications

Digitsl's Distributed Electronic Messsging Solution Components

O/SOSS/

PROFS

Personal
Services

Proprietary
User Agents
(Custom
Applications)

ULTRIX
Mail
Connection

ALL-/N-1
Family

Other
VMSmail

X.400

User
Agents

l
SNADS

Message
Transfer
Services

MAILbus

Message
Router/P

Message
RouterIS

Proprietary
Gateway

Message
Router

t--

Message
Router

Message
Router
VMSmail
Message
Router

Message
Router
X.400

Message
Router

T
\J

Custom
Gateways

DECnet!
OS/

Network

Public
Carriers
XAOO
Networks

Base
Network

NBG-152-00

VAX Message Router

VAX Message Router is a key component of the MAILbus. It is a layered
VMS application that provides a store-and-forward message transfer service,
a directory service, and a messaging network management service. Messages can consist of any information, including text, data and arbitrary
files , that need to be transferred within a DECnet network.
Electronic mail user agents , such as ALL-IN-1 or DECmail-11, attach
directly to MAILbus to access network store-and-forward services. Other
user agents, such as VMSmail, attach to MAILbus through Gateway products, which include VMSmail, MCI Mail, UNIX System V, IBM SNADS, and
IBM PROFS. An additional product, the Message Router X.400 Gateway,
adapts MAILbus to run in a fully compliant OSI environment.
In order to access the store-and -forward services of Message Router, a user
agent or gateway must perform some or all of the following functions :
• Format and display messages.
• Interact with Message Router to send or receive messages.
• Convert a received message from Message Router format to the application
format.
• Convert a sending application format into the Message Router format .
Message Router must be installed on any network node that contains user
agents or gateways that require connection to MAILbus. It is a standard
component of ALL-IN-1 and PC ALL-IN-1 configurations, all Mail Gateways , and Message Router Programmer's Kit .
& For more information, refer to Software Products Description 26.33.

5.22

Business Communications

Features
• Used by Mail Agents and Gateways to exchange messages in a Digital-only
or multivendor environment.
• Logs the progress of messages and informs the sending application if not
deliverable. Messages that cannot be immediately delivered are retained in
a Message Router node until they can be forwarded. (The system manager
controls the number and frequency of retries before the Message Router
returns a message to the sender as undeliverable.)
• May be installed in selected VMS nodes along a routing path to store messages that may, for example, be retained for transmission at off-peak hours,
or logged into a central, record-keeping node for accounting or statistical
analysis.
• May be used by any application adhering to Message Router or X.400
protocols that needs to transfer data in a multivendor environment.
• Used by mail gateways to convert messages addresses between their
MAILbus form and the form used in the foreign mail systems.
• Contains application management services for automated system management, including exception reporting and Management Action Procedures
(MAPS), which allow an organization to significantly reduce mail network
management costs.
• Provides a procedure to configure a simplified, low-management network
with the ability to easily reconfigure the network to allow for expansion.

VAX Message Router Base
The VAX Message Router Base is supplied as a separate package for installation with customer-written Message Router applications. Also, it may be
installed on selected VMS nodes along a routing path, wherever there is a
need to store and log messages in transit. This allows for a centrally managed message transfer service.

c"'
0

·~
C'll
y

=a0..
<

""O

..c=

a-"'
·i:

Required Hardware
Any valid VAX, MicroVAX, or VAXstation system configuration that supports the DECnet Phase IV network. A Refer to the order code table for a
list of supported processors.
Prerequisite Software
•VMS or MicroVMS operating system V5.0
·DECnet-VAX, V5.0

5.23

Business Communications

Message Router Base Order Codes
Order Code

Option
Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1
Cluster member

QL-732A*-AA
QL-732A*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster 3

QL-732A*-CA

Monthly rental, single-use 3

QL-732A*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-732A*-DB
QL-732A*-HZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

QA-732AA-H#

Documentation only

QA-732AA-GZ

Installation service

QT-732A*-l#

U.S. Software Services 4

DECsupport service

QT-732A*-9#

Basic service

QT-732A*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-732A*-3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P), VAXstation II (Q),
VAXstation 2000 (R), VAX-11/730 (M), VAX -11/750 (L), VAX-11/780/782/785 (K),
VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4), VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/8250 (]),
VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 8530 (G), VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E),
VAX 8800 (D)
#Supported media (#): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), RXOl (Y), RX33 (7), TK50 (5), TU58
(G)
1

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXstation, or VAX-11/730.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXstation, VAX -11/700 series, or VAX 8600/8650.
For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

VAX Message Router VMSmail
Gateway

VAX Message Router VMSmail Gateway is a layered VMS application that
allows VMSmail users to send and receive mail in a network from other
systems that use the MAILbus. The VMSmail Gateway package contains the
Message Router Base and the Gateway to the VMS Personal Mail Utility.

Features
• Allows VMS mail users to exchange messages using Message Router storeand-forward management, thus ensuring guaranteed delivery.
• Allows VMS mail users to exchange messages with users of other mail
agents on the MAILbus .
• Allows VMS mail users to exchange messages with the users of non-Digital
supplied mail systems via the X.400 Gateway, Message Router/S Gateway,
or Message Router/P Gateway.
• Converts incoming Digital DX format and WPS-PLUS documents into
ASCII before delivering them to the VMSmail user.
• Includes management tools to configure and operate the Gateway.

5.24

Business Communications

Required Hardware
Any valid VAX, MicroVAX, or VAXstation system configuration that supports the DECnet Phase IV network. & Refer to the order code table for a
list of supported processors.

Prerequisite Software
• VMS or Micro VMS operating system V 4 .4 or later
• DECnet-VAX
Message Router VMSmail Gateway Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1

QL-730A*-AA

Cluster. member 2

QL-730A*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster 3
Monthly rental, single-use

QL-730A*-CA
QL-730A*-DA

"'c

Q
·~
~

Monthly rental, cluster 3

QL-730A*-DB

Software revision right-to-copy

QL·730A*-HZ

"'O

Materials and Installation

....QJ

Distribution and documentation

QA-730AA-H#

Documentation only

QA-730AA-GZ
QT-730A*-l#

Installation service
U.S. Software Services

Q,,

J:J

·c....
"'
Q
II)

DECsupport service

QT-730A*-9#

Basic service

QT-730A*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-730A*-3#

*Supported processors (*): MicroVAX II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P), VAXstation II (Q),
VAXstation 2000 (R), VAX-11/730 (M), VAX-11/750 (L), VAX-111780/782/785 (K),
VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4), VAX 6240 (D), VAX 820018250 (}),
VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 8530 (G), VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E),
VAX 8800 (D)
#Supported media(#): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), RXOl (Y), RX33 (7), TK50 (5), TU58
(G)

'For software licensing purposes, a VAX -11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.
2
Not available on MicroVAX, VAXstation, or VAX-11/730.
3 Not available on MicroVAX, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or VAX 860018650.
4

For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

5.25

Business Communications

ULTRIX Mail Connection

The ULTRIX Mail Connection, an electronic mail product layered on
ULTRIX , provides high-performance, direct access to the VMS Message
Router and thus to the MAILbus domain and all its gateways and user
agents . The product allows ULTRIX users to exchange mail messages with
VMS-based users (ALL-IN-1, VMSma il) , IBM users (via Message Router/P
and Message Router/ S Gateways ), and X.400-based users (via Message
Router/ X.400 Gateway). In addition to the gateway, the ULTRIX Mail
Connection provides an enhanced mail user agent.
Users on ULTRIX and non-Digital UNIX-based systems can use the
ULTRIX Mail Connection as an exchange gateway between any of their
UNIX-based systems and MAILbus, enabling effective, simple mail communication between industry standard (UNIX -based systems) and proprietary
(VMS ) communities .
Note that the ULTRIX Mai l Connection gateway handles only ASCII text:
Incoming mail messages with non-ASCII body parts, such as WPS-PLUS
documents , cause a deliver y message to be sent to the ULTRIX recipient
with a brief description of the type of message and the sender 's name/
address , allowing users to make other arrangements.

• Refer to Software Product Description 29.05 for further information.

Features
• Provides connectivity between UNIX-based mail and MAILbus through
VMS Message Router V3.0.
· Allows ULTRIX users to exchange mail with ALL-IN -1, VMSmail users,
plus access X.400 , IBM/ PROFS , and IBM/ SNADS gateways .
• Acts as a gateway between non-Digital UNIX-based systems and MAILbus .

Required Hardware
For ULTRIX, in addition to the minimum ULTRIX hardware requirements
for the prerequisite ULTRIX and DECnet software, ULTRIX Mail Connection requires a minimum of 5 Mbyte disk space allocated permanently.
For VMS , in addition to the minimum hardware requirements for the prerequisite VMS and Message Router software, ULTRIX Mail Connection
requires 1,000 blocks of (512 Kbytes ) disk space allocated permanently.

Required Software
For the ULTRIX system :
• ULTRIX-32 V2 .2 or later, or ULTRIX Worksystem Software Vl.1 or later
• DECnet-ULTRIX V2 .2 or later
For VMS:
· VMS V4.6 , V4 .7, or V5 .0; or MicroVMS V4.6 or V4 .7
• Message Router V3 .0 or V3.1
· DECnet-VAX V4 .6 , V4 .7, or V5.0

5.26

Business Communications

ULTRIX Mail Connection
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)
Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1

QL-VFGA*-AA

Cluster member 2

QL-VFGA* -AB

Initial license, primary and cluster

QL-VFGA*-CA

Monthly rental, single-use 3

QL-VFGA*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster3

QL-VFGA*-DB

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-VFGA*-HZ

Materials and Installation
Distribution and documentation

QA-VFGAA-H#

Documentation only

QA-VFGAA-GZ

Installation service
U.S. Software Services

QT-VFGA*-l#
4

DECsupport service

QT-VFGA* -9#

Basic service

QT-VFGA*-8#

Self-maintenance service ·

QT-VFGA* -3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P), MicroVAX 3500/3600
(B) , VAXstation II (Q) , VAXstation 2000 (R), VAXstation 3200/3500 (C),
VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C) , VAX-11/750 (L), VAX-111780/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2),
VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4), VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/8250 (]),VAX 8300/8350 (H),
VAX 8530 (G), VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D), VAX 8810 (E) , VAX 8820
(D), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)
#Supported media(#): RX50 (3), TK50 (5), TU58 (G), RL02 (H) , 1,600 bpi magtape
(M), RXOl (Y)

VAX Message Router/S Gateway
(for IBM SNADS )

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.

Not available on MicroVAX I, VAXserver I, VAXstation I, or VAX-111725/730.

Not available on MicroVAX I, VAXserver I, VAXstation I, VAX-11/700 series, or
VAX 8600/8650.

For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

Message Router/S Gateway is a layered VMS application that allows the
transparent exchange of electronic mail, messages , revisable and finalformat documents , and MS-DOS files between the users of Digital and IBM
Office Networks. The Message Router/S Gateway links IBM systems into a
multivendor office network using an international standard (CCITT X.400).
The IBM DISOSS/ 3 70 contains the mainframe implementation of Systems
Network Architecture Distribution Services (SNADS), which provides a
store-and-forward function for the transmission of electronic mail and
documents through an SNA network. IBM System 36 and 38, and IBM
5520 also support SNADS, although the connection between DECnet and
SNA networks must be through the IBM mainframe. From the Digital office
network , WPS -PLUS, ASCII , and Digital Document Exchange (DX) documents and messages are converted to DCA revisable format for transmission
to SNADS systems . Documents and messages in DCA format received by
the Message Router/S Gateway from the SNADS environment are converted to the Digital DX document format for delivery within the network .
MS-DOS files are transferred with no conversion in either direction.

5.27

Business Communications

The Message Router/S Gateway need be installed on only one VAX/ VMS
system in the Digital network, where it serves all D igital network systems
that send or receive messages to or from the SNADS environment . The
Message Router Base must be installed on the same system as the Message
Router/ S Gateway. & Refer to Software Product Description 29.24 for
more information .
Features
• Allows users in the IBM SNADS environment to communicate with any
other Message Router User Agent or Gateway on the Digital network (once
the appropriate entries are made in the Digital Distributed Directory Services ).
• Mail senders need know only the recipient's address . IBM users address
Digital users following the conventions of the SNADS environment; Digital
users address IBM users following the conventions of the Digital environment.
• Digital and IBM users can be included in the same message address or
distribution list .
• Delivery confirmation and non-delivery notification messages are supported .
& For more information about general Message Router capabilities, refer to
"Message Router" in this section.

Required Hardware
• Any valid VAX, MicroVAX, or VAXstation system that supports the DECnet
Phase IV network. & Refer to the order code table for a list of supported
processors.
• One of the following:
- A properly configured DECnet/ SNA Gateway system . & Refer to Software Product Description 30.15 for specific requirements.
- VMS/ SNA installed for single-system connection through a synchronous
line. .&. Refer to Software Product Description 27.01 for specific requirements.
Prerequisite Software
· VMS or MicroVMS Operating System , V4.4 or later (MicroVMS requires
both Extended Base and Program Development components .)
• DECnet -VAX, V4.4 or later
• Message Router Base, V3 .0 or later
• DECnet/SNA VMS APPC/ LU6.2 Programming Interface, V2 .0

5.28

Business Communications

Message Router/S Gateway Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)
Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1

QL-VDUA*-AA

Cluster member 2

QL-VDUA*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster3

QL-VDUA*-CA

Monthly rental, single-use 3

QL-VDUA*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-VDUA*-DB
QL-VDUA*-HZ

Materials and Installation
Distribution and documentation

QA-VDUAA-H#

Documentation only

QA-VDUAA-GZ

Installation service

QT-VDUA*-I#

c"'
0

U.S. Software Services 4

·~

DECsupport service

QT-VDUA*-9#

Basic service

QT-VDUA*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-VDUA*-3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P), VAXstation II (Q),
VAXstation 2000 (R), VAX-11/730 (M), VAX-11/750 (L), VAX-11/780/782/785 (K),
VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4), VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/8250 (]),
VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 8530 (G), VAX 8550 (E), VAX 860018650 (F), VAX 8700 (E),
VAX 8800 (D), VAX 8810 (E), VAX 8820 (D), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)

"'Cl

·c....=
"'

..c

i:5

#Supported media(#): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), RXOl (Y), TK50 (5), TU58 (G), RX33
(7)

VAX Message Router/P Gateway
(for IBM PROFS)

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXstation, or VAX-11/730.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXstation, VAX-111700 series, or VAX 8600/8650.

For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

Message Router/P (MR/P) Gateway is a layered VMS application that allows
the transparent exchange of electronic mail, messages , revisable and finalform documents, and MS-DOS files between users in a DECnet environment and users in a IBM Professional Office System (PROFS) or
Conversational Monitor System (CMS) in an SNA environment. Digital and
IBM users employ standard methods to prepare and send documents and
messages. MR/P converts mail messages and documents from either environment and forwards them in a format appropriate to the recipient. MR/P
can send mail messages and documents from PROFS users to users in the
Digital network, SNADS network (via the Message Router/S gateway) , and
X.400 network (via Message Router X.400 gateway). Communications
between DECnet and IBM SNA environments is through a DECnet/SNA
gateway or VMS/SNA software.
The Message Router/P Gateway need be installed on only one VAX/VMS
system in the Digital network, where it serves all Digital network systems
that send or receive messages to or from the PROFS or CMS environment..
The Message Router Base must be installed on the same system as the
Message Router/P Gateway. £ Refer to Software Product Description
28.94 for more information .

5.29

Business Communications

Features
• Allows IBM PROFS or VM CMS users to communicate with any Message
Router User Agent or Gateway on the Digital network, once the appropriate entries are made in the Digital Distributed Directory Service. A Refer
to "DECnet Distributed Services" in this section for more information on
the Distributed Directory Service.
• Mail senders need know only the rec ipient 's address : PROFS users address
Digital users as they would other PROFS users; Digital users address
PROFS users as they would other Digital users.
• Digital and IBM users can be included in the same message address or
distribution list.
• Delivery confirmation and non-delivery notification messages are supported.
A For more information about other Message Router capabilities, refer to
the Message Router topic in this section.

Required Hardware
• Any valid VAX, MicroVAX, or VAXstation system that supports the DECnet
Phase IV network . A Refer to the order code table for a list of supported
processors.
• One of the following:
- A properly configured DECnet/SNA Gateway system. A Refer to Software Product Description 30.15 for specific requirements.
- VMS/ SNA installed for single-system connection through a synchronous
line. A Refer to Software Product Description 27.01 for specific requirements.

Prerequisite Software
·VMS or MicroVMS Operating System V4.4 or later. (MicroVMS requires
both Extended Base and Program Development components .)
·DECnet-VAX V4.4 or later
·Message Router Base V3 .0 or later
• DECnet/SNA VMS API V2.2

5.30

Business Communications

Message Router/P Gateway Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)
Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1

QL-VCGA*-AA

Cluster member 2

QL-VCGA*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster3

QL-VCGA*-CA

Monthly rental, single-use 3

QL-VCGA*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-VCGA*-DB
QL-VCGA*-HZ

Materials and Installation
Distribution and documentation

QA-VCGAA-H#

Documentation only

QA-VCGAA-GZ

Installation service

QT-VCGA*-I#

U.S. Software Services4

DECsupport service

QT-VCGA*-9#

Basic service

QT-VCGA*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-VCGA*-3#

*Supported processors (*): MicroVAX II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P), VAXstation II (Q),
VAXstation 2000 (R), VAX-11/730 (M), VAX-11/750 (L), VAX-11/780/782/785 (K),
VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4), VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/8250 (}),
VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 8530 (G), VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E),
VAX 8800 (D), VAX 8810 (E), VAX 8820 (D), VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)

a
·:::
=
1
<
Ill

"'O

...u

...

·i::

s
Ill

#Supported media(#): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), RXOl (Y), TK50 (5), TU58 (G), RX33

(7)

VAX Message Router X.400
Gateway

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXstation, or VAX-11/730.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or VAX 8600/8650.

For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

VAX Message Router X.400 Gateway is a layered VMS application that
provides a communication path between a Message Router-based network
and any other message transfer service that conforms to the CCITT 1984
X.400 Recommendations for Message Handling Systems. The Message
Router X.400 Gateway allows users of mail agents running on Message
Router, such as ALL -IN -1, to communicate with X.400 mail,systems either
in other networks or within the same network.

Message Router supports messages constructed using the encoding defined
by the National Bureau of Standards (NBS) Specification for the Message
Format for Computer-based Message Systems. The structure of the messages follows the format specified in the CCITT X.400 Recommendations.
The Message Router X.400 Gateway converts the messaging protocols
between NBS and X.409 encoding.
The Message Router X.400 Gateway (together with Digital's OSI products )
provides interconnection between Digital's mail systems and other X.400
systems, which may be within the same network , or within private or public
X.400 networks. A. Refer to Software Product Description 27.50 for more
information.

5.31

Business Communications

Features
• Conforms to the CCITT X.400 Recommendations as defined in the profiles
produced by CEPT (A311), CEN/CENELEC (A3211), and the NBS/X.400
profile.
• Includes Message Router Base and components of the VAX OSI Applications Kernel (OSAK), which includes the transport (VOTS). The Message
Router X.400 Gateway can run on any node in the mail network, provided
that it is connected to the mail system by Message Router and has access on
the same node to Message Router and either VAX P.S.I. or VAX P.S.I.
Access.
• Complements the ALL-IN-1 Integrated Office and Information System,
VMS mail, and other mail systems that can access the Message Router.
• Allows electronic mail to be exchanged with other electronic mail systems
or public service providers that support the X.400 Recommendations.
• Provides for electronic mail interchange between two independent DECnet
networks.
• Provides a directory service to translate between Digital addressing and
CCITT X.400 Originator/Recipient name forms .
• Includes management tools to configure and operate the Gateway.
Required Hardware
• Any valid VAX, MicroVAX II, VAXstation II system configuration that supports the DECnet Phase IV network.
• A communications device supported by VAX P.S.I. or a communications
device supporting 802 .3/Ethernet for Packetnet (X.25) communication .
Prerequisite Software
·VMS or MicroVMS operating system V4.4.
·DECnet-VAX, VAX P.S.I. or VAX P.S.I. Access V4.0, and VOTS Vl.l.
• Any mail system running on Message Router (requires VMSmail Gateway
V2 .1 for VMSmail connection) .

5.32

Business Communications

Message Router X.400 Gateway Orcler Cocles
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1

QL-VDMA*-AA

Cluster member 2

QL-VDMA*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster3

QL-VDMA*-CA

Monthly rental, single-use 3

QL·VDMA*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster 3

QL-VDMA*-DB

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-VDMA*-HZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

QA-VDMAA-H#

Documentation only

QA-VDMAA-GZ

Installation service

QT-VDMA*-I#

U.S. Software Services 4
DECsupporr service

QT-VDMA*-9#

Basic service

QT-VDMA*.8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-VDMA*-3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P), MicroVAX 3500/3600
(B), VAXstation II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R), VAXstation 3200/3500 (C),
VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX-11/730 (M), VAX-11/750 (L),
VAX-11/780/782/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4), VAX 6240 (D),
VAX 8200/8250 (}), VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 8530 (G), VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650
(F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D), VAX 8810 (E), VAX 8820 (D), VAX 8840/8842/8974
(V), VAX 8978 (5)

It)

#Supported media (#): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), RXOl (Y), TK50 (5), TU58 (G), RX33
(7)

VAX MAILGATE for MCI Mail

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU .

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXstation, or VAX-11/730.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or VAX 8600/8650.

For non-U.S. service agreements, consult a local Digital sales representative.

VAX MAILGATE for MCI Mail is a VMS electronic mail-handling facility
that communicates with the nationwide MCI Mail System to extend VMSbased capability. VAX MAILGATE allows ALL-IN-1 users to add the delivery options of MCI Mail to their inhouse mail systems. Messages can be
delivered to any address allowed by MCI Mail; likewise, VAX ALL-IN-1
users can receive mail from anyone who connects to MCI Mail.
ALL-IN-1 customers can specify delivery and handling information for
their messages by using addressing screens customized for use with MCI

Mail. Users also have online help for these screens.
Messages can be sent to
• Users on their own VAX.
• MCI Mail subscribers.

• Users on other systems connected to MCI Mail.
• Telex users.

In addition, a user with a registered MCI letterhead and signature can send
printed copies of a message to a anyone at nearly any postal address.

5.33

Business Communications

MAILGATE forms a gateway to MCI Mail by translating message formats
between the VAX Message Router and MCI Mail, and by transferring the
messages between the VAX system and MCI Mail. Outgoing messages and
addressing information are collected from the user by the User Agent
(ALL-IN-1 ), and then passed to the Message Router. MAILGATE then
transfers the messages from the Message Router to a message queue to
await transfer to MCI Mail. MAILGATE transmits outgoing messages in the
queue to MCI Mail over a 1200 baud asynchronous dialup line using an
MCI proprietary protocol. A Refer to Software Product Description 27.34
for further information.
Features
• Standard address and message-input methods can be used for ALL-IN-1.
MAILGATE also provides special ALL-IN -1 addressing screens with online
help.
• With VMS security features, users can control access to messages, configuration data , and images . They can also specify default message handling
information.
• The MGMAN utility allows the system manager to control the message
queue , MAILGATE processes, and configuration parameters.
• Configuration information is kept in a database ; customization includes
- MCI Mail access information .
- Modem type and asynchronous port .
- Whether each outgoing message causes MAILGATE to dial MCI Mail.
- How long to wait after messages have been transferred before dialing
MCI Mail again.
- The maximum number of messages. transferred in one direction before
changing direction.
- Whether events are logged.
- Whether user access to MCI Mail is controlled.
- Whether undeliverable messages are returned to the sender or queued
for review by the system manager.
Required Hardware
• Any valid VAX , MicroVAX II , or VAXstation II system configuration that
supports a DECnet Phase IV network with a minimum of 2 MB of memory.
(An R80/RL02 configuration is required for the VAX-11/730.) The
VAX-111725 is not supported .
• A homogeneous VAXcluster running Message Router and MAILGATE on
the same node.
.
· One of the following UNIBUS or Q-bus (non-server) communications
devices : DHUll , DZll , DMZ32 , DZQll , DHVll .
•Any of the following 1200 baud modems :
- DF03-AC, -RC
- DF112-AA, -AM
- DF124-AA, -AM
- DF224-AA
Note: MAILGATE is normally installed at 1200 baud; increased baud rates
are possible. • Refer to Software Product Description 27.34 for block
space and minimum disk space requirements.

5.34

Business Communications

Prerequisite Software
•VMS operating system, V4.4 or later.
•Message Router for VMS, V2.0 or later.
• ALL-IN-1, V2.0 or later.
The VAX Message Router, V2.0 must be installed on all routing nodes.
Note: An MCI Mail Remote Electronic Mail account is necessary to use
this software package. All necessary contractual agreements between MCI
Mail and the customer are to be made by these two parties. Digital Equipment Corporation does not participate in this process.
VAX MAILGATE for MCI Mail Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

"'
c:

Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1

QL-742A*-AA

Cluster member 2

.S!
...

QL-742A*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster 3
Monthly rental, single-use

QL-742A*-CA

QL-742A*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster 3

QL-742A*-DB

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-742A*-HZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

QA-742AA-H#

Documentation only

QA-742AA-GZ

Installation service

U.S. Software Services

Cll

...
·c
...

"'ti
41
:I

..c

"'
Q
It)

QT-742A*-l#
4

DECsupport service

QT-742A*-9#

Basic service

QT-742A*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-742A*-3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (N), VAXstation II (Q), VAX-11/730 (M),
VAX-11/750 (L), VAX-11/780/782/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4),
VAX 6240 (D), VAX 820018250 (J), VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 8530 (G), VAX 8550 (E),
VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D), #Supported media(#): Magtape,
1,600 bpi (M), TK50 (5), TU58 (G), RX33 (7)
1

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-111782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.
2
Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX-11/730.
3
Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or
VAX 8600/8650.
4
For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

5.35

Business Communications

VAX Message Router Programmer's
Kit

The VAX Message Router Programmer's Kit allows customers to write
applications that exchange messages over the network. The Message Router
provides guaranteed delivery, thus relieving the application program from
the need to consider the network state. User-written applications may
exchange messages with the Digital-supplied mail systems and gateways, or
may run independently.
The Message Router Programmer 's Kit contains the Message Router Base
and a run-time library of high-level interface routines that can be invoked
from a user application. The kit includes documentation to guide the
programmer in writing User Agents and Gateways.

Required Hardware
Any valid VAX, MicroVAX, or VAXstation system configuration that supports the DECnet Phase IV network . A Refer to the order code table for a
list of supported processors.
Prerequisite Software
• VMS or Micro VMS operating system V 4.4 or later
• DECnet-VAX
Message Router Programmer's Kit Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1

QL-733A*-AA

Cluster member 2

QL-733A*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster 3
Monthly rental, single-use

QL-733A*-CA
QL-733A*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster3

QL-733A*-DB

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-733A*-HZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

QA-733AA-H#

Documentation only

QA-733AA-GZ

Installation service

QT-733A*-I#

U.S. Software Services 4
DECsupport service

QT-733A*-9#

Basic service

QT-733A*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-733A*-3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P), VAXstation II (Q),
VAXstation 2000 (R), VAX-11/730 (M), VAX-11/750 (L), VAX-11/780/782/785 (K),
VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3) , VAX 6230 (4), VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/8250 (]),
VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 8530 (G), VAX 8550 (E), VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E),
VAX 8800 (D)
#Supported media (#): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), TK50 (5), TU58 (G), RX33 (7), RXOl
(Y)

#Supported media: 5, 7, G, M, Y
1

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-111782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXstation, or VAX-11/730.

Not available on MicroVAX, VAXstation, VAX -11/700 series, or VAX 860018650.

For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

5.36

Business Communications

VAX Notes

VAX Notes is a computer conferencing software product that allows users
to create and access online conferences or meetings. Computer
conferencing lets users conduct meetings with people in different geographic locations via computer, so that participants can join in a discussion
from their desks at any time. It also keeps a detailed record of the proceedings of a meeting, which can be searched by a variety of criteria, such
as name of participant, subject, or keyword.
VAX Notes can be used as an "electronic bulletin board" or collaborative
document for authoring and reviewing. It can be used for internal classes
or seminars, and can provide expertise to groups that lack resources in a
given area by referencing expert resources in a company. VAX Notes provides an efficient communication flow across the corporate hierarchy.
A Refer to Software Product Description 27.06 for detailed information.

Features
• Distributed access - VAX Notes has been designed for optimal multinode
access in a DECnet network, using server technology to achieve rapid
response, even from distant nodes. VAX Notes conferences can exist on
and be accessed from any VMS node in a DECnet network, offering true
distributed processing and access capabilities. Users on remote nodes need
not have an account on the node where the conference is located.

• Moderator support-A moderator is a person responsible for managing a
conference, which can be public or private. For private conferences, the
moderator can restrict access to a specific group of participants by specifying name and network location. Public conferences have no restrictions on
who may participate. The moderator may send announcements of new
conferences to participants, and has the ability to delete notes entered by
other participants . Moderators may also create special notices which are
displayed for all participants each time the conference is accessed.

c:
"'
0

·~
u

i.
0..
<
"ti
....u:s
:S
....

"'
Q

• Ease-of-use-All functions can be accessed by easy-to-use commands ,
supported with online contextual help. Documentation quickly familiari zes
new users with VAX Notes.
• Choice of editor interfaces-VAX Notes provides three screen-oriented
user interfaces for editing, allowing users to specify EVE (an extensible
interface), EDT-style keypad interface, or WPS-style Gold keypad interface
on ANSI-compatible terminals . VAX Notes also includes a line-mode editor
for use on non-ANSI terminal devices .
• Topics and replies-VAX Notes uses a simple topic-and-replies structure to
maintain conferences, with no difficult hierarchy to navigate. Directory
listings show all topics by author, title and date, and the number of replies .
All notes can be read either sequentially or at random. Also , users may
read only those notes which they have not yet seen. VAX Notes allows
participants to search for various topics and replies using the DIRECTORY
and KEYWORD commands.
• Imported Text- VAX Notes allows notes and replies to be created outside
VAX Notes (using any editor which can produce ASCII output files ), then
later imported to the conference.
· Mail Integration-VAX Notes uses VMSmail (included in the VMS Operating System) to allow users to send notes or messages to other users from
within VAX Notes .

5.37

Business Communications

Prerequisite Hardware
VAX, MicroVAX or VAXstation configurations as specified in Software
Product Description 27.06.xx-A
Note: VAX Notes supports screen-oriented editing only on terminals that
respond to ANSI control functions and that operate in ANSI mode. VAX
Notes screen-oriented editing optimizes the features of the DIGITAL
VT200 and VTlOO families of terminals .
Line-mode editing is provided for non-ANSI terminals supported by the
VMS Operating System.

Prerequisite Software
VMS Operating System V5 .0. VAX workstations require VMS Workstation
Software.
Note: Optional software includes DECnet-VAX, ALL-IN-1, ALL-IN-1 Office
Menu, and VAX DECspell.

Ordering Information
VAX Notes contains three licensing options : a full-function Server, a
reduced-function Client, and a User-based option. The Server and Userbased options allow access to all VAX Notes capabilities; the User-based
option restricts the number of simultaneous users on the node or
VAXcluster where the user-based option is installed. The Client option
contains the majority of VAX Notes functions, but prevents the creation of
conferences. The VAX Notes Client does not function without a VAX Notes
Server installed in the network. Use of the VAX Notes Client and Userbased options within the same cluster is prohibited .

5.38

Business Communications

VAX Notes Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Server Licenses (A license is required for
each CPU .)

Single-use license 1

QL·960A* -AA

Cluster license

QL-960A*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster

QL·960A*-CA

Monthly rental, single-use

QL-960A*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster

QL-960A*-DB

Client Licenses (A license is required for
each CPU.)

Single-use license'

QL-VESA*-AA

Cluster license

QL-VESA*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster

QL-VESA*-CA

Monthly rental, single-use

QL-VESA*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster

QL-VESA *-DB

c:
0

·::Cll
CJ

User-based Licenses (A license is
required for each CPU .)

Single-use license'

QL-960A9-AA

~
....

Cluster license

QL-960A9-AB

..c

Initial license, primary and cluster

QL-960A9-CA

·c
....VJ

Monthly rental, single-use

QL-960A9-DA

Monthly rental, cluster

QL-960A9-DB

Software revision right-to -copy

QL-960A*-HZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

QA-960AA-H#

Documentation only

QA-960AA-GZ

Installation service

QT-960A *-I#

U.S. Software Services for Server end User-based 2

DECsupport service

QT-960A*-9#

Basic service

QT-960A*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-960A*-3#

U.S. Software Services for Client2

DECsupport service

QT-VESA*-9#

Basic service

QT-VESA*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-VESA*-3#

*Supported processors(*) : MicroVAX I/II (N) , MicroVAX 2000 (P),
MicroVAX 3500/3600
(B), VAXstation I/II (Q) , VAXstation 2000 (R) , VAXstation 3200/3500 (C),
VAXserver 3500/ 3600/3602 (C), VAX-11/725/730 (M) , VAX-11/750 (L),
VAX-11/780/782/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4), VAX 6240 (D),
VAX 8200/ 8250 (}) , VAX 8300/8350 (H) , VAX 8530 (G) , VAX 8550 (E) , VAX 8600/8650
(F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D), VAX 8810 (E), VAX 8820 (D), VAX 8840/8842/8974
(V), VAX 8978 (5 )
#Supported media (# ): RX33 (7) , TK50 (5) , TU58 (G ), 9-track 1,600 bpi magtape (M) ,
RXOl (Y)
1

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU .
2
For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

5.39

Business Communications

VAXVTX

VTX is a software package layered on VMS that provides videotex services
compliant with CCITT F.300 recommendations. Videotex is a distributed
information retrieval service that utilizes a tree structured database
through which the user navigates by selecting choices from a menu. The
content of the videotex information base consists of full screen "pages" of
information.
The information contained in the infobase is prepared using standard
Digital editors, such as WPS-PLUS, TPU, EDT, DECgraph, and DECslide,
to create the "pages" of information. VAX VTX provides
• A distributed videotex service environment on VAX or MicroVAX systems
and Digital networks.
• Access through terminals to page and menu-oriented, distributed, text or
graphics information bases.
• An application-level protocol that permits communication between VAX
VTX and transaction-oriented "remote" applications.
VAX VTX services the non-technical and senior management person with
both quick access to the system and the ability to peruse on-line information without training. VAX VTX provides services to two primary categories
of user:
• The information provider (IP) prepares page-oriented information for entry
into a VAX VTX infobase.
• The end-user or subscriber views, extracts, and uses the information stored
in the VAX VTX infobase.
VAX VTX consists of five primary components: Server (SRV), Terminal
Control/Concentrator (TCP/CON), Terminal Specific Module (TSM),
Infobase Update and Information Provider Assistance services (UPD) and
VTX Info base Structure Tool and Assister (VISTA). A Refer to SPD 26.57
for further information.

VAX VTX Application Link Utilities
VAX VTX Application Link Utilities (VAX VALU), a companion product to
VAX VTX, extends the capabilities of VTX by providing a linkage to other
applications or databases within a Digital or non-Digital environment. The
VAX VALU product set consists of three utilities:
• VTX Application Service (VAS)
• External Link (ELK)
• Remote Update Server Link (RUSL)
VAX VALU is available as a development license and as a runtime license.
A Refer to Software Product Description 26.94 for further information on

VAX VALU.

5.40

Business Communications

Features
• VAX VTX VISTA (VTX Info base Structure Tool and Assister) - provides an
environment for the Information Provider to storyboard, design , build and
maintain a VTX infobase through the new capabilities of the VTX Infobase
Structure Tool and Assister (VISTA)-The Information Provider can build a
complete menu structure through a simple pictorial interface.
• Concentrator support-for X.29 virtual devices , construction of X.25-based
gateways, concentrator support for 3270 class terminals based on the use of
the DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Data Stream Programming interface and
customer-written IBM application.
• Ability to modify the Terminal Control Program - The Terminal Specific
Module (TSM) allows for changes in keypad to function mapping.
• Template files-a means by which a VTX Information Provider can associate some background set of information (usually containing company logos
and other static information ) with the page of information that is currently
being entered .
• Context-sensitive keywords-segmented keyword files allow for keyword
matches based on the subscriber's current page context.
• ALL-IN-1 Terminal Control Program-included in the VTX base product
and fully integrated with ALL-IN-1 as part of ALL-IN-1 , Version 2.2
release, enables the ALL-IN-1 user to access VTX using GOLD key mappings for the standard VTX functions. Also allows for integration with the
ALL-IN-1 interrupt and scratchpad menus .
· Extensive online help-available whenever the end-user requests input.
• Support for common user interface-enables a customer site to establish a
common user interface across the entire range of VAX VTX information
retrieval applications .

Prerequisite Hardware
• Any valid VAX system configuration running VMS with at least 2 Mbytes of
dedicated memory
• MicroVAX II systems must have
- Minimum of one Mbyte of memory
- TK50 tape drive for installation of the software
- RD-series system disk
• VAXstation II systems must have
- Minimum of one Mbyte of memory
- TK50 tape drive for installation of the software
A Refer to SPD 26.57 for block space requirements and supported terminals.

Prerequisite Software
VMS V4.4 to V5 .0 or MicroVMS V4.4 or V4 .7
A For information on VMS classes and tailoring, refer to SPD 25 .01 and to
SPD 26.57.

5.41

Business Communications

Ordering Information
• Order a VAX VTX full license for the CPU on which the VTX information
base will be developed and run. This license provides a functionally complete system containing all five VTX components .
• Order a Terminal Control/Concentrator license for each additional CPU
that needs to access the information base over the network. This license
provides only the TCP/ CON and the TSM components . No information base
development can be done with the TCP/ CON license . A VAX VTX full
license on another CPU is a prerequisite.
• Order the VAX VALU development license for the CPU on which the VALU
application will be developed . This license provides all three VALU
components . .A Refer to SPD 26.94 for ordering information.
• Order the VAX VALU runtime license to copy a VALU application to
another CPU . .A Refer to SPD 26.94 for ordering information.
VAX VTX Full License Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)
Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1

QL-03 lA* -AA

Cluster member 2

QL-031A*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster3
Monthly rental, single-use

QL-031A*-CA
QL-031A*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster3

QL-031A*-DB

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-031A*-HZ

Materials and Installation
Distribution and documentation

QA-031AA-H#

Documentation only

QA-031AA-GZ

Installation service
U.S. Software Services

QT-031A*-l#
4

DECsupport service

QT-031A*-9#

Basic service

QT-031A*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-031A* -3#

*Supported processors(*) : MicroVAX I/II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P),
MicroVAX 3500/ 3600 (B) , VAXstation I/II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R),
VAXstation 3200/ 3500 (C) , VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX-11/730 (M),
VAX-11/750 (L), VAX-11/780/782/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4),
VAX 6240 (D), VAX 820018250 (J), VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 8530 (G), VAX 8550 (E),
VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D), VAX 8810 (E), VAX 8820 (D),
VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V) , VAX 8978 (5)
#Supported media(#): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), RX50 (3), TK50 (5)
1

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.

Not available on MicroVAX I, VAXstation I, or VAX-111725 .

Not available on MicroVAX I, VAXstation I, or VAX-11/725.

For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

5.42

Business Communications

Terminal Control/Concentrator Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use or first license for VAXcluster 1

QL-033A*-AA

Cluster member 2

QL-033A*-AB

Initial license, primary and cluster

QL-033A*-CA

Monthly rental, single-use3

QL-033A*-DA

Monthly rental, cluster 3

QL-033A*-DB

Software revision right-to-copy

QL-033A*-HZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

QA-033AA-H#

Documentation only

QA-033AA-GZ

Installation service
U.S. Software Services

QT-033A*-l#

"'c
0

DECsupport service

QT-033A *·9#

Basic service

QT-033A*-8#

Self-maintenance service

QT-033A*-3#

*Supported processors (*):MicroVAX I/II (N), MicroVAX 2000 (P),
MicroVAX 3500/3600 (B), VAXstation II (Q), VAXstation 2000 (R),
VAXstation 3200/3500 (C), VAXserver 3500/3600/3602 (C), VAX-11/730 (M),
VAX-111750 (L), VAX-11/780/782/785 (K), VAX 6210 (2), VAX 6220 (3), VAX 6230 (4),
VAX 6240 (D), VAX 8200/8250 (]),VAX 8300/8350 (H), VAX 8530 (G), VAX 8550 (E),
VAX 8600/8650 (F), VAX 8700 (E), VAX 8800 (D), VAX 8810 (E), VAX 8820 (D),
VAX 8840/8842/8974 (V), VAX 8978 (5)

·~
OS
y

j
"'O
cu

....
j
·c

"'
Q

#Supported media(#): Magtape, 1,600 bpi (M), RX50 (3), TK50 (5)
1

For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.

Not available on MicroVAX I, VAXstation I, or VAX-11/725.

For service agreements in other countries, consult a local Digital sales representative.

5.43

Section 6

Manageability:
Services and Products

This section contains the
following topics ...

Services for the Planning and Design Phase

Services for the Implementation and Startup Phase

Services for the Operations and Growth Phase

Related Network Services

Computer Special Systems

Network and System Management Products

Network Security

Section 6

Overview

Manageability: Services
and Products

Manageability provides the service and product mix that enables customers
to design, control, direct, and support an entire network, as well as manage
change in a responsive and flexible manner.
Customers regularly require network information for pro-active planning
and performance of the system. They also need high network availability,
ease of use, and system security. Digital addresses these requirements with
· Life-cycle network services.
· Network and system management software.
· 802.3/Ethernet encryption device for security.

Digital supports OSI-based network management, open industry standard
interfaces, and voice/data/video network management. Because network
management and control features are embedded in the architecture, the
network can maintain itself and adjust to changes in the system by automatically circumventing failed components.

6.1

Network Services

Digital's Network Services, provided through its Customer Services organizations, include Educational Services, Field Service, Software Services, and
the Computer Special Systems group, and address customer needs in each
phase of the network life cycle with services for
· The network planning and design phase.
· The network implementation and startup phase.
· The network operations and growth phase.

Services for each phase have a modular structure so that the customer can
select only those services needed . For complex network projects, program
management resources are also available from the service organizations to
help plan and manage the delivery of all the network services needed
throughout the network life cycle.

In addition to the life-cycle network services, Digital offers related services
such as software and hardware installation, preventive maintenance, telephone support, and education. Also, the Computer Special Systems (CSS)
group offers design and manufacturing services to meet custom needs.
Availability
Although Digital's Network Services are developed for worldwide availability, packaging and delivery models as well as service availability may differ
outside the United States. Check with the local Digital service organizations to determine the services available in your area. Specific differences
in the European network services are noted in this section.

6.2

Sel'vices fol' the Planning and Design Phase

Services provided in the P lanning and D esign Phase aid cus tomers in
planning and designing their new or expanding networks. T h is includes the
design of distributed applications, the design and analys is of the network
topology, the actual layout of the hardware components of the network,
and train ing seminars to aid in determining appropriate network strategies .
T hese services include
• NETplan/Requirements Analysis.
• NETplan/Design Analysis.
· NETplan/Application Design.
· NETplan/Protocol Design.
· NETplan/Physical Design.
· NETplan/Planning Seminars .
NETplan/Requirements Analysis

NETplan/Requirements Analysis consists of customer interviews and data
interpretation by Software Services to plan local or wide area ne tworks.
The service assists the customer in planning a new network or modifying
an existing one to meet identified business needs, organizational constraints, and operational requirements . Digital Software Services cons ult ants analyze information flows, network requirements based on business
needs , organizational structures, and operational procedures in order to
establish network design criteria and constraints.
NETplan/Requirements Analysis provides the planning needed to enable
the customer to meet current network requirements and plan for futu re
growth. The service also assists the customer in identifying potential problem areas that might affect the network design .

In NETplan/ Requirements Analysis, Software Service consultants interview
customers to identify their business plans , applications, and users , as well
as network performance, availability, reliability, and cost constraints . Software Services then interprets the data by translating the customer 's business needs and application requirements into network design criteria . T he
result of these activities is a comprehensive requirements analysis document describing business and network requirements and network design
assumptions , and providing a network inventory.

In Europe, the activities performed and documentation provided in
NETplan/Requirements Analysis are offered in combination with
NETplan/Design Analysis . This combined Network Planning and Design
Service is offered as the DEC NETplan service .
NETplan/Design Analysis

NETplan/ Design Analysis , delivered by Software Services, consists of
designing and analyzing alternative network solutions, and selecting a
recommended network design for local and wide area networks. The
service assists the customer in designing a new network or redesigning an
existing one to meet identified network design criteria and constraints .

6.3

Services for the Planning and Design Phase

NETplan/Design Analysis assists the customer in selecting a recommended
network design based on an indepth analysis of predicted performance,
associated communications facilities, and approximate cost. The service
also provides the customer with an indication of potential problem areas or
limitations of the network design. The results of the design analysis are
compiled in a written report and discussed with the customer in a presentation. Topics addressed are alternative network designs, the analysis conducted on each alternative, and the recommended network design.

In Europe, the activities performed and documentation provided in
NETplan/Design Analysis are offered in combination with NETplan/
Requirements Analysis. This combined Network Planning and Design
Service is called the DEC NETplan Service.
NETplan/Application Design

The NETplan/Application Design Service assists customers with distributed
application design activities. This service, offered by Professional Software
Services (PSS) in the United States and Software and Applications Services
(SWAS) in Europe, is tailored to meet the customer's needs in any of the
following areas:
• Distributed application requirements analysis
• Distributed application design
• Distributed application specification development
• Project leadership of complex distributed application design efforts
Features
• Digital's design skills fit the customer's requirements.

• Tasks performed remain "Under the supervision, management, and control
of the customer.
• Expertise is provided by the manufacturer of the customer's hardware,
system software, and layered product software.
• The cost is minimized by buying exactly the service needed.
The deliverables for any distributed application design project are specified
as part of project planning activities, and typically include the results of
application requirements analyses, application design documentation, and
functional design specifications.

NETplan/Protocol Design

The NETplan/Protocol Design Service assists customers in using application interface options available within the Digital environment to design
distributed applications for communication between Digital and other
vendor's hardware and software. This assistance is currently limited to
Digital's DECnet/SNA Gateway products, which facilitate communication
between applications on VAX systems and IBM mainframes.
This service, offered by PSS in the United States and SWAS in Europe, is
tailored to meet customer distributed application design needs in a
multivendor network environment for any of the following areas:
• Distributed application requirements analysis
• Distributed application design

6.4

Services for the Planning and Design Phase

• Distributed application specification development
• Project leadership of complex distributed application design efforts
& For a list of service features, refer to NETplan/Application Design in this
section. The deliverables for any protocol design project are specified as
part of project planning activities, and are typically similar to those of
NETplan/Application Design.

NETplan/Physical Design

When planning and designing the physical layout of a network, issues such
as the type of building, type of occupancy, local codes, and restrictions
must be taken into consideration. To ensure that the physical design fully
meets the needs of the customer's application and minimizes potential
problems during installation, Digital Field Service offers a comprehensive
NETplan/Physical Design service.
In addition to the cable routing, the cableplant topology, design frequencies, component input and output levels, and anticipated network expansion must all be included in the electrical design.

Site Survey Report
Initially, Field Service conducts a site survey and prepares a Site Survey
Report. This identifies all existing equipment to be connected to the network, outlines any structural work required (including aerial and underground cable runs), and identifies any other factors that may affect
installation costs or timeframes.
Physical Layout Design
From the Network Design and Site Survey Report, Field Service develops
the Physical Layout Design for the network. This includes a set of working
drawings indicating the proposed cableplant runs and location of all
networked equipment, proposed cable frequency allocations, calculated
input/output levels at design frequencies of the cable components, and a
bill of material for the components used in the design. The Physical Layout
Design is used as the basis for generating a comprehensive Installation Plan
with schedules and costs, including quotations from vendors or contractors.
In Europe, the NETplan/Physical Design activities are offered as a
DECsite/Local Area Network Physical Design Service providing support
for network physical implementation services.

NETplan/Planning Seminars

NETplan/Planning Seminars are provided by Educational Services to aid
the customer's staff in determining the networking strategy and
multivendor interconnect strategy most appropriate for the customer environment. The seminars, targeted toward network planners and managers ,
include
• Open Systems Interconnection, which discusses the International Standards Organization (ISO) Model for a layered network architecture, the
need for standards among product vendors, advantages of a layered architecture, functions of the OSI, DNA, and SNA layers , and Digital's product
set that is compatible with OSI.
• Digital/IBM Complementary Computing, which presents an introduction to
the complete DNA/SNA interconnect product line, including the DECnet/
SNA Gateway and the VMS/SNA link to IBM networks.

6.5

Services for the Implementation and Startup Phase

These services assist customers in all network implementation and startup
activities. This includes managing installations, orienting users, establishing
operating procedures and standards, developing applications, and training.
The services are
• NETstart/lnstallation Management.
• NETstart/Certification.
• NETstart/Startup Assistance.
· NETstart/Application Development.
· NETstart/Protocol Development.
• NETstart/Startup Training.
NETstart/lnstallation Management

Field Service manages all of the installation activities to ensure a smooth,
timely, and well-coordinated network installation. Working from the Network Design and Physical Layout Design, Field Service manages the site
preparation and installation activities to ensure completion on time with
high-quality standards.
Network Installation Plan
The first step in the installation process is the development of the Network
Installation Plan. This plan defines the schedules for all site preparation
and installations, and identifies the individuals responsible for each activity.
The scope of a network installation may require that part of the work be
subcontracted to a qualified contractor able to meet Digital's high-quality
standards. As the customer's prime contractor, Digital manages and schedules all subcontractor activities.
Pre-installation Inspection
Field Service conducts a pre-installation inspection of the site with the
installer and reviews all details of the required work. This allows Field
Service to prepare the final, detailed quotation for the installation.
Installation Inspections
During site preparation and installation, Field Service carries out installation inspections and any required interim testing. These inspection and
testing services are also available to customers who are either using their
own personnel or dealing directly with a contractor for site preparation or
installation work.

For broadband networks, installation inspections include cableplant certification.
Network Acceptance Testing
Upon completion of the installation of the equipment, Field Service carries
out Network Acceptance Testing of the cable installation and associated
communications equipment.
Network Documentation
Field Service provides site documents including "as-built" drawings of the
installed network (showing cable routing, equipment location), and electrical test results. This documentation becomes part of the Site Management
Guide for sites under Digital Service Agreements.

In Europe, the NETstart/Installation Management activities are currently
offered as a DECsite Turnkey/Installation Management Service providing
support for network physical implementation services.

6.6

Services for the Implementation and Startup Phase

NETstart/Certification

Digital Field Service conducts broadband network certification tests to
ensure that the network meets or exceeds all design specifications .

Network Certification
Channel Certification-Field Service conducts certification of broadband
Ethernet. This channel certification ensures successful product connectivity
and qualifies the customer's network products for onsite maintenance
agreements.
Certification Report
Certification tests are conducted for continuity, frequency response, signalto-noise ratios, hum modulation, and RF radiation. Field Service then
provides a Certification Report that includes documentation of critical
signals and noise levels and photographs of cable frequency responses . Any
areas for which specifications are not met are highlighted and corrective
actions are proposed .
NETstart/Startup Assistance

Digital's Software Services offers start-up assistance to help users and
network support personnel get up to speed quickly. Consultation and
assistance is offered for network software implementation, orientation on
how to use the network , and establishing standards for network operation
and management. Specific subjects, such as account and security procedures , application development considerations, and network troubleshooting procedures, are also addressed.
These services cover Digital's DECnet software, and are structured to
ensure an efficient startup of the customer's DECnet network. They are
designed for managers, operations personnel, and program developers who
are either just starting to learn about network communications and
DECnet, understand network communications but are new to DECnet , or
are familiar with DECnet but need assistance in expanding their DECnet
configuration.
In the United States, these services are offered as DECnet DECstart and
DECnet DECstart-Plus. They are packaged to deliver a defined set of tasks
at the customer's site for a fixed price .
In Europe, these services are offered as DEC NETstart . Tasks are selected
based on the level of service required, then adapted to each customer's
needs through planning discussions with a Digital network specialist. As a
result of the level of service selected and the planning discussions conducted , a fixed quote and delivery plan are proposed.

The DEC NETstart service consists of 22 structured tasks made available in
three levels of service:
• NETstart 3 intended for first-time users of Digital network products, or for
users with some experience but with limited manpower resources
• NETstart 2 intended for users with some DECnet experience who are
expanding their network and need support during this period
• NETstart 1 intended for users with a good level of DECnet experience who
need support only in implementing the network software

6.7

Services for the Implementation and Startup Phase

NETstart/Application Development

The NETstart/Application Development Service assists customers in distributed application development and implementation. This service, offered
by Professional Software Services (PSS) in the United States and Software
and Applications Services (SWAS) in Europe, is tailored to meet the customer's needs in any of the following areas:
• Distributed application coding and testing
• Distributed application design (software code) reviews
• Distributed application performance analysis and tuning
• Distributed application implementation and acceptance testing
• Project leadership of complex distributed application development efforts
The deliverables for any distributed application development project are
specified as part of project planning activities, and typically include coded
and tested applications, distributed application documentation, and implementation of the distributed application in the customer's network.

NETstart/Protocol Development

NETstart/Protocol Development Services assists customers in using application interface options available within the Digital environment to
develop and implement distributed applications that communicate between
Digital and other vendor 's hardware and software. This assistance is currently limited to Digital's DECnet/SNA Gateway products, which facilitate
communications between VAX systems and IBM mainframes.
This service, offered by PSS in the U.S. and SWAS in Europe, is provided as
a project tailored to meet customer needs in a multivendor environment for
any of the following areas:
• Distributed application coding and testing
• Distributed application design (software code) reviews
• Distributed application performance analysis and tuning
• Distributed application implementation and acceptance testing
• Project leadership of complex distributed application development efforts
The deliverables for any protocol development or implementation project
are specified as part of project planning activities, and are similar to those
of NETstart/Application Development.

NETstart/Startup Training

NETstart/Startup Training are training courses offered by Educational
Services that prepare the customer's staff to design , develop and use distributed applications, and to use the network. The training courses include
• Using DECnet-VAX: How to Use VAXmail and Other DECnet Utilities.
· Programming DECnet-VAX.
• Programming DECnet-RSX.
• Managing and Programming VAX P.S.I.
• Managing and Programming DECnet-RSX.
Using DECnet-VAX provides an introduction to DECnet as it is implemented on the VMS operating system to aid users in communicating with
other users within the network. The remaining courses provide details
about the implementation of the communications software (DECnet-VAX,
DECnet-RSX and VAX P.S.I.) on Digital's systems as an aid to managing and
developing applications that utilize the network.

6.8

Services for the Operations and Growth Phase

These services provide network operations support including network
maintenance management, management tools assistance, and operations
training . The services are
• NETsupport/Maintenance Management.
• NETsupport/Management Tools Assistance.
• NETsupport/Operations Training.
NETsupport/Maintenance
Management

NETsupport/Maintenance Management provides customers with a single
point of contact and a single service contract to resolve all network maintenance issues for Digital networks and multivendor networks. This service
focuses on the maintenance of a customer's entire network in a partnership
role with the customer. NETsupport/Maintenance Management enables
Digital to act as the customer's agent to the service vendors for all of the
equipment in the network. Digital negotiates the contractual levels of
service and pricing with each vendor, and presents the customer with a
single-source solution for managing all network maintenance services.
NETsupport/ Maintenance Management provides services that extend to the
entire network including multivendor equipment.
NETsupport/Maintenance Management provides five major service elements : maintenance planning, configuration management, fault isolation,
fault-resolution management, and predictive maintenance. The Central
NETsupport Center (located at the Customer Support Center in Colorado
Springs, Colorado) provides fault isolation and diagnosis, fault resolution
management, maintenance planning, technical assistance, vendor relations ,
and reporting. Configuration management is performed by the local area
NETsupport consultant.
NETsupport/Maintenance Management includes the installation on the
customer 's network of a network maintenance server with network support
software tools . This network maintenance server acts as Digital's "tool
box" containing network fault-isolation tools . The maintenance server is
accessible from the Central NETsupport Center, and serves as the network
remote diagnostic console.
Wide Area and Local Area Interconnect Services are offered as part of this
service. A Refer to "Related Network Services" in this section for more
information.
In Europe, network maintenance management service activities are offered
as the NETsystem Maintenance Management Service.

NETsupport/Management Tools
Assistance

NETsupport/Management Tools Assistance is provided by Software Services to assist customers in implementing and utilizing Digital's advanced
network management products. A Refer to "Network and System Management Products" in this section for descriptions of these products. This
service is currently limited to the NMCC/DECnet Monitor. Assistance is
provided in planning, implementation, and startup.

6.9

Services for the Operations and Growth Phase

In the United States, this service is provided as the NMCC/DECnet Monitor DECstart Service. This service provides assistance in implementing
NMCC/DECnet Monitor, Digital's comprehensive software product that
monitors the nodes , lines, and circuits in a DECnet network. The service
helps customers use the NMCC/DECnet monitor to maximize their network
performance, and consists of pre-installation assistance, software implementation, and user orientation. As part of this service, the Digital software consultant assists in selecting the operating parameters and options
that best address customer network management goals. The Digital
software consultant also helps the customer plan, install, and evaluate
NMCC/DECnet Monitor operations against stated goals .
Europe offers an enhanced version of this service called NETmon Traffic
Monitoring and Consulting Service, which focuses on Digital implementing
and using the software to assist customers in monitoring and analyzing the
performance of the network. NETmon is a structured, modular service that
is adapted to a customer's needs. The principal elements of the service
include
• A Digital network consultant to assist in defining the various aspects of
monitoring and analysis, and to establish a base of software tools, parameters, and data structures that are used in the monitoring activity.
• Onsite orientation in the use of the principal monitoring tool
(NMCC/DECnet Monitor).
• Two consulting reports per year that analyze the network performance and
capacity characteristics, and interpret the traffic data.
• A monitoring tool (NMCC/DECnet Monitor) and the associated prerequisite
software (RDB Relational Database and GKS Graphic software), which the
customer can also use.
• Support of the installed tools and the monitoring activity.
NETmon is provided primarily as an annual service agreement with emphasis in the first year on establishing sound monitoring practices and gaining
firm operational control over the network. In subsequent years, the emphasis shifts to proactive capacity management and price/performance decisions. For customers with temporary network performance consulting and
traffic monitoring or audit service needs covering a limited time period
(maximum three months), a one-time NETmon Audit Service is also available .
NETsupport/Operations Training

NETsupport/Operations Training is proyided by Educational Services to
help customers effectively manage and operate their computer network.
Training courses are provided in the areas of
·VAX and PDP-11 Data Communications.
• Digital Ethernet Hardware Maintenance.
• DECnet Network Management.
• Network Troubleshooting.
• DECnet-VAX Network Security.
• DECnet-VAX Internals.
The courses are designed for network managers , system managers with
network responsibilities, maintenance engineers, and technicians.

6.10

Related Network Services

Digital's Network Services provide a coordinated network-level solution to
a customer 's network planning, implementation, startup, and operational
needs . These services complement many existing network component-level
services and packages available from Digital's Customer Services organizations .
Seminars and training courses addressing the design , implementation, and
operations phases are part of a complete Network Training Curriculum
offered by Digital's Educational Services . This includes courses for people
at all the skill levels required to run a successful and efficient network .
As part of Digital 's commitment to meet the total computing needs of its
customers , Field Service provides a single-source service for its own products and those of selected manufacturers in the networks market . Most
networks , including those with non-Digital products, may be completely
maintained under a standard Digital Service Agreement . Field Service
delivers its services on a worldwide basis , thus ensuring a consistent and
high-quality response to distributed or multinational networking requirements .
The related network services that Field Service provides include
• Wide Area Interconnect Service for the wide area links and data communications equipment (DCE).
• Local Area Interconnect Service for the cableplant and associated interconnect hardware.
• Software installation services for network and communications products.
• Maintenance services for the network hardware and software products .
• DECsite and DECmove services.
Software Services provides a comprehensive set of related network services
that offer customers support for individual layered networking products,
network management and operations, and customer-specific networking
needs. The related network services include Startup Packages , Network
Tools, and the Computer Services Business, which provides automated
information and software access to customers . The Computer Services
Business includes service bureau services, disaster recover y services , and
facility management services .
Related Educational Services
Training Courses

Digital Educational Services offers courses in their training centers in the
United States , Japan , Canada, Mexico, Europe, and Australia. The network
curriculum begins with the Introduction to Data Communications course,
which provides the basic foundation for building additional skills. The
curriculum can then be categorized into three areas: network architectures
training , programmer training, and network management training.
Digital Educational Services offers the following courses:
• Introduction to Data Communications
• Open Systems Interconnection
• Digital Network Architecture
• Digital/IBM Cooperative Connection
• Programming DECnet-VAX
• Programming DECnet-RSX
• Managing and Programming DECnet-RSX

6.11

Related Network Services

• Managing and Programming VAX P.S.I.
•DECnet-VAX Network Management
• DECnet Network Management
• DECnet-VAX Network Security
·DECnet-VAX Internals
• Network Troubleshooting
• Using DECnet-VAX: How to Use VAXmail and Other DECnet Utilities
In addition, Digital Press publishes the following books that cover networks:
• Technical Aspects of Data Communications
• Local Area Networks: An Introduction to the Technology
• KERMIT A File Transfer Protocol

A complete list of courses and course descriptions is available in the
Customer Course Catalog.
Wide Area Interconnect Service

Wide Area Interconnect Service is focused on remote fault isolation, resolution, and verification for wide area links and data communication equipment (DCE). Wide Area Interconnect Service is offered network wide. The
service covers fault identification, problem notification, response tracking,
escalated attention to critical problems, verification of repairs, and predictive maintenance.
Wide Area Interconnect Service is offered as a stand-alone service and
also as part of the comprehensive NETsupport/Maintenance Management
Service.

Local Area Interconnect Service

Local Area Interconnect Service addresses the broad range of services
necessary to isolate, repair, verify, and maintain the cableplant and interconnect hardware in good operating condition. Digital acts as the customer's single-source, prime contractor for cableplant maintenance services.
This service offers customers Basic and DECservice level of maintenance
support for standard baseband 802.3/Ethernet networks as well as fiber
and twisted-pair cableplants. Scheduled preventive maintenance is provided according to equipment standards as specified by Digital and component manufacturers. Under terms of the contract, broadband networks
receive regularly scheduled preventive maintenance according to standards
specified by Digital and component manufacturers. For European options,
contact the local Digital sales office.

Software Installation Services

Installation services are available for the VMS/SNA, DECnet/SNA Gateway,
and DECnet products. This service provides assistance in installing the
equipment and familiarizing the customer with the operation of these
products.
Digital installs most Digital network and communications products at no
additional cost when they are purchased with an operating system and
System Startup Service Package for that operating system. There are some
exceptions to this.

6.12

Related Network Services

The following networking products are not installed with a System Startup
Package:
X25router 2000

Micro/RSX 2780/3780 Emulator

Micro/RSX 3271 Protocol Emulator

MUX200/VAX

NMCC/DECnet Monitor

NMCC/VAX ETHERnim

RSX-11/P.S.I./M

UN1004/RSX

VAX 2780/3 780 Protocol Emulator

VAX 3271 Protocol Emulator

VAX NTR Protocol Emulator

VAX OSI Transport Service

VAX P.S.I. and P.S.I. Access

VMS/SNA

The DECnet/SNA Gateway and VMS/SNA products are not installed with a
System Startup Package, but the installation service may be purchased
separately as an Orientation and Installation Service. Any DECnet/SNA
Access Routines purchased with DECnet/SNA Gateways or VMS/SNA are
installed as part of the Orientation and Installation Service. This includes
• DECnet/SNA VMS APPC/LU6.2 Programming Interface.
• DECnet/SNA VMS Application Programming Interface.
• DECnet/SNA VMS Data Transfer Facility (VMS server and VMS client) .
• DECnet/SNA VMS DISOSS Document Exchange Facility.
• DECnet/SNA VMS Distributed Host Command Facility.
• DECnet/SNA VMS Printer Emulator.
• DECnet/SN A VMS Remote Job Entry.
• DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Data Stream Programming Interface.
• DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Terminal Emulator.
.&. Refer to the appropriate Software Product Description for more informa-

tion about installation services.
Ongoing Maintenance

Field Service provides the full range of on-site and off-site contractual
services for the network and its associated communications equipment
including Digital-qualified vendor products and broadband network interconnection cables. Baseband network interconnection cables (such as
coaxial, fiber optic, or twisted pair cables) will be repaired or replaced on
a time and materials basis only. Digital may use a qualified contractor to
carry out cable repair work.
DECservice
DECservice is Digital's most comprehensive onsite service product, providing a commitment to fast response time, continuous service effort,
extended-hours coverage, preventive maintenance, installation of the latest
engineering changes, and automatic priority attention for complex problems.
Basic Service
To those customers who do not need the level of service provided by
DECservice, Digital offers the Basic Service Agreement, which provides
economical, full service coverage. Customer service calls receive priority
second only to DECservice calls. Services provided include preventive
maintenance, installation of the latest engineering changes, and automatic
priority attention for complex problems.

6.13

Related Network Services

Software Product Services

For customers who do not require startup assistance for their operating
system, Software Product Services offers DECsupport, Basic, and
Self-Maintenance annual service contracts that cover Digital network ing software products and select non-Digital communications software
products . A Refer to "Software Services Startup Packages" in this section
for an explanation of the startup assistance available.
DECsupport Ser vice for Software
DECsupport provides maximum user productivity and system utilization by
saving customers the time and associated costs of doing their own routine
software maintenance and installation of updates. It also provides critical
on-site assistance when required . DECsupport provides

• Installation of updates.
• Preventive maintenance.
• Onsite remedial support if required.
• Telephone support .
• Digital's Software Information Network .
• Software media and documentation updates .
• Technical newsletters .
• Software Performance Reports .
Basic Service for Software
Basic Service for Software is designed for customers who have the time,
technical expertise, and resources to maintain their own systems, but who
need technical support to answer questions or to solve problems. Basic
Service for Software provides

• Telephone support.
• Digital 's Software Information Network .
• Software media and documentation updates.
• Technical newsletters .
• Software Performance Reports.
Self-Maintenance Service for Software
Self-Maintenance Service for Software is for customers who have technical
staffs with the time and resources to maintain their own system software,
and who require only software updates and written communication channels with Digital. Self-Maintenance Service for Software provides

• Software media and documentation updates .
• Technical newsletters .
• Software Performance Reports .

6.14

Related Network Services

DECsite Services

DECsite Services are available when customers require professional help to
prepare new space for new equipment, or to move equipment to a new site.
A project to meet these needs falls into three phases : decision , design , and
delivery. DECsite Services are structured to meet customer needs in each
phase and allow customers to control the extent of Digital's involvement
and the pace of the project .

Features
• Modular services to plan, design , and build new, expanded, or renovated
computer sites for Digital customers.
•Three levels of service-DECsite I, II, and III-and five forms of agreement let customers choose the extent of Digital's involvement . Customers
control financial and timing commitments for the project.
• Digital brings a professional understanding of cost-effectiveness to com puter site projects .
• All necessary physical elements are included : space allocation, power
service, air conditioning, data wiring , fire security, access security, and
materials .
• Digital provides professional project management and computer-site design
knowledge during the decision and design phases, and uses experienced,
Digital-qualified subcontractors for the delivery phase.

In Europe, DECsite services include the network physical design and
installation services described elsewhere in this section.

DECsiteI

In DECsite I, the decision phase, Digital professionals analyze the customer's computer environmental needs from the perspectives of operations,
equipment complement, available space, building services, and future
expansion. Digital provides the engineering analysis and budget estimates
needed to determine building requirements .

DECsiteII

In DECsite II, the design phase, Digital provides detailed construction
drawings , specifications, and wire lists. DECsite II design documents can
be used by the customer to build the facility using internal or contracted
resources with confidence that the design will meet planned data processing needs . For customers who elect to build their own facilities , construction phase consultations are available.

DECsite III

In DECsite III , the delivery phase, Digital provides the finished facility. At
the end of the design phase (DECsite II), Digital presents a price and
schedule quote for customer approval. The advantage of choosing DECsite
III is that a coordinated design/build project is usually the quickest way to
complete construction, and Digital's DECsite professionals serve as the
single source for the entire project. Only Digital-qualified building subcontractors are hired , and the DECsite professionals apply Digital's knowledge
and experience to computer-related issues, thus providing complete project
management. The customer can work with the Digital construction manager throughout the project instead of having to manage several vendors.
Digital will complete the project to the customer's satisfaction and guaran tee workmanship and materials for one year.

6.15

Related Network Services

DECmove Service

DECmove provides a comprehensive solution to the problems of moving
computer equipment from one site to another. With the DECmove service,
Digital handles all aspects of moving computer equipment, from qualifying
movers to coordinating the moving schedule .
Features
• Management of all aspects of the customer 's move, including selecting and
qualifying movers, and defining the type of moving equipment and transportation required . When necessary, Digital arranges for temporary storage
of customer 's equipment.

• Handling of all aspects of deinstallation and reinstallation . Digital verifies
equipment operation prior to dismantling and runs diagnostics after reinstallation to ensure that the equipment runs properly.
• Insuring the equipment against all risks except war and nuclear disaster.
Damaged equipment manufactured or supported by Digital is repaired or
replaced on a priority-one basis (bypassing normal manufacturing queues).
Damaged equipment not manufactured or supported by Digital is replaced
as promptly as possible.
• Coordinating the schedule of the move to minimize the impact on the
customer 's operations .
• Preparing a fixed price quote for the entire move. This prevents any hidden
expenses and lets the customer handle Digital's moving services with a
single purchase order.
Eligibility
DECmove is available only for equipment covered by a DECservice or Basic
Service Agreement .
Startup Packages

For customers buying new systems, Startup Packages provide the support
necessary to successfully install software, to use the system, and to maintain the software during the first year.
Digital offers three Startup Packages. Each service package provides training (available immediately upon purchase ), software installation, DECstart
(where applicable), and one year of service for the operating system and
dependent software . In Europe, these service packages are referred to as
OPTIMUM Services .
These packages are priced at the system level; that is, they cover all
Digital-licensed software operating on a particular system at no additional
charge.
Startup Package III
Startup Package III provides technical assistance and training for system
users. It provides the most comprehensive full year of service support for
operating systems and their dependent software . Startup Package III provides

• SPS DECsupport Agreement.
• Initial media/documentation .
•Training.
• DECstart Plus .
• Software installation.

6.16

Related Network Services

Startup Package II
Startup Package II is appropriate when a customer's technical staff has the
time and resources to support the new system after Digital has trained the
staff, installed the product, and oriented the staff concerning system operation. Startup Package II provides
• SPS Basic Agreement.
• Initial media/documentation.
• Training.
• DECstart.
• Software Installation.

Startup Package I
Startup Package I is appropriate for a technical staff requiring minimal
training and having the time, resources and skills to install and support the
new system. Digital provides telephone advisory support and media
updates to maintain the software at its most current level. Startup Package
I provides
• SPS Basic Agreement.
• Initial media/documentation.
• Training on selected systems .
Computer Services Business

Digital Computer Services Business is supplied by Software Services to
provide automated information and software access to its customers. The
services provided are available in the United States and the General International Area (GIA) only. The three principal service offerings are Service
Bureau Services, Disaster Recovery Services, and Facility Management
Services.

Service Bureau Services
These services, accessed locally and delivered remotely from Digital's
Computer Services Centers, are
·Enhanced Application Network Services-Digital provides a combination
of terminals/micros, customer host processors, Digital host processors, and
Digital's nationwide network to develop and implement integrated applications.
• Hardware/Software Evaluation Services-Digital provides the availability
of VAX, PDP, and DECSYSTEM-20 systems and software to enable customers to evaluate hardware and software products . Customers can evaluate
products through demonstrations, benchmarks, and trial use.
• Project Resource Services-Digital provides VAX, PDP, and DECSYSTEM20 computing resources and associated software to support Software Services consulting projects.
• Incremental Computer Resources- VAX, PDP, and DECSYSTEM-20 computing resources are provided to meet special customer needs such as peak
load processing. Timesharing access is also available for predelivery software development and peak load processing.
A telephone support service offering a 24-hour-a-day, 365-day-a-year
hotline staffed by Digital software experts is also avai lable.

6.17

Related Network Services

Disaster Recovery Services
Backup and disaster recovery services allow customers to anticipate and
plan for disruptions involving their computer facilities, and to continue
processing critical applications at computer facilities other than their own.
The services include
·Restart-Disaster Recovery Services for VAX, PDP, and DECSYSTEM-20
computing resources available within 24 hours for emergency processing
•Disaster/Plan 80-A planning methodology available to customers in
developing their own contingency plan
Facility Management Services
Facility Management Services .are long-term, customized, dedicated services
consisting of computing resources and operational staff available either at
the customer site or at a Digital site. Facility Management services free
customers from the need to develop operations resources to support information systems.

6.18

Computer Special Systems Scr\'iccs

Digital's Computer Special Systems (CSS) group offers design and manufacturing services for developing and supplying special function hardware,
firmware, and software networking products to meet custom requirements .
Typically, these available services provide
• Digital to non-Digital host and terminal interconnect.
• Links to public and private networks .
• Network bridges .
• High performance, intelligent front end communications processors .
Through CSS , Digital can provide efficient network performance and
flexible network configurations that meet custom needs with full Digital
hardware, software, and service support.

6.19

Network and System ~1anagemcnt Products

Digital's Network and System Management solutions comprise three layers :
• Inherent management capabilities in network hardware and software
• Network management application products
• Comprehensive network service for the entire life cycle of the network
The base of Digital's strength in management products is DECnet, which
automates numerous management functions and provides the basic operational control capabilities for data networking.
Network components are controlled by specific network management
products, positioned as being either "site level" (networks connecting
systems within a building and multiple buildings in one campus) or
"corporate level."
Site-level products are those network management products that are most
useful in maintaining a "campus-wide" network. Corporate-level products
are those products best suited to managing the wide area connections
between sites. Note that these products do not require that network management personnel be located where these products are deploying their
resources. They choose the balance between central and distributed management and support.
The following products comprise Digital 's Network and System Management products:
• DECnet-offers basic operational control of the data communications
network nodes. & Refer to Section 4 for more information on DECnet.
• The Remote System Manager (RSM)- provides application and configuration management for multiple, distributed MicroVAX and/or VAXstation
systems.
•The Terminal Server Manager (TSM)-provides configuration and fault
management of terminal servers in an extended 802.3/Ethernet local area
network.
• NMCC/DECnet Monitor-is a wide-area-network performance, fault, and
configuration management tool for DECnet products .
• NMCC/VAX ETHERnim-is a fault isolation and configuration management tool for extended 802.3/Ethernet local area networks .
·LAN Traffic Monitor-is a management tool for measuring bandwidth
utilization on multivendor 802.3/Ethernet local area networks.
•Remote Bridge Management Software (RBMS)-offers configuration management of LAN Bridges in an extended 802.3/Ethernet local area net work.

6.20

Network and System Management Products

Remote System Manager

Terminal Server Manager

The Terminal Server Manager VMS (TSM) is a software tool that allows a
user at a VAX host to remotely observe and control terminal servers anywhere in the extended local area network. The user can monitor the availability and modify the characteristics of all Digital terminal servers on the
network.
& Refer to "802.3/Ethernet Communications Servers" in Section 2 for more
information.

NMCC/DECnet Monitor

The NMCC/DECnet Monitor is a software tool for the observation and
control of complex, corporate backbone networks. NMCC/DECnet Monitor
responds to English-like commands and graphically presents network
conditions within a color network map (if the user has an optional color
monitor). This tool also works with a database of configuration information
and network parameters that can be readily accessed and analyzed.
The NMCC/ DECnet Monitor is designed to assist in three key areas of
network management: availability, performance, and planning.
Features
• Nodes can be instructed to send all DECnet events to NMCC/ DECnet
Monitor. This avoids major problems and minimizes downtime because it
enables a manager to detect problems early.

• Relational database capability provides for either active or passive collection of statistics .
• Visual displays of network configuration and performance information
simplify interpretation of data and highlight conditions requiring attention.
Network topology is displayed as a logical map for easy recognition of
network elements and potential trouble spots.
• Histograms and bar charts display historical information to help users
analyze trends and plan for growth and change.
• Realtime event logging with predetermined polling parameters enables
users to detect problems early and more efficiently.
• Update and adjustment of line charges for an automatic assessment of the
cost/performance of the network.
• Improved online help facility gives immediate information pertinent to a
particular screen .
• Separate kernel and user interface give users the flexibility to mix and
match centralized or distributed control.

6.21

Network and System Management Products

Prerequisite Hardware
• VAX-11/730 to VAX 8600 processor (Note: R80/RL02 configuration is
required for VAX-11/730 system.)
• MicroVAX II with RD53 (or greater) system disk
• VT240, VT241, VT330, VT340 terminal, or VTlOO or VT220 .(for tabular
representation)
• DECnet communication device
• Storage device of 35 Megabytes

Prerequisite Software
· VMS operating system V4.4 to V4.7
·DECnet-VAX V4.4 to V4 .7
• Full or runtime license for VAX GKS
• Development license for VAX RDB/VMS
NMCC/DECnet Monitor Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU .)

Single-use license 1

QSVM8-UZ

Migration option from OBSERVER Vl.x

QSP42.UZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

QSVM8·H#

Software revision right-to-copy

QSVM8-HZ

Documentation only

QSVM8-GZ

NMCC Startup service

QSVMS.sz

Installation service

QSVM8.I#

U.S. Software Services2

DECsupport service

QSVM8-9#

Basic service

QSVM8-8#

Self-maintenance service

QSVM8.3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (Z), VAX·ll/780/782/785 (E), VAX 8200/8250
(5), VAX 8300/8350 (7), VAX 8500/8530 (9), VAX 8550 (2), VAX 8600/8650 (K),
VAX 8700 (2), VAX 8800 (M)
#Supported media : 3, G, M, Y
1
For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.
2
For non-U.S. service agreements, consult a local Digital sales representative.

6.22

Network and System Management Products

NMCC/VAX ETHERnim
(Ethernet Network Integrity
Monitor)

NMCC/VAX ETHERnim is a network management tool that aids in fault
isolation and configuration management of extended local area networks.
NMCC/VAX ETHERnim utilizes Phase IV DECnet software on a system
configured as either a full-function DECnet node or a DECnet end node. It
runs as a layered product on the VMS operating system. Full functionality
of NMCC/VAX ETHERnim is achieved by having DECnet software and
remote test command files in target nodes.
NMCC/VAX ETHERnim is designed to test the communications path
through Ethernet protocol and DECnet. It also has the ability to gather
system information for its database from remote VMS and RSX nodes by
invoking test probes (remote command files).
NMCC/VAX ETHERnim is a multivendor product that recognizes nonDECnet local area network addresses, and gives the network manager the
capability of maintaining a large amount of information about each node
via a database that can be edited. It can be operated from local terminals
(VT125, VT240, VT241) using ReGIS graphics for graphic representations
of the network under test. Refer to Software Product Description 26.96.xx
for more information.
Features
• Builds a permanent database containing basic information about each node
that it detects is directly connected to the local area network.
• Provides a means of path testing to ISO levels I and II to all nodes on the
Ethernet (with the exception of the MicroVAX I and VAXstation I), and to
DNA network application and user layers for any node running DECnet
Phase IV on the Ethernet.
• Provides a means of determining the VAX processor type for VMS DECnet
nodes on the Ethernet.
Prerequisite Hardware
• Any valid VAX configuration with 802.3/Ethernet controller. (Note:
VAX-11/730 systems require an R80/RL02.) Refer to Software Product
Description 26.96 for more information.
• VT125, VT240, or VT241 graphics terminal
Prerequisite Software
VMS Operating System and DECnet-VAX, V4.6 to V4.7

6.23

Network and System Management Products

NMCCIVAX ETHERnim Order Codes
Order Code

Option
Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use license

Q*514-UZ

VAX cluster license 1

Q*514-QZ

Initial license, primary and cluster 2

Q*514-1P

Periodic payment, primary2

Q*514-JP

Periodic payment, cluster 2

Q*514-JZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

Q*514-H#

Software revision right-to-copy

Q*514-HZ

Documentation only

QL514-GZ
Q*514-I#

Installation service
U.S. Software Services

DECsupport service

Q*514-9#

Basic service

Q*514-8#

Self-maintenance service

Q*514-3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (Z); MicroVAX 2000 (3); VAX-11/750 (D);
VAX-11/780/785 (E); VAX 820018250 (5); VAX 8300 (7); VAX 8500/8530 (9);
VAX 8550 (2); VAX 8600/8650 (K); VAX 8700 (2); VAX 8800 (M)
#Supported media : 3, 5, M
'Not available on MicroVAX.
2
Not available on MicroVAX, VAX-11/700 series, or VAX 8600/8650.
3
For non -U.S. service agreements, consult a local Digital sales representative.

LAN Traffic Monitor

The LAN Traffic Monitor (LTM) is a tool used in multivendor environments
to analyze the utilization of an extended LAN. A LAN Bridge 100,
downline loaded with the unique monitoring software, is attached to the
802.3/Ethernet cable and transmits information to the LAN Traffic Monitor
Host software program located on any VAX in the extended LAN. LAN
Traffic Monitor permits multiple users from anywhere on the extended
local area network to access the traffic data.
The LTM collects statistics on all local area network traffic regardless of
higher level protocol. For example, users of DECnet, TCP/IP, LAT, and
XNS can study performance on the network by higher level protocol. LTM
gives the network manager the flexibility to monitor different segments of
an extended local area network and have this information collected at a
central location. LTM provides network utilization graphs that show the
network manager the performance of the various local area network segments.
Features
• Provides timely, accurate information needed to maximize network performance and plan network growth.

• Guarantees the integrity of the traffic statistics by capturing every frame
and continuously updating the application software.
• Displays data from multiple monitors on any host running the LTM software in the extended LAN .

6.24

Network and System Management Products

• Gathers traffic statistics from any device connected to the local area network and provides data based on nodes, addresses and/or protocol types.
• Provides performance measurements allowing for the optimum configuration and operation of the local area network .
• Simplifies analysis of local area network traffic data through the use of
both graphic and tabular displays.
• Easy-to-use menu structure shortens the learning curve of the first-time
user.
Required Hardware
LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET) with minimum revision level E
Prerequisite Software
·VMS V4.4 to V4 .7
·DECnet-VAX on the host processor, V4.4 to V4.7
Optional Software
RBMS Vl.1 for remote management of downline load feature in LAN
Bridge 100.
LAN Traffic Monitor Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use license'

Q*ZF3-UZ

VAXcluster license 2

Q*ZF3-QZ

Initial license, primary and cluster 3

Q*ZF3-1P

Periodic payment, primary3

Q*ZF3-JP

Periodic payment, cluster3

Q*ZF3-JZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

Q*ZF3-H#

Software revision right -to -copy

Q*ZF3 -HZ

Documentation only

QLZF3 -GZ

Installation service

Q*ZF3 -l#

U.S. Software Services 4
DECsupport service

Q*ZF3-9#

Basic service

Q*ZF3 -8#

Self-maintenance service

Q*ZF3-3#

*Supported processors(*) : MicroVAX II (Z); MicroVAX 2000 (3); VAXstation II (4);
VAXstation 2000 (8); VAX-111750 (D); VAX -11/780/782/785 (E); VAX 820018250 (5);
VAX 8300/8350 (7); VAX 8500/8530 (9); VAX 8550 (2); VAX 860018650 (K); VAX 8700
(2); VAX 8800 (M)
#Supported media : 3, 5, M
'For software licensing purposes, a VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a
single CPU.
2
Not available on MicroVAX or VAXstation.
3
Not available on MicroVAX, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or VAX 860018650 .
4
For non-U.S. service agreements, consult a local Digital sales representative.

6.25

Network and System Management Products

Remote Bridge Management
Software (RBMS)

Remote Bridge Management Software (RBMS) is an optional product used
with LAN Bridge lOOs (standard, fiber optic, or microwave). RBMS significantly enhances the bridge's operation by allowing the network manager, at
a VAX or MicroVAX host, to observe and control any LAN Bridge 100 in
the network. For example, RBMS allows the network manager to put a
Bridge in backup mode or to block traffic at selected bridges for security
reasons .
RBMS resides on a VAX or MicroVAX host and works in conjunction with
the LAN Bridge lOO 's management firmware . A subset of the IEEE 802.1
Management Protocol is used to communicate between the VAX host and
the targeted bridge. RBMS provides the functions needed to support the
actual control and observation of the LAN Bridge 100.
Features
• Displays counters, statistics, characteristics and the forwarding database.

• Allows the user to change the operational state, characteristics and forwarding database .
• Enables the user to remotely downline load LAN Bridge with LAN Traffic
Monitor software, changing the device from its default state as a bridge .
• Uses the IEEE 802.1 management protocol for both DECnet and nonDECnet environments.
• Allows the user to name and refer to each bridge in ASCII format by mapping ASCII names to physical addresses .
• Enables the user to use one command to address a group of bridges
through the use of global commands.
• Supports simultaneous access by multiple users on the same or different
hosts.
• Provides extensive online help.
• Allows remote troubleshooting of hardware through the Bridge Self Test
feature.
Prerequisite Hardware
·A valid VAX or MicroVAX system configuration with a Digital 802.3/
Ethernet controller connected to an 802 .3/Ethernet network which contains at least one LAN Bridge 100.

• One of the following Digital terminals: VTlOO or VT200 series, LA12,
LA34 , LA35, LA36, or LA38 .
Prerequisite Software
·VMS or MicroVMS, V4.4 to V4.7

·DECnet-VAX , V4 .4 to V4.7

6.26

Network and System Management Products

Remote Bridge Management Software Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use Jicense 1

Q*036-UZ,-UA,-U3

VAXcluster license 2

Q*036-QZ

Initial license, primary and cluster3
Periodic payment, primary

Periodic payment, cluster3

Q*036-1P,-1A,-13
Q*036-JP,-JA,-J3
Q*036-JZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

Q*036-H#

Software revision right-to-copy

Q*036-HZ

Documentation only

QL036-GZ

Installation service
U.S. Software Services

Q*036-I#
4

DECsupport service

Q*036-9#

Basic service

Q*036-8#

Self-maintenance service

Q*036-3#

*Supported processors (*): MicroVAX I (N); MicroVAX II (Z); VAXstation I (Q);
VAXstation II (4); VAX-11/730 (C); VAX-11/750 (D); VAX-11/780/782/785 (E);
VAX 8200/8250 (5); VAX 8300/8350 (7); VAX 8500/8530 (9); VAX 8550 (2);
VAX 8600/8650 (K); VAX 8700 (2); VAX 8800 (M); VAX 8974/8978 (2)
#Supported media: 3, 5, M
1
License for VAX 8974 is -UA; for VAX 8978 is -U3. For software licensing purposes, a
VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a single CPU.
2
Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, or VAX.11/730.
3

Initial and periodic licenses for VAX 8974 are -IA and -JA; for VAX 8978 are -13 and
-J3. Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or
VAX 8600/8650.
4
For non-U.S. service agreements, consult a local Digital sales representative.

6.27

Network Security

To help protect the security of network messages, Digital offers the DESNC
Ethernet Enhanced Security System that selectively encrypts information
across a network, without affecting other network nodes not requiring
encryption.
Ethernet Enhanced Security System
(DESNC)

The Ethernet Enhanced Security System is designed for users whose needs
exceed current commercial security practice. This system allows implementation of security-enhanced 802.3/Ethe .:-net local area networks (LANs)
that permit multiple network nodes to share the same cableplant, assuring
that only authorized nodes have access to sensitive data . The Ethernet
Enhanced Security System :
Increases the protection of information on 802 .3/Ethernet networks
through cryptographic protection of data confidentiality and data integrity.
• Supports comprehensive network security management with node access
control, key management, and monitoring and control.
• Is compatible with IEEE 802.3 and Ethernet standards.
• Supports single-segment, multiple-segment, and extended LANs defined by
the DECconnect System and Planning Configuration Guide.
The Ethernet Enhanced Security System comprises two products integrated into standard 802.3/Ethernet environments-Digital's Ethernet
Secure Network Controller (DESNC) and VAX Key Distribution Center
(KDC) layered product.
Features
• Network security management centralized at VAX KDC system provides
focused management and control.

•Multiple, cooperating VAX KDC systems assure improved network availability and performance.
• Automatic key generation and distribution operate transparently.
• Comprehensive and flexible audit facilities support effective security audit
and alarms as well as network monitoring and fault isolation.
• Performance is suitable for high-performance 802 .3/Ethernet applications.
·DES-encrypted 802 .3/Ethernet frames improve information confidentiality.
• DES-encrypted manipulation-detection codes (MDCs) improve information
integrity.
• Node authentication increases security.
• Network security-policy enforcement supports logical groupings of nodes
(for example, along security or organizational boundaries).
• Default network security policy quickly and easily enhances security for a
network, with minimal impact on existing operations while supporting later
development of more sophisticated policies.
• 802 .3/Ethernet compliance provides the flexibility to support
- Single-segment, multi-segment , and extended LANs .
- Multiple, simultaneous higher-layer protocols, such as DECnet , LAT,
TCP/ IP, and NFS .
- Different network technologies and topologies, for example, any
DECconnect network .

6.28

Network Security

Qualifications
This product is currently available only in the United States and Canada. It
represents the current state-of-the-art in commercial 802.3/Ethernet security systems; however, no single system provides complete security. Users
should follow industry-recognized security practices and should not rely
solely on a single security enhancing product to provide protection from
computer misuse , loss of data, or loss of service.
U.S. Government regulations specify that cryptographic hardware and
software can be exported by license only. Specifically, the Department of
State's International Traffic in Arms Regulations (22 Code of Federal Regulations Subchapter M ) require that an export license be obtained from the
Department before any cryptographic hardware or software is exported
from the United States . Accordingly, an explicit condition of sale of this
product is that the purchaser agrees not to export or cause to be exported
this product or any portion of this product from the United States without
obtaining the requisite export license from the Department of State.

DESNC
The DESNC is a standalone, store-and-forward cryptographic controller
that provides real-time encryption and decryption of 802.3/Ethernet
frames for LAN environments . Also , the DESNC provides security and
network management services such as client node authentication, enforcement of network access control policies, and status reporting .
The DESNC is installed on the transceiver cable between client nodes and
the LAN . The DESNC connects directly to the network via a standard
802.3/Ethernet interface (AUI D-shell connector). The DESNC appears as
a node to the network .
Client nodes are attached to the DESNC controller via four modified
ThinWire ports (client ports) . Each client port can support a single client
node or multiple nodes on "client-port subnetworks ." The DESNC can
support up to 20 client nodes in any distribution across the four client
ports . Client nodes using transceiver-cable interfaces are attached to the
DESNC via the DESTA ThinWire Ethernet transceiver.
The DESNC uses cryptography to protect against unauthorized disclosure
of information (confidentiality) and unauthorized modification of messages
(integrity). The DESNC encrypts 802.3/Ethernet frames received from
client nodes for transmission on the network, and decrypts 802 .3/Ethernet
frames received from the network for transmission to client nodes (refer to
the following figure ). The DESNC encryption process takes data (plaintext)
and a cryptographic key (random 56-bit variable) as inputs and transforms
the input data into an unintelligible form (ciphertext). The decryption
process converts ciphertext back to plaintext.
The DESNC uses a hardware implementation of the Data Encryption Standard (DES) cryptographic algorithm defined by the National Bureau of
Standards in FIPS PUB 46. The cryptographic process is transparent to the
client nodes and cryptographic keys are provided by the VAX KDC layered
product.

6.29

Network Security

Typical DESNC Configuration

VAX Host
Primary
VAX/KOC

OESNC

MicroVA X
II

LAN
Bridge

VAX

MicroVA X

8800

2000

4
Segments

VAX Host
Optional
VAX/KOC

OESNC

~~
~
~

~
~

OESNC

MicroVAX

2000

NBG-112-00

The DESNC and VAX KDC system implement a default access control
policy that allows all nodes on a network to communicate with each other,
after successful authentication. Such a policy allows for rapid integration of
DESNC controllers and VAX KDC systems with minimal impact on existing
network operations. Under this open policy, client nodes (that is, nodes
connected to DESNC controllers) communicate with each other using
encrypted frames on the network. All other communication, such as client
node-to-node is unencrypted .

Network Security

Customers can optionally use DESNC controllers in conjunction with an
associated VAX KDC system to implement more sophisticated access control policies. Fundamentally, the network nodes can be partitioned into
separate access classes (for example, logical groups such as engineering,
finance, and marketing) that are protected from each other. The access
control policy may be defined to allow two nodes to communicate
unencrypted even if one of them is connected to a DESNC controller.

VAX KDC System
The VAX KDC system, attached to the LAN, manages the DESNCs. The
VAX KDC system distributes operational firmware, keying material, and
other security control information (for example, audit criteria) to the
DESNC controllers .
A VAX KDC system comprises
·A VAX processor running VMS (VAX KDC node) .
• The VAX KDC layered software, which runs on VMS.
·A DESNC configured to support a VAX KDC node (KDC-DESNC) .
The VAX KDC system also provides tools to allow a system security manager to implement and manage a security-enhanced LAN. These tools allow
a system security manager to
•Define and maintain the configuration of the DESNC(s ).
• Monitor the operational and security status.
·Actively control the DESNCs on the LAN .
• Maintain an audit trail of security-relevant events.
• Define and maintain the network access control policy.

Configuration Requirements
Standard LAN topologies have few restrictions, and the addition of DESNC
controllers and VAX KDC systems to an existing LAN will generally not
disrupt operations or the basic network topology. However, some configuration requirements must be followed to ensure proper operation of a
security-enhanced LAN . Also, in certain situations, additional guidelines
can improve the efficiency and security of a security-enhanced LAN. Contact your local Digital Network Team representative for assistance in assessing configuration requirements.
Prerequisite Hardware
•Any VAX processor (excluding MicroVAX I) to support a VAX KDC system
• A valid 802.3/Ethernet local area network, either standard or ThinWire

Prerequisite Software
·VMS V4.6 or V4 .7 to support a VAX KDC system
·DECnet-VAX V4 .6 or V4 .7 to support a VAX KDC system

6.31

Network Security

Ordering Information
Minimum configuration includes two DESNCs and one VAX KDC system on
an 802.3/Ethernet LAN. This minimum configuration typically supports
two to seven client nodes and can support a maximum of 39 client nodes.
Ethernet Enhanced Security System (DESNC) Hardware Order Codes
Option

Order Code

Digital Ethernet Secure Network Controller (DESNC) LAN
. Encryption Device, 120 Vac

DESNC-BA

Ethernet Enhanced Security System System (VAX KDC) Software Order Codes
Order Code

Option
Licenses (A license is required for each
CPU.)

Single-use license 1
VAXcluster license

Q*Z56-UZ,-UA,-U3

Q*Z56-QZ

Initial license, primary and cluster3

Q*Z56-1P, -1A,-13

Periodic payment, primary3

Q*Z56-JP,-JA,-J3

Periodic payment, cluster

Q*Z56-JZ

Materials and Installation

Distribution and documentation

Q*Z56-H#

Software revision right-to-copy

Q*Z56-HZ

Documentation only

QLZ56-GZ

Installation service

Q*Z56-I#

U.S. Software Services4
DECsupport service

Q*Z56-9#

Basic service

Q*Z56-8#

Self-maintenance service

Q*Z.'56-3#

*Supported processors(*): MicroVAX II (Z); VAXstation II (4); MicroVAX 2000 (3);
VAXstation 2000 (8); VAX-11/725/730 (C); VAX-11/750 (D); VAX-11/780/782/785 (E);
VAX 8200/8250 (5); VAX 8300/8350 (7); VAX 8500/8530 (9); VAX 8550 (2);
VAX 8600/8650 (K); VAX 8700 (2); VAX 8800 (M); VAX 8974/8978 (2)
#Supported media: 3, 5, M
1
License for VAX 8974 is -UA; for VAX 8978 is -U3 . For software licensing purposes, a
VAX-11/782 is a multiprocessor that is considered a single CPU.
2
Not available on MicroVAX I, VAXserver, VAXstation I.
3

Initial and periodic licenses for VAX 8974 are -IA and -JA ; for VAX 8978 are -13 and
-J3. Not available on MicroVAX, VAXserver, VAXstation, VAX-11/700 series, or
VAX 8600/8650.
4
For non-U.S. service agreements, consult a local Digital sales representative

6.32

Appendix A

802.3/Ethernet Conhgul'ation Guidelines

Network Configuration
and Performance
Guidelines

802.3/Ethernet configuration guidelines focus on connecting terminals,
communications servers, and host systems to a local area network. The
guidelines follow a brief overview of configuration guidelines for Phase IV
networks including a discussion of connecting Phase III to Phase IV networks .
The information here, together with the product descriptions, should help
in preparing a preliminary network plan . Digital sales representatives and
Digital network specialists can give detailed network planning assistance.

Phase IV Network Terms

Full-function node-a node that originates, terminates, and acts as a transit
node for data. It can have multiple lines.
End node- a node that originates and terminates data but cannot act as a
transit node for data destined for other nodes: a single physical line. The
difference between full-function nodes and end nodes is strictly in the
DECnet software.

Router- a dedicated communications server that acts as a transit node for
data destined for other nodes. A router server is a combination of hardware
and software, and is not an originating or terminating node. To maintain
routing performance, applications software should run on a router server.
DNA Phase IV Network
Configuration Guidelines

The number of full-function nodes and router servers in a network should
be kept down because of the overhead associated with routing. The goal is
to minimize the use of full-function (routing) nodes and maximize the ~se
of end nodes . Although end nodes cannot act as transit nodes, they require
less memory, have a single physical link, can spend more time running user
applications, and require very little network management.
The following table shows architectural limits, aggressive limits, and conservative limits for router servers in one local area network. Architectural
limits cannot be exceeded in any circumstances : While DNA Phase IV
networks have fixed architectural limits, most configurations will not be
affected by them . Aggressive limits are not fixed but represent the point
where both performance and memory requirements should be analyzed:
Exceeding these guidelines requires careful analysis by a network consultant or software specialist. Conservative limits represent a point that is
easily achievable and where communications performance is acceptable.

A.1

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Remote Multipoint Configurations and Guidelines
The conventional point-to-point method of connecting remote VAX systems
is shown in the following figure.
Conventional Point-to-point Remote Configuration

VAX 8250

VAX 8550
DMB32 1----~

DECnet-VAX

Modem ,___ __

DMB32 1

DECnet-VAX

NBG-193-00

The following guidelines apply only to remote multipoint configurations.
Local multipoint links should use more cost-effective 802.3/Ethernet
connections.
• Remote multipoint configurations reduce phone line costs in leased privateline networks. They offer a substantial amount of savings for large, geographically dispersed transaction-processing applications over the
alternative dialup lines.
• No nested multipoint configurations should be used. This is not a technical
limitation, but rather a proven rule for customer success. The following
figure illustrates a non-nested configuration .
• Consult individual Software Product Descriptions for supported remote
multipoint configurations (such as the number of tributaries per control
node).

A.2

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Remote Multipoint Non-nested Configurations

End
Node

B
e

"'
~

.s
"'ii

"'O

·3

""=c
~

..g

...

~
"'O

=
c:

......=

::s

~
0

End
Node

NBG-1 94-00

A.3

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Converting Networks from Phase
III to Phase IV

This discussion is for customers who have Phase III networks and are
interested in converting to Phase IV. The following figure illustrates a
typical Phase III network that includes local and remote links and a mix of
CPUs and operating systems. Note the number of communications controllers, modems, and lines required to implement this network.
Typical Phase III Network

DECnet-VAX
(Phase Ill)
DMF32

DECnet-11 M-PLUS
(Phase Ill)
Modem

Modem

~ DMR11

1--~ DMR11

PDP-11/24

VAX-11/730

DMR11

PDP-11/23
-PLUS

VAX-11/780

DMR11

LI".

/I DMR11

DMR11

PDP-11/24
Modem

DECnet-RT
(Phase Ill)

DMR11

DECnet-VAX
(Phase Ill)

DMR11

VAX-11/780

t---

DMR11

DECnet-11M
(Phase Ill)

DECnet-VAX
(Phase 111)

NBG-195-00

A.4

802 .3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

The following figure illustrates a Phase IV network with the same level of
connectivity as the previously described Phase III network. Note that the
Phase IV network uses a standard baseband 802.3/Ethernet cable and
802.3/Ethernet communications controllers rather than the traditional
communications controllers shown in the Phase III network. In this example, all systems (except the DECnet-RT system) are running Phase IV
software and are directly connected to the local area network.
The Phase IV network can have a maximum of 63 areas with up to 1,023
nodes per area for a total of 64,000 nodes. This total is especially important because of the number of personal computers now included in networks.
802.J/Ethemet-bssed Phsse IV Network

DECnet-VAX

DECnet- VAX

(Phase IV)

VAX 8800

VAX 8550

I DEBNA

DEBNA

Terminator

DECnet-11M
DE LUA

(Phase IV)
/1
DELUA

PDP-11/84

~R11

DMA11

Modem

VAX 8350

Micro
PDP-11

DECnet- VAX

DECnet-RT

(Phase Ill)

NBG-196-00

A.5

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

A comparison between the Phase III and Phase IV networks shows the
following:
• There is a significant cost savings and performance improvement with the
Phase IV network. For example, a transceiver plus the 802.3/Ethernet
communications controller costs less and performs better than a synchronous DMRll .
• The Phase IV network increases configuration flexibility.
- Transceivers can be easily relocated along the standard baseband cable.
- 802 .3/Ethernet technology eliminates the need for redundant lines
within the local portion of the network.
- A node can be added or removed from the LAN for maintenance without
affecting the operation of the rest of the LAN.
• Many nodes can be designated as end nodes. This means that they need
only one communications controller (the 802.3/Ethernet controller), they
require less memory for communications, have more time to run applications , and are easier to manage .
.A Refer to "Connecting Shared Resources to an 802.3/Ethernet LAN,"

discussed later in this section, for a description of the use of the Terminal
Server in a Phase IV LAN. "Connecting an 802.3/Ethernet LAN to Remote
Networks,'' discussed later in this section, describes the use of router
servers in Phase IV networks.

A.6

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

802.3/Ethernet-based Products

Digital's 802.3/Ethernet products allow a network configuration to be
tailored to current needs while allowing for future growth. As illustrated
in the following figure , Digital's 802.3/Ethernet products provide many
types of communication, including
•Digital terminal to host (Digital, X.25, and IBM hosts) .
• Host to host.
• Host to server.
• DECnet to DECnet .
• DECnet to X.25 packet-switching data network.
• DECnet to IBM SNA network.
DECnet Phase IV supports direct connection to local area networks for
host systems running VMS , RSX-llM, RSX-llM-PLUS , Micro/RSX, RSTS/ E,
ULTRIX-32 , and P/OS . DECnet Phase III systems can connect to the local
area network through a DECnet Phase IV host or through an 802.3/
Ethernet communications server.

A.7

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

DECnet Network with Many Segments

VAX

Digital
Non-LAT
Host

PDP-11

VAX

NonDigital
Host

VMS/SNA
IBM

MicroVAX

Host

3600

Bridge

VAX

Transceiver Cable

Standard Baseband Cable

PDP-11
DHU11

DMR11

PDP-11

NBG-215-01

A.8

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

VAX

DELNI

Standard Baseband Cable
Terminator

MicroVAX

2000

Thin Wire

MicroVAX

3500
MicroVAX
II

Transceiver
Cable

Transceiver

Bridge

VAX

Transceiver

PDP-11

VAX

PDP-11

NBG-216-01

A.9

802.3/Ethernet Config uration Guidelines

Planning a Baseband
802.3/Ethernet LAN

Planning a baseband 802.3/Ethernet LAN can be divided into three
phases:
• Planning the physical channel layout. This is necessary for all networks,
regardless of the type of equipment to be connected to the network.
· Connecting shared resources to an 802.3/Ethernet LAN, including connecting terminals and host systems.
• Connecting an 802.3/Ethernet LAN to remote networks , including connecting an LAN to other networks, such as DECnet, X.25 packet-switching data
networks (PSDNs), and IBM SNA networks .

Planning the Physical Channel Layout
A flexible 802.3/Ethernet local area network begins with a carefully
planned physical channel layout, which includes the following:
• Standard 802.3/Ethernet , fiber optic, ThinWire, and/or unshielded
twisted-pair cable
• Connectors, terminators, and ground clamp
• Transceivers and transceiver cable
• Repeaters
Placement of these components must be carefully planned and marked on a
physical channel layout plan. This plan is used later for the network installation.
The physical channel layout plan starts with a building layout plan. This
plan is then marked for the placement of cables and repeaters. The plan
also shows the placement of the host computer systems and servers, including existing systems, possible future relocations of those systems, and
possible future equipment.

Standard 802.J/Ethernet Cable
Standard 802.3/Ethernet cable is the backbone of a local area network. A
standard cable segment can be a maximum of 500 meters (1,640 feet) long
and must be grounded at a single point to the building's ground system. A
segment can consist of smaller cable sections joined by barrel connectors.
For example, if a 257.4-meter segment is required, it could be made up of
two 117-meter sections and a 23.4-meter section. This would require two
barrel connectors as shown in the following figure . Segments up to 500
meters ( 1,640 feet) can be made by using barrel connectors; a repeater or
bridge is required beyond 500 meters.
Standard 802.J/Ethernet Cable Segment using Barrel Connectors

257.4m
BNE 2A- MC

117m

Barrel Connector

Standard Ethernet Cable

BNE2A-MC

117m

Barrel Connector

BNE 2A-MA

23 .4m

Terminator

NBG-198-00

The installation of the main 802.3/Ethernet cable segment and the connection of branching segmerits should be carefully planned . Preplanning the
placement of equipment at this stage can save time later when connecting
host systems and servers to the local area network (even while it is operating).

A.10

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Connectors and Terminators
Barrel connectors connect two standard baseband cable sections, creating a
segment up to a maximum length of 500 meters (1 ,640 feet ).
Terminators (50 ohms ) electronically terminate the ends of a standard
baseband cable segment. Each end of the cable section must have either a
terminator or a connector.
Fiber Optic Cable
Digital offers general purpose fiber optic cable. & Refer to "Baseband
802.3/Ethernet Products" in Section 2 for further details. Plenum fiber
optic cable (used where the cable path is through air plenums) and aerial
fiber optic cable (for connecting buildings through the air or in conduit
underground) are available through other vendors . Installation requirements for all three types of fiber optic cable are given below.
The Digital fiber optic cable certification is needed to assess proper connectivity and determine if the installation meets acceptable attenuation
limits. Certification is also required for Digital Field Service to support an
installation. A Digital Field Service Network Planning Consultant or
Digital-recommended installer (see Section 6) can provide this service .
The fiber optic cable and connectors used must meet the following requirements:
• The fiber should be a Corning 1508 type fiber or equivalent.
• Connectors on these cables must be Amphenol 906 type SMA or equivalent.
• Bandwidth must be greater than or equal to 300 MHz per kilometer at
850 nm .
• Cable attenuation must be less than or equal to 6 dB per kilometer at
850 nm over the operating temperature range.
• Total system loss must be less than 12.5 dB , to be verified after the installation.
• Operating temperature and humidity must be within the ranges listed in
the following table .
Operating Temperature and Humidity Ranges for Fiber Optic Cable
Cable

Operating Temperature

Humidity

General Purpose

0°C-70°C

95 % , noncondensing

Aerial

-30°C-60°C

95 % , noncondensing

Plenum

0°C-70°C

95 % , noncondensing

ThinWire 802.J/Ethernet Cable
ThinWire cable is recommended for offices and other local work areas to
bring 802.3 / Ethernet capability to personal computers, workstations and
low-end systems. & For more information, refer to "Planning a ThinWire
802.3/Ethernet LAN," discussed later in this section.

A.11

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Unshielded Twisted-pair Cable
Unshielded twisted-pair cable is recommended for those customers who
have already installed telephone -type twisted -pair cabling, and want to
minimize the cost and network disruption of installing new network
cable. .& Refer to "Unshielded Twisted-pair Cable Guidelines," described
later in this section, for more information.

Transceivers and Transceiver Cable
Devices are connected to standard baseband cable via transceivers and
transceiver drop cable. The transceiver transmits signals on the transceiver
cable to the connected devices and detects message collisions. Transceivers
mount on the standard baseband cable by means of a tap and can be easily
installed using Digital's Ethernet Transceiver Installation Tool Kit.
There is one general-purpose transceiver cable that supports both Ethernet
and IEEE 802 .3 hardware. This cable is available in standard and office
types . Because office cables have a high signal loss, they are limited to a
maximum distance of 12.5 meters. They are, however, thinner than standard cables and easier to run in an office environment.
Remember these rules when planning installation of transceivers and transceiver cable on the standard baseband cable:
• There is a maximum of 100 transceivers per standard 500-meter cable
segment.
• Transceivers must be at least 2.5 meters (8 .2 feet ) apart. Standard
802 .3/Ethernet baseband cable is premarked every 2.5 meters to ensure
adequate spacing.
• Each transceiver needs a corresponding transceiver cable.
• Transceiver drop cable can be a maximum of 50 meters ( 165 feet) in
length . Some devices have an internal cabling eguivalency which must be
subtracted from the 50-meter maximum. Consult the device's technical
manual for the appropriate cable egu ivalency.
The following figure shows an 802.3/Ethernet network with each system
attached to the standard baseband cable by means of a transceiver and
transceiver cable. The systems communicate with the network through an
802 .3/Ethernet communications controller.

A.12

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

802.J/Etbemet LAN with Connected Processors

t.
1

MicroPDP-11

VAX8800

---I

DE LOA

DEB NA

MicroVAX
3600
DESOA

I.7

Standard

r=
an=sc=e=iv)er_--!r-L==J - - -G - --C-=:::::____.·-:.--Ethernet Cable
..1 - --c==i----r---1-J---!T
';;,minator
B~el
~
Connector
T DEBNA

VAX 8250

- L_

t1 DESVA
MicroVAX
2000

NBG-199-01

Ethernet Repeaters
An Ethernet repeater allows network expansion beyond the 500-meter
( 1,640-foot) limit of one standard Ethernet cable segment. Two repeaters
(the maximum allowed without an intervening bridge) can connect three
standard Ethernet cable segments, making them function as if they were
one cable by retiming, amplifying, and repeating all signals received from
one segment, then passing the signals to the next segment.
Digital offers two repeaters for standard Ethernet cable:
•Local repeater-connects two standard Ethernet cable segments in the
same building. The two cable segments can be a maximum of 100 meters
(328 feet) apart.
•Fiber optic repeaters-connect two standard Ethernet cable segments at
greater distance , such as between buildings, using fiber optic cable.
Repeaters can be used effectively in a multifloor building to expand a
network. A backbone standard Ethernet cable segment can be installed
vertically from the basement to the top floor of a building with repeaters
and a branching segment installed on each floor.
Consider these rules when planning LAN expansion using repeaters:
• A message transmitted on a local area network must pass through no more
than two repeaters (DEREP, DEMPR, or DESPR) before either reaching its
destination or passing through a LAN Bridge .
• Fiber optic repeaters may be used to connect multiple Ethernet segments.
However, the total amount of fiber optic cable used in the path between
any two nodes may not exceed 1000 meters (3, 282 feet).
•Repeaters may be placed in parallel for backup purposes-one active and
the other inactive. If one fails, the other activates .
• A repeater cannot be connected to a DELNI.
• Both local and fiber optic repeaters are connected to the standard Ethernet
cable via H4000 Ethernet transceivers and Ethernet transceiver cables.

A.13

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

The following figure illustrates an Ethernet LAN that has been expanded
from one floor to another floor within the same building. In this example,
because the distance between the two standard Ethernet cables is 100
meters, a local repeater is used.
Ethernet LAN Expansion using a Local Repeater (100-m maximum separation between
between repeaters)

MicroPDP-11

VAX 8800

I DELOA

DEBNA

VAX 8550
DEBNA

'./

Terminator
Transceiver

Standard Ethernet Cable

5 to 50m

H4000

NBG-200-00

If it is necessary to expand the network to another building up to 1,000
meters (3, 280 feet) away, a fiber optic repeater is necessary as shown in the
following figure .
Ethemet LAN Expansion using a Fiber Optic Repeater (1000-m maximum separation
between repeaters)

MicroPDP· 11

VAX 8800

DE LOA

DEBNA

VAX 8700
DEB NA

Terminator

Standard Ethernet Cable

5to50m

VAX 8350
VAX 8550

DEBNA

5to50m

---~~~,,---~,~
H4000

H4000

NBG-201 -01

A.14

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Standard Baseband Ethernet Distance Guidelines
Standard baseband 802.3/Ethernet is a branching, non-rooted tree topology with a maximum node separation (the distance between the two farthest systems on the network) of 2.8 kilometers (1 .74 miles) . Up to 1,023
transceivers can be connected to the standard baseband cable, allowing
thousands of devices to be connected.
The 2,800 meter (9,194 feet) maximum distance between any two nodes is
the sum of two 50-meter (164 feet) transceiver cables, three 500-meter
(1,640 feet) standard 802.3/Ethernet cable segments, four 50-meter (164
feet) transceiver cables connected to repeaters , and 1,000 meters (3, 280
feet) of fiber optic cable.
A few simple rules for configuring a standard 802.3/Ethernet local area
network, derived from certain limits that are imposed on the physical
channel, ensure the optimal performance of the network. The maximum
configuration for an 802.3/Ethernet local area network is as follows :
• A segment of standard baseband cable can be a maximum of 500 meters
(1,640 feet) in length. Each segment of standard baseband cable is terminated at both ends, at which point transmitted signals stop.
• There can be a maximum of 100 physical connections (transceivers) on any
segment of cable (at 2.5 meter intervals). Note that a number of devices
can be connected to one transceiver via a DELNI.
• Repeaters are used to continue signals from one segment of the local area
network to another. A repeater requires a transceiver connection on both
segments it joins and counts toward the 100 transceiver maximum for each
segment. A message transmitted on a local area network must pass through
no more than two repeaters (DEREP, DEMPR, or DESPR) before either
reaching its destination or passing through a LAN Bridge.
• The maximum length of standard baseband cable between any two transceivers is 1, 500 meters (4, 920 feet) .
• A total of 1,000 meters (3, 280 feet) of fiber optic cable is allowed for
expanding the network using fiber optic repeaters.
• A standalone DELNI configuration supports up to eight devices (systems,
not terminals) using transceiver cables between 40 and 45 meters (131.2
and 147.6 feet) in length, depending on the communications controller.
• A hierarchical standalone DELNI configuration supports up to 64 devices
using standard transceiver cables between 40 and 45 meters ( 131.2 and
147.6 feet) in length , depending on the communications device, and up to
50 meters ( 164 feet) for another DELNI which, in turn, can support
devices between 40 and 45 meters (131.2 and 147.6 feet) in length, depending on the communications device . A hierarchical standalone DELNI LAN
is not connected to the standard baseband cable.
• A connected DELNI configuration supports up to eight devices using
standard transceiver cables between 35 and 40 meters (114.8 and 131.2
feet) in length, depending on the communications device.
• Transceiver cable length is limited to 50 meters ( 164 feet) for connection to
host systems and communications servers.
• Some devices have internal cabling that may reduce the effective length of
the transceiver cable.

A.15

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Baseband 802.J/Ethernet Distance Guidelines

500m
Standard Ethernet Cable

H4000

5to50m
Host

5to50m

5to50m
H4000

Transceiver
H4000

H4000

5to 50 m

5to35m

Host

5to50m

Terminator

H4000

NBG-202-01

Planning a ThinWire
802.3/Ethernet LAN

While standard baseband 802 .3/Ethernet is recommended for use between
satellite equipment rooms , ThinWire is recommended for use within the
floor areas of a facility. ThinWire 802.3/ Ethernet cable is an alternative
baseband cabling system that can be configured as a standalone network or
connected to the backbone cable in local work areas . ThinWire 802.3/
Ethernet products include ThinWire coaxial cable, multiport repeaters
(DEMPR), singleport repeaters (DESPR), station adapters (DESTA), and
connection components.
Three configurations are recommended for ThinWire installation : small
work group, standalone departmental, and connected departmental.

Small Work Group Configuration
The small work group configuration allows users to connect personal
computers , workstations, low-end systems, and 802.3/Ethernet communications servers using ThinWire cable and T-connectors. A segment of
ThinWire cable is divided into sections . Two sections of cable are joined by
a T-connector and the bottom of the "T " is inserted into a DESTA or
ThinWire 802 .3/Ethernet communications controller. The DESTA has a
15 -pin D -connector for attachment to standard 802.3/Ethernet devices and
a BNC connector for connection to ThinWire. Up to 30 devices can be
connected to a 185-meter ThinWire segment.

A.16

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

ThinWire Small Work Group Configuration

Terminator f 'T-Connector

~~~

Thin Wire Cable

Station
Adapter

MicroVAX
II

NBG-203-00

Standalone Departmental Configurations
The standalone departmental configuration allows up to eight 185 -meter
ThinWire segments to connect to the Multiport Repeater (DEMPR). The
DEMPR can be used in a radial topology to connect personal computers,
workstations, and low-end systems in a work area or throughout the floor
of a building. Each of the eight ThinWire cable segments that connect to
the DEMPR can accommodate up to 29 stations. Therefore, one DEMPR
can connect 232 stations. The DEMPR will isolate faults in a segment so
that the rest of the network will stay in operation. The following figure
illustrates the standalone departmental configuration .
ThinWire Standalone Departmental Configuration

MicroVAX

MicroVAX
II

2000

T-Connector

Terminator'

~
;r-;,?l~~CM
'1
MicroVAX

3500

~
NBG-204-00

Eight DEMPRs can also be connected to a DELNI in a standalone departmental configuration. In this configuration , the 802.3 / Ethernet limit of
1,023 stations can be connected .
Connected Departmental Configurations
In connected departmental configurations , ThinWire segments connect to
the backbone cable for access to more computing resources on the larger
local area network . Up to eight ThinWire segments can connect to a
DEMPR, which connects to the backbone cable via a baseband transceiver.
In addition , up to eight DEMPRs can connect to a DELNI, which connects
to the backbone standard baseband cable using an H4005 (or H4000-BA)
transceiver.

A.17

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

When connected to standard 802.3/Ethernet cable, the ThinWire repeater
functions as a repeater between all stations attached to it and all devices
connected to the standard cable. The ThinWire repeater must count as a
full repeater when configuring an 802 .3/Ethernet LAN. Since it counts as a
repeater, only one other repeater can be configured in the path between the
ThinWire repeater and any station on the rest of the local area network.
For configuration simplicity, bridges rather than repeaters are
recommended between standard 802.3/Ethernet segments where ThinWire
repeaters are attached . The following figure illustrates a ThinWire connected departmental configuration.
ThinWire Connected Departmental Configuration
Standard Ethernet Cable

Transceiver
Transceiver
Cable

ThinWire Cable (185 meters max.)

MicroVAX

2000

T-Connector

Multi port
Repeater

Terminator '

MicroVAX
3500

NBG-205-00

ThinWire Configuration Guidelines
• A segment of ThinWire cable may be a maximum of 185 meters in length.
Each segment must be terminated at each end with 50-ohm terminators.
• A section is a single length of ThinWire cable with male BNC connectors at
each end . ThinWire segments are composed of one or more sections of
ThinWire cable connected by barrel and/or T-connectors.
• A maximum of 30 stations (28 with the DECconnect System) may be connected to a single ThinWire segment . The DECconnect faceplate , the
ThinWire repeater, a BNC T-connector, or barrel connector counts as one
station. There must be 0.5 meters ( 19 inches) between T-connectors .
• A ThinWire repeater provides internal cable termination and can therefore
be placed only at the end of a segment.
• A message transmitted on a local area network must pass through no more
than two repeaters (DEREP, DEMPR, or DESPR) before either reaching its
destination or passing through a LAN Bridge.
• A ThinWire repeater must be connected to standard baseband cable using
either a baseband transceiver or a DELNI. The DELNI in this configuration
cannot be connected to another DELNI, and it must connect to the standard baseband cable with an H4005 transceiver (or H4000-BA) . The standard 802 .3/Ethernet segment to which a DELNI/DEMPR or DELNI/DESPR
configuration is attached may not exceed 300 meters (984 feet) .

A.18

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

• A station requiring a DESTA must be connected directly to the DESTA
with transceiver cable. The DESTA must connect directly to the BNC
T-connector. No cable is allowed between the DESTA and the BNC
T-connector. The DESTA cannot be connected to a DEREP.
• There must be only one ground per cable segment. Ensure that no other
connectors contact the ground. If the segment is attached to a ThinWire
repeater, the repeater provides the ground and no other ground connections are allowed .
• ThinWire cable segments must never be configured in a loop .
• ThinWire cable segments must never have any branch segments. All
T-connectors must attach directly to stations, not to other segments of
ThinWire cable.

DECconnect ThinWire Configurations
ThinWire can be used to supply 802 .3/Ethernet capability from a satellite
equipment room to a faceplate in an office or other work area , as long as
the 185-meter distance requirement is observed. Ji. Refer to Section 2 for
more information.
Unshielded Twisted-pair Guidelines
The unshielded twisted-pair Ethernet adapter can attach to these types of
unshielded twisted-pair cable :
• DECconnect unshielded twisted four-pair cable (H8245/H8246)
·AT&T Type C and D
• Northern Telecom 3-Pair
·IBM Type 3
Allowable distance over unshielded twisted-pair cable is 50 to 70 meters .
Each unshielded twisted-pair adapter supports a single device only.
Twisted-pair installations are restricted to one station per twisted-pair
segment.
A twisted-pair cable segment must be dedicated to 802 .3/Ethernet services. No concurrent services, such as telephone or low-speed data , can be
used within the same cable sheath as the 802.3/ Ethernet cable.
When configuring 802.3/Ethernet twisted-pair products, the cable qualification is as important as the product itself. Customers planning to use
existing wiring qualify for testing if they can answer yes to the following
questions:
·Is your wire unshielded twisted-pair?
• Is it one of the following types: DECconnect unshielded twisted four-pair
cable (H8245/H8246) , AT&T Type C or D, Northern Telecom 3-Pair, or
IBM Type 3?
• Is your wiring newer than two years old?
• Does each sheath contain a maximum of four pairs of wire?
• Is the cable currently unoccupied?
• Will the cable be used for 802 .3/Ethernet communications only?
Ji. For more information on configuring unshielded twisted-pair cable, refer
to the configuration ·manuals listed in Appendix D.

A.19

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Planning an Extended Baseband
802.3/Ethernet LAN

The extended LAN is an 802.3/Ethernet environment that uses bridges to
connect several 802.3/Ethernet segments into one large network of up to
8,000 nodes . By using LAN Bridges in network configurations, it is possible
to extend network size without diminishing network performance.
The LAN Bridge forwards packets destined for other segments of the
extended LAN, filtering out the packets destined for a node within the
same segment. This "packet filtering" allows the customer to configure a
segment based on traffic flow, thereby making the best use of network
bandwidth. For example, the bridge can be used to isolate a network
segment with heavy traffic from the rest of the extended LAN .
The following configuration rules apply to standard, fiber optic, and microwave versions of the LAN Bridge 100.

Configuration and Distance Guidelines
• An extended LAN may have up to 8,000 stations.
• Digital recommends that an extended LAN have no more than seven
bridges between stations. Protocols that have time-sensitive parameters
may suffer performance loss if packets move through more than seven
bridges, due to the accumulation of slight delays caused by the storeand-forward function .
• Bridges can be placed in parallel with other bridges to provide an autobackup capability. Bridges causing loops in this situation automatically
enter a backup state. A bridge that is in the backup state continues to
monitor traffic on both LANs and, if the primary bridge fails, automatically
activates and forwards messages.
• The LAN Bridge 100 can be used to connect network segments using any
standard 802.3/Ethernet medium (i.e., baseband or broadband) .
• Distance from the transceiver to bridge can be a maximum of 50 meters , a
total of 100 meters between segments. Internal cabling may reduce the
effective length of the transceiver cable .

Fiber Optic Links
Fiber optic links can be built using two fiber optic bridges, two fiber optic
repeaters, or one fiber optic bridge and one fiber optic repeater. Two
bridges connected by a fiber optic link count as two in the seven-bridge
limitation.
• When building links with fiber optic repeaters , there must be no more than
1,000 meters of fiber between stations.
• Distance from the transceiver to bridge can be a maximum of 50 meters.
Internal cabling may reduce the effective length of the transceiver cable.
• The fiber optic repeater must use an H4000 transceiver to attach to the
standard Ethernet cable.
• When building links with the fiber optic bridge and fiber optic repeater
combination, the length of the fiber optic link must be included as part of
the configuration of the LAN to which the fiber optic repeater is
attached . .& For more information, refer to the topic on Ethernet repeaters
in "Planning a Baseband 802.3/Ethernet LAN" in this section.

A.20

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

• When building a link with two fiber optic bridges, each link length is
limited by the 12 dB system budget for signal loss. Therefore, with the
present Digital 62.5 / 125 micron fiber cable, a link can be 3,000 meters
long. Many 3,000-meter links can be built throughout the extended LAN .
• T he fiber optic bridge and repeater are designed to operate with other size
fibers including 100/140, 85/125, and 50/125. The following table lists the
distance and power-budget specifications.
Optics/ Specifications for Fiber Optic Bridge (DEBET-RHIRJ) and Repeater
(DEREP-RHIRJ)

Fiber
(micrometers)

Power
Budget*
(dB)

Attainable Distance (km )*

DEBETto
DEBET

DEREP to
DEREP

DEBET to
DE REP

50/125

08.0

2.0

1.0

1.5

62.5/125

12.0

3.0

1.0

1.5

85/125

13.5

3.0

1.0

1.5

100/140

16.0

3.0

1.0

1.5

*With less than a 1x10· 10 bit error rate.

Microwave Link
Microwave links are implemented using the Digital METROWAVE Bridge
and the M/A-COM, Inc. , MA-23 LAN microwave radio equipment .
• 802.3/Ethernet LAN configuration rules for the METROWAVE Bridge are
based on the same configuration rules that apply to a pair of fiber optic
LAN Bridge lOOs : microwave-based METROWAVE uses two LAN Bridge
lOOs and counts as two bridges in an extended LAN configuration. Digital
advises a maximum of seven bridges between the two farthest nodes in an
extended LAN when time-critical protocols such as LAT are used .
• Line-of-sight single-link distances up to 4.5 miles (bridge to bridge ) are
possible. Maximum path length is determined by 802 .3/ Ethernet propagation delay specifications, designed to detect signal col li sions during simultaneous two-way transmissions .
As with coaxial or fiber optic cable, microwave has an associated latency
that can be the same or less than a fully configured maximum-length
802 .3/Ethernet LAN. T he maximum allowable delay determines the 4.5mile (7,240-meter ) distance restriction for METROWAVE. (A standard
802.3/Ethernet LAN has a maximum distance limitation of 2,800 meters
between its two farthest nodes . A single LAN Bridge 100 can join two such
maximum LANs .)
The path length is also a function of the cable distance as measured along
the path of the cables between the two links . The cable distance is determined by adding the following distances on both ends of the link:
- the distance from the LAN Bridge 100 to the microwave adapter, plus
- the distance from the microwave adapter to the receiver (RX ) and transmitter (TX) controllers, plu s
- the distance from the RX/ TX con trollers to the RF (radio frequency )
units.

A.21

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

The following table lists the resulting point-to-point antenna path given
various total (both sides) cabling distances from the LAN Bridge to the
antenna :
Total Cabling
Distance (ft)

Antenna Path (miles)

100

4.48

200

4.45

600

4.33

1,000

4.21

2,000

3.91

• The microwave transmitter and receiver controllers may be up to 1,000
feet from the antenna.
•A METROWAVE Bridge must be located at each end of the microwave link
and includes the following :
- Standard baseband 802.3/Ethernet transceiver
- LAN Bridge 100
- BNE3M-20 cable connecting the standard baseband transceiver to the
LAN Bridge 100
- Microwave adapter
- BNE4D-02 cable connecting the LAN Bridge 100 and microwave adapter
•The METROWAVE Bridge is available premounted in 31.5-inch high cabinets, or in non-cabinet configurations that make it suitable for
rackmounting in satellite equipment room (SER) racks.
•Two METROWAVE Bridges connected by a microwave link count as two in
the seven-bridge limitation.
•Although it is packaged with a baseband transceiver, the METROWAVE
Bridge can also be attached to standard 802.3/Ethernet cable using a
DELNI, to ThinWire cable using a DESTA, or to broadband cable using a
broadband transceiver.

A.22

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

The following figure illustrates the extended baseband LAN configuration
and distance guidelines.
Extended Baseband LAN Configuration and Distance Guidelines (Standard, Fiber Optic,
and METROWAVE Bridges)

Transceiver

••1----- - - 4[ -

•

-,.- - - - ----

fl)

Terminator

Transceiver

....c

Fiber

"ii
"ti

·3

Standard

Bridge

Fiber Optic
Repeater

..s...

Transceiver Cable

•

c='.:::J~---------1,--- "....___{ ~~------H4ooo

St and ard Baseband Cable

~
c
=
c

"ti

·:::

...=
:I

Fiber

Cl!)

Optic

~
0

<
Fiber
Optic

Antenna

Microwave Link

\------~

METRO-

WAVE

~
ll'

Bridge
7

Antenna

METROWAVE

Bridge

Transceiver

'62.5/125 Micrometer Fiber Cable

NBG-206-00

A.23

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Planning a Broadband
802.3/Ethernet LAN

In broadband local area networks, a different cabling system is used than
for baseband networks. The network cable, coaxial drop cables, and cable
components (amplifiers, splitters, taps, etc.) necessary to construct broadband networks are the same as those used for cable TV.
The planning and installation of a broadband cable system is most often
undertaken with the assistance of consultants, installation contractors, and
cable TV (CATV) equipment vendors. As part of its Network Services,
Digital will serve as the customer's single point of contact for the planning,
design, installation, and maintenance of Digital broadband networks .

In preparation for installing broadband networks, Digital certifies the
broadband 802.3/Ethernet channel in new and existing broadband
cableplants to ensure successful operation of broadband 802.3/Ethernet
products. Digital also provides ongoing and remedial maintenance services
for these broadband products and other Digital-qualified vendor products .
Certification of the broadband 802.3/Ethernet channel in the customer 's
network is a prerequisite for onsite service contracts for broadband
802.3/Ethernet products.
A Refer to Section 6 for more details about Digital's Network Services for
broadband local area networks and broadband 802.3/Ethernet products.
Contact your Digital Account Manager or Local Field Service Office for
further assistance.

Broadband 802.J/Ethernet Distance Guidelines and Configuration
Broadband 802.3/Ethernet is a rooted branching non-rooted tree topology
with a maximum node separation (the distance between the two farthest
systems on the network) of 3.8 kilometers (approximately 2.4 miles ). Up to
1,023 broadband transceivers can be connected to the broadband network
cable, allowing thousands of devices to be connected.
A few simple rules for configuring 802.3/Ethernet on broadband, derived
from certain limits imposed on the 802.3/Ethernet physical channel,
ensure the optimal performance of the network.
• Distances in broadband 802.3/Ethernet are measured from the location of
the broadband frequency translator in single cable networks. The frequency translator is located at the network "headend."
The maximum distance from the frequency translator to the farthest broadband transceiver (for example, the maximum radius of the network ) is
1,900 meters, or about 1.2 miles.

· In dual cable networks, distances are measured from the point at which the
transmit (inbound) cable turns around and becomes the receive (putbound) cable. This is considered the headend of the dual cable network .
The maximum distance from the cable turnaround to the farthest
802.3/Ethernet broadband transceiver is 1,900 meters, or about 1.2 miles .
• The maximum station separation of 3,800 meters is achieved when the
broadband cable branches out in opposite directions from the network
headend. Two of these 1,900 meter branches add up to 3,800 meters of
maximum station separation.

A.24

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Broadband 802.J/Ethemet Distance Guidelines: Single-cable Networks

1900m
3800m

Broadband
Frequency
Translator

Broadband Signal Splitter ....
Broadband Tap
Drop Cable s2~
Broadband
Transceiver

Broadband
Transceiver

Ca~

Transceiver
Sto 40 m

Host

NBG-207-00

Broadband 802.J/Ethernet Distance Guidelines: Dual-cable Networks

1900m
3800m
Midcable Loop

.... Broadband Signal Splitters
Broadband Cables

Broadband Tap

Broadband
Transceiver

Host

NBG-208-00

A.25

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Because the broadband cable can branch out in any direction, the network
can consist of virtually unlimited numbers of "spokes" from the headend
location. The network cable system in broadband networks is made up of
broadband coaxial cable (trunk and drop cables ) as well as cable components (amplifiers, splitters, taps , etc.) . These elements are the same as
those used by the cable TV (CATV) industry. When a broadband network
is configured, taps are installed in the cable to allow connection of network
devices.
The connection from the broadband tap to the broadband transceiver is
made with a broadband drop cable, usually a flexible coaxial cable of RG-6
variety. In single cable networks, there is one drop cable from the tap to
the transceiver. In dual cable networks, there are two drop cables from the
taps to the transceiver, one from a tap on both inbound and outbound
cables .
• In both single- and dual-cable broadband networks, the maximum length
of drop cable from the broadband tap in the network cable to the transceiver is 25 meters. In some networks, the drop cable from the broadband
tap leads to a wall outlet . Customers can connect the Ethermodem to the
wall outlet using the same flexible (RG-6 ) coaxial drop cable .
• The maximum length of drop cable from broadband tap to wall outlet to
broadband transceiver is 25 meters. Transceiver cable is used to connect
the broadband transceiver to an 802.3/Ethernet communications controller, LAN Bridge 100, communications server, or terminal server.
•Transceiver cable length is limited to 50 meters (164 feet), and is measured
from the connection at the rear of the broadband transceiver to host system, communications or terminal server. Note that some devices have
internal cabling that may reduce the effective length of the transceiver
cable .
Planning an Extended Broadband
802.3/Ethernet LAN

The configuration guidelines for standard broadband 802 .3/Ethernet also
apply for extended broadband networks , with the following additions:
• For local links, the bridge connects to a broadband transceiver on both
sides. Distance from the broadband transceiver to bridge can be a maximum of 50 meters, a total of 100 meters between segments. Internal
cabling may reduce the effective length of the transceiver cable.
• For fiber optic links, two bridges must be used, with each bridge attached
to an broadband transceiver. Maximum distance between bridges is 3,000
meters using 62.5/125 micron fiber cable and the DEBET-RH/ RJ LAN
Bridge . Distance from the transceiver to the bridge can be a maximum of
50 meters . Internal cabling may reduce the effective length of the transceiver cable . The following figure illustrates the extended broadband LAN
configuration and distance guidelines .

A.26

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Extended Broadband LAN Configuration and Distance Guidelines (Single Cable )

Frequency
Translator

.... Broadband Signal Splitter
Broadband Cable
::s25m
Broadband
Transceiver
Transceiver Cable
:s40 m

Fiber

Standard

Optic

Bridge
Frequency
Translator

Fiber
Optic

11
L_,_J

Broadband
Transceiver

Bridge
Broadband Cable
Broadband
Transceiver

Broadband Tap

<C
'62.5/125 Micron Fiber Cable

NBG-209-00

Connecting Baseband to
Broadband LANs

Baseband and broadband LANs can be connected using the LAN Bridge
100. For local links , the bridge connects to a baseband 802.3 / Ethernet
transceiver on the baseband side of the link using transceiver cable with a
maximum length of 50 meters . On the broadband side of the link, the
bridge connects to a broadband transceiver using transceiver cable with a
maximum length of 50 meters. Internal cabling may reduce the effective
length of the transceiver cable on both sides of the bridge.
For fiber optic links, two bridges must be used. The bridge on the
baseband side of the link is connected to a baseband transceiver. The
bridge on the broadband side of the link is connected to a broadband
transceiver. Maximum distance between bridges is 3,000 meters using
62.5 / 125 micron fiber cable and the DEBET-RH/ RJ LAN Bridge . Distance
from each transceiver to the bridge can be a maximum of 50 meters. Internal cabling may reduce the effective length of the transceiver cable.

A.27

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Baseband-to-broadband LAN Configuration Guidelines (Standard Bridge)

Baseband
Transceiver
~~~~~--!~'--~~~~~

s5~,

Standard
Baseband
Cable

Standard

Bridge

,..

s 40m

Broadband !-'~'

Transceiver

s 25 m

Broadband
Frequency
Broadband Translator
Tap

Single-cable Bro~dband
NBG-210-01

Baseband-to-broadband LAN Configuration Guidelines (Fiber Optic Bridge)

Baseband
Transceiver
'-

Standard
Baseband
Cable

s 50m
.11

Fiber

Optic

Bridge
JL/

d3ooom·
/1

Fiber

Optic

,.,

Bridge

!.!'.

s 40m
Broadband
Transceiver
_~'

s 25 :~~adband
Single-cable Broadband

Broadband
Frequency
Tn

'62.5/125 Micron Fiber Cable w/ DEBET-RH/RJ
NBG-21 1-0 1

A.28

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Connecting Shared Resources to an
802.3/Ethernet LAN

When planning a baseband or broadband 802.3/Ethernet LAN, alternatives
for connecting shared resources (including terminals, host systems, and
communications servers) should be explored .
Connecting Terminals
There are two ways to connect terminals to the 802.3/Ethernet LAN : direct
connection to a host system on the LAN, and connection to a terminal
server on the LAN.
Direct connection is the conventional method of con11ecting terminals to a
host. Directly connected terminals can access any other host system in a
network , then operate as if they were connected to the other host system.
However, this connection scheme lacks flexibility because terminal controllers must be added to each host system ; wiring must extend from each
terminal to the directly connected host, which may be a long distance away;
and directly connected terminals incur the overhead of passing through
their direct host to connect to another host. The following figure illustrates
a LAN configuration with directly connected terminals.
802.J/Ethernet LAN with Many Terminals Per Host

DMB32

VAX 8650

VAX 8250

Transceiver
Terminator

Standard Baseband Cable

VAX 8550

NBG-212-00

Terminal servers allow a more flexible connection scheme than direct
connection . A group of terminals connect to a terminal server, which then
connects directly to the LAN, allowing the terminals to access any host on
the LAN. Printers and modems can also connect to a terminal server,
allowing them to be shared by all host systems on the LAN . Terminal
servers can be placed close to the users' workplace, thereby reducing the
length of wire extending from each terminal.

A.29

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

The following figure shows an 802.3/Ethernet configuration using terminal
servers. Compared to the configuration shown in the previous figure, the
terminal server configuration reduces the number of controllers for each
host, reduces the length of wires extending from terminals, and offers
greater flexibility in accessing host systems on the LAN.
802.J/Etbernet LAN Configur•tion Using Termin•l Servers

Modem

~ VAX~50 j
I
Transceiver

VAX8550

NBG-213-00

Connecting Host Systems
Host systems can be connected to an 802.3/Ethernet LAN in the following
ways:
• Directly to standard 802.3/Ethernet cable (using an 802.3/Ethernet transceiver) or to ThinWire. These systems require DECnet Phase IV software
and an 802.3/Ethernet communications controller. If the controller connects to standard baseband cable, it can connect to ThinWire via a
ThinWire Ethernet Station Adapter DESTA).
• Directly as part of a group of DECnet Phase IV host systems connected to
a Local Network Interconnect (DELNI). Each host system requires DECnet
Phase IV software and an 802 .3/Ethernet communications controller.
• Indirectly via a DECnet Phase IV host system that is connected to the
802 .3/Ethernet cable . Connected host systems can have DECnet Phase III
or Phase IV software. Connections can be hardwired or through modems.
• Indirectly through a DECrouter 2000, a DECrouter 200, or X25router
2000. Connected host systems can have DECnet Phase III or Phase IV
software. Connections can be hardwired or through modems .

A.30

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Connecting Host Systems to an 802.J/Ethernet LAN

~ G
DESTA -

Host

"'Ill
.....c
u
"ti
Transceiver

Standard Baseband Cable

Terminator

Ill

cI'll

.,£

~""
cI'll
c

Host

"ti

.9
...
I'll

""c.o
=

Host

t::l

c
0

u
ct

Host

NBG-214·00

DECnet Host System Software
DECnet Phase IV software allows host systems to communicate with
up to 64,000 addressable nodes in a local or wide area network environ ment. An addressable node is either a host system or communications
server. & Refer to Section 4 for detailed information on Digital's DECnet
software products.
Local Network Interconnect (DELNI)
The Local Network Interconnect (DELNI) provides low-cost 802 .3/
Ethernet performance for a group of 802.3 / Ethernet-compatible devices in
a 50-meter area. The DELNI can be configured in three ways:
• Standalone
• Hierarchical standalone
•Connected
The DELNI standalone configuration, illustrated in the following figure ,
supports up to eight systems or system-based devices (not terminals ) using
standard 802.3 / Ethernet transceiver cables up to 50 meters ( 164 feet )
away.

A.31

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

DELNI Standalone Configuration

Transceiver Cable

45m

MicroVAX

NBG-135-01

The DELNI hierarchical standalone configuration, illustrated in the following figure , supports a combination of DELNis and devices using standard
802.3/Ethernet transceiver cables . The transceiver cable can be up to 50
meters ( 164 feet) in length to connect to another DELNI, and between 40
and 45 meters (131.2 and 147.6 feet) in length to connect to 802.3/
Ethernet communications controllers. A DELNI hierarchical standalone
configuration is not connected to the standard baseband cable.
DELNI Hierarchical Standalone Configuration

50m
Transceiver Cable

VAX 8350
MicroVAX

DELN I

NBG-136-01

The DELNI connected baseband configuration, illustrated in the following
figures , supports up to eight devices using standard transceiver cables. The
total maximum length of transceiver cable is 40 meters (131.2 feet). In a
baseband configuration without an Etherjack, this would be the sum of the
length of the cables from the transceiver to the DELNI and from the
DELNI to the host system or communications server. However, a particular
controller may restrict this length. For example, the maximum cable length
from the transceiver to the DELUA is 35 meters (115 feet) .

A.32

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

In broadband configurations , the Chipcom Ethermodem should not be
used with a DELNI because this is an unsupported configuration.
DELNI Connected Configuration
Terminator

Transceiver

••i--~~~~~~~~~~~~~r-==:.::J

Standard Ethernet Cable

35m 1

40m 1

DEBNA

DELO A

PDP-11 /84

VAX 8550

MicroVAX

The sum of two cable lengths.

NBG· 137·01

In configurations with an Etherjack (baseband only), the lengths to be
considered are from the transceiver to the Etherjack, Etherjack to DELNI ,
and DELNI to the host system or communications server.
DELNI Connected Configuration Using an Etherjack

Transceiver

Term inator

Standard Ethernet Cable

35m 1

40m 1

DE LUA
DELOA

PDP-11 /84

VAX 8250

MicroVAX

Sum of three cable lengths.

NBG-139-01

A.33

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Connecting Servers
Servers are specialized network nodes that act as shared resources. Three
types of servers can be used on an 802 .3/Ethernet LAN :
• Digital's 802.3/Ethernet communications server hardware/software packages including routers and gateways.
• Digital's general purpose software that provides server functions in the
network , such as file transfer, remote job entry, and remote printing .
• Non-Digital applications servers written by users, for example, a computer
node that provides typesetting services using software written by a customer or another vendor.
All three types of servers connect to a standard 802.3/Ethernet transceiver
or to a Local Network Interconnect (DELNI ).
Connecting an 802.3/Ethernet LAN
to Remote Networks

Digital offers the following 802 .3/Ethernet communications servers to
connect Ethernet LANs to remote networks:
·DECnet-to-DECnet routing : The DECrouter 200, DECrouter 2000, or a
full-function DECnet node allows host Ethernet systems to communicate
with remote DECnet systems or with DECnet systems on other 802 .3/
Ethernet local area networkss by means of point-to-point links.
• DECnet-to-X.25 communications: The X25router 2000, or a full-function
DECnet node with a Packetnet software product, allows host systems to
communicate with other DECnet systems as well as non-Digital systems
over an X.25 Packet Switching Data Network. & Refer to Section 4 for
more information about Packetnet software products.
•DECnet-to-IBM SNA communications : The DECnet/SNA Gateway products
allow host systems to communicate with IBM systems in SNA networks.

DECnet-to-DECnet Routing
DECnet-to-DECnet routers provide communications between local and
remote DECnet networks. The types of DECnet-to-DECnet routers are
full-function host system routers , DECnet router servers, and DECnet
gateways .
Host System Routers
A DECnet Phase IV full-function node can manage 802.3/Ethernet routing
functions using asynchronous or synchronous lines connected to a communications controller, such as a DMF32 or a DMRll. This may be adequate if
there are only one or two connections to remote nodes and if the routing
load on the host system is fairly light.
The resources of the host system that functions as a routing node should be
carefully analyzed . If the host system has more than two communications
controllers, or if it uses a significant amount of CPU processing time for
routing, a DECrouter 2000 or DECrouter 200 should be considered . These
servers are dedicated to routing functions , while full-function nodes must
also run applications. In addition , the physical line interfaces for the
DECnet Router Server or DECrouter 200 are much less expensive than
those provided by communications controllers.

A.34

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

DECrouter 2000
The DECrouter 2000 performs DECnet routing functions between Phase IV
nodes on an 802.3/Ethernet LAN and remote DECnet nodes , and provides
connections between independent 802.3/ Ethernet networks .
For routing purposes, Phase IV DECnet networks consist of a number of
linked areas. Each area is not limited to a specific geographic region, but is
often localized, such as a LAN in a building . (Here LAN refers to any local
area network that conforms to the Ethernet, IEEE 802 .3, or the ISO 8802/ 3
standards.)
Packet routing is handled by specified routing nodes, which may have to do
this task in addition to providing services to users . Routing works on two
levels :
•Level 1-Among nodes within an area (called intra -area routing)
• Level 2-From one area to another (called inter-area routing)
The DECrouter 2000 is a dedicated routing system that can act as a Level 1
and/or Level 2 router. The system routes information over one LAN circuit
and up to four synchronous DDCMP circuits. This gives other DECnet
nodes on the LAN access to remote nodes , and also relieves them of the
routing overhead .
An example application for the DECrouter 2000 might be as a Level 2
router for a LAN whose nodes are in a single DECnet area , connected to
two remote nodes in the same DECnet area , and two other nodes in other
areas . In this case it would act as both a Level 1 and Level 2 DECnet
router.

Routing Capabilities
• Level 1 and/or Level 2 Phase IV DECnet routing
• Ability to route messages between 63 areas, each with up to 1023 nodes ,
the maximum permitted by the architecture. (Satisfactory operation in large
networks requires proper network planning .)
•Adaptive routing over the synchronous links and to/ from the LAN.
• Ability to communicate with remote Phase III nodes in the same DECnet
area.
• Path splitting where there are two or more equal -cost paths between the
DECrouter 2000 and the destination DECnet node. For this feature, all the
destination nodes on the network must support out-of-order packet cachmg.

Synchronous Line Capabilities
• Data speeds of up to 256 Kb/s
• EIA-232-C , EIA-422 , EIA-423, V.24 , V.35 and X.21 electrical interfaces:
X.21 is supported in leased-line mode only
• Full modem control on all synchronous lines

DDCMP Capabilities
• Communicates with all supported synchronous Digital DDCMP products,
excluding the DMCll.
• Ability to work on point-to-point or multi-point links . However, on
DDCMP multipoint links, the DECrouter 2000 can act only as a tributary.
• Full- or half-duplex communications.

A.35

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

802.J/Ethernet LAN Configuration Using a DECrouter 2000

DECnet-VAX

(Phase IV)

VAX 8800

VAX 8550

DEBNA

DEB NA

Standard Baseband Cable

DMR11

DEBNA

DESVA

PDP-11/24

VAX 8350

MicroVAX
2000

DECnet-RT

DECnet-VAX

(Phase Ill)

(Phase IV)

NBG-219-01

Network and Configuration Management Capabilities
• Configuration using a downline-loaded image and a configuration utility.
• Remote management from any suitable DECnet node using the DECnet
Network Control Program.
• Remote problem diagnosis (for example, using the TRACE tool).
• Automatic attempt to dump and reload following a system failure.
• Event logging to any Phase IV DECnet node.
• Dynamic reconfiguration while the system is running.

Network Management
The network manager controls the DECrouter 2000 by using the DECnet
Network Control Program from any DECnet Phase IV node. For example,
the manager can use the utility from one of the systems on the LAN.

A.36

802 .3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

The utility provides three basic functions:
• Display statistics and error information for the DECrouter 2000 (for example, statistics on line usage or errors) .
• Control the DECrouter 2000 (for example, starting and stopping lines,
setting parameters, and loading the software).
• Test the components of the network (for example, loopback messages of all
or part of a communications path to isolate a defective component).

In addition, a separate utility available on VMS load hosts assists problemsolving by tracing information at various stages in its path through the
DECrouter 2000 .
Host Sy stems
The DECrouter 2000 has no file storage of its own, and so relies on host
systems to

• Load the software.
• Log events .
• Receive any memory dumps .
The minimum requirement is for one host to load the DEC MicroServer,
the hardware base for the DECrouter 2000. Event-logging and dumpreception facilities can be used at the discretion of the customer. Only a
DECnet P hase IV DECnet-VAX or DECnet-ULTRIX node on the same LAN
can be a load host or dump receiver.
The DECrouter 2000 software can be installed on a number of load hosts .
This helps to protect against loss of service if a single load host is unavailable or unable to load the system for any reason . Each load host must be
on the same LAN, but not necessarily in the same DECnet area as the
DECrouter 2000.
DECnet-to-X.25 Communications

As networks grow and users require more network functions, nodes, and
communications alternatives, the complexity of the network increases.
D igital's communications over Packet Switched Data Networks (PSDNs)
can be a cost-effective alternative for customers who want to transmit a
low volume of data remotely. Public PSDNs charge primarily on the amount
of data transmitted, and to a lesser extent, if at all, on distance and time
factors.

If a customer requires only short, low-speed data transmissions, a dial-up
line might be cost-effective because it avoids the PSDN connection charge.

If high-volume continuous data transmission is required, the customer will
want to avoid the PSDNs "data-sent" charge, making a leased line more
appropriate. Somewhere in the middle (medium data rates and volume),
X.25 PSDNs are cost-effective. Because most X.25 ne tworks charge by the
amount of data sent, customers may want to mix capabilities (leased line,
dialup, and packet-switched), depending on the traffic patterns and line
costs.
T he CCITT X.25 specification defines the network protocols for communications among multivendor systems over X.25 packet-switching data networks (PSDNs). There are two ways of connecting 802.3/Ethernet nodes to
an X.25 network: host-based system connections or the X25router 2000 .

A.37

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

Host-Based System Connections to X.25 Networks
Individual VAX or RSX host systems can connect to an X.25 network using
the VAX P.S.I. or RSX -11 P.S.I. products . During installation, customers can
choose to allow the VAX P.S.I. system to act as a gateway to a PSDN . Other
VAX systems in the DECnet network need only install VAX P.S.I. Access to
take advantage of the facilities available through or from the X.25
PSDN. .& For more detailed information, refer to the "Packetnet Communications Software" in Section 4.
X25router 2000
The X25router 2000 is an addressable node on the network available for
access by any host node on the network . The X25router 2000 connects
host nodes to other DECnet nodes in an X.25 network using the Data Link
Mapping (DLM ) capability of the gateway software .& Refer to "Packetnet
Communications Software" in Section 4 for a description of the X25router
2000.
In addition to acting as a Level 1 (lo cal) router and supporting limited
numbers of DDCMP synchronous lines , the X25router 2000 gives VAX
P.S.I. Access systems access to all facilities offered by the connected X.25
network.
Most often the design of geographically dispersed networks is influenced
by the expense of transferring data over telecommunications facilities
owned by common carriers. Network implementations use either leased
lines for high volume, continuous data transfer, or PSDN communications
for low-to-medium volume data transfer. For customers with one or both of
these requirements , the X25router 2000 offers a unique solution . Because
the X25router 2000 supports both X.25 and DDCMP (leased ) lines, it
offers flexible configurations .
The X25router 2000 allows users to make traditional wide-area network
DECnet connection using DDCMP to DECnet nodes on an 802.3/Ethernet
local area network , and to DECnet nodes connected to an X.25 network, as
illustrated in the following figure.

A.38

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

X25router 2000 Configuration (DECnet-to-DECnet)

Modem

Standard Baseband Cable

DECnet-VAX
(Phase IV)
Host

DMB32

VAX 8550

Host

Micro

PDP-11

DECnet-11M

DECnet-RT

(Phase IV)

(Phase Ill)

Host

RSX P.S.I.
Host

Broadband
Transceiver

Terminator

Broadband
Tap

Broadband Cable

l Broadband
Frequency
_ __J Translator

NBG-220·01

A VAX/VMS host system on the local area network must have a copy of the
basic X25router 2000 software. This host system downline loads the software into the X25router 2000. Then the X25router 2000 is started and
DECnet-to-DECnet communications are available to all other host systems
on the LAN.

Digital-to-non-Digital Communications over X.25 Networks
• Refer to "Packetnet Communications Software" in Section 4 for a description of Digital's P.S.I. and P.S.I. Access products, which are used with the
X25router 2000 to provide X.25 and X.29 communications capabilities.
Section 4 also contains a table indicating the relative advantages and disad vantages of gateway versus direct X.25 connections, and the alternative use
of VAX P.S.I. in multihost mode.

A.39

802.3/Ethernet Configuration Guidelines

DECnet-to-IBM/SN A
Communications

The DECnet/SNA Gateway products link Digital VAX/VMS nodes within a
DECnet network to an IBM SNA network. The gateway, illustrated in the
following figure , connects to the standard 802.3/Ethernet cable. A Phase
IV VAX/ VMS host is needed to downline-load software to the DECnet/SNA
Gateway. The DECnet/SNA Gateway is accessible directly by any Phase IV
VMS host connected directly to the local area network or any Phase III
VMS host connected via a DECrouter or DECnet routing system with
DECnet/SNA Gateway Access software.
DECnet/SNA Gateway Configuration

Standard Baseband Cable

Transceiver

Terminator

VAX

RSX

IBM

Host

NBG-221-00

Each DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST can handle up to four lines to remote SNA
networks. A DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT provides one link directly to an
IBM channel. In network applications with extremely heavy traffic between
the DECnet and SNA environments, more than one DECnet/SNA Gateway
may be necessary.

DECnet/SNA Access Routines and Programming Interfaces
Each VAX/ VMS host system that accesses the IBM systems in the SNA
network needs the appropriate DECnet/SNA Access Routine or Programming Interface software. .& For more information about DECnet/SNA
Access Routines and Programming Interfaces, refer to "Digital/IBM Communications Software" in Section 4.

A.40

Performance Guidelines

DECnet-VAX

A Refer to DECnet-VAX Software Product Description 25.03 load unit
tables for guidelines.

DECnet-RSX

This topic provides performance guidelines for file transfer and task-to-task
communication for DECnet-11M-PLUS V4.0 .
The performance of a network can be affected by several factors . One
major consideration is the type of processor used . The CPU can be a limiting factor in terms of performance.
Another factor to consider in determining network performance is the
communication devices used . Because those with a low line speed can
bottleneck a configuration, it is important to choose a line that meets the
user's needs. Note that the user bit transfer rate should not be expected to
equal the line speed .
The buffering level of task-to-task communication has an impact on the bit
transfer rate . Multibuffering uses more of the available network buffers
than single buffering . In a small memory machine , multibuffering could
degrade system performance. The increased difficulty in programming with
multibuffering and the increased possibility of system performance degradation must be weighed against improved network performance. With this
performance trade-off, it is necessary to evaluate and determ ine how the
user's needs will be best satisfied.

Throughput Data
When writing programs for task-to -task communications, there are tradeoffs to cons ider. It is much more difficult to develop software that uses
multibuffering than software that uses single-buffering . Also , when tasks
use multibuffering, it may be necessary to increase the number of network
buffers . A program 's buffering level may actually slow down execution time
and increase user response time on the system . Each configuration and
application has an "optimal " buffering level. It is important to consider at
what point the small increase in performance is no longer worth the additional buffering required to extract the extra throughput.
The following figure illustrates how an increase in the buffering rate
improves the bit rate and throughput as the buffering level increases from
one to two . In a typical situation , expected results can range from 150 Kb/s
to 600 Kb/s for multibuffering.

A.41

Performance Guidelines

Effects of Multibufferin1 on Bit R•te
900
800
700

600
:t:
..0
:;:; 500

.--

'§i 400
::J

e 300

200
100

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

User Message Size (Bytes)

0--·--·--·D buffer = 5
D--------0 buffer = 2
D
D buffer = 1
NBG-224-00

Transmission of a large message will generally have a higher throughput
than that of a small message. All messages have an associated CPU overhead, independent of the message size. If the CPU is a limiting factor, the
transmission of a long message will push more bits through than a small
one will. In other words, holding the CPU utilization constant, a higher bit
transfer rate will be realized with a longer message.
Large user message sizes are more demanding on a system than small ones .
With a limited capacity, an increase in throughput may not be worth the
degradation of the total system. However, it is also not advisable to have a
system buffer size smaller than normal user message size. In that situation,
each message would have to be segmented.
The user should never expect to reach a bit rate equal to the line speed
because there will always be some protocol overhead to consider. For a
given level of buffering , throughput depends on processor speed, message
size, and line speed. For single-buffering situations, one might typically
expect rates of 50 Kb/s to 500 Kb/s .
CPU utilization generally decreases as message size increases primarily
because of the fixed costs associated with transmission of each message. A
large message has a lower CPU cost per byte and CPU cost per second
because the fixed cost is distributed over a larger message and a longer
transmission time period.

A.42

Performance Guidelines

The following table lists the typical CPU utilizations for task-to-task communications over an 802.3/Ethernet local area network.
CPU Utilization for Task-to-task Communications over 802.J/Ethernet
PDP Systems

CPU Utilization

Communication
Device

11/44 to 11/44

63% to 75%

DE UNA

RSX-HM-PLUS

11/5 3 to 11/5 3

85% to 97%

DEQNA

Micro/Rsx·

11/83 to 11/83

85% to 95%

DEQNA

Micro/RSX

Operating System

*The throughput can increase -for PDP-11/53 systems by loading the network into lower
memory space. This lower memory space is located on the CPU board.

File Transfers
The time required to transfer a file can be divided into two categories,
either connection time or transfer time. There is a fixed amount of connection time required to execute startup functions such as opening files and
creating logical links. The transfer time is a function of the number of bits
per unit of time that can be transmitted over the network by NFT/FAL and
the file size.
In an actual case, an RMS FAL was installed on the remote node. ASCII
files of different lengths were transferred from a local node to a remote
node over the 802.3/Ethernet. The results from the NFT task are shown in
the following table.

"'u

'"ii

""O

·:;
<-'
u
y

=
e
..s
ell

""O

=
ell

...=0
f

~
0

u
C(

Network File Transfer Over 802.J/Ethernet
Configuration

Connection
Time (secs)

Blocks/second
Transferred

11/44 to 11/44

2.5

60.24

11/44 to 11/7 5 0

2.7

34.36

11/53 to 11/53 (Network loaded by default)

2.9

45.45

11/83 to 11/83 (Micro/RSX)

2.2

82.64

11/83 to 11/83 (RSX-UM-PLUS)

2.2

84.75

Routing Nodes
Information regarding the amount of routing done by a system can be
gathered by using NCP circuit counters. This tells how many packets have
been routed through each circuit since the counters were zeroed.
Routing nodes are affected by many factors, including the amount of traffic
on the network , the stability of the nodes in the network, the topology of
the network, and the amount of work (other than routing) done by the
routing node.

A.43

Performance Guidelines

In a study of the packet throughput performance of two DECnet routing
nodes , the following measurements resulted:
•The highest number of transit packets a PDP-11/44 node can route each
second is 306. Note that this number decreases if routing updates are
required , or system and network activity increases .
• The number of milliseconds required to transmit a packet through a
VAX-11/750 and PDP-11/ 44 is 3.9 and 3.3, respectively. Note that this
number increases if routing updates are required , or system and network
activity increases .

Equal-cost Load Splitting
DECnet-RSX/ UM-PLUS V4.0 supports a feature called equal-cost load
splitting . A routing node can split its network load over communication
paths of equal cost. Using this feature , the aggregate throughput for multiple paths is significantly higher than that of a single path .
The following figure compares the aggregate throughput for PDP-11/
83 -to -PDP-11/ 83 communications over three 9.6 Kb/s lines to that of one
9.6 Kb/s line. The buffering level for three line tests varies from one to
five. In this figure , the aggregate throughput for three lines is about three
times that for one line provided there is enough load to saturate all the
lines (using large message sizes and high buffering levels) . Using small
packet sizes and low buffering levels results in less aggregate throughput,
but is always higher than the single-line throughput. Users are able to take
advantage of equal-cost load splitting when the line is the bottleneck.
Throughput with Equ.I-cost Load Splitting

~ 20

•
-· - - ·

g_ 15 - -

•

::i

e 10

··-··-··- ·· - ·· ·•
5

500

1000
1500
User Message Size (Bytes)

2000

2500

0··-··-··-··-0 1 line 1 buff
0·--·--·--·0 3 lines 5buff
0--------0 3 lines 3buff
O

O 31ines

1 buff
NBG-225-00

A.44

Performance Guidelines

DECnet-DOS and DECnetVAXmate

Software testing for DECnet-DOS and DECnet-VAXmate V2.0 performance
was conducted on standalone systems connected by unshared transmission
media. Only those machines under test were on the network at the time of
the tests, and the remote node was running no other processes except those
required to carry out the experiments. In general, the user cannot expect
to see the same throughput and response times, because most hosts and
,networks have multiple users contending for available resources .

File Transfer
The total transfer time of a file is composed of two parts. The first is a
fixed overhead to initialize the process. This is referred to as the startup
cost. The second is the time to transfer the file . The transfer time is
expressed in seconds per block.
With the asynchronous line, the line speed is the bottleneck of the system
and the transfer time for all the machines is approximately the same. The
difference in throughput is a result of the difference in startup time.
Because the IBM PC/AT is a faster processor than the IBM PC/XT and PS/2
Model 30, it has a shorter startup time, faster overall response time, and
higher throughput.
With 802.3/Ethernet local area networks, the line speed is not the limiting
factor; therefore, the speed of the processor is a factor in both the startup
cost and the block transfer cost.
DECnet-DOS and DECnet-VAXmate Startup Times and Transfer Costs
Startup Time

Transfer Cost
per Block

VAXmate->MicroVAX

3.60

0.60

PC/XT->MicroVAX

6.50

0.76

PC/AT->MicroVAX (6 MHz)

3.60

0.61

PC/AT->MicroVAX (8 MHz)

3.30

0.60

PS/2 Model 30->MicroVAX

4.50

0.97

PS/2 Model 50->MicroVAX

3.30

0.60

3.30

0.31

VAXmate->MicroVAX

3.00

0.036

PC/XT->MicroVAX

5.60

0.117

PC/AT->MicroVAX (6 MHz)

3.60

0.046

PC/AT->MicroVAX (8 MHz)

3.40

0.037

PS/2 Model 30->MicroVAX

3.40

0.059

Processor
9.6 Kb/s line

19.2 Kb/s line
PS/2 Model 50->MicroVAX

802.3/Ethernet line

A.45

Performance Guidelines

To calculate an approximate response time, multiply the transfer time by
the number of blocks of the file and add the startup cost.
For example , to transfer a 1000-block file from a an IBM/XT to a
MicroVAX II over a 9.6 Kb/s line :
(Blocks x transfer cost per block) + startup time = response time
(1000 1' 0.76 ) + 6.5 = 766.5 seconds

802.J/Ethernet File-transfer Performance
In an 802.3/Ethernet configuration, maximum throughput using DECnetVAXmate for file transfer on the VAXmate is 98 Kb/s, using DECnet-DOS on
the 8 MHz IBM PC/AT is 94 Kb/s, while the maximum using DECnet-DOS
on the PC/XT is 32 Kb/s. These measurements are the same for both of the
supported third-party interfaces. With the greater speed of the IBM PC/AT,
there is a greater load on the remote node. This is negligible with small
files of less than 50 blocks, but when transferring larger files this could
effect network performance if the remote node is multitasking and highly
utili zed.
Task-to-task Communications
When using task-to-task communications, segment buffer size for all communications was set at the system default of 557 bytes, which includes the
user-message and protocol overhead . For the most efficient use of the
network , the user should use these sizes as a guideline when programming
intertask communications .
When using task-to-task communications on the local area network, the
throughput increases with message size . The maximum throughput for
DECnet-DOS on the IBM PC/AT with 8 MHz is 1.16 Mb/s; for DECnetVAXmate on the VAXmate, it is 1.5 Mb/s. The remote CPU utilization is
correspondingly higher on the remote node when using a VAXmate .
The following chart shows the throughput for messages of various sizes .
All nodes were on the 802.3/Ethernet local area network. Single-buffered
task -to-task communication was measured.

A.46

Performance Guidelines

Mess.ge Throughput

1.60 .----.-----.-----.---1.40+----+------+--

-..----.-----.-----T---...
----+-

1.20+----+----+-----+-----+- ---+--/~
.,.,.--'---+-

1500
2000
2500
Message Size (bytes)
D .... ...... ... .... 0 IBM/AT (8 MHz)
o .. _,,_ ,, _,,_o PS/2 Model 30
D·-- ·- -· - -·D VAXMATE-Lance
D---- --- -0 IBM/AT(6MHz)
D
D IBM/XT

500

1000

3000

···

--1

... ...

3500

4096

NBG-226-01

Terminal Servers

Terminal Server performance is characterized best by the following
metrics:
• Host CPU interrupt load (for protocol messages)
• Server system throughput
• Average response time
• 802.3/Ethernet utilization
The metrics are constrained by the terminal workload on the host . For
example, a large number of users running an editor will generate a greater
load than users running VMS MAIL. For the information presented below,
an average workload is defined as a mix of terminal users running applications such as MAIL or doing program development with editing.
The LAT protocol is an 802.3/Ethernet-based virtual-circuit protocol.
Since LAT buffers characters from many terminals into shared LAT messages, the interrupt load (protocol message processing) on the host can be
greatly reduced. Testing indicates that the host load for LAT terminals is
comparable for that of the terminals connected directly through a DMF32
device. LAT terminals may provide some savings in the character interrupt
load of DZll terminals. In fact, the larger the number of users with a
common destination on one terminal server, the less overhead.
The DECserver 200, V2 .0, can process an aggregate output throughput of
over 14,000 characters per second, and an aggregate input throughput of
over 11,900 characters per second for eight terminals running at 19.2 Kb/s.

A.47

Performance Guidelines

The average response time is 43-125 milliseconds, depending on whether
the terminal driver or the applications program on the host performs character echoing. Expect the response time to be approximately 45-50 milliseconds when the terminal driver handles echoing.
The DECserver 550 Vl.1 can process and aggregate output throughput of
160,000 characters a second for 128 terminals running at 19.2 Kb/s with a
circuit timer of 20 milliseconds. The aggregate input throughput is over
14,000 characters a second. The average response time is 63-145 milliseconds, depending on whether the terminal driver or the host application
program performs character echoing . The average response time is approximately 63-70 milliseconds when the terminal driver handles echoing. (All
performance measurements are application-dependent.)
802.3/Ethernet utilization will vary with the number of hosts connected to
a server and the speed at which terminals are transmitting data. Estimates
indicate that this utilization should be well below one percent in most
cases.
Note that overall server performance is highly dependent on the value of
the circuit timer and the number of hosts connected to the server. The
shorter the value, the lower the response time. However, this increases the
general overhead on the server, hosts, and the 802.3/Ethernet local area
network. The higher the value, the lower this overhead becomes. However,
this will increase the response times. For the information above, the circuit
timer default of 80 milliseconds is assumed.
Distributed File Service Vl.O

The VAX Distributed File Service (DFS) is a VMS-layered product that
allows transparent access of remote files over a DECnet network. Using the
VAX Distributed Name Service, DFS provides location-independent directory specifications.

In determining performance guidelines, throughput of up to 2.6 Mbit/sec
was measured on a MicroVAX server, and up to 3.8 Mbit/sec on a VAX
8700 server. Two groups of functions were tested :
• Control functions -file create, file open/close, and file delete.
• Access functions-file copy, read virtual block, sequential read, sequential
write, indexed read, and indexed write .
In a DFS environment, a DFS client system can access disk directories and
files located on a DFS server as if they were local to the client. Thus a list
of local devices on a DFS client can include DFS remote disks . This allows
several clients with limited disk space to access a server that acts as a
storage center. The approach is particularly beneficial when there is extensive sharing of files that might otherwise have to be duplicated on each
system .
The primary objective of the DFS performance testing was to measure the
response time and CPU load on both client and server when accessing files
on a remote node . Another objective was to ascertain the rate at which a
DFS server can process transactions, which should help in determining the
number of clients a DFS server can support. These are dealt with using
measurement and analysis techniques.

A.48

Performance Guidelines

The following figure shows the throughput of sequentially accessed records
of various sizes. The figure compares DPS throughput to other methods of
accessing records . A Refer to "Comparison with Other Communication
Products" in this description for more information.
Comp•rison of Throughput for V•rious Access Methods

3 . 00'~---~----------------,--------,

•.. ··-··-··-··-··- ·· /
-+----

2.5(}1

~ 2.001

·-·· - ·· - ··-·· - ··-· -·· --.

_ __ / / -

/ ..

.. / . ........ ... : · ..~·H· -·~·n•

°§.1,5nJ
J::..

JV I

• • •••••••• • ••••••••••••••• •• • ••• •

/•.·.....

e 1 oo .·..;;._.-..
--!'
__ .....· -- ~--~---~- i-=--

..c. .

•

1,..-ll

o.o5.W
0

-+5000

10000

15000

20000

Record Size (bytes)

0 .. ............... 0 Local-RD53
0 .. -.,_ .. _ ., _0 Local-RA81

0- --·- - ·--·0 LocalAreaVAXcluster
0--------0 DFS
0

0 DECnet File Access Listener (FAL)
NBG-222·01

Factors A ffecting DPS Performance
When considering DPS performance, remember that DPS transmission uses
virtual blocks, and the DPS server uses caching to reduce the number of
disk accesses.
Because the typical DPS environment comprises a large number of clients
accessing a single server, the performance largely depends on the following
characteristics of the server:
· CPU performance-affected by the amount of data transferred, the overhead of processing a disk access when the data is not in cache, and the
speed of the processor.
• Probability of cache hit/miss-depends on the method of file access . For
example, a sequentially accessed file has a predictable cache hit ratio that
depends on how much data is accessed at one time; a randomly accessed
indexed file has a cache hit ratio that depends on such factors as the bucket
size, the size of the file, and the size of the key and data portions of each
record . The cache hit ratio can improve when several users access the same
files, which increases the chance the data is already in cache.
• Disk performance-determined by access time and transfer rate .
• Speed of the 802.3/Ethernet controller-can determine the maximum
throughput for high-speed CPUs and a high cache hit ratio.

A.49

Performance Guidelines

Comparison with Other Communications Products
DFS performance was compared to the following alternatives for accessing
files:
• On a system where the files reside on a local disk-both the RD53 and
RA81 disks were measured.
• On a local area VAXcluster satellite where the files reside on the bootmember disk.
• On a DECnet node where the files reside on another DECnet node and are
accessed via a DECnet remote-file-access (FAL/DAP) application.
DPS Test Configurations

DFS Server
Local Area VAXcluster Satellite Member
DECnet Node

MicroVAX
II

Standard Ethernet Cable
Transceiver

Terminator

MicroVAX
II

DFS Client
Local Area VAXc/uster Satellite Member
DECnet Node

NBG·223-01

DFS is more loosely coupled than a local area VAXcluster in that DFS
allows participating systems to run different versions of software, and can
work among a large number of systems. Because it is more tightly coupled
than the DECnet File Access Listener (FAL), DFS should show better
performance.

A.50

Performance Guidelines

The following table shows performance measurements taken when reading
a file sequentially via RMS . Records sizes of 4096 bytes were used , and the
server and client processors were both MicroVAX IIs . The disk used in the
local access method was an RD53; other measurements used an RA81.
Comparison of Access Methods with Sequential Read
Access Method

Response Time
(ms)

Server CPU Time
(ms)

Client CPU Time
(ms)

Local

21.51

NIA

5.79

Local Area
VAX cluster

30.90

11.79

12.68

DFS

31.52

12.84

15.77

DECnet FAL

157.58

70.82

75.91

DFS is more likely to be used where independent systems need to access
shared data on a regular basis. Because the remote data can be accessed as
if it were local, most programs need no modification. (The only restriction
is that write-sharing is not currently allowed.)
When DFS was compared to a local area VAXcluster and DECnet FAL, it
was noted that the local area VAXcluster tends to have a slightly higher
throughput and uses 30-45 percent less CPU time than DFS. DFS showed
better throughput and CPU utilization than DECnet FAL which , due to a
high degree of flexibility and functionality, had a higher set-up, overhead,
and transfer time per block of data .
When a remote RA81 via DFS was compared with a local RD53 on a
MicroVAX II, the higher speed and capacity of the RA81 compensated for
much of the DFS overhead and network access . For file control operations
(create, open/close, and delete) , DFS performed up to 85 percent as fast as
the local access; for data' accesses, DFS performed from 33 percent slower
to twice as fast (for cache hits on small requests).
Server Throughput Characteristics
The maximum throughput of the DFS server was calculated using the
service times of each component, namely, the server CPU, the client CPU ,
the 802.3/Ethernet controller, and the disk. The service times are represented in the following table.
Service Times of DFS Components
Resource

Service time (in milliseconds)

Client CPU: MicroVAX II

6.22 ms + 1.26 ms/blockx # blocks

Client CPU: VAX 8700

1.42 ms + 0.28 ms/block x # blocks

Server CPU~ MicroVAX II

4.88 ms + 1.26 ms/block x # blocks

Server CPU: VAX 8700

1.39 ms + 0.28 ms/block x # blocks

Disk rotation time for RA81

16.67 ms

Average seek time for RA81

28 ms

Minimum seek time for RA81

2 ms

802.3/Ethernet controller (approximate
figure for DFS packet-size distribution)

1.08 ms/block

A.51

Performance Guidelines

Considering the delays imposed by the disk subsystem, note that, in the
case of a single contiguous file being accessed, the seek time is minimum (2
milliseconds), whereas in the more general multi-user case, the access time
tends to be randomly distributed and the seek time should be approximately 20 milliseconds. The total time (seek + scan + transfer) is approximately 40 milliseconds.
Using bottleneck analysis, the maximum throughput can be calculated:
T = 11 max time
where max time is the longest of the following times:
• Server CPU time
• Client CPU time divided by the number of clients
• Cache miss ratio multiplied by the disk time
• 802.3/Ethernet controller transmit time
This ·equation gives the maximum throughput in transactions per second.
To translate this into bits/sec, multiply T by the average size (in bits) of
DFS requests.
The following example shows the maximum throughput of 25 MicroVAX II
clients, a VAX 8700 server, two RA81 disks equally accessed, a cache hit
ratio of 0.4, and an average request size of 12 blocks. The throughput Tis
determined by
T = 1/max [1.29+0.28X12, (6.22+1.26X12)/25, 0.6X40/2, 1.08X12]
T = 77.2 requests/second = 3.8 Mbit/sec

In this case, the 802.3/Ethernet controller is the bottleneck. In another
situation the values of the parameters might change, making other components the bottleneck.
Using this equation, the system manager can identify the bottleneck and
improve performance by reducing the load on the bottleneck component.

In other tests, the CPU times on a MicroVAX server, when broken into
component driver execution times, revealed that disk access overhead was
only 500 milliseconds in CPU time (DUDRIVER and PUDRIVER), the
NETDRIVER consumed 1.62 milliseconds ( 1 block request) to 8.29 milliseconds (16 blocks), and the XQDRIVER consumed 1.22-5.59 milliseconds.
The overhead of the DFS driver remained relatively invariant at 2.23-2. 77
milliseconds for the DFSSDRIVER (DFS server), and 1.27-1.77 milliseconds for the DFSRRDRIVER (DFS communications). This indicates the
relative efficiency and low impact of DFS, and the predominance of the
NETDRIVER and XQDRIVER loads on the CPU.

A.52

Performance Guidelines

Performance Metrics
The following are test results of running DFS on a MicroVAX II with a
DEQNA Ethernet controller and an RAxx server disk.

• Maximum throughput measured with request sizes of 16 blocks and a
cache hit ratio of unity: 2.6 Mbit/sec
• Server response time to a single request of size 16 blocks : 21. 9 milliseconds
• Average overhead of disk access when there is a cache miss (dependent on
data distribution on the disk): 23.5 milliseconds
For a VAX 8700 server with a DEBNA 802.3/Ethernet controller and an
RA81 disk, the maximum throughput measured with request sizes of 16
blocks and a cache hit ratio of unity was 3.6 Mbit/second.

VAXFTAM

VAX File Transfer, Access, and Management (FTAM) is a file-access protocol defined by the International Standards Organization (ISO) that specifies
how files are transferred and manipulated across heterogeneous environments . VAX FTAM, which implements this protocol on VMS , uses VOTS to
provide the transport over which the data is communicated.
VAX FTAM implements three functions, accessible at the DCL level : COPYI
OSI, DELETE/OSI, and DIRECTORY /OSI. These are possible for three
OSI-defined file types: stream files (FTAM-1), variable record length files
(FTAM-2), and unspecified files such as binary-image files (FTAM-3).
Taking into account the functions of VAX FTAM, the primary performance
metrics for a particular configuration are the maximum throughput, the
CPU load on each processor, and the elapsed time for an operation. This is
desirable for each file type as well as for different file sizes, and on different CPUs .
Elapsed Time Measurements
The elapsed time for an operation has a fixed part consisting of the time
taken to set up various regimes, and sometimes a variable part depending
on whether the operation is size-dependent. In the case of DELETE and
DIRECTORY operations the time taken is independent of file size; COPY
operations depend on the size of the file. Due to the heterogeneous nature
of VAX FTAM operations-where sender and receiver can be from different
environments and can have different capabilities-the set-up involved is
high . Consequently DELETE and DIRECTORY set-up take about the same
amount of time as the set-up for a file copy.

A.53

Performance Guidelines

The following figure gives the elapsed time for all three types of files. Most
noticeably FTAM-2 files are transferred record by record and the speed is
heavily dependent on the size of the record in the file.
Elapsed Time for VAX FTAM O~rations Using MicroVAX H anJ Filn witb BO·byt~
Records

-t- - - - - 1 - - - - - 1 - -

160-

140---J
;

-+-

120_,___._i_
1
I

I
(J)

-g

100

I
~ aoHo

'
60 i
I

4ot-/
I

__,--

I
-20 i~

1.- -------

---

O r-~~--t----~~-;-~~-t-~~-+~~~j+--~----1
0

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

Blocks

0---·--·--·0 FTAM-2Copy
0--------0 FTAM-1 and FTAM-3Copy
O

o Delete and Directory

NBG-143-00

A.54

Performance Guidelines

CPU Time Measurements
An important metric of performance is the CPU load imposed on the
systems running FTAM . As for the elapsed time measurements, the CPU
cost for DELETE, DIRECTORY and the set-up time for COPY are comparable because the common functions executed in setting up each regime
outweigh the differences between the actual operations performed. The
following figure gives the CPU load for all three functions on both nodes.
CPU Time for VAX FIAM Operations Using MicroVAX lls snd Files with 80-byte Records

- t - -- - - <

120+--~---+------+-----+-

- 1 - - - - - - - - - + - - - ----l

100+--:,-+!.--+------+------t-- - --+------+-------!

j"'

!![j_

r-·--· ----

40 lJ_

.--·- ---

-·- -:~---_.---1<~::~·:_-_-_.-r- ---+-

f__
__....

.--·--· _..

.-- -------=:--~-

-t-_.- - ----<

----

i-'-='.:.-_._...-_ _ - - - - - -----+----- - - - - -----.
-

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

Blocks

0·················0 Remote FTAM-2 Copy
0··-··-··-··-0 Local FTAM-2 Copy
0---·--·--·0 RemoteFTAM-1 Copy
0--------0 Local FTAM-1 Copy
0 - - - - - 0 Remote Directory/Delete

o Local Directory/Delete

NBG-144-00

In the figure , "Remote " denotes the CPU time consumed on the Responder,
and "Local" on the initiator.

Calculating Elapsed Time and CPU Load For Any File
Using cur ve-fitting methods one can arrive at a set of equations to describe
the behavior of the system , which would allow one to determine the
expected elapsed time and CPU load for any file transfer between two
systems. The following table gives the elapsed time as a set-up time and a
time per block for FTAM-1 and FTAM-3 files , and the set-up time and time
per record for FTAM -2 files . The example at the end of this section illustrates how this can be used .

A.55

Performance Guidelines

Elapsed Time for VAX FTAM

Processor/Disk

File Type

Set-up Time
(seconds)

MicroVAX II/RA60

FTAM-1

13.03

12.22

MicroVAX II/RA60

FTAM-2

12.68

262.40

VAX 8800/RA81

FTAM-1

7.44

3.58

VAX 8800/RA81

FTAM-2

7.30

38.00

Incremental
Cost
(millisecs/
block)

*FTAM-3 files behave similarly to FTAM-1 files.

Similarly, the CPU load can be divided into a set-up time and an incremen tal cost. The following table lists these values for the same operations .
These figures are averages of transfers in both directions and are accurate
to within 20 % for individual copies .
CPU Load Imposed on a MicroVAX II
File Type 1

Local Set-up
(secs)

Local Iner
Remote
Cost (msecs/ Set-up (secs)
blk)

Remote Iner
Cost (msecs/
blk)

FTAM-1

2.69

11.5 2

6.69

11.83

FTAM-2

2.93

205.6

6.67

237.2

FTAM-3 files behave similarly to FTAM-1 files.

This figure is an approximation based on 94 % CPU utilization for the maximum file
transfer.

This figure is an approximation for the responder incremental CPU cost based on an
average CPU utilization of 97%.

The following example calculates the time it takes to transfer a 200-block
FTAM-1 file from one MicroVAX II to another MicroVAX II over the
Ethernet and determines the load on the two CPUs.
Transfer time = 13.03 + 12.22 x 10-3 x 200 = 15.5 seconds
Local CPU = (2 .69 + 11.5 x 10· 3 x 200) x 100/15.5 = 32 %
Remote CPU = (6.69 + 11.8 x 10·3 x 200 ) x 100/15.5 = 58 %

A.56

Performance Guidelines

Bottleneck Analysis
Bottleneck analysis gives an approximation of maximum throughput when
different components are combined using simple arithmetic. The assump tion is that the slowest component is always busy and effectively determines the throughput . The resources in this case are the initiator CPU,
responder CPU , communications line, and disk . The throughput is then
defined by
T = 11 max( CPU init, CPU resp, Xfer time, disk time) blocks/sec
T = 4096/ max(CPU init, CPU resp, Xfer time , disk time) bits/sec
where CPU init is the CPU time on the initiator; CPU resp, the CPU time
on the responder ; Xfer time , the time to actually transmit the data over the
communications medium; and disk time, the average time to read/write a
block on the disk . Thus, with MicroVAX Ils, an IEEE 802.3 line and the
assumption that on average an RA-series disk takes 1.1 seconds per block
when contiguously reading a file , the maximum throughput would be
4096/ max(ll.5, 11.6, 1.08, 1.1 ) = 347 Kb/s

Overview of Performance Metrics
The following metrics effectively characterize the performance of VAX
FTAM :
• The overhead of setting up all the regimes conforming to the ISO FTAM
standard was measured at only 13 seconds between MicroVAX Ils .
• Between MicroVAX Ils, an FTAM-1 file could be transferred at a maximum
of 335 Kb/s over an IEEE 802.3 line. Between VAX 8800s, the maximum
throughput was much higher at 1.14 Mbps.
• The maximum throughput was reached when copying large FTAM-1 or
FTAM-3 files. The steady-state throughput for an FTAM-2 file containing
80-byte records is 16 Kb/s; however, for ver y large records the throughput
of FTAM-2 files increases dramatically due to the low incremental cost. For
1024-byte records , for example, the measured throughput was 107 Mb/s.
• Between machines other than those mentioned, the maximum throughput
through the system can be estimated using bottleneck analysis .
DECrouter 200

The process of properly configuring the DECrouter 200 is based on an
understanding of the desired performance characteristics of the network as
well as the desired network topology. The DECrouter 200 does not trade
off configuration characteristics against memory requirements. The
DECrouter 200 has sufficient memory to accommodate a maximally configured network , and sufficient memory allocated for a large number of large
buffers. Even with all eight asynchronous lines fully active, the DECrouter
200 can support the maximum of 1,023 nodes within the area, the maximum of 32 other routing nodes in the same area and on the same local area
network , and a network buffer size of up to 1,482 bytes .

Communication Line Characteristics
Note that the rate at which user data can be transmitted over a communications line may approach , but will never reach, the actual line speed . The
actual throughput is a function of many factors including the line quality,
protocol overhead, topology, and network applications .

A.57

Performance Guidelines

The DECrouter 200 supports all eight asynchronous lines simultaneously
active at line speeds of up to 19.2 Kb/s. The DECrouter 200 operates these
lines in full duplex point-to-point mode only. The DECrouter 200 does not
support multipoint lines.
System Throughput Characteristics
In addition to the asynchronous line characteristics, the processing power
of the DECrouter 200 must be taken into consideration. Assuming equal
distribution of 802.3/Ethernet-to-asynchronous and asynchronous-to802.3/Ethernet traffic in an office environment, the respective maximum
values can be averaged to a value of 175 packets a second. Thus on average,
the DECrouter 200 can route a maximum of 175 packets per second when
all eight asynchronous lines are running at speeds of 19.2 Kb/s each.
The DECrouter 200 can support all eight asynchronous lines, each running
at 19.2 Kb/s (full-duplex), in all types of communications except asynchronous to asynchronous.
The following table lists the maximum throughput for different types of
communications.
Maximum Packets per Second
Type of Communication

100 data bytes/packet

1500 data bytes

Ethernet to Ether net

786.3

Ethernet to asynchronous

205.2

20.5

Asynchronous to Ethernet

144.8

15.6

Asynchronous to
asynchronous

100.7

9.0

Care must be taken when designing a valid configuration that the average
route-through packet-per-second rate does not exceed 170 packets-persecond. Determining the average packet-per-second rate requires an understanding of the applications that will generate data routed by the DECrouter
200 in the overall network. A For more detailed information on configuring the DECrouter 200, refer to Software Product Description 27.72 .

In order to achieve a viable configuration, the user and/or a Digital software specialist should perform a level of application analysis which
addresses both communication-line characteristics and system-throughput
characteristics.
DECrouter 2000

Many factors affect network performance, especially in wide area networking where public-network and communication-services characteristics need
also be considered. Primarily, the performance of a DECrouter 2000 node
is a function of the expected network traffic and normal workload. Thus,
router performance depends on the following factors:
• Communication line characteristics
• System throughput characteristics
Communication Line Characteristics
The DECrouter 2000 can be set up in a number of ways. The number of
synchronous links supported on the system depends on the maximum line
speed in use and on the electrical interface used. The following table
shows the number of lines supported for each combination of line speed
and electrical interface.
A.58

Performance Guidelines

Number of Synchronous Lines Supported
Electrical
Interface

Maximum Line Speed (Kb/s)
19.2

256

EIA-232-C

EIA-422

EIA-423

V.24

V.35

X.21 Leased Line

The actual packet rate will be less than that indicated by the aggregate
synchronous line speed, and is determined by such factors as:
• Type of traffic (routing expolates or data packets) and data rates.
•The path of messages through the DECrouter 2000 system (LAN-to-LAN,
synchronous-to-LAN, or synchronous-to-synchronous).
• Communications line characteristics .
• Frequency and type of errors on the synchronous links.
• Network topology.
• Protocol overhead .
System Throughput Characteristics
The performance of the DECrouter 2000 is measured in packets per second . The line utilization depends on the average size of packets routed.
Actual performance may not reach the maximum if line-speed is the limiting factor ; conversely, line saturation may not be achieved on high-speed
lines with small packet sizes .

Performance depends on whether traffic is routed predominantly between
the synchronous lines and the Ethernet or from one synchronous line to
another. For synchronous-to-synchronous routing, the expected performance is 340 packets per second. For Ethernet traffic, the performance is
480 packets per second .
To achieve a viable configuration, the user and/or a Digital software specialist should perform a level of application analysis which addresses both
communications-line characteristics and system-throughput characteristics.
X25router 2000

Configuring the X25router 2000 is influenced primarily by trade-offs of
cost and performance while satisfying the user's application requirements.
Network applications typically range from low-speed, low-cost situations
(that is , connecting a few remote lines over low-speed communications
lines ) to those of relatively high performance (that is, connecting two local
area networks). The addition of X.25 packet switching considerations to
those associated with point-to-point DECnet communications necessarily
makes arriving at the optimum configuration more difficult.
Note that the rate at which user data can be transmitted (throughput) over
a communications line approaches , but never reaches, the actual line speed .
The actual throughput is a function of many factors, including the line
quality, protocol overhead, topology, and network application.

A.59

Performance Guidelines

The X25router 2000 supports four lines at 64.0 Kb/s, or two lines at 256.0
Kb/s . The X25router 2000 offers superior price/performance especially in
the area of routing DECnet packets over an X.25 network. This is because
the implementation of Data Link Mapping (DLM ) has been optimized with
considerable performance benefits .
Traditionally many customers have implemented host -based X.25 routing .
The cost of this solution is not just the cost of the communications controller but also of the CPU cycles it consumes . The amount of the CPU utilized
varies considerably with the network size and application, but whenever
routing requires more than a standalone system, an X25router solution will
generally be more cost-effective. Indeed, in the case of the mid-range to
high -performance systems, a dedicated X25router 2000 can usually be
more cost-effective even for standalone situations .
The following table compares X25router 2000 performance against
MicroVAX II and VAX 3500 systems with DSVlls that were dedicated as a
communications server. Two scenarios were examined :
• Routing DECnet packets over an X.25 packet switched network
• Routing native X.25 packets over a packet switched network as an X.25
Gateway
In these performance figures, "packets per second" refers to packets
received from the 802 .3/Ethernet local area networks and routed onto the
synchronous lines or vice versa .
Performance for DEC MicroSer ver Compared with MicroVAX II and VAX )500 using
DSVlls
Processor

DECnet over X.25
(packets per
second )

Native X.25
(packets per
second)

X25router 2000

170

120

MicroVAX II with two DSVlls

VAX 3500 with two DSVlls

160

170

To achieve a viable configuration, the user or a Digital software specialist
should perform a level of application analysis which addresses these fac tors .
DECnet/SNA Gateway for Channel
Transport

Performance Considerations
The following information is useful in evaluating the performance of the
DECnet/SNA Gateway products . However, performance is dependent on
specific conditions in hardware , software, and procedure.
All tests were performed in a standalone environment : The only processes
running on the various VAX systems and IBM mainframe were dedicated to
the performance testing . The performance results for simi lar configurations
may differ with additional users and tasks .

A.60

Performance Guidelines

Test Conditions
The DECnet/SNA Gateway for Channel Transport connects an IBM S/3 70
(using one of the channel interfaces) to VAX systems through a DECnet
link. The performance of the Gateway-CT was tested using file transfer via
the DECnet/SN A Data Transport Facility (DTP) - either the byte, block, or
selector-channel interface.
DTP allows the transfer of text and data files into (inbound) and out of
(outbound) the IBM system. The DTP software used in the test had three
components . A DTP "client" process initiates a data transfer to be performed by a DTP server process that is based on either the same system as
the client or on another system on the local area network. The DTP server
accesses the DTP module in the IBM mainframe (MVS DTP) . (In this discussion, a client is a process that requests a data transfer. )
Both the client and server DTP processes for each test session ran on a
single VAX 8800 system. The record sizes were 80, 132, 500, 1000, 4000,
8000, and 8192 bytes. The Network Block Count on the VAX 8800 was
between 4, 8, and 12. Character translation was not used , resulting in lower
CPU utilization of the VAX 8800 . Measurements included the "steady-state"
throughput and the VAX 8800 CPU utilization. (Steady-state performance is
a measurement of the throughput during the actual data transfer, disregarding time for connections, sessions startup, and shutdown.) The following table presents the model and version numbers of the hardware and
software used in the test configurations.
Hardware and Software Components Used in DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT Tests

Digital
Hardware
VAX 8800 with RA81 disk
Both processors active
DEBNA 802.3/Ethernet communications controller
DEC Channe!Server (DESNA) with 4 MB memory Block multiplexer channel
DELQA 802.3/Ethernet communications controller

Digital Software
VMS

V4.6

DECnet/ SN A
Gateway-CT

Vl.O

DECnet/SN A
DTF

Vl.O

IBM Hardware
4381

Q13 CPU

3880

003, disk controller

3380

AA4 , disk drive

IBM Software
MVS/SP

V2.2

MVS/DTF

Vl.O

ACT/VTAM

V3, release 1.1

A.61

Performance Guidelines

Performance Results
The following table summarizes the test results. (Other configurations may
produce different results .)
All testing used a single session through the DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT (a
single file transfer) . The RU size is the 'Request/Response Unit' size, the
message size for the IBM SNA network. The 'Pacing Window' is the
amount of RUs that can be pipelined .
Throughput and CPU Utilization for Inbound DTF (VAX to IBM)
RU Size (bytes)

Pacing Window
Size

2048

Throughput
(Kb/s)

VAX 8800 CPU
Utilization (%)

389.4-534.3

11.63-19.47

8
16
4096

4
8

8192

554. 7-634.4

11.87-16.00

590.3-641.0

11.94-14.02

577.1-670.0

13.32-13.82

603.2-668.6

11.43-14.15

Throughput and CPU Utilization for Outbound DTF (IBM to VAX)
RU Size (bytes)
2048

Pacing Window
Size

Throughput
(Kb/s)

VAX 8800 CPU
Utilization ( % )

723.8-976.7

7.48-21.72

8
16
4096

4
8

8192

A.62

83 7.9-1238.6

5.42-13.33

599.1-1042.3

13.42-18.51

843.9-1200.9

13.75-18.66

879.4-1241.0

6.33-14.61

Performance Guidelines

Test Conclusions
• In this particular test a single DTF session on the VAX 8800 was sufficient
to saturate the Gateway-CT. (It would be expected that the Gateway-CT
CPU would be at maximum use before the more powerful VAX 8800 CPU. )
In actual applications, with the VAX 8800 performing other tasks (time sharing, batch processing), this would not necessarily be the case.
• T he variation in VAX CPU utilization is based on record size (from smaller
to larger) . In other words , the most significant variables in the test were
the record size of the file and the message size in the SNA network.
• The difference between the maximum inbound and outbound throughput
is due to a VTAM buffer management parameter. (Virtual Telecommunication Access Method, the RMS network equivalent.) The DECnet/ SNA
Gateway-CT CPU utilization is very high on inbound transfers because the
large RU sizes must be broken up in the Gateway-CT into VTAM 128-byte
buffers (for file creation ). Outbound transfers use the RU size exclusively,
allowing the Gateway to move to maximum CPU utilization. (Note that the
VTAM parameter is user-defined ; a larger-size buffer should help the
Gateway-CT CPU utilization .)
DECnet/SNA Gateway for
Synchronous Transport

Performance Considerations
The following information is useful in evaluating the performance of the
DECnet/SNA Gateway products. However, performance is dependent on
specific conditions in hardware , software, and procedure .
All tests were performed in a standalone environment: The only processes
running on the various VAX systems and IBM mainframe were dedicated to
the performance testing . The performance results for similar configurations
may differ with additional users and tasks.

Test Conditions
T he DECnet/SNA Gateway for Synchronous Tran sport (Gateway-ST) allows
network -to-network connections between an IBM S/ 370 (using a Front End
Processor as the physical link) and VAX systems through DECnet. The
performance of the Gateway -ST was tested using three access methods:
• DECnet/SNA Data Transfer Facility
• DECnet/SNA VMS Remote Job Entry
• DECnet/ SNA VMS 3270 Terminal Emulator

DTF Performance
For DECnet/ SNA Data Transfer Facility (DTF ) testing, the client and server
processes ran on separate MicroVAX II systems. Fixed values were record
size for the files to be transferred (80 characters) and DAP buffer size
(4096 bytes) . Variable limits were used for the message size in the SNA
network, called the Request/Response Unit or RU . The values used were
512, 1024, 2048, and 4096 bytes . Character translation was not used , resulting in lower CPU utilization on the MicroVAX. Measurements included the
CPU utilization for the Gateway-ST and the MicroVAX, the "steady-state"
throughput , the synchronous line utilization and connect times.

A.63

Performance Guidelines

The following table lists the model and version numbers of the hardware
and software used in the test configurations.
Hardware and Software Components used in DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST Tests
Digital
Hardware

MicroVAX II with RD53 disk drive and DEQNA Ethernet controller
DEC MicroServer (DEMSA) with 2 MB memory
Digital Software

VMS

V4.6

DECnet/SN A
Gateway-ST

Vl.O

DECnet/SNA
DTF

Vl.O

DECnet/SNA
RJE

Vl.2

IBM Hardware

4381

Q13 CPU

3725

001, communications controller

3880

003, disk controller

3380

AA4, disk drive

IBM Software

MVS/SP

V2.2

MVS/DTF

Vl.O

JES2/SP

V2 release 3. 7

ACF/VTAM

V3 release 1.1

ACF/NCP

V4 release 2.0

CI CS/VS

VI release 6.1

The following table summarizes steady-state throughput results. Configurations with bigger RU sizes, bigger record sizes, bigger pacing window and
bigger network-block counts may result in higher throughputs.
The line utilization is calculated as the ratio between steady-state throughput and maximum line speed. (Steady state divided by maximum speed.)
Throughput and CPU Utilization for Inbound DTP (VAX to IBM)
Line Speed
(Kb/s)

Number of
Sessions

Throughput (Kb/s)

Gateway CPU
Utilization(%)

9.6

9.3-9.4

1.59-2.24

34.4-55.3

4.38-5.87

54.4-55.5

5.68-6.29

55.1-55.2

6.28-6.48

128

67.6-104.7

7.88-11.22

123.9

8.16-11.22

123.9

8.23-11.24

52.3-101.7

8.55-12.24

256

A.64

97.0-139.5

14.02-18.30

193.5-249.2

22. 72-3 7.22

Performance Guidelines

Throughput and CPU Utilization for Outbound DTF (IBM to VAX)
Line Speed
(Kb/s)

Number of
Sessions

9.6
56

128

256

Throughput (Kb/s )

Gateway CPU
Utilization (%)

9.2-9.3

1.76-2.41

42.0-54.4

4.10-6.32

53.9-54.4

5.12-6.72

54.0

6.39- 6.70

54.0-76.2

5.88-7.41

105.7-127.1

8.25-11.26

127.l

8.23-11.24

56.0-78.8

4.64-12.71

108.9-138.8

10.13-13.67

199.2-227.5

15.19-34.14

Test Conclusions

· In general, the MicroVAX CPU became the bottleneck when data rates of
approximately 100 Kb/s were achieved with DTP transfers .
• The time taken by the Gateway-ST CPU to process each RU was between
5.13 RU/second to 62.74 RU/second depending on the line speed and RU
size. (The smaller number occurs with larger RUs and faster line speeds ;
the larger number uses smaller RUs and slower line speeds. )

Remote Job Entry Performance
The DECnet/SN A VMS Remote Job Entry (RJE ) access routine was used in
conjunction with JES2 software on the IBM mainframe. RJE allows the VAX
system to function as an SNA/ RJE workstation. The VAX system subm its
batch jobs to the IBM host and receives job output .
For the RJE test, a JCL file (Job Control Language) was submitted to the
IBM host with commands to transfer a file back to the VAX system. The file
was transferred to either a print or punch stream . (The print stream produces 132-column printed output ; the punch stream produces RMS data
files .) Performance measurements of the Gateway-ST included steady-state
throughput , Gateway CPU utilization, and local host CPU utilization (on a
MicroVAX II). The RU size was set to 512 bytes. Compression was turned
on for the RJE data streams . (Compression produces fewer bytes through
the test link.)

Test Results
The results of the testing showed the Gateway-ST CPU to be fully utilized
at line speeds above 56 Kb/s . (The Gateway-ST can have a maximum line
speed of 256 Kb/s.) This saturation is due to the functional translation
performed in the Gateway-ST CPU by the RJE server software. The maximum throughput observed through the Gateway-ST was approximately 55
Kb/s.
Terminal Emulator Performance
The DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Terminal Emulator (TE) allows VAX users
with Digital's VT terminals to run interactive programs and applications on
IBM host systems.

A.65

Performance Guidelines

Because traffic generated by TE sessions occurs in bursts, it is difficult to
characterize "steady-state performance" in the Gateway. However, two
performance metrics of primary interest were measured: the minimum
number of TE sessions needed to saturate the Gateway-ST CPU, and the
response time per TE transaction.
Both DTF and TE utilize the same server in the Gateway-ST: Gateway
Access Server (GAS) is one of three servers in the Gateway; the others are
exclusively for R]E and DHCF. This means that the time to serve an RU
through the Gateway for TE traffic should be the same as the time needed
for an RU generated by DTF (assuming the RUs are the same size). By using
the DTF results earlier we can calculate the time taken to serve a TEgenerated RU. Inverting this number ( 1 divided by the service time for 1
RU) gives the minimum sessions needed to saturate the Gateway CPU.
In reality, TE sessions have two components: a service time for the RU, and
"think time" that is usually some order of magnitude higher than service
time in the Gateway (a human interpreting the screen takes some amount
of seconds as opposed to milliseconds). Looking at both components
reveals that many more TE sessions are needed to saturate the Gateway
than the minimum number derived from RU processing.
Example
Consider a 505-byte transaction. The session for this transaction is outbound on a 128 Kb/s line, using an RU of 512 bytes (the closest RU for the
size of the transaction). Using the DTF results from above, the time needed
to serve this RU would be 7.2 milliseconds. (This is based on 12. 92 RUs per
second in the Gateway. The equation is CPU utilization over average number of RUs per second). The result should also be the time needed to
service a TE RU. By inverting this number (1 divided by 7.2 milliseconds),
139 transactions can be serviced by the Gateway per second. This is the
minimum number of sessions needed to saturate the Gateway-ST. (The
Gateway-ST will support only 128 sessions.)
In the above example the "think time" is 0 seconds. If the "think time" is
set to a more realistic five seconds, the Gateway-ST then theoretically
supports 139 x 5, or 695 sessions.
This example clearly shows that the Gateway CPU is never the bottleneck
for TE since the maximum number of sessions is higher than 128 (the
number of sessions the Gateway-ST device is emulating). The major source
of TE utilization is still the VAX doing the character translation. It has been
shown that the VAX CPU will become a bottleneck with only a few TE
sessions, depending on the size of the transaction and the power of the
VAX processor.
This example for number of sessions should also hold true for the MS-DOS
and ULTRIX 3270 TE products, though neither of these configurations were
tested.
The other performance-metric measured for TE was response time.
Response time in general is composed of the aggregate delay imposed by
several network components:
• Between the terminal line and the VAX
• In the VAX host
• In the Ethernet between the VAX and the Gateway
A.66

Performance Guidelines

• In the Gateway
• In the synchronous line to the IBM network component
• In the IBM host process
Delays are encountered on the return trip also. The line delays are composed of transmission time and queuing waits . Delays in processors are
composed of processing time and queuing waits. The most significant delay
is the one in the VAX host, followed by the time between the terminal and
the VAX processor. (Most of the testing was done without terminal servers. )
Using the test configuration as an example, the response time was measured
to be approximately 3.5 seconds for a transaction size of 1890 bytes , both
inbound and outbound. (This was using one TE user on a MicroVAX II
through the Gateway -ST; a larger VAX and the use of Terminal Servers
would decrease this number).

Performance Results for the
DECnet/SNA Gateway-CT and
DECnet/SNA Gateway-ST

File Transfer
RJE throughput is the same with both Gateway-CT and -ST (under 56
Kb/s ) regardless of the line speed . DTF remains the product of choice for
high speed data transfer. With DTF, line utilization averages 96 % in
Gateway-ST, for example, 249 Kb/s on a 256 Kb/s-line.

The Gateway-CT approaches transfer rates of between 640 Kb/s and 1.2
Mb/s using DTF .
Interactive Access
Terminal-emulation throughput is more a function of the VAX CPU (processing terminal screen I/O ) than either Gateway CPU . In real-world conditions , both Gateway -ST (with 128-session capability) and Gateway-CT
(with 255-session capability) will provide TE users with more than adequate performance.

VMS/SN A

These guidelines describe the performance of VMS/ SNA Vl.1 software
when transferring files and messages from an IBM host to a VAX system.
The following VMS/ SNA products were tested :
• DECnet/ SNA VMS DISOSS Document Exchange Facility (DDXF)
• DECnet/ SNA VMS Remote Job Entry (RJE )
• DECnet/ SNA VMS 3270 Terminal Emulator
The testing showed that DDXF takes 30 to 50 seconds to transfer a file
from the IBM system to the VAX system . For short files the transfer time is
the same regardless of the line speed (4.8 , 9.6, or 56.0 Kb/s) . Files longer
than 20 or 30 blocks take a longer time to transfer at low line speeds . With
the 56.0 Kb/s line, DDXF transfers most files in less than a minute.
RJE transfers a file at the rate of one block/sec with a 4.8 Kb/s line and
four blocks/sec with a 56.0 Kb/s line.
The 3270 Terminal Emulator allows VAX users to connect to an IBM host
and run applications designed for the IBM 3270 terminal. After the IBM
application has generated a screen of data , the terminal emulator displays it
on the terminal in one to five seconds , depending on the amount of data
and the line speed.

A.67

Performance Guidelines

Test Configurations and Conditions
The CPU utilization of the VAX machines was measured by running a lowpriority background process that counts its own CPU usage. It is presumed
that the remaining CPU time was used to transfer the files and messages.
All the tests were performed in a standalone environment with the processors and communication lines idle except for the tests being run. Note that
performance of a similar configuration with multiple users and tasks may
not equal the results discussed here.
The following figures show the hardware configurations used in the tests.
VMS/SNA Configuration with 56.0 Kbls Synchronous Line

- - - - - - - --'"""" IBM 1
TDMB32- , 156 -Kb/s- Synchronous
Line
3725

IBM 4381

VAX 8200

NBG·227-00

Configurations with 9.6 Kb/s Synchronous Line

DMB 32 1--9-.6-K-b/-s -Sy-n-ch-ro-n-ou_s _Li_ne-

£IBM

-.-.:1 372 5

IBM 4381

VAX8200

DPV11 1 - - - - - - - - ---~
9.6 Kb/s Synchronous Line

Micro

IBM
3725

IBM 4381

VAXll

NBG-228-01

Configurations with 4.8 Kbls Synchronous Line

DMB32

4.8 Kb/s Synchronous Line

,4.

VAX 8200

IBM
3725

IBM 4381

- DP
- V11 <----------~-"m IBM
4.8 Kb/s Synchronous Line
3725

Micro
VAX ll

IBM4381

NBG-229-01

A.68

Performance Guidelines

The following list shows some of the model and version numbers of the
hardware and software used in the test configurations.
Hardware and Software Components Used In Test
Digital
Hardware

MicroVAX II
with RD53 disk
drive
VAX 8200 with
RA60 disk drive
Digital Software

VMS

V4.4

DECnet-VAX

V4.4 (used for the RJE testing)

IBM Hardware

4381

P13, CPU (3.2 Mips with 16-Mbyte memory)

3725

001, Communications controller (with 1.5-Mbyte memory)

3880

003, Disk controller

3380

AA4 , Disk drive (2.5 Gbytes per controller)

IBM Software

MVS/ SP

Release 3.8

JE2/SP

V2 , release 3.7

ACF/ VTAM

V3, release 3. 7

ACF/ NCP

V4 , release 2.0

CI CS/ VS

Vl , release 6.1

DISOSS/ 370

V3, release 2.0

IBM Network
Parameters

Secondary
Pacing count :

MAX OUT:

MAXDATA
(segment size) :

521 for the 4.8- and 9.6-Kb/s lines ;
1,033 for the 56.0-Kb/s line

DECnet/SNA VMS DDXF
The DDXF software accesses the Distributed Office Support System/3 70
(DISOSS ) software on the IBM system. DDXF transfers DISOSS text files
called documents . The following DDXF functions were tested :
• The FILE function , which copies a document from the VAX system to
DISOSS on the IBM system .
• The RETRIEVE function, which copies a document from DISOSS to the
VAX system .
• The SEND function , an electronic mail function that sends a document to a
list of DISOSS users .
• OBTAIN function , an electronic mail function that allows a user to check
what mail is on the DISOSS account .

A.69

Performance Guidelines

DISOSS has two document types: simple and complex. Simple documents

are straightforward text documents; complex documents have special
formatting features such as italic and bold fonts, lists, and tables. Complex
files generally require more CPU time than simple files on the VAX system
to translate to DISOSS format.
The Request Unit/Response Unit (RU), which is the message size on the
SNA network , was set to 512, 1024, and 2048 bytes.
For the test system, the following formula gives the approximate response
time for DDXF to transfer a document of a given size:
Response time (sec) = connect time + (number of blocks
x time per block)
A block is 512 bytes of user data .
In most test cases, the connect time was 30 to 45 seconds, and was unaffected by the line speed, RU size, or file type. The connect time for the
OBTAIN operation was a little longer at 40 to 50 seconds . The connect time
would probably be faster with a larger, more powerful IBM system.
The time per block is shown in the following table, which also shows
throughput and line utilization while the document data is actually being
transferred (without including the connect time).
DDXF Performance
Line Speed

(Kb/s)

Time per Block
(sec)

Throughput

Line Utilization

(Kb/s)

4.8

0.91 to 0.98

4.2 to 4.5

92 to 99%

9.6

0.45 to 0.53

7.7 to 9.0

84 to 99%

56.0

0.10 to 0.22

19 to 40

35 to 75%

Part of the connect time is due to the fact that DDXF logs into and out of
the IBM system for each command . DISOSS allows only one user to log into
an account. If a new user logs in, the previous user is interrupted and
logged out. To reduce the possibility of being logged out unexpectedly,
DDXF logs out after each command .
With these connect times, the line speed does not affect the response time
very much for small files. For example , transferring a five-block file would
take 30 to 45 seconds connect time plus the time to transfer the data
blocks. As shown in the fi gure "File Transfer with Five-block File," the
response tim e is 45 seconds with the 4.8 Kb/s line and 41 seconds with the
56 .0 Kb/s line. The user would not notice any improvement in the response
time with the 56 Kb/s line. With a 30-block file , as shown in the figure
"File Transfer Tim e with 30-block File," the user would start to notice an
improvement in response time.

A.70

Performance Guidelines

File TrtUJsfer Time with Five-block File

Transfer Time-5 sec

.------C-on_n_e_c-tT_i_
m_e___4_o_s_e_c_ _ ----.l---'-~I
4.8 Kb/s Line

I - Response Time-45 sec ---~
TransferTime- 1 sec

.-------C-on_n_e_c-tT
_i_m_e___4_o_s_e_c_ _____,.,.,ll
56Kb/sline

I-

Response Time-41 sec --...j
NBG-230-00

File Transfer Time with JO-block File

4.8 Kb/s Line

Connect Time-40 sec

Transfer Time- 30 sec

--- - -- - - Response Time- 70 s e c - - - - - - -,

TransferTime-4 sec

.---C-on_n_e_c-tT_i_m_e___4_o_s_e_c_ _----.l---'-,I
56Kb/sline

--- - Response Time-44 sec - - - - NBG-231-00

For the 4.8 and 9.6 Kb/s lines, line speed is the limiting factor. Varying the
RU size, the file type, the type of operation, or the hardware device makes
no significant difference in response time or throughput .
For the 56.0 Kb/s line, line speed is not as much a limiting factor, and
other factors start to influence performance. T he RU size has a considerable
effect on the throughput. Transfers with a 2048-byte RU have a greater
throughput than a 512-byte RU. Transfers with the 2048-byte RU size may
have 0 to 50 percent greater throughput. Simple files may have 0 to 20
percent greater throughput than complex files. The FILE and RETRIEVE
operations have perhaps 5 to 15 percent greater throughput than the SEND
and OBTAIN operations for the 56.0 Kb/s line.

A.71

Performance Guidelines

The following table shows the CPU utilization of the VAX system while it is
actually transferring the document data , not during the connect time.
CPU Utilization for Document Transfers with DDXF
VAX 8200
with DMB32

Line speed
(Kb/s)

MicroVAX II
with DPVll

4.8

11 %

14%

9.6

20%

29%

56 .0

98 %

DECnet/ SNA VMS Remote Job Entry
DECnet/SN A VMS Remote Job Entry {RJE) allows a VAX system to function as one or more SNAIR]E workstations. The VAX system can thus transmit jobs to the IBM host and receive the job output .
For these tests , a JCL file was submitted to the IBM host with commands to
transfer a file back to the VAX system . The time it took to transfer the file
back to the VAX system was measured . The file was transferred as an output printer stream. The RU was 512 bytes.
The following formu la determines the actual transfer time of a file , not
counting the time to submit the job to the IBM system .
Transfer Time (sec) = Number of Blocks x Time per Block
For testing , the number of blocks was calculated at 512 bytes of user data
per block. This calculation does not include any extra bytes associated with
RMS overhead .
The time per block is shown in the following table :
RJE Performance with Data Compression
Line Speed
(Kb/s)

Record Size
(bytes )

Time per
block
(sec )

Throughput
(Kb/s )

Line
Utilization

130%

4.8

40 to 160

0.65

6.3

9.6

40 to 160

0.34

12.0

130%

56.0

0.20

20 .0

36%

56.0

80 to 160

0. 16

26.0

46%

The measurements shown in the table were measured using data compression, where the IBM system replaces strings of the same character with one
or two bytes of data. In the test files , 50 percent of the data was compressible. The resultant compressed data was 60 percent as long as the original
data . (With the 56.0 Kb/s line, the greater throughput with data compression is usually not worth the extra CPU cost to compress and decompress
the data .)
Record sizes of 40, 80, 120, and 160 bytes were tested . The record size
made little difference for the 4.8 and 9.6 Kb/s lines : throughput was a few
percent greater with the larger records . With the 56.0 Kb/s line, the
throughput was about the same for the 80, 120, and 160 bytes records .
However, the throughput for the 40 byte records was about 25 percent
slower.

A.72

Performance Guidelines

The testing showed that , when the IBM host sends more than one data
stream simultaneously, the overall throughput is the same as sending one
stream . For example, if data is sent in three streams, each stream goes one
third the speed of a single stream.

DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Terminal Emulator
The 3270 Terminal Emulator is a software product that allows VAX users
with VTlOO and VT200 series terminals to emulate IBM 3270 terminals .
This allows VAX users to connect to an IBM host over the network and run
IBM-based application programs .
For testing , a remote terminal emulator (RTE ) system was connected to
three 9.6 Kb/s terminal lines on the VAX system , as shown in the following
figure. This RTE system requested a screen of data as would a terminal
user, then measured the time it took to receive the screen of data.
Configurations for Testing the 3270 Terminal Emulator
DMB32 ..___ _
4.~
8 , 9.6 or 56 Kb/s
Sync

IBM4381

VAX 8200

oPv

3725

,____ _4_.a_o_r 9_.6_ K
_b_l s_ ____,,..,, j~~
Sync

Micro

IBM 4381

VAXll

NBG·232·01

The following table shows the results of the testing .
3270 Terminal Emulator Performance
Data Size
(bytes)

Line Speed
(Kb/s)

Response
Time (sec)

Line
Utilization

CPU
Utilization

256
256
256

4.8
9.6

1.9

11 %

12 %

1.6

15 %

56.0

1.3

14 %

1536

4.8

6.1

28 %

1536

9.6

4.7

17%

13%

1536

56.0

3.4

13%

Tests were run with RU sizes of 256, 1536, and 2048. The performance was
not significantly affected by varying the RU size.
When the user presses a key to request a screen of data , the VAX sends a
message to the IBM system over the SNA line . The application program on
the IBM system generates the screen of data, then transmits the screen of
data over the SNA line to the VAX. The VAX system translates the data to
VTl00/200 format , then transmits the data over a 9.6 Kb/s asynchronous
line to the terminal.

A.73

Performance Guidelines

The following figure shows the approximate time for each step of a 1536byte transfer under the test conditions. The request for screen data
includes VAX processing of request and transmission over the SNA line.
The IBM CPU processing includes IBM-communications-controller and
application-program processing.
J270 Terminal Emulator Response Time over 9.6 Kbls Line

I:
lI

Request for Screen Data-0.1 sec
IBM CPU Processing-0.1 sec

VAX CPU Processing 1.9 sec

Transfer over 9.6 Kb/s
SNA Line-1.3 SC

Transfer to Terminal over
9.6 Kb/s Line-1.6 sec

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - 5.0sec-------------------~

NBG-145-00

J270 Terminal Emulator Response Time over .56.0 Kbls Line

JrI

...---- Request for Screen Data 0 1 sec

IBM CPU P'"""'81"9-0.1'""
Transfer over 56.0 Kb/s SNA Line- 0.2 sec

VAX CPU Processing 1.9 sec

Transfer to Terminal over
9.6 K b/s Line-1 .6 sec

. _ - - - - - - -- - - - - - 3.9sec - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

NBG-146-00

Increasing the SNA line speed from 9.6 to 56.0 Kb/s does not significantly
increase the response time. At 9.6 Kb/s the transfer time over the SNA line
is 1.3 seconds out of the total response time of 5.0 seconds. Increasing the
line speed to 56.0 Kb/s nearly eliminates the transfer time over the SNA
line, but improves the overall response time by only 3.9 seconds.
Note that in this test the IBM system generated the screen of data in only
0.1 second. Under normal conditions the IBM application program often
takes considerably more time to generate a screen of data.
Using a 19.2 Kb/s line to the terminal instead of the 9.6 Kb/s line improves
the response time further, saving about 0.8 second on a 1536-byte transfer.
Using a VAXstation II for the VAX processor virtually eliminates the terminal transfer time.

A.74

Performance Guidelines

These tests ran with one, two, and three users. The response time with
three users is the same as with one user. The only exception is when the
VAX processor translates data for two users simultaneously, at which time
each user has to wait an extra one to two seconds.
The number of users that a MicroVAX II can support depends on how often
each user requests a screen of data and the size of the data transfers. A
1536-byte data transfer takes about two seconds of VAX CPU time. If each
user waits five seconds to receive a screen of data, studies it for five seconds, then requests another screen, the MicroVAX II capacity would be
consumed by five users.
With most hardware configurations and IBM application programs, it takes
more than five seconds to receive a screen of data. Also, most users study
the screen for more than five seconds before requesting a new screen of
data. Therefore, a MicroVAX II system can usually support considerably
more than five users.
DECnet/SNA Data Transfer
Facility

Configurations and Methods
In testing the DECnet/SNA Data Transfer Facility, all measurements were
conducted on standalone systems. Only the tasks necessary for measuring
were running on the VMS V 4.5 system. All unnecessary applications on the
IBM system were stopped during testing. Although this method yields
benchmarks for the product, users in a timesharing environment may not
see the same response time and throughput as observed in a test environment. However, the percentage of CPU used by the application will be
consistent.
The following three figures illustrate the configurations used for testing.
Figure A.1

Test Configuration Using MicroVAX II or VAX 8200 as Server and Client

VMSIDTF
Client and Server

t:
MicroVAX II
or
VAX8200
~

•

Transceiver
Terminator
c:::::'.::=J~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~··

Standard Ethernet Cable

MVS/DTF

9.6 or
56 Kb/s
Synchronous

IBM
37~

IBM 4381

NBG-234-01

A.75

Performance Guidelines

Figure A .2

Test Configuration Using One MicroVAX II as Server and One as Client

VMSI DTF Client

VMSI DTF Server
,/

MicroVAX
II

IL
Transceiver

••....._~~c.....: ---r
~ ----~

DECnet/SNA
Gateway
(DECSA)

-t
...J

-7

Terminal~

___,;-..--------~--

Standard Ethernet Cable

MVS/ DTF

I- j~~5 I
IBM 4381

56 Kb/ s
Synchronous

I<"'

7
NBG-235-01

Figure A.3

Test Configuration Using VMSI SNA on VAX 8200

VMSI SNA with
VMSI DTF
Client and Server

MVS/DTF

~·.

1--- -

VAX 8200

d~~5
IBM 4381

56 Kb/s
Sync

NBG-236-00

The file transfer measurements were designed to transfer a variety of file
sizes, 1 to 1000 blocks, from the local node to the IBM host (inbound to
IBM) and from the IBM host to the local node (outbound from IBM). Files
with record sizes of 80, 512 and 4096 bytes were transferred using a
Request Unit (RU ) of 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096 bytes . The frame sizes were
521 bytes on the 9.6 Kb/s line and 1417 bytes on the 56 Kb/s line. The
pacing is set to 4 for all measurements . Measurements included the CPU
utilization of the application, the response time for transferring the file, and
the synchronous line utilization, because the synchronous line was the
gating factor in most measurements .

Results
The optimal RU size is 1024 or 2048 bytes cons idering response time
inbound and outbound as well as CPU and line utilization . This is true for
all configurations studied .

A.76

Performance Guidelines

Note: The operating system used for all VMS nodes is VMS V4.5. Increased
functionality in subsequent versions of VMS may impact performance. VMS
V4.6 handles the establishment of logical links between nodes differently.
With increased functionality, this leads to longer connect times.
When using the configuration in Figure A.1 with the MicroVAX II as the
local node, the maximum throughput is 45.3 Kb/s ( 11.1 blocks/second)
with a line utilization of 80.97 percent of the 56 Kb/s line. The following
table gives the maximum observed throughput for varying RU and record
sizes over the 56 Kb/s line (outbound, 1000 blocks).
Maximum Throughput with MicroVAX II Local Node over 56 Kbls Line
RU

Record Size
(bytes)

Response Time
(sec, V4.5)

Throughput
bits/sec

blocks/sec

512

80
512
4096

92.7
98.7
103.0

44201
41513
39766

10.8
10.l
9.7

19.9
18.9
17.9

1024

80
512
4096

96.3
94.3
93.0

42519
43420
44043

10.4
10.6
10.8

19.1
19.5
19.8

80
4096

93.0
90 .3
90.7

44043
45343
45176

10.8
11.l
11.0

19.8
20.4
20.3

100.0

40960

10.0

18.4

2048

512

4096

MB/hr

"'u
.E
~

·=

C!)

u
y

The throughput on the 9.6 Kb/s line is limited by the line speed. The
maximum observed throughput was 8.5 Kb/s for an 89 percent line utilization. This is true also for 1000 blocks outbound with RU 1024 bytes and
record size of 512.

=
e
..s
...

~
""O
c
c

=
.E0
:I

Oil

~
0

Some of the measurements were taken when transferring files without data
translation. It was observed that the response time was 13 percent longer
on the average if data translation takes place.
When a VAX 8200 is used as the local node, as shown in Figure A .1, the
throughput is increased about 12 percent. The following is a list of maximum throughputs observed with RU set to 1024 bytes over a 56 Kb/s line.
Maximum Throughput with VAX 8200 Local Node over 56 Kb/s Line
RU

Record Size
(bytes)

Response Time
(sec, V4.5)

Throughput
bits/sec

blocks/sec

MB/hr

1024

80
512
4096

94.0
90.7
90.3

43574
45176
45343

19.6
20.3
20.4

15.6
16.2
16.3

In the configurations shown in Figures A.1 and A.3, using the MicroVAX II
or VAX 8200, the DTF/VMS client and server software are resident in the
same node. In the configuration shown in Figure A.2, the client and server
are in separate MicroVAX Ils, each running VMS V4.5 operating system.
The test file was sent from the client node to the server node to the
DECnet/SNA Gateway, then over the synchronous line to the IBM system .

A.77

Performance Guidelines

The following table compares the CPU utilization when transferring a file
on a single DTF/VMS client/server node to the utilization on separate client
and server nodes. The measurements were taken using an RU of 2048
bytes, a file size of 1000 blocks, and a record size of 80 bytes.
CPU Utilization on Single and Separate Client/Server Nodes
Single Node

Separate Client/Server

Response time

93.0 sec

96.3 sec

Throughput

44.0 Kb/s

42.5 Kb/s

CPU utilization(%)

55.9%

client: 18.2%
server: 34.8%

The client CPU utilization is record-size dependent: the larger the record
size, the less CPU time used per block.
The configuration shown in Figure A.3 uses VMS/SNA Vl.1 software as a
connection to the IBM system rather than the DECnet/SNA Gateway. The
CPU utilization on the VAX 8200 node generally increases 22 percent when
transferring files of 50 blocks or fewer when using VMS/SNA Vl.1 as a
gateway. The user may see an increase of 30 percent in the CPU utilization
when transferring files with small (80-byte) records. The increase in CPU
load is due to the VMS/SNA software residing on the sending node. The
maximum throughput in this configuration is 45.2 Kb/s observed when
transferring 1000 blocks outbound from IBM with the RU size set to 2048
bytes and a file record of 512 bytes. The outbound throughput will be
similar to throughput using the DECnet/SNA Gateway Vl.3 for large files
(over 100 blocks) . When transferring inbound files or small outbound files,
the throughput is an average of 30 percent less using VMS/SNA Vl.1 than
DECnet/SNA Gateway Vl.3.
Bisync Emulators

These performance measurements show test results for several bisync
emulators. The purpose of these tests was to produce a set of results on a
typical configuration for each of these bisync emulators. These results can
then be extrapolated to other systems to allow the user to estimate the
capabilities of these emulators on different configurations.
Bisync terminal emulators have traditionally been positioned as low performance and high functionality; that is, performance was not an issue.
3270 Terminal Emulation
Issues for 3270 Terminal Emulation are

• Number of terminals supported on a single system.
• Incremental response time.
• Line speed .
· CPU load.

A.78

Performance Guidelines

The following configuration was used to test the VAX 3271 protocol emulator: VAX-11/780, VMS V3.4, and a 9.6 Kb/s synchronous line using a
modem eliminator. Note that 9.6 Kb/sis the highest line speed that offers
the greatest throughput, but also has the highest impact (CPU cycles) on
the VAX system. Two rates of data entry were used : a typical software
engineering environment and a "worst-case" simulation using the
autorepeat feature of the VTlOO. For the typical software engineering
environment, the protocol emulator and the first terminal used 10 percent
of the CPU. Each subsequent terminal used an additional 2 percent of the
CPU. When the autorepeat mode of the VTlOO was used for simulating
"worst-case" data entry, the protocol emulator and one terminal required
25 percent of the CPU . (Each additional terminal required another 6
percent.)
As far as response time is concerned, the test results do not add significant
incremental delay to what the IBM host system imposes .
These figures can be extrapolated to other configurations to give a general
idea of typical performance capabilities-that is, a VAX-11/750 increases
the VAX-11/780 figures by a factor of approximately 1.5, and the
VAX-11/730 increases the VAX-11/780 figures by a factor of approximately
three.
The following configuration was used to test the RSX 3271 Protocol Emulator: PDP-11/70, RSX-llM (no extended memory support) , and a 9.6 Kb/s
synchronous line using a modem eliminator.
Two rates of data entry were used: a typical software engineering environment and a "worst-case" simulation using the autorepeat feature of the
VTlOO.

For the typical software engineering environment, the protocol emulator
and the first terminal used 10 percent of the CPU . Each subsequent terminal used an additional 5 percent of the CPU. When the autorepeat mode of
the VTlOO was used for simulating "worst-case" data entry, the protocol
emulator and one terminal required 15 percent of the CPU. (Each additional terminal required another 10 percent.)
The CPU use on the RSX -llM configuration is somewhat lower than on the
VAX configuration because the VAX terminal emulation utility runs in
compatibility mode.

A.79

Performance Guidelines

2780/3 780 Protocol Emulation
Issues for 2780/3 780 protocol emulation are

•Throughput (number of records transferred per unit of time).
·CPU load.
• Line speed.
The 2780/3 780 protocol emulator includes many different options for
translating and manipulating records: use of space compression, transparency or nontransparency, 2780 or 3 780, fixed or variable length records,
and so on. Because of the variety of options for record translation and
manipulation, it is difficult to present any conclusive results.
Typically, a 9.6-Kb/s line on a VAX-11/750 with a DUPll device uses about
10 percent of the CPU. Lower line speeds will result in decreased CPU use.
In addition, using a DMF32 device on a VAX instead of the DUPll
decreases the CPU use by about one-half.
Typically, a 9,600-bits-per-second line using a modem eliminator on a
PDP-11/70 also uses about 10 percent of the CPU. As is to be expected,
CPU use will increase on processors smaller than those tested.
For example, the results for the VAX-11/750 configuration ( 10 percent CPU
usage) can be extrapolated to 20 percent CPU use for the VAX-11/730. The
results for the PDP-11/70 configuration (10 percent CPU use) can be
extrapolated to 20 percent CPU use for the PDP-11/34 and 14 percent for
the PDP-11/44.
On the other hand, CPU use will decrease on processors larger than those
tested. For example, the results for the VAX-11/750 configuration (10
percent CPU use) can be extrapolated to 7 percent CPU use for the
VAX-11/780.
LAN Bridge 100

The LAN Bridge 100 is a high-performance device which connects two
802.3/Ethernet segments. The bridge receives frames from both
802.3/Ethernet segments, determining which segment contains the destination node. If the destination for the frame is not on the same segment as
the source, the bridge transmits the frame to the other segment; If the
destination node is on the same segment, the bridge discards the frame.
Factors affecting the performance of the LAN Bridge 100 include the
latency the bridge adds to the transmission of a frame and the maximum
throughput of the bridge. The latency of the bridge is the amount of time
the frame spends in the bridge, that is, time to process and transmit an
incoming 802.3/Ethernet frame. Maximum throughput is the rate at which
the bridge can receive frames on one segment and forward them to the
other segment.
The latency introduced by the bridge is very small: approximately 107
microseconds for minimum length (64-byte) frames.
Packet Processing Rates
The LAN Bridge 100 has high-throughput capability. Under test conditions,
the bridge can forward bursts of frames at full 802.3/Ethernet bandwidth.
At "steady state" (continuous steady stream), the bridge can forward
13,404 minimum-size packets and can filter 24, 200 minimum-size packets.
(Minimum-size packets are the worst-case condition for a bridge.)

A.80

Performance Guidelines

Fiber Optic Bridge
The Fiber Optic Bridge interfaces one transceiver cable and a fiber optic
link . It contains high-performance optics , allowing communication over
longer distances . The other end of the fiber optic cable can connect to
another fiber optic bridge or to a fiber optic repeater.
The relationship between achievable distance and power budget involves
several factors that influence distance gained as power budget increases :
• Cable length , type, loss characteristics, and overall quality
• Number of splices and connections in the fiber
Because each network environment is unique , actual obtainable distance
may vary by cableplant.
The following table summarizes the power budget and distance specifica tions for the fiber optic LAN Bridge 100 (DEBET-RH/ RJ) and the fiber optic
DEREP repeater (DEREP-RH/ RJ ). These specifications are based on the
four major multimode fiber types generally in use today. Distances shown
are worst-case conditions with best-case fiber.
Power Budget and Distance Specifications For Fiber Optic Bridge
(DEBET-RHIRJJ and Fiber Optic Repeater (DEREP-RHIRJ)
Fiber Type

Power Budget 1

Attainable Distance (km ) 1

(micron diameter )

(decibels )

Bridge to Bridge 2

Bridge to
Repeater2

501125

08.0

2.0

1.5

62.51125

12.0

3.0

1.5

851125

13.5

3.0

1.5

100/140

16.0

3.0

1.5

With less than a 1 x 10· 10 bit error rate.

DEBET-RH/-RJ and DEREP-RH/RJ versions are compatible with the previous fiber optic
bridge and repeater (-RC/RD), but are limited to the performance specified by t he
-RC/RD .

A.81

Appendix B

Environmental
Specifications

The environmental information provided in this appendix will help you
plan for installation when ordering products . Detailed site preparation
information is provided in the individual site preparation guide for the
specific products .
Hardware products are classified and tested according to one of the classes
of temperature/humidity environments shown in the following table.
Environment Classes
Class

Temperature

Relative
Humidity

Maximum
Wet Bulb

Minimum
Dew Point

WC (59°F) to
32°C (90°F)

20-80%

25°C (77°F)

2°C (36°F)

lO°C (50°F) to
40°c ( 104°F)

10-90%

2s 0 c (s2°FJ

2°C (36°F)

5°C (4 1°F) ro
50°c ( 122°F)

10-95%

32°C (90°F)

2°C (36°F)

B.1

Appendix C

Software Product
Description List

Software Product

SPD

Version

DECnet-llM

10.75 .xx

4.3

DECnet-llM-PLUS

10.66.xx

4.0

DECnet-llS

10.74.xx

4.3

DECnet-DOS

50.15.xx

2.1

DECnet-Micro/RSX

18.27.xx

4.0

DECnet-RT

10.72.xx

2.1

DECnet-ULTRIX

26.83 .xx

3.0

DECnet-VAX

25.03.xx

5.0

DECnet-VAXmate

55.05.xx

2.1

...

DECnet/E

10.73.xx

4.0

DECnet/PCSA Client: PC

55.07.xx

2.0

""
~

DECnet/PCSA Client: VAXmate
DECnet/SNA MS -DOS 3270 Terminal
Emulator

55.10.xx
30.63.xx

2.0
1.0

·::

DECnet/SNA ULTRIX 3270 Terminal
Emulator

29.88.xx

DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Terminal Emulator

26.84.xx

1.4

DECnet/SNA Data Transfer Facility

27.85 .xx

2.0

DECnet/SNA Gateway for Channel Transport

29.76.xx

1.0

DECnet/SNA Gateway for Synchronous
Transport

25.C6

1.0

DECnet/SNA Printer Emulator

26.70.xx

1.1

DECnet/SNA VMS 3270 Data Stream
Programming Interface

26.87.xx

1.2

DECnet/SNA VMS Application Programming
Interface

26.86.xx

2.2

DECnet/SNA VMS APPC/LU6.2 Programming
Interface

26.88.xx

2.0

DECnet/SNA VMS DISOSS Document
Exchange Facility

26.72 .xx

1.3

DECnet/SNA VMS Distributed Host
Command Facility

26.71.xx

1.1

DECnet/SNA VMS Gateway Management
DECnet/SNA VMS RJE

29.70.xx
26.85 .xx

2.0
1.2

DECrouter 200

27.72 .xx

1.0

DECrouter 2000

28.85 .xx

1.0

DECserver 200 for RSX -llM-PLUS and
Micro/RSX

15.72.xx

2.0

DECserver 200 for ULTRIX-32

27.54.xx

2.0

DECserver 200 for VMS

27.53.xx

2.0

DECserver 500/550 for RSX-llM-PLUS and
MicroRSX

18.53.xx

1.1

DECserver 500/550 for VMS

26.97.xx

1.1

EDE with IBM DISOSS

26.92.xx

2.0

EDE-W Document Exchange

26.37.xx

1.2

FUSION TCP/IP

29 .81.xx

3.2

c
0

·cu
1.0

""
Q.I

...u

:I
"'Cl

...
Q.I
~

£
0

r/:J

C.1

Software Product

SPD

Version

KMSll RSX X.25 LAPB Link Level
Software (UNIBUS)

13 .42 .xx

2.0

KMVlA MicroVMS Driver

28 .23 .xx

1.1

KMVlA Micro VMS Development Tools

28 .24 .xx

1.0

KMVlA MicroVMS X .25 Link Level

28.25 .xx

1.0

KMVlA X.25 Link Level (Q-bus)

13.43 .xx

1.0

KMVlA RSX and Micro/ RSX Development
Tools

13.41.xx

1.0

KMVlA RSX and Micro/RSX HDLC
Framing Software

14.22 .xx

1.0

LAN Traffic Monitor

27.80.xx

1.0

MUX200/VAX Protocol Emulator

25.02.xx

2.0

MUXserver 100 Remote Terminal
Server (VMS)

28.45 .xx

2.0

MUXserver 100 Remote Terminal
Server (RSX)

15.27.xx

2.0

MUXserver 100 Remote Terminal
Server (ULTRIX)

28.46.xx

2.0

NMCC/DECnet Monitor

26.91.xx

2.0

NMCC/ VAX ETHERnim

26 .96.xx

2.0

poly-COM

AJ.23 .xx

1.2

Remote Bridge Management Software

27.12.xx

1.1

Remote System Manager

29 .59 .xx

2.1

RSX -11 2780/3 780 Emulator

10.01.xx

4.1

RSX -11 P.S.l./M

10.42.xx

3.0

RSX -11 P.S.I./M-PLUS

10.43 .xx

3.0

RSX -11/3271 Protocol Emulator

10.88.xx

3.1

RSX-llM/M -PLUS RJE/ HASP Emulator

10.48.xx

Terminal Server Manager

27.64 .xx

1.3
1.2

ULTRIX Mail Connection

29 .05 .xx

1.0

VAX 2780/3 780 Protocol Emulator

25 .07.xx

1.6

VAX 3271 Protocol Emulator

25 .21.xx

2.3

VAX DEC/MAP

27.66.xx

2. 1

VAX Distributed File Service

28 .78.xx

1.0

VAX Distributed Name Service

28 .79 .xx

1.0

VAX Distributed Queuing Service

28 .80.xx

1.0

VAX FTAM

29 .86.xx

1.0

VAX KCT32

26.04 .xx

1.1

VAX KMSll -BD/ BE HDLC/ BSC Framing

26 .55 .xx

1.2

VAX KMSll -BD/BE X .25 Link Level

25 .80.xx

1.3

VAX MAILGATE for MCI Mail

27.34 .xx

1.0

VAX Message Router Programmer's Kit

26 .33 .xx

3.0

VAX Message Router X.400 Gateway

27.50 .xx

2.1

VAX Message Router/P Gateway

28 .94.xx

1.0

VAX Message Router/ S Gateway

29 .24.xx

1.0

VAX Message Router VMSmail Gateway

26 .33 .xx

3.0

C.2

Software Product

SPD

Version

VAX Notes

27.06.xx

1.3

VAX NTR Protocol Emulator

25 .68.xx

1.1

VAX OSI Applications Kernel (OSAK)

27.47.xx

1.1

VAX P.S.I.

25.40.xx

4.2

VAX P.S.I. Access

27.78.xx

4.1

VAX PrintServer 40 Client

27.67.xx

2 .1

VAX PrintServer 40 Support Host

27.68.xx

2 .1

VAX Public Access Communications
(VAXPAC)

28.51.xx

1.1

VAX VTX

26.57.xx

3 .0

......;i...."'

VAX Wide Area Network Device Drivers

29 .64.xx

1.0

VAXmate Services for MS -DOS

55 .09 .xx

2.0

VAX/ VMS Services for MS-DOS

30.50.xx

2. 1

.e-...

VIDA with IDMS/ R

27.25 .xx

2 .0

"'cu

VMS/SN A

27.01.xx

1.3

VMS/ ULTRIX Connection

25 .A4.xx

1.0

WIN/ TCP

29 .80.xx

3.0

WPS-PLUS/ PC

30.75 .xx

1.0

X25router 2000

28 .86.xx

1.0

c:
0

·::
u

....u

'"O

...0
i::i..
...cu

i
0

!;/}

(.)

C.3

Appendix D